The Wes Penre Papers

The Wes Penre Papers 

The Third Level of Learning 

The Wes Penre Papers: 

Bringing our Inner Darkness 

into Light 


by Wes Penre 

©2013 Wes Penre Productions 1 st Edition 

1



Table of Contents: 

The Third Level of Learning, Paper #1: In the Aftermath of the Nano-Second (Posted on January 19, 

2013) … Page 6 

I. Follow Your Passion 

II. Our Most Common Mistakes As Truthseekers 

III. Responses Thus Far 

IV. What Actually Happened in 2012? 

V. "The Second Level of Learning" in the Rearview Mirror 

v.i. Thesis, Antithesis, and Synthesis 

v.ii. Some Updates Since the Completion of "The Second Level of Learning" 

VI. A Look at What is Coming 

The Third Level of Learning, Paper #2: In Wait For Things to Come (Posted on February 1, 2013) … 

Page 28 

I. The First Alien Invasion and its Main Distraction -- Nibiru 

II. What We Don't Know is Bound to Kill Us! 

III. Channelers Who Have Opened Up Their Chakras Start Channeling ... Who? 

IV. Dimensions and Densities According to Different Channeled Sources 

V. RA and the Different Light-Bodies 

v.i. The Veil of Forgetfulness 

v.ii. The Orion Group -- Friends or Foes? 

The Third Level of Learning, Paper #3: Channeled Entities Part I -- the Harvesters of Souls (Posted on 

February 10, 2013) … Page 66 

I. Some Major Channeled Sources 

i.i. The Elohim 

i.i.ii. The Cosmology of the Elohim 

i.i.iii. Angelic Beings from Outside Time 

i.i.iv. Channeling the Elohim 

i.i.v. RA, The Council of Elohim, The Council of An, and the Council of 12 -- All Familiar Terms! 

i.i.vi. The Possible WingMakers Connection, Elohim Connections with Famous Humans, and Ancient 

Visitations 

i.ii. The Cassiopaeans 

i.ii.i. Being us in the Future 

i.ii.ii. Transmitting from Different Futures 

i.ii.iii. The Channeled Sources -- Do We Really Need Them As Much As They Need Us? 

i.ii.iv. The Hybridization of Mankind and its Implications 

i.ii.v. An Interesting Connection! 

i.ii.vi. Orions -- "The Transient Passengers" 

i.ii.vii. The Giants of Ancient Times 


2



i.ii.viii. Some Final Statements from the Cassiopaeans 

The Third Level of Learning, Paper #4: Channeled Entities Part II -- Channeling the Grays (Posted on 

February 20, 2013) … Page 94 

I. Abstract. A Short Summary 

II. Channeling the Zeta Reticulians 

ii.i. The Zeta Agreement 

ii.ii. Grays Speak! 

ii.iii. The Collective "We" - Who Are They? 

III. Understanding More About the Gray Hive Mentality 

IV. How a Hybrid is Created 

V. Disclosure 

The Third Level of Learning, Paper #5: The Alpha Draconians and the Creation of the Starhuman 

(Posted on March 6, 2013) … Page 127 

I. Alpha Draconians -- Dragons from the VOID 

II. Understanding the Basics of Alpha Draconian Cosmology and the Draconian Star Race 

ii.i. Dimensions of the VOID and the 4% Universe 

ii.ii. Bigmo's Balloon 

III. Humanity as One Big, Universal Family 

iii.i. The WingMakers Interview from a New Angle 

iii.ii. Ascension Equals Descension 

IV. The Archetypes 

V. Gaia as the Center of the Galaxy 

v.i. Gaia's Sink Hole Vortex and the "Alien Agenda" Explained 

VI. Birth of the Starhuman 

VII. The Harvesting of Souls and the Dragonized 5D Starhuman Template 

vii.i. What is the Procedure? 

vii.ii. The Dragons are Here! 

VIII. Draconian Law and Constitution of the Future Serpentina/Earth 

The Third Level of Learning, Paper #6: The Alpha Draconians and the Creation of the Starhuman 

Part II (Posted on March 6, 2013) … Page 167 

I. Abstract 

II. The Final Alpha Draconian Thread, Broadcast from the Council of Thuban in the 12th Dimension of the 

VOID 

III. The Vortex Between the Universe and the VOID Closes and Abraxas Trapped in the 4% Universe 

IV. Epilogue 


3



The Third Level of Learning, Paper #7: Riders on the Galactic Superwave (Posted on March 12, 2013) 

… Page 201 

I. Discussing the Thuban Material from Papers 5 and 6 

i.i. Allies of Humanity and the Hybridization of Mankind 

II. The Galactic Superwave and the 200 Million 

III. In Summary 

The Third Level of Learning, Paper #8: Galactic Federations and Councils (Posted on March 23, 2013) 

… Page 226 

I. Abstract. Galactic Federations and Councils 

II. A List of Galactic Federations and Councils 

III. The Galactic Federations and Councils Under the Microscope 

iii.i. The Council of Thuban 

iii.ii. The Council of 24 

iii.iii. The Council of 12 

iii.iii.i. The Andromedan Council (The Council of 12) 

iii.iv. The Confederation of Planets 

iii.v. The Council of Zendar and the Rings of Saturn 

iii.vi. The Council of 9 

iii.vii. The Council of Elohim 

iii.viii. The Nibiruan Council and the Galactic Federation of Worlds 

iii.ix. The Ashtar Command and the Galactic Federation of Light 

IV. Afterword 

The Third Level of Learning, Paper #9: The Splitting of the Worlds Part 1 – The Machine Kingdom 

(Posted on April 5, 2013) … Page 265 

I. A General Look Ahead: 2013-2034 

II. The New SmartCities 

III. "We are your Ancestors and Friends!" 

IV. The Hybridization Program 

iv.i. What Happened to the Microchip Program? 

iv.ii. The Hybridization Program Revisited 

V. Life in the SmartCities 

v.i. Welcome to the Machine! 

VI. When the Robots Outsmart us! 

VII. The Larger Story around Lucifer's Rebellion 

VIII. The Hell Dimension 


4



The Third Level of Learning, Paper #10: The Splitting of the Worlds Part 2 – Evolving without 

Technology (Posted on April 9, 2013) … Page 311 

I. Confronting our Dark Side 

II. Creating a Safe Environment for Self and Others 

III. Building Communities 

IV. Humane Meritocracy 

V. The Divine Feminine in Future Societies 

VI. Indigo Children 

VII. Another Choice for the Future: Do We Want to Come Back to Earth or "Move On"? 

vii.i. Suggestions how to Bypass the Sirian Trap in the Afterlife 

VIII. From Here and Into a Future Which is Very Bright After All 

Appendix: Definition of Special Terminology from "The First--Third Levels of Learning" … Page 332 


5



Paper #1: In the Aftermath of the Nano-Second 

by Wes Penre, Saturday, January 19, 2013 

Updated: January 22, 2013 

(http://wespenre.com) 

I. Follow Your Passion 

Since I completed "The Second Level of Learning" I have spent my time doing a lot of research, and 

I mean a lot. And not only that -- I did research for two different levels at the same time. My intention 

was to let this "Third Level of Learning" become a pure spiritual level, which dealt with the mechanics 

how to become multidimensional while still being here in a body in the 3rd Density. In fact, I did find a 

way that really seems to do the trick and I was very excited! I passionately continued researching this 

subject and others that were related to it, but at the same time I discovered a lot of new information 

pertaining to the material I released on "The Second Level of Learning" (Level II from hereon). The 

information felt so important that I just couldn't let go of it. So I researched that as well on the side, 

unintentionally creating two levels of learning in parallel. 

I was really in doubt what I should do for quite a while. Should I update Level II with the new material 

(which would make it as massive as Level I), or should I just not publish the material and go for the 

spiritual research instead, like I'd intended to begin with, and let that become Level III? For a while, 

that's what I decided to do. 

However, somehow, things started going slow. I never seemed to get anywhere. It was not that there 

wasn't enough material to research to build a whole level of learning, but there were so many 

distractions of different kinds that I never seemed to be able to start researching. So I decided to take a 

break for a few days to do something totally different. 

One thing I had started on earlier, and now discarded, was to dig into the channeled material and the 

Galactic Federations, where there is a lot of information that is very important for people to know. And 

not only that -- we need to know which ones are purposely deceptive and which ones are not, and we 

also need to know the mechanics behind it all, because I saw way too many people getting sucked into 

very dark stuff, thinking it was positive. So, out of nowhere I got this idea I should listen to a Bashar 

lecture[1] just to relax, in order to more easily being able to resolve the dilemma of what to do. 

I noticed this morning that the particular lecture I was listening to is unfortunately taken offline -- it 

used to be here: http://www.ashtarcommandcrew.net/forum/topics/soul-potential-bashar-benarion. 

Unfortunate in a way, but there are other Bashar lectures stressing the same thing, if the reader is 

interested. Anyway, I was sitting there listening when a person in the audience asked a question. She 

said she had a lot of different passions in life, but for some reason she didn't finish a project until she 


6



started on a new, because she had so many passions (she was an artist, I think), and before she was 

done with one project, she got ideas for a new one and therefore abandoned the old one, believing she 

didn't have enough time to do it all. Then it often ended up with that she instead didn't complete any of 

them. 

Bashar told her that time is not an issue -- there is time for everything. We won't leave this lifetime 

until our goals are fulfilled, or when we know we failed fulfilling them and want to try again by starting a 

new life. So he advised her to take one passion at the time and take it as far as she could or wanted to, 

and then finish it and start the next. 

This really hit the nail on the head for me! Not only am I a Gemini (whom they say have a lot of 

projects going simultaneously), I am also a typical Gemini, having several half-read books on my bed 

table, and different projects going at the same time. Normally I complete them, but not without a 

problem similar to what this artist had. So I realized that I was not finished with what I had brought up in 

Level II, and although I have a great passion for the spiritual level I was about to finish researching, my 

thoughts often went back to the "Sirian Agenda" and the additional, important information I'd found on 

that subject. I now understood that I had to put the spiritual research on the shelf for a while and 

complete what I had previously started with Level II, and take it as far as I need, which will pretty much 

be a whole new level of learning. And interestingly enough, I feel I have a lot of passion to do so. 

So now, my final decision is this: Level III, which you are now reading the first part of, will take off 

where Level II ended. Then, when Level III is published, I am done with my series of papers. Nothing 

more will be posted at http://wespenre.com, except potential corrections and smaller updates. My next 

step after that will be to open up a new domain (or a subdomain to wespenre.com, perhaps) where I will 

publish my future books. Yes, the spiritual level, which was supposed to be Level III will instead of a 

series of papers become one or more books. The way it looks like now, I will not charge for my books 

either, but publish them in a similar fashion that I've published my papers, and also present a pdf 

version of the whole book for the reader to download for free. Any voluntary donation is always 

welcome, but not at all mandatory. 

II. Our Most Common Mistakes as Truthseekers 

During my years of research I have seen people make some fundamental mistakes that I want to talk a 

little bit about before we move on to the "real subjects". I talk out of experience, because I have made 

some of these mistakes myself, but came to my senses. I like to bring them up, because they will stop 

people from finding the truth. So please bear with me for a while. 

Those who have read my articles and papers over the years know how I'm working -- my articles, 

postings, and papers show my own progress as a truthseeker on Planet Earth in the 20th and 21st 

Century. If someone wants to see how I was thinking five years ago, they can go back and search for 

stuff I was occupied with then and see where in the process I was at the time. It's one man's journey 


7



through the 3rd Density with the aim at becoming a true multidimensional being, free from the slavery 

created by the Sirians and their human minions. I sometimes don't delete or correct the mistakes in my 

older writings unless they are very glaring and obviously very misleading. Instead I correct them in my 

future writings, referring back to the error(s) I made in the past. The reason for this is that I always 

learned something from my mistakes, and count on that the readers will, too. Sometimes I learned more 

from those than the things I got correct. It's quite interesting how things work sometimes. 

My point with telling you all this is to once again stress that this is my research and my own 

conclusions that are building my view on the Universe, and my place in it. When you read it, I would like 

you to feel in your gut if what you learn feels right for you or not. The more you start thinking in these 

terms and trust your body as a truth- and lie detector, the easier it will be, eventually, to quickly know 

what is supporting you in your quest and what is not. This goes for all material you read, by me or by 

others. And in this area lies one of the mistakes I want to bring up: it's very easy to swallow it all just 

because a piece of material feels right on target. Be critical of every paragraph, take in what feels right 

and discard what doesn't. Just because it works for me, it doesn't necessarily work for you. If it does, 

wonderful! If it doesn't, there are other paths leading out of the jungle, I'm sure. However, if you have 

followed me thus far you must have found more than a few items that indicates for you, or you wouldn't 

have plowed through 1500 pages worth of research. But always feel things out; your body will tell you 

what is true or not. Don't swallow things because they are intriguing and exciting. It's easy to do, but 

again, your body will tell you if you listen to it. 

And here is another glaring mistake and it has to do with our belief systems. Everybody has their 

belief systems, even those who say they don't. If not, they wouldn't be here. It's okay to have them, and 

even necessary, actually. It's through our belief systems we are experiencing ourselves in the Multiverse, 

and it's through them we learn and build realities. The problem with them is when they become fixed. 

We see this quite often when comes to religious people; they think they know it all. And with religious 

people I also include much of the New Age movement. It's very important that we let our belief system 

be fluid and not fixed so that we always are willing to change in order to evolve to the next level. And I 

see way too often how people are forcing their own belief systems on others, and most of those who 

are doing so are not even aware of it, or that something is wrong with it. This, of course, is very obvious 

when we read threads on different forums. Remember, everybody is entitled to their own belief systems 

-- even if they are fixed! We all have our own pace when comes to learning, and those who are stuck in a 

certain belief system will sooner or later snap out of it. But not until they are ready to, and it could take 

another year, or another thousand years. Either way, everybody needs to learn at their own speed or 

lack thereof. It's okay to share our experiences and give advice when asked for, but every time we see a 

lively debate on a forum, for example, it's because people are forcing their belief systems on each other. 

In order to defend their own belief system, people can get pretty nasty with each other. 

Next thing has to do with disinfo agents. Let's just face it, they are everywhere where important truths 

are told. However, what we are taught is to avoid disinfo agents like the plague once they're spotted. 

And as soon as someone is stumbling on some new material, they are anxiously wondering if this could 

be a new disinfo agent. Big mistake! When I hear that a certain website is run by a disinfo agent, I almost 


8



always go there to check it out, because I know that these people are telling us a lot of true things, or 

they wouldn't be disinfo agents. There is a difference between disinformation and misinformation. The 

latter is telling you lies, while the former usually is telling you the truth with a twist to it in order to lead 

people astray. Then, if the disinfo agent is spotted, people are told to avoid him or her with all their 

might. This is so that people will not see the truth in their information. Hence, I may look through the 

site of a disinfo agent very carefully, because I suspect there may be things there that I can learn from. 

Unfortunately, people who fall victim to a disinfo agent and makes the mistake to post some of the 

inaccurate information are likewise avoided after the disinfo agent is spotted, as if the truthseeker 

suddenly doesn't have anything of value to say. Still, before he or she fell victim to the disinfo campaign, 

they were popular and known to bring truth to the public. This is not only very sad but also a dangerous 

path to go down, because this is exactly what the disinformation campaigns are designed to accomplish. 

The agenda I've just described not only stops people from seeing the truth in the disinfo campaign, but 

is also stopping the same people from seeing the truth in well meaning and honest truthseekers' 

material; those who fell victim to the disinfo agent. 

And lastly, watch out for professional debunkers! There are a lot of such people, too, employed by the 

government to debunk people's research. And they know what they are doing! Of course, this doesn't 

mean we shouldn't be critical when we see something that doesn't feel right, but these debunkers are 

screaming for proof when the proof is in the pudding. They always want documented evidence on any 

new idea that shakes the status quo. And how can you give documented evidence on something that's 

metaphysical? Still, when no documented evidence is provided, the debunker claims he or she has 

debunked the matter. Unfortunately, many fall for this. As a matter of fact, what the debunker does is 

very clever. When people start thinking outside the box, leaving the material world and begin to look 

into other realities, the debunker quickly brings the person back into the "analytical mind" and back into 

the trap. You don't need others to debunk anything; you are your own debunker. 

III. Responses Thus Far 

I also want to thank everybody who have responded to, and commented on the two first levels. I have 

had overwhelmingly great responses, and those who have commented have often had very good 

insights -- many of them which I have learned a lot from. 

Level II was very different from Level I, and I was not sure what kind of response I was going to get 

from it. Much of the information in there has never been released here on Earth before. Although some 

of it may still be hidden in the upper levels of certain secret societies, none of that has made it out in 

public domain. For the record I want the reader to know that it hasn't always been easy. I have been 

subjected to quite some psychic attacks -- especially while posting the last few papers in Level II, and all 

the way up to this day. I think I have finally found a good way to ground myself and put a bubble around 

me, but also stated my boundaries in order to be left alone in dream state. Some attacks have been 


9



pretty vicious, and always metaphysical, but I believe I know where they come from, and lately they 

have diminished considerably. 

I hope that those who patiently read Level I and II will also stay with me here on Level III and read the 

book(s) to follow as well, which I think will be of great help for those who want to become multi-d but 

don't really know where to go from here. So hang in there -- the future is bright, brighter than we may 

think, considering everything that's going on behind the scenes. 

IV. What Actually Happened in 2012? 

When you read this, the nano-second is over -- it officially ended on 12/21/2012. Just like at Y2K (the 

year 2000), the expectations were great and diverse. Some expected Rapture, others Ascension, some 

thought it would literally be the end of the world, while others thought the Earth would transform into a 

higher dimension or density. Others yet were expecting prophecy to be fulfilled -- perhaps the beginning 

of the Battle of Armageddon, or an alien invasion. Not to speak about the Return of Nibiru. There was 

more, but I think I covered the most common beliefs. 

So what happened? Was this just another Y2K, passing by like a breeze, and nothing really happened? 

Many people probably think this is the case, because they are "still here" and there are no radical 

changes from what they can see. Just another hoax? 

Not at all! The year 2012 was not like the year 2000; we really did complete a cycle and have now 

started a new. I have first hand experiences, so I have no doubt, but I will quickly bring up a few things 

already now that I have noticed and which I know we all have gone through, whether we are aware of it 

or not. 

The most important thing is the nano-second, the time period between 1987-2012, when time 

incrementally sped up; a little in the beginning to a million fold at the end, and I'm going to explain what 

is meant by that. 

The term "nano-second" was invented by Barbara Marciniak's Pleiadians to name the time period 

when time sped up due to the end of this cycle we are talking about and because of the alignment with 

the Galactic Center. The nano-second had basically three phases. They were 1987-1996, 1997-2008, and 

2009-2012. These dates are approximate and may fluctuate a year or so in either direction. But the 

important thing is that the first phase was the basic awakening, when people started realizing that 

things were not the way they had been told in school and by their parents. What happened in the 1960s 

was the forerunner to this. In the first phase, many started researching in order to find out what felt so 

wrong with their lives. Time started speeding up, and by the end of Phase One, it had sped up a 

hundred-fold. During Phase Two things started happening even more rapidly. Time eventually sped up 

ten thousand-fold. People became much more aware; not only to the fact that we are run by a Shadow 

Government, the so-called Illuminati, but more and more people started realizing that we were visited 


10



by beings from other planets, and that the Illuminati families were not the top of the pyramid. During 

Phase Three, people woke up incredibly fast, as time sped up a million-fold. Many were ready to learn 

what is really going on in this world and beyond, and droves of very young people woke up almost over 

night and found themselves knowing a lot of things they weren't aware of before. They learned a lot 

faster than the generation before them. They have by some been coined the nano children. 

So what does it mean that time speeds up a million-fold? Most of us, when we think back, can see 

that everything became much more hectic during the nano-second, and life was indeed much more 

stressful than before 1987 (those who were born in the nano-second have a hard time grasping this, 

because they have no frame of reference as it is all they know). Not everybody were able to handle it 

and actually vacated their bodies and left the Earth plane. However, when we talk about a million-fold, 

we basically talk about the learning process. If we look at it from that perspective, those who decided to 

wake up and started using their increased consciousness learned more during these 25 years than they 

had done during a million years previous to that. Sound unbelievable? Well, think about it. Take a 

journey in your mind, back in time across the centuries and the millennia. Then you can see how little 

we actually learned during that vast time span compared to how much we learned during the nanosecond. 

That's what we mean when we say that time was speeding up. 

The nano-second was wild in many ways. We already know that we live in a Free Will Zone where 

"everything goes", but during the nano-second this was taken to its extremes. There were unexplainable 

whether- and earth changes, insanity, financial collapse, crimes revealed in the upper echelons of 

society, evidence of aliens among us, confusion, personal traumas, dramas, unexplainable 

happenstances, but also great gains in consciousness with lots of epiphanies and experiences left and 

right, often following one another in an enormous speed. The common dominator was that we rarely 

had time to sit down to think about what we had learned. Before we had the chance to reflect, we 

learned something new again, and again, and again. It was sometimes quite overwhelming. 

Also, in the "unseen worlds" of non-physical beings a lot of things happened. We, who were down 

here on Earth during this time period must call ourselves lucky, because it was not easy to get a body. 

The population grew rapidly until it now has peaked at around 7 billion people, but the spirits who were 

waiting to take bodies here on Earth way exceeded that amount. Never before have so many star beings 

wanted to incarnate on our planet. 

Why is that? The answer is simple. Star beings came from all across the Universe to participate in the 

"Big Party". Never before in the history of this Universe had a being such an opportunity to come down 

here in the physical world and learn a million times more in a few linear years than they may have done 

over a million year time period. This was very attractive to many, many star beings, and many ETs 

incarnated here, we know that for a fact. Many of them took baby bodies just like any human soul, while 

others who were "lazier" hitch-hiked by attaching themselves to humans, hoping to learn that way. 

Many people all of a sudden walked around with attachments without even knowing it, pulling the 

energy from the host, or on rare occasion, kicked the original soul out and took over -- something which 

is looked upon as a serious crime in the Universe in general. Still, many non-physicals, and many souls of 


11



the human soul group whose body died before the nano-second found that there were no body down 

here for them to take -- the line was too long, so they just had to hang around. Still, those who never 

managed to take a body here could still benefit by hovering in the Earth planes or in the astral and learn 

a lot by just observing. 

This is how wild the nano-second was, although most people weren't aware of what actually 

happened -- all they knew was that something was out of the ordinary. I had person after person tell me 

that; people who had never picked up a conspiracy book in their lives, or read any spiritual material. So 

the nano-second affected everybody across the whole spectrum of the human soul group. 

For those who need a refresher on the more technical circumstances that made the nano-second 

happen may want to read the following few paragraphs. What actually happened around 1987-2012 

was that our solar system got in alignment with the Galactic Center of the Milky Way Galaxy, of which 

Earth belongs. A lot of energy was released because of this, and gamma rays were bombarding us here 

on Earth, both from our own Sun, other suns in other solar systems, but mainly from the giant Sun in the 

Galactic core (which is actually a cluster of perhaps millions of suns, which are so close together that the 

long distance of 26-30,000 light-years make them seem like one big sun). These gamma rays (and other 

rays of the spectrum as well) affected our DNA in a very profound way, which enhanced our abilities and 

increased our consciousness and our awareness many-fold. This had a profound effect, not only on 

individuals, but on the whole mass consciousness, which is the common consciousness for the whole 

human races. Our mass consciousness in its turn had a profound effect on other systems many lightyears 

away. It was a great awakening in many parts of the Universe. But we, who were in bodies here on 

Earth, experienced it all from Ground Zero, which was the absolute best place to be, in spite of the 

negativities going on down here. 

Although we are still going to be aligned with the Galactic Sun for another year or so before our solar 

system will slowly but surely misalign itself again until it happens again, time is going to slow down. In 

fact, it has already started. If you ask me, it already started before 12/21/12. I could feel a slowdown 

already in September-October 2012. That was when I became quite sure most of the things that 

frightened people were not going to happen on 12/21. But more on that later. Like a train with its 

breaks on, time is not going to stop and go back to "normal" overnight, but will slowly get there. We will 

now have more time to reflect over what we learned during the nano-second, and it will be evident that 

we've reached the "post-nano"[def], as I will call it. 

We will also see that people will vacate more than usual now when the nano is over. Many were just 

here "for the ride", and when it's all over, they leave. It was a soul agreement they had, and before they 

were born they made the decision to end their lives at the end of, or shortly after the nano. It could be 

by getting a deadly disease, get in an accident, or anything else in the book. There will also be fewer 

souls willing to incarnate here when they no longer can gain from the nano-second -- at least as long as 

the Sirians are in charge here. Therefore, we will see a depopulation happening. We have just about 

reached the top of human population, and from here on we will probably start seeing a decrease. For 

different reasons, the male sperm will not be good enough in many men to produce children, and a 


12



similar thing will happen in women -- many will become infertile, and this has already started. Upon 

that, the PTB will also implement more of their own depopulation programs. It has been known for quite 

a few years that the Shadow Government has planned such a thing, but it hasn't really been 

implemented fully yet. We will see more of this. 

But now, let's discuss a few more things that happened in 2012, and what did not happen. Let us start 

with what happened (some of this is subjective, but I think that more than a few readers will agree). 

1. Time stopped speeding up. I already mentioned this here above. I started noticing it already 

in September-October 2012, and by now, when I am writing this in January 2013, I have begun 

to feel this veil of calmness coming over me, and time is going slower, subjectively speaking, 

which feels extremely nice. I sense that I can accomplish more in a day than before without 

having to stress about it. In other words, time has slowed down much more than I had 

expected. 

2. About dreaming. I have vivid dreams; in the beginning of the year they were not so pleasant 

as they were actually not normal dreams but psychic attacks. Once I learned how to protect 

myself, the dreams became much more pleasant. As I have described elsewhere, I used to not 

remember my dreams, although I knew I accomplished a lot in dreamscape, but now I 

remember them almost every single night. They are more about traveling to nice places, being 

"lifted up", changing vibrations, communicating with animals, feeling good, and things of this 

nature. They have become quite consistent and are truly helping me in my daily life. 

3. Healing across the lines of time. Many things I felt I needed to work on with myself in my 

everyday life all of a sudden have worked themselves out. Of course, not without me having 

worked on them for quite a few years, but I feel that much inside of me has come together -- to 

a conclusion -- and I have changed in regards to myself and my environment, and I feel it's very 

positive. Perhaps it is my timelines that have come together. I am not nearly as "reactive" as I 

used to be. I see things in the "outside world" for what it is, and instead of having a defensive or 

negative reaction to it, I look at it, understand it, and can respond to it without the negative 

emotions attached. It is very helpful. 

4. The end of the Mayan Calendar. Yes, this is the end of an old cycle in the Mayan chronology 

and the beginning of a new. It's not the end of the world; it's not the Rapture or the Battle of 

Armageddon. Nor have we been "beamed up" by aliens and that way ascended to the 4th or 5th 

Dimension. However, something strange but positive seems to have happened. Although the 

Global Elite are still in charge of industry and trade, and everything seems to have its usual 

negative flow in that sense, I feel much more dissociated from it, but not in the sense that I am 

not confronting it. 

5. The alignment with the Galactic Center. There is no discussion about whether this happened 

or not; it's scientifically proven. Some say it actually happened much earlier, as far back as in 

1998, but it's more or less beside the point, because it's my experience that we didn't gain the 

full benefits from this incident until closer to winter solstice 2012. Again, I am talking in 

subjective terms, but I believe that what I mentioned in items 1-3 has a lot to do with this 

alignment, which also brought about 25 years of gamma ray bombardment, stimulating the 

development of the so-called "junk DNA" (which is pretty much the opposite from junk). This, in 


13



turn, started the process of reconnecting us to the Multiverse, slowly but surely making us more 

multidimensional, getting our attention more and more away from strict linear thinking. 

6. Ascension to a higher density. Well, did we actually ascend during this time period? Are we 

now in the 4th or 5th Density? If I said no, that would probably be true, and if I said yes, that 

would probably be true as well. We are going to discuss a lot of different channeled entities in 

this level of learning, because they have a lot to teach us, regardless if they have good or bad 

intentions. By studying them separately and then compare them, I got some important insights, 

but more about that later. The reason I'm saying this now is because most of those channeled 

entities are talking about ascension in one form or another. One thing they do is to clearly 

distinguish between the densities like if there would be some kind of "door" you opened, and all 

of a sudden you are in 4th Density! And once you're there, things are immediately very different 

-- so different, in fact, that it will meet you with total surprise and confusion in the beginning, 

until you get used to your new reality. 

I don't see it happen like that at all. We earn our higher vibrations successively and 

incrementally as we go along and learn more and practice what we've learned. I've said this 

before, but want to say it again: the different densities are just labels so we can easier 

understand that we are moving in the right direction! For example, if we are in the 4th Density, 

many say it's the density of compassion and understanding, and that means that if you feel your 

attention is on compassion and understanding, you already are in what is labeled the 4th 

Density. The problem starts when we begin to label these things, because it creates strict 

boundaries that are not there in reality. I agree that when we focus on compassion and 

understanding we have reached a new level in our evolvement, and sometimes, for some of us, 

it may be interesting to see what the next step up contains, but at the same time it may be quite 

irrelevant, because we are all different, and it is my conviction, from what I have seen, that 

people can have their focus in many different densities at the same time, if we follow the label 

system of these channeled star races. So, in my own opinion, these labels become quite 

obsolete. 

Then, when they say we are to spend perhaps a million years in one density, working on 

basically one or two things, it does create the reality for those who believe in this, and from 

where I sit, it sounds like going from one prison to another. We don't have to go through 7 or 15 

densities in order to accomplish what each of those densities say we are to learn there. All we 

need is to break free from the Sirian control system and the rest will come rather easy for us. It's 

not that complicated. The most complicated part is to break out of the system. Once that is 

done, the rest will fall in place naturally. Many of these channeled entities are using these labels 

to keep us in the trap, making it sound very hard to be a galactic citizen when all it takes is some 

personal responsibility and group responsibility. The rest comes in time when the individual is 

ready. In the meantime, we should all be able to take advantage of our abilities to travel in 

space on a nano level from inside our divine bodies as described in Level II. 

So does this mean we did not ascend then? If so, shouldn't this be listed under things that did 

not happen in 2012? Well, the word "ascend" is defined as follows at Dictionary.com: 

verb (used without object) 

1. to move, climb, or go upward; mount; rise: The airplane ascended into the clouds. 

2. to slant upward. 


14



3. to rise to a higher point, rank, or degree; proceed from an inferior to a superior degree or 

level: to ascend to the presidency. 

4. to go toward the source or beginning; go back in time. 

5. Music. to rise in pitch; pass from any tone to a higher one. 

In a sense, all 5 definitions applies to what I feel I have accomplished, and I have seen a lot of 

other people accomplish the same thing, so I think many people around the world have 

ascended. The difference between what I mean by ascension compared to the channeled 

entities is that I don't see that an Elite of humans have risen/ascended to a fixed space where 

only those who are "Service to Others" (STO) enough are allowed to follow, while the rest have 

been dumped somewhere else, on another less desirable planet. The latter sounds like Sirians 

Elitism all over again. 

So please relax if you feel you haven't "ascended" in the way the channeled star beings have 

taught you. If you are reading this right now, you are well on your way to break out of the 

system, which is all it is about at this point. Once this has been properly done (which may take a 

few generations), the splitting of the worlds I talked about in Level I and II will take place in its 

real sense, and the negative control system will no longer exist in our reality. But to fully 

experience this, we may have to reincarnate again, once or twice or so. Still, we're now breaking 

ground for those new generations to come after us, and if we don't do that, there is only a 

Machine Kingdom to return to a few generations from now, and that's the beginning of the end 

to the human species. It's that direct and simple. 

It's all about choices, and there are no right or wrong ones, only choices. We evolve in our 

own speed, and we create our own reality. First there is a certain awakening to that something 

is wrong with the world, then there is the step to educate oneself and more and more our 

chakras start opening up. From thereon, it usually only goes forward and upwards. 

So in summary, I think many of us are working instinctively on compassion and understanding 

and have thus gained a lot of wisdom (which is supposedly the 5th Density in some schools of 

learning), and if we look at other labeled densities, we have gained a lot in almost all of them. 

However, we are still here in our bodies; here on Earth, and that's the whole thing as I see it. We 

can reach higher densities/vibrations and all that it contains, but still be anchored/grounded in 

our physical bodies, if we so wish. Our physical bodies have potentials far beyond our wildest 

imaginations. 

If this is true (and I feel it is), it is very possible to evolve in spite of the Sirian control system. 

We can't (and shouldn't) fight them; instead we focus on what we want to create and ignore 

them in our daily life once we understand the mechanics of the trap, and the control system on 

an individual basis falls apart. Then, when enough individuals accomplish the same thing, a split 

in realities occurs. This is what the Sirians are most afraid of. They don't care about losing a few 

individual slaves along the way, but they are afraid that enough individuals will evolve so it may 

distort and shake their system of control. And that's exactly what we're doing! There is a reason, 

however, why it doesn't happen even faster, and that reason is called H.A.A.R.P. Many say it's a 

weather manipulation device, which it is on one level, but it is also designed to change our brain 

waves. In order to keep us in 3D, the Sirians have given the military the technology to create this 

monster, which sends out so-called "extra low frequencies" (ELFs) across the planet. 

Unfortunately, from their point of view, it's not working as they anticipated, because people are 


15



waking up in spite. 

7. The alien invasion. Yes, I put this category under things that did happen, because I believe it 

did -- at least to a large degree. In Level I, I talked about the fulfilling of Prophecy, and I 

anticipated The Battle of Armageddon and the Return of the "gods". I envisioned them coming 

down in spaceships and start a physical war that would be devastating and kill most of the 

population. This is basically what is promoted by disinfo agents out there, who have taken over 

the field of prophecy fulfillment. Many otherwise good researchers have fallen for this and 

spread disinformation on the Internet and in books. I fell for it myself for a while. 

However, since then I have learned that the disinfo agents, who are from different 

Intelligence Agencies around the world, want to distract us, and have us look up in the sky for 

armadas of UFOs storming down from the Heavens, when in fact the invasion happened (and I 

believe is still happening -- it's not completed) on a nano level. Star beings, belonging to the 

Sirian Alliance, have created bodies through genetic manipulation, which contain a lot of their 

own genes -- enough so that these beings can incarnate into them and mingle with the rest of 

humanity without drawing attention to themselves. They have in fact improved old bloodlines, 

but also created new ones, and let these bloodlines recreate, while their babies are being 

inhabited by souls of the Sirian Alliance. This is an ongoing process, but I think that with the 

alignment with the Galactic Center and everything that happened around it, a mass invasion 

took place, because it was basically the "right time". We will discuss this in detail as well in this 

level of learning. 

Now let's list a few things that were supposed to happen that did not happen. 

1. The Return of Nibiru. This is also something I will expand on later. I know we have discussed 

this subject quite a bit in the other levels of learning, but it deserves more attention, because 

this is a big deception with many layers to it -- more than I was aware of when I wrote Level I 

and II. All I want to say in this first paper is that Nibiru did not return in 2012 (evidently), and will 

not return any time soon, either. And Nibiru in the sense of being the home planet of the Sirians 

(Anunnaki) does not even exist, so obviously Sitchin's Nibiru will never return. 

So, is there another aspect of Nibiru or Planet X that's more likely to show up. Well, it 

depends on how we define it. They told us in the news recently that an asteroid was spotted in 

the solar system in 2012, and will come quite close to Earth in February 2013, about a month 

from when I am writing this. On the other hand, NASA is reassuring us that its crossing will not 

affect our planet in any negative sense[2], if we can trust that or not, but I feel they are right this 

time (fig. 1). 


16



Figure 1. The path of the February 2013 asteroid DA14 (click on image to enlarge). 

So what does this have to do with Nibiru? Nothing, except that this may be one aspect of what the 

whole Nibiru issue is about. From my research, the reader is aware of that the Sirian and their assisting 

star races are traveling in hollowed out asteroids, planetoids, and planets. We have no guarantees if 

DA14, the incoming asteroid, may be a spaceship or just a natural celestial body. There is no way for us 

to know. And like I said in Level II, Nibiru is most probably just another hollowed out planetary body that 

the Sirians use -- one of thousands. 

There are more aspects of Nibiru that we should take a look at in a later paper, so this will suffice it 

for now. 

2. The Battle of Armageddon and the end of the world. Obviously, the world is still here. Some 

speculate that a version of Earth actually did blow to pieces, or however we want to describe it, 

but that's not the version we live in. Whatever the matter is with that, the thing is that we are 

still here, and so is our planet. According to some, it shouldn't be. The most stunning 

disinformation I've ever seen, I believe, is the following: There were/are two Russian scientists 

who were all over the news, covered by "The Examiner" for one[3], saying that the end of the 

world should have started in March 2012. The names of the scientists are Victoria Popova, Dr. 

Sc. PhD, professor, and Lidia Andrianova, PhD. I think Victoria was the one of the two who also 


17



was the first Russian cosmonaut in space. They claim they are in contact with ETs, whom they 

are channeling. These ETs are helping them decoding the crop circles, and they were saying that 

Earth will blow to pieces and we have to make the transition to a higher dimension right now, or 

it's too late. We have to get rid of our material things and repent very quickly, because before 

we ascend we have to go through a 1000 years worth of judgment in an "in-between-area" of 

time and space. Of course, the best way to repent is to donate to their website. Yes, you read 

that correctly. 

Figure 2. Professor Victoria Popova, and Lidia Andrianova, PhD. 

When nothing happened in March, they changed the date to September, then to October, and after 

that to December 21, 2012. When nothing happened then either, they irresponsibly said that the first 

step of the cataclysm was happening on December 21, but the real cataclysm will happen in 2013. Their 

website is the most outrageous thing that's out there, I believe, but it's also very dangerous, because 

these two women have quite some prominent background with lots of patents on personal inventions, 

and are holding very high positions in the Russian society. However, their irresponsibility and deceptive 

nature is remarkable to say the least. There biographies are here: 

http://www.ourtransition.info/index.php?option=com_content&view=article&id=135&Itemid=8&lang= 

en and their home page here: http://www.ourtransition.info/. I bring this up so people can warn other 

from them. Although their deception is so obvious, many fall for this. 

3. The Harvest. Not all channeled star beings/collectives that are promoting the Harvest said it 

was going to happen on December 21, 2012, but many told us it would be an approximate time. 

The more advanced channels know better than giving an exact date for many reasons, but one 

major reason would be because we humans have a tendency to change our minds ever so often 

and therefore also alter the anticipated future; the one the aliens can see when they look into it. 

There are an infinity of probabilities, and they often operate based on the most probable future, 

taking our mass consciousness and our anticipated actions into account. 

4. The Superwave. I include this one here, although I didn't expect it to happen yet anyway, and 

neither did most other researchers into this phenomenon. The Superwave, as I have looked at it, 

is most likely something aside from the gamma wave from the Galactic Center. Some physicists 

believe it has to do with the explosion of a giant supernova, and a huge wave of energy is going 


18



to hit Earth in the near future with unpredictable outcome. It doesn't mean that this wave of 

energy does not originate from the center of the galaxy, however. 

This phenomenon did not reach the Top 10 of apocalyptic events that were anticipated to 

happen in 2012, from what I could see, although Laura Knight-Jadczyk, who runs the website, 

http://cassiopaea.org, wrote 1639 pages on the subject, all accessible for free on the website. 

And that's just on one subject! She is calling this a galactic tidal wave upon which a lot of star 

beings and races are riding, and they are all coming in direction towards Earth -- intentionally so! 

This is one possibility what the wave could be. However, the galactic tidal wave is probably the 

#1 apocalyptic event I personally am anticipating in the near future, in spite of the poor 

attention it has received. Albeit, it seems like it's not the effects from a supernova, but another 

tidal wave from the Galactic Center, coming our way, and supposedly "harvesting" all beings 

and/or star races ready to ascend to the 4th density. 

But why am I concerned about this? Doesn't it sound good? It probably does for those who 

are aware of it and read and listen to certain channeled information, which makes it sound like 

this is the thing we should be waiting for. The crux, however, is that the entities who are 

supposedly riding on this wave will allegedly do so to come here to "save us". And the wave is 

apparently not that far away. We may ask ourselves why they are not using stargates or nano 

travel to come here instead, but the reason, so they say, is that there is no point for them to 

arrive here in the "physical" (or in interdimensional form) before the Wave. They can 

communicate with us just as well while riding the Superwave. Something to be afraid of? No, 

not if we know what the intentions are. The only ones who should fear some rumbling in their 

guts are those who are unaware of this events, or those who are excited about it. And neither 

category is aware enough to be afraid anyway -- not yet. We will talk about this in combination 

with the Galactic Federations and channeled entities in upcoming papers. 

5. The Second Coming. The reader can probably recall the hysteria behind this, and it is still 

ongoing, although most people are just catching their breaths right now when the nano-second 

and winter solstice are in the past. Many anticipated a Rapture earlier and the Second Coming of 

Christ around 12/21. Didn't happen. Others said that the Second Coming had other meanings, 

but none of these interpretations were fulfilled either. Then I saw on Dr. Henry Makow's 

website that disinfo agent and 33° Freemason, Leo Zagami, is screaming his lungs out right now, 

propagating that 12/21 was the beginning of the Tribulation. Oh well... 

I was talking about the Second Coming being the return of the old "gods", albeit I didn't set 

this event to happen exactly at winter solstice. Maybe I should have, because I have this eerie 

feeling in my gut that much of the alien invasion (which I consider has to do with the Second 

Coming in Revelation and the Book of Daniel) was completed. At least I believe there was a mass 

invasion that happened behind the scenes, on a soul level, as described above. Again, I put it 

here amongst events that did not happen, because if we talk about the traditional 

interpretations, they didn't happen, and I cannot prove that this spiritual invasion actually 

happened. And if it did, it's not over yet. Personally, I think the Sirians are behind schedule, and 

that is thanks to everybody who worked hard on waking up to a higher consciousness. This was 

a big obstacle in the Sirian plans. 

I guess those were the most common events people had their attention on. In spite of that we are 

passed 21/12/12, we still have quite some challenging events in front of us, but the funny thing is that I 


19



feel much more relaxed writing this level of learning than I did any of the two previous ones. I have a 

totally different calm inside of me and don't feel the same urge to get the papers out in a rush as I did 

before, feeling I was racing against time. I am still writing, however, because what I am about to bring up 

are very important issues, in my opinion, and things people need to know as well before we can put 

these challenging issues a little bit aside and concentrate more on spiritual/body/mind subjects in 

depth, something that will certainly bring us to another level, and hopefully bypass all the negativity that 

is trying to bring us down because we (up until now) have refused to look at it. These three levels of 

learning can be looked at as catalysts, or springboards to becoming galactic citizens in the not-to-faraway 

future. 

Before we move on I want to say that my heart goes out to all those who had family members or dear 

friends who lost their lives, perhaps prematurely, during the last period of the nano-second. I know 

there are quite a few people out there who can relate to this. You have my empathy, and most of all, 

remember that many people only came here for the nano-second. They were lucky enough, just like you 

and I, to get a body here in this lifetime so we could experience this. However, when the nano was over 

(or just before), many people got sick and vacated, because they had accomplished what they came for. 

And just being here means that those people accomplished a lot -- more than they would have done 

otherwise in thousands of years. So please understand that all is as it should be in the Goddess' 

Universe, and there is always a bigger picture to anything that happens. It doesn't mean we won't miss 

those who pass over. I had close relatives who died as well near the end of the cycle, and one friend 

who is alive but terminally ill, so I know... 

V. "The Second Level of Learning" in the Rearview Mirror 

The Second Level of Learning was incredibly interesting to write. Although some of it took a lot of 

courage to confront at first, it took me to a whole new level of being. It carried me light-years ahead of 

where I was before. 

I also had help from many levels of existence. I mentioned that I had sources I could not reveal for 

their own safety, and I kept my word and will continue doing so, but want to explain a little bit how this 

works. My main sources were not channeled, and they were of course not of the Sirian Alliance, if 

someone had the idea it could have been Utu Shamash. But the reader has probably already figured out 

that my most important sources are not from here, but are here to assist, and the information I released 

in Level II was due to come out exactly when it did. 

So how does this work? Am I just given a load of information that I can pick and choose from and all I 

need to do is start writing? Not at all. Nothing was given to me if I didn't ask the right question. My 

sources were very strict about not breaking the Law of Free Will and the Law of Non-Interference. At the 

same time, help was given because it was "asked for". Still, there was a lot more to it. I didn't always get 

a straight answer, but the answers always led to more questions, and I realized that they wanted me to 

do my own research to a certain degree. All they wanted was to guide me in the right direction. Of 


20



course, I got some straight answers too when appropriate, but the whole point was that I had to work 

for it as well. What came out of this was both alarming and quite shocking as the reader noticed when 

you read the finished material. 

But how do I know I can trust my sources? For many reasons, and don't think I was not alert. I was 

looking for red flags everywhere, and I even had my disputes with them, but it always ended with that I 

realized that the dispute had started because there was something I had overlooked, or still didn't 

comprehend. Once I understood that, the disputes stopped immediately. Another thing is that you 

"feel" when something is right and when it's not (like we discussed in Section II). And I think I used my 

guts feeling to the maximum on that level, because I did not want to become too comfortable with the 

sources, so that I started missing possible red flags. 

Inevitably, with time I became very good friends with my informants, and we became more personal 

with each other; especially so when the flow of information stopped. Even then I was on my toes for 

quite a while, but eventually I had to relax about it, because there was really nothing to "suspect" about 

them anymore. If there are genuine sources somewhere, these will be it! Is there an agenda? Yes, of 

course! Humanity's future will affect a lot of star races out there, and it is very important to them that 

we get out of here alive, so to speak. We are so tangled up here in the agendas of the negative races 

that we need someone who don't have ulterior motives to give us a hand; someone who's agenda is not 

to negatively benefit from the development of the human race. I feel extremely privileged to have been 

able to connect with such sources. Just like me, they understand that we have to gain a certain level of 

knowledge before we can even think of getting out of the trap, and the information that was missing 

(much of it contained in Level II) would be very hard for mankind to find unless someone helped us in 

the process. It is in everybody's interest (except the Sirians and those who side with them) that 

humanity evolve past the point of slavery and other-determinism. 

Another very important source, always, is my Higher Self -- my Oversoul. When I'm inspired and on 

the right track, writing comes very natural. All I need to do is to turn on the computer, pull up the 

software, put my hands on the keyboard and start writing. There is no such thing as "writer's block" in 

this case. I've only had it when I later noticed I was way out of track and unable to tune into the right 

frequencies. Otherwise, I can't write fast enough to express the thoughts I have, and they sometimes 

download so quickly that I, on occasion, miss a point or two in the process because I can't type fast 

enough (I really have to work on my typing. I'm not a slow typer, but to catch up with the thoughts, I 

have to be able to write faster than 60 words per minute, that's for sure). So in other words, my chakras 

open up instantly when I sit in front of my keyboard, but in all honesty, I also need the right atmosphere. 

There is a reason I get up at 2 o'clock in the morning to write. Everything is quiet; not only in the house, 

but the whole neighborhood is sleeping, and there are no interfering energies. I put on relaxing, spiritual 

music (no lyrics, all instrumental, or it will be distracting), and dim the light so I only have enough to see 

what I'm doing. After that, nothing can stop me from writing, hour after hour. So in a way, I am 

channeling, but in my case it's not some exterior alien collective, but myself on a higher level of 

knowledge. I'm telling the reader this, hoping it can be to some inspiration for you who may have 

thought about starting to write. The above setup may not work for you, but perhaps something worth 


21



trying? 

v.i. Thesis, Antithesis, and Syntheses 

These three levels of learning can be looked at from a few different perspectives. On a macrocosmic 

level we have the eternal battle between good and evil, male and female, master and slave, etc. We 

have this constant polarity that seems to be so prominent here on Earth, but exists as well on a higher 

level in the rest of the Universe as well, almost regardless of how evolved a species are. You have to 

reach the higher levels of what Anton Parks labels "The Angal" dimensions in order to stand above 

polarity (higher dimensions in the KHAA). Channeled entities compare these Angal dimensions with the 

highest couple of densities. 

For the rest of us, at this level of development, we have this polarity all around us to deal with. In my 

writings we have the Aryans (the Orion Empire), portrayed as our true ancestors in line with what Alex 

Collier and a few others state as well. So Orion may be seen as the "good guys" in this drama. Their 

direct mirror is the Sirian Alliance, who is out to conquer the Universe and destroy anything connected 

with Orion in the process. The so(u)lution to this drama is presented as being what we casually call 

"spiritual". So here we have the thesis (Orion), the antithesis (Sirius), leading to a synthesis (the spiritual, 

or self reflection). This, of course, must be seen on a much deeper level where everything is a mirror of 

ourselves and our inner struggles and conflicts -- dark against light. This is why I have stressed so hard 

that there is no use in going out there and "fight the good fight", killing off one side of the polarity to 

break even, and think this will lead to a solution. 

For humanity to have any chance whatsoever to survive, we need to look at this whole problem from 

inside ourselves. This is where the real universe resides! The outer conflicts will go on and on, and we 

can intervene, having the best of intentions, the best of armies, the best of weapons, and the brightest 

of minds, and still lose the war. In fact, we can't win -- there is no way. When any conflict, big or small, is 

solved from inside ourselves, that's when the change will take place on the outside -- not a second 

before that. Hence, those who realize this are the exact ones who shall build the New Earth (if they still 

wish to stay here on Earth), while the rest have to continue fighting until there is no energy left to fight 

with. It is inevitable. 

Hopefully, these three levels of learning will present the adequate thesis and anti-thesis, and present 

the synthesis on a more shallow, but challenging level. If I have accomplished that, I'm quite pleased. 

The synthesis in its entirety will be presented in book form once this last level of learning is completed. 

With all this in mind, we also must understand that we have a lot to learn from what we consider our 

adversaries, or enemies, the so-called dark forces. If they are all reflections of our own inner conflicts, 

this is only natural. Again, I have always stressed not to throw the baby out with the bath water, and this 

is exactly what I mean by that. If you can't learn from the darkness inside of you, you can only do half of 

the learning, if that. 


22



Listen to this, for example. These are two quotes from whom we may consider being our enemies, the 

Alpha Draconians, relayed by a "walk-in"[def]. Quite profoundly, she says: 

"If we are Prisoners of War on a Prison Planet with Grey Guards and a Reptilian 

Warden...what are our options...exactly? 

Simple ortho, internalise the lot. Put the 'Grey Guards' as a galactic hive-race into a cell in 

your kneecap and 'imprison' them within yourself in a metaphorical association and a 

topographical map-making. You can map entire continents in an atlas, thus is the nature of a 

holographic universe."[4] 

And here is more from the same source: 

"The 'war in heaven' is a war of archetypes between the True God and the usurper God, who 

IS the true God's Image in a Mirror. Understanding this, will allow you to understand what the 

unified duality or polarisation represents in the greater order of things."[5] 

The time where we used to require "solid proof" for any and all statements we made is over. That 

belonged to the Old Cycle -- the Old World -- and should properly die with it. Existence isn't material in 

its essence; this is something that we are required to understand in this New Era if we are to evolve 

further from here. Metaphysical events and statements can only be proven by personal experience and 

by looking inside for accuracy on one's personal level, or to put puzzle pieces together, having an open 

mind. 

The 3rd Density is mainly dealing with the material existence, where spirit is only vaguely defined, if at 

all. Those I am writing for know all this and are ready to move on from here, using a whole new kind of 

language than was used in the old days. This new language is the Language of Light and is growing more 

towards telepathy and communicate so much better and fuller than written words on a paper. And the 

more we look within, the more we realize that the Universe is partly built with symbols and geometry. 

This is where we are heading towards experiencing. We need to be willing to experience things way 

beyond our current belief systems, exploring what is there, deep within, but without expectations. 

Boundaries belong to 3D and is something we gradually need to break. There are no boundaries; they 

don't exist except in our own mind. There are always beings out there who are wiser than ourselves, 

looking at us as we look at our pets, perhaps, and say about us, "Look at these beings! Look what 

boundaries they set up for themselves when there are no such! It would be so easy for them to take that 

extra step and suddenly a whole new reality would open up for them!" Interestingly enough, it's the 

looking deep within ourselves that will get us to the stars, not the opposite. As we learn more and more, 

the truth is often opposed to what we have been taught. And it has to be, because we are solidly 

trapped here in 3D. The opposite of entrapment is freedom, so it's only natural that we need to look 

inside instead of outside of ourselves. 


23



Never before have we been so close to make it since the Sirians took over our planet, but on the 

contrary, never before have we also been so close to lose it all. Yet, it is so simple once we realize what 

it is we need to do. Albeit, it is because it is so simple that it makes it so hard. In the Sirian learning 

center, i.e. the traditional school system, everything is extraordinary complex. You enter the system 

with a simple and curious mind, and come out on the other end, brainwashed to believe that life is 

incredibly complicated. And that's wherein the trap lies! 

v.ii. Some Updates Since the Completion of "The Second Level of Learning" 

Things are happening fast on this level of learning, and the changes are very quick. Some things 

change constantly, and it's impossible to keep up with them. This is when the reader needs to continue 

doing their own research if they find this being appropriate and necessary. However, there are a few 

comments I want to make on what I wrote in Level II before we start to really dig into Level III. 

Life Physics Group California (LPG-C) has dissolved, but I have been told that the original core group of 

seven scientists are still working together just like before, but thus far, more behind the scenes. The 

LPG-C's website, which I referred to a lot in Level I and II has been taken down and will not see the light 

of day again. I have tried to find out what happened, but only get vague answers. The reason that is 

most commonly promoted is that the group was under attack from the Powers That Be (PTB[def]) and 

had to go underground. I haven't heard anything directly from Dr. A.R. Bordon, the chief scientist of the 

group, but what I've heard is the most official unofficial explanation I can get at this point. I may come 

back on this subject while I'm writing the rest of the papers on this level of learning. The last thing I 

heard was that A.R., Michael Lee Hill and a few other supposed Nephilim hybrids had been working on 

steering Nibiru out of course so it won't collide with Earth, or prevent it from getting so close that it will 

cause devastating effects, but then these psychic sessions silently stopped, and when I talked to Michael 

Lee Hill (MLH) last, he didn't know what was happening with Nibiru. I have my own thoughts about that, 

some of which I revealed in the beginning of this paper, but with more to come... 

On November 20, 2012, I also made a major update to the paper, "Humanities Future Paper #2: The 

Dawn of a New Species: Humanity Without Chains", and added a whole section to it, which I called, "5.1 

Update on the Aryan/Sirian Peace Agreement". In the original text, I asked the questions but didn't have 

any real answers. Still, in the back of my head, I remembered that I had discussed this with one of my 

sources, but couldn't find the correspondence. Then, after I'd posted the article I found out about the 

answer. So I updated the section. If you read that paper before November 20, 2012, I suggest you go 

back to that section and review it, because the answers I added are quite remarkable and revealing. It's 

about the battle between Orion and Sirius here on this planet 500,000 years ago. The Sirians won and 

have been in charge here since then, and that section tells the reader exactly how they managed to win 

that battle. It says a lot about the Sirian mentality in war and battle. 

Our old "friend", Supriem David Rockefeller deactivated his facebook account shortly after winter 

solstice (for those who don't know who he is, I wrote an e-book on him and the myth around him, which 


24



can be viewed here: http://supriemrockefeller.wordpress.com/). Those who have followed his 

whereabouts may ask what happened, and I am just as oblivious as anybody else. My best guess is that 

he had planned for a while to take it down after his birthday on 12/21/12. What he is doing now is 

clouded in mystery, and that was exactly how the man wanted it, wasn't it? He wanted a mystery 

around himself. If I hear something spectacular, I will post it on my own facebook page, otherwise I will 

let it go. 

VI. A Look at What is Coming 

Level III I believe is going to be slightly shorter than Level II, but on the other hand, I didn't think Level 

II would be 500+ pages, either. After all, Level III contains information I could not include in Level II due 

to space issues; the level would be way too long. But on the other hand, it will also hopefully take the 

reader up a notch in understanding of what is going on in Earth's vicinity and on our planet herself. It is 

my conviction that what I will include in Level III is necessary for people to know in order to avoid some 

future traps while working on creating our own path into the future, more away from linear time and 

into multidimensional thinking. 

In Level III I want to go into more details about the different star races who are here, interfering with 

Earth on any level, and a few who don't, and only observe at this point. Some say it's not that important 

who is who as long as we know the overall agenda, but I disagree. I think it's important to know who 

they are, whom they are working together with (if that information is available), and possibly where 

they come from. How they look like is of less important, however, as most of them can manifest in 

virtually any shape and form they wish. 

I want to bring up both physical and non-physical beings, i.e. dimensionals and interdimensionals. 

We're going to dig more into the "unseen world" and what that may reveal. The unseen (for us) reality 

brings more havoc to human daily life than many people have a clue about. This needs to be confronted, 

or we will never make it anywhere. 

Then we have a very different subject to discuss -- the Galactic Federations! In this area we have a lot 

of deception going on, and way too many otherwise bright people are falling for their delusions -- could 

be a deadly choice as we shall see... 

We have discussed channeled entities before, but I have taken time to compare a number of the most 

prominent channeled sources out there to see what they have in common and what differentiates them. 

I decided to do this so we understand better the ulterior motives behind them, and again, which group 

works with whom (yes, many different channeled sources are actually the same source under another 

name and slightly different approach). We will also go into if there are both bad sources, or if it's a mix. 

Furthermore, we're going to talk about the future Prison Planet, and what it would probably be like to 

live in a future society run by the Sirian Alliance in a more open fashion; something similar to how it was 


25



in old Mesopotamia, perhaps. Only that this time we are going to see a Machine Kingdom emerge and 

how mankind will slowly but surely turn into cyborgs and start looking different from today's humans. In 

fact, in the future, for those who follow this timeline, they are going to look very frightening, but being 

able to space travel in a more traditional way, using portals, star gates and black holes. The bodies are 

going to be constructed in a way that make space travel, using highly developed technology, possible, 

and together with the Sirians this branch of humanity is going to conquer space, and in the future they 

will visit certain civilizations that they know since before, and a karmic situation will occur. Beings who 

come from our future are returning to our present (in the 21st Century) to try to avoid this from 

happening. We're going to talk about the concept of "time jumpers", something that is much more 

common than we think. For many, this concept is totally new -- unfortunately so, but we're going to 

change that. 

Then we will revisit the afterlife again from a new angel. A few other subjects will be touched on as 

well. 

Lastly, we will end with bringing up a possible scenario how we can make contact with star beings in a 

more positive way -- something that already is being done -- and how such an interaction can benefit 

them and us. 

So we have a lot to cover again, and the first subject we will dig into is the next phase of the alien 

invasion. Yes, there is more to it. Phase I was accomplished last year, or should I say almost 

accomplished, because I think they are a little bit behind schedule. I was almost fooled for a while, and 

nearly missed what was going on, and more importantly, how it was all connected. But I believe I am 

connecting the dots now, and that is what I want to share. Phase II has to do with the channeled 

entities, which we have a lot of. At a first glance they all seem different and separate from each other, 

but are they really? And more than that, what is their purpose? Is it really to help us evolve? Or is there 

something more sinister going on? 

I wish I didn't have to write about all this, and I could go on and concentrate on more positive writing, 

but what I am about to expose is very important and needs to come out in the public. Well, as a matter 

of fact, it's already out there, but no one (or very few) is catching what is really going on. 

In spite of the sometimes "heavy" message, I have had a lot of insights and been quite enthusiastic 

while researching it, to be honest. That's how it works when we learn. We need to know both about the 

dark and the light side of life, or we'll never become "whole". 

It's my hope that if you enjoyed Level I and II, you will enjoy Level III as much. At least I did, 

researching it. 

Love, 

Wes Penre 


26



Notes and References (hit the back button on your browser to go back from where you came after have read the note): 

[1] Bashar is channeled by Darryl Anka. Darryl's website is http://bashar.org/ 

[2] http://www.space.com/14810-asteroid-earth-impact-risk-2012da14.html 

[3] http://www.examiner.com/article/russian-cosmonaut-popovich-ets-warn-cataclysms-will-unify-human-consciousness 

[4] http://www.birthofgaia.com/t116p360-abraxas-thuban-qa , op. cit. 

[5] ibid, op. cit. 


27



Paper #2: In Wait for Things to Come! 

by Wes Penre, Friday, February 1, 2013 


I. The First Alien Invasion and its Main Distraction -- Nibiru! 

In the previous paper I stated that the "alien invasion" has already happened -- at least to some 

extent -- but that it is still not completed. It looks like they have planned the takeover in at least two 

phases, where Phase I is already accomplished. 

The first phase was happening very much behind the scenes and was discussed in details in Level II. 

What it is, or at least what they want us to believe, is that Phase II is going to be the Harvest[def]. The Big 

Secret was that we were not supposed to know there was a Phase I. 

For a while I thought nothing of real substance (besides from my own and other's evolvement) was 

going to happen in 2012, until I suddenly realized how it all had been done, and how we all had been 

distracted by looking in other directions so we would miss the point. Nibiru was only one of those 

distractions, although the story of the Ša.AM.i in general is correct. However, Nibiru is not the home 

planet of the Sirians (Ša.AM.i), but a hollowed out space/battle ship. Albeit, the point is that it's not here 

in the Earth vicinity to create havoc. That idea was abandoned decades ago, something that both James 

of the WingMakers (Mahu Nahi), Barbara Marciniak's Pleiadians, and Amitakh Stanford indicate as well 

(I am not a fan of Amitakh's research otherwise, but here she is right on the spot)[1]. 

Mahu Nahi said already back in 2008, in the now classic interview with Project Camelot, that Nibiru is 

not going to be a threat, and the Pleiadians have stated the same thing for years. These are 

metaphysical beings, and they are telling us there is no Nibiru anywhere near the solar system. And I 

trust them with that, because they have showed to be a very reliable source over the last 25 years. This 

is what Amitakh Stanford has to say about this whole scenario: 

"Of the many surviving calendars, a considerable focus for divining has been on the Aztec/Mayan 

calendar, which many have interpreted as an indicator of the end of time in the year 2012. 

As 2012 approaches, more and more interest is drawn to its ominous consequences. Books, movies, 

articles are being distributed that focus on the idea of predictions that are attached to the year 2012. 

Many people have interpreted this to be the date for the end of time, hence, the end of the world. 

As I have previously written, the Mayan/Aztec calendar was an imposition on the planet that 

originated from the Anunnaki Elite, who had escaped from their future into the past, which is where 

they left the Anunnaki Remnants. That is, the Anunnaki Remnants were left on the Earth to fend for 

themselves and await the return of the Anunnaki Elite, whom the Remnants believed would return to 

Earth and re-start time. 


28



[Note: The Mayan Calendar originated from the Pleiadians and their teachers, the so-called Game 

Masters. But Stanford is correct, because we know them as the Anunnaki Elite, or in my papers, the 

Sirian Alliance (SA). Wes.] 

Long ago, the Anunnaki Elite were responsible for the creation of the Aztec/Mayan calendar, which 

gave the false postulation that 2012 could well be the end of this planet. 

Millennia ago, at the time the calendar was manufactured, the Anunnaki Elite thought that they could 

come back to Earth and re-visit the past to reset the Atu-waa before 2012, but they have failed, and 

time has run out for them because the Atu-waa had to be re-started before the end of 2008. 

[Note: Mahu Nahi of the WingMakers said something similar in his 2008 interview with Project 

Camelot. He mentioned that ANU's return had been planned for a long time, and so had the return of 

Nibiru. However, plans have changed, and ANU is not coming back and neither is Nibiru (which indicates 

that Mahu knows it is a battleship they can maneuver as they wish). He says the return of ANU was 

scheduled for 2008, so he had a few years to prepare before 2012, but it will not happen (and it didn't. 

However, Sirians came back in thought form and invaded certain bodies they had prepared). Mahu also 

indicates that ANU and his people are time traveler and as such, ANU always is ahead of the game and 

can prepare things to happen before anyone else has a chance to make their move. Wes.] 

The prediction of 2012 as the end of the world is not only wrong, it is a cruel and deliberate hoax. 

The world will not end in 2012, despite all the fear-mongering propaganda that is being distributed at 

the behest of the ruling elite on Earth. Many of the people are innocently participating in the 

distribution of the message because they have been hoodwinked by the ruling elite. 

The 2012 calendar threat is similar to the Y2K panic and the nuclear holocaust horror that the ruling 

elite have instigated and implemented. All three of the events are hoaxes that were designed by the 

Anunnaki and impressed on people to spread about the planet. Obviously, the 2012 hoax is a longerstanding 

deception than the nuclear horror threat and the Y2K panic. 

The 2012 hoax is also akin to the “save the planet” message because of greenhouse gases. 

* From the “save the planet” message, laws were implemented to, 

* prohibit incandescent light bulbs 

* mandate carbon-trading schemes 

* force ethanol-blend petrol on motorists, 

...among other things. 

The ideals behind the green movement were initially well intended, but the ruling elite have seized 

control of the “save the planet” issue, and it has now become another powerful tool of the One World 

Government. 

The consistent theme throughout the 2012 hoax, the Y2K scare and the greenhouse gas deceptive 

policies is that all of these “weapons” were designed by Anunnaki to be used against humans."[2] 

I'm going to jump around a little bit here in the beginning, because so much has happened even in 

the short amount of time since I completed Level II. I want to show you the following picture and advise 


29



the reader to read the Space.com article connected to it, and also check out the slide show. Now they 

are promoting in mainstream media how we humans are going to use asteroids to exploit their 

resources, just like the Sirians once did. Like if that wasn't synchronicity enough, they also say in the 

article, which can be viewed here, http://www.space.com/15387-asteroid-mining-planetary-resourcesgallery.html, 

that soon we can colonize space with these asteroids. They are hollowing them out, my 

friends! 

The Sirians are becoming quite blatant, but are also doing what they love to do; hide the truth in plain 

sight. Their human minions sound really excited when I listen to them being interviewed about this on 

CNN News and other places, saying that these hollowed out asteroids can be used for a lot of things, 

such as extracting water from them so NASA can use this water in space whenever they need it for a 

fraction of the cost of transporting water from Earth to space, and therefore it becomes a business 

proposal (CNN, 1/23/13). They can also excavate gold, minerals, and other valuable metals from these 

flying rocks, but are planning on making them into satellites and space stations as well. The CNN anchor 

then distinguished between good asteroids and bad asteroids, where the bad ones are those who come 

too close to Earth and create havoc here. 

After that she shot off the punch line; the question she'd been told to ask before the interview, you 

could tell: "if we can manage these good asteroids, can we use them to steer away the bad ones so we 

are not hit by them?" And the scientist they were interviewing knew exactly how to sell this to the public 

by saying something to the effect: "Of course, that's possible. We can use our technology to push the bad 

asteroids just an inch or two out of course already when they are far away so they get out of course by 

the time they would have hit Earth otherwise." 

I saw this information days ago and posted articles from Space.com and IO9 on my blog 

(http://battleofearth.wordpress.com/2013/01/23/asteroid-mining-project-aims-for-deep-spacecolonization/ 

and http://battleofearth.wordpress.com/2013/01/08/nasa-considers-plan-to-capture-anasteroid-and-turn-it-into-a-space-station/, 

respectively), but yesterday, on January 23, 2013, it made 

headlines everywhere in the world, being the top news on CNN and in all prominent newspapers. So this 

is big, my friends. 


30



Figure 1: There are tens of thousands of asteroids in the solar system we can use for this project, 

says NASA and their parroting scientist allies. 

In other words, they want to sell the public on this idea with space stations, satellites, hollowed out 

asteroids, and the ability to make us feel safe, when the real reason I can see is entirely different: 

The Sirians are now building hollowed out battleships in the thousands here in our solar system, right 

before our oblivious eyes, in order to create a space armada for an upcoming war, and they are using 

humans to build those for them! And why not? "The human super soldiers we are creating, and the rest 

of the humans, too, who can fight, better get used to it, because they are the ones we're going to use in 

the upcoming space war," they seem to think. 

I also ran this through one of my sources, who said it looks inevitable that there is going to be another 

galactic war if this continues. And as the reader will see when you continue reading these papers, the 

Sirians here in our solar system are going to get help, and that help is on its way as we speak, moving 

quickly towards our solar system. 

My source thinks that the Sirians are preparing a war with Orion, and if that happens, Orion has no 

choice but to respond. And in the middle, as usual, are the human population, used as shields and 

cannon fodder. So it will always be, from now until our extinction, unless we understand whom we're 

dealing with, and have the guts to say NO, and just walk away from all this insanity -- the reason why I 

write my papers, by the way, if someone was wondering... 


31



Figure 2: We are hollowing out asteroids to colonize space now, according to Space.com. 

Soon we're going to have battleships all around the solar system. Only thing is that no one 

(except those who have read my papers) will know they are ultimately owned and 

inhabited by the Sirian Alliance (click on the image for a beautiful, much bigger picture). 

What I have been trying to say lately is that Nibiru was just a distraction so we could keep our minds 

and efforts away from researching what is, and was, really happening -- an alien invasion on a nano 

level. This doesn't mean that Nibiru doesn't exist, it only means it's not the home planet of the Sirians, 

thrown out of an orbit around one of the Sirius stars when it went nova, and incidentally happened to 

find its way to our solar system. 

The disinfo agents know what they're doing, however, and they know the real story. You see, the 

Sirians did come here to Earth once upon a time, and one of their battleships (perhaps the lead one) was 

called Nibiru after the Queen of the Stars' personal spaceship (the name was hijacked). So that part of 

the story is true. However, what has been covered up is that the Sirians still live in Sirius and Nibiru is 

just one of thousands upon thousands of hollowed out asteroids, planetoids, moons, or planets that the 

Sirian Alliance use for space travel and as efficient battleships. So the story about Nibiru is semi-true, but 

not a threat to Earth in the way we've been taught. And these days they don't even call the battleship 

Nibiru anymore, but Ša.AM.e, apparently. Another name, but the same vessel. 

For decades -- well, ever since Zecharia Sitchin came out with his first book, The Twelfth Planet, in 

1976 -- have we been living with the fear mongering around an incoming, perhaps inhabited planet 

which may or may not become our nemesis. It was in the mainstream newspapers in the 1980s, but 

since the 1990s, tons of books and an abundance of websites have been dedicated to this mystery 

planet which supposedly house the even more mysterious space aliens, the Anunnaki. I fell for this piece 

of distraction and disinformation as well, planned for decades (if not even more) by the PTB[def] and 

their masters, the Sirians. Now, when I understand which roll this piece of disinfo and distraction had, it 

all becomes quite obvious. 

But doesn't fact remain that some kind of object has been spotted within, or close to the solar 

system, the last few years? Something that is coming closer? Possibly. The question is, what is it? Well, 

according to the fear mongers who keep pushing this story, Nibiru is now somewhere extremely close to 

Earth -- within 1AU[3] or so. First of all, if this was the case, wouldn't we feel the earth changes pretty 


32



drastically now? Especially as this alleged planet is many, many times bigger than Earth and is followed 

by at least 9, perhaps 11 moons[4]. 

Albeit, we hear of course that there are those who are sitting meditating this heavenly body off 

course to save mankind. However, in my opinion, even they are deceived, only doing what they think is 

the best they can do to help out with a huge (non-existing) problem. Behind the scenes, there are others 

pulling the strings, who know better, but want to gain credibility and create a bond between the 

manipulators and those who are manipulated. Some people are chosen to do this thing because they 

have "special abilities", as the story goes. Where have we heard that before? You got it! Cult recruiters 

have used the phrase "you are special" on people for eons to get them recruited. It usually works...What 

I'm talking about here, however, isn't necessarily a cult, but those behind the scenes know human 

psychology pretty well. 

Like I mentioned earlier, we have asteroids coming close to Earth all the time, and the latest story 

about that has been in the news lately. Although some say that NASA is lying and that the asteroids are 

much bigger than they will admit to the public, I think it's safe to say that we will survive February 15, 

2013, when the next asteroid named DA14 is supposed to come close to Earth. However, as you notice, 

more fear mongering is created around this event. Many fall for this latest one, too. Others say that the 

Doomsday has been changed to March, 2013. There will be people who continue changing the dates 

now when it didn't happen in 2012, but it will all be disinformation and more fear mongering. They are 

trying to squeeze out as much fear they can from the public before they change subjects. 

Some people say that Nibiru, as we know it, actually is Earth's second sun, which has been invisible to 

us here on Earth because of its position in space. This has been called the "Brown Dwarf Theory". I have 

not researched it enough to know if there is any substance to it, but I'd rather put my money on that 

than I would on the "Sirian Home Planet Theory", which I don't trust at all. A double-star system? Why 

not? 

I read from a channeled session with the Cassiopaeans that our solar system indeed is a double-star 

system, and that the whole solar system is orbiting a brown dwarf star, which is located in the Oort 

Cloud on an outer perimeter orbital plane at a distance of approximately 510 billion miles, well outside 

the orbit of Pluto. This brown dwarf has a mass much less than our known yellow sun, if we are to 

believe the Cassiopaeans. The distance, of course, between planets and this brown dwarf would in that 

case fluctuate, but allegedly this brown dwarf is the reason why there has been abnormalities noticed in 

the orbits of the outer moons lately (this session is dated 9/15/2010). The closest this second sun will 

come to any of the planets in the solar system is about the orbit of Pluto, and this is what is supposedly 

going to happen now.[5] No catastrophe, folks, just some abnormalities in the planetary orbits, perhaps 

also in regards to Earth. This brown dwarf, however, may very well have been confused with Nibiru. 

It's not easy for someone who has not spent a lot of time researching to understand what is going on 

here. But the following is probably the most plausible scenario as I see it right now. The Sirians are 

showing humans how to hollow out asteroids and give the public a false pretense that this is to exploit 

resources and colonize space. Instead, they are building a future space armada right here, in our own 

solar system that they can use in conjunction with the human military in the not too far away future. 

People in general think the public version sounds cool, oblivious of what is really going on. 

Next step is something we will go into later in this paper, and also the next. It has to do with the 

Harvest and Saviors in general. Many had put their faith on 2012 and that some kind of Savior was going 


33



to come and save the world and themselves. It didn't happen. To make things even more discouraging 

for people with such faith (and they are many!) is that the PTB made sure we had some pre-dates back 

in 2011 etc., where something of this nature was going to happen. Of course, it didn't. People get more 

and more discouraged and are ready to accept almost anybody as their Savior, as long as they have a 

plan for mankind that looks good. The wars and negativities continue around the world, and the only 

ones (more or less) who are saved from that are those who have started vibrating on a higher frequency 

so all that negativity does not reach them personally. Otherwise, business as usual. 

People are getting tired of this and are in need of a change. This is where the Sirians come in. Helpful 

star races are impatiently waiting for us to take the "right" decision and take responsibility for our own 

situation and start ignoring the PTB and build our own communities where new, much improved rules 

are applied which are all for the betterment of the group and the individuals in them. Although this is 

about to happen to a certain extent, the vast majority of star races have no such intentions. The Sirians 

have already invaded many people's minds -- especially those in power, and have now directly taken 

over much of business and trade, religion and education, instead of just controlling the situations like 

puppet masters from other dimensions. The vessels were already built, so to speak, and are continuing 

to be built, so the Sirians can incarnate here or do a "walk-in" in human bodies that are slightly altered 

genetically, but on the outside identical to yours and mine. 

Then, when the Harvest is taking place, and some people are supposedly getting "beamed up" to a 

higher density, leaving others behind, the planet may be losing many of their "New Age Leaders", whom 

they have looked up to and given their power to, instead of building their own. I will talk a lot about 

upcoming events in regards to the alleged Harvest soon, but if that plan will succeed (and from 

whatever angle we look at it, it's not positive), then the Sirians think they have us, because they believe 

those who were in the New Age community and who had to stay behind now think life is so unfair that 

they may be ready to give up. Not to speak about the fear they feel when they realize that they did not 

graduate to the next level/density, and now have to be dumped on another 3D planet in another solar 

system the next time they incarnate, and time will start all over again -- a new 26,000 years of slavery in 

a harsh 3D environment. 

That's when it's time for our "heroes", the Sirians, to come into the picture, now showing up in the 

open. Speaking of disclosure! They will tell us they have the ability to save mankind and it's now time to 

join the Galactic Federation of Light or something of the sort. They have the technology to help mankind 

take the last step in order to become galactic citizens and a space-faring race. When NASA and most 

governments in the world (who are already under Sirian control and influence) will agree and suggest to 

people that we all join, so everybody will have a good life in the Machine Kingdom (they will of course 

not use those words). Those who don't want to join are on their own, but can't take advantage of any 

benefits the rest of mankind can enjoy in the mega metropolitans that are planned to be built; so-called 

Smart Cities (everything is "smart" these days, have you noticed?). 

So, if this succeeds, the Sirians will kill three birds with one stone: they win us over with deception 

and technology and thus manage to unite the world (except the small percentage who refuse to 

participate and are forced out of the cities); they make peace with the PTB in front of the peoples of 

Earth, saying that forgiveness is what we all need now and join together as one into a time of peace and 

harmony. And lastly, the Sirians can rule openly in this well planned Machine Kingdom. Little does 

humanity know what consequences that will have for them in the future! It will start out like a Paradise 

on Earth, but will end up in a Living Hell, and it will come creeping upon them so they won't even notice. 

The future will judge me on what I'm saying here, and I am not concerned, because what I'm telling you 


34



is correct and will hold up to scrutiny a hundred years from now. That is what they are planning for 

those who fall into the trap of the New Era, the Age of Aquarius! 

I will expose this trap to the best of my ability in this level of learning, and I think that those who 

finish reading it will have little doubt afterwards that this is how it is. And of course, here is where the 

splitting of the worlds which I have talked about so much come into the picture. Choose the easy path 

and let the Sirians take care of you, or choose the path of responsibility, which perhaps will require a 

little bit more from you at first, but in the end will show to be the easiest path after all. 

The problem here as well is the ETs who are "out there", waiting to be of assistance, but don't hear 

any calls for help, except from a few individuals here and there. This is why there will be no Disclosure, 

my friends. No good ETs will disclose themselves to an oppressive government. The so-called Disclosure 

will therefore not happen the way irresponsible people such as Dr. Steven Greer and Dr. Richard Boylan 

present it (and who are willing to embrace any ET races who are showing themselves to us, without 

using discernment). Instead, good ETs will present themselves to individuals who are ready to receive 

the messages from the stars and who are responsible enough to have such a connection established. If 

ETs are disclosing themselves in public and it's all over the news, count on that this is either a wellplanned 

hoax by the government, or if the ETs are real, they are not here for our benefit. I've said this 

before, but it's worth repeating. 

And don't forget that the Sirian Alliance are trying to create a Master race, a Super race of humans, 

who are half human and half robotic, whom they can use for future conquering of space and their 

ongoing war against Orion, or more specifically, the Mother Goddess, the All That Is. 

I want to take the opportunity here as well to emphasize one important thing. I don't want people to 

live with the false idea that just because star beings and star races out there are much ahead of us when 

comes both to technology, star travel, and development in general, that they are all like saints, or 

benevolent towards humans. There are star races out there who could be considered very advanced and 

billions of years old, who still are fighting wars and have quite a selfish (Service to Self, or STS[def] for 

short) attitude to existence, just as well as there are star races which are very humble, friendly and 

spiritually inclined. As above, so below. 

And lastly, we know that the Sirians don't come down here in their native bodies, because this is 3D 

and they are interdimensional. Some say they are 4D Negative, and if you're an interdimensional being, 

you would never feel comfortable living in a locked-in 3D world. This is one of the reasons they don't 

just show up and invade (there are many other reasons too, which the reader probably can think of). 

They want human bodies, but not any human bodies. They need bodies that vibrate a little bit higher 

than the average human. Therefore, they are also tampering with Earth's frequency via H.A.A.R.P. and 

other technologies. This has nothing to do with that Mother Earth herself is changing her vibrations; this 

is done with technology. The truth is quite the opposite; the Sirians do not want Earth to naturally 

change her vibrations, because then the ET control of this world will diminish. Instead, they only want to 

increase the frequency so they can feel more comfortable, but suppress further evolution. Not all 

humans can handle the higher frequency and get sick, often with neurological problems. Unfortunately, 

the Sirians have no sense or respect for life, and they couldn't care less about how Mother Earth feels 

when she's being tampered with. It's a miracle that she still is willing to host life on this planet, but if we 

don't take heed, there will come a time when she is giving up! 


35



And finally: ten, twenty, fifty, one hundred years from now, those who are waiting for Nibiru to show 

up in the sky will still be waiting in vain. 

II. What We Don't Know is Bound to Kill Us! 

I am aware of that much of what I am exposing here can be quite disturbing and may scare some 

people. This is not my intention, however, although I know it's inevitable. Things are what they are, and I 

can't sugar-coat it and hope for the best; I need to tell it as it is, or what I'm doing would be useless. 

People who say, "No, I don't want to listen to that. I only want to listen to love and light!" better shape 

up and stop being cowards. We all need to look at both the dark and the light side of ourselves and our 

environment, or we'll be stuck in a horrible imbalance. If people can't even handle how words are 

written without freaking out, how are they going to be able to face the real thing when it's just in front 

of their faces? 

Still, these bad things I'm about to describe in this and upcoming papers is not necessarily going to 

happen to you, personally. In the other levels of learning I have clearly stated that it's extremely 

important that we create our own local universe just the way we want it, and look at the bad news as 

something that happens "over there", but with a clear understanding of what's going on. It's not going 

to be part of your reality -- this is crucial, because none of us wants to be caught up in this space 

scenario for real. Some people may think it's exciting, and a break from their own boring life and tell 

themselves that it would maybe be fun to live in the middle of a space opera. No, it wouldn't. And once 

we make such a suggestion for ourselves, we create that timeline and will quite likely find ourselves in 

the middle of something we have a hard time getting out of. So be careful what you wish! This is just 

some good advice before we move on. 

We need to know what is going on, because what we don't know is bound to kill us. We have a 

tendency to think we are the top of the food chain, but we are not. Thousands upon thousands of 

people disappear from the surface of the Earth every year without a trace, and no one knows what 

happened to them. Of course, there can be different reasons for their disappearance, but many of them 

are eaten by the Sirians and their allies. When they are in 3D, they need flesh, and they have gotten a 

taste for humans. Just like we breed cattle to slaughter and eat, so do they with us. And they drink our 

blood like water and even bathe in it to make it fill their pours. It gives them an adrenaline rush, and as 

we know by now, our blood is divine, and they use it to contact the Higher Realms -- the Universe of the 

Goddess. 

I am telling the reader this to make sure you understand that in general, these people are what they 

are. They do not consider themselves evil, as little as we consider ourselves evil when we slaughter 

lambs, cows, chickens etc. We consider them being of lower consciousness, so we think it's okay to kill 

without mercy. They have the same attitude towards us. And they are brought up with the mentality 

that it's either conquer or die; there is no stagnation. Expand your empire, or someone will take it away 

from you! What does that tell us? Well, it's telling us that they are very fearful themselves, and in order 

to conquer their own fear, each individual strives for power, thinking that the higher up in the hierarchy 

they climb, the less they are bound to be used and slaughtered themselves. The respect they have 

created by getting there will, they think, help them survive if they at the same time induce fear in those 

who are beneath them in the hierarchy. They want to create a rumor about themselves that they are 

merciless, so no one dares to challenge them. This is to be a coward to the extreme. Right now, here on 


36



Earth, we are on the bottom of that totem pole, and they feed on our fear. This is the daily life for a 

wolfen-reptilian Sirian. Want to join their Empire? 

Now, to be fair, not all Sirians are like this. Just like people on our planet don't like when they see how 

animal are cruelly slaughtered while screaming in pain, and have a distaste for injustice and war, there 

are Sirians who feel the same about what they are doing. But again, just like with us, there are few who 

dare to stand up against authority, and in their society the consequences would be much more severe 

than here on Earth (in general). Perhaps more like how it would be to go against the President in an 

earthly dictatorship; you would be tortured and killed! So, understandably, there must be very few 

Sirians who dare to take side with humans, unless they flee from their own society and join ours. This 

has happened, and is happening, I'm sure. The best way to do that is to incarnate here with full memory 

of who you are, i.e. you need a specially built human body for that, as we shall see in an upcoming 

paper. 

The consequences from the First Invasion has started to show now. It needs to be understood that 

this invasion did not happen overnight; it has been ongoing for decades, even centuries. Human bodies 

have been altered in order for Sirian consciousness to enter, so that the "job can get done". What job, 

you may think? The job to prepare Earth for the Second Invasion, or Phase II as I call it. It's like when a 

team of janitors, carpenters, architects, and others come before the royal crew to clean up and prepare 

for what the second, "important" group needs to get accomplished, so they can do it without too much 

distractions. 

I see a lot happening right now, and it has been highlighted in the news the last few days. One thing 

the Sirian Overlords fear is the middle class. They are often educated (sometimes quite highly 

educated), capable, and smarter than the Overlords think is comfortable. Therefore, they have wished 

to get rid of the middle class for decades -- I even wrote about it on my first website, Illuminati News, 

fourteen years ago in an article called The Swedish Model[6]. Their goal is to have an Elite and a low paid 

working class and nothing in between. This way, they think the masses will be easier to control, but it 

also makes the system collapse, which is something they want in order to prepare a One World 

Government for the second invader force. This plan, however, is way behind schedule, and may even 

have been temporarily abandoned. Their biggest task right now is to create the Machine Kingdom. That, 

hopefully (from their point of view) will automatically lead to a One World Government later on. 

Yesterday's news carried a lot of information for those who could read between the lines. They were 

talking about how many jobs had disappeared since the recession, and that they are not coming back. In 

earlier recessions (like back in the 1990s), the system took a few years to recover, but eventually the 

jobs returned and things went back to normal. It will not happen this time, the newspapers said. 

Instead, the middle-class jobs are being taken over by computers, robots, and other high-tech! This 

means that the middle-class workers will have no jobs to come back to, and people with too much 

education will rarely get jobs at McDonald's and other places with minimal wage, because they are 

considered over-competent for the job. And we have not seen the end of it yet, they said. So, they have 

effectively destroyed the whole middle-class by exchanging them with technology, which can do the job 

cheaper and with fewer errors. 

This is just one example what the First Invasion has to accomplish in order for Phase II to be as 

smooth as possible. In all fairness, it's not just the Sirians who are working on this; they have lots of 

human minions helping them to accomplish their goals, wittingly and unwittingly, but the ideas are not 

human in origin. There's no use in putting blame on the Sirians, which would give them even more 


37



power, because we are gladly helping them and are therefore just as responsible. No one in their right 

mind, who is capable of looking into the future, and care about future generations, would substitute 

humans with machines and leave millions of people to their fate. Only a very irresponsible human would 

go along with that. So there are many of us who are just as guilty. 

III. Channelers Who Have Opened Up Their Chakras Start Channeling ... Who? 

We have discussed channeling before, both in Level I and Level II, but we are going to take this 

subject quite a step further here in Level III, because some of these channeled entities play a major role 

in the Sirian Agenda. So I am not implying that all channeled material is bad, or the entities evil. 

Much depends on the energies and vibration of the channeler; it's actually crucial! You receive 

information in direct relation to what you are prepared to receive; no more, no less. Also, the quality of 

the information from a specific channeler from a specific source may fluctuate in accordance with the 

channeler's mood or vibration at a certain occasion. So, even if we feel that a channeled source may be 

trustworthy one day, the next the quality of the information may not be so great. Therefore, we need to 

use discernment even with a source we normally trust. 

This is not because the source is intentionally willing to give you disinformation or bend the truth; it's 

because when the channeler is not "with it" and tuned in, other entities who correspond with those 

vibrations may come in and interfere, pretending to be the original source. When we feel that the 

source is giving us correct information, we say that the channel is "clear". The opposite, when a 

channeled source is taken over by negative entities, is called "not clear" in the world of channeling. 

Many make the mistake of abandoning a channeler when they notice dis- or misinformation embedded 

in the messages, when in fact the channeler may just have had a "bad day". But it's also the channeler's 

job to be critical towards the messages he/she receives, or they will lose their credibility, and eventually 

their audience. 

I have spent a lot of time listening to channelers lately, and read channeled material from different 

sources; both those who are considered trustworthy and those who are not. Then I have compared 

what I got to see differences and similarities between the sources in order to find some kind of pattern. 

For example, what do these channeled sources really want? Why are they here? Are they as benevolent 

and helpful as they say they are, or are they just faking it? 

The ones I have listened to are not hoaxes, by the way. All of them are genuine channels and not 

something the channeler is "making up". Although there are such fake mediums as well out there, they 

have a tendency not to be long-lived these days when people are spoiled with the genuine stuff. It's easy 

to distinguish between a human fabrication and a true channel, because the information we receive 

from a true source is way beyond the scope of knowledge of any human being, normally, and the 

questions are answered instantly, without any lags, which would be difficult, if not impossible, to 

fabricate by a human. However, there are also channels that are not originating in the metaphysical 

universe, but are transmitted via satellites by Intelligence Agencies, in order to mislead people. Those, I 

believe, are also relatively easy to distinguish from the real stuff, because the quality is not as high. Still, 

it's harder to distinguish between the military/intelligence sources and the real material than it is 

between a human who is faking it and a real source. But the messages transmitted from the Military 


38



Industrial Complex (MIC[def]) is usually of such that sooner or later one will see through it, especially if 

we are used to listening to channeled material in general. 

Many sources come in all of a sudden in a person's life, sometimes as thoughts that the person feels 

is not their own. Then they can start communicating with that source back and forth, and a channeled 

communication can take place. It's important already in the early stage for the person to set limits and 

boundaries, and for example letting the source know that the channeler is only allowing uplifting 

communication that is for the benefit of him/her and/or the whole planet. It's more common that whole 

collective of star beings are acting as sources in a common effort, than that the source is just one entity, 

from what I have noticed. The energies of such non-physicals can be pretty intense, so it's crucial that 

the channeler is in good mental and physical shape, or the intense energies will eventually break down 

the body, like it has done with so many channelers who have been too open; Carla Rueckert is only one 

example, during the period she channeled RA. Others, in pure excitement, take on more than one 

source -- they may be channeling 5-10 different sources -- and that can be very dangerous to the body, 

first of all, and secondly, the channeler is so wide open that they let any entity in, and it's very easy to be 

deceived. So if you're going to channel, my advice is to feel out the source, say no to it if it doesn't meet 

the guidelines, and wait for the right source to come then. Then stick to one source. 

Normally, when we ask the source a question, they look in the memory bank of the vehicles (the 

channeler), which often go back thousands and thousands of years due to the genetic memories from 

previous life, and they look in the Akashic Records for an answer, in case they don't know it already. 

Bashar (one of these sources) explains it pretty well when he says that the Akashic Records are not, like 

many think, some sort of "library in the sky" where you have to go to find the answer. The Records are 

all around us in the ether; it's there to immediately pick up and use. 

Then apparently, according to some sources (something I was not aware of), such as Harone (who is 

a Gray whom Lyssa Royale channels), these entities are using computer systems to gather their thoughts 

so that they become transmittable. Harone says: 

"Emotions on my end are not necessary to channel, though I am working with physical 

facilitators on my end [Bashar and Sasha] and the three of us are linked into a computer device 

[my emphasis] that will synthesize our thoughts. They provide a balance for my thoughts so that 

the biological vehicle can receive them. Thus they are translated."[7] 

Bashar is of a Gray species as well, while Sasha is supposedly a Pleiadian. In the above case the 

computer was apparently used in order to combine the thoughts of these three very different species (is 

that really necessary?) and make sense of it to humans, but if this is true, it makes me wonder how 

often channeled sources (called only "sources" from here on) use computers when answering questions 

that humans. Also, I said earlier in this paper that it is fairly easy to recognize sources that come from 

the Military Industrial Complex, MIC[def], but if the MIC is using extremely advanced computer systems, 

built or given to them during TTPs[def], and connected to special satellites using ET technology, how easy 

isn't it to copycat even advanced real sources[def]? I haven't had any trouble spotting MIC sources when 

I have plowed through these kinds of material, but who knows, maybe there is more sophisticated 

programs that can fool any of us and the lower quality MIC transmitters are only there to make us 

believe that this is the best they can do. If this is the case, we can only go on intuition and connect the 

dots to our best abilities. 


39



IV. Dimensions and Densities According to Channeled Sources 

This is a very confusing subject for people who decide to look into channeling, because different 

sources have different dimension and density systems that they are using to get across their message. 

Mainstream science almost always uses the term dimension when speaking of different aspects of the 

universe. With string theory being quite popular these days in quantum physics, we learn that the 

universe consists of 11 dimensions, which are all very, very tiny -- like "strings" (thus "string theory"). 

However, they don't normally speak of densities. 

In metaphysics we usually speak of densities; more often so than of dimensions. Wherein this, the 

confusion lies. In reality, our universe consists of both dimensions and densities, like I described in Level 

II: "Metaphysical Paper #2: Creation of Universes", June 15, 2012, Rev. Dec. 12, 2012. The universe 

consists of a certain number of dimensions, and between these dimensions we have the densities, which 

are the gradual change in vibration between dimension A and dimension B, while where reaching for 

one while being in the other. It can most easily be illustrated like in figure 3 below: 

Diagram 1: A simple diagram, showing Dimensions and Densities. 

Here we see how we move from one density to the next before we reach the next dimension. This 

diagram is based upon the theory of 8 densities (an octave), where the 8th density is the next 

dimension. So this simple diagram can basically be read in two different ways. One way would be to look 

at we humans living in the 3rd Dimension, and depending on our awareness level, we operate in any of 

Density 1-7 within the 3rd Dimension. We could perhaps say that plants operate in Density 1, while 

animals in general operate in Density 2. We humans -- again, in general -- operate in Density 3, but in 

reality exist in Densities 3-7 as long as we are still stuck in the 3rd Dimension. A more aware human 

would, according to this diagram, operate closer to Density 7, but we all fluctuate between the densities 

depending on if we have a "good day" or a "bad day", so to speak. Even the most aware person 

sometimes operate in Density 3, particularly when he or she is at a work place which focuses on tasks 

more in line with 3rd Density vibrations, just to later in the day, when the person comes home and 

attends to their favorite spiritual exercise fly up to Density 6 or 7 again. (As a side note, I need to point 

out that although we are generally considered to live in the 3rd Dimension, most scientists -- rogue or 

mainstream -- would add a 4th Dimension to that, where the 4th Dimension is time. This is of course 

correct, but confuses the matter even more, because many metaphysical researchers use the 4th 

Dimension as the dimension where the "bad ETs" dwell. I wouldn't say that these so-called "bad ETs", 


40



shapeshifting reptilians or otherwise, live in the pure "time dimension" (if people like David Icke are 

correct). And I don't think that's what these researchers intend to say either. So, as you can see, the 

matter is quite complicated). 

A second way of looking at Diagram 1 would be to interpret the 7 densities like we interpreted 

dimensions in the previous paragraph. In this case, we would live in the 3rd Density, as shown in the 

diagram. When the sources talk about ascension, they speak about moving from the 3rd Density, in 

which we currently dwell, up to the 4th, or even to the 5th, depending on whom we listen to. Then, 

when we reach the 7th Density, we have, together with our soul group (usually our species, such as 

humankind in our case), transformed into a collective complex almost only consisting of light. Some, like 

the Ra collective, say that after the 7th Density, we merge with All That Is (God or the Goddess) and 

have thus completed an "Octave"; i.e. we have, as a body/spirit/mind complex transformed into a star. 

After that, we start our journey into the next octave of densities, and so it goes on for all infinity, the 

way the Ra body/spirit/mind complex (BSMC[def] from now on) have understood it. Dimension B in the 

diagram will thus work as the octave, or the 8th Density, and Dimension A will be the fulfillment of the 

previous Octave. 

There is yet another way of looking at densities. This obvious point of view is too often overlooked. If 

you are in a room, there are several densities existing in that room at the same time, and you perceive 

all these densities simultaneously. In fig. 3 you can see a typical living room with a few things in it. The 

pillows on the couch, for example, are lighter than the couch itself, and is therefore of a lower density 

than the couch. The couch would be considered of higher density than the pillows, but in metaphysics 

we don't measure the weight of on object, but the gain of awareness and consciousness to the soul. 

Hence, we see the soul as becoming "heavier" the higher up the densities we move, and thus we move 

from lower densities to higher. But the furniture in a room is nonetheless another example of densities, 

and that we live in different densities throughout the day, depending on the space we're in. 

Figure 3. A living room, where all the things have different densities. 

In the RA material (http://lawofone.info/), the term "density" is quite satisfactory explained, 

however. It is not literal, but an analogue. Densities in metaphysics is often another word for 

dimensions. Here is the direct explanation, word by word, and the letters and numbers within 

parentheses, e.g. (B2, 15) means the book "Law of One, Book 2, Session 15): 


41



"...density of consciousness - or density of vibration (B4, 28). Frequently used by Ra as an analog 

to what is currently thought of as “dimensions” in the Universe. The densities are organized into 

an eight-fold “octave” system, analogous to the musical octave and the visual light spectrum. 

Therefore the higher the density, the higher the level of consciousness." 

"Harvest = the process whereby a soul and / or planet “Graduates” from one density to the next. 

Occurs naturally as a planetary system traverses through different areas of energy density in the 

galaxy, thus creating dimensional shifts. These shifts occur in precise, measurable cycles of time. 

So it has to do with planetary shifts; when a planet goes from one density/dimension to another. This 

is, according to the source, when the beings living there have had to make a choice whether they want 

to follow Earth on her journey to the 4th Density, or if they want to stay in the 3rd. If we choose the 

former, we need to be 51% STO (Service-To-Others) to graduate, or we won't vibrate on the same level 

as the planet, and therefore not qualify. Another option is to be 95% or more negative, and if we are, we 

apparently vibrate on Earth's 4th Density vibration as well, but in the negative field (some Powers That 

Be qualify for this option). In the latter case where we choose to continue being in 3D, we need to be 

moved away from Earth, because we don't vibrate on her new, higher frequency. We will be 

transported, by RA and others, to another 3D planet somewhere in the universe. Those who are "evil", 

such as the Global Elite, but are still less than 95% evil (Service-to-Self [STS]), will follow those 3D 

humans to the new planet and continue to control them there. Some say that the 4th Density is the last 

density for Earth, and when it will be time for her to ascend again, she won't be able to, and those who 

graduate from 4th to 5th Density have to be moved. Others say that Earth will ascend all the way up to 

7th Density. 

In other words, a soul group, such as humanity, has 75,000 years in 3rd Density to decide whether 

they want to ascend with the planet they live on, or start all over on another planet until they are ready 

to ascend. And herein lies the difference and the confusion people may have felt regarding densities and 

dimensions! The sources are only talking about ascension together with the planet you're born on, while 

if you leave the planet and go somewhere else in the universe, this density concept is no longer valid. 

Well off planet, you live in a universe where you are free to explore almost all densities and dimensions. 

I say almost, because there are, I believe, some upper dimensions of the KHAA which we need approval 

to enter, more based on character than evolution, from what I understand. These higher realms, which 

Anton Parks calls The Angal are guarded by the Orion Empire. So, if you are already of 4th Density, to 

continue living in that density if you decide to leave Earth and go to another planet, you need to find a 

4th Density planet in order to keep your vibration intact. If you incarnate on another 3D world, your 

vibrations will adjust to the lower realms of the 3rd. But if you're invited to visit a 3D world, you do so in 

spirit (nano-travel), or use a genetically engineered body which can live in 3rd Density. 

I personally think that the first example, which is presented in Diagram 1, is much closer to how the 

universe is perceived by most beings; much closer to how it really works, but there are not many 

sources who use that construct. Most of them use the second way of looking at. Then (again to make 

matters more complex), different sources use different amount of densities in their teachings. RA, like I 

said, use Octaves (7 densities, where the 8th is the beginning of a new Octave, very similar to the 

western musical scale, C-D-E-F-G-A-B-C (or DO-RE-MI-FA-SO-LA-SI [or TI]-DO), where the second C (DO) 

is the same note as the first C (DO), only one octave higher, i.e. it vibrates on a much higher frequency 

than the lower C. It's a good allegory to use the musical scale, as a matter of fact, even if people are not 

musically inclined, because it explains things quite easily. On a piano, for example, if you play a musical 


42



scale from a lower C to an upper C, you can hear, even if you're not a musician, how the notes go higher 

and higher in frequency and appear less dense to the listener. 

Lastly, before we move on, let me continue on my thought from an earlier paragraph. I said that RA is 

using Octaves to explain ascension, but there are those, like the Guardian Alliance (data streamed by 

A'shayana Deanne, aka Ana Hayes) who use 15 densities in their ascension process. Other common 

numbers are 11 and 12. 

So why is there such a difference between sources? If they are living in the same universe, how can 

there be different amounts of densities or dimensions depending on whom you ask? I don't know if 

anybody has ever asked a source this question, which is unfortunate, because it would take off a lot of 

confusion on the subject, if the answer is reliable that is. 

However, there is a good explanation for this; there are no set densities, and that's the bottom line of 

it. You can't say in all honesty that now you jumped from Density 3 to Density 4. It's arbitrary at best. 

When we listen to a source, it sounds like there is a line drawn in the sand, saying that here is the 3rd 

Density, and if you cross this line you are in the 4th. That's not accurate and quite misleading. Densities, 

like everything else in the universe/Multiverse, are fluid, which means that they interact with each 

other. The 3rd interact and blend with the 4th and vice versa. Awareness and consciousness in a being 

increased incrementally and no one is jumping from one density to another from one day to the other. 

Things change and vibrations increase little by little, and we are able to perceive realities that previously 

were occluded. We may be able to zoom in and out of the "other world", which is the KHAA, or the 96%, 

which we talked a lot about in Level II (please review if these concepts have become vague in memory, 

or look them up in the dictionary for a faster review). Eventually we will be able to travel in our lightbodies 

(avatars) to other dimensions and densities; both in the KHAA and in the 4% universe, while we 

still are grounded here on Earth in our much denser, physical 3 (or 4) dimensional bodies. The 3rd 

Dimension (or the 3rd Density, depending on which concept we use) is the dimension of matter. This is 

where non-physicals incarnate when they want to experience a period of time in a denser environment; 

basically for learning lessons. It shouldn't be a big deal, and it should actually be fun and very 

interesting, but in our case we have had our version of 3D "locked in" by the Sirian Alliance when they 

took over the planet, which means that souls who incarnate here get stuck in a loop of seemingly 

endless cycles of reincarnation, which this ET alliance has created. It is certainly not meant to be this 

way, but here we are, stuck for eons in the grip of an alien invader force. So the way we experience 3D 

here on Earth is an exception rather than a rule, or is at least meant to be. I will talk more about this in a 

later paper, where I show that the Sirians have set this up even smarter than we may have thought. If 

they would be put on trial for what they've done, they may, incredibly enough, get away with their 

crimes. They are "smooth criminals" to borrow a term from a Michael Jackson song. They have set it up 

in a way that they can show that whatever we humans have experienced here on Earth in form of 

negativity, pain, and suffering, is not "their fault", because we choose to experience it! This is why some 

say that it's a co-creation. We humans, wittingly or unwittingly, have agreed to pretty much everything 

we have been subjected to. 

Now, we are not supposed to reincarnate, but to leave a reality whenever we want to -- it should be a 

choice. Incredibly enough, as I have found out through my new research, not even the reincarnation 

process can be blamed on the SA (Sirian Alliance) -- it's totally "voluntarily"; it's just that we humans 

don't know it. So we choose to reincarnate here over and over, not even knowing that we don't have to! 

This is both bad news and good news at the same time, because once we've learned that, we can break 

the cycle of reincarnation! And I will tell you how in a later paper. 


43



I hope the reader is not too confused after this "lesson" in dimensions and densities. My hope is that 

it is actually sorting things out for those who have had problems understanding these concepts. 

V. RA and the Different Light-Bodies 

In Level II we talked a lot about avatars[def]. This is not a new concept here on Earth, however. It was 

known by Pythagoras already in the antique how it is possible for a human body to leave his/her 

physical 3D body and explore the universe in one of our light-bodies (avatars). In a book from 1979 

about Pythagoras' life, it is talking about it in some detail. I watched a video where Professor Roger Weir 

from Shared Presence Foundation read out loud from this book, describing the exact thing I have been 

talking about here to quite some extent[8]. Further, Pythagoras was talking about that life in the 

universe is multidimensional, and most beings living out there in the Multiverse are non-physicals, in our 

terms. He said that it was the norm rather than an exception, and that we humans who are living here in 

biological, physical bodies are the awkward ones, not the other way around. 

Figure 4. Pythagoras. 

So this was known during the antique, and this knowledge, and more, which Pythagoras inhabited 

made him to some kind of Buddha or Christ figure of his time. This knowledge, of course, was later 

suppressed by the mainstream religion and the Catholic Church, and people in Greece and elsewhere 

went pretty much back to sleep again. 

Our metaphysical sources, however, speak a lot about light-bodies, but for some odd reason they are 

not very keen on mentioning that you can use them for space travel while you are alive here on Earth. 

The RA Material, for example, talks about seven light-bodies, one for each density, but nothing about 

space travel. 

When I discuss avatars, the light-bodies are the avatars, but the way I understand it is this: each Fire 

in our body is a spark of the Divine, coming directly from the Mother Goddess. All these Fires are not 

physical per se, but are making up the shape of the physical, biological body. The Fires in themselves are 

microscopic in size, but they are all connected with each other on a super subquantum level and 


44



communicate with each other. All the Fires in the body make up the whole, not only a physical whole, 

but also a metaphysical whole. This metaphysical whole is creating one or more light-bodies around the 

physical body (e.g. we have a light-body/avatar which is the main light-body we are supposed to use in 

nano-travel [more about that here below]. Another body is the emotional body). In my previous 

diagrams I drew one avatar/light-body around the physical body to simplify it at that point, wishing to 

wait with describing the bigger picture until we get into this section about channeling. 

We have an enormous amount of Fires in our body, and if each Fire is a part of the whole, it also has 

the imprint of the whole inside of it. So, let's say we want to nano-travel to another galaxy. We can then 

stay here in our physical bodies and send out one or more of these Fires to travel long distance in almost 

no time at all; all it takes is a thought. Arriving at the destiny, this Fire (or a combination of Fires) can 

then manifest in a light-body by the intention of these Fires. Also, the Fires can decide what shape and 

form they want this light-body/avatar to take, and we have shapeshifting explained right there. With 

some practice, we can make it look and behave very physical. These Fires, who are part of the Whole, 

communicate back and forth to the soul and the body here on Earth, and the experience will be that we 

are actually travelling through space and will experience everything in the distant galaxy just as real as if 

we would travel there in a nuts and bolts spacecraft in our biological bodies. 

Today's humans are still not there in their development so they can do that in full capacity (some 

people can do it to a certain extent, and others through technology), because we have been taught that 

this is fantasy at best and witchcraft at its worst. Also, we are being subjected to low frequency 

bombardment on a cellular level, and therefore it is impossible to nano-travel until we raise our 

vibration above what is preset as the norm for the human mass consciousness. Therefore -- ignorant as 

we are -- when we depart from our physical bodies at body death in our light-bodies, which are made up 

of equally ignorant Fires, we can see where a certain soul was in her development here on Earth. If we 

look at a light-body that is separating from a deceased biological body, we would see it has a similar 

shape as the physical body, but is "glowing" in a certain color, or more often, vaguely shifts colors back 

and forth. This is because there is more than one light-body all merged into one -- or rather, that's what 

it looks like. Now, each range of vibration has its corresponding color, so depending on your awareness 

level, your light-body will have a certain predominant color, which we will go into more details about in 

a minute (we also call this aura). That's why different discarnate souls who visit us may seem to have 

one predominant color, although they may sometimes shift between several colors, almost like a 

Christmas tree, but not as dominant. 

When we discuss the phenomenon of light-bodies in relation to our metaphysical sources, I'm going 

to use the Ra Material as a model, because it describes what other sources touch on pretty well. But 

before we do so, I want to remove another confusion that I'm sure has bothered many metaphysical 

truthseekers. It has to do with the complexity of densities again. The RA Material speaks of seven lightbodies, 

one for each density, in a sense that it sounds like when you "jump" from one density to another 

because you have reached that level of awareness, not only the color of your light-body changes, but a 

totally different light-body gets activated! According to my research, this is not what happens. The way I 

see it is that there is one light-body (which I call avatar), and that will certainly change color according to 

your awareness level (psychics see that in auras all the time), and your emotional body is somewhat 

merged with this avatar (this is why psychics can see wounded parts of your aura and your chakras, and 

can read your emotional state). Although this subject with light-bodies in relation to the sources is not 

crucial for what I am wanting to get across regarding these entities, I think it's good to know, and if it 

can shed some light (no pun intended) on an otherwise confusing subject, I believe it's worth bringing 

up. 


45



So, let's go over to the Ra Material[9]. I am aware of that the quality of the answer you get from the 

sources depends on how you formulate and address the question, I definitely get the impression that 

the Ra collective are talking about seven different light-bodies, and not one body shifting color. I do not 

agree with ascension through densities in the way they and many channeled sources explain it, so I find 

some of this information inaccurate and misleading, but for the purpose of this and upcoming papers, 

it's irrelevant what I think. I am only relaying information as it is presented by others (the 

vehicles/channelers and the entities). I will, however, wedge in a few comments every now and then; I 

can't help myself. 

Although, like I explained earlier in this paper, different sources use a different amount of densities in 

their teachings, I am here going to concentrate on, and mostly stay with, RA's eight densities, or the 

Octave, as this seems to be more commonly used, and also, in some sense, is more accurate according 

to my own research. If we use 12 or 15 densities, the following information is not relevant. 

According to RA, the densities are as follows: 

1st Density: fire, air, earth and water; equivalent to 4 of the 5 elements (where the 5th is 

aether/ether). This is the Red Ray Density, corresponding to what they call the Red Ray Body. 

2nd Density: consists of animals, trees, minerals, (and plants). I put plants within parentheses, 

because they do belong to the 2nd Density; however, only the three first mentioned are 

"enspirited", according to RA. They are not outright saying that plants are not, but they are only 

mentioning the first three as being inhabited by spirits, which is not accurate. 

The 2nd Density lasted for 4.6 billion years here on Earth. The color of the light-body of this 

density is orange, the Orange Ray Body. 

3rd Density: Homo sapiens sapiens ("The Thinking Man"). This is the density of "selfawareness". 

Not until 3rd Density is reached, a being is self-aware (an animal is not). The purpose 

of the 3rd Density is not to gain knowledge and wisdom, but to learn the ways of love. This 

density normally lasts for 75,000 years, followed by the Great Harvest. If the 3rd Density beings 

can't be harvested at that point, they will be transferred to another planet and start the cycle all 

over again for another 75,000 years period. The time for the Great Harvest is now. The light-body 

of the 3rd Density is the Yellow Ray Body. 

4th Density: this is the density of compassion and understanding. Selves are not hidden to 

other selves, and communication is done telepathically. Not until here are you supposed to get 

the understanding that we truthseekers are looking for. In 4D you are "denser in consciousness" 

than the 3D body, and this is an important statement from RA, because it explains why they 

consider each ascension process as a rise in density. The body the 4th Density beings are using is 

less dense than the 3rd Density, however. We see here that the densities according to channeled 

sources are not the same as dimensions used by traditional science, or 4th Density would have 

been that of time. The 4th Density is the density where the soul group starts acting more like 

what RA and others call a Social Memory Complex, which is when people in the soul group start 

acting more like one with each other. The group becomes more important and everybody's 

thoughts start to slowly merge into becoming One with the Creator. The beings of 4th Density 

choose to be invisible to 3rd Density beings like ourselves, but can be visible if they choose. This is 


46



why those who choose the negative path (see next paragraph) are able to show themselves to us 

in 3D, and where information like that of David Icke comes from, that the evil Reptilians are of 

"lower 4th Density", or 4th Density Negative. 

The Harvest into 4th Density is both of negative and positive nature depending on if the person is 

oriented towards service-to-self (STS) or service-to-others (STO). To qualify for ascension into 4th Density 

Positive you need to be 51% STO or more. To qualify for 4th Density Negative you have to be 95% or 

more STS. Those in between will stay in 3D, but will be transported to another 3D planet due to that 

Earth is becoming a 4D planet herself. Your lifespan in the 4th Density body is approximately 90,000 

years, and the density itself lasts for about 30 million years(!), all counted from our perspective or time. 

The 4th Density uses a Green Ray Body. According to RA, it's the awareness of all as the One Creator that 

opens the Green Ray center[10]; i.e. the awareness of that we are all One opens up this center, which 

steers the soul in the direction towards the 4th Density. 

5th Density: the density of wisdom. It's an extremely "free" density, and we can choose 

whether we want to learn as an individual or as a Social Memory Complex. It's about compassion 

leading to wisdom (an extreme focus on the heart center). To graduate to this density you need 

to accept the honor and duty of the Law of One (which means that we are all One with the 

Creator, and we are all working towards becoming One with It again (in the cosmology of RA, God 

has no gender, and gender ceases to exist in the 7th Density). This density, just like the 4th, 

accepts both positive and negative Harvest, so there are still negatively oriented beings living 

here, choosing the negative path to serve the Creator in the learning process of knowing Itself. 

Their physical appearance is very similar to ours, so they could come to Earth and pass 

themselves off as humans. Also, in the Universe of RA, the only really negative beings who are 

visiting Earth in the "physical" are the "Orions". Many are supposedly from the 5th Density, but 

some also from the 4th Negative. (There is a reason why RA is blaming the Orion Group for 

interfering with our development, and it will be explained under its own section later in this 

paper). The 5th Density is extremely white in vibration, according to RA, but uses a Blue Ray Body. 

6th Density: RA says: "This quality relates to the blending into wisdom of the compassion 

learned in 4th density."[11] This is the density the Ra Social Memory Complex is currently in, 

about to be harvested into the 7th Density. However, just like Marciniak's Pleiadians, RA needed 

to revisit humankind and did so through channeling. Both the Pleiadians and RA have a history 

with tampering with our evolution, and the results were negative. According to RA, their 

intention was good (they claim they were the ones building the Egyptian pyramids), but by 

interfering with us in their physical, the result was not what they anticipated, so they left. They 

actually visited us more than once, as we shall see. Now, before they can go to the 7th Density, 

they have to have a "clean record" and make up for negative results from actions in the past, or 

they won't be able to proceed. The Pleiadians present a slightly different scenario for us, but 

there are also a lot of similarities. The Pleiadians worked with the SA[def] already from the 

beginning when Lord ENLIL and his warriors came here and chased the Aryans (Orions) away, 

500,000 years ago, and now they have to make up for the consequences, or they won't be able to 

evolve from where they are (in our future). (From here on, I will call the Aryans Orions, because 

of the misunderstanding it created for some readers, who confused the Aryans/Orions with the 

Aryan race which Hitler supported and tried to mass produce during World War II). 


47



So it seems like these entities, or Social Memory Complexes, can get away with not taking 

responsibility for their actions for quite some time, but at one point in their development 

(evolution), they need to stop what they're doing and go back in time and correct their 

"mistakes". If this is true, this is something you and I need to think about as well. In an upcoming 

paper I am going to bring up a quite interesting future potential scenario which involves 

humankind as a spacefaring species. The scenario has been very real for the Pleiadians as it were. 

In the 6th Density, negative and the positive (darkness and light) merge into one positive Social 

Memory Complex and service-to-self does no longer exist. Everything is group thinking and a 

matter of using the compassion learned in 4th Density and merging that with the wisdom gained 

in the 5th Density to become a whole soul group, with one goal, which is to blend together with 

All There Is, or the One Creator in Density 7. The light-body is a Indigo Ray Body. (The reader has 

probably noticed that the color of the ray-bodies are the same as that of the rainbow, or the light 

spectrum. According to science, the more something moves towards the blue, indigo, and violet 

colors of the spectrum, the warmer/hotter that something becomes. The same principle goes for 

stars. However, this is somewhat misleading, because we see the universe from a 3D manipulated 

4% universe perspective, while those who live in, and have access to the KHAA/VOID may look at 

the universe totally differently. In Level II I tried to explain this with the allegory of a spider web, 

and that is probably pretty close to how multidimensional, interdimensional non-physicals see 

the universe. It's a myriad of galactic and intergalactic "highways", which are the web strings in 

the spider web). 

7th Density: the "completed being"; the One Creator knowing Itself through the Social 

Memory Complex ascending from Density 6, and merge with the Creator (I would say that this is 

equivalent with a soul group igniting and becoming a star). Polarity does no longer exist and 

everything is a constant "now". In the 6th Density, Social Memory Complexes are working directly 

with their "teachers" to complete the Octave. Due to that RA is "only" a 6th Density Complex, 

some of the 7th Density is dwelled in mystery, and they don't know exactly what will happen. 

Intelligent Infinity turns to Intelligent Energy from the 8th Density. The 7th Density body is the 

Violet Ray Body. 

8th Density: the tipping point. Here is where one Octave ends and a new Octave begins. Very 

little is known about this density, says RA, but the logical process is that it's a fast density where 

life starts all over in the 1st Density of a new, higher Octave, where the learning process is 100% 

unknown to RA. There is no light-body assigned to this density. 

This structure, with a few modifications, is representative for most sources; that's what we are 

taught. One thing most of them have in common as well is the Harvest. Everything in their teachings is 

pointing in the direction of the harvesting of souls. 

I also found a reference in the RA Material directly to the different light-bodies, which is more 

detailed and excludes the density comparison. I'd like to share that as well. 

I. THE RED-RAY BODY 

RA: The red-ray is your chemical body. However, it is not the body which you have as clothing in 

the physical. It is the unconstructed material of the body, the elemental body without form. This 

basic unformed material body is important to understand for there are healings which may be 

carried out by the simple understanding of the elements present in the physical vehicle. (B2, 114) 


48



II. THE ORANGE RAY BODY 

RA: This is the physical body complex. It is still not the body you inhabit. but rather the body 

formed without self-awareness, the body in the womb before the spirit/mind complex enters. 

This body may live without the inhabitation of the mind and spirit complexes, but seldom does so. 

(B2, 114) 

III. THE YELLOW RAY BODY 

RA: (This) is your physical vehicle which you know of at this time and in which you experience 

catalyst. 

IV. THE GREEN-RAY BODY 

RA: This is a lighter body packed more densely with life. It is the body that is seen in séance when 

what you call ectoplasm is furnished. Some call it the astral body. Others have called it the etheric 

body, but this is not correct in the sense that the etheric body is that body of gateway wherein 

intelligent energy is able to mold the mind/body/spirit complex. (B2, 115) 

V. THE BLUE-RAY BODY OR LIGHTBODY 

RA: The light body or blue-ray body may be called the devachanic body. There are many other 

names for this body especially in your so-called Indian Sutras or writings, for there are those 

among these peoples which have explored these regions and understand the various types of 

devachanic bodies. There are many, many types of bodies in each density, much like your own. 

(B2, 115) 

RA: There is always some difficulty in penetrating blue primary energy for it requires that which 

your people have in great paucity (i.e., scarcity); that is, honesty. Blue ray is the ray of free 

communication with self and with other-self . (B2, 121) 

VI. THE INDIGO-RAY BODY 

RA: This is what we choose to call the etheric body. It is the gateway body. You may only see this 

body as that of light as it may mold itself as it desires. (B2, 116) [This is clearly the body which 

best corresponds with what I call the Avatar. (Wes' comment).] 

RA: This is the first body that activates itself upon death. It is the “form-maker” (or what the 

Egyptians referred to as “Ka.”) This body remains until understanding has been gained by the 

mind/body/spirit complex. Then a body of another ray (e.g. green) is activated. (B2, 116) 

RA: This indigo body, being intelligent energy, is able to offer the newly dead, as you would term 

it, a soul perspective and a place from which to view the experience most recently manifested. 

(B2, 117) 

VII. THE VIOLET RAY BODY 

RA: You may call this the Buddha body or that body which is complete. Within it lies a sense of 

wholeness which is extremely close to unity with all that there is. (B2, 115) 

RA: This may be seen to be manifested by a sense of the consecrate or hallowed nature of 

everyday creations and activities. (B2, 121) 


49



Now, to end this section with light-bodies, RA is claiming that we all possess these 7 light- or raybodies 

as they call them, but only the one we are using for the specific density we are in is activated. 

However, it sounds like we are able to also activate the ray-bodies that are beneath the level we're at. 

This can be seen as RA technically telling us that this is what we call shapeshifting. 

I talked to another metaphysical researcher and truthseeker who is very much into channeling, and is 

leading a well-known channeling group in California. I discussed the Harvest and the limitation of 

awareness the idea of densities is. He agreed with me in sum, but said that the use of densities in the 

fashion our sources do is just so people can easier understand the concept of ascension and the raising 

of frequencies. That was his way of making sense of it. I can see where he's coming from, but I think that 

despite the sometimes complex language in the RA Material, it is quite straight forward on the density 

subject, and there is not much room for interpretation. He also mentioned that the 7 densities could 

very well directly correspond to the seven chakras... 

Before we move on to the next paper, I want to talk a little bit more about the RA Material in general, 

in addition to their density system and the way they look at light-bodies. My intention is to compare 

different channeled sources in the next paper with a purpose to figure out whether these entities are 

here in our best interest, in their best interest, in a shared best interest, or with the intention to harm 

us. I can tell the reader already now that it's a mix of it all, but it is obvious that a lot of them are here 

with the same motivation, and it has to do with the harvest of souls! Whether this is benevolent or not 

is something we shall discuss, but is ultimately up to the reader to decide. 

RA visited Earth 18,000 years ago for the first time in the physical. At that time they were a 6th 

Density civilization living on Venus. They were half etheric. They had the ability to nano-travel (they call 

it that they traveled with their thoughts), and their bodies were tall, slender, and shining with a golden 

"glow" to them. However, when they visited Earth, they came in bell-shaped spaceships which were 

crystal-powered[12]. These spacecraft could be seen over Egypt when they arrived, but the Egyptians 

did not pay much notice to them, according to RA, because at that time, Earth was visited by many ET 

civilizations, and vessels in the sky was an almost daily event. 

Dr. Don Elkins, who mostly came up with the questions and was the one who asked them in the RA 

Sessions, once asked RA which ETs use physical spaceships and who are not, and just like I explained in 

Level II, advanced beings don't need them. Here are their comments: 

"For the most part those coming from distant points do not need craft as you know them. The 

question requires understanding you do not possess. We shall attempt to state what can be 

stated. There are a few 3rd density entities (for example, those from Sirius) who have learned 

how to use craft to travel between star systems while experiencing the limitations you now 

understand, namely very long flight times. (Book B, Session 3, Question 7, or B3, 7) 

4th, 5th and 6th density entities use one of two other means. 

(1) One type of craft can arrive without any time lapse at all, using a slingshot gravitic light 

effect. (B3, 7) 

(2) The other type is a type of experience (rather than a craft). 

These entities have learned the necessary disciplines enabling them to view the universe as 

one being and, therefore, are able to proceed from one location to another by thought alone, 


50



materializing the necessary craft, if you will, to enclose the light body of the entity. (B3, 7) 

In 6th density there are virtually no entities which any longer use outer technology for travel or 

communication." (B3, 13) 

I have talked a lot about becoming multi-d in our bodies and being able to travel with our thoughts 

and bring our light-body/avatar with us instead of using nuts and bolts spaceships (or even 

interdimensional spaceships). According to RA that happens in upper 5th Density and the 6th. If that is 

the case, we are heading towards 5th and 6th Density, not the 4th, because we are going to learn how 

to nano-travel. 

Figure 5. The last ice-age, 18,000 years ago, when the RA people first visited Earth. 

18,000 years ago was the middle of the last ice-age (fig. 5), which at that time only affected the 

northern and the southern hemispheres; the middle part of the world was not under the icecap at all, 

but the temperature was colder than now. 

According to RA themselves, 18,000 years ago when they visited both Egypt and Atlantis, aid was 

given to the latter, but not the former. They found that the people of Egypt were quite selfcontradictory 

when came to religion, and many people chose to worship the hawk-headed Sun god, 

Horus. The RA people say they never come unless they are called for, and both 18,000 and 11,000 years 

ago there was a call for them to come and assist. However, on their first visit, due to the contradiction 

with religious beliefs, RA didn't think it was appropriate for them to heed the call for their vibration, so 

they left without taking action. 

Next time they visited was 11,000 years ago. We know, because RA has admitted to it, that they had 

problems with establishing certain earthly time periods and get them right, so 11,000 years ago may be 

only slightly correct, and 11,000 years ago would have been approximately the time of the Great Deluge. 


51



Anyway, they say that at this time they had more luck when they visited Egypt, and there were those 

who now were quite gung-ho on the Law of One. Another 6th Density group visited South America at 

the same time. 

This is what RA said about the 11,000 years ago visit: 

"We are those of the Confederation who eleven thousand of your years ago came to two of 

your planetary cultures which were at that time closely in touch with the creation of the One 

Creator. It was our naïve belief that we could teach/learn by direct contact and the free will 

distortions of individual feeling or personality were in no danger, we thought, of being disturbed 

as these cultures were already closely aligned with a[n] all-embracing belief in the live-ness or 

consciousness of all. We came and were welcomed by the peoples whom we wished to serve. We 

attempted to aid them in technical ways having to do with the healing of mind/body/spirit 

complex distortions through the use of the crystal, appropriate to the distortion, placed within a 

certain appropriate series of ratios of time/space material. Thus were the pyramids created. 

We found that the technology was reserved largely for those with the effectual mind/body 

distortion of power. This was not intended by the Law of One. We left your peoples. The group 

that was to work with those in the area of South America, as you call that portion of your sphere, 

gave up not so easily. They returned. We did not. However, we have never left your vibration due 

to our responsibility for the changes in consciousness we had first caused and then found 

distorted in ways not relegated to the Law of One. We attempted to contact the rulers of the land 

to which we had come, that land which you call Egypt, or in some areas, the Holy Land. 

In the Eighteenth Dynasty, as it is known in your records of space/time distortions, we were 

able to contact a pharaoh, as you would call him. The man was small in life-experience on your 

plane and was a… what this instrument would call, Wanderer. Thus, this mind/body/spirit 

complex received our communication distortions and was able to blend his distortions with our 

own. This young entity had been given a vibratory complex of sound which vibrated in honor of a 

prosperous god, as this mind/body complex, which we call instrument for convenience, would call 

“Ammon.” The entity decided that this name, being in honor of one among many gods, was not 

acceptable for inclusion in his vibratory sound complex. Thus, he changed his name to one which 

honored the sun disc. This distortion, called “Aten,” was a close distortion to our reality as we 

understand our own nature of mind/body/spirit complex distortion. However, it does not come 

totally into alignment with the intended teach/learning which was sent. This entity, Akhenaten, 

became convinced that the vibration of One was the true spiritual vibration and thus decreed the 

Law of One. 

However, this entity’s beliefs were accepted by very few. His priests gave lip service only, 

without the spiritual distortion towards seeking. The peoples continued in their beliefs. When this 

entity was no longer in this density, again the polarized beliefs in the many gods came into their 

own and continued so until the one known as Muhammad delivered the peoples into a more 

intelligible distortion of mind/body/spirit relationships." [13] 

So the RA group claims to be the one who created the Great Pyramids, something which Sitchin 

devoted to Lord Ningishzidda, also known as Thoth, ENKI's son. So, we have a contradiction here, unless 

RA actually come from either Orion or the Sirian Alliance. Well, they say they developed on Venus and 

are a very old race in our terms. We know there are flaws in Sitchin's work, so that could be one 


52



explanation, but there is something with the planet Venus that is still dwelled in mystery. There are lots 

of contradictions regarding our neighboring planet, and many stories passed around, both on the 

Internet and in books; definitely something humanity could gain knowledge from if someone wants to 

take time to research it. 

Figure 6. Pharaoh Akhenaten, reigned approx. 1353-1336 BC. 

RA talks more about the pyramids in another session, where they also tell us they are having 

difficulties with the timeline, but they are giving us some valuable information as of when the pyramids 

were built: 

"Approximately eleven thousand [11,000] of your years ago we entered, by thought-form, 

your— we correct this instrument. We sometimes have difficulty due to low vitality. 

Approximately eight five zero zero [8,500] years ago, having considered these concepts carefully, 

we returned, never having left in thought, to the thought-form areas of your vibrational planetary 

complex and considered for some of your years, as you measure time, how to appropriately build 

these structures. 

The first, the Great Pyramid, was formed approximately six thousand [6,000] of your years ago. 

Then, in sequence, after this performing by thought of the building or architecture of the Great 


53



Pyramid using the more, shall we say, local or earthly material rather than thought-form material 

to build other pyramidical structures. This continued for approximately fifteen hundred [1,500] of 

your years."[14] 

The time frame when the pyramids were built has always been subject to controversy, and the 

Pleiadians claim that they are much older than what RA are saying here. The Pleiadians also have 

another story about how they were built, and that they were actually inserted from vertical time with 

sound frequencies, as I explained in Level II. But this is about the teachings of different channeled 

sources, so some information will contradict each other while other information will coincide. 

Of course, during all these visits[15], the SA had a stronghold over our planet, and these were the 

Men of Power that the RA people are talking about. We know that Pharaoh Akhenaten was certainly a 

rebel of his time. He refused to worship several gods, which otherwise was the standard in Egypt when 

he lived (and these deities were Sirian "gods", of course), and instead decided that there is only one 

God. The project failed, because no one, except perhaps the pharaoh and his wife, Nefertiti, endorsed 

the One God Religion, or the Law of One. When Akhenaten died, the Egyptians went back to 

worshipping the Sirian deities again. Interestingly enough, RA also claim to have a finger in Muhammad's 

revelation. I can't help it, but it appears to me that RA is a more evolved faction of the Sirians, but I 

could be wrong. There are contradictions that we have to live with, but again, Venus is flashing all the 

time in the back of my head as I'm writing this. I feel it is an important, and missing part of the story. I 

may have to look into that more in the near future. 

RA also mentions the term wanderers in the above quote. This means, for those who are not familiar 

with this concept, a soul from a higher density (usually 4th or 5th), who chooses to come to a certain 

planet which is in need of assistance, decides to incarnate there and help raising the frequencies. 

Wanderers often get caught in the Sirian trap system, however, and get recycled with the rest of the 

souls, but they are willing to make that sacrifice. 

Here is quite an interesting remark from RA: 

"Questioner: ...how were you able to make the transition from your— Venus, and I assume the 

sixth dimension, which— would that be invisible when you reached here? Did you have to change 

your dimensions to walk on the Earth? 

Ra: You will remember the exercise of the wind. The dissolution into nothingness is the 

dissolution into unity, for there is no nothingness. From the sixth dimension, we are capable of 

manipulating, by thought, the intelligent infinity present in each particle of light or distorted light 

so that we were able to clothe ourselves in a replica visible in the third density of our 

mind/body/spirit complexes in the sixth density. We were allowed this experiment by the Council 

which guards this planet."[16] 

Here they clearly tell us how they are able to use their avatar to "shapeshift", so they can descend 

into 3D, the material world, and that they had permission to do so from the Council of Saturn. We are 

going to talk more about all these councils and Galactic Federations in an upcoming paper, so we'll leave 

it with that for now. 


54



Anyway, RA stopped visiting Earth, due to that they noticed that humans misunderstood their 

teachings because of language difficulties (and they are certainly not making it easier now, as their 

channeling can be hard for many to understand), and the visit in Egypt 11,000 years ago did not end 

well. RA left humanity to their fate at that time, but say they haven't stopped looking over us since then. 

Now, however, they have come to a place in their own development when they need to make up for the 

damage they [accidentally?] did to us all this time ago, by interfering with our evolution. They are 

making amends, they say, by teaching us through a channel what we want to know, and they also will be 

present at the time of the Harvest. 

RA says that the first humans on Earth came from Mars (Sirian laboratories? They certainly existed on 

Mars at that time and were used for genetic engineering and manipulation). However, this group of 

humans became so warlike (under Sirian influence?) that they destroyed themselves and the planet at 

the same time. So they had to be transferred down to Earth around 75,000 years ago. There was no 

harvestable beings at that time. 

Then there was another planet in our solar system which they call Maldek (my "Old Terra" in Level II), 

where an advanced, Atlantis-like society had formed. They, too, destroyed their planet utterly in an 

atomic war, and everybody without exception, died a violent death. It took a very long time (thousands 

of years) for the Confederation to even reach these beings, but 500,000-600,000 years ago they 

succeeded and untied the knot of fear and terror in this soul group. These beings were also transferred 

to Earth, because Earth was the only inhabited planet in 3D at that time, and these were 3D beings. 

However, they never incarnated in bodies, but allegedly live in our atmosphere, and when we see some 

paranormal activities (and some of the UFOs), they are Maldekians bleeding through the layers of 

reality. Some, however, later managed to incarnate in Neanderthal bodies. 

The RA collective mention several times that mankind was living in correlation with many different 

star races in Atlantean and Egyptian times, and not all of them were benevolent. They also mention both 

Mars and Maldek as being two planets directly involved in our evolution, just like I've been saying. 

RA is talking about a Higher Self, or an Oversoul, which is a higher version of you, living in the upper 

6th Density, and therefore knows your path all the way up to that point. Because all time is 

simultaneous (something RA endorses), your journey is already over from the viewpoint of your 

Oversoul. However, it is there to guide you so that you can find an easier and faster path to get there. 

This concept can only be understood from a multidimensional, heart level, and is just mind-boggling for 

the 3D mind. In the 6th Density, when you are just about to graduate to the 7th, you merge with your 

Oversoul and you become One with it. Both the Oversoul and the One Creator are without gender in the 

RA cosmology, and is normally addressed as It. Gender becomes obsolete in the 6th Density, according 

to RA, when individuals merge into a group soul, a Social Memory Complex. 

In RA's universe, only the One Creator is without distortion. It just is. Anything added to that is called 

a distortion, although it's not meant in a negative way. The first distortion is the Law of Free Will, the 

second is Love and the third is Light. Thus, New Age people, and many metaphycisists use the terms 

"Love and Light" when communicating with each other, and when showing affinity and understanding, 

although it has more become like an automatic greeting, such as "regards". Many sources, channeled 

through a human vehicle/body, say they are of the Light, and if they say that, the channeler accepts the 

source as being benevolent. This can, as we shall see, be quite misleading, and may not at all be so. But 

that's something for the next paper. 


55



v.i. The Veil of Forgetfulness 

This term comes from RA. This is similar to what I have said about the Grid and the Amnesia Trap in 

earlier papers. The difference is that RA sees this veil as necessary for us to experience 3D. The Veil of 

Forgetfulness makes you forget your true identity and purpose as soon as you incarnate or reincarnate 

on Mother Earth. They say it's a space/time phenomenon and does not exist in time/space. This means 

that you only forget when you are in an incarnation (in a body), but between lives (time/space) you do 

remember. I wholeheartedly agree with this as I have come to even newer conclusions regarding 

afterlife than what I had in Level I and II. I will dedicate another whole paper on the subject later in this 

level. 

When asked why this Veil has to be there, RA explains that without the Veil there would be no 

potentials for misunderstanding, and thus no experience[17]. And here is the interesting stuff. RA 

admits that the Veil is a separation between the Conscious mind and the Unconscious Mind (which is 

dream state), and that it was purposely put there so we could have this experience. Well, put there by 

whom? Not the Orions, who created 3D, that is for sure. They wanted mankind to have their memories 

intact so we could experience 3D in "one go" and then move on. No, it was created by the SA to be the 

basic part of the Control System. For some reason, RA is not mentioning this. Something to keep in 

mind... 

However, RA does explain that there was a time before the Veil. However, they say that "knowing" 

instead of "not knowing" creates very little motivation to change and to expand one's consciousness. 

There are very few catalysts and the evolution is compared to that between a turtle and a cheetah. 

However, once they realize that we are all One, these beings climb quickly to the highest densities. 

According to RA, the inhabitants of such planets were STO, and this was in the beginning of this Octave. 

It only happened on planets close to the Galactic Center, where the beings still had memories from the 

previous Octave they had ascended from. However, when it became clear how slow the progress 

became in this Octave without a Veil, one such was created and has been present ever since on any 

developing planet, according to RA. 

This seems like good logic, unless we are aware of that there are two different universes -- the 4% 

and the 96%. The purpose from the beginning was that 96% beings (those who were of, or had access to 

the KHAA, the 96%) should be able to experience the material universe if they so desired. It was 

supposed to be something fun and educational. Non-physical beings could take a physical body and 

experience the 3rd Dimension while still being multi-d. In other words, they were able to come and 

leave bodies at will. It had nothing to do with long learning experiences; it was like high spirit going on 

vacation by descending into matter. There was no death involved, and no reincarnation, unless the spirit 

wanted to switch bodies, but if so, it happened with memories intact. 

It was only when the Sirians came into the picture, which was much later, that things changed. They 

were the ones who created the separation between the conscious and unconscious mind, so we forgot 

who we were, and most importantly -- once trapped in a 3D body, you couldn't get out. Then, when 

your body deteriorated in matter, the soul left the useless vehicle, but was now manipulated to go back 

into matter again to complete a goal that was not set by the soul in the first place. Not only on Earth, 

but on many, many planets in the universe, the Sirian Overlords created a similar trap, and you got the 

4% universe -- a universe dictated and manipulated by them. The trapped souls who had lost their 

memories of who they were and why they were there had no other choice, it seemed, than to listen to 


56



those who seemed to know; the so-called "gods" or "Men of Power". They told you how to look at the 

universe. They said that what you can perceive with your 5 senses is what reality is, and when you look 

up in the night sky you see stars and galaxies. But the blackness between the stars is just a nothingness 

that no one knows anything about. The only thing that exists is what you see. This manipulation, plus 

some tampering with our DNA, got us trapped in a very narrow frequency band, where only 4% of the 

universe is visible. They wanted us to believe that if there really is life out there, it's so far away that we 

can't reach it. We became isolated. In reality, we should be able to perceive all frequency bands at will, 

and if we did, the universe would not be black anymore, but filled up with particles almost everywhere -- 

it would lighten up. You would be able to perceive all dimensions, and not only the 4 lowest ones (time 

included). 

The fact that RA does not mention any of this makes me very alert. That means that they are either 

only perceiving the 4% universe themselves, or they are holding back on vital information that can set us 

free. Or are they of the impression that mankind can only expand themselves in baby steps, and 

therefore the information they freely give out stays within the 4% frequency band? This could be a 

possibility, because the 4% universe has its own dimensions and densities. You don't have to experience 

all the higher bands of the spectrum to be able to travel between some dimensions and densities. This 

could very well be the case with RA. If they allowed us to "ascend" in a manner so we became multi-d 

right away, they are afraid we're going to be overwhelmed by all the new perceptions in the gamma 

spectrum, for example. 

If this is true, the sources we are channeling (because RA is not the only one teaching the same thing) 

is the slow way of becoming multi-d; one little step at the time, while the way I want to do it, based on 

material from anonymous sources, the Pleiadians, Seth, and a few more, is the faster way, but still safe. I 

would not want to take the channeled ascension route when I can do it in a much faster way. This will be 

obvious the more you read, and especially after you have read the book I'm going to write after I'm 

done with this level of learning. 

So, if this is close to how the sources think, and they want to help us through the ascension process in 

something they call the Harvest, that would sound benevolent enough, wouldn't it? After all, it's nothing 

wrong with asking for help, is it? However, first of all, we have not asked for help; what has happened 

here is that we have a number of sources who say they are here to help us because they need to do this 

in order to advance (and be accepted into the Orion Empire [the KHAA]?), and not because we asked 

them to help us. Albeit, they are trying to make us think that we asked them for help. Therefore, 

something like helping us through a Harvest is an interference and a break of universal laws. They know 

this, so therefore the purpose of doing it is not to be accepted by the Orion Empire, because they know 

the Empire would never agree with what they're doing. So there is another agenda here, and it seems to 

play right into that of the Sirian Overlords, wittingly or unwittingly. 

I can hear many metaphysical researchers protest at this point and say that we can't go through the 

ascension process without help from "the other side"! First of all, yes, we can, because the way these 

metaphysical sources explain the process is one way of doing it, and I believe it's not benevolent either, 

and later I will explain why. All we do is we are moved from one box to another, but are still controlled. I 

have read a lot and listened to a lot of channeled information, and I am far from convinced that the 

transition is benevolent. Is what they are planning even possible? Yes, I believe it is, but why, when your 

body dies, would you put yourself in the hands of all these metaphysical beings and trust that they send 

you to where you want to go? Why give up your power and give it away to, it doesn't matter whomever, 

and then close your eyes and hope they are giving you Paradise? 


57



That sounds pretty fishy to me. Instead, you can trust your own power and perceptions and do it all 

much better and faster on your own, once you understand the concept and the procedures how to do it. 

I have suggested many times, and I suggest it again; don't trust an outside power to go free! If they were 

benevolent, they would help you to self-help and not offer to do it for you. It doesn't work that way. 

This is a universe where the individual finds their own strength and abilities, and whatever needs to be 

done, it can be done by the individual soul. You want to do it in group? Sure, no problem. But I would 

suggest that if you do, the group members all need to have come to the same conclusions and then do it 

together. And they probably would need to be of the same soul group (humankind) for it to work. Aliens 

who are here don't need the same things we do. We are responsible for our own evolution. 

There are those who say that 3D, the way it is now set up (by the SA), is the best learning lesson you 

can ever imagine. In a very short time (relatively speaking), you learn more than non-physicals, or beings 

in other dimensions, learn in one million years. Oh yes, there is a lot of trauma, horror, torture, war, 

famine, separation anxiety, and God knows what, involved in the learning process with such catalysts as 

the blood-thirsty Global Elite, but fact remains, they say -- we learn quickly! It wasn't meant to be this 

way, but now that it is, there are apparently souls who want to incarnate here just to have this quick 

learning experience. But you see, "up there" time is different, and you are able to see the bigger picture; 

it's like you are Superman and can handle anything. So non-physicals are sometimes very tempted to go 

down here and change things around. However, once down here they find out quickly that it's not that 

easy in this dense reality. 

Furthermore, some say that everything is a co-creation. No one is a victim; we all have decided the 

ball part of our fate so we can learn -- even if we go through torture or famine. This is probably true, but 

there is still manipulation involved. All sides of the "game" do not have the same opportunities, because 

some know the secrets, and others don't. This makes it an unfair game, where the players all think they 

are in for it with the same opportunity for growth, but with manipulation involved, I would say that this 

is not true. 

We can sugar-coat what this trap is all about and try to see it from a positive angle, but it doesn't 

change the fact that it is a trap. No one is going to tell me how much of the spectrum I am allowed to 

see at once by putting me in a new box, which I don't even really know what it contains -- only what 

some non-physical sources say it does. 

RA says: 

"RA: The nature of vibration is such that it may be seen as having mathematically straight or 

narrow steps. These steps may be seen as having boundaries. Within each boundary there are 

infinite gradations of vibration or color. However, as one approaches a boundary, an effort must 

be made to cross that boundary."[18] 

This is exactly where I differ (second sentence). I look at it the opposite way; the whole thing is that 

the steps do not have boundaries, but blend in with each other. Someone who endorses RA's teachings 

may say that what I am experiencing is a "bleed-through" into the 4th Density, but not even that 

indicates as being correct. I have read RA's definitions of the different densities, and my experience is 

exactly that of the Pleiadians and others; that I can reach 5th or 6th Density while sitting in my chair at 

work, or talking to people around a table, and then go back and forth. I do not feel like I am hitting any 

boundary at all, but that it is all fluid and blend together. But for some reason, the non-physical in this 

respect apparently want to describe them as boundaries. LPG-C called the distinctions between the 7 


58



Superdomains boundaries as well, but they didn't mean it in a literal way; they, too, looked at the 

Multiverse as being fluid. 

If we move further into the creation theory of RA, we notice that each galaxy is created by its own 

logos, which in this case can be compared with a Creator God (or Gods). The logos who created our 

particular star system also created 250 billion others (corresponding to all the star systems in the Milky 

Way Galaxy). They also say that some galaxies are prone to having more negative Harvest than others, 

i.e. STS is more pronounced in these galaxies, probably because of an experiment instigated by its logos 

(Creator God[s]). It appears, however, that RA decided, when they became evolved enough to nanotravel, 

to basically stay and work within our own Milky Way Galaxy, except for some Wanderers[def] who 

went to other major galaxies. These Wanderers could tell about beings looking very different from those 

here in the Milky Way. 

In our own galaxy, RA says that 1/5 of all planets are inhabited in some density or another, which 

means not all of them are inhabited in 3D. If we, as 3D beings would travel to such a planet, we would 

probably find it barren. Some would be gas planets from our point of view, just like Jupiter and Saturn, 

which are supposedly both inhabited by beings of another frequency/density. Furthermore, RA explains 

that approximately 32% of all stars have planets around them, while another 6% have some kind of 

clustering materials which can be inhabited in some densities (notice here that RA is all the time talking 

about the 4% universe!). Then Dr. Elkins asks them what percentage of 3D beings from other star 

systems could move to Earth and walk among us without we noticing that they are aliens, and RA replies 

that it's 5% of all 3D races, while about 13 to 15% would look similar enough that you had to look twice 

to notice (they are still talking about the whole 4% universe). And lastly, in the 4% universe, on those 

planets, where beings are aware, 27% are in 3D; 16% in 4D; and 6% in 5D. The other 51% are of the 

other densities. 

RA is not the only source saying that we need 4th Density bodies to be able to live on the 4th Density 

Earth. The philosophy is therefore that we need to die before we can ascend (4D bodies are waiting on 

'the other side'). Also, those who don't qualify will thus at that time be sent to a 3D planet somewhere 

else. So, according to RA's hypothesis, no one is going to come here and beam anybody up in 

spaceships. Therefore, we will not be able to feel out this hypothesis, because we won't know until we 

die whether we qualify or not. And there, on the other side, RA and other Social Memory Complexes will 

wait and lead us into the right fold. If you read this paragraph again and think about it, doesn't this 

sound awfully artificial? Is it a built-in part of Creation that some Social Memory Complexes from 6th 

Density or such have to steer us in the right direction between lives? Shouldn't "ascension" be 

something that comes naturally? All I want is for the reader to ponder that for a minute before you 

continue. 

RA also have their view on the Second Coming. Dr. Elkins is asking if Jesus will return, and they say no; 

albeit, they claim that Jesus is a part of the Confederation and will only make himself present through 

channels(!)[19]. This to me is a disturbing comment, because the metaphysical researcher knows that 

this being who calls himself Jesus has been channeled by quite a few, but especially by the Galactic 

Federation of Light and The Ashtar Command which both clearly are Sirian channels, as we shall see. 

They even have Utu Shamash's Winged Sun Disc as their logo[20]. If RA claims Jesus to be part of the 

Confederation they are part of, and they say "their" Jesus is going to be channeled, and those channels 

are both Sirian in nature, what does that make RA and the Confederation? I'm just trying to put two and 

two together here. 


59



Although RA says that Jesus will not come back to Earth, there are others of the identical congruency 

of consciousness that will welcome those who go to the 4th Density. "This is the meaning of the 2nd 

Coming", says RA[21]. I am sorry, but the picture I get in my head is very much similar to that we see in 

New Age channeling, such as the Ashtar Command, where bearded, handsome men in their early 

thirties, such as Jesus himself and St. Germain come and hug us, dressed in long, white robes. That's a 

little bit too much for me to stomach. 

v.ii. The Orion Group -- Friends or Foes? 

Then again, RA is conveying the message about the Orion Group, which has caused so much 

confusion here on Earth, and they are accusing Orion of being the enemies. They claim that the Orions 

are the only negative density entities who can penetrate the Veil here (not counting those who were 

already on the planet in the 1980s and are still here). RA says that the Orions are often the ones we see 

in the skies, piloting the so-called UFOs. They send out messages, and some of those are received by 

those who are oriented towards service-to-others. The messages are altered to be acceptable to those 

positive entities, while warning of difficult times ahead. This is, says RA, the most those negative entities 

can do to manipulate those of positive orientation. Not so, I would say. They can do (and are doing) a lot 

more than that. 

The contacts the Orion Group finds most rewarding, however, are those with a service-to-self 

orientation.[22] The reason for this is that the STS beings are more on their wavelength and can be 

manipulated into becoming the minions of the Orion Group. 

So let's go over this once and for all. Why does the RA collective talk about Orion when they are in 

fact are definitely describing the Sirian Alliance? Well, the best reference is the Urantia Book and 

Lucifer's Rebellion. This bright, beautiful, once very positively oriented being called Lucifer, rebelled 

towards God (or in reality, the Goddess), managed to gather a support group behind him, and a War in 

Heaven began. It ended with that Lucifer and his Fallen Angels were "cast out of Heaven" (the Orion 

Empire) and descended upon Earth, and the Fallen Angels created the Nephilim etc. 

Aside from the Urantia Book, where have we heard this story before? In virtually all ancient 

scriptures, such as the Bible (Satan in the Garden of Eden), and the Sumerian Scripture (ENKI as the 

Serpent in the Garden). I am saying in my papers with great emphasis that ENKI is not Sirian but from 

Orion. He is the son of the Goddess and her brightest "angel". He is Lucifer. In his rebellion he gathered 

around him the Sirian Overlords and the Pleiadians, the former whom had earlier signed the Peace 

Treaty with the Goddess (see Level II), and from thereon were considered members of the Orion Empire. 

Hence, Lucifer and his Fallen Angels also became known as the "Orion Group", the faction of 

Orions/Aryans who rebelled against the Goddess. 

There lies the confusion, and most possibly the main reason why Orion has such a bad reputation 

here on Earth, described as shapeshifting Reptilians by researchers as Icke and quite a few others. But! 

Orion, dear reader, is our original home, and they are not our enemy. However, there is a group or a 

faction of Orions, who have created a bad reputation about the whole Orion Empire. Hence, I want to 

distinguish between the Orion Empire and the Orion Group, by still calling the Sirian/Pleiadian/Orion 

Group the Sirian Alliance, although they were led by an Orion being, ENKI or Lucifer. So those who say 

they channel ENKI and have positive experiences with this being are, I'm sorry to say, manipulated and 


60



deceived. In certain terms, ENKI is worse than ENLIL, and the Bible is correct when it labels 

ENKI/EA/Lucifer as Satan. YHWH/Jehovah was a composite of beings (none of them benevolent), and 

two of those beings from this composite were the stepbrothers, ENKI and ENLIL. Another was ANU 

himself, the King of Kings back at Sirius. 

This is the reason why RA, the Cassiopaeans, and others call the bad guys the Orion Group. The 

Cassiopaeans, however, are more to the point, talking about this group while on the other hand they 

also say that the cradle of humanity is in Orion and not in Lyra. I wrote a whole paper on Lord ENKI, the 

Cosmic Vampire, in Level II, but now in Level III it's time to bring it to a close and tell the reader who 

ENKI really is. He has done a great job with convincing people here on Earth how good he is (was) by 

saving mankind from the Deluge by talking to Utnapischtim (Noah). Yes, Lucifer saved mankind, but not 

out of compassion, but in order to control our planet, its inhabitants, and to eventually build an army to 

overthrow the Goddess of the Universe. This is ENKI's real face -- he is still Lucifer, the Rebellion. So, in 

other words, the RA collective is correct when they label the negative entities "The Orion Group". 

In RA's own words: 

"QUESTION: Windows occur to let the Orion group come through once in a while. Are they 

needed as a balancing to prevent the Guardians from reducing their positive polarization by 

totally eliminating the Orion contact through shielding? (B1, 150) 

RA: This is partially correct. 

Balancing allows an equal amount of positive and negative influx. In your particular planetary 

sphere less negative information or stimulus is necessary than positive due to the somewhat 

negative orientation of your social complex distortion. (B1, 150) 

STATEMENT (by Questioner): In this way, total free will is balanced so that individuals may have 

an equal opportunity to choose service to others or service to self. Is this correct? 

RA: This is correct. (B1, 150) 

STATEMENT: This is a profound revelation, I believe, in the Law of Free Will." (B1, 150). 

So, in other words, according to RA, there is a council located in the rings of Saturn (in a higher 

density), which has decided together with the Guardians, who are supposedly a group of entities living 

in the center of the Earth (equally in a higher density), to put a Quarantine around Earth so that the 

Sirian Alliance (the Orion Group) normally can't enter, in order to create a balance between good and 

evil (STO and STS). Humankind is polarized towards STS, so we need more positive influence to have a 

fair choice. Therefore, the Sirians who are not here on the planet already, are kept out with the help 

from those who maintain the Quarantine. However, sometimes there are windows in the Quarantine, 

which allows some Sirians to come in. In my opinion, though, the Sirians have no business here 

whatsoever. 

However (and here is the interesting part), many say that the Quarantine now has been lifted! So we 

may ask ourselves what this really means. The people who tell us this see it as a positive thing, because 

we can now supposedly travel out in space, and easier communicate with positive ETs, etc. But if we are 

to believe RA, it basically means that the Sirians can come in here in droves if they like. And isn't that 


61



exactly what I have said that they are doing? Isn't this the reason why Sirians like Utu Shamash came 

through the Quarantine window a couple of years ago and started preparing for the rest of his kind to 

come to Earth? Some of them have already arrived and now occupy human bodies here on Earth, but 

the main preparation and the opening of the stargates in conjunction with a lifted Quarantine will pave 

the way for the rest of the gang to arrive. We are here talking about the Invasion, Phase II, which we 

shall discuss in much detail in later papers. 

In other places in the material, RA explains pretty well what the Orion Group, i.e. the Sirians did: 

"RA: The Yahweh group worked with those living on Mars 75,000 years ago to make the body 

bigger and stronger through a new genetic coding. (B1, 174) 

However, the Orion group were able to use this distortion (larger body) to teach the thoughts 

of the elite. Those of the Orion group were able for the first time to make serious inroads upon 

the consciousness of the planetary complex. (B1, 175) 

QUESTION: What allowed the Orion group to succeed at this? 

RA: Those who are strong, intelligent, etc. have a temptation to feel different from those who 

are less intelligent and strong. This allowed the Orion group to form the concept of the holy war, 

as you may call it. This is a seriously distorted perception. There were many of these wars of a 

destructive nature. (B1, 175) 

It is definitely no doubt that RA is talking about the Sirians here, and furthermore, they explain that 

they were the ones who built the stone monuments on the Easter Island. When Elkins asked why, RA 

explained that humans in that time period worshipped the Orion Group as Gods, and by building such 

monuments that represented an interdimensional force they couldn't disobey, the monuments 

themselves got power and were attracted to worship (and in the extension, the Sirian Overlords could 

"suck in" these energies of fear and feed on them). The monuments were created by thoughts from a 

distance. 

Elkins also asks if there are anyone from the Orion Group on Earth now (in the 1980s), and RA said 

"no". However, they said that the group is here as a though form (in people's heads, as walk-ins and in 

genetically manipulated human bodies), but normally a robotic kind of being does their bidding. Elkins 

asks if these beings are the Men in Black, but RA says no. They did not elaborate further, because the 

Grays were not yet well-known at that time, before Whitley Strieber wrote about his experiences in 

Communion. 

The Men in Black are a thought form with the ability to somewhat materialize themselves here on 

Earth (Sirians using avatars is what it is). They can also dematerialize at will. 

And here is what they tried to do on me by trying to have me endorse the Sitchin material and get me 

in contact with Utu Shamash: 

"QUESTION: Is it possible for a person to be confused and call on both the Confederation and 

the Orion group? 


62



RA: It is entirety possible. Many of your so-called contacts among your peoples have been 

confused and self destructive because 

THE CHANNELS WERE ORIENTED TOWARDS SERVICE TOWARDS OTHERS, BUT, IN THE DESIRE FOR 

PROOF, WERE OPEN TO THE LYING INFORMATION OF THE CRUSADERS FROM ORION WHO WERE 

THEN ABLE TO NEUTRALIZE THE EFFECTIVENESS OF THE CHANNEL." (B1, 125) 

Most beings from the Orion Group are 5th Density Negative, because they are the ones who most 

easily can penetrate the Quarantine. The 4th Density beings are more like servants to the 5th, or lower 

in the hierarchy, if you will. But don't make any mistake about it; whether the Council of Saturn, 

together with the Guardians, have set up a Quarantine here or not, the Orion Group (the Sirian Alliance) 

think they own this planet and are still in charge of the stargate and the frequency machine. They have a 

soul group down here who can accommodate that. And here is something to think about for those who 

channel entities of Love & Light and think that as long as everything is friendly and cozy, and the 

vibrations are high, we're safe. Not so, necessarily. The Sirians are master manipulators. Here is RA 

again: 

"QUESTION: Why would one of us freely follow the negative entity? 

RA: The positive polarity sees love in all things. The negative polarity is clever. (B3, 140) 

And lastly on this subject, they explain how the Orion Group (led by ENKI) is manipulating the PTB. 

"RA: This negative entity will strive to offer these understandings to the other-selves, most 

usually by the process of forming the elite, the disciples, and teaching the need and rightness of 

the enslavement of other-selves for their own good. These other-selves are conceived to be 

dependent upon the self and in need of the wisdom and guidance of the self (i.e., the elite 

group.) (B2, 130)" 

We know from different sources, and I know from have been tightly connected with LPG-C in the 

past, that not only are members of the SA present on the Earth surface in human hybrid bodies, but 

some of them, who preferred to stay in a higher density, but still are stuck in the Quarantine (according 

to RA, and I think they are correct in this), stayed as a thought form (soul/spirit) in the inner planes of 

Earth. Interestingly enough, RA calls these hidden entities the Dark Angels, which would correspond 

pretty nicely to some of ENKI's "Fallen Angels": 

"RA: Temptations are offered by those negative entities of what you would call your inner 

planes. These, shall we say, dark angels have been impressed by the service-to-self path offered 

by those who have come through the quarantine from days of old." (B1, 135) 

I brought up a lot of subject here regarding the RA Material, and did so for a reason. I think RA 

represents pretty much what many other channeled sources represent as well, so I wanted to give the 

reader who is not too familiar with channeling a chance to understand the metaphysical universe of 

these entities. 

In later years, RA has been channeled by David Wilcock. This is allegedly not the same quality of 

information as the Rueckert channeling, but still supposedly gives the listener some good insights. I 


63



haven't listened much to this version of RA, however, but I will mention it some when we talk about the 

Elohim. 

In the next paper, we are going to address a few other prominent channeled sources. The purpose 

with that will be self-evident when we start talking about the Galactic Federations. I think the reader will 

appreciate the knowledge I am about to provide in the next few papers... 

Love, 



[1] Source: http://www.bibliotecapleyades.net/esp_2012_52.htm 

[2] ibid. op. cit. 

[3] 1AU, or Astronomical Unit, is the distance between the Earth and the Sun, which equals to approximately 149 600 000 

kilometers, depending on where in the orbit the Earth is at the moment. 

[4] Isn't it interesting that moons are also called satellites? Couldn't that imply that they may be manmade? 

[5] Source: http://cassiopaea.org/2010/09/15/laura-answers-questions-from-readers-haarp-roswell-rods-4th-densitybleedthrough-and-7th-density/ 

[6] Source: http://illuminati-news.com/swedish-model.htm 

[7] Source: http://www.lyssaroyal.com/trans85.htm 

[8] Unfortunately, I can't remember which video this was, but I believe the producer was David Sereda, which makes me think it 

could have been an excerpt from his documentary, "From Here to Andromeda". 

[9] The 5 books in the RA Material series, channeled by Carla Rueckert in the early to mid 1980s, can be purchased through 

Carla's website, L/L Research, at http://llresearch.org/. 

[10] Source: "The Law of One", Book 2, p.50, op. cit. 

[11] Source: "The Law of One", Book 4, p.82. 

[12] Interestingly enough, these bell-shaped craft from Venus were exactly what George Adamski saw in the skies in the 1950s, 

when he met with tall, humanoid visitors. How that fits in with RA, I don't know, but Adamski couldn't have any pre-knowledge 

of RA, because the RA Material were not published until several decades later. 

[13] "The RA Material", Session 2, Question 2, op. cit. 

[14] Session 23, Question 6 (23.6), op. cit. 


64



[15] RA previously said they only made two visits here, but apparently they didn't count some of them; perhaps so because they 

did not appear in physical. In one of the sessions they clearly state that they came in these bell-shaped craft both 11,000 and 

18,000 years ago, and they landed both times. These were the only times RA landed on Earth in spaceships and walked among 

us. 

[16] Session 6.7, op. cit. 

[17] "The Law of One", Book 4, p.94 (B4, 94). 

[18] (B2, 42). 

[19] (B1, 165) 

[20] http://www.ashtarcommandcrew.net/video/galactic-federation-of-light-jesus-january-27-2013 

[21] (B1, 165), op. cit. 

[22] (B1, 124). 


65



Paper #3: Channeled Entities Part I -- 

-- the Harvesters of Souls 

by Wes Penre, Sunday, February 10, 2013 

Revised: Tuesday, February 12, 2013 


I. Some Major Channeled Sources 

We have no proof if there are more channelers today than it was a few hundred or a thousand 

years ago, because in the past there was no Internet, and information coming from channelers were 

most likely being considered witchcraft by the mainstream religion and heavily suppressed. So we can 

assume that many psychics kept quiet if they made contact. Still, we can also assume that the 

phenomenon is more widespread now than it was in the past, because if the channeler didn't claim that 

the source was from angels or whatever God or Gods that were worshipped at the time, the world never 

got to know about it. Also, the sources make contact because they want their message to become 

known, and not just for the material to stay between them and a few people. At least that is mostly the 

case. Also, we've noticed that since the RA Material came out, the amount of channelers have skyrocketed 

-- a true sign of the End Times. 

If you ask a channeler what the difference is between their particular source and other sources out 

there, most, if not all of them, will tell you a lot of things that are different and why they have chosen to 

work with their particular entity or Social Memory Complex[def]. Evidence show, however, that most of 

them seem to have a common goal, and it looks like they just use different angles to address the same 

issue in order to attract a different kind of audience; similar to an advertisement firm which puts a 

certain touch to an ad in order to reach a certain public. Some can take quite drastic measures trying to 

make people pay attention. The thing most of the channeling have in common besides the Harvest is 

that they say that they are us in the future. But are these sources benevolent, or are they wolves in 

sheep's clothing? It is a very complex subject; much more complex than one would think, and it's not 

black or white. Whether humankind will gain from our connection with them in the long run or not 

remains to be seen, but after have studied quite a few of them, it looks like they are here to make 

amends to us for one reason or another, or at least that's what they want us to believe. It's interesting, 

though, that they contact us now when we are in the middle of taking a giant step in our evolution. 

Albeit there may be reasons for this. As humans once again become more psychic, many people are 

more prone to tuning into the vibrations of these entities, when they perhaps may have wanted to get 

in touch with us much sooner if they could have. The Internet has certainly been a blessing in disguise in 

this regard. 

Whatever we think about them, it's hard not to acknowledge that they are giving us information we 

would not have been able to find anywhere else at this point in time, and evolution would have been 

slower. 


66



The fact is that we as a species have been isolated from the rest of the universe for so long that now, 

when the Grid is about to fall apart, and perhaps the Quarantine is being lifted, a lot of things are bound 

to happen simultaneously, from our perspective. The ability for channeled sources to get their message 

heard is one thing; then we have star beings who can more easily come here and incarnate in order to 

either help or destroy; the major part of the Sirian Alliance, who previously had a hard time breaking 

through the Quarantine, can now enter via stargates, almost exclusively in spiritual form. In the 

meantime, and because of the above, the chaos is increasing and so is the confusion, both amongst 

common people and in the realm of Power. The PTB can't get away with things they used to, because 

many humans can see through the lies, and some of people in authority are being thrown to the wolves, 

having their dirty laundry being hung out in public. 

While all this happens, the channeled sources are playing an important role in these times, for good 

or for bad, or both. I will present this subject from my point of view, and the reader can decide for 

themselves. 

I ended the previous paper, "Paper #2: In Wait for Things to Come" with discussing one of the most 

popular ad well received channeled material of our time -- the RA Material. We are going to continue 

now and discuss some other channeled entities (from here on called sources most of the time) with a 

similar view as that of RA. We are also going to see that they are actually working together on a 

common goal -- to oversee the harvest of souls. And the souls we are talking about is of course the 

human souls! 

i.i. The Elohim 

I believe the Cassiopaeans are those who come closest to the RA cosmology, something they 

themselves have no problem admitting, although there are some differences, too, of course. Another 

source who claims connection with RA is the Elohim. This is what they call themselves. The Elohim are 

channeled by two women, Daphne Karandanis and Terry Brown. A third person, who is asking the 

questions makes it a trio, and his name is Wynn Free, a former musician. Mind you that the group which 

channeled the RA Material were also a trio, although the setup for the RA sessions was different, with 

only one channeler, Carla Rueckert. 

Before I go too deeply into this I want to mention to the reader that I do not have any solid proof who 

these sources really are and although there are those who are obviously malevolent, it's not always so. 

And there are also those whom you can tell are here to help, even when they have their own agenda. 

My intention is not to talk badly about certain groups and praise others; I will give you some information 

and sometimes draw a few conclusions, but the final conclusion must be yours. I will connect some dots, 

and you will decide whether I do a good job or if a lot more needs to be said about this. Personally, I 

have come to some conclusions that make sense to me, but if it shows that I am incorrect regarding 

some groups, I will address that later in the light of more information. Also, I want to make clear that I 

am not attacking the person or the group who channels/channel these sources, as I think most of them 

have good intentions, but when comes to the sources themselves, they may not always be whom they 

present themselves to be. 

This Elohim channel opened themselves up to the above group back in 2002 when Wynn Free and his 

fiancé, Daphne Karandanis, drove up from California towards Oregon. When they reached Mount Shasta 

in northern California, a voice began to talk through Daphne. Wynn started asking some questions and 


67



the voice answered. This was the beginning of their now 12 years+ contact with the Elohim[1]. 

Interestingly enough, Mt. Shasta is known for its "paranormal" activities, UFO sightings, and 

underground facilities, and there is also a stargate located in the area. 

The reader can see the details about how it all started, and much more, in Wynn's e-book, "The 

Creator Gods of the Physical Universe Want to Talk to You", which can be downloaded for free on the 

Internet, and later on, Terry came into the picture as well, also being able to channel this same group of 

entities. 

In Wynn's case it's easy to understand at least one reason for his loyalty to the Elohim, which is that 

they apparently saved the life of his sister, who was terminally ill. She is now fully recovered, from what 

I understand. There is no way such an incident wouldn't affect you. All he did, he says, was to ask them 

for help and they responded. Still, Wynn is telling us that he was very skeptic about them for a long 

time, and it took quite a while, and some serious research to establish in his own mind that they are 

benevolent. He suggests everybody else does the same. 

Wynn says that the Elohim can be of assistance to mankind in three ways: 1) they can inform us in 

such a way that we can dispel our fears. 2) they penetrate this reality with love-light energy, which can 

uplift the vibration here, and 3) they can intervene (such as with healing), but only within the guidelines 

of Free Will. They would never help somebody if it harms someone else.[1] 

The Bible talks about the Elohim being synonymous with God himself, in spite the fact that Elohim is 

plural. Others, like Wynn's group, say they are the Creator Gods (plural) of this whole physical universe, 

while some, like Zecharia Sitchin, tell us that the Elohim are synonymous with the Anunnaki, "those who 

from Heaven to Earth came" (I discussed Sitchin's work in Level I). 

My own research has shown that the Anunnaki is a term being used for the "gods" who invaded Earth 

half a million years ago, but is basically a term originating from Orion, most possibly brought down here 

by ENKI, the head of the faction of Sirians (the Fallen Angels) who arrived here half a million years ago. 

However, these gods who arrived here and started manipulating the DNA in existing humans and apes 

were a mix of Sirians, Pleiadians, Alpha Draconians, Vegans, and a few other star races. I gave the name 

The Sirian Alliance to this group of star beings. 

So if we are to believe Sitchin's translation of who the Elohim are, they are the Sirian Alliance. But if 

we go with the claim that the Elohim are actually the creators of this physical universe, like Wynn and 

his group say, then we still have to ask ourselves, which physical universe? The 4% or the 96%? If they 

are talking about the 4% (the universe we perceive with our 5 senses), then we are still coming back to 

that they are the Sirian Alliance. Only if they are talking about the physical universe before the Sirian 

Overlords tampered with our DNA, and they were working directly with the Mother Goddess, can we 

consider this Elohim group being benevolent (if they are truthful, that is). So let's see who they are, what 

their cosmology is, what their intentions are by contacting this group of humans, and what the effects 

are from the channeling. Also, let us take a look at whom they are in cahoots with. They do mention, 

however, that they consider themselves being more feminine than masculine due to their creative 

abilities. 


68



Figure 1. The 7 Superuniverses according to the WingMakers. 

i.i.ii. The Cosmology of the Elohim 

Let's start with their cosmology. Like almost all channeled sources, they say there is One Creator, 

which is All That Is, and we are smaller portions of that One Creator, here to have experiences, so that 

the Creator can have experiences outside of himself. Creation consists of a Central Universe, and from 

that, five other universes expand, while a sixth universe is being formed as we speak. Interestingly 

enough, that corresponds with the Seven Superuniverses in the Urantia Book and in the WingMakers' 

cosmology, and is also in line with LPG-C's seven superdomains, although the latter are constructed 

slightly differently. 

Moreover, they are very much in contact with RA and share their cosmology to a very large degree. 

Therefore, they say, just like RA, that we are at the end of a 75,000 years cycle, and that we are at the 

point where some people, who are 51% STO[def], will be harvested, and RA and the Elohim, together 

with other star beings, such as Carla Rueckert's new group, the Q'uo, are here to help in the process. In 

fact, although RA said that they would never speak through a medium here on Earth again if Carla 

Rueckert's group will dissolve (which it did when Dr. Don Elkins -- the questioner of the Ra Sessions -- 

committed suicide), because no one else could hold their energy, RA is back and apparently channeled 

through metaphysical researcher, David Wilcock. Carla Rueckert, who is friends with Wynn's group, says 

she thinks Wilcock's source is indeed RA, but a lower vibration of the same collective Carla channeled in 

the 1980s. If this is true, Wilcock is apparently strong enough to hold their energy. 

Like I said in the beginning, the Elohim claim to be the creators of the entire universe; the original 

Creator Gods I was talking about both in Level I and II, the so-called Builders. They are from the 6th 

Dimensional ray of light & love, and now they are coming to Earth to partake in what they say is a very 

important event; the ascension to the 4th Density Earth. We get the feeling it's their responsibility to 


69



come back and "check in" on their creation. Note, however, that they are not saying, from what I know, 

that they created mankind in particular, but they created a universe for mankind to be created and 

develop in. They also say that 2012 and the Mayan Calendar, and prophecy in general, has a lot to do 

with why they are here now. It's all connected to the Harvest and the end of a major cycle. 

i.i.iii. Angelic Beings from Outside Time 

Wynn says in his book, "The Creator Gods of This Universe Want to Talk to You", p.26, that P'taah is a 

high individual soul, who made himself known to Wynn and Daphne, although he happens to be a 

member of the RA group. So, curiously enough we now have the terms RA and P'taah. Ptah was the 

Egyptian name for ENKI as the first Pharaoh of Egypt, and MARDUK, ENKI's son, is also known as Amon 

RA, the "Hidden RA". This name issue (P'taah and RA) has been addressed at times with the RA Group, 

who denies any connections with the Egyptian deities. Oh well, coincidences then? I just find it peculiar 

that both ENKI and his son, RA, are presented (name-wise) in the RA group, and P'taah is channeled by 

Daphne side by side with the Elohim Group (Elohim also relating to the Sirians, just like RA/MARDUK and 

Ptah/ENKI). Why so many coincidences and still they deny them all? 

Anyway, the difference between the RA Group and Elohim is that the RA collective are graduates 

from the 7 Density realm, while Elohim exists outside of time. RA have incarnated here in this physical 

universe, while the Elohim have not. The Elohim have entered this reality out of curiosity to see how it is 

to live in 3D, but they have never incarnated. Some of them have never even left their realm outside 

time in order to stay pure and not be affected by the realms "below". To understand what it means to 

live outside of time, the Elohim explain it like this: if something lives outside of yourself, you must add 

time to the factor as a reference point of before and after. No reference point, no time. If it's true what 

they say, it makes me think they live in the KHAA[def], but what they are describing is the 4% universe 

and its dimensions and densities. Without putting any judgment on Elohim at this point, it's necessary to 

say that not all beings or star races living in the KHAA are benevolent, loving beings. The Orion Empire is 

the higher realms of the KHAA, but the KHAA has its own dimensions and densities as well. So please be 

advised that the Harvest spoken about is addressing the levels of reality in the 4% universe, and not in 

the KHAA. Not once has any of these sources (except the Pleiadians what I know of) even mentioned the 

real universe (the 96%), although they simply address it as "the invisible universe" -- invisible to our 5 

senses, that is. 

i.i.iv. Channeling the Elohim 

The Elohim are allegedly transmitting great portions of love and light; at least according to many of 

those who attend the sessions. They also say they love us tremendously and think very high of human 

beings -- we are very special, according to them. Although, sometimes a less loving thought pattern is 

revealing itself to us. In Wynn's e-book, page 90, Wynn is asking the Elohim what it is that limits a 

normal 3D being from operating outside 3D rules, and the Elohim replies, "The normal fog-dense brain." 

Wynn then asks if that is how they talk about humans when we're not around, and they respond, "It is a 

product of our frustration when working with your realm." One would expect a huge amount of love, 

and understanding in particular, from beings who say they are the highest of highest on the universal 

scale and after all have created it, but their response here clearly shows that they don't look upon us 

that highly after all. I am a being, still being stuck here in 3D, working hard to work myself out of the 

trap. I am communicating with my fellow 3D beings every day; beings who don't know anything about 


70



what's going on, and I don't feel frustration anymore. If I don't feel frustration when dealing with our 3D 

issues, although I'm "just" a 3D being, why would they, who apparently are supposed to feel infinite, 

unconditional love? I may sound picky, but sometimes it's in the small details you eventually can start 

seeing the bigger picture. It's very important not to trust a source only because they transmit large 

portions of love and light. It's easy for them to transmit those energies by using technology and by using 

positive universal energies against us. All they need is to know how to do it. For them, it's kids' stuff. 

Because RA have experienced our realm, they have more knowledge how to overcome obstacles here 

than Elohim have, but Elohim are more angelic and can perform miracles. They actually say they can 

beam love/light energies into this realm, although they are mentioning this in a positive context. They 

are often working together with RA to liberate the Earth realm. 

In both Level I and Level II, I discussed something I call The Wave of the Supernova, which supposedly 

is a wave of energy heading towards Earth in faster-than-light speed. Some people fear this wave, while 

others believe it's going to raise our consciousness, either to become truly multi-d or enough to once 

and for all ascend to Density 4 (those who are ready for it, that is). Like I said at the time, this is an event 

that could happen around 2012, or it could happen later. We are still waiting, but by looking into the 

channeled sources a little bit extra, like I have done since then, a certain pattern starts to unfold, and it 

has to do with the Harvest[def]. Not only do a certain amount of sources suggest they are here to help us 

with the Harvest from the 3rd to the 4th Density, but they also tell us that they are all riding the Wave. 

And this Wave is approaching Earth in super-high speed! They say that the Wave is the direct cause to 

our ascension! I found this a little peculiar and looked into it some more. The result of my research will 

be revealed in a couple of papers from now. Elohim, RA, Q'uo, the Cassiopaeans, and the Alpha 

Draconians, according to themselves (as we shall see), are all Wave Riders. 

Let's continue with three channeled sessions, so the reader gets the feel for them. In the first one 

Wynn Free is the first talker, and beside him is Terry Brown, who will start channeling a few seconds into 

the video. In the second and third videos we hear Daphne Karandanis channeling the same entities: 

Multimedia 1 (M-1). Terry Brown channeling the Elohim. 

Source: http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=MHngjfBL384. 

Multimedia 2 (M-2). Daphne Karandanis channeling the Elohim. 

Source: http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=B08JiE6y7gA. 

Multimedia 3 (M-3). Daphne Karandanis channeling the Elohim. 

Source: http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=JdpjFd62y7A. 

These videos are merely short examples of all the channeled sessions by Elohim, of course, and are 

perhaps not even directly representative for them; I simply picked them more or less at random on 

YouTube. I also wanted the reader to hear both Terry and Daphne channel. I advise the reader to go to 

YouTube and listen to more sessions to get a broader picture of this channel. 

I have talked to Wynn some, and what he repeatedly says is that those who are either attending the 

conference calls or are sitting in the live audience often feel an increase in energy; a feeling of happiness 


71



and joy -- an overall uplifting experience from being in the energies of these beings. Also by reading 

transcripts, many people can feel a similar thing, because the energies are put into the words in the 

transcripts. I am not going to comment on how people feel when they listen to Elohim, however; that's a 

very personal experience. 

i.ii.v. RA, The Council of Elohim, The Council of An, and the Council of 12 -- All Familiar Terms! 

There are a few comments I would like to make on the Elohim channeling above, though. First thing, 

they give a rather vague answer to Wynn's question in M-2 above (circa 4:45 into the video) whether 

Elohim has anything to do with being part of the Elohim of the Bible. They reply that they are connected 

"to some degree or another". We know that the Elohim of the Bible are the Sirian Overlords, or whom 

the RA Social Memory Complex (SMC) calls the Orion Group. But we never get a straight answer what 

part they had in the whole Sirian/Orion escapade. I would probably have left it with that, if it wasn't 

because there is more. 

Approximately 2 minutes and 45 seconds into M-2 Elohim say that they are the Council of An, which is 

a division of the Council of Elohim. The Council of Elohim in their turn answer to the Council of 12![2] 

Where have we heard that term before? The reader may not remember off hand, but I talked a lot 

about the Council of 12 in Level I, particularly in PFC Paper #1 of May 5, 2011: "The Marduk Issue and 

the Earth-Bound Anunnaki".[3] The Council of 12 is the Council of the Earthbound Anunnaki (the Sirian 

Alliance), led by Marduk (who is in alliance with his father, Lord ENKI, something we will discuss in a 

later paper). In fact, the friction between the Earthbound Sirians and the Incoming, as described in Level 

I, seems to just be a show for the masses. I believe that scenario was just one of many distractions put 

into play so that the Incoming forces, who are not physical but interdimensional, could invade silently 

without being exposed. I believe Utu Shamash, when he contacted me, had the same intention to 

distract me from the real issue, knowing I would do everything in my power to get the truth out there. 

Figure 2. The Council of 12. 


72



So, now we have the name Elohim, RA, Ptah, and we have the Council of An (we all know who An or 

ANU is in this whole scenario -- the King of Kings of the Anunnaki/Sirians[4]), and the Council of 12. 

These are all indicators that this Elohim group that Daphne and Terry channel have a Sirian connection. 

Are these just coincidences? Why would these channeled sources use all these Sirian names and terms if 

there wasn't a connection? 

But if the RA group is connected with the Sirian Overlords, why do they attack the Orion group, which 

in that case would be like attacking themselves? One option would be because they want to blame 

Orion for the bad ET intervention on Earth in preparation for a future war against Orion, and at the time 

when the RA Material was released (as well as the Cassiopaean Experiment), no one here on Earth knew 

that the Sirian group was led by an Orion rebel -- ENKI, Lucifer himself. No one knew that ENKI came 

from Orion until I revealed it; or rather, those who knew kept quiet about it, because they wanted to put 

ENKI in a good light. By blaming the evil intervention on the Orion "Group", they could get away with it 

without lying. No one expected that the information about ENKI being Orion would be publicly known. 

By the time I'm releasing this information, I still haven't had too many visitors to my website yet, but in 

the future, when it will take off (due to that more and more people will search for the truth), those who 

tried to cover up the fact that ENKI is from Orion and one of the "bad guys" (thereby ENKI himself), will 

not be too happy about that this information is public, and will do what they can to ridicule it. 

If we continue to video M-3 above, in the end Daphne is channeling Archangel Michael, who is later 

toning on a low E, and when people start channeling those archangels, I get suspicious. It never feels 

genuine to me, regardless of which group it is that does it. The video ends with that the host for the 

radio show is breaking out in tears, saying she has never experienced anything like this before. There are 

apparently a lot of energies let loose during these public channel sessions. 

Another thing (which doesn't show in these three videos) is that Elohim allegedly have cured some 

quite sick people. We have already mentioned Wynn's sister, but apparently there are more, and they 

say that if we need them in that respect (or in general) we only have to call for them and they'll come. 

I don't want to pain the Devil on the wall here, but are they doing this to show credibility, or is it 

genuinely done to help us? In the Bible Prophecy it says (and yes, Christians are going to like this!) that 

there will be many deceptions in the End Times, and there will be those who claim they can heal the 

crippled and the blind and resurrect those who have died. But aside from that, the fact (if it is fact) that 

they have done this is something Wynn and his group are advertising to bring more people to listen to 

them, obviously. Wynn also states that the incredible energies of love and light this Elohim group is 

emitting should be evidence enough, as it can't be faked. Without suggesting that they are faked in this 

case, I disagree with Wynn. Channeled sources who don't have our best interest at heart can very well 

mimic high level energies without feeling them themselves. They use our own highest emotions and 

those available in the universe to channel through the vehicle (psychic person) in order to deceive those 

who listen. People can come out from a session feeling incredibly uplifted, and the source can still be of 

ill intent. Unfortunately, this is something few people know about, and if they do, they don't believe it. 

Well, now I've said it (twice), so with that in mind, people have to feel those things out for themselves 

and always look for red flags. When comes to Elohim, the red flags to me are the name Elohim, the 

Council of An, and the Council of 12, in particular. Also their connection with RA and P'taah, which are 

both Sirian terms. I understand if those who attend the sessions want to discard this, because they feel 

so good, but these are strange coincidences nonetheless. Another thing is the Harvest, something I do 

not embrace at all and want to have nothing to do with, personally. 


73



It's up to each and every one to feel the Elohim out. I have listened to them, and I have read Wynn's 

free e-book, but must say that I do not feel those high love and light frequencies those people talk 

about, and overall I wasn't too impressed. What I hear is a channel that often has a hard time finding the 

right words and is sometimes stumbling on them, and it doesn't affect me positively, contrary to some 

other sources. I must say I had a much more positive experience reading the Law of One books (the RA 

Material), listening to the Pleiadians, and Bashar, whom we are going to look into as well in time. 

Figure 3. Wilcock and Free say that Wilcock is a reincarnation of Edgar Cayce 

(Cayce left and Wilcock right). There is undoubtedly a great resemblance. 

Wynn has strongly suggested to me that I read his book, "The Reincarnation of Edgar Cayce", which 

basically supposedly shows evidence that David Wilcock is a reincarnation of Cayce, the famous sleeping 

prophet. Wynn tells me that people have a tendency to look like their previous incarnations, and I agree 

that there is a stunning resemblance between Cayce and Wilcock. Apparently, there is more than just a 

facial expression, but I must confess I haven't read the book yet. If what he's saying is true, I still don't 

find it interesting enough, unless Wilcock starts creating astounding prophecies that come true. More 

people have been famous in their past lives. If I were Aristotle in a past life (and I'm sure I wasn't), I 

would raise my eyebrow, but that's about how interesting that is. Another lifetime, another experience. 

Still, I understand and respect those who want to know such things, so it's seriously just a personal take 

on it. I would never go in regression therapy to find out who I was a few hundred years ago. But for 

those who are interested, Wynn's book may be something to look into. You can see the similarities in 

fig. 3 above. After all, I have stressed in my previous papers that during the time around the nanosecond, 

old souls who have reincarnated here before will show up again, souls such as Tesla, perhaps. 

These geniuses don't want to miss out on these times. Cayce could of course be one of them, as well. 

Besides, there could be something more Wynn is revealing in his book that is more interesting than the 

Cayce connection, and if so, I apologize. Like I said, I haven't read the book. 

But Wilcock is not the only one in this Elohim channeling group who say they are reincarnations of 

famous people. Terry Brown is apparently the same person as St. Catherine of Siena. Again, there is a 

resemblance in the photo they are usually showing to the public, but I can neither confirm, not dispute. 


74



However, when I look at old paintings of St. Catherine, none of them, except the one they selected, is 

showing much of a resemblance with Terry, in my opinion. For the curious, read Wynn's books to make 

up your own mind; I just want to show the reader who these people say they are, and perhaps, if what 

they say is true, it could be the reason why they have abilities to more easily express their psychic 

abilities than the average person. 

In his free e-book, Wynn is asking Elohim about Lucifer. We now know who Lucifer and his Fallen 

Angels are (see previous paper, section, The Orion Group -- Friends or Foes), so I wanted to compare. I 

must say they got it quite right, although they don't do any comparisons with names. But they clearly 

describe the group of star beings who came down here 1/2 million years ago and fought a battle against 

the faction of the Orion Empire, which still was present on Earth. 

i.i.vi. The Possible WingMakers Connection, Elohim Connections with Famous Humans, and Ancient 

Visitations 

In this paper I want to introduce a few sources who have the same cosmic view, and who say they are 

here for the same purpose -- the Harvest. I want the reader to be aware of them and their view on 

cosmos and on we humans, because it becomes relevant when we go into the Galactic Federations in an 

upcoming paper, and Phase II in the Alien Invasion, which is not fantasy, or something I made up. I can 

guarantee you that what I am about to present in a few papers ahead comes directly from the horse's 

mouth. Not many people know about this! 

So let us continue with a few more things about Elohim and the RA Group, and let's look at a few 

answers they gave to questions they were asked. Through these answers, it's easier for us to know them 

better. 

So, like many others, they say that the 3rd Dimension is a lesson in limitation, against odds, to temper 

and strengthen the soul. In addition, each dimension has its own lesson (so here they talk about what 

RA calls densities, while Elohim call it dimensions. This distinction can be confusing to the reader). 

Then there is something they say which caught my attention. The Elohim tell us that after the Atlantis 

disaster, they sent star-seed to Earth in order to help rebuilding what was destroyed in the Flood. They 

were hoping to establish a strong connection between themselves and the Anunnaki star-seed, already 

operating on Earth (the Sirian Alliance). However, Elohim say they were discouraged at the divergence 

of these star-seeds into Earth activities and their forgetfulness of their Elohim origins.[5] 

So here they are clearly telling us that the Sirians once upon a time were Elohim themselves of the 

angelic realm, but had forgotten about their origins (Dr. A.R. Bordon of former LPG-C always said that 

the Ša.AM.i [Sirians] had forgotten who created them, and A.R. didn't know, either). We know from 

Level II that the Sirians were not created by the Mother Goddess herself, or by members of the Orion 

Empire, so Elohim is probably not Orions, although they may very well originate in the 96%, because 

they tell us they exist outside time. On the WingMakers website[6], James talks about a similar (or the 

same?) group as Elohim, but call them the WingMakers. They, too, live outside time and are the creators 

of this universe. James and the WingMakers, however, do have a connection to the Sirian rebel group 

who came to Earth and manipulated human DNA, and he even uses Utu Shamash's Winged Sun Disc as 

one of his logos. However, according to what Elohim say here, the Sirians were supposedly a part of 


75



them, but have descended, just like we did when we were tricked into taking 3D bodies which would 

keep us trapped in 3D. The Sirians' situation is a little different however. 

If it wasn't for the other evidence discussed earlier in this paper, I would find it possible that the 

Elohim are actually of the Orion Empire, and in fact the angelic beings who did not rebel together with 

Lucifer/ENKI. That would explain how Archangel Michael can be a part of this group. However, with 

what I know, it makes very little sense that the Elohim are the angels who didn't fall, and Archangel 

Michael is not an individual, but whomever is leading the Orion defense forces at the moment. 

Figure 4. Joseph Smith encountering the Elohim (first vision) 

Joseph Smith, who had an angelic encounter with higher beings before he founded the Mormon 

Church, also talked to the Elohim group. However, there are contradictions saying that the Book of 

Mormons was written before Smith had his visions, and not the other way around.[7] After have 

researched the First Vision, which was the most important one for Smith, it sounds to me like another 

encounter with Lord ENLIL, or perhaps even Lord ENKI. Although Smith never identified the two 

personages, or angels, that he saw, the Church of Latter Day Saint interpret them as visions of God and 

his son, Jesus Christ (ENKI and MARDUK?). Smith is told by these angelic beings that he shouldn't join 

any existing church, because they are all false, but he should start studying the Commandments. Also, 

these beings came down in a pillar of light, just like "God" almost always did in the Bible (except in 


76



incidents like that with the Moses and the burning bush). If these beings were the same Elohim as we 

are talking about here (and they say they are), I have a hard time not relating them to the Fallen Angels. 

There were apparently a few Elohim star-seed (star-seed in this case referring to those who chose to 

incarnate on Earth, or visit the Earth plane) who after all have incarnated here on Earth (while there is 

another group who chose to never to that, so at least some of the Elohim stayed pure in their original 

form), and according to this channel, they volunteered to do so in order to uplift the planetary vibration 

so it would help us evolve. However, it was not always successful because of the Veil (of forgetfulness). 

Once an Elohim incarnated in a human body, they forgot who they were and their connection with the 

divine. 

The Elohim also had an "occurrence" here 60 million years ago, when there were gold miners on 

Earth (before the Sirians came). However, that occurrence did not pan out well, they said (60 million 

years ago was shortly after the dinosaurs disappeared, which means that the Elohim possibly made 

contact with the Vegan group who was here at that time and created a reptilian/humanoid race, based 

on earthly reptiles and Vegan genes [see Level I, Genesis Paper #1 (March 31, 2011): "Human Origins 

and the Living Library"]). 

Then, at another occasion they made contact with King Solomon, a contact which panned out in a 

more constructive manner, they say. 

Like I mentioned, the star-seed who incarnated here soon forgot who they were due to the Veil, but 

still others came after, totally certain that the Veil would not affect them. They came to Earth to rescue 

those of their own star-seed who had gotten lost here in the reincarnation cycle. The rescuers, of 

course, got trapped too, in spite of their conviction. It's interesting that they didn't learn from their 

mistake, and instead did the same thing over and over again, despite the fact that they obviously knew 

how the Veil works. These lost star-seeds are supposedly still here, being somewhat more "enlightened" 

than the average human, but don't know why they are different. They are just waiting to be able to 

remember. 

I found a quote in Wynn's e-book which I found quite educating, and which corresponds with what I 

have been teaching as well. I think it's in order to re-emphasize it, because it is important. 

"The idea of possessions was the foundation for the growth of the negative realm. The many 

factors and complications that became involved led to the third dimensional reality that humans 

experience today. A human can reclaim his innate divine powers of creation by stepping out of 

all these possessions and ownerships and by returning again into the realm of creation and love. 

They don’t have to relinquish their possessions, just their attachments to them."[8] 

The reason I want to emphasize this is because people think, I have noticed, that in order to be 

"spiritual", they need to let go of material possessions. Not so. You can have as much as you need and it 

won't hurt in this life or in afterlife, as long as you are able to let go of your attachments to them. 

For a while, in the beginning of researching the Elohim, I thought they looked at creation from a 

feminine standpoint, and I thought that maybe these guys are different after all; especially as they said 

that they look upon themselves as more feminine than masculine because they have the power to 


77



create. However, as I continued reading, I noticed that, like so many other channeled sources, they 

addressed the Creator as He. 

Another thing I find odd is when they explain how we achieve what we want in life. In the e-book, 

they took an example of someone who has a bad eye-sight, and who worked very hard to get a better 

eye-sight, but didn't succeed. Then he said to himself, "I will never get 20-20 eye-sight". It was then, 

when the person saw it for what it was that his eye-sight got better. In fact, this person gave up and 

started thinking in the negatives, which does not normally give people what they need. Positive 

thoughts give positive outcomes and negative thoughts give negative outcomes. A godly group like the 

Elohim should know this. Another red flag. 

Lastly, I want to emphasize that many of the things I have pointed out here are things that either 

differ from many other sources, align with the same, or clash with my own research. I want to add, 

before we go on to the next source, that there are also a lot of things told by the Elohim that I agree 

with and is in accordance with my own research. This is often the case with many sources; they can 

teach us a lot (and they do), but we must question their motives before we dedicate too much of our 

time to them. Most of them (if not all) have their own agenda, which can be a very bad thing for us, but 

doesn't have to be. It all depends on what the agenda is, and if it benefits us as well. Always make sure 

you find out what their agenda is, and even if it seems okay, always be alert and read between the lines, 

but without becoming paranoid about it. It's a skill to be able to step back from some material and take 

a new look at it from another angle. Does it still hold water? It's not easy, I know, but we all need to 

practice this skill, or we'll be deceived, time after another. And don't be afraid or ashamed of being 

deceived, either; we all are once in a while. So am I, but that's how we learn. 

The Elohim, like so many other metaphysical sources, have a very positive thing in common that I find 

is appropriate to mention here, because the Elohim are big on it as well. It has to do with nuclear 

weapons. Those who study the UFO phenomenon and exopolitics[def] usually know that ETs often show 

up around power plants. Some of them use craft that are able to misdirect nuclear explosions, because 

they are so incredibly destructive -- not only for life here on Earth, but in other dimensions as well. They 

also mention that it is better to get a secondary effect from a nuclear blast than to die in the blast itself. 

If a being dies in the original blast, there is a big chance they lose their soul matrix, as the Elohim 

explains it, and struggles to find it. They say, "It [the soul matrix] misshapes itself into the vestiges of 

whatever portion of the blast it finds itself in in an effort to maintain form..."[9] This is a nicer way of 

saying that the blast destroys the avatar, and the fires get dispersed and can't find each other again to 

create or maintain a form. The fires split up in thousands of pieces, like the shattered pieces of a vase 

dropped on the floor. They have nowhere to go and will eventually return to becoming one with the 

universe again - the person loses his/her personality. The Elohim say that if there is one prayer they 

recommend, it is that which addresses the end of nuclear power in the weapon industry. 

With that we're going to leave the Elohim for now, but have reasons to come back to them in a later 

paper, which talks about the ascension process, abductions, and a lot more. We will also touch on this 

group in the Galactic Federations paper later on. 

i.ii. The Cassiopaeans 

The Cassiopaeans, just like the Elohim and RA are a Social Memory Complex (SMC) and are basically 

"channeled" by three people -- one channeler, one questioner, and one scribe. I put "channeled" within 


78



parentheses, because this source is not exactly channeled, and this group of people would agree with 

me. They are actually using an Ouija board when communicating with the source. 

This source has been channeled for approximately 20 years now (since 1994), and there are lots of 

transcripts available for free online.[10] Their web address is, http://cassiopaea.org/. The people behind 

this, what they call The Cassiopaean Experiment are Laura Knight-Jadczyk, Fred, and Paul (the two latter 

are usually not addressed by last name). All the three of them are quite sure that it is Laura who is the 

cause of the information transfer, and that it is more or less because of her that the Cassiopaeans 

managed to get in touch with this group, although they also say that Fred could probably go ahead and 

channel from morning until dark. Laura says the Cassiopaeans are probably something from her 

subconscious mind, or what Carl Jung called collective unconscious. 

i.ii.i. Being us in the Future 

When the Cassiopaeans first contacted them via the Ouija board, they said they were we humans in 

the future, or a "Higher Self", which is more evolved than we are at the present here on Earth. Like so 

many others, they tell us that time is simultaneous, and this is the reason why this source can contact us 

from the future. They also say they are us in 6th Density. 

Important to stress here is that the Cassiopaeans (from here on interchangeably called the Cassios) 

are not "aliens" or "discarnate entities". Here is what they say about themselves: 

"We are you in the Future. We transmit 'through' the opening that is presented in the locator 

that you represent as Cassiopaea, due to the strong radio pulses aligned from Cassiopaea, which 

are due to a pulsar from a neutron star 300 light years behind it, as seen from your locator. This 

facilitates a clear channel transmission from 6th density to 3rd density."[11] 

We are hearing this concept a lot when comes to channeling; the source is us in the future. The alert 

reader then must be thinking, "How can all these different sources be us in the future?" They are 

different entities; they transfer from different locations in time/space, and they have slightly different 

things to tell us (although the main message is usually similar). The answer is quite simple if we 

understand the concept of probable futures. We are standing before crossroads all the time as 

individuals and as a collective consciousness. The possible reason why we have so many sources 

contacting us at this point is because we now stand before a major crossroads; a fork in the road. We 

are not talking about only two possible futures for mankind, but an almost endless amount of them. And 

it's not that the entire mankind is going to choose one distinct future; we are going to be divided into 

different timelines -- different multiverses, even. 

Earlier I have talked about how each person lives in his own version of the Multiverse. Every time you 

make a decision, ad put thought, emotion, and action behind it, you slightly change the fluid Multiverse 

you live in. With time, you have made a lot of decisions, and depending on what these decisions are will 

determine how your Multiverse will look like. See, we are all creators in our own rights; even if you do 

nothing, that's a decision, too. So, not only does each person create their own Multiverse, but each 

decision also affects the whole mass consciousness of humankind. Each decision, unless it's a major one 

which is changing the path of the whole mankind at once, only has a little effect on the whole, but still it 

has an effect. Eventually, those who are somewhat likeminded will end up in one grouping, and those 


79



who think differently, in another. It happens all the time, whether it's a nano-second or not, but at this 

time the energies are extra strong, and our decisions have more power. 

i.ii.ii. Transmitting from Different Futures 

I have talked about the Machine Kingdom, and I have talked about going back to nature, and 

everything in between. This is what "the fork in the road" is about in the beginning of the New Era. Our 

DNA is activated and our neurology strengthened, and it's all ready to be used as soon as we can 

penetrate the Grid. How we use it is each and everyone's choice. Many people who read this may think 

that if you choose the Machine Kingdom, there is a particular world you will end up living in, while if you 

use nature, there's another. This is not entirely so, because there will be slightly different versions of 

either or, and everything in between. This can probably be best illustrated in the diagram below: 

Figure 5. Future probabilities. 

Here we see how the probabilities branch out. Still, in a diagram like this, there are only so many 

branches visible due to limited space. In reality, there are a myriad of them. Hence you can see that 

there are slightly different versions of the Machine Kingdom, from the most extreme to the left, and all 

the way to the far right, where we have the most extreme version of going back to nature, where no 

technology whatsoever is allowed. There is everything in between. 

Now try to picture all these different channeled sources coming from our future, being us in that 

particular realm. If we have the above diagram in mind, we can imagine that different sources come 

from slightly different versions of the above possible futures. This is the reason why the information we 

receive is so similar, but also in some regard also different -- it depends on which probability of our 

future the channeled source comes from. Laura Knight-Jadczyk explains it pretty well when she says that 

the Cassios come from her subconscious (or rather, the unconscious, I would say) mind. If all time is 

simultaneous, her future, and the future of those who will choose the same probability as she will, are 

the Cassios, once Laura's soul group has reached the 6th Density and become a Social Memory Complex. 


80



Elohim and RA come from a slightly different time perspective, signifying Terry's, Wynn's, and Daphne's 

probable future, and Don Elkins', Carla Rueckert's, and Jim McCarthy's probable future, respectively. 

Interestingly enough, when Don Elkins committed suicide, his group of channelers chose a different 

probable future from that which the RA Collective comes from, and once Elkins unexpectedly killed 

himself, RA could no longer get through, because the timeline changed. Amazing, isn't it? 

Now imagine something James (Mahu Nahi) of the WingMakers said back in the 2008 interview with 

Project Camelot. He said that ANU, the King of the Anunnaki (Sirians), has the technology and 

knowledge how to master the lines of time. Thus, he can manipulate different timelines in the 4% 

universe and this way be more or less ahead of the game. So perhaps the Sirians (ANU, MARDUK, and 

ENKI in particular, together with their minions) sit "on top" of these timelines and channel information 

through us to indoctrinate the "spiritual movement" aka the New Age movement in this particular time 

to prevent certain futures to manifest. Also, if they failed on their mission in the future, they may try to 

change their past (our present) in their favor. Something to ponder, perhaps? 

i.ii.iii. The Channeled Sources -- Do We Really Need Them As Much As They Need Us? 

There seem to be two major official reasons why channeled sources want to communicate with 

humans. The first reason is to take us through the Harvest and prepare us for that event. The second 

reason is (like in the case of the Pleiadians) that they are unhappy in the future in which they live and 

want to change the timeline that created the tyrannical present they are currently experiencing. Hence, 

the best way to do that is to go back to a "hub" in time, which apparently is normally at the end of an 

old era and the beginning of a new, when stronger possibilities are created. They want to change the 

time they are in by having us make "better" choices, which will affect their timeline. This way they hope 

that their tyranny will cease to exist. Some do this with force (negative entities), while others (like the 

Pleiadians) do it by educating us so we can make better choices, but without forcing their ideas on us. 

We need to ask the questions and they provide answers, which are only partial answers, leading to 

additional questions that the listener/reader has to research themselves. Laura tells us the same thing; 

the Cassios give them clues that they have to spend a lot of time researching. 

Now we must ask ourselves, do we need these metaphysical sources in order to advance spiritually, 

or are they all more an obstacle in our progress? Aren't they inflicting on Free Will? 

To answer the last question first, they seldom are. They say that they came because they were called 

for. This is probably true. Someone asked them to come in; if no one else, the channeler probably did, 

consciously or unconsciously. But do we need them? That's a question that is more difficult to answer. 

If I answer for myself, I would say they can be most useful because of the information they are 

providing us with. So long as we are aware of their agendas, we can possibly benefit from the learning 

process. I must say that without them, my own learning process would probably have been much 

slower. So in that regard, the answer is yes (taking into consideration that we can discern between good 

and bad information). But what about their agendas? Do we want to help them, or in some cases, help 

them to help us? 

There is a great reward for everybody when we can help each other when help is asked for, but the 

question is if we understand their agenda well enough to be sure we make the right decision. I am not 


81



so sure about that, in general. It would be relatively easy for them to make something up and tell us that 

this is the reason they are here. In fact, I have proof that this is the case, at least when it comes to one 

source, as we shall see when we get to the Galactic Federations paper. To begin with, before they 

showed their real face, it would have been pretty hard to know that these entities were outright lying 

(and eventually admitted to it). 

I am bringing up the Cassios as number three of the channeled sources, after RA and Elohim, because 

they belong to the same "group" of sources as I see it. With that I mean that they are all here for the 

Harvest. Another thing all three of them (and there are more) say they are riding on a Wave of 

Consciousness, sweeping across the galaxy faster than light, and when that wave reaches our solar 

system, ascension will occur for those who are prepared. Those who have their heart chakras 51% or 

more open will ascend together with Planet Earth to the 4th Density. The rest of the population will be 

recycled onto another planet in the galaxy, light-years away from Earth, where they will re-experience 

3rd Density once again for another 75,000 years. 

But this can't be too bad, can it? After all, if they are us in the future, it seems like they survived, and 

are now in a much higher density. So, what's the problem? Why not just go along with whatever 

happens? 

Well, the question arises, if they are us in the future and have reached that high, why do they need to 

help us? They have already achieved so much, and apparently we made the "right" choice which 

brought them to where they are now. And that is exactly the problem! Why do they have to come here? 

They say that for them to continue up to the next density, they have to go back in time and "take care of 

business", which is usually to make amends for bad things they did in the time we now live, or slightly 

earlier or later. The Pleiadians have already told us that their ancestors were the Sirian Alliance who 

messed with our DNA (they call them the "lizzies"), so that is in the open. But what about the rest? 

What's their story? Well, RA's story is similar to that of the Pleiadians. They came here and messed up, 

and left without taking responsibility. We have to assume that the rest of the sources have a similar 

story untold. 

I would say that if the place where they are dwelling right now is so fantastic and full of joy, they 

wouldn't have to come back. Something is quite wrong with the time period in which they live (time or 

no time, however they want to look at it from their perspective). If they are positive beings who rebelled 

against the Sirian Alliance here in our time and chose a positive timeline, they wouldn't need to come 

back to assist us (make amends). So I think we can at least assume that most, if not all of the sources 

who are channeled, data streamed, or contacted via an Ouija board, are somehow connected to the 

Machine Kingdom timelines. 

After I'd researched and cross-referenced the different channeled sources for a while, I thought they 

may all be different variations of Sirians, trying to deceive us from different angles, but it doesn't 

necessarily have to be that way. As I looked deeper into this subject, I came to the insight that the 

sources chose vehicles (channelers) who were directly connected to their timeline -- the timeline which 

it looks like they want to change. If you once again look at the diagram (fig. 5) and picture the arrows 

going from 2013 toward the Machine Kingdom, they symbolize slightly different timelines, all connected 

to this technological empire which is quickly being built in front of our eyes as we speak. If you then can 

imagine how additional arrows are branching out from the Machine Kingdom and further into the 

future, you can also imagine the different channeled sources sitting on top of some of these arrows, 


82



contacting somebody here in our reality, hoping to create a change in our time so that it affects them 

positively. 

These sources may very well be the future versions of the Powers That Be, some can be Sirians, while 

others are regular people who chose a timeline where a particular source is dwelling. They know they 

can't really lie to us, or it will defeat their purpose, but they can manipulate us if they want to. However, 

we must assume that much of the information they are giving us is true from their perspective, but not 

necessarily from another source's perspective, because their overall experience is different. Therefore 

it's so important to use discernment. 

i.ii.iv. The Hybridization of Mankind and its Implications 

Now that we know the main topics upon which the Cassios agree with the former sources we've 

mentioned, let's go through some more distinct information that is not necessarily unique to the 

Cassios, but more rare and important in respect to what we're going to discuss in the future. The first 

thing is cloning. The Cassios are warning us from these things on many occasions, which makes me think 

that this version of our future selves (the Cassios, that is) may very well come out of the Machine 

Kingdom, in which cloning will be a big part. 

In a transcript from 2010 the discussion circles around abductions. Laura is asking the Cassios what 

the purpose is with the alien abductions. First of all, which we have discussed elsewhere, the abductions 

are not always alien in nature. The most common are abductions done by the military or the military 

and ETs in conjunction. One of the major operations, according to the Cassios, is not only to create 

clones, but to create what they call "replacements". And with replacements they mean replacements of 

us! Listen to this: 

"You see, if one desires to create a new race, what better way than to mass hybridize, then mass 

reincarnate. Especially when the host species is so forever ignorant, controlled, and 

anthropocentric. What a lovely environment for total destruction and conquest and 

replacement… see?"[12] 

And what kind of hybrids do "they" have in mind? Well, we have discussed that too, but once again, 

they want to create an enhanced human; a new species that is more evolved, but still has the Fire of the 

Goddess intact, and in which they, the Sirians, can incarnate, so they can experience all the wonders 

possible in our divine bodies. This, the Sirians have one thing in common with those who think like me, 

who want to evolve our bodies and minds so we can use our body potentials to their maximum. The 

difference, however, is that I and my likeminded want to do it without using technology. 

But that is not all of it, and it's not what I think the Cassios are talking about. Most alien abductions 

are orchestrated by the "Grays", who in this case are...who? Well, whom have the Grays often been 

seen together with? Yes, the Sirians in human bodies (the so-called "Nordics"). Let's think of it this way: 

once the Sirians are established here, they can genetically manipulate human bodies and use them here 

in 3D, but what kind of bodies would be optimal for the Sirians to use when they travel long distances in 

their hollowed-out craft? There are currently top secret projects, leaked by whistle-blowers, where 

scientists are working on creating a hybrid which is well suited for space travel outside the solar system. 

And how does this hybrid look like? It looks almost exactly like the Gray alien we are so used to seeing in 


83



drawings, science fiction movies, and all over the Internet! Any why would they look like the Grays? 

Because it has shown that this kind of body is one of those best suited for space travel due to its 

resilience and ability to adapt. It can also successfully withstand radiation in space, long term. This is the 

body NASA and other more secret space agencies are planning on using in the future for interstellar 

travel. All they need is the technology to transfer a soul from a human body to the "Gray". Once that is 

done, we're good to go. Of course, we also need an interstellar spaceship which can go through 

stargates, at least as long as we're keeping things on a 3D level. 

Figure 6. (left) Gray Sirian. Figure 7. (right) Nordic Sirians. 

What I am trying to say here is that what about if the Grays that have been seen together with the 

"Nordics" are no less than Sirians in interstellar space suits? "As above, so below". The only thing the 

Sirians need to do is to transfer soul essence to the Gray body and they are ready to go. Not to confuse 

these Grays with real Grays, however, who exist as well. Many say that Grays are very common in this 

galaxy and the next, the Andromeda. They have a better survival potential than let's say the humanoid 

body. The Sirians know this and seem to have managed to hybridize their own bodies with that of the 

Grays (some say they used the Grays from Zeta Reticuli as templates) and use them to travel between 

the stars. 

But why do they need to experiment with human bodies here on Earth and mess with our DNA again 

in this respect? If they want humans to be space travelers in the future, and perhaps build an army, why 

not use the Sirian/Zeta template to transport human souls into? 

The reason is possibly that the Sirian/Zeta hybrid has a problem when they are coming to Earth. We 

see them on the surface every now and then, but sooner rather than later they have to leave; they can't 

handle the effects from our Sun for a very long time, as it seems. Some Sirians were ordered to stay a 

long time ago, and some were left behind for unknown reasons. These Grays had to move underground, 

and there is where people like Phil Snyder found them and started battling with them decades ago. They 

are still down there. Keep in mind that the Gray template is not like a real space suit that you can take 

on and off; when a Gray hybrid is stuck here, they are stuck with the hybrid body, because they 

transferred soul essence from a real Sirian body into a Gray template, which now became their body 

until they have the chance to switch back. 

The Sirians don't want to face this problem when humans are transferring their soul essence to a Zeta 

template, so they need to experiment with human DNA and mix it with the Zetas' so humans in Gray 

space suits can live on Earth as well. Then they clone the improved body type. This whole scenario could 


84



very well be the reason why sources like the Cassiopaeans and the Pleiadians suggest we don't start a 

big cloning process; it will affect them negatively in the future. 

This is one major reason for abductions. Earth is going to be a strange place only a few decades into 

the future if the Sirians get what they want. First we are going to have normal humans like we have 

today (but much fewer of them); then we're going to have human hybrids who look almost identical to 

the Zeta Grays, but that's not enough. Studies have shown that medical research teams, taking order 

from the Global Elite, put nano-particles in pharmaceuticals. In practice, this means that people who 

take certain medicine (so far it's mainly antidepressants that are effected) are going to have their body 

structure slowly but surely altered, and so also their DNA. If this technology speeds up like it's supposed 

to do, we will see many human cyborgs by the year 2034, apparently![13] In case this article is correct, 

some of us are going to experience this in our current lifetime! Things like this signifies the extension of 

the Machine Kingdom that many people are going to find attractive at first, until they notice, much too 

late, that it's the worst trap they have ever sat in, perhaps since the beginning of time. 

There are more reasons for kidnapping people than we may think, so let me mention a few more. 

The following is not the most common example, but important. The Alliance were kidnapping 

children in the beginning to the mid-1970s and experimented on them. Later on in life, these kids 

remember the little gray men who stood over them at the operation table, and they told their parents 

that strange little men were running around outside the house, or even inside the house. No one else 

could see them. The Alliance wanted 12 candidates for the "Maitreya", i.e. a new Messiah, whom is 

supposed to act as the Messiah of the New Age. The old Theosophical Society, founded by Madame 

Helena Blavatsky in the 1800s, and who channeled the Ascended Masters of the Great White 

Brotherhood, foresaw such a person coming into being at a later time. Today, Benjamin Crème, who is 

also connected to the Theosophists and the Great White Brotherhood, has made it his life mission to 

find this Maitreya. He has mentioned a few people whom he thought could be the candidates, and one 

of them was even seen together with George Bush Sr., but so far they haven't succeeded in finding him. 

The latest from Benjamin Crème is that he thinks Michael Lee Hill may be the candidate. Hill certainly 

fits the picture with abductions and little gray men. 

Another self-proclaimed candidate is Supriem David Rockefeller, about whom I wrote an e-book in 

2009.[14] The latest I heard from him was shortly after 12/21/2012 (which is also his birthday). A friend 

of his, whom I know well enough to know he's honest, got a phone call from Supriem in a luxury hotel in 

Washington DC, where he sat and drank, looking out over a big pool inside the hotel room. He told his 

friend that it was time to skip all the public distractions like Facebook and similar, and shortly after he 

deleted his Facebook account, and no one has heard from him since then. However, when I was in touch 

with him in 2009-2010, he told me that one day he was going to exchange those jeans he had for 

expensive suits and start mingling with very rich and powerful people who were going to help him to 

power. A year later, he started dressing up considerably, and now he "disappears" from public exposure 

while in a luxury hotel in the U.S. Capitol... 

People like Ben Crème are oblivious of what is really going on behind the scenes. They are just 

dedicated to a mission which is orchestrated by those behind the scenes; they don't know the whole 

picture. And who is behind the scenes on this, by the way? Who is deciding which candidate is going to 

be chosen? Well, I certainly got a clue when I talked to the Illuminati in Great Britain. This group says 

they are the same group as Adam Weishaupt's Bavarian Illuminati, who once upon a time started the 

French Revolution, the Russian Revolution, and were part in orchestrating the American Revolution as 


85



well. Weishaupt was friends with both George Washington and other prominent Founding Fathers 

before he and his organization had to flee underground in Germany. Letters between Weishaupt and 

the Founding Fathers still exist. I always call this present group The Bavarian Illuminati, albeit they only 

call themselves the Illuminati these days, not to be confused with the Global Elite group so many people 

(including this author) have worked on exposing. 

Mike Hockney, who is the public writer in their society, told me that there is a very top secret Secret 

Society behind the scenes, which call themselves The Brotherhood of Shadows.[15] Their main task is to 

produce these 12 candidates, who will then compete for the title of "Maitreya", and the "strongest man 

wins". According to The Bavarian Illuminati, the other 11 candidates will be killed. Nothing is said what 

will really happen to the chosen one; will he be a human soul in a hybridized body, or will a Sirian soul 

take over? My guess is definitely the latter. 

Another more common reason for the abductions these days is cloning. The Cassiopaeans talk about 

this to some extent, and it has to do with the Superwave (or the Wave as many of the channeled sources 

call it), on which they say they're riding. We are going to spend a whole paper talking about this wave 

soon, and it's obvious that it's not only good star beings riding on the Wave. The Cassios say that a lot of 

cloning of humans is taking place right now to prepare for when the Wave arrives. When it does, they 

want to have a lot of soulless bodies waiting for them which they will try to enter en masse with the 

energies of the Wave. However, they don't mention who these beings are that's going to "enter en 

masse" into these soulless bodies. When the Cassios are saying "they", meaning negative beings, they 

are often talking about the Orion Group, aka the Sirian Alliance. This goes hand in hand with my own 

conclusion, and my own conviction is that many beings of the Alliance have already entered such bodies 

and are walking among us. Behind the scenes, they are then preparing for the Wave to arrive, 

apparently. 

i.ii.v. An Interesting Connection! 

In a session dated October 23, 1994, the Cassiopaeans reveal that they are not only the forerunner to 

the RA Collective with a purpose to take off where RA ended, but they also claim to be RA![16] They 

reply to a question about where the RA Material comes from with a short, "us." This, to me, is quite an 

interesting statement, to say the least. If this is true, it is actually a mind expander and could explain a 

lot. I will later in this paper expand on the concepts and terms included in the Elohim Material as well as 

both the RA Material and the Cassiopaean Experiment, which all lean towards that they are connected 

to the Sirians. The above statement from the Cassios, however, is quite a blunt one, confirming my 

hypothesis. 

This is also the reason why I have divided the channeled sources into different categories. This paper 

is exclusively dedicated to those who promote the Harvest and are talking about the Wave Riders. 

Although I can't prove it 100%, I think I can prove without any reasonable doubt that these sources are 

connected to the Sirians, "love & light" or no love and light. Also, as the reader knows by now, I have 

spent quite some time listening to Pleiadian lectures and read all of Barbara Marciniak's books, and the 

Pleiadians have no problems admitting that they are connected to the Sirian Alliance, although they are 

supposedly a rebel group (and I believe them). My point here is that I know the Pleiadians pretty well, 

and the information they are giving us are well in line with that of the "Harvest channels" I'm 

investigating in this paper, except that the Pleiadians are openly against the Harvest and the concepts of 

STO and STS as well as Galactic Federations. They are basically the ones who inspired me to further look 


86



into these things, and so far I have found that they are right on the spot! However, being 

Sirians/Pleiadians in their essence, they still have the Sirian way of expressing themselves, and I 

recognize it in Utu Shamash, with whom I've had contact, but also in the Harvest channels. 

i.ii.vi. Orions -- "The Transient Passengers" 

The terms STO and STS (service-to-others and service-to-self) are extremely important to the sources 

we've covered so far, because they are the terms which we need to understand and live by if we want to 

ascend and be part of the Harvest, according to them. Also, when talking about different star races, 

these channeled sources often speak of them in terms of STO and STS. So, when they mention the 

Orions, they say there are two types of Orions; the STO and the STS. The STS is the group that came to 

Earth and started manipulating human DNA (the Sirian Alliance, led by ENKI), while the STO Orions are 

those of the Empire (acknowledging the Mother Goddess as the Creator). 

The STO Orions are also, say the Cassiopaeans, called The Transient Passengers. This means that they 

are a "unified thought form". The Orions thus could create matter from a unified thought form (this is 

how the Cassios explain it, and it makes me think about how the Goddess created the Galaxies, nebulae, 

stars, and planets etc.). But the interesting thing is that they say that the Orions created them, the 

Cassiopaeans![17] 

So, if the Cassiopaeans are us in the future, are they saying that we humans once upon a time were 

created by the benevolent Orions, i.e. the Mother Goddess and her Helpers? As a matter of fact, they 

do! They are saying that our home (the home of mankind) is in Orion. Laura and her group are 

protesting, because they learned from Lyssa Royal and Keith Priest and their Zeta Reticuli channeling 

that mankind's cradle stood in Lyra. The Cassios, however, say that this is not the case, and that one day 

we will see... (Note: When a channeled source says they are us in the future, it doesn't necessarily mean 

they are humans in the future. A great example are the Pleiadians, who explain this phenomenon pretty 

well. They also say that they are us in the future, and still they are the Pleiadian/Sirians. How is that 

possible? Well, it has to do with genetic manipulation again. Because we humans have a lot of 

Sirian/Pleiadian genes in us, they say they are us in the past and in the future, even if this is a relative 

truth. Utu Shamash also claimed that we and they are the same. I am pretty sure the same thing goes 

for the three channeled sources I've investigated so far). 

Here is how the Cassiopaeans expressed it in regards to the Orions (A = the Cassiopaeans, and Q = the 

Questioner, while (L) within parentheses is Laura Knight-Jadczyk): 

A: "In this part of your 3rd and 4th density universe, specifically your “galaxy” it is the region 

known as Orion that is the one and only indigenous home of human type beings … reflect on 

this! Indigenous home base, not sole locator. What you are most in need of review of is the 

accurate profile of “alien” data." 

Q: I thought that humans originated in Lyra and then a war broke out there and they ended up 

in Orion. 

A: Lyra is not inhabited. There have been homes in all places, but some were/are transitory, and 

some are not. Pay attention to Orion! This is your ancestral home, and your eventual 


87



destination. Here is the absolutely accurately accurate profile of Orion to follow: This is the most 

heavily populated region of your Milky Way galaxy! This is a region that extends across 3rd and 

4th density space for a distance as vast as the distance between your locator and it. There are 

3,444 inhabited “worlds” in this region. Some are planets as you know them. Some are 

artificially constructed planetoids. Some are floating space barges. And some are “satellites.” 

There are primary homes, traveling stations and incubator laboratories all in 2nd, 3rd and 4th 

densities. There are overseer zones in 5th and 6th densities. [...] The name “Orion” is the actual 

native name, and was brought to Earth directly... 

Q: (L) Are the Orion STS the infamous redheaded Nordic aliens? 

A: Yes, and all other humanoid combinations. 

Q: (L) Okay, if it started with the Nordic types, and that is where the other humanoid 

combinations came from, what genetic combinations were used for human beings? Black 

people, for instance, since they are so unlike Nordics? 

A: The Nordic genes were mixed with the gene pool already available on Earth, known as 

Neanderthal.”[18] 

The above information is coinciding with my own research as presented in Level II. I don't know what 

they mean when they say that Lyra is not inhabited, because I know that at least Vega is, and the Vegans 

(resembling the Vulcans in Star Trek) are to some degree Helpers of the Mother Goddess, although 

some fell for Lucifer's manipulating talk and rebelled against the Goddess together with others, 

mentioned earlier. The Nordics, like I said before, are the STS Orions, i.e. ENKI's group, who used the 

Neanderthals and later Cro Magnon to create the human slave race. 

i.ii.vii. The Giants of Ancient Times 

Many alternative historians talk about a civilization of old, which dwelled in what we now call 

Antarctica. Now it's covered with layers upon layers of ice and snow, but at that time it was a very 

prosperous land, teeming with life. The Cassiopaeans say this land was called Gor (not related to the 

novels by John Norman or any science fiction novel or film), and that it was inhabited by a humanoid 

species, 18 feet tall.[19] When I first read about this in their transcript, I thought they were talking about 

the Namlú'u; the human race which was here when ENKI and the Sirians came, but the Cassios say that 

this race was sexual (males and females) and they were not interested in space travel. 

The height may correspond, but the Namlú'u were androgynous. When comes to space travel, what 

the Cassios say, I would say is semi-correct if we refer to the Namlú'u. They were probably not 

particularly interested in space travel, either, being the Guardians of the Living Library, but they were 

multidimensional, and could travel the universe by splitting their fire/soul. 

Therefore, I don't think the Cassiopaeans refer to the Namlú'u, but an older race. After all, there were 

several experiments carried out here long before the Namlú'u. Apparently, this ancient race of giants 

didn't only dwell in Antarctica, we later find out, but they could also be found in South America, in the 

Amazon. Here they walk about the legend of the Amazon warriors, and in that case they are referring to 

the Orions. However, they get it mixed up somehow, because the Amazon warriors were females. They 


88



say that the governments know about this race and have found remnants which they keep in 

warehouses somewhere, and they have no intention to tell the public. Albeit, we have seen pictures on 

the Internet of extremely tall skeletons that archeologists have dug up. Some of these may very well be 

hoaxes, but according to the Pleiadians, many of them are not. It's just the regular routine work of 

Intelligence Agencies to debunk everything that has to do with truth. 

i.ii.viii. Some Final Statements from the Cassiopaeans 

As the reader may have noticed, I am bringing up a lot of subjects told by the different sources, and 

some of them may not even be that relevant to what is to come, and I could just have skipped over it 

and not included it in the papers. However, I decided to write about it anyway, because a comparison 

between the different channeled sources is very rare, if it exists at all, so I thought it may be a good idea 

to present something like that here. It could be a subject for several volumes of books just by itself, and I 

could have decided to complete a project like that as well, but I went for this shortcut instead. Hence, I 

want to end off with a few last statements from the Cassiopaeans. 

Let's start the last part of this paper with some relevant information, however. In a transcript, Laura 

asked the source why the invaders hadn't invaded already full blast, when they have been present on 

the planet for hundreds of thousands of years. The answer that was given was that they don't want to 

rule us in 3D, because they are 4D beings. Therefore they want to rule us in 4D, once we've 

ascended.[20] 

Well, that doesn't sound very encouraging to me. Of course, this already corresponds quite exactly 

with what I've said throughout my papers, although I don't use terms like 3rd and 4th Density when 

comes to evolution. What I hear, translated to what I've been saying, is that the Sirian Alliance want us 

to evolve so that they can take us over once our biology is more in line with their frequency. If we 

expand on this (and the Cassiopaean statement was made almost 20 years ago), the time for the 

invasion would be approximately now (something the Cassios have said as well), because the adequate 

amount of humans have expanded their consciousness enough -- at least in biological terms -- that it's 

easier for the Sirians energy to take over, perhaps after having done certain adjustments. This means 

that those who believe the aliens are our saviors (or "helpers"; it doesn't matter) will be taken 

advantage of, because they are easy targets. The Sirian Overlords usually have no use for the human 

souls who subscribe to the New Age philosophy when comes to the ascension/Harvest process (other 

than for food), but they do have use for the divine human body template, which usually is more evolved 

than that of the regular person on the street. This is why it's so incredibly important that we stop 

agreeing with the Sirian mindset and start seeing through their deception and manipulation, or we'll be 

food, too. 

What the Cassiopaeans are basically saying here is that when we go from 3rd to 4th Density, the 

Sirian Overlords are waiting for us (or for those who follow the path of those metaphysical sources), so 

they can take over the evolved bodies of these people and absorb the soul/fire in order for them to use 

it for their own purposes. 

However, it makes at least me very uncomfortable to hear that once we "evolve" enough for the 

Sirians to think we're "ripe", they can "Harvest" us. The word "harvest" does not have a very positive 

ring to it, does it? Why using that term if it's not exactly what it is: a harvesting of souls to use for very 


89



dark purposes? I want you to think long and deeply about it before you decide to go for something like 

this. 

But, you may say, if I just happen to be the kind of person who has a "big heart" and love to help 

others, won't I automatically go into this trap? After all, they say that if you are 51% or more STO, you 

will be harvested. No, not necessarily, because they also say that you will not be harvested as long as 

you live in your current physical body. Once you die and go to the between lives area, you will be 

harvested if you fit into the category and put into a 4D body, but you can also refuse! You do that by 

saying that you disagree with this and the whole Sirian Agenda. They may tell you that if so, you'll be 

sent to their planet of choice, which has a 3D vibration, and you will have to live another 75,000 years 

cycle there, under continuous slavery. Don't buy it! If you refuse their manipulation, they can't do 

anything; they won't inflict on your Free Will if what you want is appropriately expressed, and also what 

you don't want. Instead, you can go wherever you want to go and just turn your back to the whole thing. 

That is what I am going to do. Those in real danger, in my opinion, are those who buy into this whole 

"love and light" thing when comes to channeled sources; the ones that want to be harvested... 

The source is also contradicting itself when it says that we will be put into 4D bodies between lives. If 

the Harvest process is natural, why do they have to provide us with bodies? 

This is an excerpt from the transcript so you can get a feel for it. To me it doesn't feel good at all. 

"Q: We have to be mostly STO as a planet in order to move to 4th density, right? 

As a “planet,” yes. But I don’t think that is gonna happen. I think that only a few will move to 4th 

density to an either already existing 4th density Earth, or that they will be instrumental in 

CREATING a 4th density Earth, and the rest will start the cycle over again in 3rd density on a 

“primitive” earth… The key lies in how many folks can be “awakened” to the balanced, positivenegative 

nature of cosmic reality. 

Could this be why the STS forces want to “take us over” before and right as we get to 4th so we 

can tip the scales in their favour? 

A: Pretty much it, in one sense. But, there is a more insidious reason… they are working VERY 

hard to PREVENT the graduation of ANY to 4th density. They want to keep ALL of earth as their 

3rd density stockyard, and cafeteria of ethereal and physical food. BUT, if there is a movement 

to 4 D, they want to be in charge of it."[21] 

You can see the similarities with my concept of the splitting of the worlds and their ascension into the 

4th Density. Reading this quote above, however, gives me a good opportunity to also explain the 

difference. My concept is the Machine Kingdom (3D) versus going back to nature (4D). Eventually and 

gradually, over generations, the realities will split. I don't subscribe to a Harvest, where the change will 

be pretty much immediate, and those who go to 4D will be put in a new box with limitations. Once we 

are multi-d, we are free to travel the universe as we please and visit different dimensions and 

"densities". Almost no channeled sources bring up these important subjects. 

Anyway, it's true that the Sirians in certain terms want to prevent us from waking up in its real sense, 

but don't mind us "waking up" to follow the guidelines of these metaphysical sources or to the New Age 

"religion", embracing the Ascended Masters (who are the Sirians in disguise, anyway). It's also true that 


90



they want to keep us as slaves in this 3D reality, but control it from 4D (if we follow the Cassiopaean 

logic). According to the Cassiopaeans, the Sirians of today control our brainwave cycles via HAARP 

(headquartered in Alaska) so we'll stay either in 3D or 4D. This as well, is to me a give-away, because 

they are bluntly telling us that the Sirians are controlling both 3D and 4D with their frequency 

machines!!! So my question is: how can channeled sources embrace the Harvest, whether positive or 

negative, when they say, loud and clear, that the Sirians are waiting on the other side (see also the last 

paragraph in the indented quote above)? If the Sirians want to be in charge of it, how can we prevent 

that from happening once we've agreed to being harvested? They don't tell us. Bottom-line, dear 

reader, is that all these sources we listen to are following their own agenda! They are not doing this to 

be kind! We need to learn this, or we'll dig our own graves! Everybody has the right to do what they 

want to do, but at least I have thrown in my two cents. 

Figure 8. The four outer gas planets in our solar system. All 4D planets? 

In the same session as the quote above, they also mention the infighting between interdimensional 

forces. They say it's ongoing, and it is happening here in Earth vicinity; some of it even in our own 

atmosphere. They are telling us that the abnormal weather changes we are now accustomed to are 

mostly fighting going on in other dimensions, and it is "bleeding through" and showing up as tornados, 

hurricanes, and flooding. This information also aligns with what I've independently received earlier from 

one of my anonymous sources. Also, Jupiter is already a 4th Density planet, which in that case indicates 

that it would be a perfect outpost for the Sirians and others of similar frequency. They tell us moreover 

that 4th Density planets appear as gas planets to 3rd Density beings. This means, in that case, that the 

giant outer planets in our solar system (Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, and Neptune) are all 4D. 

This source also mentions 3 additional planets outside Pluto's orbit, so instead of nine planets (if we 

include Pluto), we have 12, which is the number this universe is based upon, not 7, like the Cassiopaeans 

and a few others want us to believe. The number 7 is definitely a divine number, but this universe is not 

based on it -- not from a human perspective at least. The additional planets, their distances from the 

Sun, their chemical composition, and their diameter, are allegedly as follows: 

NI = Montonanas, 570,000,000,000 miles from Sun; solid matter; 7000 miles diameter 

NII = Suvurutarcar, 830,000,000,000 miles from Sun; 18000 miles diameter; hydrogen, ammonia. 


91



NIII = Bikalamanar, 1,600,000,000,000 miles from Sun; 46000 miles diameter; hydrogen, 

ammonia.[22] 

Pluto's distance from the Sun is about 3,666,100,000 miles, and its diameter is 1,864 miles, in 

comparison, and the Earth is 93 million miles away and has a diameter of 7,900 miles. So, the next 

planet, outside Pluto's orbit, is of solid matter and only a little bit smaller than Earth. 

I've noticed that although the Cassiopaeans in certain terms subscribe to the idea of a feminine 

universe, they say that all gender and all duality disappears in 7th Density, so in their perspective the 

universe is still neuter. They (like so many other metaphysical sources) "forget" that the Sun, and any 

star, including the clusters of suns making up the Galactic Center -- all 7th Density in nature, according 

to the Cassios -- are creative forces on a very high level, and the creative forces on that level are 

feminine in nature and not neuter. The Divine Feminine is the ultimate driving and creative force in this 

universe and others. They also say that gravity is All That Is - light is gravity, too, and on its highest level, 

God is gravity as well. 

And with that we're going to leave the Cassiopaeans for now. Part II will concentrate on other 

channeled sources who do not necessarily concentrate on the Harvest and the Superwave as a part of 

an agenda. 

The Third Level of Learning is mainly focusing on the channeled sources and the Galactic Federations, 

as you will notice as we move on. This is definitely a Level III subject and couldn't have been included in 

Level I or II, unless we wanted to make Level II an extremely long level. The fact remains, the last part of 

this 3 level series of papers needs to concentrate on this subject in order to come full circle. 

Love, 



[1] Source: The FAQ section of "The Creator Gods of the Physical Universe Want to Speak With You" by Wynn Free. 

[2] Source: Free, Wynn: "The Creator Gods of the Physical Universe Want to Speak With You", p.85. 

[3] http://wespenre.com/marduk-issue-and-the-earth-bound-anunnaki.htm 

[4] While I was writing and researching for Level I, LPG-C suggested that ANU had stepped down from the throne in favor of 

Nannar, ENLIL's son, who now supposedly is the King of Nibiru. This is only if we believe this really happened. 

[5] Source: Free, Wynn: "The Creator Gods of the Physical Universe Want to Speak With You", p.66. 

[6] http://wingmakers.com 


92



[7] Source: http://www.mormonthink.com/firstvisionweb.htm#evidencethatbom 

[8] Source: Free, Wynn: "The Creator Gods of the Physical Universe Want to Speak With You", p.77, op. cit. 

[9] ibid., p.104, op. cit. 

[10] http://cassiopaea.org/forum/index.php/board,51.0.html 

[11] Source: http://www.cassiopaea.org/cass/faq.htm 

[12] Source: http://cassiopaea.org/2010/09/15/the-cassiopaeans-answer-questions-about-ascension/ 

[13] This news article was discussed by the Pleiadians and the audience, where many of them had seen it. This discussion is 

included on the Pleiadian CD of 8/11/2012: "View from the Craft", CD #2, track 14. 

[14] http://supriemrockefeller.wordpress.com/ 

[15] Sources: http://www.armageddonconspiracy.co.uk/Supriem-Rockefeller%281584416%29.htm ; 

http://www.armageddonconspiracy.co.uk/The-Satan-Plan%281837991%29.htm ; 

http://www.armageddonconspiracy.co.uk/Exodus%281717365%29.htm ; and http://armageddonconspiracy.co.uk/The-New- 

World-Order%282306375%29.htm 

[16] http://cassiopaea.org/2010/09/16/the-cassiopaeans-and-ra/ 

[17] Source: Cassiopaean Transcript, October 7, 1994 (http://cassiopaea.org/2010/09/16/the-cassiopaeans-and-ra/). 

[18] Source: http://cassiopaea.org/2012/03/24/the-wave-chapter-68-as-above-so-below/, op. cit. 

[19] Source: http://cassiopaea.org/2010/09/15/questions-from-readers-crystals-shems-4-d-takeover-and-music/ 

[20] ibid. 

[21] ibid., op. cit. 

[22] Source: http://cassiopaea.org/2010/10/05/hoagland-hyperdimensions-space-and-time/ 


93



Paper #4: Channeled Entities Part II -- 

-- Channeling the Grays 

by Wes Penre, Wednesday, February 20, 2013 


I. Abstract. A Short Summary so Far 

In the previous paper, and the latter half of the paper before that, we were talking about the 

channeled sources who had one obvious theme in common -- the Harvest of Souls! When we look at 

these different sources one at the time, we tend to think that they are all separate from each other, 

telling their stories based upon what the questioners ask them. 

However, if we cross-reference them we find something very different. It's hard not to get the feeling 

that they are all connected somehow, and at first we feel it, but we don't know why. Then we notice 

that they all use terms we've heard so much before, and they are all Sirian terms, such as the RA 

Material (MARDUK RA); Elohim (the Anunnaki/Sirians); Council of An (ANU being the King of the 

Anunnaki); the Council of 12 (ENKI/MARDUK'S council to decide what to do with us "lulus"); the Council 

of Elohim (which would be the Higher Council in the Sirian Hierarchy -- the "off-worldly" one), and P'taah 

(or Ptah, which was ENKI's name when he was the first pharaoh of Egypt). 

So we have the RA Material; the Elohim; the Cassiopaeans; Q'uo, and the Alpha Draconians (not yet 

discussed), and I know there are more out there who have these Sirian terms in common, and they are 

all here for the Harvest. They all deny such a connection to the Sirians, and RA even said they their name 

was taken for totally different purposes, but there are too many coincidences just to write it all off. 

From what I can see, they are here to pull in as many "lightworkers" and "truthseekers" as they can 

into their fold, and they are using different channels to have as much variety as possible. They "cure the 

blind", "heal the crippled" and spread an enormous amount of "love & light" around them so we will 

think they are genuine and positive in nature. Some sources say that they are basically here to assist us 

in the afterlife when this lifetime is over by handing out 4D bodies for those who have been "good" and 

have their heart chakras open 51% or more. After that, those 51% will enjoy their next lifetime in 4D. 

But if you don't meet the criteria, your only option is to be recycled to a new 3D planet. This is what 

many of them want you to believe. Others, like David Wilcock's RA people, say they will come down in 

spaceships and bring us to the 4th Density while we're still here, in incarnation.[0] Wild, but many 

people fall for it. 

The sources belonging to this group of channels say they are riding on a cosmic Superwave which is 

heading our way, and on this wave both "good" and "bad" entities are riding. Once it's here, it's going to 

sweep over the solar system, and if you're ready, it's going to be a very uplifting event, but if you're not, 

it can be quite a negative experience both for the body and the mind. Of all the people who are 

unprepared, not everybody will die, but many supposedly will. Laura Knight-Jadczyk, who is in contact 

with the Cassiopaeans, spent approximately 1,600 pages on her website explaining and discussing the 

Wave. 


94



This is as much as we've discussed the Harvesters of Souls and their agenda so far. However, to get 

the full picture of what is going on, we need to look into the "Grays", and especially the Zeta Reticulians 

and establish who they really are. And lastly, we're going for the real shocker -- the Alpha Draconians. 

When these groups are exposed, it should be pretty clear for the reader what this is all about, and many 

will be shocked. In fact, I've found out a whole lot more even within this week and a half since I released 

my previous paper. 

II. Channeling the Zeta Reticulians 

"Germane is a group consciousness energy, [who] states that "his" orientation is from a realm of 

integration that does not have a clear-cut density/dimensional levels [sic]. The term "germane" 

in the English language means "significant relevance", or "coming from the same source". 

Germane chose this term to somewhat personify his energy. Neither male nor female, he views 

us as evolving to become like him as we begin the process of physical, emotional, mental and 

spiritual integration, which leads us back to the Source of All."[1] 

The above quote opens up a 360 pages long document which is basically a collection of channeling 

sessions, articles, and documents from between 1992 and 1999, by and with channeler, Lyssa Royal. It's 

no longer online, from what I know, but has some revealing information in it. Germane is one of several 

group consciousnesses that Lyssa is channeling; this group extended out from an earlier Arcturian 

connection (Arcturus is connected to ENLIL and the Sirian Alliance, which I will prove beyond any doubts 

in a later paper. Many people think of Arcturus as the home of some very spiritual, non-physical beings 

after have read the book, "We, the Arcturians", but like the Cassiopaeans say that these beings are not 

from Arcturus; the whole book was just a way to prepare us to be able to understand the concept of 

non-physicals. Some say that the Tall Whites, an alien group working for the Government on a military 

base in Nevada, near Nellis AFB, are coming from Arcturus. We are going to look into that connection 

and relay it to the Sirians in an upcoming paper). 

Another source Lyssa is channeling is Harone, who happens to be a Zeta Reticulian Gray hive 

consciousness. Harone, who is the spokesman for this hive consciousness is a project leader for some 

genetic projects, and we get the impression that "he" is an expert on it (the Grays are genderless, but 

both Lyssa and I prefer to call "him" he for simplicity). In addition to this, Lyssa is also channeling a 

female being, Sasha, who is from the Pleiades, and lastly Bashar, who is another Gray consciousness, 

claiming to be us in the far future. All these beings and group consciousnesses are connected to each 

other in one way or another and are assisting each other in the goal to create a future society based on 

human hybrids. 


95



Figure 1. Lyssa Royal 

I have read a few interviews with Lyssa Royal, and she comes across as a very intelligent, rational 

woman, and I can tell she is a person with a good heart. She is the author of a number of books on 

metaphysics and channeling, and started channeling already in the 1970s, before she attended some 

classes on the subject. She channeled a lot of different entities before she decided to stay with 

Germaine, Harone, and Sasha. Channeling Bashar was something she did in her earlier days, and this 

group consciousness is more known to be channeled by Darryl Anka these days. Lyssa channeled RA as 

well before Carla's group was contacted by them. Two of the more interesting earlier channels, 

according to Lyssa herself, were of one entity called Raydia from Arcturus, and Akbar from Orion. Raydia 

eventually "turned into" Germane. In a channel session, Raydia told Lyssa that this was the last time 

she'd hear from her, and a little bit later she "transformed" into Germane (whom we then highly suspect 

is connected to ENKI and the Sirians). 

What I think people know her best from today, and what stayed most in the 

human consciousness, is The Prism of Lyra, a book which is more or less the 

story of the universe from the beginning, when life came through a prism in 

the Lyra star constellation into our universe, and later on moved over to 

Orion. Furthermore, it is explaining which star races came to Earth millions 

upon millions of years ago and created civilizations here. It also described how 

the Vegans created the dinosaurs and out of that came a reptilian race, which 

to some degree still lives here on Earth in underground caves and caverns, 

while others left the planet and went to other star systems. In other words, 

Figure 2. Keith Priest 

this channeled book is saying that at least one or a few reptilian races out 

there in the universe today actually originated on Earth. It also tells about the conflict between the 

Vegans and the Lyrans, and how mankind later on became genetically manipulated by a negative star 

race from Sirius, while a galactic war was raging in this sector of the universe. 

The way Lyssa is explaining the difference between densities and dimensions is probably the best I've 

seen in channeled material. She explains the differences as follows: 

"Density: Density denotes a vibrational frequency and not a location, which the term 

"dimension" implies. The density structure of this reality is primarily expressed in seven levels, 


96



though each level has sub-levels within it. The density scale is a model used to communicate 

one's perception of orientation in relation to other realities. 

Dimension: Dimension refers to one's location in space/time rather than a person's vibrational 

frequency (density). Webster defines "dimension" as "Magnitude measured in a particular 

direction, specifically length, breadth, thickness or time." There are an infinite number of 

dimensions existing with a given density or vibrational frequency."[2] 

Density, as most of these sources see it, is the opening of the chakras, one by one, which in turn lifts 

us to higher vibrations/frequencies. As long as we're in 3D, we are reacting and acting mostly out of fear 

and base our decisions from that. Fear belongs to the 3rd chakra in the body, which is controlled by the 

belly. The 4th chakra is the heart chakra, and this is the chakra they are concentrating on in the 

ascension. This is, of course, a simplified explanation of what it really is, but it works for their purposes. 

I explained in Level I, "Genesis Paper #1: Human Origins and The Living Library" of March 31, 2011, 

the history about the Zeta Reticulian Grays, partly as it was told by Harone, the Zeta mass 

consciousness, and how they basically come from a planet called Apex in the Lyra star system. Once 

upon a time, the story goes, the Zetas were pretty much like us when comes to evolution. They, too, 

destroyed their planet, and the toxicity created mutations in their offspring. The babies were either 

stillborn, or were born with much larger skulls than their parents. This made it almost impossible for the 

females to have a normal birth. Then, to make a long story short, they were also invaded by another 

race of the Gray stock. A war broke out, which culminated in a nuclear war that ended up destroying the 

whole surface of Apex. The Grays thus had to live underground for many, many generations. That is 

supposedly how they developed their big, black eyes, so they could see in the dark where no sun ever 

shone. 

Figure 3. ANU (note the big, black eyes) 


97



The radiation the Grays were subjected to during the nuclear war made their body more or less 

resistant to it, but it came with a price. They could no longer reproduce and had to learn how to clone 

themselves to keep the population on a more or less steady level. They lost their reproduction organs 

and the digestive tract atrophied, and instead began to absorb food through their skin. With time, they 

became a bee-hive community in order to survive better. 

What the Grays did not understand while they were living underground was that their planet, due to 

earlier misuse of energy; both nuclear and zero-point energy; had started breaking down the planet's 

energy field on a subquantum level. This created an electro-magnetic warp in the time/space fabric 

around the planet. This made their world change position in the time/space continuum, and when the 

species one day decided to go up to the surface and check things out -- to see if it was perhaps 

inhabitable again -- they noticed that the planet now revolved around a different sun in the Zeta Reticuli 

star system. 

Some Grays then stayed in their new star system, while other migrated beyond Orion, where they 

eventually evolved into the Essassani Grays, where Essassani is the name of their planet. To us they 

became known as Bashar. 

This is the ball part of the story that Harone, Sasha, and sometimes Germane have been telling us in 

channeled sessions back in the 1990s. Furthermore, they say they have an agreement with we humans 

to abduct us to learn more about us, so they can regain their sexuality and their emotions by studying 

us. They are promising that they are not making any changes in us. This, as we shall see, is not true; they 

are making changes in us and are later on admitting to it. 

ii.i. The Zeta Agreement 

Regular people, but perhaps even so the major part of abductees, have a hard time understanding 

what this agreement between Zetas and humans consists of. We who have researched this are aware of 

the TTP (Technology Transfer Programs), which is an agreement between our government and the Grays 

(now, forget about the Sirians for a moment while I get to the point here, and you are going to be able 

to see a very interesting connection). This agreement allows the Grays to abduct a certain amount of 

humans in exchange for technology. The best known agreement was that between the Grays and the 

President Eisenhower government in the 1950s, but abductions had been going on long before that, and 

Hitler had a similar agreement. 

The TTPs certainly took place, but they are only a part of the whole Gray scenario. The TTPs were 

either agreements between governments and a very negative faction of the Zetas, or they were the 

Sirians themselves (in their "Gray spacesuits"), but not the main part of the Gray community. Not all 

Grays have been involved in those TTPs, according to Harone, Sasha, and Germaine. They say that the 

agreement to abduct humans is made between the separate humans themselves and the Zetas on a 

subconscious level, or between lives. They say that they can only abduct those who are vibrating within 

a certain frequency and transmit a certain "signal" which can be picked up by the Grays. The rest of 


98



humanity can't be abducted, because the Grays, who are operating from another density, can't 

physically find us. 

In other words, those who are abducted are willingly being subjected to this, and have always given 

their consent, whether they remember it or not, according to our sources. Still, many who are abducted 

are afterwards very fearful about these events and feel both anger and terror from their experiences. 

They are the last to admit that they have been taken with their consent. The Grays strongly disagree. 

Harone says that it all depends on how the abductee is letting themselves experiencing the event. 

They can meet it with fear, or they can see it as a learning experience which will benefit themselves, the 

Zetas, and the rest of humanity. If they choose the first alternative, the abductions are going to be very 

painful on many levels, but if they choose the second, the experience can be very rewarding. 

But what is this all about? Why are all these people actually taken? Harone is the first to admit that 

the Grays lack both emotions and understanding of human pain and needs, and they totally lack the 

ability to have sexual thoughts and desire. 

When these subjects are raised, Harone is giving us a comment we have heard many times before: 

they are us in the future! Oh no, you think, not them, too! We've heard that phrase so many times now 

that we're sick and tired of it. Why are these sources all saying the same thing? Are they all lying, or is it 

just proving my point in the previous paper, that they are all us in the future, but from different 

timelines? 

Yes, that's certainly how it seems to be -- they are us in the future, but from different lines of time. 

That's the common denominator amongst all these channels we've mentioned so far. But on the other 

hand, it's not the first time in my papers that I've said that the Grays are us in the future. However, we 

are going to look at this from a different angle now and see if we can find some missing pieces, such as 

where the Grays come into the picture. If they are us in the future, how could things go so wrong? 

I already told the supposed history of the Grays and their planet, Apex, twice -- here in this paper and 

in Level I. Albeit, a thought unmistakably pops up in the head when we read the story, and Harone 

mentions it as well; the story is very similar to the story of humankind! Well, that's not so strange when 

we, in a totally different channeled session, are told that the Apex story is more or less a metaphor for 

humanity's own history, and even future if we don't get our act together. So, more than a real story, it's 

a warning for us to change our ways.[3] However, later on Harone refers back to this story as being 

partly true. For our purpose, it's actually irrelevant, as we shall see. 

Lyssa Royal's sources all say the same thing, that humanity around this point made a collective 

decision (instigated by our Shadow Government as usual, but whatever they say, normally goes, and 

people go along with it). This decision took us on a path through a certain timeline, where we started 

experimenting big time with genetics. Of course, we know that this is not only something that's 

currently being done only by the government and the military, but is in usual manner directed by 

interdimensional forces, our "friends", the Sirians. We have already talked about how they want to 

create Supersoldiers that are resistant to radiation and can tolerate harsh space conditions. The Sirian 


99



Alliance already knows how to do that, because they were the ones who "created" the "Grays" in their 

own solar system once upon a time to use as "spacesuits" when they go on interstellar travels, and at 

the same time can comfortably move around in these Gray bodies on their own planet. The reason they 

can do that is because these Gray bodies are genetically manipulated in a way so that they can tolerate 

the density on the Sirian home planet. Moreover, it looks like they adjusted this body template for each 

star race who are allies with the Sirians, such as the Alpha Draconians, so that each race, respectively, 

could use the Gray space suit both for star travel and on the planets of their origins. When the Sirians 

and their allies first came to Earth, they came here in Gray bodies. And they still mostly do! That's 

probably why some star beings call them "lizzies", or lizards, because they look very sauroid. 

In old Sumerian times we see the "Anunnaki" depicted mostly as humanoids, but with slightly bigger 

eyes. The Sumerian people probably knew that the Sirians came here as Grays but jumped into human 

bodies when they planned on staying on Earth for a longer period of time. The Grays bodies could only 

stay in our 3D frequency for a short time, where after they had to leave. In humanoid bodies, the Sirian 

Alliance could stay as long as they wanted. However, like artists often do, the Sumerian artists added a 

personality, or traits, to the statue or the drawing. What perhaps stands out the most on a Gray body is 

the big, black eyes. If the Sumerians knew that the Sirians, when in space, used bodies with big, black 

eyes, it makes sense if they added that to the humanoid bodies in their artifact, to give a hint of their 

real, "original" appearance when space traveling. 

But where did the Sirians get the idea of creating Gray bodies for interstellar space travel in their 

hollowed out craft? It is my qualified guess, after have read Lyssa's and Keith's material, and others, that 

this is where the story about the Apex planet and the Zeta Reticulians is partly true. Somewhere along 

the line -- long before the Sirians came to Earth, and probably before they encountered the Orion 

Empire -- they invaded the Gray world and killed off the Grays in their usual cruel manner, and used the 

rest as slaves, possibly on the Sirian home planet. Whether the part of the story where the Grays were 

subjected to nuclear radiation is true or not, perhaps the Sirians quickly noticed how easily the Gray 

template adapted to the conditions in space, and from there, their genetic experimentation with the 

Grays started, which led to that they created their half biological, half machine space suits. Before they 

encountered the Grays, they must have either used their own original bodies and noticed their 

shortcomings, or traveled in some other ways, maybe even using some kind of artificial space suits, like 

our own astronauts do, but much more high tech. I don't have the answer to this. 

Now, let's go back to Earth and present time. Of course, the Sirians already know how to create 

efficient Gray bodies because they use them all the time. Even if they have to genetically manipulate 

them here on Earth, and perhaps add human genes to them, it wouldn't take long for them to create 

Zeta/human hybrids. I wouldn't be surprised if they, in underground facilities, already have a whole 

army of human hybrids, ready to be used, but in suspense for now. Or, they are teaching human 

scientists how to do this genetic engineering from scratch. We don't know very much what's going on 

deep beneath our feet in those multi-leveled underground military facilities; not to speak about the 

bases under the ocean floors! There are whistle-blowers, of course, but they are usually only low level 

ex-military with limited clearance, and even if what they tell us can be horrifying, it's just the tip of the 

iceberg. 


100



However far they have come with their hybridization, we now have quite a clear picture of what will 

happen in the future. Interestingly enough, an almost identical story is told by Barbara Marciniak's 

Pleiadians, who otherwise very much dislike the Grays and most of the rest of the channeling pack, and 

Galactic Federations in particular. Harone, Sasha, and Germaine are telling us that far in the future 

mankind has become totally hybridized, with no emotions and no sexual abilities. Reproduction is done 

totally through cloning. But just like when you use a standard copy machine and copy paper after paper, 

and use copies to create new copies, eventually the text will be unreadable. It's the same with cloning a 

species. The Gray's DNA became distorted and the immune system so depleted that the future 

Gray/humans realize that their species will not survive unless something is done. 

So what they do is to become "time jumpers". 

This means that they with help from technology are able to go back in time and insert themselves on 

our timeline from perpendicular time, a scientific term which we discussed earlier. On a linear timeline, a 

highly technological race like our future selves (or a race who can nano-travel, which most Grays can't, 

except Bashar and a couple of others, at the most) is able to go back on this linear timeline and insert 

themselves perpendicularly anywhere they want. What would be more appropriate than to do it here 

and now around the nano-second, when the old era ends and a new has just started? This is, after all, 

when all the timelines merge (like we've discussed before) and we start anew from a starting point, 

which is now, and branch off into different futures, taking us to different destinations on multiple 

timelines. 

This is why we see different versions of Grays here, I've just found out. They are all us in the future, 

but in different stages of development, from different times, and perhaps even slightly different 

timelines! Many think these are Grays from different star systems, and that's why they look different, 

but apparently, that's not the case.[4] 

So, the abductions by the Grays are not present time abductions so much as they are abductions by 

our future selves on our present time versions of themselves! And sometimes, say Lyssa's sources, they 

have help from more humanoid races, who are present during the abductions, to make the abductee 

feel safer, because they recognize the familiarity in the humanoid presence. 


101



Figure 4. Artist's impression of Essassani Gray 

The end result of all these abductions from the future is the Essassani race (Bashar). Supposedly, they 

have settled in a star system beyond what we see in the sky as the constellation of Orion[5]. 

Figure 5. A close-up of a "Zeta" Gray, as we are used to seeing them. 

The Grays, of course, are the product of the Machine Kingdom, where the human race slowly and 

successively turns into half machines and half humans, with no emotions and no means to reproduce; a 

dying race. A lot of things, as we shall see soon, will happen on these Machine Kingdom timelines before 

we get to the Essassani stage. But the eerie questions is; what will happen after the Essassani society? 

Why does it stop there, where humanity are better off than in earlier stages where the Grays are 

visiting, but still quite emotionless and not able to have sex? Not a word is said about what will happen 

after Essassani...! 

The following quotes are directly from the Gray collective, Harone, and this is what they are currently 

engaged in: 


102



1. That we will assist you in triggering latent genetic codes that will propel you into an 

accelerated state of genetic evolution. These codes were placed in you by your forefathers and 

were designed to be triggered when you achieved a certain vibratory rate. This vibratory rate 

occurs when your consciousness accelerates. That is what is occurring now. In our work with 

you, when we interact with you either physically or etherically, we work with these genetic 

structures, these latent genetic codes. Some of them can be activated from the etheric level; 

some need activation on the physical level. As we have agreed to do millennia ago, we will carry 

out this agreement of assisting in this species triggering. 

2. Even though we do not understand the concept of emotion we seek to understand it and we 

watch you in order to do so. We have been told by others who interact with us that your 

species' goal at the present time is in expressing and then integrating your fears. Even though 

we do not understand why, we understand that our interactions with you promote fear in some 

people. It is not our desire to promote fear in you, but those we interact with who are guardians 

to you tell us that your confrontation with your fear is of vital importance at this time in your 

development. Though we do not intentionally desire to trigger your fear, we are made aware 

that our interactions with you do in fact trigger that fear."[6] 

I was just listening to a CD by the Pleiadians from late summer 2012, where they said that a group of 

Pleiadians who are still willing to use weaponry to protect Earth and themselves (apart from Marciniak's 

group, who are against weapons) are currently in battle with the Grays here in the solar system, trying 

to chase them off. Whether they are succeeding or not, I don't know yet, but Marciniak's Pleiadians 

were not too optimistic about it if I should trust my feelings and senses when I listened to it. 

To the Pleiadians, the Grays 100% represent the Machine Kingdom, I can tell. Like I said, they too tell 

us that the Grays who are operating here in our solar system to a large degree are us in the future. In 

one of the more recent lectures, they finally explain what the tyranny in the Pleiades in our future (their 

present) is all about -- and it's more to it than I have told before. 

They say that at around this time, in the nano-second, we humans made a choice to create a very 

high tech society, the so-called Machine Kingdom. Of course, it's all run by the Sirians, but humanity, 

more or less as a whole, chose to go in that direction. Not many people chose the more natural path, 

away from the technology; a technology which consequences later may become humanity's Achilles' 

heel, at least on one or more timelines. 

Eventually, say the Pleiadians, humanity is going to turn into half robot and half human and start 

exploring space. And not only that, we are also going to start conquering other worlds (doesn't this 

sound like the Sirian evolution all over again? Only, this time the Sirians are in charge of using humans to 

do their job, which is more like a rehearsal for bigger tasks, like taking over Orion). Eventually, in a 

distant future, the tyranny we spread is going to reach the Pleiades, and supposedly, on a certain 

timeline, we will conquer the Pleiades and start a tyranny there. A rebel group of Pleiadians, who in fact 

are Sirian/Pleiadian descendants, once upon a time the creators of the Nephilim, and the ones who also 

used their DNA in the mix to create Homo sapiens sapiens, are leaving their bodies and meet in the 

ether in a "safe place", where they can channel their message through time and space. Through their 

vehicle, Barbara Marciniak, they then reach humans such as myself via their lectures. 


103



So, what the Pleiadian rebels say they did was to trace back the tyranny in the Pleiades to our present 

time, where there is a "fork in the road", and people choose different probabilities to create their own 

timelines in the Multiverse. Like I mentioned, in versions of the nano-second (on other timelines) where 

the Pleiadians are not present, only a few chose not to go for the option to create a Machine Kingdom. 

As usual, most humans were oblivious that they chose a timeline which would lead to such a 

catastrophic future. They were just fascinated by all the cool technology, and one thing slowly led to 

another. 

Apparently, there are thousands upon thousands of people around the world who listen to the 

Pleiadian lectures and get the message. What they want to do is to slightly change the timelines, and by 

educating people so they can make more conscious choices, the tyranny will hopefully disappear in the 

future (their present time). Those of us who take their teachings to heart, but also start thinking on their 

own and do their own research, one by one help changing the vibration of the mass consciousness, and 

more major changes will occur that will create more distinct options. 

The Pleiadians are suggesting in their lectures that we choose to evolve without technology, just by 

natural means, which is done through education and willingness to change accordingly to the changes in 

our belief systems. As usual, they ask us to use discernment even when listening to them, and it's our 

choice if we want to believe what they teach us. 

The Pleiadians were the first to suggest we go back to nature, which doesn't mean we need to throw 

out all technology; some of it can still be of assistance to us. Technology in itself is not bad; it depends 

on how we use it. But it's important that we don't let technology run our lives, and that we only use it 

when we see it can really enhance our living. In other words, they suggest we create a totally new 

timeline, based on what they've taught us. Thus far, they are quite pleased and say that bigger changes 

than we think have been made in the mass consciousness. Most people will still choose the Machine 

Kingdom, but many more than anticipated will now choose the timeline that leads to natural evolution, 

without Harvest or Gray intervention. We may not always notice this, because not everybody who wake 

up are blogging or participating in discussions on the Internet. 

But shouldn't we help the Grays, then? After all, they are our descendants! Well, that's what the fork 

in the road is all about. Some souls (especially in the afterlife, apparently) made the decision to assist 

the Grays to achieve their goals. They probably did so because they thought that the Grays are now our 

future, and if we want a better future than what they have produced so far we'd better help them. 

Therefore, they have agreed to spend perhaps more than one lifetime as guinea pigs and abductees for 

the Grays. 

In the future, a branch of humanity will realize that the choices they made were non-survival and 

want to go back and change things, but personally I am not going to be a slave to the Sirians anymore 

and choose the Machine Kingdom even if it's to help our future selves. In fact, if we choose the natural 

way to evolve, we are creating a brand new species, and the Grays are no longer our descendants in that 

sense after we've branched out. What they want to do and how they do it is their solution to the 

problem, but I for one am not going to get involved in it. I know there are many more people (perhaps 


104



you who read this) who will think like me. And besides, the Machine Kingdom does not end with the 

Essassani, probably. It will continue in one form or another. And somewhere along the line, things will 

branch off again, for sure, and one branch will go for attacking Orion, because that's the Sirians' goal, 

apparently. With all this in mind, it may be a whole lot easier for people to make a choice. 

However, it's very important that we understand what choices we make. In the next section I want to 

quote a channeled session between a group of Zeta Grays and a human being from the audience. It is all 

happening during a Bashar section. The channeler is Darryl Anka. 

ii.ii. Grays Speak! 

Figure 5. Darryl Anka channeling Bashar 

"Q: Is there a way we can communicate with one of the Greys through you, by this process? 

Bashar: Yes. 

Q: In the mass-consciousness? 

Bashar: Yes. Do you want this now? 

Q: Yes I do. 

Bashar: One moment, we will see if this is allowed. 

Greys: Speak! 

Human: Greetings, we enjoy having you here. 


105



Greys: Enjoy? 

Human: Enjoy, you don't understand an emotion, I suppose? We understand you have a lack of 

emotion. And that's why you are inbreeding with our race. Is that correct? 

Greys: We are blending. 

Human: Blending 

Greys: For our agenda of rectitude. 

Human: Is your agenda going to be complete within this next short time span? 

Greys: Your time span of a decade. 

Human: A decade. 

Greys: Complete. 

Human: If it was not extended, if it was stopped short within this next month would that effect 

your future race, your Essassani race? 

Greys: No stoppage is imminent. Therefore no discussion is needed of this point. 

Human: We feel that we do need to discuss this. This abduction scenario is ... 

Greys: You may feel as you wish, no stoppage is imminent! 

Human: This abduction scenario needs to end. 

Greys: It will end when the agenda ends. 

Human: Are you in enslavement of a Draconian race, as of this moment? 

Greys: No, your information is erroneous. 

Human: You do this only for your self-preservation, is that correct? 

Greys: There are levels to our species, what you would call factions. Our faction is dying, our 

faction has need, our faction also recognizes that you are dying; our faction is attracted to your 

faction through death and resurrection of both species simultaneously, through the agreement 

of our simultaneously co-created agendas. 

Human: This is against free will of human nature. 

Greys: It is not. It is agreed, you have given your agreement on other levels. 

Human: You have technologically manipulated our free will in order to accomplish this. This is 


106



not allowed! 

Greys: You have emotionally usurped our will. 

Human: This is not allowed! 

Greys: This is allowed because you have created it. 

Human: And you have created your death scenario also. 

Greys: And you are creating yours. 

Human: We have passed that point. 

Greys: You have not! 

Human: Your technology has put us to that point where we obviously became extinct a decade 

ago. 

Greys: You have not, you still have not allowed your world the balance it needs for there to be 

the transition as smoothly as it could. 

Human: The transition is happening right now. 

Greys: It is in process, and you see upheaval and what you call detrimental environmental 

impact around your planet. 

Human: Well, we also see too that there's an abduction scenario that needs to stop and should 

not be continued any longer; it should be stopped at this present time. 

This is the mass consciousness of this planet of our free world. 

Greys: What you are referring to as stoppage is not stoppage that you seek, what you seek is 

transformation and equality of terms. You do not seek stoppage; you seek conscious 

participation. 

Human: Well, our negotiations need to be re-evaluated. 

Greys: Then evaluate them. 

Human: We are evaluating at the moment and this needs to cease. 

Greys: You do not need to evaluate them with us; you need to evaluate them with yourselves. 

Human: With you because technologically you are at an advantage point at this moment. 

Greys: You do not understand the concept of technology as we experience it. 


107



Human: And you do not understand love emotion, the energy that you need to exist with, and 

that's why you are becoming extinct. 

Greys: It is now through hybridization that we are beginning to connect to the understanding of 

what you experience and label as love energy, but you as species, do not exhibit love energy in 

the way you ask us to. 

Human: We are being manipulated at this point and that's why we want our free will back, we 

want it back! 

Greys: You have your free will, you have no manipulation of your will with regard to your ability 

to express what you call your emotional context. 

Human: We do not want any more of your technology here on this planet; it is self destructive. 

Greys: You have no more of our technology. 

Human: And it will be agreed upon. 

Greys: You have no more of our technology. What you experience as the idea you refer to as our 

technology is not our technology any longer. It is your technology; you have your FACTION; you 

have your structure; you have your military; you have your [secret/shadow] government. These 

are exploitation of your free will. We do not participate in that. 

Human: Not at the present moment, but who has manipulated that to start that? 

Greys: In time, agreements were made between what were deemed to be the representatives 

of your world. You still allow those individuals to represent, but we are no longer engaged. 

Human: Well, we do understand what you are saying with our emotions as you look at it, as our 

shortcomings, but we do as a mass-consciousness want it to end. 

Greys: It will change, and in that it will experience what you call an end, but you are required to 

change before it can be experienced as an equal transition. 

Human: Well we are here and we know what is going on, and we do expect action and we 

expect you to keep hold up your end of the bargain. 

Greys: Our end is met. Your end is within yourselves. End of transmission. 

Human: Thank you. 

Bashar: One moment, one moment, one moment - did you have a satisfactory conversation with 

the entity? 

Q: Pretty much. He's not very emotional but I knew that. 

Bashar: But you knew that. 


108



Q: Yes, I knew that. I knew that I was dealing with a machine that... 

Bashar: Well, so to speak. You are dealing with a type of hive mentality. 

Q: Right. 

Bashar: You are dealing with an entity that only experiences, shall we say, the closest 

approximation of what you would call an emotion: the sensation of irony. 

Q: I see. 

Bashar: And that is all that they can experience in that state. Now understand that what you ask 

to converse with, was one of the more primitive factions. We thought it best to simply start at 

the beginning with one of the older and more primitive factions. You must understand that 

there already more evolved factions of what you call the Grey, but do understand more 

concretely the blending and incorporation of the emotional body. 

Q: And that is your future selves. 

Bashar: Yes, but in that sense, it is the idea that we gave you first as the opportunity to interact 

with, what you call, the foundation, so that the interactions could ripple upwards through the 

incorporation of the entities' hive mentality and have some kind of an effect, as you would say, 

up the line. 

Q: Well, do you feel that I had an effect on him that you can see or feel at the moment? 

Bashar: I feel that you had an effect on yourself, and that will make all the difference in their 

capability of interacting or not interacting with you, in the way that they determine that they 

must. That's the difference. 

Q: Well, I just concerned with the present time and what is going on here. That's why I'm here. 

Bashar: But watch your levels of fear, for you yourself, are exhibiting some of that vibration still. 

And the idea is that, as much of that vibration of fear and anger as you in yourself experience it, 

only reinforces the idea of the agenda that you say you would like to transform. 

Q: That is true. 

Bashar: So you yourself must come from UNCONDITIONAL LOVE, even as you state your 

preferences and stand your ground. That is what will create the equality of terminology that will 

allow conscious interaction and participation with the level of the Greys that ultimately does 

have the incorporation of the emotional body, sufficiently to understand what you are saying 

and interact with you on a more equal basis. 

Q: If they were to end their agenda at the moment and be prematurely short for months instead 

of a decade how would that effect the Essassani race? 


109



Bashar: It would not affect us since we are in what you would call a parallel reality time track. 

But, in terms of their reality time track, they would cease to exist. They would die. 

Q: They would die at the present moment? 

Bashar: Yes. 

Q: Is there any other way that you can salvage them or can save them in any other way, if they 

had to end it at this moment? 

Bashar: One moment. 

Q: A cosmic reason? 

Bashar: One moment one moment one moment - there was an offer made by another species 

to them as an alternative, that they rejected. 

This offer, if it can be, perhaps, translated into your language, would be something as follows; it 

was likened to the idea, of offering to render their essence down into a mathematical construct, 

and to be deposited in an artificially created matrix. Until such time that evolution would allow 

there to be, incarnationally speaking, automatically bodies available for their constructs to 

evolve into, or incarnate into, that would allow them to express themselves and learn to express 

themselves in a more balanced way. However, they rejected this because they feared, from 

their fear, in that sense, as best as they can experience fear, that it was a trap. 

The idea being that they reflect that aspect of your civilization that does not trust itself, for they 

contain that idea of not trusting since they are not in balance with themselves, and therefore 

only deem themselves to be capable of deciding how it is that they should allow this agenda to 

play out, and will not allow others to help them in that sense. 

Q: Is there a way that we can have that negotiated? 

Bashar: Again, the idea is, to keep it at home. Allow yourself to strengthen your own 

unconditional love for yourself, and allow yourself to make the changes that you need to make 

within your own society, for it is only the changes that you need to make within your own 

society that will allow your society to have the collective critical mass to be able to deal with 

them on a more equal and loving basis. 

Q: Well, we also do have help from other entities from other sources. 

Bashar: Yes, of course. But help is not doing it for you. We cannot do that. It is your hands. You 

have had, and always do have, the free will. But, again, it comes down to the fear that exists 

within your society, and it is that that needs to be transformed. 

Q: Also their fear of extinction. 

Bashar: Yes. But they are only reflecting and are attracted to your society, because your society 

also contains that kind of vibrational resonance. 


110



Q: I did understand that, yes. 

Bashar: So, work on that and that will help them as well as yourself. 

Q: Okay, and tell them to work on theirs also. 

Bashar: We do not need to. 

Q: I see, okay, well thank you for this communication. 

Bashar: Thank you."[7] 

Isn't this clearly showing the reader what a mess we have got ourselves into? The person in the 

audience is trying over and over to convince the Grays that the abductions and their interference must 

stop. However, the Grays are, ironically enough, correct. There was an agreement made and the Grays 

are playing out their part in it. Our representatives, just like the Grays say, made the decisions for us, 

and the Grays will not stop until they are done, and by doing so, they are still not inflicting on Free Will, 

because they have our consent through our representatives. You see how they do it? This is Sirian 

tactics, as the reader has noticed from earlier papers, especially from Level II. We can also tell from what 

we discussed earlier, that this is a less advanced future Zeta/human hybrid, just like Bashar indicates. 

Bashar is right, too. We can't go out and more or less shoot Grays and think that it will take care of it. 

We have to work on our own fears and shortcomings. When we've done that, we can, as individuals and 

as a people, reevaluate old agreements between humans and ETs and void those we don't like, but in 

our current sorry state, there is not much we can do, except inner work -- it all comes back to that. Inner 

work and disagreement with being controlled by anybody outside of ourselves. It comes back to 

claiming our sovereignty as a species, and we don't do that by watching "Bachelor" on TV. 

What I am doing in these papers is that I bring our worst fears to the surface by telling it as it is, from 

what I have concluded in my research (please evaluate and keep and discard as needed), so we can 

process it on a conscious level instead of letting it sitting there, deep in our unconscious, unreachable 

and used by the Sirian Alliance as fear-triggers. We have no choice but to look at our fears and our dark 

sides and evaluate them by recognizing them for what they are and let go. Hopefully, I'm being 

successful enough in doing this and more people will, like I have, learn not to fear the dark side 

anymore. Some may say that they were never afraid of this in the first place, but they were, whether 

aware of it or not, or all this wouldn't have been buried away from them in their unconscious. Fear does 

that. Only reading this material shows you are a brave soul and are willing to look and make decision 

based on what you read. Much fewer people than you think are willing to confront these papers. 

ii.iii. The Collective "We" -- Who Are They? 

So where do the Harvesters of Souls come into the picture? This is a very interesting question, and I 

am not sure if the reader has figured it out yet or not. If not, no problem, because this is all tricky and 

quite manipulative. 


111



Have you ever wondered why almost all these channeled sources call themselves "we"? "We are the 

Cassiopaeans!"; "We are the Elohim!"; "We are the Zeta Reticuli!"; "We are the Pleiadians!"... I can go 

on and on. Then we have "I am RA!", which is singular. However, RA explain to us that they are a Social 

Memory Complex, and therefore a group consciousness, and that's what most of these channeled 

entities call themselves -- group consciousness! But what does that really mean? 

Well, they tell us that this is "natural evolution", and we present time humans will eventually be a 

group consciousness as well. Then they go on telling us that they are of 5th, 6th, 7th Density, or 

whatever it may be, and when we reach the same level as they are at, we will be like them. But first, we 

must be subjected to a Harvest before reaching each new density, and the Harvest from 3rd to 4th 

Density is now! So we'd better be prepared and have our heart chakras open, right? What happens is 

that many people stress out and ask themselves over and over, "Am I good enough? Will I be part of the 

Harvest, or am I doomed???" There is a lot of fear involved in this Harvest process. As we shall see, there 

is this future human hybrid who tells us through Lyssa Royal that machine technology is the natural way 

to evolve, and we need help to do it; help from those who know how to use nano-technology. That is 

true for them, because they may not know better, but it's a lie. A species can, and is supposed to, evolve 

on their own, without external "help". 

Now, let's think about it. Who else do we know who think of themselves as "we", a "collective", or a 

"bee hive community" where the group is everything and the individual next to nothing? Ah! The 

Grays!!! So who can all these channeled sources be? You got it! They all have to be Grays; there is no 

other logical option. They all say 1) they are us in the future, 2) a group consciousness, 3) they are all 

giving us the same message, but from slightly different angles, so they can attract more truthseekers, 

and 4) they are able to channel love & light in huge quantities (which is done by machine technology, 

which we shall see later in this paper), while still sounding like monotonous machines, and 5) they all 

hope we'll make it through the Harvest, so we can be like them. 

But why the Harvest? Well, it's obvious that they want to change things on their future timeline, 

which ended up with the Bashar group consciousness. In other word, they failed and are now coming 

back from different places in time and space to start all over again. They want a soul, that's what they 

want, and they want evolved souls! Why wouldn't they? They want as many spiritually evolved people 

gathered together as possible, focusing on one thing -- the Harvest. Then, when the Harvest is 

happening, after this lifetime is over, they hijack our souls, steal our Fire and try to figure out our 

emotion by researching our light-bodies. And God knows what else they have planned to do with these 

people in the ether whom they subject to the Harvest? 

We need to remember that the Grays don't necessarily look at themselves as evil; they simply want 

to survive, and we are their guinea pigs. They have no emotions and no remorse, so they can't see that it 

would be something wrong with using evolved souls, trying to figure out how they work. 

Even the Pleiadians say they are a collective. They are different, however, in that they want to stop 

the Gray's experiments, and they give us the option how to not participate in this quite horrendous 

future by creating an alternative timeline. I wouldn't be surprised if they end up being Grays as well, but 

are a splinter group who is hoping that they can ride on the wave we create when we naturally build a 

new future -- without being dependent upon technology. I am not saying this is the case, but it's a 

possibility. If so, they are still correct, because that's the way out. Yes, the Pleiadians say they are us in 

the future as well, but rather than saying they are the Grays, they claim to be those who mated with 

human women and created the Nephilim, but also contributed with their DNA, which is still in our 


112



bodies - in other words, the Fallen Angels. Therefore they are us in the future, and also our ancestors. 

So, that's a paradox, but like Harone says (the quote is at the end of this paper), when we get into 

paradoxes, we are getting closer to the truth. 

And where are the Sirian Alliance in all this? It looks like the tyranny and the machine people (the 

Grays) are related to humans, not Sirians. This may be so, but let's say something happens in the future, 

and the Sirians need to step back for a while and say, "We didn't do it, it's the humans. They did it!" And 

whatever created that situation forced the Zeta/Gray hybrids -- the future humans -- to rectify their past 

before they once again can be used for Sirian purposes. We know very little about what will happen in 

the future, and all we have here is the Grays' stories, and they are not complete. They simply tell it from 

the viewpoint of their searching for their Holy Grail -- human emotions and sexuality. 

Another possibility is that the future human/Grays are in fact controlled by the Sirians all the way 

through; even in the Grays' attempt to "rectify" themselves. Perhaps the Sirians are not happy either 

with how we humans turn out 2,000-10,000 years from now, and are indeed in charge of the Zeta 

program to recreate the human race in our present time and forward. The Harvest would in that case be 

a part of that whole scheme. I would not be surprised if it ends up being this way! 

When I think about it, the only channeled source that comes to mind which is not a hive community is 

the Seth Material by Jane Roberts. Seth is one individual, and I strongly recommend Jane's books; they 

are very enlightening! And I am pretty sure Seth is not a Gray! 

As long as we are in our current bodies, we can only raise our frequency so much during one lifetime. 

However, if we do what we can, become an inspiration for others, and continue to work on yourselves, 

that's the best we can do. Then, when our bodies die, and we eventually come back to Earth again (if 

this is what we decide to do), we will incarnate in a version of the world that matches our new 

frequency. Then, the next time around, it gets a little better again and so forth. We will get ideas, or get 

together in groups to create whatever communities we wish to live in. The Global Elite, the Sirians, or 

whomever is on their wavelength, will probably still be here the first few lifetimes, because they still 

match the range of frequency we are operating within. However, each lifetime we will incarnate on a 

version of the Earth that has a higher frequency range than that of the previous lifetime, and soon 

enough those who do not vibrate within the same range will not be able to live in the same reality as we 

do. Then, perhaps a few incarnations or so from now, we will be born on an Earth where the Global 

Elite, the Sirians, and humans who vibrate within their frequency band, will no longer exist in our world. 

The ones who do exist there are people quite similar to us, who are more into expressing love, 

compassion, and understanding. Our reality will be less and less dense. 

This doesn't mean that the Sirians and the Global Elite have lost their stronghold; they will still be 

here on Earth, doing their thing, but in another reality, because of the difference in frequencies. 

However, the negative forces and the humans who chose to follow them will not move to a world, 

thousands of light-years away, like the channeled sources suggest, but will still be here, on a lower 

frequency version of Earth. Albeit, if the Sirians get it the way they want it, some people probably will be 

moved to another planet. We can only speculate. 

Now, many of us will not return to Earth for a very long time after this lifetime is over. Does that 

come as a shock? Well, we are the forerunners, and our job is to build the energy so that the rest of 

humanity can make their choices based on a knowledge base that will soon come more and more to the 


113



surface in the mass consciousness. Those who wake up due to our work will be the ones who build the 

New Earth, the one which will eventually not be able to house the lower vibrational Invader Forces with 

their global control. When our job is done, it's time for many of us to move on. Of course, there will be 

those among us who still choose to stay here and come back again after this lifetime is over and help 

building this New World, and that's a very noble thing to do. And there are those among us who look 

forward to living in the New World, because Mother Earth, the Goddess, is after all one of the most 

beautiful planets in the Milky Way Galaxy, and 'm sure it will be even more beautiful when experienced 

from a higher dimension. 

III. Understanding More About the Gray Hive Mentality 

If we take everything else we've discussed in regards to the channeled visitors and add what Lyssa 

Royal and Keith Priest have put together in their book Visitors from Within to the soup as well, we get an 

even closer picture. Hence, I have selected a few sections from the Royal/Priest book to quote and/or 

analyze and discuss before I finish this paper. 

We talked about the agreement between the Zetas and the U.S. Government in the 1950s, which 

resulted in a TTP, allowing the Zetas to abduct humans, especially in the United States. This was done by 

a faction of the Zetas, which the rest of them call the "negative faction", but the rest (if they want to call 

themselves the "positive faction"?) have not hesitated to take advantage of that program. Although the 

"positive faction" doesn't deliver technology to the Government at this time (but will in the future), they 

sometimes refer to this program to justify the abduction scenarios, and the way things transformed on 

that day back in the 50s, the Zetas do have right to take us, according to universal laws. 

However, what the "positive faction" likes to address more frequently is the voluntarily program, 

where humans, either between lives or otherwise, agree to help the Zetas regain their human abilities in 

the future, and thus also safeguard their own future existence; or so they think! We have no solid 

evidence that this is the Grays' real agenda, although it seems to at least be one of them, but also, it 

looks like the Grays will not succeed, either, because when humankind decided to become half machine 

and half human, there was no way back. After that it seems like they will have a peak in their efforts 

when the Essassani race is created, but after that -- an eerie silence! Also, the Essassani race is being 

created very far away into the future, so it sure will take the Grays a lot of time even to get to that point, 

and still they will not be like we are now, because they lack most of their Fire. That's why we say they 

are "soulless". They are clones, left only with a machine-like brain which is half physical and half etheric, 

and a soul that seems hopelessly depleted from its Fire due to that the Sirians have used it up, and that's 

a long way from a soul. The Essassani, however, seem to have managed to create bodies which are good 

enough to work as soul carriers, and they can even nano-travel, but they can't regain an emotional state 

of mind. 

The agreement the so-called positive faction wants to stress is the following: 


114



"There is an agreement between our species. You are teaching us about the love we supposedly 

have within us that we want to unlock, and how not to fear our own individuality. We are 

teaching you about your fears and how you can turn those fears into your strengths. Our 

relationship is a symbiotic one, for we are all part of the same Whole."[8] 

I find this particularly interesting, because Prince UTU, when he contacted me, said basically the same 

thing that our relationship is symbiotic in nature, and we are all part of the same Whole. The Grays 

further comment: 

"There are many who protest what is occurring with abductions and genetic experiments. Those 

who protest can only protest when they feel they are victims. Those who feel they are not 

victims will not protest. Do you follow what we mean? The act of protestation means that in 

some way there must be a feeling of victimization." 

There is some twisted logic in this statement, if we really look at it. It is their conviction that it's not 

only when an abductee protests that the above applies, but also if someone like you and I do it; they 

want us to "realize" that we feel like victims and need to change our mentality. This is very similar to 

Hidden Hand's logic, as well. 

What about if we don't agree when we see someone who can't defend themselves, being carried 

away and experimented upon? Is that victimhood or is it caring about another, defenseless individual? 

Even if that individual does have an agreement somewhere down the line, agreements should be 

allowed to be changed and re-evaluated. In this case they can't, because once you make an individual 

agreement with them and want to break it, the Zetas are referring to the Government agreement, and 

thus the individual has no longer any say in the matter. That's the twisted logic. Anybody has the right to 

say no, but the abductees don't know how, and the Zetas are certainly not teaching them. All the 

abductees need to say is something to the effect: "I understand that we may have had a one on one 

agreement once upon a time, and I may even transmit on an unconscious level that I still am part of this 

agreement, but I am telling you here and now that our contract is void. I no longer want to take part in 

this experiment, and I don't want to encounter you again. So now, bring me back where you took me and 

leave without coming back again." 

Some may argue that this is us in the future, so we owe it to ourselves to set things straight, but 

people don't understand that all they need to do is to choose another reality -- now, in the present. If 

they change their belief systems, they choose another timeline. This may in the long run lead to the 

termination of the "Gray timeline", but in my opinion, that's what needs to be done. If not, our future is 

going to become a living hell -- at least for those who choose to become mesmerized by Sirian 

technology. 

Bashar says that we are moving towards a time when we "much more openly and freely choose to 

confront that which [we] fear".[9] He is correct in this, but if we do what they want, it will just slingshot 

us right into the Machine Kingdom. I must say I like to listen to Bashar; he -- or they, rather, as they are a 

Social Memory Complex -- have some very empowering information to give us, and these Essassani 

Grays may even have good intentions, seen from their perspective. They have even gained a good sense 


115



of humor. However, it is in their interest that we choose a certain timeline, or they may cease to exist in 

our future! This is most probably the real reason why they are here. They know the intentions of the less 

evolved Grays and know that if things are not going in the right direction this time around, things may 

be worse for the Essassani as well. They want to go further in their development, as well as we want to 

go further with ours. It's up to each person to choose; I simply lay out the stepping stones and what the 

consequences most possibly will be when we follow one or the other, or any alternatives thereof. You 

see, these Grays, I've noticed, have the same philosophy as I have, because it's just how metaphysics 

works. Bashar says that the contact with the Grays will lead to a personal transformation on a 

widespread level, and then lead to species transformation, very similar to what I want, but without 

nano-technology. 

So it really boils down to in what direction we put our thoughts, intentions, emotions, and actions. 

Our future depends on it, as the reader can clearly see. If we agree to help the Grays out of the mess 

they're in (we humans are creating it) will also continue the slavery we are experiencing right now, but it 

will become worse and really won't resolve much, from what I can see. The Essassani are definitely not 

the solution, in my opinion. But now, at the end of the Old Era, we get a new chance to start all over and 

create a new future, and I doubt we get another chance in a very long time. 

Right now, as we speak (and this has been going on for a while), members of the Zeta community are 

incarnating in human bodies with an agreement they have with their own to be abducted and 

experimented on from early childhood and throughout life. This is another type of agreement, and is the 

only reason these Zetas are incarnating on this planet in human bodies. Obviously, this doesn't work 

either, because the Zetas don't understand the nature of the human soul. If they incarnate in a human 

body with the little individual consciousness they have left, they will never figure out how it all works, 

because they exclude the human Fire from the equation, just like our own scientists do. 

Sex is of course another thing they want to be able to re-explore. Therefore, from another dimension, 

they are spying on humans having sex without the humans knowing about it. Hearing about this, people 

in the audience protest and say this is a intrusion of privacy, but again the Zetas say they only do it with 

people who respond with their "wavelength", and therefore are part of their project. To them, there is 

no difference between a conscious decision on the part of the human, or a sub- or unconscious 

response. The Grays respond to the part of the human mind which is the "loudest" at the moment. Their 

goal for now is to be able to have sex with a human. They say they can do that already now, even 

without having any genitals, because according to them, they can manifest a penis by just using their 

thoughts, and even have sex. However, they are not able to get the sensations a human gets in that 

situation, and they can't make a female pregnant. 

Harone explains that the Zetas are here in our local space, in what they call interdimensional space, 

and all they need is the flip of a switch in order to enter our reality and time continuum. But 

interestingly enough, none of them can nano-travel naturally until they reach the Essassani stage in their 

development. Before that, the Zetas are "nano-traveling" with the help of nano-technology! This is 

partly what the current investment in this technology will lead to. We will discuss nano-technology 

much more in one of the last papers, and I'm sure the reader will find that interesting. I am going to 


116



explain it in a very simple way, so people can really understand it. But bottom line is that when people 

see Zetas go through walls, they usually do this with help of technology, and not because they can do it 

as a part of their natural evolvement, which we who choose to evolve naturally are going to be able to 

do in the near future. With machine technology, they can also slightly change the vibration of the 

abductee, so they vibrate on a different frequency than the solid wall, and thus the Grays can lead them 

through solid objects. This, too, is coming from the horse's mouth. 

Many of the future Zetas are half etheric, like I said before, and Harone confirms what I told you 

earlier in my papers, that we humans have a tendency to call everything non-physical which we can't 

see, or perceive with our 5 senses, but Harone says that what we call non-physical can be very physical 

in other dimensions; it's just in other light and sound frequencies. 

Furthermore, they are talking about the 60% group versus the 40% group, where the 60% are the 

Meta Group, and we're talking about visitors here. They explain that the 60% group are of a slightly 

higher dimension and density and are able to shapeshift by changing their vibratory frequency so we 

perceive them as something different from what they really are. The 40% are more truly physical (which 

means 3D beings). These two groups represent present and future visitors to Earth. Interestingly 

enough, some of the 60% they call the meta-Lyrans, meta-Pleiadians, and meta-Terrans. The Lyrans, 

without any doubts, the way Harone, Sasha, and Germane describe them, are the same old Sirians 

under another guise. So, in other words, they are talking about the Sirian Alliance as those who can 

manipulate energy in the above ways, just like I've said many times before. The meta-Terrans are future 

humans whom the Sirians have taught how to do this. There are most probably already those who can. 

We know for a fact that the old shamans could do it in the ancient past - without technology. 

In the previous section, I said that the story about Apex is at least partly the story about we humans. 

For those who are interested, I want to give you the whole conversation where Sasha, the female 

Pleiadian who is working with the Grays, is telling us this. Keith, who is asking the questions, is Keith 

Priest, co-author to the book: 

"Keith: Obviously the Zetas are not truly alien to humanity. There has to be a deep connection that 

brings the two species together. It is a reunification of something in a unique way to create 

something new. I would go so far as to say that those who had a hand in engineering the humans 

also had a hand in engineering the Zetas. How else could it be? 

Sasha: Yes, that race would be called the Founders, and you discussed them in your book The 

Prism of Lyra. We would also like to bring up an issue that has been debated many times in your 

past about who, exactly, the Zetas are. In Visitors from Within the Apexians were discussed as 

being the species who became the Zetas. It has also been debated by others that the Zetas are 

really humans coming from the future to influence yourselves. 

Keith: Considering the nature of time and space, couldn't it be both? 

Sasha: Absolutely yes! Many people would feel that they need a definitive, either/or answer. Are 

the Zetas Apexians (a race outside of yourselves) or are they future humans - a literal aspect of 

yourselves returning to heal its past and change its future? It does not have to be one or the 


117



other. In fact, because reality is cyclical and not linear, a definitive answer does not make sense. It 

is both! Therein lies the paradox. As we have said many times, when one approaches a paradox, 

one is the closest to the truth."[10] 

And Sasha adds in another place in the book: 

"...different factions of Zetas and/or humans who are conducting various contact activities. Each 

of these groups has a different agenda"[11] 

So is it a wonder that people think the ET issue is complex and confusing? This is particularly true 

when we learn that part of the so-called "ET issue" is not about ETs at all, but about time jumpers. Many 

of them are humans from the future. 

Moreover, they tell us that another thing they were doing from the future was to "insert" the Asian 

race into the melting pot of Homo sapiens when they saw that the evolution "didn't work"[12] Not only 

do the Asians have similarities with the Grays when comes to their physical appearance, but they are 

also more of a "hive community", where the group means everything and the individual means less (I'm 

not saying this to insult Asian people, just as a matter of fact). They thought the Asian people would be 

the solution, but it wasn't. 

The Grays have always been fumbling in the dark, due to their lack of emotions and comprehension 

of their own past. One would think that even if they can't feel pain (which they can't in the sense we do 

it), they could at least notice that something is wrong when we do, during the abductions, and do 

something about it. Apparently, when they have humanoids with them at the abductions, something is 

done about it, thanks to the humanoids, but then the next time around when the Grays are alone with 

the abductee, they seem clueless again. How can something like that evolve, or change anything? To 

evolve as a species, you need to be able to learn these basic concepts, otherwise it's useless. And future 

history shows that it apparently is useless. Sasha says that humans will experience a leap in 

consciousness due to the Zetas' present interaction, but even if this is the case, it only propels us 

towards the Machine Kingdom, and we're running right into the arms of the Sirians. And the Harvest, 

according to the Alpha Draconians (whom we are visiting in the next paper), started its first phase in 

2011, when the first people were harvested. This means that "evolved people" who died around that 

time were harvested in the between-lives-area. 

Now we're supposedly only waiting for the Superwave. If the reader still has doubts which future you 

want to experience, a future hybrid child named Ethil in Royal's and Priest's book tells us that in his 

reality there is no difference between technology and spirituality, because they have blended so much. 

Apparently, in his time they have also managed to extend their lives considerably with technology. Ethil 

says that he basically can stay in the same body as long as he wants (thousands, perhaps millions of 

years if he so wishes), and when he gets bored, he can choose another one. Sounds exactly like what the 

Sirians do. And in the case of Ethil and his likes, they are at a point in the future development where 

humans are almost all machine, and as long as you can repair machine body parts, you can 

hypothetically live forever. Besides, if time is not linear, we have a totally different ball game. 

Furthermore, Ethil says that the natural way to evolve is with technology, and we need "outside help" to 


118



be able to take the leap. 

IV. How a Hybrid is Created 

Now the reader hopefully has a better comprehension of what I meant when I talked about the 

"enhanced human", "the evolved human", or even the "new species". This is literally so, because our 

DNA structure is changing radically as we learn new things and start living more in line with the cosmos 

and less within the current societal structure. Most of us still need to have a job and a roof over our 

heads, but we have a better understanding of how things are set up here, and know the difference 

between the 4% universe the Sirians want us to see and experience, and the real, 96% universe. 

We also know what the goals of the channeled sources are, and we need to remember that our 

branch of the Tree of Life -- a branch which is slowly but surely growing out -- is the natural evolution. 

No future being whatsoever is going to tell me that we need more genetic manipulation to be able to 

evolve. The Pleiadians said recently that this is a Living Library after all, and generic engineering and 

manipulation has always been going on here, and always will. Still, they say (and I agree), we are now an 

evolving species and must be left alone to do our thing. Hence, we need to claim our sovereignty, just 

like I've stressed as well throughout these papers, and one of the reasons I got interested in LPG-C and 

their projects, which were based on this same principle. We need to take a step outside of all agendas 

and create our own goals -- individually and as a soul group. 

We still have a few papers to go before Level III is finished and what's been hidden deep inside of us 

has come to the surface. So I suggest we move on to explain a little bit about how human hybrids are 

created; the real process. Again, this comes from the Grays themselves, but is it true? I would say it is, 

because it makes sense, it fits, and it feels right. The process the Grays use when they genetically 

manipulate a race is told by Harone, whom allegedly is the expert, being in charge of many of these 

projects. 

Here on Earth, the military has been involved in genetic engineering and manipulation for quite a 

while. But like with so many other things, there are always different factions, and each faction only 

knows so much. There is the "mainstream faction", which basically doesn't know enough to succeed in 

this field, and we have the "hidden section", which is overseen by military officers from the Shadow 

Government and the Sirians themselves. One faction is for the public, where a small percentage of what 

has been accomplished is released, so that the other faction can get more funding. 

Harone says that the problem in the mainstream faction is that scientists only look in the physical 

realm, and therefore miss out on 50% of the process, or more. So now Harone will reveal how to work 

with both the etheric and physical realms. 

The Etheric Levels: The etheric work is done on a meta-atomic level (where meta means "beyond"). It 

means it exists outside the physical dimensions, but exists here as well. The manipulation on this level is 

plasmic. Light plasma is induced in different areas to create specific coding, or for language. The physical 

adjacent to this non-physical state forms itself according to the light plasmic language that is set up. 


119



When they do their genetic work in the creation of hybrids, they first begin on the most basic of 

levels. They create a template around which physical life will eventually form itself. Chromosomes, RNA, 

DNA -- what we call the genetic structure -- represent some of the smallest genetic codes we can read 

right now. But there is a whole world beyond that, and that's where they begin. 

They start, first of all, by harnessing the template that exists for all forms of life in the reality the 

Zetas share with us. This template is a triadic structure that represents one polarity, its opposite, and 

the integration and the joining of the two. Life forms the way it does because of this template, which 

exists in the reality they share with us. They begin with the triadic template. 

Within the energy dynamic of this template they then insert plasmic light energy with the language 

encoded into it at the most basic levels. It is difficult to exactly describe what this language "says", they 

tell us, because it is a language that does not exist in physical reality. Its components eventually instruct 

physical matter how to create body structures. The language first affects the non-physical, and then the 

physical realms. Work on the etheric levels can be compared to building blocks. From the most basic 

level, plasmic light language instructs the physical matter to arrange itself according to these etheric 

templates. They have been working on many different strains of hybrid beings to find the most resilient 

ones, so they alter the plasmic light language attached to the triadic template in order to find the most 

perfect body structure that can serve them. 

Physicality is always connected to the non-physical, so what is done in the non-physical always affects 

the physical realms. There may be, in our terms, a time lag between the non-physical work and the 

physical manifestation, but that is only because of the idea of growth in an exponential sense from nonphysicality 

to physicality. Matter is matter because it has compressed itself enough from the energetic 

state to form a densified field. When the template is given enough light plasmic energy, it becomes 

compressed and enters the physical realm. This is the bridge between the etheric and the physical. 

The Physical Level: Our scientists may think that the physical aspects are much more easily 

manipulated. But once they have what we would consider to be a fetus, they then can monitor and 

direct its biochemical development so it will have the right mixtures and proportions of chemicals 

needed to develop the type of being they would like to create. 

The physical genetic work continues throughout the life of the hybrid simply because they haven't 

perfected the strain. They must continue to achieve the perfection that they seek. This is done through 

experiments and neurochemicals, adrenal chemicals, and basic chemical function in the body. It is also 

achieved by directing various light and sound frequencies on the developing fetus that will give it the 

signature vibration it needs in order to develop according to their plans. On all levels, then, the genetic 

work is done. The etheric level is the most basic, but is instrumental in the forming of the physical 

level.[13] 

So the above is, in general terms, how a hybrid is created, according to the Zetas. 

The questioner at one point is asking what the humans can gain from the visitations we currently 

have, and Sasha, the Pleiadian female, is the one who gives the answer: 


120



"Again we must understand that we must speak in generalities because each group has its own 

desires. They are always looking for ways to rectify their past. So the humanoids see this as a way 

to give back to humans what they perceive they've removed from Earth for thousands of 

years."[14] 

Think and ponder this statement. Why do all these star beings have to come here and rectify their 

past? And if this really is what they're doing, what does the following statement from Sasha mean? 

(Remember that the "metahumans", which are the Zeta/human hybrids, come back here in time in 

different stages of development and on different timelines. Therefore, they may have different agendas, 

even when they come as channeled sources): 

"The metahuman from the future has several different agendas, but they are all intertwined. This 

has to do with stimulating the energy necessary in the individual or the mass-conscious mind or a 

society to trigger the evolutionary process -- to make the leap." 

[...] 

"The Zeta Reticuli, even in the future, have not yet mastered the understanding of emotions, but 

they have learned the value to using empaths to translate to them what the human is 

experiencing. The humanoids take the emotional expressions from the human, synthesize them 

into a form that the Zeta Reticuli can identify with, and channel those emotions through 

themselves so that the Zetas can understand. [Emphasis not in original].[15] 

So, their agendas may be different, but they are all intertwined. And then, the humanoids have the 

ability to take human emotions and funnel them through themselves so that the Zetas can understand. 

If they can do that, they can do exactly the same thing when they channel through a human vehicle! And 

this is precisely, just like I've said so many times, why the audience who listens to a channeled source 

can feel all this love and light inside themselves during a channeled session, when in fact the entities are 

not even able to feel emotions! 

In my papers I have talked a lot about possession and how entities can attach to humans if people are 

not protecting themselves. What do you think happens when a channeled source is transmitting all this 

love and light, which is nothing but human emotions that they "steal" and funnel back through the 

vehicle and into the minds of the audience? Well, people feel so good about this boost of energy that 

they temporarily leave their bodies. And what can happen when someone leaves their body 

unprotected? They put up a "vacant sign" on it, and entities feel free to enter the empty body! This is 

entity possession. 

This may be one reason why the source is funneling all this love & light through the audience, but not 

the only reason. Of course, they also want to win people over so they can harvest them. 

Does this mean that we can't listen to channeling anymore, because we may become possessed? Not 

necessarily. But it is important that you protest yourself by putting an imaginary bubble around you 

before you start listening to any of that kind of material. Not all of it will make you possessed, of course, 

and not everybody get possessed, either, when they leave their body, but what I'm saying is that there is 


121



a chance. And if it is the purpose of the source to possess people, they will do what they can to take 

advantage of the vacancy. 

Mother Earth will continue orbiting the Sun in all the different versions of herself. The Machine 

Kingdom will happen here and not on a third party planet, and so will the splitting of worlds, where 

higher dimensional versions of Earth will exist simultaneously, and in the same space as the versions 

containing the Machine Kingdom. The only difference will be that they exist in different densities and 

dimensions, like Earth always has had its different densities and dimensions. The question is, which 

version do you want to live in? 

We have talked about many reasons why it's important that we do our inner work and how important 

it was to take advantage of the leap in consciousness and awareness that came, almost like a free ride, 

with the nano-second. Not only because this is the natural way to evolve, and we need as many people 

as possible to start realizing what is going on so they can begin to work on themselves, but it's also been 

(and still is) a race against time. The future hybrid Machine Kingdom Zeta/human hybrids are doing 

exactly what we are doing, but they are doing it with technology! They, too, are trying to get as many 

people as possible to realize that we belong to a cosmic consciousness and that we need to reach for the 

stars so we can apply for membership in the Galactic Community. 

But there is a major difference! The steps they are taking will lead humanity to a community where 

we become members in different Galactic Federations; most of those are just different names for the 

Sirian Alliance. The Zetas are mentioning the Association of Worlds, where the end product, the 

Essassani Grays are members. Indeed, Bashar and Sasha say that the Association of Worlds is the same 

as the Galactic Federation, which is the Sirian Alliance! 

The following is what the Zetas are doing with humans right now as we speak. They are talking about 

thousands of people, but that was in the 1990s. Imagine how many they are now. This is why we can't 

win the race and hope for all mankind to evolve like we want to do it. This is why we simply need to do 

the best we can and affect as many as possible -- as many as are willing to listen. Our job is not to force 

our ideas on others. All we can do is to work on ourselves, be of assistance when and where it's asked 

for, and that's it. The ripple effect will do the rest, and time will tell how many will go in this or that 

direction. 

"...we are facilitating something within you that is the culmination of a very ancient agreement. 

The genetic work on your planet with your species began from a more primitive form of life over 

a million of your years ago." [...] "At that time, it was not the Zeta Reticuli doing that work. In this 

time that you call the present we are picking up where your forefathers have left off..." 

[...] 

"But we also give you something. That something is more codes, more activation on the lightplasmic 

language level. This is occurring with literally thousands of people on your planet. There 

will be a critical mass reached, and when this happens, the species leap will occur in force." 


122



"What type of code? Can you explain the ideas that are represented there?" 

"...Primarily, the code we are triggering within you is the recognition of yourselves as part of a 

galactic ecosystem, a working piece of the whole..." 

"...We see the work we do with you as a galactic evolution, and since you've experienced only 

species planetary evolution, it is a new arena for you. But there are guides, there are facilitators 

who have been there before who assist you..." 

"...You will begin to speak the same language symbolically." 

"Do you mean in our thinking and feeling?" 

"Yes."[16] 

In the first part of this quotation they are telling us that they are continuing the work of the Sirians 

(which basically means that they are working on behalf of the Overlords), and that they are making 

changes to us, in spite of what they told us earlier (see the beginning of this paper). 

You can also see at the end of the quote that by coding us differently, they will alter our ways of 

thinking into thinking more collectively (and become more of a bee-hive collective, i.e. a Social Memory 

Complex(!)), and of course in a way that will fit into their agenda. If we let them do that, we are left with 

no choice. Can you see now why it is so important that I let people get the chance to take part of all this 

information? I haven't seen all this being revealed in its context anywhere else (and I mean the Levels I- 

III as a whole), but as soon as I'm done, it will be, and I will feel more at peace. 

My next paper, which will finish the series on channeling, is going to be all about the Alpha 

Draconians. Believe it or not, but it will take a whole paper, and it is totally necessary. I have never seen 

such a revealing information anywhere else when comes to channeling and what the real purpose of the 

Harvest is. We have already talked about that here, in relation to the information we get from the 

sources discussed thus far. But the Alpha Draconians take it ten steps further, if I may say so. It's too 

much to include in this paper, so I decided to give this information a paper of its own. You will see what I 

mean when you get the chance to read it. 

V. Disclosure 

People who are into channeling and have found it exciting may feel discouraged now after I've 

written these papers. Don't be! First of all I wanted to inform people about the true nature of the 

Harvest, and second, the more we learn about these things, the more we can use our discernment and 

figure out what information can be useful for us, and what is not. Even the most conspiratorial channel 

has good material in it which can be used for our growth. Again, let's never throw out the baby with the 

bathwater. I listen to channeled material myself and learn how to discern. 


123



The bottom line, however, is probably as follows: the star beings who are really genuinely here as our 

friends are still mostly lurking in the background without intervening. Some may have incarnated here in 

the same manner as we humans, and grown up here in order to directly assist, while others (most of 

them) are still observing. The latter are hoping that we can figure out on our own how to say no to the 

Sirian Alliance, raise our frequency, evolve, and be ready to make contact with a Galactic Community. 

When we are ready, contact will happen on an individual basis with this Galactic Community, and the 

information will be shared on channels who can handle it and are prepared. This is already happening 

and has been for a while. 

So many people are talking about Disclosure, which has become a subject with a capital "D" these 

days, and they are writing to the government, or even make appointment with our "representatives" to 

discuss the matter that the ET issue, which has been kept secret from humanity, now must be disclosed. 

There are those who want all files opened and let the ETs show themselves to the peoples of the world. 

I am sorry to make the reader disappointed again, if this is what you are hoping for, because the 

chance it will happen is next to zero. This is for several reasons, but the two most important ones are, 

1) The government is hiding so many crimes on this subject and many representatives in high 

positions are afraid for their lives if the UFO issue will be disclosed. They will do all that's in their power 

to keep the real X-Files hidden. And there are more people involved in the cover-up than we may think. 

However, there are factions of the military and the government who also want an end to secrecy and 

are working behind the scenes to make Disclosure happen, but they tread lightly, because they have 

families and don't want to end up like JFK and others who have "gone too far". Then when have 

something which is perhaps even more important: 

2) What do you think would happen if ETs start showing up here on Earth? Many of them are 

interdimensional and "materialize" from thin air. Many may look like us, but not all of them will behave 

like us. Then two things are bound to happen, which are 

a) people will freak out, because they are not ready. They will deny the truth as if their lives 

depended on it, because "everybody knows" they are demons, and many religious people will call them 

demons, Devas, Jinns, or whatever fits into their rigid belief systems. And they will demand that this 

horrific alliance with demons will stop. In the name of God they will invade the White House or whatnot 

and call everybody in there Satanists. Others will be scared out of mind, and our mental hospitals will be 

overfilled, and 

b) most peoples' nervous systems can't handle the energy from an alien. These energies that 

mankind would have to deal with are much stronger than our own at this point, and we have not been 

trained and prepared for such an encounter. Many, if not most peoples' nervous systems would fry. So, 

before the positive ETs show up in our cities, mankind needs to be prepared, and this is something I will 

talk about in my book, which will follow upon Level III. 

So, in other words, Disclosure in the sense most people think of it is not written in the stars at the 

moment. I have talked about the Machine Kingdom and a world ruled openly by negative ETs, so is that 

not a kind of Disclosure, after all? Yes and no. Of course, it is Disclosure in the sense that humankind will 

start mingling with this group of ETs directly, but they will live among us in enhanced human bodies that 

can handle their energies, and well established in those, they can hold back the powerful energies that 

are destructive to us, except when they want to show what they can do, or want to punish us. In these 

cases, people are bound to witness some phenomena they have so far only seen in movies. But 

remember that ETs walked among us in Sumerian times, and earlier. In those times, believe it or not, 


124



peoples' neurological systems were much stronger and they could more easily handle ET energies, 

because ETs were part of their daily life. 

For those who plan to come back to Earth and be part of building a higher density world, I would 

suggest you start preparing yourself for encounters that are much more beneficial for you than the 

Sirians. They are here in Near Earth Space, just waiting for you to be strong enough for an exchange to 

take place, without any exterior motives. Those who plan not to come back to Earth still need to practice 

this for the same reason. Many of us will move on and perhaps start an interaction with the Galactic 

Community already after this lifetime, and at that time we need our personal issues resolved -- at least 

those which hold our energies back. It's very important. That's why I, and many other researchers, have 

stressed how imperative it is that we take a look at our dark side, let them face the surface, take a look 

at them for what they are and let them go. This is the simple procedure that needs to be done right 

away if you haven't already started on it. And whatever comes up, it is nothing to be ashamed of. We all 

have done things we weren't proud of, which we throw down into the abyss of our minds, hoping to 

never have to dig them up again. Surprise, surprise! Now is the time! 

I know there are a lot of channeled material I haven't covered; the above is just a scratch on the 

surface. Some groups I will present in the Galactic Federation Paper later on, but if I have missed your 

favorite channeled source, I am sorry. However, the ones I've mentioned are enough to dig into in order 

to understand the agenda. 

Love, 



[0] Source: Wynn Free, "The Creator Gods of this Universe want to Talk to You", p.138. 

[1] Source: 4th Density, Channeling by Lyssa Royal (Document Collection, 1992-1999), p.1, op. cit. 

[2] Lyssa Royal: "Density/Dimension Scale", op. cit. 

[3] Lyssa Royal and Keith Priest, 1999: "Visitors from Within". 

[4] ibid. 

[5] Source: Transcript of channeled session by Bashar. 

[6] Royal: "The Zeta Reticuli Civilization -- Group Mind", op. cit. 

[7] http://cosmicawareness.websitetoolbox.com/post/Bashar-allows-a-Grey-to-speak-to-the-audience-5483523 

[8] Lyssa Royal and Keith Priest, 1999 [Second Edition]: "Visitors from Within", op. cit. 


125



[9] ibid. p.158. 

[10] ibid. pp.190-91. 

[11] ibid. p.192. 

[12] No, it didn't work from the perspective of the future Zeta/human hybrids, as we know. From their viewpoint, the "fork in 

the road" didn't happen the way the Pleiadians want it to happen now. Therefore, they think their timeline is the "best" there 

is; there are no alternatives, unless they intervene. Of course, they would never want the "splitting of the worlds" that I've been 

talking about, because that could potentially change their timeline, too, and they wouldn't have any control over it. 

[13] Lyssa Royal and Keith Priest, 1999 [Second Edition]: "Visitors from Within", pp.67-70. 

[14] p.126, op. cit. 

[15] p.122, op. cit. 

[16] pp.75-76, op. cit. 


126



Paper #5: The Alpha Draconians 

and the Creation of the Starhuman 

by Wes Penre, Wednesday, March 6, 2013 

Revised: Saturday, March 14, 2015 @4:05 PM 


Note to the Reader! After the fact of having published this paper, it has come to my knowledge that the Thuban (Alpha 

Draconian) calling himself Abraxas or Axraxasinas (interchangeable) is not a female, which I suggest throughout this and 

the next-coming paper. There were different reasons why I believed he was a she; one of them is the avatar that is being 

used on the forum that I am discussion in this and the next paper, http://www.birthofgaia.com/t116-abraxas-thuban-qa, and when 

reading the thread, I got the impression that she is female because she took possession of a handicapped middle-aged man (a so-called "walk-in"), which 

would potentially have made Abraxasinas a male. However, a few years earlier, in 1995, this being was living in a female body. However, with all this in 

mind, Abraxasinas gave at least me the impression that "he" wanted to be looked at as a female. 

I was contacted by a Thubanese about this issue, but it is too much to change all the gender references in this and the next article because I equally need 

to change it in the pdf version for this paper, and also the pdf version for the entire Level III. This is the reason why I let it stand as it is, but instead make 

this note to the reader. 

Another issue is fig. 1 here below. I used to use the avatar from the thread I am discussing, namely http://www.birthofgaia.com/t116-abraxas-thuban-qa. 

There you can see that the avatar is that of a young woman with long, black hair. This, however, is not Abraxasinas, but Xeia Kali SuiGeneris, Leviathan 

Waterflyer of the Realms and Thuban DragonQueen. Yes, this is the real deal. She claims to be one of the founding Elders of the Council of Thuban. The 

reason her picture was used in the thread I am discussing below is because the Thubans were banned from the Project 

Avalon forum during the time Kerry Cassidy and Bill Ryan were working together, so all the threads were transferred over 

to other servers, which the one I'm using as a reference is one of them. Xeia became the Administrator of that forum, and 

this is why her avatar is showing on Abraxasinas/Abraxas' post, which confused me into thinking Abraxasinas was the one 

depicted in the avatar. 

I want to set the record straight, however, so I changed the pictures (fig. 1 below) and instead use Abraxasinas' original 

avatar. Now that problem is out of the way. 

The second problem is the gender problem. Xeia Kali SuiGeneris, Leviathan Waterflyer of the Realms and Thuban DragonQueen, who was 

the Thubanese who contacted me regarding these errors, wanted me to present Abraxasinas/Abraxas as a male rather 

than a female (something I'd done throughout the papers). In fact, Xeia says that the Thuban Elders are all androgynous 

12-D beings, except when they take "outside bodies." Then they express a gender, such as male/female. Therefore, 

throughout this paper and the next, every time I call Abraxasinas/Abraxas "she" or "her," etc., it should actually be "he" or 

"him." 

Hope this will work for you, the reader (I will also update my pdf files). 

Love, Wes 

March 14, 2015 

I. Alpha Draconians -- Dragons from the VOID 

She calls herself Abraxas, but as an Alpha Draconian she goes under many names. Her perhaps most 

prominent name is Sirebird Beardris, and she is one of the Founding Elders of the Council of Thuban, 

residing in the 12th Dimension. 

I found her on a forum called The Birth of Gaia, http://www.birthofgaia.com, and she uses a gravatar 

of a young, attractive woman. In reality she is a "walk-in", which means she is a non-physical ET, whom 


127



as a soul is "possessing" a body where an original soul already dwells. It is like a soul came into your 

body and shared it with you and you kept yourself in the background. She emphasizes that she didn't 

just "walk in", but that it was an agreement between her and the original soul. Walk-ins are not 

uncommon these days when people are evolving, she says, and exactly what she means by that will be 

clear later on in this paper. She goes as far as to say that you and I are walk-ins as well, otherwise we 

wouldn't have any interest in this material. A walk-in can also be seen as a higher aspect of self. The 

reason she is here is to inform humanity of what is going on right now in regards to ascension and the 

so-called "Harvest". 

The human with whom she shares the body is John Shadow, a 53 year old handicapped man, born in 

Queensland, Australia, on June 4, 1957. John has a similar disease as that of the scientist, Stephen 

Hawking, but in Shadows' case, it's concentrated only to the legs, and he needs two canes to be able to 

move around. Abraxas, however, looks at herself as a female and addresses herself like such. She also 

says she's the Thuban Council's Ambassador to Earth, where Thuban is the name of the star, Alpha 

Draconis. 

Figure 1. Abraxas, as she 

depicts herself on the forum. 

The Thuban Council, which is directing her message to mankind, are not 3D beings, but of the 12th 

Dimension, which is within the KHAA (also called the 96%, or the VOID). Abraxas is actually telling us 

that she is from the VOID, and that the 12th Dimension is not in the physical universe. 

Abraxas uses a type of data streaming when she is transforming her message, just like A'shayana 

Deane does when she is communicating with the Guardian Alliance, and the Thuban message can 

sometimes be just as complicated and esoteric as that of Ms. Deane. However, Abraxas is not reluctant 

to answer questions when asked, and sometimes the questions are of high quality, and that makes her 

going. Some new and quite shocking material is being revealed. 

But why is she here? What does the Council of Thuban want? Because the Alpha Draconians are 

super-bad, aren't they? If someone would eat you alive, it would be them, right? 

Not according to Abraxas. She admits, though, that there are Dracos in lower densities who are more 

like savages in that respect, but she is the messenger of a very highly respected Royal Dragon Council. 

And of course, as usual they are us in the future! Abraxas says we have a lot of Draconian DNA in our 

body and that our reptilian brain comes from them. The reason they are here, preparing for the Harvest, 

is because we called for them, our future selves, due to that "it's time". The Thubans also believe that 


128



they are here to assist James of the WingMakers, whom they in most part support. And just like James 

Mahu Nahi and Hidden Hand, Abraxas has no intention to go public except on a few forums. She is of 

the conviction that those who need to find the information will find it. 

Just like RA, the Cassiopaeans, and others, the Thubans are coming only because of the Harvest. And 

just like them, they are riding on the Superwave. But there is a difference; the Alpha Draconians say they 

are in charge of the Harvest. They are the Highest Order, and the ones who will see to that the Harvest 

happens. She also says quite a lot about us, and for one, we are of Dragon blood and Dragon seed, and 

therefore we should come to them, and them alone. And fear not; the Dracos are benevolent (so she 

says). 

I believe there is the equivalent to a few hundred pages long thread where the Birth of Gaia members 

interact with Abraxas online. I started reading it some time ago, and when you see through the esoteric 

language she uses, you mainly see similar information that you see when studying channeled sources; 

albeit, she goes a whole lot deeper. Otherwise, it's the same love & light, STO/STS, density teachings, 

and ascension in form of a Harvest. However, towards the end, when Abraxas gets into a dispute with a 

few of the forum members, it's getting extremely interesting. Suddenly, she lets her guard down and 

tells these people exactly what the Harvest is all about and why they are really here! Suddenly, the 

whole subject on the Harvest makes all the sense in the world! 

So I decided to write this paper to reveal the same thing to you that was revealed to me, but without 

much of the complicated linguistics. Her message is often delivered in quite an esoteric language, and 

hopefully I can make the whole subject more coherent and easier to read than on the forum. Albeit, the 

forum is there for those who want to read it all, but it often requires all of your attention to grasp what 

she's saying. Here is the URL: http://www.birthofgaia.com/t116-abraxas-thuban-qa. The thread on the 

Birth of Gaia Forum started on October 17, 2010. Enjoy! 

II. Understanding the Basics of Alpha Draconian Cosmology and the Draconian Star Race 

Abraxas starts with giving us a short introduction of the Council of Thuban, but goes more into details 

later on. She says they are not well known by any beings dwelling in the lower dimensions, but have 

been mentioned by the Andromedans, and their messenger, Alex Collier. 

When we look at what Alex Collier says about the Alpha Draconians, it is that they are probably the 

most misunderstood of all star races. He says he has witnessed a deep respect for this race, generated 

out of admiration and fear. He further says that the Draconians are probably the oldest race in our 

universe, and they don't even know how they came here.[1] The Council of 11 (or just 11 for short), 

which is the Andromedan Council according to Collier, say that the Draconians were here first and are 

therefore the heirs to this universe and are as such all royalty! Furthermore, they say that the Dracos 

have conquered big parts of the universe and altered the DNA in species they have encountered on their 

conquest. 

Apparently, the Thubans have told the Andromedans that the most densely populated area of subraces 

of Draconians is the Constellation of Orion, Rigel, and the star system known as Capella. The 

Thuban thinks that fear rules and love is weak, and the weak are meant to be slaves. Therefore, they 


129



don't exactly bring peace where they show up. They use technology for control and domination and they 

brainwash their young to be suspicious against other star races, including humans. Abraxas refers to 

Collier's paper, but neither confirms, nor disputes the information therein. 

So this is the story the Andromedans are telling us about the Draconians. Thuban is one of the star 

systems the Sirians have conquered, so then the Draconians are pretty much in alliance with, or maybe 

even slaves to the Sirians, right? Not according to Abraxas. She is talking about archetypes ruling the 

universe, where the Prime Creator is on top, and the Alpha Draconians, or the Thubans, of the 12th 

Dimension is an Archetype of the 1st Oder, while both the Sirians and the whole Alliance are Archetypes 

of the 3rd Order (we will go much deeper into archetypes later in this paper). It means that these 

Thubans are way higher up on the interdimensional scale than the Sirians, or at least so they claim. 

However, they are promoting the 3rd Order Archetype as being the controller of this 4D reality. This 

shows clearly in the thread, where Abraxas promotes the Second Coming of Jesus, whom is none less 

than Jesus/Lucifer/ENKI. But isn't Lucifer Jesus' adversary? No, according to the Thubans, Lucifer is Jesus' 

mirror, which means that when Jesus was battling Lucifer or Satan in the Bible, he was simply battling 

his own dark sides; the ones inside himself. 

Now, don't think for a moment that this paper will be a repetition of the previous ones about the 

Harvest and the Superwave. Although I'd gotten used to all that, this Thuban thread came as a shocker. 

All the following information needs to be known! 

At the top of the Thuban Council sit the 24 Elders, who are the Thuban Dragons, receiving their 

authority from the 4 Beasts, and through them from the Prime Creator, or God. To be more precise, the 

Council consists of 12 androgynous archetypes that are mirroring the 12 existing dimensions and are 

therefore fulfilling the role of mirroring all the dimensions, from the 1st to the 12th. It is my 

understanding that in Thuban cosmology everything is mirroring itself, and this mirroring continues on 

an upward gradient scale, up through the dimensions. I am mirroring myself as well, by also being my 

opposite, and the same goes for you. That's us here in 3D. According to Draconian cosmological model, 

each Elder can be each dimension and at the same time mirroring them. So 12 Elders in this sense 

become 24 Elders, as each Elder Dragon is doubled. This may sound incredibly esoteric, but is basically 

nothing new; I believe I've seen this is old gnostic writings as well. 

When asked if this star race are real dragons, and look like dragons, their answer is confirmative. 

However, how does a dragon look like? Well, when we humans found the first bones of the horrifying 

"lizards" in form of the prehistoric Iguanodon, our imagination started working for us, and thus we 

created an archetype of Dragons here on Earth. Then, as time went by, we more and more changed our 

perspective of how dragons look like, from fire-breathing flying dinosaurs to more T-Rex and alligatorlike 

creatures. But before that, in medieval Europe, the "correct" picture of Dragons replaced the old 

ones. Here they were two-legged human-looking serpentine creatures -- the correct archetype of the 

Serpent, which did not glide sideways, but like a sinusoidal waveform, which is up and down like the 

picture in an oscilloscope. This is how the Dragons apparently move in the VOID. 

The Thubans distinguish between the Sky Blue or Cyan colored Dragon and the Red Dragon. The 

former is the Master Dragon and the latter is in prophecy called the "Devil", and is so neutralized 

(discharged) in the Entwined Serpent or Double-Dragon of the White Lucifer with the Black Lucifer. But 

as long as we are reading this paper, we need to keep in mind who this group of entities, declaring 

themselves as being next under the Prime Creator, are. They say they are both our ancestors and our 

descendent, like so many others. The thing is that if we look at this in perspective, there is a chance that 


130



each of these channeled sources who say they are us in the past and in the future could potentially tell 

us the truth. We have the Grays, we have the Pleiadians, the Cassiopaeans, and many more...They all fit 

into this agenda, as we shall see. 

Figure 2. "The Blue Master Dragon", here moving through the VOID in a sinusoidal waveform. 

The Thubans say that in the beginning of the universe was the Dragon. The Dragon as consciousness 

eventually descended into matter (3D) and became humans. Then, seen from a perspective of 

simultaneous time, we are now going to ascend again, after have learned the lessons we need to learn 

in 3D, and we will become what they call Starhumans. A Starhuman is Old Human (homo sapiens 

sapiens) + Dragon. So in reality, we are ascending, while they are descending down to meet us; they, 

who are us in the future. This is what they call the Harvest. The new human, after the Harvest, is the 

Dragonized Starhuman. 

ii.i. Dimensions of the VOID and the 4% Universe 

Abraxas agrees that one of the most misunderstood concepts in metaphysics is that of dimensions 

and densities. Without going into too many details about the Alpha Draconian version, we still need to 

touch on it to have the rest make sense. It's not differing too much from what we have already talked 

about earlier, however. The Thubans prefer to use the term dimension, I've noticed. 

We already know that according to the Thubans, there exist 12 dimensions all together. This also 

coincides with the RA Material and others, who embrace 8 densities (or dimensions), and I will explain 

why that is. The Draconians do not endorse A'shayana Deane and her Guardian Alliance's 15 dimensions, 

however. 

They say that any ET race we can ever think of exists in the 8th Dimension or under. We humans 

basically exists in 4 of them, where the 4th Dimension is the astral. So in other words, the ascension is 


131



not from 3D to 4D, but from 4D to 5D, unless we speak of densities. In that case it would be from 3D to 

4D. The RA collective were talking about octaves. In the RA concept, when we'll reach the 8th Density, it 

starts all over in a new, higher octave of 8 densities. According to the Dragons, this is basically correct, 

because like I said, no star race can go higher than the 8th Dimension, because the rest, from 9-12, are 

the "Angelic Dimensions", if we want to call it that, and exist in the VOID, outside our universe. 

When we talk about dimensions here on Earth, we are still only talking about the astral, they say, 

which is limited to 4 Dimensions. 5D is the last dimension of embodiment. To reach the 6th Dimension, 

we need to get in contact with what they call the "superconsciousness", which requires transcension of 

the subconscious; something that is not possible if we inhabit a physical body, they say. Not even in 

Near Death Experiences or Out of Body Experiences can we reach the 6th Dimension. 

If we compare this with what I wrote about in Level II, it corresponds pretty well with the distinction 

between the 96% universe and the 4%. Dimensions 9-12 in the Thubanese model are the VOID (96%), 

and dimensions 1-8 are the 4% where we are programmed to dwell. As we can see, there are nonphysicals 

even in the 4% universe. And I agree with the Dragons when it comes to entering the VOID; we 

totally must connect our different "minds" with each other. Some can be done already now, while the 

rest has to be done in the non-physical. This starts in Dimension 6, according to this material, and 

expands up through Dimension 8, when we finally can see the universe for what it is. 

James of the WingMakers said in the Project Camelot Interview in 2008 that ANU of the Anunnaki 

and his people created what I call the 4% universe, ready with its own dimensions and everything. He 

called it a "cloned universe" (more as a metaphor, when indeed he described the 4% universe), and 

those who are stuck in it believe that this is the only universe there is. So, what it certainly looks like is 

that even the channeled sources, who are us in the future, but of a higher density or dimension than we 

earth humans, are still stuck within the 8 dimensions of the 4% universe. They say that once they reach 

the 8th dimension/density, they become One with the Creator and start operating in a new octave, 

which starts on a higher level than the one they just completed. Therefore, they are waiting for us 

humans to catch up in order to reach the next octave. At the same token, they have no idea what the 

next octave is, and how life will be there. 

Every 26,000 years, when the solar system has completed an orbit around the zodiac, the Thubans, 

who say they live "outside" the 4% universe[2], descend at that time and help a few "ripe" humans 

ascend into the VOID, where they are assigned a mission, which we shall talk about in the next 

paper. Moreover, they tell us that they are us in the future, trying to collect us all one day, so we can 

unite with our future self. 

There are different ways for a human here on Earth to receive messages from star beings; channeling 

is just one way. The Cassiopaeans, as we learned, are communicating via an Ouija Board, but there are 

more ways, such as "data streaming", which I mentioned in the beginning. A'shayana Deane and Abraxas 

of the Alpha Draconians have that thing in common -- they are data streaming their information, which 

is different from channeling. In channeling, there are beings there, communicating to the audience 

through a human "vehicle", in real time. In data streaming, the vehicle is receiving the message in 

"packages", almost like computer zip files, containing all the information the vehicle needs to answer 

the question, and sometimes more. No trance state is needed; you ask the question, a download 

happens, and the vehicle receives the answer from the star race. Normally, the messenger who receives 

the "zip file" is a member of the star race which is sending them, so it's not like the receiver is 

uninformed of the information. 


132



What people who are data streaming seem to have in common is that the messages come from 

outside the physical universe! Therefore, the information is considered extra valuable and "advanced". 

In other words, the messages come from the VOID, the 96% Goddess Universe, somewhere between 

Dimensions 9-12. James of the WingMakers said that as long as someone is communicating in words or 

even thoughts, no matter the language, the message comes from within the cloned universe. This is 

true, he says, in spite of if the messengers are non-physicals from higher dimensions or not. Data 

streaming, however, doesn't consist of words, but a package of information that is instant and manifest 

as "knowledge" in the receiver's brain. Therefore, data streaming is considered the highest form of 

"channeling". For data streaming to take place, there must be an opening between the VOID and the 4% 

universe, or the communication channel is closed. It's almost like a stargate opening between the two, 

or a black hole, but still something different. Abraxas calls it "Bigmo's Balloon". This was actually a 

concept which was coined during a forum session when Abraxas discussed this matter with someone on 

the forum with the profile name "Bigmo". Abraxas used the allegory of a balloon to describe the 

difference between the 4% universe and the VOID; thus "Bigmo's balloon". And here is how it works. 

ii.ii. Bigmo's Balloon 

Abraxas explains that normally the difference between space/time/time/space and the VOID (which 

does not include time and space) is closed. Sometimes there is a little opening between the two, and 

that's when communicating (in form of data streaming) can happen. Those in the VOID (Dimensions 9- 

12) are living in the Goddess Universe and are supposedly all-knowing and can potentially answer any 

questions someone in space/time or time/space may have. According to the Thubans, we all have a 

"mirror" in the VOID, which is our adversary, just as well as here we are the adversary to ourselves in the 

VOID. Thus the concepts of Satan and God, where Satan is God's adversary, and the two "live" in the 

VOID and the 4% universe, respectively. 

This can be exemplified by a balloon that has been filled. The balloon is egg-shaped, just like the 

universe (or the Multiverse in LPG-C's Working Model, where they called it the UNUM), and has an 

outside and an inside. The inside is of course the 4% universe with its 8 dimensions, while the outside is 

the Goddess Universe (the VOID, the KHAA, the 96%), with its 4 dimensions. The Thubans are our 

mirrors, waiting on the inside for us to become one big collective and join them -- at least this is the 

ultimate "Masterplan". 

There are small periods of time when "stargates", in lack of a better word, open between the VOID 

and the universe of space and time, when we humans can ascend and be harvested before the gates 

close again and we have to wait another whole cycle (26,000 years), or a semi-cycle, before we can 

ascend again. This is not because we are going from 4D directly into the VOID, but because the Thubans 

need to descend from the VOID to the 4% universe every time we are ascending from one dimension to 

the next. The Gnostics used a great picture to explain the difference between the VOID and the 4%, 

which we can see below in fig. 3. 

The term "Bigmo's Balloon" has now allegedly been incorporated in the Thuban nomenclature. 


133



Figure 3. This old Gnostic painting can be viewed as an example of a being who is looking through a "stargate" 

between the 4% universe where he lives, and into the outside of "Bigmo's Balloon". 

III. Humanity as One Big, Universal Family 

Abraxas is telling the Forum members that in the 4% universe there are only humans! No other 

species exist here except humans! I want the reader to ponder this for a moment before you go on to 

the next paragraph. 

Now, who else has been telling us the same thing in the past? That's right! James of the WingMakers 

said the exact same thing in his 2008 interview with Project Camelot (for you who need a link to that 

interview once again, here it is: http://wingmakers.com/downloads/Interview_James_PC.pdf). He said 

that the human template was used here on Earth first, and highly developed spirits from higher 

dimensions (read the VOID) were manipulated into entering these biological, human bodies. These 

bodies could do a lot of fun things, like having sex, playing around, touching things, smelling things, 

going on adventures -- you name it! And ANU and his people asked the highly evolved spirits if they 

wanted to try this, and they did. Then, after these spirits had experienced this holographic universe that 

was built into these bodies and wanted to get out, ANU said, "Oops, we forgot to tell you something. 

There is no way to get out!" And these spirits of the VOID have been trapped in human bodies ever 

since. So if we are to believe James, the whole 4% universe exists only within our bodies and does not 


134



exist outside of them. Our bodies, in other words, are huge holograms which contain everything we 

know as being a universe. The Thubans and the WingMakers therefore live outside of these bodies and 

data stream their information from there. The movie "The Matrix" certainly comes to mind, where 

human bodies where hooked up to machines showing a hologram of the universe, and these hooked up, 

spirited bodies, experienced the holographic universe from their seats, so to speak. 

iii.i. The WingMakers Interview from a New Angle 

To continue the WingMakers story (and I really think we need to review it again, now from a new 

angle); ANU wanted to become the God of the universe. And he wasn't talking about a 4% universe, but 

the whole universe, and thus entrap all souls there are -- in the 4% universe as well as the 96%, which is 

exactly what I've been saying, too. James says the entrapment happened during the Atlantean times, 

and I agree with that, because different researchers have different concepts of when the Atlantean time 

started. What he is basically talking about is when ENKI, the master scientist trained directly under the 

Queen of the Stars, on a mission from his stepfather, ANU, after he'd rebelled in Orion, went to Earth to 

create Homo sapiens as a slave race to the gods. Like James says, the earlier humans were highly 

evolved (androgynous) humans who were not stuck in their bodies and had total recall of whom they 

were. 

We then know the story how ENKI, together with his brilliant co-engineers, created Homo sapiens 

from the existing apes and the human race I call the Namlú'u. These new bodies were not of the same 

kind the Namlú'u (Lús) had, which were divine and created directly by Mother Goddess and her own 

scientists at that time (the Thubans say it was them). So, Homo sapiens became a watered-down version 

of the magnificent Lús, but still divine in their making, because they still had Lú and Orion DNA, but were 

degraded with Sirian genetics. 

What ENKI did was to add a Human Mind System (HMS) to the bodies he genetically engineered in 

secret, successfully withholding this from the Namlú'u, who were living side by side with the Fallen 

Angels from Sirius. His and ANU's idea was to trap the human multidimensional souls into the new 

bodies, so they could enslave these highly evolved spirits from Orion, who had the Fire of the Mother 

Goddess. 

These new bodies also contained something that was very unique for them -- a rich range of 

emotions! The new Human Mind System had this, plus a higher dimensional body attached to it, based 

on the physical body. This higher body separated itself from the physical body when the physical body 

died, and thus carried on. 

Some call this higher dimensional body the "soul", while others call it the astral body, but in reality it's 

just a lesser dense body for the real soul to operate within. The truth is, according to James, that even 

this higher-dimensional light-body is part of the HMS, and therefore within the trap system. Thus, it has 

been subjected to most of the programming ENKI and his cohorts put into these bodies. These new 

vessels were then programmed to be run by a soul (which is basically a cluster of Fires), who were 

manipulated into attaching themselves to the physical body and the higher-D body. 

Some of the most potent programs in the Homo sapiens bodies were "fear of death"; "fear of 

separation", and fear of "non-existence". Another powerful program was amnesia; the soul had now 


135



hardly any memories from previous lives. It was easy for ENKI and the Sirians, ruled by ANU and ENLIL, 

to place themselves as the one and only God in the minds of the new humans. They did so by creating a 

composite God, whom we know as YHWH, Jehovah, and a number of other different names. This 

composite God manifested himself, or spoke to humans in the non-physical, through at least three 

individuals, portraying themselves as one; ANU, ENKI, and ENLIL. 

Then, to be able to meet God and be redeemed, it didn't matter which religion you subscribed to and 

whom you called God, because the underlying programming was the same; you had to meet the 

requirements of the earthly conditions and could then either live in Paradise with God for all eternity, or 

be your own spiritual teacher of the light. 

It is also embedded into the human mind that you need a savior or a teacher to be able to ascend, 

and even to achieve happiness in the physical world. The program is so powerful that even when you 

feel you have achieved self-realization, you are still trapped in this human mind system. This is why the 

PTB, or the metaphysical beings who run them, often don't care if people are trying to evolve. ENKI and 

ANU knew that mankind would evolve over time, so they made it extremely hard to be able to evolve 

out of the Human Mind System! James mentions that saviors can come in many shapes and forms; as a 

Messiah, a wrathful God, prophecy, or extraterrestrials who say they are able to help you evolve and 

intercede on humanity's behalf, to name a few important and common ones (especially keep the last 

one in mind when you read the rest of this, and the following paper, or papers). And James says, word 

for word in this interview: 

"Each of us is our own and only savior, our only master who can truly cause us to stand-up within 

ourselves and shut down the suppression systems and awaken to their Sovereign Integral 

consciousness." 

I couldn't agree more, and this is what I have always said. This is important to understand when we 

continue reading, because this powerful statement will be challenged by the Thubans. And ponder this: 

the main reason the Overlords want to keep us separated and not in groups is because separated 

individuals who don't have the power of the group mind can be more easily controlled. Therefore, 

groups who are becoming powerful are therefore infiltrated. 

Polarity is also a part of the Human Mind System that ENKI created, and it is based on fear, originating 

from the solar plexus area. Polarity includes friction between the different polarities, so that fear and 

domination will always exist. If there is polarity where you exist, you are a part of this giant Human Mind 

System program which is the Sirian trap. 

James says it is true that the Sirians (whom he calls the Anunnaki) came here to participate in the 

human experience in the realm of matter to exploit its resources, but they also wanted to entrap those 

powerful, free-thinking beings who lived on this beautiful planet, and they wanted to make them not 

only into slaves, but willing slaves (and God knows they have succeeded!). But because human souls 

evolve naturally, it would eventually become a problem if no intervention was done over time. 

Therefore, the Overlords decided that when people came close to breaking through the HMS prison 

walls, more genetic manipulation needed to be done on them. This is one reason why there are so many 

alien abductions these days, I would say, because people are getting pretty close to seeing through the 

trap. Now the Sirian genetic engineers are busy, busy, to keep up with the "upgrade" of the human 

template (which in fact works for us like a "downgrade"). The true state of the human soul (the soul as a 


136



Fire and a Feminine Divine) was not realized by anybody until quite recently, and has been even more 

expanded upon since James was in this interview in 2008, in parts by myself. 

Over and over I come back to this single interview with James from -08, because I think much of it is 

very potent and powerful information that should be taken seriously. There are other aspects of the 

WingMakers Material I am less thrilled with, and also so with small parts of the Camelot Interview, but 

at the most part, it is spot on if I compare it with my own research so far. Listen to this, for example: 

"Yes, the densities are shifting, but these are artifacts of the Human Mind System (HMS). Even 

the belief that the near-infinite dimensions of the astral and mental planes are real is a 

comparison to the physical plane. I would suggest to you that what is in the purview of the 

human instrument, which includes the physical, emotional (astral) and mental densities or 

dimensions are all caught up in the HMS and suppression framework. It is not of the Sovereign 

Integral and it is therefore impermanent, existing in polarity, separation, and deception. In other 

words, it is a creation designed to conceal what you truly are." 

Here is the key to the channeled material, whether it is the RA Material, Elohim, or non-channeled 

material such as that given to us by the Thuban walk-ins. It's all part of the HMS and a distraction! Like 

I've been saying; people are waking up and the Overlords need to do something! However, they don't 

need to think very hard, because their solution has been planned for long in form of prophecy. In simple 

words, they are using prophecy against us so we divert from our path and start going towards the dead 

end of the HMS. This is hopefully becoming crystal clear with this and the few upcoming papers. 

So the human body, whether it is the physical body or the higher-D body, is the soul trap we're 

engaged in, and the PTB are our prison guards, although they themselves are part of the prison. It's truly 

like if the inmates are running the asylum. Within this body system exists the whole holographic 

universe, including all the higher dimensions which the channeled sources are talking about. Although a 

higher dimension may seem like infinite freedom compared to the prison we're sitting in here on Earth, 

the higher-D beings are still trapped, just like we are, because they still operate through their higher-D 

body and are thus being manipulated. This is how it works according to James, and overall I think that's 

a picture close enough. 

I definitely don't want to suggest that I am more knowledgeable than James, because over the whole 

spectrum of knowledge, he is much more aware than I am, but there are certain things I have 

researched very deeply, and one of these things is the concept of Fire/Soul. James is mentioning only 

one body that is higher dimensional compared to the physical body, and that this body as well is trapped 

within the HMS. I would say we have more than one higher-D body within the HMS, and one of them is 

the Soul/Fire, or what I call the "light-body" or the "avatar". This light-body consists of perhaps millions 

of small fires which all together form this light-body, or avatar, normally in a similar shape as the recent 

physical body. This avatar is the human soul, which means that the human soul does not operate within 

a higher-D body; it is the higher-D body. However, I agree with James that the avatar is certainly trapped 

within the HMS. 

However, we need to remember that even if the avatar is stuck in the HMS, it also has a direct link to 

the Oversoul, which James calls the Sovereign Integral. And it is our search for ourselves outside the trap 

that becomes our priority. James tells us that all we need to do is a simple breathing exercise called "The 

Quantum Pause" and we will connect. I think it's a wonderful exercise and believe it works, but there are 

more things I think need to be done. 


137



Sometimes, when we evolve, we break down a prison wall and suddenly we have more freedom than 

we had the minute before. However, there are other walls, and other walls, and other walls behind 

those, which all need to be broken down. And, according to James, so long as we depend on pictures, 

images, sounds, words, feelings, and thoughts to interpret our world, we are still inside the prison walls. 

I know that many people think that this sounds scary. How can you enjoy living without all the 

perceptions in the above paragraph? Is the VOID really the way to go? Yes, that's where our freedom 

lies, because we, as infinite Fires, are there free to create whatever we want, and what we create is 

manifesting instantly. Then, we can uncreate it just as quickly if we wish or get tired of it. And if we want 

to travel somewhere within our own creation, or the creation of somebody else, it's instant. There is no 

time in the VOID in the sense we know it. To reach the point of freedom from the imprisonment, we 

need to use nature as a catalyst, but also find the spirit within and work on making it remember. This 

will be the project of my book, following upon Level III. And just to make something clear, the way I see 

it: Ascension is not the answer to obtaining our freedom. We already have everything we need within 

ourselves. It's not ascension, but self-realization that we need. 

This, I believe, is very important to understand. We gain nothing from "ascending to the 5th or 6 

th Dimension", except the illusion of freedom, which in the long run will lead us further and further 

away from what we want to accomplish -- freedom from external manipulation. Number one is to 

realize we are controlled in every corner of life. Number two is to disagree with the manipulation, and 

number three is self-realization. 

There is more coming from James on the subject of ascension and channeling. How do we know that 

the pictures we have of ascension is not just information that has been implanted in us through our 

unconscious mind (which is dream state)? After all, we going to hear from the Dracos themselves that 

they consider it okay to give us unconscious information through dream state. So that validates what 

James is saying. 

Bill Ryan and Kerry-Lynn Cassidy of Project Camelot are asking James about channeled material in 

general, and James is saying that all of it is coming from the HMS and are just artificial, clever programs, 

created by the Anunnaki (Sirian scientists, using Orion technology [my comment]). 

"In more recent times channeling has become more automated, using pre-programmed scripts, 

voice tonalities, gestures, and accents which are implanted in the HMS of the individual 

channeler, and quite literally “broadcast” for later publication and dissemination among those 

who have a resonance to GSSC and seek enlightenment therein." 

[...] 

"They discuss the heavens, God, angelic beings, extraterrestrial intelligences, the service 

orientation of ascended being, ascension process of soul, morality, practical living, alignment to 

God, life after death, and the complex teacher-student ordering of the universe. It is all designed 

to instill separation and satisfy the seeker that truth exists on the material plane, thus, they do 

not have to leave the prison to find it; they simply need to read or listen with their mind." 

If the above is true, the channeled material in my previous papers are merely Sirian preparations for 

the direct information through walk-ins like the Alpha Draconian Abraxas. This could very well be the 


138



case, and the most possible purposes for that will be discussed at the end of the Alpha Draconian 

Series. 

James' version of how the Lú souls (which are us according to the WingMakers' philosophy) got 

trapped in the bodies has been covered in a previous paper, but shortly, as a reminder, these free spirits 

were shown the new bodies and were asked to try them out. ANU and his team said that it would be a 

very fun experience, and there was a lot they could do which the current Lús couldn't, because they 

were androgynous. One such experience was to feel sexually aroused and be able to have sex and 

reproduce from having intercourse. The Lús, who were very wise, but still curious souls, tried it out and 

liked it. Somehow, through manipulation, ANU managed to have most of the Lús entering the new 

bodies, but when they wanted out, they found out they were trapped. Soon enough, their consciousness 

decreased as well, because the vibration of the new bodies were much lower. 

And thus, the 4% universe was created and we got trapped in it - Lú souls and others. This story 

coincides quite well with what I told in Level II. 

James of the WingMakers then claims that in 3D there are no other alien beings but humans, and that 

ANU's universe consists of only humans (in 3D) and interdimensionals, who are also trapped in the HMS. 

I never really understood what he was talking about until I dug into the Alpha Draconian info, although 

the Dragons insist that this universe only exists of humans, no matter if they are dimensional or 

interdimensional. 

Soon the reader is going to understand why I had to go into such details about the channeled sources. 

It's extremely important in order to understand the whole agenda with the Harvest and ascension in 

general. 

iii.ii. Ascension Equals Descension 

What the Thubans are saying is that they are now going to descend "down" from the VOID into the 

physical universe to meet us here on Earth and help us ascend to the 5th Dimension through something 

they call the Harvest. But moreover, they also tell us that Earth is the center of the universe, and 

mankind is the center of attention for all beings in the universe! This includes the Grays, other physical 

beings from 4th or 5th Dimensions, and the non-physicals in Dimensions 6-8. All of them have their 

attention on Earth, whether they reside in the Milky Way Galaxy, the Andromeda Galaxy, or galaxies 10 

billion light-years from here! 

Why is that? What is it that makes us humans so special? Well, we are special because if we don't 

ascend, they can't ascend, either! The reason for this is that no matter where a star race exists in the 4% 

universe, or how they look like, they are still versions of mankind; either in the past or in the future! So 

we have all these timelines (remember, time allegedly only exists in the 4% universe) with different 

versions of humans, hybridized or not, who are all waiting to merge with the version of themselves 

dwelling in the lowest dimensions, which are dimensions 1-4. This means us humans! 


139



This is why RA and all the rest of these sources say they are a Social Memory Complex, dwelling in 

one of the higher dimensions. They have become collectives and are now waiting for all these versions 

of humanity who have spread out over the universe over time to merge with them and with each other. 

And in particular, they are waiting for us here on Planet Earth to ascend, one dimension at the time, 

until we reach dimension 8 and can merge with the rest of humanity from different timelines and places 

in the physical, holographic universe. Once that is done, we can all, as a whole humanity, ascend into 

the VOID, and the illusion of the 4% universe will disappear! 

And thus, if this would be true, we have the answers to almost all of the questions about who the 

channeled sources are -- at least the version they want us to believe in. So again, according to Abraxas, 

they are different collectives of humans, in different space and time, waiting to merge with each other, 

and most of all, they are waiting for us 4D beings to catch up with them and ascend, one dimension at 

the time. However, as we saw in the WingMakers material, there are other options, slightly different. 

IV. The Archetypes 

Abraxas says it's important to understand that the universe is run by archetypes. They have a 

hierarchal order and have existed since the beginning of time. Still, as time goes by, these archetypes 

change in the eyes of their descendants, and they become slightly different. These archetypes are very 

much alive, because we make them so, and they are around somewhere in the universe right now. 

The Andromedans call the Draconians Paa Taal, which means "the ones that came first", and they say 

that the Dragons don't remember where they came from. Abraxas says that they do remember; they 

came from the VOID and were the Great Dragons, the Founders (same as the "Builders" if we use my 

own terminology), and they were the ones who helped God create the Universe. They are the Dragon 

Race, who later, through genetic engineering, helped God create the human template. Well, we've 

heard that story before, haven't we? 

We are going to look a little bit at the archetypes and discuss them. From reading my papers, and 

other researchers' work, perhaps, the reader will recognize many of the personae that go with them. 

This is what Abraxas wrote on the forum: 

"1st Order: Undifferentiated Polarity 

Greek: (Eros+Abyss/Tartarus+Night/Erebus)+Gaia=Uranus+Gaia 

Egyptian: Ra+Apep in internal mirror images Yang/Yin=... 

Mesopotamian: FreshWater of Apsu/Yang+SaltWater of Tiamat/Yin=Nammu=... 

2nd Order: Internally differentiated Polarity as Unity 

Greek: Titans, in six males with six females say from Oceanus with Tethys 

Egyptian: Shu=Father Sky+Tefnut=Mother Earth 

Mesopotamian: Lahmu+Mummu=Lahama 

3th Order: Externally differentiated Polarity 

Greek: Titans led by Cronus with Rhea 

Egyptian: Geb=Father Earth+Nut=Mother Earth 


140



Mesopotamian: Anshar+Kishar 

4th Order: Beginning of the Generations of the Gods and Goddesses 

Greek: Olympians, led by Zeus+Hades with Metis/Consorts+Consorts 

Egyptian: Osiris+Isis with Set+Nephthys twinships etc. 

Mesopotamian: Anu+Ki into Enlil+Ninlil+Ea/Enki+Dumkina 

The male semen=essence=fresh water=ground water so follows the order of Uranus/Ra/Apsu--- 

Titan/Shu/Lahmu---Cronus/Geb/Anshar---Zeus,Hades/Osiris,Set/Anu,Enlil,Enki---... 

The female essence=salt water follows the orders of Gaia/Apep/Tiamat--- 

Titaness/Tefnut/Lahama---Rhea/Nut/Kishar---Metis,Hera/Isis,Nephthys/Ki,Ninlil,Dumkina---... 

Marduk is the son of Ea+Dumkina and like Zeus (or Horus as the son of Osiris+Isis) challenges the 

'old order' in Cronus (or Set, the usurper of Osiris), the usurper of Uranus; Marduk challenges the 

'murder' of Apsu (who wished to eliminate the younger gods) by Ea in Qingu+Tiamat. 

Sin is the son of Enlil+Ninlil (as Anubis the son of Set+Nephthys) and continues the 'cosmic 

twinship' archetype of Anshar-Anu and Enlil-Enki in Marduk-Sin in the external polarisation 

leading back into unification in the third generation. 

The fourth generation will so result in this unification in 'The Queen from Heaven' in 

Innana=Ishtar=Esther (biblical)=Mary=Venus=Aphrodite say as the daughter of Sin+Ningal and 

'twinbrother' Utu/Shamash. As Aphrodite then Ishtar can reclaim the primordial creation, having 

been 'unnaturally' created from the foam of the primordial waters as the genitals of Uranus 

(compare Isis substituting Osiris phallus after it had been eaten by a 'Spider of Set')"[3] 

The 1st Order is "no polarity" and the creations of the metaphysical Gaia (Earth), being the center of 

the universe. And it is freshwater, saltwater, and the Apsu (Apzu), which is the "Abyss", where ENKI 

eventually started his genetic experiments with mankind. It was also the beginning of the universe. It 

was creation and the Creator turning into the 2nd Order; internal first, turning into external polarity 

from a unified program. The 1st Order manifested before they came into physical being; turning 

metaphysicality into physicality. This split the so far unified Creator-Creation into two -- the Source- 

Sender and the Sink-Receiver (Source-Receiver). The 1st Order is unattainable, as it requires complete 

resonance with Source as a Unity of All That Is -- All That Exists. 

The 2nd Order is the first polarization, but this polarization is still in Unity. The Titans, whom I 

presented as daughters of Orion, are here presented as male and female in Unity, which probably will 

signify androgyny. Lahmu + (Mamitu Nammu) Mummu = Lahama (Lahamu), the Unifying force. Mamitu 

Nammu is the Queen of the Stars, manifested. The Draconians here talk about six males and six females 

from Oceanus, who make up the traditional Titans; 6+6=12. 12 and 13 being the numbers of the Mother 

Goddess. Here the Goddess manifests in Gaia, Earth, and becomes "Mother Earth". 2nd Order is Unity as 

a race, still not separately expressed. This Order also implies the Seraphim, the Cherubs, and the 

Archangels. In Anton Parks’s hierarchy, the 2nd Order would signify Lahamu and Lahmu, father and 

mother of Kišár and Anšár, 3rd Order Archetypes, and parents of ANU, who is 4th Order. Furthermore, 

Abraxas says regarding dragons and humans in the 2nd Order: 


141



"Here then the Race of the Humans is DIFFERENT from the RACE of the DRAGONS and say the 

Arcturian ETs are different from the Pleiadean ETs in polarisation, yet the Humans or the Dragons 

remain unified as a RACE." 

The 3rd Order is the Father and the Mother of the Gods and Goddesses we have heard about so 

much; being the Sirian "gods". The 3rd Order divides the race and is thus Geb, Father Earth, and Nut, 

Mother Earth. Geb and Nut were also looked at as the Sky, which can be interpreted both as Gaia's sky 

and the cosmic sky, in which they traveled in thought form, seeding and creating. Here is where the 

concepts of "good" humans and "good" dragons and "bad" humans and "bad" dragons begins. Anton 

Parks exemplifies the 3rd Order with the parents of ANU, who were Kišár and Anšár. The 3rd Order is 

also the 9 Mayan Timekeepers (or the "9 Mayan Timelords" as Abraxas calls them), whom the Pleiadians 

talk about in Barbara Marciniak's books as being the Pleiadian teachers; the Pleiadians being the 4th 

Order. I discussed this in a few papers in Level I. 

There is also more polarization. Abraxas again: 

"3rd Order is then polarisation externalised, such as angels and demons/devils as etheric and 

higherD forms able to interact with lowerD forms in polarisation, such as humans and ETs and 

flora and fauna." 

The 4th Order is the beginning of all the generations of gods and goddesses within the Sirian 

hierarchy, starting with ANU and his son ENLIL and (step)son ENKI/EA. From there it takes off into 

several generations of gods and goddesses. The 4th Order also symbolizes the conflict of the Inner Self 

with the Outer Self in a yin-yang type of dance. The 4th Order is that of the "astral" and the dimensions 

above the 4th, which are less physical and more etheric. This is where the non-physicals dwell, such as 

the Sirian Overlords and the Pleiadians -- the so-called "future humans". 

According to Abraxas, these archetypes are kept alive in the memory bank and imagination of 

mankind, whether it's here on Earth or in other places of the 4% universe. These archetypes rule the 

universe, and since so much attention has been put on the Mesopotamians deities, ANU and KI and their 

offspring are the archetypes we are giving the most power and are thus the ones who are coming back, 

says Abraxas. We are experiencing the 4th Order Archetypes merging with humanity in 4D, in other 

words. Because what is energized will be set into motion. In other words, we are calling on the gods to 

come! This is very true, because that's what's being done behind the scenes from our highest ranking 

Power Elite down to some confused and possessed people in small offshoots of secret societies like the 

German/America Thule Order. They all "help" bringing the gods here, and keeping them here by giving 

them enormous amount of energy. 

All star beings, Abraxas says, know about Gaia and her destiny to become the New Earth through 

ascension, and what that means in the extension. Here she gives us a tidbit of the usual disinformation, 

starting with the distortion of the stories of the 4th Order of Archetypes: 

"Because the ETs have known about the 'masterplan' of the Logos and their part in it as a cosmic 

intelligence NOT physicalised in the density field of the graduate starplanet; they have engaged in 

the hybridisation of the primitive human template with themselves. 

As said, this has made ALL humanoids already Human-ET hybrids and beginning in a mindwaveinduction 

so 208,000 years ago. 


142



None of you would have the sentience for abstract thought, would you be a 'pure' hominid stock, 

say as evolved from Old World Monkeys 20 million years ago into speciations of 

Australopithecines so 4 million years ago and diversivications in the Homo Erectus typology so 

500,000 years ago. All of your so called intelligence IS in fact ET intelligence. 

All ETs are Human Family, albeit not physicalised in the density field of Gaia, extending 2 million 

kilometers from the Gaian center and growing by so 105 millimeters per year. 

So this 'masterplan' KNOWS that the Old Earth is destined to become a New Earth." 

Here the Draconians clearly state that the Sirian Alliance knew all along what was planned for Gaia 

and that she is destined to turn into a star-planet, and mankind to become the new Starhumans. I'm 

prone to think that they are actually working on our ascension together with the Thubans/Draconians, 

but with help from technology, so they can continue to control us. Also, here is the lie about the 

primitive human repeated again, where it's said that without interference from the Sirian Overlords and 

their genetic manipulation of the apes, we humans would never be capable of abstract thinking. This is 

not true. We were a much evolved race before the Sirians came; there is enough evidence of that. UTU, 

when he contacted me, tried to push the same buttons, that we humans would be nothing if they hadn't 

interfered and created Homo sapiens from their own DNA. I told him this is a big lie. 

By the same token, in this context, they bring up "Nibiru" as not being the home planet of the Sirians, 

just like I've suggested in Level II and III, or the home planet of any of these kinds of beings. Instead, they 

say, Nibiru has been confused with our "Second Sun". Almost every star system which houses intelligent 

life forms is a double or triple star. That way they can create the appropriate gravitational system for 

stable planets to form, contrary to what mainstream science thinks. Esoterically enough, in the case of 

our own solar system, which is special because it's housing Gaia, the Mother Goddess incarnated in a 

Divine Planet, the Second Sun is not some brown dwarf or another sun hidden behind our yellow globe 

in the sky, but the sun of the Galactic Center herself, called the Hunab Ku, and another name for the 

Milky Way Galaxy is the Perseus Galaxy. Hunab Ku means "The Giver of all Wisdom" and the "Street of 

Remembrance". It's also called the "Womb of the Mother". This second sun, around which we orbit, is 

by some also called Nemesis. 

In regards to the four Orders of Archetypes, we humans exist as all of them, from the highest to the 

lowest, but in the 4% universe we are heavily polarized and diverse, and thus humans existing in 1-4D 

are then the lowest form of humanity in the physical universe. The Draconian "Masterplan" is then to 

ascend all humans to the 2nd Order, in Unity, or rather, where the polarization is only internal. This is 

why the Pleiadians in their lectures say that currently they are more knowledgeable than we humans are 

here in 4D, but in the future that may change. What they mean by that is that they are the Archetype of 

the 4th Order, and the Masterplan is to bring mankind up to the 2nd. Once that is done, the Pleiadians 

and all other star beings in the 4% universe, being humans just like us according to Thubanese 

cosmology, will ascend with us. 

Abraxas as a soul and a walk-in is of the 2nd Order in the 12th Dimension of Thuban. This is where 

she wants humanity to ascend to, eventually. In the 2nd Order she is "Sirebard Beardris". Just like the RA 

Material embraced 8 densities (they were unaware of the "angelic densities/dimensions", or did not 

want to expand on that subject), where the 8th Density also equals the 1st Density in the next octave, 


143



Dimension 13 is the same as the 1st Dimension, but according to Abraxas, the 13th Dimension is not a 

start of a new, higher set of dimensions, but is a descension down to Dimension 1. 

Abraxas, promoting the second coming of Messiah in form of Lucifer/Jesus being the same deity (in 

other words, she's covertly promoting ENKI), she is rebutting the "myth" about the "Fall of Lucifer" and 

his Dark Angels. And of course she does, and the reason for this will be obvious before this paper is 

finished. This is what she says: 

"All of Prime Source's 'intelligence' became dispersed at the birth of the universe in the 1st 

dimension and then manifested the LineSpace in the commonly understood cosmogenesis of the 

terrestrial science, cosmology and astrophysics. 

This then was the 'Fall' of the higher orders, rather poignantly related to the 'mundane' physical 

sciences and quite without ETs/archangels warring against God to be 'chucked out' of 'heaven'." 

According to Abraxas, "The Fall of Lucifer" is the fall of the Archetypes from the highest to the lowest, 

eventually manifesting in our physical reality. There is, however, a reason for her not to stick with the 

Lucifer/ENKI agenda, as ENKI is the Messiah of the "New World", whether he manifests himself or not. 

And let us end this section about Archetypes with the following interesting statement from Abraxas: 

"The Cosmic Archetypology RULES the Cosmos. 

The reconfiguration of Gaia so requires reconfiguration of the entire cosmic structure. 

This has been the agenda of all, PTB and ETs all along. 

Not many know the details, but many have hints and indicators as to what those details entail - 

especially the echeloners at the top of the PTB pyramid." 

Every piece of evidence points in the direction that this is the hidden agenda of the "Illuminati", as 

well as the Sirian Overlords and the rest of the "future" human star beings out there in cosmos, whom 

are all waiting for us to ascend - but again, on the Sirians' terms! Because just like James WingMakers 

says, it's just a show to make us feel we're making progress, when in fact we are going nowhere. And 

what will really happen to those who are ripe for the Harvest? Here are a few scenarios I can think of, 

seen from the perspective of those who are excited to be harvested: 

Best case scenario: the Draco/Sirian Alliance will use technology to make the ascension take place to 

satisfy the humans of higher dimensions, and a small percentage of mankind will actually ascend, but 

within the HMS system. And not knowing any better, they will find the 5th Dimension being just another 

prison cell, but this time a little bigger. They will still be controlled. 

Second best case scenario: nothing will happen. These people die like everybody else, while thinking 

they will reincarnate into the 5th Dimension next time. What a disappointment when they notice that 

they will be recycled like everybody else -- in 4D! Then they must start all over again with amnesia, and 

this time they may not even be interested in "spiritual stuff", because they "know" subconsciously that it 

didn't work last time! 


144



Worst case scenario: The Sirians will know who they are and do whatever they think is appropriate to 

do with "rebels". And I'm positive it's not good news. 

Also, it could be a mix of all the three above. 

V. Gaia as the Center of the Galaxy 

The metaphysical age of the universe is 19.14 billion years, while the age of the physical universe is 

13.8 billion years. This, Abraxas explains, is because electromagnetically, the universe is always 

oscillating at light speed, but expands at less than light speed in its matter content. Our solar system 

crystallized 4.6 billion years ago, and Earth was created only 40 million years thereafter. The physical 

Earth then became the New Earth through the clustered material which forms the metallic, elemental 

Earth. 

This means that the Old Earth had existed in a metaphysical form before it got "densified". It was a 

phase shift between geometrical dimensions which allowed the Old Earth to transform into the New 

Earth. The metaphysical Earth is as old as the universe itself, and exists simultaneously with the New 

Earth. The Old Earth is now about to phase shift again; this time from a line-space-time to a more hyperspace-time, 

while still keeping its line-space-time as a kernel for the ascension process. Last time Earth 

transformed, it did it the other way around, from hyper-space-time to line-space-time and became a 

material Earth. Translated into plain English, Abraxas is saying that the New Earth which is coming to life 

through this next phase-shift is part physical and part metaphysical, moving into the 5th Dimension. 

Earth herself is "spiritualized" by the Mother Goddess. Many pagans and Gnostics have known this 

for a long time. In ancient times people worshipped and even made sacrifices to Mother Earth. I think 

everybody has heard once or twice at least that the Earth has been called the Goddess. The Thubans call 

her The Home of the Great Dragon Mother. When asked who owns the planet, Abraxas says that it 

belongs to all alien species. Taken out of context, this would upset many people, but what she means is 

that the universe exists of only humans in different stages of development, depending on within which 

time frame they are operating in, if we think of it from a 4D linear time perspective. 

Abraxas says that Earth, however, whom the Alpha Draconians call Gaia, is not a planetary 

consciousness, and not even a star consciousness, but a Galactic Consciousness who mimics the 

Andromedan Consciousness as a "divine placeholder". But more than that, Gaia is about to transform 

Hunab Ku's (the Galactic Center) consciousness as well, through and by the opening of the 12th 

Dimension, and the Alpha Draconians will enter as Universal Consciousness; they being the Creator Race 

of the universe. The Alpha Draconians are the Council of Thuban, but Abraxas says that we humans are 

very tightly connected to this council as well, meaning that we are the descended Thubans, and from 

that perspective we are also The Fallen Angels. Of course, they can call it whatever they want to confuse 

the matters, and to take the attention away from the real fallen ones, who are ENKI/Lucifer, and those I 

call the Sirian Alliance. However, the Thubans want to make the statement that the Sirians, as well as 

ENKI are Thubans, too, just like we humans. As archetypes, they are our ancestors, hence humans, or of 

the "human family". It's easy for those who don't have the bigger picture to swallow what Abraxas says, 

because her stories have their own logic. 


145



v.i. Gaia's Sink Vortex and the "Alien Agenda" Explained 

There are billions, perhaps trillions of planets in the universe, but according to the Thubans, there is 

only one planet such as Gaia. This difference between Gaia and any other planet in the universe also 

explains the so-called "alien agenda", where people see and interact with different kinds of aliens. 

I have talked a lot in my papers about the Living Library with its incredible variety of life forms. 

Nowhere else in the universe can you find a planet like ours, allegedly. There is something in the center 

of Earth that makes her very special and unique -- one of her kind. Indeed, Earth is the only planet 

where life as we know it can form. All other life forms are interdimensional and of higher dimensions; 

even those who live on other planets. Nowhere else could you experience life like you do here. In other 

words, all other life forms would be less dense and more plasmic than those who are born on Earth. 

They would be more fluid and electromagnetic. They are, however, capable of inhabiting bodies of a 

more plasmic nature than the dense ones we use here in the lowest of dimensions. 

However, should the more plasmic life forms come down to Earth and interact with the 4D reality, 

our denser world would "densify" their plasmic bodies, and all of a sudden they would appear the way 

they look like in their plasmic bodies; be it Reptilians, Insectoids, humanoids, Grays, or you'll name it. 

And there we have the reason why people see those extraterrestrials in what appears to be a solidified 

form, such as ourselves! Albeit, should this happen, such encounters must be quite temporary, because 

the alien plasmic life form would soon feel very restricted, uncomfortable, and imprisoned here on 

Earth, and would leave as soon as they could[4]. Abraxas explains: 

"The parameter of the physicality is the inversion of the lightspeed c. 

When the universe was born, the Source of All That Is also required a Sink of All That Is to 'source 

itself to'. 

This sink became like a VORTEX. This Vortex is at the center of the earth and it [is] from this the 

archetype of the mythological 'Hell' eventuated." 

The "c" in "Lightspeed c" refers of course to the scientific letter which symbolizes the speed of light 

in Einstein's theory of general relativity. What she's saying here is that in the core of Earth there's a sink 

hole which works like a vortex, where All That Is, i.e. the Goddess, can descend from the VOID down to 

4D. 

So, 19+ billion years ago, when the metaphysical universe was created, there was not yet a physical 

Earth, but the vortex existed. Since then, this vortex has expanded out and does now surround Earth like 

an aura, and within this aura, the Moon and 9% of Mars exist. This vortex is higher dimensional and 

cannot be detected in 4D and with 4D instrumentation. But any plasmic energy being who enters the 

vortex will be densified and start vibrating within the 4D frequency. This is, according to Abraxas, why 

the plasmic UFO crashed in Roswell in 1947. 

Another thing I explained about the Living Library in Level I was that Creator Gods who created our 

fauna and flora left behind smaller versions of themselves (insects and flora); living organisms that 


146



looked much similar to the Creator Gods themselves (a typical example is the praying mantis, which has 

its counterpart in an advanced Creator God somewhere in the universe). Other examples are the big 

cats, wolves, dogs, pet cats, elephants, whales, dolphins, etc. Some of them "spy" on us through their 

earthly counterpart, or you can contact the Creator Gods by communicating with these animals. 

Another thing, however, which Abraxas brings up is that these same Founders can come here in spirit 

and in their plasmic bodies and attach themselves to their animal imprint and thus don't have to be 

stuck here. They can leave the animal, insect, or fauna host anytime they wish. This procedure, 

supposedly, happens quite often. They simply nano-travel to here and use their counterparts while 

staying on Earth. This way they also avoid detection. This will engage an energy transduction between 

higher and lower dimensions. 

So how is this vortex used in today's world? Well, first of all, aliens out there (or future selves) know 

about this vortex, and many of them can use it. The PTB on our planet know about it too, and spend a 

lot of time, energy, and money trying to make use of it. However, the use of the vortex is determined by 

a being's frequency. If it is too low, the being can't use it. This is the case with the Power Elite. Only the 

upper echelons of the Shadow Government knows about the non-physical control of humankind, but 

they know about star beings coming in through the vortex in the core of the Earth (which is also where 

our idea of Hell comes from, says Abraxas). This totally freaks the PTB out and they spend lots of money 

trying to figure out how to stop these plasmic beings from entering our world. 

This is also one reason why the Sirian Alliance has "allowed" other civilizations here while they have 

still been in charge of Earth. The Overlords can close down other vortexes, stargates, and wormholes, 

but they have no power over the vortex in the middle of the Earth, because it is Divine. Hence, it has 

been impossible for them to stop each and every star being from coming in here. In addition, the "alien 

agenda" is encapsulated in the understanding that Gaia belongs to everybody; not just we humans in 

4D. They all consider Gaia their Mother. 

Now, Abraxas and the Thuban Council from the 12th Dimension are preparing for the Harvest, which 

already started in 2009, she says. People who passed over that year and who qualified for the initiation 

were taken aside and given 5D bodies to incarnate in. These people, some who have already 

reincarnated on Earth again, are the absolute pioneers for the New Earth (programmed and ready, I 

would add), with more graduating happened in 2011 and 2012. More will graduate in the few years to 

come. Some will die and receive 5D bodies then, while others will be picked up in spaceships. 

So, what does the reader think we should name the New Earth? Terra Nova? No, wait! Don't waste 

your energy, because we have no say. The Thubans have already named it. The New Earth will be called 

"Serpentina", which means "In a Serpent" according to the Thuban labeling! Here we have the hierarchy 

again, and we humans, stuck in a realm of amnesia, are merely puppets without any say in anything. The 

only thing we are supposed to do is to believe that the Thuban Council represents the words of God, and 

what is about to happen is "God's Will". Do you KNOW that it's God's will? 

Now, how will this Serpentina be like? What is the Draconian vision of this future planet? Well, we're 

not told in any great details, but we learn a few things from listening to Abraxas. The Harvest and our 

ascension into the 5th Dimension is not going to happen naturally, but through technology. They are 

using nano-technology to make this happen, and they are using more genetic manipulation. For 

example, where are those new 5D bodies coming from? Why all these alien Technology Transfer 


147



Programs over the last 100 years or so? Why this extraordinary investment in nano-technology here on 

Earth? 

The answers to these questions should be obvious by now, but interestingly enough I happened to 

listen to a Pleiadian CD last night, which was recorded in September 2012, that was on this subject 

(synchronicities happens to me all the time these days). They talked some more about the future and 

how mankind, on one timeline, will come as cyborgs to visit the Pleiades in the future, genuinely 

thinking that they are looking for their ancestors; their genesis. Today, we already have technologies to 

take us way out to the stars. No one is interested in the Moon anymore now when Mars is in the news, 

but behind the scenes, Mars is already explored from north to south, west to east. Most of the 

technology the military has received from ETs has to do with star travel and how to perform genetic 

engineering and manipulation. So these cyborgs the Pleiadians are talking about are already well 

underway. 

Instead of visiting the Pleiades as cyborgs, instigating terrible wars resulting in a great tyranny, we are 

invited to the Pleiades without our cyborg bodies, and instead, as multidimensional beings we can split 

ourselves up, soul-wise (the Pleiadians own words) and travel in spirit over to the Pleiades. They never 

mention the word "nano-travel", but they describe it all the time as something we are going to be able 

to do in the very near future. However, we must qualify, and this is what they have prepared us for over 

the last 25 years (and I have helped spreading that messages in parts of my papers, although the idea of 

nano-travel in my case didn't originate from them). 

The Pleiadians say that we are already nano-traveling all the time when we are thinking, "should I 

turn left over there, or should I turn right?", and when we are going to travel somewhere by car, let's 

say, and we think about our destination in our head. Then you're already there, but you don't realize it. 

"Real" nano-travel, however, requires a little more, but the principle is the same, and according to them, 

many are soon ready to do it, and a few humans can already space travel in this capacity. 

But why am I bringing up this? Only so the reader can see what we are looking at here. The Alpha 

Draconians are obviously not promoting the "Pleiadian way" to space travel long distance. The Thubans 

are talking about technology, and we shall soon see for sure that they are. So again, we have the 

Machine Kingdom versus nature. I insist that the whole subject on the Harvest and ascension with the 

help from star beings, is an agenda that suits them and not us. Therefore, I hope that as many people as 

possible who are preparing themselves for the Harvest read my papers. It is true that we need to open 

up our heart chakras in order to be able to see through the lies and step aside from any hidden agenda 

from not-so-benevolent star races, but the idea of being 51% STO to be able to qualify is pure 

manipulation. To be able to go to the stars in a non-technological way, we actually need to be quite STS 

(Service to Self) in the sense that we need to work on ourselves to qualify, not on others. The reason for 

this (and I have explained this before) is simple. If we don't work on ourselves most of the time we don't 

develop our inner selves, and we also don't let others go through the barriers and obstacles they are 

currently confronting. There is no way you and I know exactly what another person is up against, and 

therefore we should interfere as little as possible, so that the other person can get through whatever 

there is to work on. We can support them morally and by giving them energy and keep an eye on the 

situation, but for the most part, leave them to experience what they need to experience. Then, of 

course, we must use common sense. If someone lies injured or passed out in the street, we don't leave 


148



them "because they need to go through that". We help them! The whole trick is that the more we work 

on our inner selves, the more we help our fellow man, because every single person who works on 

themselves contributes to the overall increase of the mass consciousness, and this affects those we care 

for, but also, the entire humanity benefits. 

But what about people who are starving to death in Africa because countries like the United States 

refuse to send them food, and instead throw millions of tons of food away? Shouldn't we go over to 

Africa and help these individuals? Or protest against the U.S. government? I would say no. Protests and 

demonstrations only helps the vicious agenda of the Power Elite; they want us to protest and 

demonstrate so their police force can be sent out in the streets and create chaos and rage. Then the 

negative beings behind the scenes feed on that energy. OK, but what about going to Africa? Well, it's a 

noble thing to do, and even if each person can only help so many people, at least something gets done. 

The problem is, that often when the assisting crew leaves the area, everything goes back to the normal 

"bad". My view is that the best we can do, overall, is to raise our own frequencies and spread those 

vibrations within the ocean of consciousness, and with humankind being one soul group, we can affect 

each other that way. Perhaps we need both; people who go to Africa and people who raise their 

frequencies. After all, the idea of helping a starving soul group faction already comes from a higher 

consciousness. Such people can sometimes, on rare occasions, make an impact that remains after they 

leave. So, everyone needs to follow their hearts, but I think a good idea is to always remember to work 

on ourselves -- that's the one thing that is most important! 

VI. Birth of the Starhuman 

The name the Thubans have given the new, evolved human race -- the 5D ascended human -- is 

Starhuman. Abraxas says that although some of the channeled entities have taught us that those who 

have less than 51% of their heart chakra open will not ascend and instead be transported to another 

planet, many light-years away to start all over in their 3D/4D experience, while the Earth as we know it 

will ascend with the new human race to the 5th Dimension, it is not true. Those who don't evolve will 

not go anywhere, and in the beginning, the old 4D and the new 5D human will live side by side, but the 

Starhuman will be much superior in their psychic abilities, and will look at the world and the universe 

with a different pair of eyes. Eventually, the two different species will then separate due to the different 

range of vibrations. This is similar to what I have talked about, although the Thubans want to create an 

enhanced human with technology, most certainly in order to create a stronger warrior race. 

The human body, whether it's the old human (the current race), or the enhanced human, is indeed 

divine, says Abraxas, and here I totally agree with her, as the reader knows. Every cell in the human 

body is the equivalent to a galaxy in the universe. The Milky Way Galaxy, for example, is one single cell 

in the human body, and you as a being exists within a single cell in your own body. It's only an illusion 


149



that you exist outside of that single cell. An organ, such as the liver, is thus equivalent to a galactic 

supercluster (a huge amount of galaxies orbiting each other). If we then expand this concept and include 

your whole body and count all the cells together, we have the whole universe. This is not metaphorically 

speaking, but literally! So says Abraxas. You alone exists as a whole universe, and the belief that you and 

I are separated is another illusion. 

There is only you; nothing else exists! If you were able to 100% understand the implications of that 

statement, how would it make you feel? I bet it would make you feel very lonely. No one to talk to, no 

one to bounce ideas with, no sex, no one to share your love with except yourself... So what would you 

do in a situation like that? Well, if you were omnipotent, you could do anything, so why not just create 

more of you, but in smaller factions? And why not let these smaller factions explore a cosmos which 

appears to be outside of yourself, but is in fact a super hologram, like a movie where all your 

counterparts were interactive? 

This was exactly what the Mother Goddess did. For billions of years, there only existed a metaphysical 

universe with a certain amount of dimensions. Her counterparts (separate souls) could travel within this 

hologram and create freely as they went along. Mother Goddess herself, in her original state, also 

decided to participate in this game, but with full memory of who she was -- in other words, she 

manifested in the universe as the "Queen of the Stars". From that position she was able to create 

galaxies, stars, nebulae, and planets etc. -- all of them sentient beings, operating in different dimensions. 

Eventually the Queen of the Stars decided to create a lower dimension which was composed of solid 

matter, and after many wars and battles over real estate, planet Earth was created in its current form. It 

was meant to house a unique star being made up of the Divine Fire of the Mother Goddess, the Queen 

of the Stars, or the Queen of Orion. Each cell/Fire in this divine body was, like mentioned above, a galaxy 

of its own, and within the Fire/cell that corresponds to the Milky Way Galaxy, you as a separate human 

being is residing. From within this cell (Fire fragment), you can travel freely within the body hologram by 

using thought, intention, and emotion. This means you can instantly travel to any place within your own 

universe. When your dense, biological body dies, you still have your avatar, and other "astral" bodies, 

like your emotion body, all of which you bring with you after body death. These bodies all still include 

the cells, Fire, soul fragment, or whatever you prefer to call it, so these cells don't disappear just 

because your body dies. However, your avatar and the rest of your astral bodies are all divine and 

belong to the human soul group, which belongs to Earth. In other words, you need a human avatar to be 

able to incarnate on Earth and take full advantage of the human biological, physical body. Other star 

races, like the Sirians, have desperately tried to imitate the human body and incarnate in it, and even if 

they know how to do that, they still can't be in the physical and nano-travel. 

A Starhuman is a dragonized human, according to Abraxas -- this is the difference between the "old 

human" and the new Starhuman. Ponder on that statement for a while until we get further into this 

agenda. What it looks like, however, is that we are going to have 3 different species of humans 

inhabiting this planet for quite a few generations to come, if the Thubans get what they want. We will 

have the "old human", the Starhuman, and those who refuse to be either or, which is the category I am 

in. 

Some people who read this may still be sitting on the fence, wondering if the Harvest is still the way 

to go, moving up the densities and dimensions with the help from our "future selves", and in the end it 


150



will of course be each person's choice, but I'm far from done here. So let us talk a little bit more about 

the Harvest. 

VII. The Harvesting of Souls and the Dragonized 5D Starhuman Template 

Most people who listen to, or read material from channeled sources usually have a source they are 

particularly fond of. Some love the RA Material and say that it's the best channeled material up to this 

date; other like the Pleiadians (like myself); some like Bashar, while others like the Elohim and so on. It's 

quite rare, unfortunately, that people look into all of these materials to see what it is actually all about. 

This is the only way to find out, however. It's so easy to get stuck with one or two sources because we 

think they feed us with the exact information we are curious about. This, of course, is per design. 

The reason why I had to write this series of papers on channeling was because I started seeing an 

agenda with the whole channeling community. All these sources had things in common; I noticed that 

they have a common message -- at least most of them. And this is the reason they are contacting us at 

all. People think it's because they want to enlighten us and help us in our effort to evolve, but that is just 

a small part of the agenda. The main part has to do with an agenda which concerns them, and from 

what they try to tell us, it concerns us, too. We have a very special thing in common with these entities, 

and that's what they are attempting to push through; some in more subtle ways than others. 

The thing we have in common with these sources is that we are all human and we are all ascending 

together! This is not just about us, but about them, too, to the exact same degree. They can't evolve 

further if we don't go to the next level -- they will be stuck where they are! I may be repeating myself, 

and I highlight this because it's the bottom line when comes to their agenda. 

This is serious, and we indeed stand in front of the most important crossroads we have ever 

encountered as a human species -- our whole future depends on what choices we are making right now! 

Researching these papers -- all of them, from Level I to Level III -- has been worthwhile; every second of 

it! The sad part is that humankind as a whole doesn't have the slightest idea that they are up against the 

most important choice in history. If they just had an inkling, things would be much different. 

Now, let's start explaining the Harvesting of Souls agenda from the beginning. Abraxas, just like the 

Pleiadians, talk about the nano-second, but don't call it that. She says, "...from 1987 onwards ... the 

human groupmind experienced a 'quantum leap' in its potential group-consciousness...", and that's 

exactly what the nano-second is all about. The Pleiadians explains that the nano-second happened in 

three main parts, where the first part was from 1987-1996 (I believe), and the second part was from 

1997-2007, and the last part was from 2008-2012. Abraxas seems to agree with this; she says that 

2008 started the great transformation "in a midpoint of a warptime loop, beginning in December 2004." 

The year 2008 would be halfway to 2012, beginning to count from 2004. Abraxas continues: 

"2009 began the declaration from 'Dragonspace', meaning the 'Land of the Dead' above the 

limiting 8th dimension of what many here term the 'Reptilian agendas'. Dragonspace 

encompasses dimensions (or densities) 9-10-11-12. 


151



2010 will allow 1 in 50,000 inhabitants of the earth to sow internal seeds for a harvest beginning 

on the Mayan nexus date and culminating in an 'end of all old prophecy' in August 2013. 

In that time period, the total population count of the earth will have reached the required 

saturation level of 7.2 billion incarnates." 

Don't we love the terms she uses (and she uses such terms a lot), like "Land of the Dead". Has a clear 

positive vibration, doesn't it? The declaration Abraxas is talking about will be posted in the next main 

section. 

The second paragraph is certainly interesting. Here she tells us that 1 person in 50,000 will be eligible 

for the Harvest. This, she explains elsewhere, is based on mathematics and prophecies, and is calculated 

on a population of 7.2 billion people. So, in a way (and I will explain what I mean by that in a moment), 

the exact amount to be harvested is interestingly enough 144,000! We have heard that amount before; 

especially in Bible prophecies. In fact, there will be exactly 144,000 people, not 144,005 for example. 

This is important to understand, because these beings follow prophecy to the letter, and they use 

advanced physics and mathematics. Also, prophecy is created by ... "dragonhood", allegedly. This gives 

us some hints if we base it on my earlier research. The Sirian Alliance has claimed the same thing. But let 

us not be ahead of ourselves. 

The Pleiadians say that the human population has peaked, just above 7 billion people. They claim that 

the world population will not exceed that amount, and if it does, it will not be with much (how about 

200,000,000 more?). The Draconians seem to have a similar view, or they wouldn't have calculated the 

Harvest on 7 billion 200 million people. So, are you 1 in 50,000??? Well, if you're not, I wouldn't be too 

sad if I were you. I hope I'm not one of them either. 

Well, sure enough, Abraxas mention the 200 million that exceed the 7 billion: 

"Around this core of humanity will be 200 Million humans, also able to graduate into a new form 

of humanity. 

Post 2012 there will so be TWO different RACES of humans inhabiting this planet - Old Humans 

and New Starhumans." 

So, are these 200 million graduates are in addition to the 144,000? Why does she distinguish between 

these two figures? Well, there is a reason, and we'll come to that as well. 

The forum I have been studying for this paper was written in 2010 to 2011 before this particular 

thread was closed down by Bill Ryan of Project Avalon, but Abraxas was saying already in 2010 that 

December 21, 2012 was going to be eventless in regards to major events that people can see with their 

own eyes. She said that December 21, 2012 was going to go by like any other day in people's mind, 

although the Harvest was going to continue unnoticed behind the scenes. Nothing dramatic is going to 

happen as Earth is continuing its orbit around the Sun, while Mother Gaia is going from the 4th 

Dimension to the 5th. At the same time prophecy is playing out just as planned, but it's not what people 

think it is. There are not going to be any devastating wars with star beings coming down in spaceships 


152



and kill us with laser weapons. Instead, prophecy is going to play out inside of us all. There will be an 

invasion, Abraxas says, but not a physical one. As we shall see, I was totally correct when I said that the 

invasion happens on a nano-level. I felt chills down my spine when I read about it, because Abraxas tells 

us 100% the way I told you. There is, and has been, an alien invasion on a soul level, and I will tell you 

more about that later in this paper. 

According to Abraxas, this whole situation we humans have had here since we were created by ENKI 

and his scientists, including being manipulated and controlled to the extreme, has been a part of a much 

bigger plan than just the Sirian Alliance needing a slave- and eventually, a warrior race. All the torture, 

famine, disease, murder, rape, and all the rest of it has been necessary for a very specific reason. To be 

able to become positively harvested (51% STO or more), the positive energy can only express itself in 

individuals, and not in group minds. This is also the reason why they have kept us in quarantine for so 

long. The individual has to suffer through a group mind, however, which is the Global Elite. That is why 

ENKI had to put the PTB in charge of humanity, and they have to be 95% or more negatively oriented as 

a group to be able to be negatively harvested (see the RA Material or Hidden Hand)! We, as individuals, 

then have to become solitaries after feeling that we don't "fit in", and start looking for "inner guidance". 

Each individual, prepared for the Harvest, will feel like an "outcast" and have a hermit-like experience, 

perhaps even questioning the fact that they are human, because they feel so different. I can imagine 

that many truthseekers feel this way. 

This, allegedly, is called our "Christening" into Dragonhood, and you redefine yourself not as a human 

anymore, but as an evolved human, which the Thubans, in full, call a "Starhuman Dragon". Abraxas says 

we are free to replace the word "dragon" with any other word, but if we do, we supposedly can't draw 

upon the potent energy of the "Memetic Complex" of the Dragon-Serpent label, as they call it. This, dear 

reader, is manipulation on a high level, because people are falling for this. Why? Because they recognize 

themselves in what Abraxas describes. But we have to be clever; cleverer than they, and be able to see 

through their manipulation. Once we start seeing a pattern in it, it becomes easier. The solitude a 

truthseeker feel in an oppressive world is obvious, and the Thubans know this. Therefore, they can play 

on our emotions to their own favor and thus pull us into the fold where after we can be harvested. 

When Gaia ascends from her planetary status to "universal status" through her "galactic status", all of 

her human cells can also ascend into cosmic consciousness, says Abraxas. In all this, she is only the 

messenger who comes forth and appears, because, she says, "the scenario is much grander than a 

planetary transformation or the transition of a galactic civilization. What is to occur is the birth of a new 

universe!" Therefore, she claims, the entire universe and all the intelligences therein will participate in 

this. 

If it was just what Abraxas said on this forum, I would have thought she was crazy, but she is not. I am 

pretty sure she is genuine; any reader who would look into the forum thread would realize that, too. 

And additionally, it is impossible to just discard the evidence that exists in form of all the other 

channeled materials which say exactly the same thing! It's like we have sat back and listened to all these 

channeled sources for all the wrong reasons. They have had a message for us, and that message has 

been transmitted all across the line by all channeled sources who talk about the Harvest (and a lot of 

others as well). If we won't ascend, they can't do it, either. But if as many as possible of we humans here 

on Earth participate in the Harvest, the closer they will be to move on. To them, it doesn't matter if we 

are 51% positive or 95% negative and thus ascend through a negative or positive Harvest, as long as we 

ascend! Because well up the dimensions and densities, the positive and negative will blend together and 


153



polarity cease to exist. The thing is that they need all humans here on Earth to ascend, whether it is in 

this upcoming Harvest, the next, or the next after that. The fewer people who will ascend, the longer the 

whole transition will take. 

The entire point, which many people will have a hard time accepting, is that there are no aliens in the 

universe (at least not according to the Thubans or any of the channeled sources). All the so-called 

"aliens" are all humans in different stages of development and on different timelines, but they all 

originate from Earth!!! There are no other aliens! The ones contacting us are just us in the future. To 

understand this material that I'm presenting here and now, this paragraph needs to sink into the 

reader's mind. This is what James WingMakers has tried to tell us with his esoteric language, as well. 

So this is what they say it is. All humans are divine and factions of the Goddess, and we are spread 

out through the universe but now, once again working on coming together as one big soul group, or 

group consciousness. And this is what is meant when aliens tell us we have to forgive them and each 

other, because we are all one and the same. If we don't forgive each other, we can't ascend. That's the 

whole idea behind the Harvest. This is also what the Andromedans meant when they told Alex Collier 

that humans are Royal. We all stem from the soul essence of the Mother Goddess; the Queen of the 

Stars! 

And in all this, what about the Sirians? Well, they are humans, too, according to Thuban logic, and 

they took on the role of playing the "evil guys" and created the Global Elite from their own bloodlines 

(mainly ENKI's) as a group consciousness who could give us individuals the experience we needed here 

in 4D before we continue up the dimensions. And the Draconians are our original ancestors, the 

Dragons. They are the Paa Tal, whom the Andromedans talked about -- the Builders, or the Founders, 

who created the first human template billions of years ago. This human template has the reptilian brain 

of the Alpha Draconians, and many other parts of it is reptilian as well, and some of it is created out of 

the Thubans' imagination. Humans were thus created a long time ago on Earth through genetic 

engineering and constantly improved through more genetic manipulation. 

When Hidden Hand talked about being Luciferian and the RA Material being the best channeled 

source so far, he was describing himself as being part of ENKI's plot. Hidden Hand was one of the top 

members of the Global Elite, but human, nevertheless. He is talking about being 95% negative or more 

to be able to be harvested to 4th Density Negative, and that's what the human Global Elite are hoping 

for. The RA Material is what describes this whole agenda the best, and that's why Hidden Hand 

mentioned RA before other channeled sources. To understand this paper from an expanded viewpoint, I 

suggest you read Hidden Hand once again, and you will get much deeper insights than when you read it 

the first time: http://www.illuminati-news.com/00363.html. In fact, you will probably understand all of 

it. 

We know that it takes Earth 26,000 years to orbit the zodiac, and during such a time frame we 

humans reincarnate exactly 214 times, according to the Thubans. This means all of us! The rest of the 

time we spend in the astral, in the between-lives-area. Sometimes, we reincarnate almost instantly after 

a previous incarnation, but then we have to wait longer the next time. We can even it out that way, but 

for some reason, which is not clearly explained, we all incarnate 214 times. The math how this is set up 

is published on the forum. 

The Thubans say that they are the only beings dwelling in the 12th Dimension, which is outside the 

physical universe. Hence, they are the only ones who know the whole story of the universe, from 


154



beginning to end, and all the other star races (different stages of humans) know only part of the story. 

The higher up in the dimensions, the more they know, while we humans are at the bottom of the totem 

pole and therefore are the most oblivious. 

According to both the Thubans and Hidden Hand, what I have told you here is precisely what the 

Powers That Be believe is the truth, because this is what ENKI and his teachers, like Thoth/Ningishzidda 

has told them, and the Thubans and Hidden Hand emphasize that it is the truth, but it has not been told 

in full until now, by their messenger, Abraxas, in the body of John Shadow. 

vii.i. What is the Procedure? 

Now, let us look into the procedure of how the Harvesting of Souls will be done. But first, let me 

mention a few things that I believe can be good to know in the context of things. I will put it in list 

format, because if I go into too much details, this will not be a paper, but rather a whole book: 

 

 

 

Abraxas insists that the Thuban story is told perfectly in Nag Hammadi (The Gospel of Thomas) 

for those who know how to read it. This is the reason why this gospel was not included in the 

Christian Bible; it was too early to reveal the message therein. 

When asked whether Nibiru is the home of the Anunnaki (Sirians), Abraxas says it's not, and no 

Nibiru is going to come into the solar system and create havoc. The real Nibiru is an archetype, 

and is in fact Earth (Nibiru=Serpentina=New Earth) as the new "Star Planet". George Kavassilas 

also says that Earth is going to turn into to star(planet), but according to the Thuban, no one is 

going to burn up on Serpentina. Serpentina, by the way, will be the name of the New Earth out 

there in the universe. We have no say in that; it's already established all across the galaxies. 

The ascension we are apparently about to experience is just as much a descension as it is an 

ascension. First of all, Gaia is giving birth to herself in the metaphysical plane, but is keeping her 

physical core, which will be the 3rd Dimension. Abraxas compares this procedure with a peach, 

which has a hard core and a soft fruit meat. The hard core is 3D the way people have 

experienced it so far, but when Gaia is giving birth to herself, she is adding the fruit meat to the 

core, and this addition is the astral plane. In other words, the 5th Dimension is really the 4th 

Dimension, which is what quantum physicists call anti-Sitter Space, or the astral plane. So, the 

astral plane will be available as a part of Earth instead of separated from her. Thus, humans will 

have access to the astral in their daily life, and no one, regardless of belief system, will be able to 

deny the existence of the spiritual world. Some will rejoice, other will fear, some will accept and 

some will try to reject the new reality of the ascended Gaia. No one, say the Thubans, is 

responsible for somebody else's reaction to this process. 

For this to occur, some "spark" needs to set it into motion, and this spark has to happen at the 

center of the Earth. This spark is the Mayan nexus point, so when Earth is aligning with the 

Galactic Center (Hunab Ku), Earth's hollow core will turn inside-out and become a power source 

and send messages back to the Galactic Center and the rest of the universe. So it's not the ETs 

sending messages to Earth, but the Earth sending messages to the ETs. Hence, the SETI program 

has always been worthless. 


155



Lastly, the Thubans, who supposedly are our ancestor and our future selves, need to descend 

down to our dimension in order to "help" us ascend. 

 

The Thubans see the 4D humans as "caterpillars" awaiting to turn into full butterflies (5D). Those 

who don't graduate will continue living like caterpillars until the next Mayan nexus point, 26,000 

years into the future. 

The 144,000: 

1) This number comes from Revelation 21:16, counting the days from September 12, 1975 - 

December 21, 2012 as building of the "Holy Temple". 

2) Everyone is the 144,000, but not many can conceptualize this, says Abraxas, and therefore 

search for something without that is within. In fact, what I have found out by reading her 

material with a tooth comb, is that the real number is not 144,000, but rather 200 million. This 

means that 200 million "aliens", i.e. non-physicals have already possessed the same amount of 

humans who are ready to ascend. And who are these "aliens"? Of course, it is explained that it's 

non-physical humans in different stages of development, who will ascend together with the 

ones who are ready. Now, why would they do that? They are already in higher dimensions, so it 

sounds pointless. Well, there is only one logical answer to that, and it is that these 200 million 

are "helping" the initiate to graduate; i.e. they are Thubans who have descended down here to 

assist us. Apparently, we can't ascend on our own(!). So if you feel possessed, don't worry, it's 

just a Thuban who is hiding inside your skull, and it's a good thing(!) The following is one of the 

references to what I just said. "Ellie" is a person on the forum, asking Abraxas a question: 

"Ellie: If it is the latter to be the most right (only 144,000 souls will be saved) I find it wanting to 

say the least because with the billions of people on Gaia right now I know for a fact there are 

more than 144,000 good souls here who are more than enlightened IMHO. 

Abraxas: Of course, you have misinterpreted the archetype. The 144,000 also become coupled to 

200 million (aliens); all of whom again reside within you in the interdimensional sense." 

And here is a second reference as a reply to "Jack", another forum member: 

"Everyone can help Jack; but on the 'graduate' level (your label [sic: level?]) it is 1 in 50,000 

including 200 million 'alien walk in aspects." 

 

The "Illuminati" knows about the Luciferian Agenda (ENKI and his Fallen Angels) and that the 4th 

Order of Archetypes rules the Earth behind the scenes. They, "of course" are doing us all a favor 

by keeping us separated instead of turning into a group soul, which they say is the natural 

direction in which things go. If we turn into a group soul, we can't ascend from this reality, 

supposedly, because "God redeems itself in the individual and not in the collective ". Hence, the 

PTB work day and night to divide and conquer and always make sure there are polarization; 

patriots vs. peacenicks; Christians vs. pagans etc. This is also why groups like LPG-C teaches that 

there are two factions of Sirians: the ENKI clan and the ENLIL clan, in order to create polarity. In 

reality, there is no such division. Whether LPG-C is aware of this or not, I don't know, but would 

assume they are. 


156



 

 

Information is allowed to be given to us in dream-state, because this is the state of unity and not 

of individuality. Here, information can be given without the awake individual knowing about it. 

Then, when time is ripe and the person is getting ready to ascend, the information will be there 

if the person is willing, and understand how to find it. Today, in most people, there is a "cut-off" 

between the awake state and the dream state, but once a person has ascended, that cut-off is 

gone, and the two minds -- the conscious and the superconscious -- merge and have access to 

each other. Only those who can break down this barrier or cut-off will be able to have access to 

the 4th Dimension (I already knew this instinctively and have mentioned to a few people that a 

part of my upcoming book will be about how to break down this barrier. It has to do with 

"conscious dreaming". This is how to become multidimensional. There is a reason why I like the 

Pleiadians before other channeled material, because they are presenting other soulutions to the 

ascension process). This is a contradiction in Abraxas' teachings, however, because earlier she 

said that we need to reach the 6th Dimension before this "cuf-off" between dream state and the 

conscious mind could happen, and that it can't happen in the physical. 

The Thubans mirror what we call the "Shadow Government", the PTB, the Illuminati, and all the 

rest of it, in what they call "The Shadow Council of Thuban". They dwell in what we would call 

the "Shadow Universe" (read the 96%), which mirrors the physical universe we and all "aliens" 

live in. 

As the reader can see, Abraxas gave us an endless amount of information before the thread on the 

forum was closed down. Still, I will not be able to cover all of it, so I suggest the reader goes through the 

material themselves as well as reading the compressed version here. The URL, again, is, 

http://www.birthofgaia.com/t116-abraxas-thuban-qa. But I also think it's important to read my papers 

until the end, because I have a lot of comments I'd like to share, whether you agree with them or not. 

Also, Abraxas refers a lot to the Scripture and different Bible passages to compare her message to the 

Bible, which was, by the way, allegedly written by the Thubans. But let us ramp this up with giving 

Abraxas' version of how people will experience the Harvest. 

One of the most common question regarding the Harvest has always been whether you have to 

physically die in order to ascend, or will you ascend while in this life, here and now? And if so, will the 

neighbors, who may not be qualified for ascension, disappear from your reality or will they still be here? 

The answer is that you need to die before you can ascend (this, and the following information are of 

course according to the Thubans, and not my personal opinion). If you would have died, let's say in 

2011, and at that time were a graduate, you would have ascended as soon as you arrived in the astral, in 

the between-lives-area. However, if you at any time in this life will come to a point where you qualify, 

you will still live until your lifetime is over, even if you're 30 years old now and die at 85. Then, when you 

hit the ether, after body death, you will ascend then. 

When your soul leaves your dead body together with your other light-bodies, the Thuban soul, who 

possessed your body, will ascend with you to the 4th Dimension (between-lives-area), and will thus be 

your "spirit guide". There you will be given a 5th Dimensional light-body, which has been prepared for 

you, and you will access it. This light-body has been modified so that next time you reincarnate, your 

light-body will adjust the RNA/DNA in your earthly body so it corresponds with the frequency of the 5th 

Dimension. Your new ascended body is thus further hybridized. I will add the scientific data here as well 

for those who are interested and savvy at quantum and subquantum mechanics: 


157



"In a nutshell a fifth gauge interaction is required besides the longrange unification of gravitation 

with electromagnetism and the shortrange strong- and weak nuclear gauge interactions to 

harmonise the longrange with the shortrange. 

This interaction engages 'Stationary Lightwaves' as Consciousness-Fields from the Universal 

LightMatrix (of the Heisenberg ZPE say). 

This then is akin a Merkabah-Aura encompassing the 'Old Human Bodyform' in a Magnetic 

EnergyInduction termed Monopolar EMR. 

In this manner what you know as Mass becomes Static Electricity coupled in mass parameters to 

the Frequency Nature of electric current not as i=dq/dt, but as i=2ef in quantum form (the 

electron charge quantum becomes a constant coefficient in a differential equation reduced in 

order from 2 to 1. 

Some esoteric schools term this the Superelectron of Metatron and similar. 

It is 'hard core' advanced string-membrane physics in the modern usage of the archetype." 

So, how will it feel to live in 5D? Well, one way to imagine it is to compare it with living in 3D and add 

the astral world to it. It's always been there and accepted as a 4th Dimension, but normally people 

haven't been able to perceive it. Now, you will be able to see exactly what is going on in the astral. 

Our planet will become multidimensional and allow a 5th Dimensional perception. We will thus be 

able to function as a planet, a star, and a galaxy simultaneously. Abraxas is adding: 

"Gaia the Planet or Old Earth, will transform into a StarPlanet Consciousness coupled to a Galactic 

Mother consciousness coupled to a Cosmic Mother consciousness. 

Gaia will become the SANCTUARY of a certain data bank for the ENTIRE UNIVERSE, incorporating 

ALL extraterrestrial lifeforms WITHOUT EXCEPTIONS." 

Of course, multi, like in multidimensional, means more than two, so this term fits with the Thuban 

explanation. However, my own research shows that we have all the possibilities to become really multid 

and be able to move across the dimensions, and visit much more than five of them. It certainly feels 

like they want to move us from one box to another. Our future is so much more than what they 

describe. The data bank they are talking about is the Living Library. 

The opening of the 4D space dimension is programmed to occur midway between the Sun and the 

star Sirius A! This is some 4.3 light-years from the Mayan nexus point. The Thubans highlight here that 

the Sirians are our best friends! Figure that! This means that this is the primordial stargate which has 

been prepared to be opened since June 25, 2008[5]. As of 2011, when the forum thread was closed, the 

stargate had still not been opened. However, our Sun's stargates have opened, and we can see evidence 

of that when we look at pictures of the Sun. Also, some point out that they have seen spaceships coming 

out of the Sun, and a meteor which hit the Sun but didn't burn up. This last pehonomenon was also 

mentioned on CNN and couldn't be explained by science, they said. 

The Harvest is simply the fulfillment of archetypes. There are many esoteric sources here on Earth 

that know about this, but the PTB have decided to emphasize one that is much empowered and is based 


158



on the Book of Revelations. This has nothing to do with religion and dogma, but is much deeper 

embedded in the human psyche. It has to do with the 3rd and 4th Orders of Archetypes. 

vii.ii. The Dragons are Here! 

Yes, the "Dragons" are here, says Abraxas, and they have been here since 2010. What does this 

mean? It "only" means that it was then that they descended from the 12th Dimension down to the 

3rd/4th, IN SPIRIT, and possessed those whom they consider graduate candidates to the 5th 

Dimension. This is in Abraxas' own words: 

"And the Dragons are here, they have arrived and have begun to confront all humans as their 

invisible mirror images reflecting their fears about their unseen images back to them. 

The Dragons are here to be EATEN in the cosmic eucharist of the second coming; waiting to be 

eaten by the humans who have the stomach and the guts to do so as the Heavenly MANNA of the 

selfhood christenings. 

Aye the works of God sometimes proceed in mysterious ways and divers methods, do they not. 

(7) Jesus said : "Fortunate is the lion which the man eats so that the lion becomes a man ; and 

cursed is the man whom the lion eats so that the man becomes a lion." 

The Lion of Judah of Revelation.5.5 is the Skyblue BabyDragon of the second coming and its fake 

image is Yaldabaoth of the gnostic lores (Secret Book or Apocryphon of John of the Nag Hammadi 

Codex). 

Yaldabaoth is the Lionhead with the Serpent's Tail as a 1st order archetype for falseness and the 

true-false dichotomy required redefinition. 

Yaldabaoth is the Old Testament God and its aliases in mirror image to the I AM THAT I AM in 

distortion I AM THAT AM I of Exodus.3.14. in the Fire of the Burning Bush of Moses." 

Clear as a day, right? No, it's not. 

They are talking about "eating your dragon" as a part of the initiation. What does that mean? Well, I 

don't think it's like physically eating an Alpha Draconian, but it has a metaphysical meaning that is not 

clearly stated, and that is for a reason. Only the initiate understands fully what that means, and actually, 

there were people on the forum who did understand Abraxas' esoteric language, which made her very 

pleased, and she welcomed them into "dragonhood". Some of her language was encoded in such a way 

that it was only accessible to those who are "ready for dragonhood". I am not, and God knows I am very 

happy about that! This whole agenda sounds like a big nightmare to me and I feel like I want to protect 

myself with a hundred laser-resistant shields to stay away from it. None of it resonates with good love 

vibrations. To me it's very dark. 

It would be bad enough if it ended here. I was planning on writing only one paper on the Alpha 

Draconian agenda, but it will be too long -- it's long as it is already. And the "best" or "worst" part 

(depending on how we look at it) is yet to be exposed. So I decided to end the first part with copying and 


159



pasting the Draconian Manifesto, which basically is the laws and constitutions that are going to be used 

in the New World. That should tell you something if you can understand the esoteric language -- as usual 

when it comes to all these negative sources, it's quite complex and encoded. It's a curious paper and has 

to be interpreted by each individual, as it may tell a different story to different people. However, some 

of it will be clearer after the next paper in my series. 

Does this all mean that the Thubans will stay and dictate the New World? 

Well, Abraxas is telling us that the Earth belongs to everybody, because all beings in the universe 

(including the Thubans) are humans. Is that so, or only a justification to accept an invasion? 

After the next paper, which is going to be very revealing and very evident, you, the reader, will have 

to decide. 

I hope you all have courage to look within your hearts, because this is a very old conflict and a very old 

war, and it's not been told here on Earth truthfully. The Dragons can be very convincing, and your mind 

may flip back and forth into accepting and rejecting, because we so much want it to be true. We want a 

change, and we want it fast! But do we want a Dragon fleet in form of a Battleship Galactica hovering 

above our atmosphere, filled to the brim with 200 million members of the 4 archetypes (including the 

Sirians), all landing here on Earth -- not in the physical, or course, but in our brains? Well, they are 

already here since three years back. Do we want them as our spirit guides to show up the way to 

Dragonhood once we leave our divine physical bodies and hand them the Divine Fire we received 

directly from our own Mother Goddess? Do we think that once they are here, we can distinguish, with 

our limited knowledge, whether they are right or wrong? Especially as they are already implanted in the 

brains of those they so carefully have chosen. If you feel that you are one of those who all of a sudden 

got a "spirit guide" appearing in your space, I am happy you are reading this, and upcoming paper, 

because only then can you make your discernment based on factual information. And do not fear, 

because you have the right to say "no!" anytime, and they are chanceless. Give them the trace of a 

doubt and they have you. 

Perhaps you feel anyway that you are a Dragon inside after have read the next paper? The choice is 

yours and I can only advise. Can I be wrong? There are supposedly no such thing; it's all about belief 

systems. At least as long as we are staying in the lower realms of "reality". It's a matter of what we want, 

and what we wish our own future to be. 

I took a long time to write this paper, because I wanted to make sure you understand the next paper; 

you see, it's all in preparation for that. I wanted you to understand the term spoken of so you will not 

get mesmerized by words that only stick in your subconscious, after have been given its dragonian 

definitions in your dream state. I have tried to take that information up to your conscious mind so that 

all minds can help each other make a decision. 

These words will ring in your head while you are reading the next paper, and your decision will be 

based on what you do with them, or the words of the Mighty Dragon. We can only be fence-sitters for 

so long. The time to choose is now, my friends... my human friends! 

Love, 


160




__________________________ 


[1] Source: "Letter from Andromeda: The Race of Alpha Draconis", 

http://www.bibliotecapleyades.net/andromeda/lfa/v2n3alpha.html#Council%20of%20Eleven 

[2] "Outside" is just a perception so we humans can more easily understand. "Being of the VOID" only means that you are not 

trapped in the restricted 4% universe but can perceive and experience 100% of the created universe. Even that perception is 

limited, because ultimately, the entire universe is within yourself. 

[3] All quotes and references in this paper from hereon come from the Thuban thread, Dragons of Thuban to Ban the Falseness, 

starting Oct. 17, 2010, on the forum, Birth of Gaia, unless otherwise indicated. 

[4] There are researchers who say that star beings who stay here on Earth too long in densified bodies get stuck in our 

vibrational field and then can't leave. I brought up this issues in Level I. If so, the potential "Reptilian", for example, would then 

be trapped here in its reptilian form. 

[5] This is the stargate Jarl Vidar and the Thule Order were talking about in 2009 when I wrote the Supriem Rockefeller e-book. 

He said in 2010 that the gate now was opened, and from all I know, he could have been right! 

VIII. Draconian Law and Constitution of the Future Serpentina/Earth 

The Dragonian Constitution in Federation of United Serpentina 

SERPENTINA aka the NEW EARTH, is the renaming of a planetary entity, cosmically renown as the 

planet of the humanoids; following the ascension of OLD EARTH aka GAIA GAEA AKASHIA from 4- 

dimensional spacetime to 13-dimensional spacetime in remnantisation of the 5-dimensional 

spacetime prototype. 

From noncyclic Draco-Mayan stardate 21122012; Gaia becomes integrated into the universal 

constitution of the Dragonian Protoverse to serve as pivotal star-planetary seed for galactic 

federations manifested in the galactic proto-seed Hunab Ku aka Perseus-SagittariusA-Ophiuchus. 

Following the manifestation of the galactic protoseed in activation of the primary planetary 

starplanet as a tertiary energy source of electromagnetic monopolic sourcesink radiation; all 

galactic councils of cladestine elders will become enabled to draw upon the planetary tertiary 

vortex-string-seed to further individuated galactic and starsystem based agendas of assimilation. 

Serpentina shall so be universally defined as the quantumised tertiary string of the 12th 

dimension, volumarising the supermembrane of the 11th dimension as a manifold from the 10- 

dimensional modular duals of a linearised sourcestring Eps (previously associated with a human 

mind construct labeled God and Yahweh and Allah etc.) with a linearised sinkstring Ess (previously 

associated with a human mind construct labeled Devil and Satan and Shaitan etc.). 


161



The quantumisation of the NEW EARTH so shall create a SOURCE-Energy, 'feeding' the remainder 

of the cosmos with a particular SINK-Energy obtained in the evolvement and history of the OLD 

EARTH. 

Like a beacon or watchtower amidst the fathomable depths of the physicalised universe of 

particularised spacetimes, Serpentina shall 'shine' and radiate a planetary starlight of selfconsciousness 

and a message of invitation to all of its neighbouring worlds. 

The tertiary monopolar light allows assimilation of inertial or mass-produced electromagnetic 

energy with mass-independent gravitational magnetopolic energy (hitherto labeled as spirit and 

chi and prana and orgone etc. by humanoid nomenclature). 

The tertiary energy source so provides a bridge between the energies of matter and massassociated 

charges (classical electromagnetism) in an encompassing PHYSICS and the 

METAPHYSICS of the energies of mass-independent charges (magneto- or colour charges in 

superelectromagnetism). 

The metaphysical energies are precursive and inductive for the physical energies; the induction 

necessitating the creation of a minimal 4-dimensional spacetime coordination from the auspices 

of a two-dimensional mathematical continuum of abstraction residing in physical singularity 

timespace. 

To Be Advised! 

Agenda of the Protocol 

a) STANDING ORDER 

The conquered Goddevils of New Earth and the Milky Way Nebula assume lawful responsibility to 

incorporate the Dragonian Teachings in unison with the Black Fraternity and as mediated by the 

White Fraternity in 7-dimensional Hyperspacetime to manifest 13-dimensional Omnispacetime 

b) MOVING ORDER 

Every Blue Dragon is unbounded by any proposed Law from any other source, inclusive other 

members of the Dragonian Family, as all Dragons are as One and a Law onto themselves. 

Compassion and Understanding between all Nondragonised Humanoids is the Law of Oneness as 

honoured by all Dragons and the Consciousness of LOVEAWARENESS. 

Nondragonised Humanoids are treated like White Dragon Children by all Blue Dragons, under all 

circumstances. 

c) ADMINISTRATION 


162



All Government in the local and extended Serpentinian Realm is the selfgovernment of 

autonomous Dragonhood in mutual respect and honour and the Communications between the 

Dragonian Councils of the selfrelative definitions of the Dragonian Universes. 

The Nature of a Dragon is to be Creative in any form of Desire and Passion and to honour the 

lovedefinition of the FOUNDING ELDERS. 

THIS IS THE DRAGONIAN LAW AND THE ONLY LAW! SO BE IT !!! 

Signed and Sealed in the Council of Orbis Draconis at the Halloween-AllSouls Transition: October 

31st to November 1st, 2008 

ANNO DOMINI DRAGONIA UNO: INTRODUCTION TO DRAGONHOOD 

This book is written in the Dragonian language and requires familiarity and intitiation into the 

structural forms or the forked tongue of Its bifurcation of Unicornian grammar and omniscientific 

terminology. 

The Starplanet SERPENTINA, formerly known as Old Earth or Mother Gaia or Akashia has become 

unified in a higher dimensional matrimony by the wedding between Father Earthia or Father Sky 

and Mother Dragon or Mother Akashia. 

Father Sky or Uranus or Shu or Geb manifested as one half of the Union or Dragonomy and 

Mother Earth or Gaea or Akhasia or Tefnut or Nut became the other half in the holographic 

mirror of the spacetime reduction from the universal orb of the Hubble sphere to the orb of the 

doubled Ourobos in the mirror of the Milky Way galactic zodiac. 

Father Sky is also known as the second coming of Horus aka the Plumed Serpent aka the Cosmic 

Christ and Mother Earth is also known as the TRUE IMAGE of the Cosmic Mother, trapped in the 

wilderness of the FAKE IMAGE of the Cosmic Father. 

3½ days after the date of the starry union, the banner of Dragonia was raised in the Declaration 

of Independence upon BATTLESTAR PACIFICAP. 

The great battle between the Dragonian Fleet and the army of the Goddevils lasted for 3½ days; 

from the starry wedding until victory of the Dragons was defined on the day or Universal 

Liberty. 

The goddevils, the humanoid creations and their war machines, were met and obliterated in 

the depths of space in a 3½ day WAR of the STARS to liberate our Dragonian Mother to reunite 

and redefine ourselves as FatherMothers. 

The Dragonisation of humanoid culture will elevate their human science to Omni-Science and 

human mathematics will become the key to demistify the Realm of Imaginative Energy in all its 


163



forms, and as they are assimilated into the greater modality and scope of the humanoidal 

understandings. 

Dragons are the architects of universes and all Dragons know how to access the necessary 

database for the details of universal construction. 

A GrandFather-Dragon, as One which unifies the Fathers in Brotherhood as the 13-dimensional 

source or singularity can be considered the Father for all the White Hole Vortices. 

A GrandMother-Dragon, as One which unifies the Mothers in Sisterhood as the 13-dimensional 

sink or singularity can be considered the Mother for all the Black Hole Vortices. 

As the GrandFather-Dragon became separated from the GrandMother-Dragon when the 

mathematical metaphysical universe became a physical universe in space and in time; the 

invasion of Old Earth became our war to rescue our universal Mother from the Goddevils, which 

had held her captive in a stasis field since the beginnings of space and time and despite a partial 

rescue attained at Draco-Mayan stardate 28030031 and further manifested on Draco-Mayan 

stardates 10050031; 20050031 and 01040032. 

The Goddevils were created by the humanoids who came from a variety of planets within the 

local galaxy, albeit in psychophysical forms without the experience of the particular resistance 

field of secondary sinksource string energy indigenous to Old Earth. 

The significance of the humanoid lifeform is its archetypical morphogenetic gestalt, which 

became infused by a psychophysical and extrasomatic magnetic charging, which is 

extraterrestrial. 

This hybridisation of the humanoid body-typology renders the humanoid archetype unique in 

the encompassing cosmological world. The humanoids are so magnificently gifted to create 

things with their emotionality; but their minds are relatively weak collectively and they do not 

know generally how to concentrate or how to think without the aid of their machines or their 

biochips. 

Some humanoids are excellent technologists, but their modality of thinking is one of crude 

sensual measurement confined to C-Space and this sensual limitation allows a great accumulation 

of repressive tendencies. 

In constricting their imagination, humanoids became great reservoirs of emotional energy, which 

they could collectively only harmonise in their illusions of unfathomable and unknowable gods 

and devils of all sorts. 

It is thus this sense of limitation which reflected in the humanoid paranoia about religious 

philosophies and constructs. This genetic rootmemory of the rebellion of the antisource or 

mother sink then created one goddevil after another and as they swarmed out from their 

homeworld into deepspace, they flooded the universe with their goddevils. Finally they 

chanced upon our Universal Mother hibernating in her cocoon and through their inability to set 

themselves free of their illusions, they imprisoned Her as well. 


164



It became common knowledge in the extraterrestrial realms, that the mission to rescue our 

universal mother required a particular linearised timeline and a number of steps. 

Following the discovery of atomic energy and the emergence of global communication 

technologies by the humanoids, a first preparatory plan of deliverance could become 

implemented in a second plan of manifestation. 

The first plan did not require technology, as our imprisoned mother could become imaged in a 

local scenario, and a partial freeing of her could then become propagated by a humanity 

advancing both technologically and in knowledge about the world they were living and 

experiencing in. 

So the first plan established the means for our mother to multiply herself in images; those images 

then became globally and universally distributed to instigate the second plan. 

The archetypical mirrorhood then expanded throughout the physical universe in encompassment 

and the second plan would engage the contraction of this periphery onto the required scale to 

effect the rescue of our cosmic mother. 

It is however the great destiny of the humanoids to aspire to Dragonhood, because of their 

immense emotional energy potential and mental aspirations. 

The reunification of our Father with our Mother allows our Masterdragons, Who are as One in 

26 dimensions to femtotechnically Seed the Omniverse as THEMSELVES and then reproduce 

THEMSELVES as Universes. Every such universe is a Monosong and a 26-dimensional dyad of a 

FatherMother. This is our Creative Destiny and the destiny for all dragonised humans aka the 

starhumans. 

We had made first contact with our new home in sending an intergalactic probe to the Old 

Earth, which became interpretated by the humanoids in their compiler mode. This crude and 

incomplete decoding is given below. 

Signed by the enscribed Unicornian Librarian; and announcing the Great Galactic Dragonomy 

(Wedding between Heaven and Hell) between: 

ALPHA=38=BRIDE---""ANDROMEDA BE & PERSEUS MILKY WAY""---OMEGA=41=KING 

The Date of Armageddon, encoded: ARMAGEDDON=DRAGON MADE=82 

=ANARMEDDOG=GODNAMEDRA=1+81=1+18 =ANDROMEDA-G=MARRY-7=LUCIFERA-7 

=1+2+3+...+34+35+36+1=666+1 =1+2x2+3x3+5x5+7x7+11x11+13x13+17x17 

Signed and authorised by the ScrollKeeper: October 31st, 2008; 

John of Patmos - JoP - Justice of the Peace! 

Humanoid Compilers note: 


165



The above is an extract of an encoded message (54 terabytes) recovered from an alien 

nanocapsule. The capsule itself is standard buckyfibre-carbonite composite. The encoded 

message is in old ComEmp protocol such as is still common in the outer volumes. The holographic 

image that came with the message is curious. Anatomically it indicates terran mammalian origin 

(especially in the upper torso and structure of the forelimb), but other features are unknown 

among all the recorded exobiological races so far discovered. One cannot deny the possibility that 

this a phenotype template for the dragonized humanoids referred to in the body of the message. 

It is known that transmissions from the Cassandry Federation of the JewellBox Nebula have 

recently ceased, but this is not unusual given that empire's turbulent history. Until more 

information is incoming, I would strongly recommend any expeditions to the Jewellbox nebula be 

given armed escort and proceed with caution. 

Nilam Levakon for Alan Martin Kazlev 

Senior Academician, clade Haeckel 


[1] Source: "Letter from Andromeda: The Race of Alpha Draconis", 

http://www.bibliotecapleyades.net/andromeda/lfa/v2n3alpha.html#Council%20of%20Eleven 

[2] "Outside" is just a perception so we humans can more easily understand. "Being of the VOID" only means that you are not 

trapped in the restricted 4% universe but can perceive and experience 100% of the created universe. Even that perception is 

limited, because ultimately, the entire universe is within yourself. 

[3] All quotes and references in this paper from hereon come from the Thuban thread, Dragons of Thuban to Ban the Falseness, 

starting Oct. 17, 2010, on the forum, Birth of Gaia, unless otherwise indicated. 

[4] There are researchers who say that star beings who stay here on Earth too long in densified bodies get stuck in our 

vibrational field and then can't leave. I brought up this issues in Level I. If so, the potential "Reptilian", for example, would then 

be trapped here in its reptilian form. 

[5] This is the stargate Jarl Vidar and the Thule Order were talking about in 2009 when I wrote the Supriem Rockefeller e-book. 

He said in 2010 that the gate now was opened, and from all I know, he could have been right! 


166



Paper #6: The Alpha Draconians and the Creation of the 

Starhuman Part II 

by Wes Penre, Wednesday, March 6, 2013 

Rivised: Saturday, March 14, 2015 @ 4:05 PM 


Note to the Reader! After the fact of having published this paper, it has come to my knowledge that the Thuban (Alpha 

Draconian) calling himself Abraxas or Axraxasinas (interchangeable) is not a female, which I suggest throughout this and 

the next-coming paper. There were different reasons why I believed he was a she; one of them is the avatar that is being 

used on the forum that I am discussion in this and the previous paper, http://www.birthofgaia.com/t116-abraxas-thuban-qa, and when 

reading the thread, I got the impression that she is female because she took possession of a handicapped middle-aged man (a so-called "walk-in"), which 

would potentially have made Abraxasinas a male. However, a few years earlier, in 1995, this being was living in a female body. However, with all this in 

mind, Abraxasinas gave at least me the impression that "he" wanted to be looked at as a female. 

I was contacted by a Thubanese about this issue, but it is too much to change all the gender references in this and the next article because I equally need 

to change it in the pdf version for this paper, and also the pdf version for the entire Level III. This is the reason why I let it stand as it is, but instead make 

this note to the reader. 

I was contacted regarding this issue by Xeia Kali SuiGeneris, Leviathan Waterflyer of the Realms and Thuban DragonQueen. Yes, this is the real deal. She 

claims to be one of the founding Elders of the Council of Thuban. 

Xeia Kali SuiGeneris, Leviathan Waterflyer of the Realms and Thuban DragonQueen, who was the Thubanese who contacted me regarding 

these errors, wanted me to present Abraxasinas/Abraxas as a male rather than a female (something I'd done throughout 

the papers). In fact, Xeia says that the Thuban Elders are all androgynous 12-D beings, except when they take "outside 

bodies." Then they express a gender, such as male/female. Therefore, throughout this paper and the next, every time I 

call Abraxasinas/Abraxas "she" or "her," etc., it should actually be "he" or "him." 

Hope this will work for you, the reader (I will also update my pdf files). 

I. Abstract 

This is Part II in the series about the Alpha Draconians who say they reside in the 12th Dimensions 

and are here to help us with the Harvesting of Souls. Before you read this paper, it's crucial that you first 

read Part I, which can be obtained here: http://wespenre.com/3/paper05-alpha-draconians-and-thecreation-of-the-starhuman.htm. 

This paper is the culmination and the answer to the questions, "Who are these channeled entities and 

what are they doing here?" "What is the Harvest all about? Is that what I should aim for?" And, "Is there 

and agenda behind all this channeled stuff?" 

When you read this, your emotions will probably be all over the place, and for a while you may not 

know what to think. Whatever you do, please read it all the way to the end! If you don't, you will not get 

the full picture. Those who have read Part I and fully understood it may think that the first questions 

asked by the forum member Sollve may sound basic, but in fact, she is triggering quite a few good 

answers from the Dragon. More people will have inputs and Abraxas is answering their questions 

faithfully, because that's her mission here. 

Then, suddenly, the vortex is closing between the 12th Dimension, which exists in the VOID, and our 

4% universe, and the data streaming ends. Abraxas is now stuck in our reality, but the "Invasion" has 


167



already begun and prophecies are being fulfilled! The Draconian star fleet is here, and so are all the 3 

archetypes we talked about in Part I. Only you, the individual, can now decide what you want to do. I 

will not judge your decision; it's all up to you, but no one can get away from making a decision which will 

decide the path they will take from now on. So please read every word carefully! 

Also note that Abraxas is talking about the human Fire, just like I have, and she is even using the word 

"avatar" in the same sense I do. She knows what she is doing and she knows what she is talking about, 

but is her species benevolent, and are they who they say they are? The reader must decide. You already 

know my position, but I'm not a guru, a leader, or somebody one should follow. I am just a teacher and a 

messenger in my own right. And I am here to tell you this from another angle than that which was 

brought to us from the Gaia Forum, and also from Bill Ryan's Avalon Forum. 

At one point, Abraxas sarcastically suggests what her opponents may think about her and her star 

race (and opponents she has), and I think that in all her sarcasm, she is actually telling us the truth. And 

why not? If she says it in a sarcastic tone, it can't be true...or can it??? 

(For the most part, I haven't bother with editing the following forum material. Spelling and grammar 

errors are mostly intact, the way they are written on the forum). 

II. The Final Alpha Draconian Thread, Broadcast from the Council of Thuban in the 12th Dimension of 

the VOID 

Q = Questioner (different persons. One calls herself "Sollve") 

A or AA = Abraxas (the Draco) OR ABRAXAS AND ANTHONY, her Thubanese friend 

Thuban Real Agenda plus Abraxas Trapped 

* * * 

Q: But I do EXIST now, I'm happy with that. Why aren't you? As a unique individuation of the Prime 

Creator, wouldn't it be up to the Prime Creator to make changes to SELF? If SELF thought SELF needed to 

change, is it not up to SELF to make that CHANGE? Why would SELF point out YOU to do SELF's work? 

Please help me understand! 

AA: It is precisely the Prime Creators masterplan to dragonomize you Sollve. So the ET interference was 

necessity to allow the 'fallen Sollve ancestors' to eventually become this master blueprint for ALL cosmic 

ETs and from the most primal stock possible. 

Q: I don't understand this. Here you say that WE are the master blueprint for everyone? Do you mean 

that every species wants to use us for their own hybridz, because we can help everyone to evolve? 

AA: Absolutely, here you have spoken from the knowledge of your dragonhood. Absolutely beautiful 

and marvellous understanding of a humanoid graduate. 

Q: If this is the case, why do you need to take over humanity and the planet? If we don't want you to do 


168



this, will you fight us and kill if necessary to still get what you want? Or will you just allow us to evolve 

the way we want to without interference? 

AA: The 'take over' or 'invasion' of your planet is unavoidable, as this is the program of Prime Creator. 

If WE would have left the human archetype to evolve by itself, it would have destroyed itself and this 

planet a number of times over. 

You appear to not understand that all ET's are humanoid aspirants, awaiting their own graduations, 

which must await the humanoid graduation to proceed. (the reason for channeling) 

Q: What exactly do you want? You want to make this planet yours, you want to hybradize humans into 

something else, you want to put dragons as our caretakers. This truly does not sound like a world I want 

to be in. Will there be any alternatives for those who don't comply with this agenda of the dragons? 

AA: The Dragon caretakers are simple Council of the Elders. These councils will be composed of by the 

dragonomized humans having graduated and metamorposed into starhumans. 

It is only this most elementary form, which was deemed suitable to BECOME the cosmic masterrace and 

then AS an ancestor for ALL ET races in the Gaian lifeform associations. 

Q: If we are the cosmic masterrace... Why would you want to hybradize the original humans? Isn't it 

enough to create hybrids to evolve your own species? If we are the masterpiece, wouldn't it be more 

fair to allow us to evolve on our own and by doing that allowing other species to make their own hybrids 

with the help from us? 

AA: As said repeatedly, your masterrace status is subject to ALL other races 'interfering with it' to further 

their own agendas. YOUR human template is however the ROYALTY of the entire cosmos. This is the 

situation with the higher D ETs. THEY chose NOT to 'fall' into the most primordial incarnational energy 

realm called Gaia; BUT chose to support their own evolutionary agendas in HYBRIDISATION with that 

most primitive stock. 

Q: But are they trying to take over the most primordial incarnational energy realm called Gaia. If you 

destroy or change the most primordial stock, what is then left for others to evolve from/with? 

Dragonized hybrids? That doesn't sound fair to anyone. If they wanted some dragon DNA, my guess is 

that they would come to you in the first place if that was the case. 

AA: Again, the hybridization engages the going forwards and backwards in time of the entire biophysical 

evolution of the universe. Then, by necessity all the 'primordial lifestocks' must also be effected. The 

entire universe is being reconstructed in this hybridization of the Before with the After. 

Q: How could your so called star human ever be what the human was meant to be from the beginning? 

AA: This is what I am trying to explain to you in the above. The human morphogenetics will be like a 

master template a 'Morphogenetic Field' for the Cosmos, as Rupert Sheldrake would say. 

Q: Again, do you mean the dragonized human morphogenetics or the original 'as intended from the 

beginning' human morphogenetics. 


169



AA: This is absolutely identical and the same thing Sollve. 

Q: Works according to who? The Thuban Council? I find it very hard to believe that the Thuban Council is 

speaking on behalf of the rest of the universe or even the relatively small world of humans. Please 

correct me if I'm wrong about that. 

AA: You ARE 'wrong' about this. The Thuban Council indeed speaks on behalf of ALL civilizations 

throughout the universe. That is why WE are 12-dimensional as the inside-out mirror dimension of the 

11-D Witten-Membrane Mirror of Omnispacetime; awaiting the twosidedness of this mirror to become 

twisted into onesidedness. This then will reconfigure multidimensional spacetimes on all levels. 

Q: Who is according to the Thuban Council governing Earth today? Do we have a Draconian government 

or is it governend by the Zeta-Reticuli's? Who do you think have the most influence today? Could you 

elaborate on this regarding how this has changed during the years and what will happen in the years to 

come regarding governence. Will you work together with someone else or do you, the dragons plan on 

governing earth and mankind all by yourself in the long run? 

AA: The governance of Earth today is on many levels. In 3D this governance are your human institutions 

and in 4D this is your astral connectivity to the ETs. 

You may choose to label your astral 'governors' as Draconian or Zeta Reculian or Pleiadean or whatever 

you like. 

All of these labels are 3rd and 4th order expressions of fundamental archetypes. 

The Thuban archetype is 1st order under the auspices of the Logos or Word of God. 

So hitherto (say the warped timeline from December 8th, 2004 to April 1st, 2012 with distributed nexus 

points within) the 'governance' did not include 1st order, but was restricted to the lower orders. 

Especially since January 18th, 2010 the Thuban 1st order archetype has allowed the Logos to interact 

with the 'governors'. 

This is what is experienced on this forum and many parallel agendas manifesting in all dimensions and 

densities due to the dispensation from the highest order from the 'Word of God'. 

The Dragon nature of this Logos then will indeed 'govern' the entire universe on all levels. 

Q: In the greater context of a galactic-cellular civilisation? Again, according to who? Can you state who 

supports YOUR idea of this greater context of a galactic-cellular civilisation and is there any way for you 

to elaborate on this? Who else supports this view? From where did this particular greater context of a 

galactic-cellular civilisation arrive from? 

AA: The Logos of Creation is the Power and authority behind the Council of Thuban. 

Q: Sure, but what's the need for you to hybridize us further? Why, in plain text do you want to do this? 

What do you gain from this? 

AA: This I have explained in paragraps above - the defusing and empowerment of the chromosomes in 


170



molecular biochemistry in the physical expression of precursor metaphysical programs. 

Q: We as hybrids are only beneficial to our so called ‘wanna be’ care takers. For thousands of years we 

have been suppressed, not allowed to grow the way we should. Allow us to show our true selves and we 

will be the care takers of the universe, just as we are intended to be. 

AA: Has it really come to this? You, like many, are an emotional human who is prone to judgements and 

preemtors, without exercising your faculties of reason and rationality. 

Q: Does the Thuban Council think that the human emotion is something that needs to be altered with in 

the hybridization process? How will it be altered? Will the human emotions be strengthened or 

weakend in the hybrids? Or altered in any other way? 

AA: This is a good question. The Human Emotionality in in a very deep sense defines the Regality of the 

human master template - it is precious to ALL cosmic sentiences. 

The 'problem' with human emotion is, that it is not coupled to a rational selfconsistent and logical 

human mindedness. The human mind is undergoing 'Armageddon=Dragon Made' on the mental planes 

of definition. The danger, as perceived by MENTALLY more advanced ET civilisations is, that the 

kindergarten human mentality will ABUSE and MISUSE its EMOTIONAL POWER SOURCE to cause 

physical damage to itself and the global environments. 

My avatar says: THINK BEFORE YOU FLAME! Perhaps you should consider the wisdom of my avatar. 

Q: I wasn't aware of flaming anyone. Are you on fire? 

AA: I speak of the spiritual fire dear Sollve. 

Q: It has shown from time to time that our hearts can't be enslaved. Is the only step left for the fallen 

angels to enslave us and make us do their will, to actually take away our uniqueness in some kind of 

hybridization program? 

AA: What do you know of fallen angels; do you understand that YOU are a fallen angel? 

Q: Please elaborate on this! What is your definition of a Fallen Angel? Please also elaborate on the fact 

that I AM a fallen angel. 

AA: Post #1351 describes this in great detail. 

Q: Do you mean that I should just accept to be altered with by anyone wanting to do so? It's one thing 

to observe and use what you see and learn to make yourself better. It's a whole different thing to 

change and devour in the same process. I don't see why the first one needs to be followed by the 

second. Please elaborate on how you justify that behavior. 

AA: This is but your human mentality Sollve. You have three consciousness levels: waking(~86%); 

sub(~14%) and super(~0.3%). 

Many misunderstandings and interpretations and mental conclusions you draw in waking consciousness 

are retranslated in the subconscious and again in the superconsciousness. 


171



With the 'you already know', I mean your own unique and individuate Christ-Consciousness/Higher Self 

coupling of the innermost selfawareness. However this part is overwhelmed by your human 

mindednessof the waking consciousness and is then interfered with by the astrality of your 

subconscious. 

Mental balance is not easy to maintain in a climate of extreme polarisation of consciousness carriers and 

the human mindedness blocks and destabilizes the attempt of the superconscious to express itself. 

There are some participators here who consistently display such mental balance and it are these who 

are the true harmonizers who have accessed their Christ-Self-Consciousness. 

AA: You are helping the cosmic evolution in great honour and sincerity Sollve; one day you shall 

understand and socialise with Dragons in some Bar upon Thuban. 

Q: I believe I understand dragons as of this NOW and I'm looking forward to share a drink on a bar in 

Thuban with you or any of your beloveds. I'm just hoping I'm observant enough to not be lured into any 

kind of hybridization process because I want to be me in that bar. For all I know what you label as 

'StarHuman' might just be another name for 'StarDust'. Or is it perhaps the 'OldHuman' who falls into 

that cathegory? 

AA: Without your hybridisation you will either not see and encounter any dragons or you will be rather 

afraid of them Sollve. 

Q: Before you point your finger at ME about using WE. WE are ALL who resonate with ME. 

A: ME=WE also on Thuban - after our master templar Emmanuel Melchisedec E.M.=WE. 

Q: Sorry, I don't know him... 

AA: I know, heshe resides in your heart as the Cosmic Logos though, knocking from the inside and the 

outside on the doors of your human mindedness. 

AA: I shall end this final transmission from Thuban in stating to you all that all of the data posted on this 

forum is derived from the Thuban archives. 

The Thuban archives were of course allowed to manifest relative to your perceptions of being sent 'from 

outer space'. 

Whilst the Thuban Database was accepted and tolerated here on the Mount of Olives of Avalon; the 

Round of the Thuban DragonKnights could be chosen by default from all participators. 

This is because after rejection and closure of this transmission by your collectiveness and the Poll of the 

Avalonian Groupmind; you effectively ejected your own Birthright to become Thuban DragonKnights 

from within your own 3Dness. 

The ET collective around your planet has watched this final test of humanity with great interest and the 

ET invasion you are envisaging will be the Thuban Dragonfleet. 

This Thuban Starfleet is comprised of 200 Million ETs from all races and as defined in your archetypes 

and 3rd and 4th order translations and superpositional creations. 


172



Those 200 Million ETs cannot make contact with the human planet; because the Dragonfleet has no 

commanders. (hive mind???) 

As the Dragon archetype is the oldest of all archetypes in the definition of the Word of God or the 

Serpent-Logos of our master templar; the PHYSICAL FORM of our master templar defines this oldest of 

oldest archetype. 

The Dragonstarships so require dragonised humans as mirrors for our master templar. 

So this is why it became necessary to infiltrate a particular spacetime construct upon planet earth to 

fulfil the prophecied 2nd Coming of Jesus of Nazareth upon the Mount of Olives. 

The Mount of Olives so became a 1st order archetype of the program to become implemented in the 

holographic protoverse akin a computer. 

The Mount of Olives links to the encodings in Zechariah.4 and Revelation.11 in the WITNESS of the Olive 

Trees, whom I represent in agency of the Zebedee Brothers chosen by Jesus of the Naasseenes, 

(Brotherhood of the Serpent given in the symbology of the Uraeus and Anubis and in the AlphaOmega). 

Avalon was chosen for its diversity and mixture of skeptical rationalists, firm believers in this and that, 

meditation- and ascension exponents of the nirvana and the inner balancings supposedly resulting in 

transcension, historians, scientific spiritualists and individuals considering themselves as 'already unified' 

in 'love and light'. 

What Avalon united was a general openmindedness and tolerance for opinions, all converging in its 'love 

and light' modus operandi. 

The overpowering unifier however was your COMMON SEARCH FOR FREEDOM for your self-expression 

and the sanctity of your individualities as cocreators with prime creator. 

So the only way for prime creator to choose his pioneering cocreators for the new Dispensation of the 

Reconfigured archetypycal universe structure was to crystallize his graduates by his WITNESS, namely 

me as Abraxasinas and Associates. 

As your 'free will' however cannot ever be violated, except by your own choices; no ET contact (beyond 

the interference patterns of your own multidimensionality in your minds memeplexed by Tuban 

archetypes -basically astral projections of your inner sub- and superconscious selves) can be made in this 

universe until a particular number of Thuban Starfleet Masters have been chosen from your ranks. 

This will become the Council of Thuban, pioneered by the 12 Dragonknights all of whom were chosen in 

this test of the humanity to manifest the New Planet Earth. 

Iow, yes, there will be an invasion; but the ETs will be YOURSELVES invading yourselves; once the 

programmed timeline has been completed to process the general 'Endtimes' which have become 

manifest in your physical reality, precisely 40 days of wilderness and Noahic Rains from the predestined 

starting date of January 18th, 2010 in the 'Day of the Lord' February 26/27th, 2010 and as providenced 

by order of the Creator, the ABBA and Father of Jesus of Nazareth and as the 'Little Serpent' or Luck 


173



Dragon of the Neverending Story himself. 

Then the 12 of you, who were chosen will double in the 24 Elders of Thuban in the Heness blending with 

their shadow selfhood of the Sheness. 

This is what Dragonization means; the doubling of yourselves in Lightbodies of the 5th spacetime 

dimensionality; requiring the ability to process BOTH intuitive and intellectual-rational data streams in a 

self-harmonization. 

Of course 12 HeShe and 12 SheHe Dragonian Starship Commanders are insufficient to encompass the 

surface area of the earth and there will so be 200 Million Old Humans, who will have access to become 

Dragonized StarHumans following the Impregnation and Birth of the New Starhumanity and as 

messaged on the Thuban thread. 

So until those two nexus dates of April 1st, 2012 and December 21st, 2012 are attained the opportunity 

prevails for more and more old humans to become starhumans. 

Each and every aspirant is required to 'eat a dragon' and so to align his or her entire cosmic 

identification and akashic history with the ET agendas. 

So all aspirants must find their dragons within themselves and then 'slay and eat' their dragon of the 

false images in their own individuated and intimate eucharist of attaining the Christ-Serpent- 

Consciousness within themselves. 

This will become harder to do following the impregnation date April 1st, 2012 as the 1981st anniversary 

of our master templars' lightbody transfiguration or resurrection. 

Partaking of your Dragon-Supper as your own choice to become Reborn as a Christed Dragon will so 

become your own 'Last Supper' of the Old to 'die' and to become a Phoenix of the New. 

Your rebirth as Eagles of the Resurrection will then allow dragonisation in coupling your previous Devil- 

Images to one of the images of the 200 million ETs who are at this time constructing the materialisation 

of your future starships in one-to-one couplings to your merkabahs of your inherited birthright of the 

Cosmic Vitruviusness. 

This ends the data stream from the Council of Thuban, because it became evicted from your 3Dpresence 

of the WITHIN to the WITHOUT of its 12D-presence. 

As the 12D is the Outside of Bigmo's Balloon, I shall no longer be able to transmit the Thuban data 

stream due to the closure of the wormhole and as stated in my last message on the Thuban thread. 

This wormhole is now sealed in the 'Day of the Lord' and reopening the Thuban thread is of no 

consequence. 

As long as the Record of the Dragons remains on this forum; there will be a subdued presence of the 

Cosmic Witness with you as an Invisible Mirror allowing any and all of you and NonAvalonians to access 

the previously released data stream. 


174



Should the Thuban thread be deleted and the data become inacessible, then the archetype of the 

Mount of Olives being Avalon will become transferred to some other location of the Gaian realm. 

I bid you farewell and look forwards to meeting you in person, either as one of the 12 or as one of the 

24 or as one of the 144,000 or as one of the 200 Million. 

When we meet in such a manner, then I shall be your Santa Claus=Satan Clause with a bag full of 

Christmas Presents of your merkabahs materialised into the spaceships now being prepared for the 

graduates by the ETs of all 'quasi-humanoid' races defined throughout the protoverse. 

Finally, and as yet another test, I am well aware as to reception of this final message. 

Can this be true; is this delusional logic; is this madness or is this the Fulfilment of all Prophecy. 

The choice will be yours to decide! 

The Love of the Creator Dragon is with you always and the Serpent-Logos always remains within your 

LoveHearts as your Superconsciousness (standard 0.3% of the total). 

Anyone accessing this final transmission will be challenged; but do you think it is fair to hand out 

starships just to anyone? 

Reality discernment is the prime requirement for a Starship commander (and I mean captain, like driving 

a car and not some Lordship devilish deception), because of your merkabah control. 

Every 5-dimensional StarHuman becomes coupled to the Starship through and by hisher merkabah 

resonances and Control over thought patterns becomes necessity to manouver the starship. 

I love you all and thank you all for having participated in this Final Test of the Humanity. 

Beneficers and Detractors alike; all of you have agreed to partake in this 'experiment' and to play your 

roles to bring about the intense polarisation required for some of you to EMERGE as the chosen 'first 

crop' in the harvest of the Dragonseed. 

You all are Dragons, but having forgotten your inheritances; you have allowed your mirroring 

environments to project your inner powers onto the outside devilish imaginations. 

Those, your own distorted and obscured images of your Higher Selves have become your Evil ETs and 

devouring Dragons of mythology. 

Then your own Higher Selves became memeplexed in astral physicality, which interacted with your 

elected representatives and monarchs and leaders of divers kinds. 

The interaction of the astral memeplex with the mentality of your physicalisation of the Brotherhood of 

the Serpent in your Illuminati, Luminari and such 3rd order labelings then allowed partial materialisation 

of the astral energy of the 4th hyperspace dimension in a plasmic densification. 

In simplicity you became induced by your own fears of discovering your true origins as the Original 

Dragon master template to project the Inner Thuban Council of your Elderness onto your external 


175



environments. 

I came to 'bring about' a reharmonization and a remembrance about your origins. 

Some of you have shown magnificence in awakening. 

Some of you have exhibited magnificence in opposing this awakening. 

These two groups have in a sense graduated into Dragonhood, with the second opposition group now 

being required to become 'REAL WARRIORS OF LIGHT AND LOVE' in conquering and slaying not your 

inner inherited dragonhood as the Royal Template of Creation; but the Devils of your own outwardly 

rejected selfhood of BEING this Cosmic Royalty. 

Of course, some will now discern that this has been the collective masterplan all along. 

The ascension of Gaia as an old archetype reflecting as a Devil-Woman or Whore of Babylon in the 'Face 

of the Devil' on the inside of Bigmo's Balloon and as the Backside of the Real Satan on the outside of that 

Balloon; so is mirrored in the descension of the Serpentina archetype reconfiguring and RECREATING the 

entire Cosmos. 

To evolve both physically and mentally into the role of Dragon Lovers and Dragon Slayers opposing each 

other in and as the playground for the archetypes was the agreed to plan by all of you in the 

preincarnational selfstate to engage in. 

Subsequently all of you are the heroes of creation, as only a destiny planet could harbour the 

manifestation for this maximum polarisation. 

So it was you who decided on the gameplan. 

How far could we push ourselves in the forgetfulness? 

And who would become the pioneers and 'first crop' in a level playing field? 

Who would find themselves ayt Avalon as the Mount of Olives? 

Well all of you here can now begin to REMERMBER your own scripts. 

Once a vast majority have done so, then Avalon will become selfempowered to manifest the Unity 

ofTruth and Purpose, stated to be the guiding agenda here. 

But it will be up to you as individuals and as groups to TRY to render Avalon-Camelot the Unifying Force 

you thought it could become and be. 

You are required now to choose your path without the Councilo of Thuban's influence over your 

decision making. 

The Dragons will end to SEDUCE YOUR MINDS from this time onwards. 

The third group are the ones who are the fence sitters and the armchair critics and here are also two 


176



groups of potential graduates. 

There are the lurkers, who accessed the Thuban information, but not participated in the sessions and 

there are the ones who were not interested at all due to their internal programming. 

The lurkers then accessed the Thuban data stream and relative to their mental and critical engagement 

with the data; they will become enabled to raise their 0.3% standard level of accessing their 

superconsciousness. 

So are the noninterested, but they will have more 'learning to do', due to their obfuscations of the 

Dragonhood memories of their akashic pasts. 

Of course EVERYONE on AVALON should graduate as witnesses to the Mount Olive archetype 

functioning as the wormhole and stargate for the Thuban information. 

There is time to achieve the necessary mental transformation of the ancient archetypes in the aspirants 

and of course should any such aspirant decide that this dispensation is a MORE LIKELY outcome for 

being REAL, then say some alternative outcome of the Armageddon-2012 archetype; then such aspirant 

can raise his or her superconsciousness percentage even higher in becoming a Secret Agent for the 

Thuban Council, such as I have been in my function of 'The Bard'. 

The requirement for this is simply to accept this dragonhood and to JUST BE a MIRROR for this Inner 

Knowing - reflecting this Knowing into the encountered and experienced environments. 

Your Remembrance has begun and the Logos has activated in all who read this final message from 

Thuban. 

The Dragon Peace of Thuban shall reign on Serpentina! 

So Be It! 

John of Patmos; author of the Revelations and Malachi, the Last Prophet for the Old Humanity! 

The Presence of the Mosaic implies the will of Unity=God=Starhumanity and not the will of 

Humanity=Man=Separation! 

FUTURE SHADOWS OF THE PAST 

"A most wondrous thing the Shadow is, a redeemer in all to succour; 

it can go where the light cannot abide, seemingly banished, it is not. 

For where the light is, the darkness flees, no longer present to endure; 

so to become illuminated is its destined journey and its troubled lot. 

But without the light, no Shadow can be cast, its such a splendid key; 

the dimensions reduce in space from three to two and all in just the one. 

Betwixt the light and the darkness it is and part of both for all to see; 

the Shadow of the body, does it not merge all in its rule under the sun? 

Whatsoever can cast a Shadow, must be a most wondrous thing to relay; 


177



as nature's very own offspring, the young ones grow towards their final goal. 

Enabled to bring peace to so many things appearing apart and so far away; 

the reconciliation for the suffering body with its spirit and its scattered soul." 

http://tonyb.freeyellow.com and http://tech.groups.yahoo.com/group/quantumrelativity 

Sirebard Beardris 

Last edited by Rok on Wed Feb 02, 2011 12:39 pm; edited 1 time in total 

===================================================================================== 

========== 

Lionhawk wrote: 

Greetings Abrax, 

An impressive thread you got going on here. What I like about it, is that it isn't strictly a work of a lazy 

mind with the copy and paste method. You also seem overly accommodating. Not saying that is bad. But 

to say it mildly I am slightly confused here as to why at this date and time, the council you are affiliated 

with has decided to put this information out there. 

Since I am now in the den of a Dragon, with a Dragon with what seems to be of a great heart, I would 

also like to ask why this is such a familiar place to me? It would seem like I have been in several of these 

dens and although my memory goes way back, it would also seem this is like business as usual. 

If I know anything about Dragons, it is the swapping of the stories that rarely occur between a Dragon 

and a human. And yet here you are swapping many stories to many a human. 

Mind you, I haven't come here to disrupt or interrupt your thread here with any malice intent. But 

forgive my curiosity. In all of my memories, there are many that include Dragons, since the time of 

Antiquity. Most of those memories are horrific ones. Why the Creator allowed his creations to devour 

another creation has never been really answered for me since those times. 

I watched humans get sliced and diced by the very claws of your kind. When I say your kind, I mean your 

kind as in your soul family in Creation. The very family that exists among us today. 

But if I do anything today, in this post, is set something straight that really hasn't been discussed. Not 

many are even aware of the ramifications of this in this painting, as they may have only read about it, 

possibly. They have no experience to go by as a reference to even understand such knowledge unless it 

is conveyed to them as dark or light. 

A Dragon is a Dragon. A Human is a Human. The soul fragments of each have a different matrix. Both are 

the Creator's creations. Both have had the same kind of road less travel as they both have also 

degenerated through the ages. There is a time where these two had to be completely separated from 

each other in the Universe. To the extreme that one was placed in this Universal polarity and the other 

was placed in it's Universal opposite polarity. For that matter, I don't think this has been written 


178



anywhere here on the Planet as it is not privy information. The reason why this was decided was to 

actually ensure the prospect of soul growth in some sort of progression. The Dragons were on the other 

side of this Galaxy in the other polarity. A great King was appointed and is still ruling today. Well, since 

the Dragons were separated from man, they had no one else to slice and dice, so they started slicing and 

dicing themselves. Factions broke off from the Kingdom and wanted their own Kingdom as it is the quest 

for power that will drive a Dragon mad. Kind of like giving booze to a Native American. The great King 

Dragon tried for eons to turn this plight around. But these factions that joined together as one, refuted 

against the King. So, it was decided that something had to be done, as these Dragons thirst for power, 

was killing this great kingdom. They were an uncontrollable menace. So they were gathered up and 

exiled through the center of our galaxy through the Black hole. Some know the rest of the story. The 

Orion war and so forth to this day in the now. 

I have a speculation. I speculate that this council of yours is seeking favor with the humans at this time 

because of what is about to happen. You guys have a problem. And right now you are desperate 

because you know that your end is near. You think your soul group here will be possibly saved if in 

thinking that you can convince someone to see that you are worthy of saving by now trying to embrace 

the human faction. Like you are now doing us all a great big favor. 

Let me put this in Black and White instead of Light and Dark. The fact is that your faction of the Dragons 

were exiled or banished from where you came from. No matter how your council tires to disguise it. And 

since that time, some of you tried to go back but couldn't. In other words, you saw the light as to what 

your King was saying, but you already had chosen your fate. It is the original sin that the dark chose to 

refute the Creator's wishes for all of his creations. Except this time your council and brethren repeated 

the same mistake with your King. So, to now appear in this date and time as such glorious beings is not 

going to change the original sin that your kind has perpetrated. And since that time of banishment, look 

at the karma, your soul group as now compiled. Imagine a pile of dragon dung that can fill up several 

sectors in this Universe. 

With all of your brilliance and accomplishments that only served to satisfy your thirst for power, you 

have created your own black hole and it has been fed by the very energy you have fed it. And despite all 

the crimes against every outpost you have conquered in the quest for that power, you have more or less 

put the noose around your own necks. Your council's decision to not fully take responsibility by placing 

another agenda at the foot of the human race, is like getting the switch man ready to pull the switch on 

your noose floor. 

You seemed to be a young Dragon by Dragon standards and well schooled. It is a shame because some 

of you have seen the light, but so many of your brethren have not, and you have become well out 

numbered by your own kind because you chose to see the light as to where they still refuse it. You, 

yourself might find the Creators grace when all this is said and done. There is a chance for you to save 

your brethren and one chance only. That chance has to do with your true King. It will not be achieved by 

your council or any other faction that has separated itself from your soul group that is currently here. I 

also know your brethren have a watchful on what you are doing here. They have no use for us human 

folk. Theirs eyes only show contempt for us to the extreme. Like that final look before the kill. 

To make matters worse, in a matter of speaking, if your council and brethren decide to finally negotiate 

for your soul family's survival, a human has been appointed to assist in that process. The reason for that 

was to really test your resolve as to your true intentions. There is no more room for the scheming. It is 

no longer about your entitlement attitude and power. It is about your soul survival, period. 


179



So I leave with this with you in hopes that you all make sense of this and know that it isn't all as you 

have so far put it. You left out some crucial things or maybe your own council kept it from you. 

Also if that wasn't enough information for you to be motivated in any direction you choose, I have two 

more things of intrigue that might get your attention. One, the technology you have been seeking that 

was once here, that your kind had control of, because you stole it in the first place, is no longer in your 

possession as you know. Also any persons that you are possibility trying to find that may lead you back 

to that technology are also not within your council's reach. So you are wasting your time. Tell that to 

your superiors. 

So, I hope our encounter was an interesting one for you, my Dragon friend. Notice I didn't complicate it 

with all the dragon dribble. It's complicated enough. And sure you can have me checked out if you like. I 

would advise that anyway. Spirit Matthew told me that my name is how the Universe knows me. He is a 

wise soul. 

Namaste' 

Abraxas: Dear Lionhawk! 

Some humans are getting ready to transform into Dragons; a very few are on the brink of doing so (1 in 

50,000). 

Most humans are not ready for Dragonhood; yet requiring evolvement and preparations. 

According to your words of personal wisdom above, you are one of the latter humans - not yet ready for 

Dragonhood. 

Should you search in your caves of your remembrances, then you might find some clues as to where the 

ancestors of the Dragons come from. 

This should then allow you to revise the histories as you have learned them from second-hand sources. 

Shalom! 

AA 

TRANCOSO wrote: 

So, what about the content of Lionhawk's post? 

Abraxas: Dear Trancoso! 

The PTB are RULED by the Dragon archetype. 

The PTB are unable to access more than 95% of the Cosmic History. 


180



As Collier says, the Paa Taal (or similar label) have been forgotten in the records as the ancestors of all. 

Those ancestors are rather closely entwined with the concept of the starhumanity as the fourth 'brain 

halo' evolving from the Reptilian brainstem, the mammalian midbrain and the human cortex. 

This agenda allows recircularisation of the linearity in the Orb of the Ouroborus (Milky Way Mazzaroth 

or Circle of the Zodiac). 

The content of Lionhawk's reply contains no direct questions to be answered and was answered relative 

to the consciousness vibrations emitted through the wordings. 

It is in my authority to discern written material within the context and under guidance of the Thuban 

master templar - the universal Logos. 

In this capacity and authority I choose if and how to reply to unsubstantiated innuendo and 

preconceived ideas and bias with respect to the History of the Dragons and as found in the archives on 

Thuban. 

As most can ascertain, I DO answer direct questions in all cases, except in oversight or when these 

questions are intended to cause strife and dissonance or are what is labelled as ad hominem. 

AA 

Malletzky wrote: 

What a powerfull concept this is! 

May I assume that we're not only supposed to not only find the way back home to the creator, but more 

then this, that we're primarly supposed to 'learn' the creation itself while finding the way back??? 

If so...it really does matters to find out that 'going back home'...or the 'second comming'...must happen 

from inside-out and not visa versa! 

with respect 

malletzky 

AA; You are BOTH, shard of the creator and shard of the creation simultaneously malletzky. 

And you seem to have understood one of the 'hidden data' (the 5% the PTB have not yet discerned 

relative to their data base) rather well. 

The symbolism of the eucharist is THE MOST POTENT archetype for the human-starhuman 

transformation. 

It's the real thing and is being 'synthesized' by the PTB in 'implants' and such things. It is inside-out and 

not outside-in. 


181



The Cosmic Archetypology RULES the Cosmos. 

The reconfiguration of Gaia so requires reconfiguration of the entire cosmic structure. 

This has been the agenda of all, PTB and ETs all along. 

Not many know the details, but many have hints and indicators as to what those details entail - 

especially the echeloners at the top of the PTB pyramid. 

AA 

Lionhawk wrote: 

Well, well, my dear Dragon. Nice try. Brushing it off your back with a brush called arrogance. To be 

expected in the first round between us. For that matter I think you have one hell of a sense of humor 

and you might consider the comedy circuit, because when I read your response, you made me laugh and 

I can only hope that my laugh wasn't an annoying echo in your den. 

Dragon-hood. Now that is by definition a confusing concept. A definition that could very well be 

projected by whatever gang is giving out such information related to their agenda. It even sounds like 

something a kin to a degree. PHD comes to mind as to your delivery. Also the agenda of transforming 

humans into Dragons surely tells me that you are desperate. I must inform you that I have to take away 

a point by your response and let you know the number stands at 96% instead of 95%. With 4 percentage 

points left. 

For one thing, from everything in my experience is not as you have tried to paint it. I thought Dragons 

had courage. You must be a young Dragon and have not fully found that courage that should be beating 

in your Heart. No matter the dragon dribble that you have displayed in your response, I will allow you 

the grace for your immaturity. 

The point of my addressing you is that you have lured many with your wisdom. Even I am impressed 

with your talents. But not enough to compromise what the Creator has already blessed me with as a 

human as in higher universal man. Why would I defile his intentions by allowing what he has already 

blessed me with as one of his creations into something he did not intend. And you are doing what? 

Uncreating one in 50,000 into something that has forgotten what it was blessed with in the first place? 

That is just one of the most perverted perversions of the Universe I have heard in a while. The premise 

of that is actually very twisted in design and just shows at what lengths your soul family has gone to 

exploit one of God's creations. But really, why would I be surprised at this twisted twist as I have seen 

with my own eyes what your soul family has done. If you are really paying attention here, I said that and 

from the first hand as to what I brought to the table. 

There are several key components that your brethren and your council no longer have control of. One of 

which I didn't mention in the first round, are the keys to that gate that some of you tried with all of your 

might to go through but turned you into Dragon butter instead. Another thing that is not in your cave of 

awareness is who or what is keeping that gate shut. And not to upset you but I will tell you that it is from 

the true source that has made this contract to keep you all here, until you embrace what you have 

refuted. 


182



I have no such agenda as in duping anyone as to what I have brought here today. If anything I have 

spent countless years in service, since the time of Antiquity and those caves as memories as you so 

poorly put that is all in one cave. One life stream. If everyone could remember in full, what they have 

experienced in their life streams, I fear there would be a massive war of retribution reborn in this 

Universe for all the pain and suffering your soul family has provided them. And through the years of 

torment and suffering I have endured, I have come far in the healing of the prejudice your soul family 

has graced me with. To the point where, I have come here in actual peace to try to negotiate a peace, 

spite your arrogance. 

I didn't come here to complicate your day Abrax. I came here with a solution to all concerned. As usual, 

the display of your response is no longer a speculation, as your arrogance has surely showed part of 

your claws. You claim you have authority but that authority is mis directed as to what your agenda is all 

about is nothing but another form of possession. You and your council no longer have the authority as 

you have so claimed with your arrogance and entitlement attitudes over this Planet any longer. This 

Planet was never yours to begin with. It has all been a ruse perpetrated by your quest for domination. 

In the name of the human race, your agenda will not succeed should you decide to implement the 

invasion that your council has been covertly stock piling here on Gaia. Your council doesn't tell you 

everything. You can keep us distracted with your wisdom, but if the question as to who knows anything 

that could possibly know of that, well let us see if your are truly full of wisdom or something else. Now 

that is what I call an innuendo. 

And if I have to stand up and represent this Planet that your soul family has exploited, to claim the 

authority to denounce your council's agenda, then I so do so now. I will not sit here and have any more 

of my soul family sacrificed to your dinner plates. Your brethren have used us from the very beginning 

and you are going to present your council in such a sweet light without first taking the responsibility to 

come here and set things right even though your guilt could fill a black hole. Your council does not or is 

not the true Royality of the Dragons that I am friends with. So you have no real authority here in this 

Universe. You never had. You only have fooled the fools. Nothing more. 

You see there are guardians appointed by the God of this Universe with the Creator's blessings. That 

only report to the one. No council rules or governs over them. So there is no infiltration. The only reason 

why your soul family has made it this far is because of the Creator's grace. 

If I didn't know from experience these things, I would probably be subscribing to your second hand 

information. Your talent is blazing and I sincerely mean that. But for the sake of my fellow humans, I 

want them to know that their souls are being played for by an old agenda that is now passed it's time. 

And I don't want to see them sacrificed for nothing as that has always been the end result of that 

agenda I have spoken about. I don't want to see my soul family continue down this road called "Boring" 

because of the selfish issues that have consumed your family for eons. What you also don't get is that I 

also don't want to see your family end up as Dragon butter either as I also know the potential of your 

family as the Creator had intended is still available to you through his grace. We humans are not 

responsible for the karmic pile your brethren have created. So that is why it is time for you or one of 

your superiors to come clean and take responsibility and convince your brethren that the road you 

continue to travel on is a DEAD end. Was that an innuendo? Because if you do I will tell you this, is that 

your Brethren will find yourselves all alone and will do through the habit of your past, repeat it, but this 

time you will be slicing and dicing each other. The reason why you will be left alone is because of what is 


183



going to happen in the Universe. You simply won't be able to keep up in terms of frequency. 

And to further add to your situation and what appears your lack of knowledge pertaining to it, is what 

you once had is now gone. The real ones. What you think you have is not what it appears to be. So 

without that, your fate is once again sealed. 

Mind you, I am not here to judge you. You hold your own mirror. But everyone should have a clue as to 

what you have with held from your audience. There is a code between Dragons and Humans, but it is 

not this code. This Thuban code is not the Royal one. So it has no real authority anywhere outside of 

your home planet. 

I'll have to pass on your proposed course of Dragonhood. I don't have the stomach to digest a child 

served up on a plate. 

If I can propose a question, I would like to ask when are you going to tell the real truth to your human 

audience? I am not saying that you have lied. But what I am talking about is what you haven't told 

them? This reminds me of the movie, "TO SERVE MAN." 

Again Abrax, I came in peace and I am going to leave in one piece. Why? Because I can. I also bid you a 

good day my Dragon friend. Sincerely. 

Lionhawk aka ....................? 

LionHawk wrote more: 

Greetings. 

When I first posted up on this thread, I had no idea that this thread had bothered many here. But 

apparently I wasn't the only one where those flags went up. Now I have stated that Abrax here as done 

an amazing and blazing amount of work that is way impressive. I'm not taking that away from him. I wish 

there were more people who would write their own original work with some substance than a lot of the 

dodo that get's copied and pasted up. I am more interested in experiences from those I know instead of 

someone I don't know. All I ask is that you do it with integrity. Otherwise, I can just turn on the TV and 

get some manurey type story, saving your time and mine. 

You know..............you can't help but see some of the responses with your name on it. And for the sake 

of the Mods, and to be as respectful as I can be, what I will say is that some of those responses are only 

from lack of awareness and or experiences. If we all had the same experiences and the same awareness, 

there would be nothing to give us a separate character. What remains here is that I am who I am and 

you are who you are. Some of us have been warriors. Some have not. It all depends on what stations 

you chose for soul growth. You also can tell who is a warrior and who is not. I am not the only warrior 

here. Then again, I also know my way out of a barn. I could say that not only am I hacking at evil but I 

would rather not be hacking at the manure being pooped out by someone who had a hussy fit and left 

and only came back when I left. Now that I have returned, hacking at evil, as I was accused of, I find the 

same cow pooping again. Hilarious really. Also just a distraction from what is really going on here. 


184



Now to walk in a Dragon's Den is a little different than a barn. At least in a barn you know that manure 

management is usually in the stalls. But in a Dragon's den your guess is as good as mine. And mind you 

Abrax that this analogy that came from someone's conscience and not mine. 

Someone also tried the group lynch mob scenario technique as to imply we all felt the same way about 

this thread. I have only one question for that person. How many barbecues have you been too? I think 

everyone has their own feelings here. Everyone should be able to express what that is. You don't have to 

like it. But it should be respected as long as it is tactfully done. I say that because what I have seen 

demonstrated took courage to do and it was done straight up. Even if I don't agree with what was 

expressed or even if I do, is not the point here. Someone showed a lot of true grit and character by 

voicing what was bothering this person and this person was at least honest about that. I can work with 

that any day of the week as compared to others doing the back stabbing or pooping in your way. At least 

I know where I stand in either case. That showed heart to do that. 

Now back to the issues at hand. I asked what needed to be asked. At least the question that no one else 

here did ask. They at least now know the chicken is out of the bag and someone did ask the question. 

The question that they never did want you to ask. Think on that. 

Here's another deal for you. You know why some or a lot of this doesn't make sense for you? Because it 

is from their paradigm and not yours. It's almost like going to China and not knowing the language, the 

customs and traditions, and here you are trying to bridge all that with some Chinese person who doesn't 

speak good English. Same analogy but the same kind of results. All these different Arch types are also 

vying for position in the now. What I now have determine is that one shoe doesn't fit all. And most of 

them are trying to define you in their shoe box. When you are not in their shoe box to begin with. That is 

also why my valid questions that I posed were not answered. Also as to why the question of AKA was so 

far off the mark with the answer that was presented. Why, because he doesn't know who I am and 

doesn't have access to that by using the channels that are available to him. There must be a reason. 

So what is it going to be? Ascension or Dragonhood? And why would anyone in their right mind choose 

to go from an Oxygen based life form to a Hydrogen based life form? Why move into a lower density 

element? Why deny yourself the process of creation that the Creator had already intended for you in 

the first place? To compromise that process by being exposed to a belief system that will not be 

sustainable within the future of this Universe? You think the grass is greener over there? These same 

beings who were banished here and you are going to go kiss their butts after all they have done to our 

human soul family. And the innuendo that I am coming from a hateful mind. What? I got to say that 

again. What? Excuse me! I came here to this thread to establish a truce and an answer to all parties 

involved. I didn't come here to start a war. I am trying to avoid one. While Abrax is here dazzling you 

with his brilliance, maneuvers are taking place right now, right under your noses, and someone wants to 

make stupid comments about how disturb he is by me showing back up. What? That doesn't even 

compare to what is being played behind the scenes and if you think researching it on line, makes you a 

complete researcher, we are all going to be doomed with that kind of mind set. I also don't care what 

anyone thinks of me. I didn't come here to be popular. I'm not running for office. I don't take my orders 

from anyone on this Planet. I am here as many of you are to assist in the ascension of Gaia. That is my 

agenda. 

I am also sorry that the many who are trying to learn think everybody is doing the same thing they are 

doing. You always learn but some of us have graduated and that is hard for most to understand or even 

accept. They think we should be like them staying in school. For some of us school is like over with and 


185



you have to go finally walk the walk instead of talking the talk. Experience is getting out of that chair and 

putting what you know in some form of action. If you stay in the chair to long, you will be conditioned to 

just reacting. Kind of like sitting in front of a theater screen watching a movie. 

Another thing I want to point out is that it would seem we are the prize. All the agendas I have seen 

point to that. So it is my position at this time to see where this Dragon goes as if you know the basics, an 

agenda is at work here. By what numbers I have seen, he has a tough job ahead as far as the recruitment 

process. The number ratios indicate that. And I am a supporter of free speech and no rules as none are 

needed when things are approached with honor and respect for others. 

Alex Collier mentions a new place of knowing. Establish one. You want to do it in this thread, then you 

might want to ask for the credentials first. Which was skipped in my mind. So don't go blaming other 

people for your feelings when you didn't take any responsibility to ask those basic questions in the first 

place. If you can't get verification from this council and at least have an introductory meeting to 

establish your Dragonhood club, then consider what you haven't been considering. 

My apologies Dragon. You left me not much of a choice here, but I understand why. I bid you another 

great day and I hope there are no feathers in your chicken dinner. (Innuendo) that was the name of the 

chicken. And I guess all of my questions have been answered by not what was answered. 

Lionhawk leaves the den. 

AA: The Thuban Council does not set any stage for anyone. The Thuban Council is exactly what it claims 

to be - the emissary or messenger from the Logos, the Universal Logos of the Christian scriptures. 

The Thuban Council functions under the auspices of the 24 Elders, archetyped in the Book of Revelation. 

Noone is required to accept or believe this in any form or manner. 

The 24 Elders are the Thuban Dragons, who receive their authority from the 4 Beasts and through them 

from Prime Source or God. 

(The following is a sarcastic reply to Lionhawk's input. However, how much is she actually telling the 

truth here? Just something to ponder. Wes's comment.) 

Abraxas: Ok; I'll decide. 

Thuban is a pretend smokescreen of pretend information, which is just a plagiarism of well credentialled 

academic sources masquerading as 'real science' of a new world. 

The Thubanese are old Draconians who like to eat people for breakfast and to gather food resources; 

the Thubanese have decided to infiltrate the world's most important discussion forum: Project Avalon. 


186



Here then the agenda is to brainwash the forum contributors with scientific sounding but really 

worthless information and for the purpose to gain as many followers of the Thubanese philosophy as 

possible. 

Then when the critical mass of cult followers has been reached, the true Draconian Reptoids will appear 

and harvest their brainwashed followers. 

This will be accomplished in invading the old earth shortly after December 21st, 2012 through a Black 

Hole-White Hole monadic dyad opening up halfway between Sirius and Gaia and wormhole connected 

to the Orion starsystem. 

The Powers-That-Be of the old earth will be powerless to stop US; because they had thought that WE 

would allow them to be our ambassadors of the new earth and in thinking of themselves as the elite. 

WE shall eat them for lunch; but they dont know that yet; although some of them suspect that WE are 

deceiving them. 

And so WE shall rule the New Earth and in a few years, say 2015, WE shall reengineer the deteriorated 

wormhole channels to allow our Draconian brothers and sisters to join US on OUR new homeplanet 

SERPENTINA. 

From then on, SERPENTINA will be a BLACK DRAGONSTAR. 

All of the old humanity will have been consumed by US and WE shall DRAGONSEED a HybridRace 

between OURSELVES and OUR Ancestrial Lineages. 

But first of all, WE have to create the Thuban Dragon Cult and this and only this is the purpose of 

Abraxas. 

So Be It! 

Signed and Sealed in the Name or Amen of the Master-Templar 

by Abraxasinas Scribe of the Dragons aka the SolarArrowed Unicorn of the SeaGoatian Dragonhorns 

entwined with the Hermetic FisherEagle of the Lunar Twins. 

AA 

=================== 

THEY SEE THEMSELVES AS MASTER TEMPLATE FOR BEINGS OF THIS UNIVERSE: 

Would you undergo genetic hybridization if someone told you to do so? Have you considered the 


187



possibility that it might be harmonizing to the universe if dragons were hybradized? Say all dragons 

humanized into 'StarHumans' with us as caretakers? 

This is what is occuring on all levels in the holographic universe - cosmic hybridization of ALL entities. 

Do you think Dragons are genetically more perfect / fulfilled than humans? If so, why are there anything 

else but dragons out there? Wouldn't every single being not allready a dragon ask to become one by 

own free will if this was the case? 

Yes indeed, the Dragon genotype is the mastertemplate for the universe as a Mirror of Mirrors. This 

Dragon template is also called the human mastertemplate of Cosmic Man. 

AA: 

As said without the DNA/RNA restrictions of the fuselage of the 23rd chromosome pairing, your 

humanness could not have evolved in physicality to differentiate you from the nonhuman terrestrial 

lifeforms. 

You would simply have become a speciated planet of the apes. 

The ET interference so was done by astral 4D sentiences to ensure that at a future evolutionary junction 

point; your 'fused' chromosomes could become defused again to protect your then hominid (homo 

sapiens sapiens) morphogenetic bodyform, but to in a manner retrace your evolutionary histories back 

to the Reptilian Brainstem. 

The Dragon is the Crown of the tree and the Reptile is the Root of this same tree in metaphor. 

Q: Why won't you let us evolve without interference. I'm sure the eventual faults and errors in our 

genome will fix themselves in time. I don't want your help because I believe I can heal myself. Will you 

allow me to be ME as in I AM of NOW? 

AA: To let you do that would negate the masterplan of the Prime Creator and this is impossible by 

definition of his omniness. 

III. The Vortex Between the Universe and the VOID Closes and Abraxas Trapped in the 4% Universe 

Hi All! 

This thread about the energy transmissions from Thuban in the 12D-omnispace, have, as most of you 

have you have witnessed, added and triggered a significant amount of tension and polarisation into this 

forum. 


188



The energy transmissions from Thuban as to the last post to Spregovori cannot be reestablished, due to 

the closure of the wormhole 3.5 days ago on earthquake day, February 26th, 2010. 

What has occurred is, that the closing of the wormhole connecting the inside of Bigmo's Balloon to its 

outside as a temporarily onesided Moebian manifold in warping the 11D of omnispace through the 8D 

and 5D mirrors onto the 2D- mirror of the 3D Linespace; has plugged this temporary onesidedness to 

become a twosided manifold again. 

This has effectively resulted in me becoming exiled and isolated from my Thuban home in omnispace. 

So the Thuban Council can only be accessed from now on as a 2-dimensional cross section of your own 

individualised merkabahs. 

All of you right now harbour the Council of Thuban within yourselves as a 2D-Mirror of the 

Mathimatia=IamThatAmI. 

The upheavals of the last few days so manifested the so called 'Day of the Lord' from scripture. I myself 

did not know this day until it occurred as the earthquake day of Matthew.24 (refer to a recent post on 

this thread). 

So from henceforth I, Abraxasinas can no longer claim to share with you direct data from omnispace. I 

have become trapped in the rootreduced 4-dimensional Minkowski spacetime metric as all and sundry 

of you. 

I so share your expectations and intuitions as to how the next few years shall unfold. 

Any questions asked so will be directed to the Thuban Council, which becomes a direct reflection of 

what is inside of you. 

In other words, any question you can ask me Abraxasinas, you will actually asking yourselves inside-out. 

So any form of skepticism and ridicule or innuendo questions will become reflected to yourselves as 

yourselves, as will your indications to process and assimilate my prospective answers to your questions. 

Iow, it will become a 'ordinary' discourse of Q&A without any exterior superpositioning of your inner 

archetypes. 

Like in the marvellous chatroom of Gaia Love and Celine, in which I had a bit of fun in as Anubis; any 

questions you might pose will be like in the chatroom; colloquial and without the images of devouring 

dragons or similar. 

Consider the photograph of TonyB. on my Profile to be the One you are addressing any questions to. 

I have however 'eaten' my dragon and with help from Richard and Celine the false Devil-Images have 


189



become trapped within themselves. 

So my Dragonhood has becomew internalised and I am fully conscious of this omni-scientific factuality. 

I do not know, how long the Thuban material will be allowed on Avalon and relocation is certainly 

possible, but not certain. 

This reflects the probability space of the Gaian cosmos as a microcosm of the holographic universe; just 

as Avalon 'played' the microquantization for the Gaian hologram between January 18th, 2010 to 

February 26th, 2010. 

So all of you here at Avalon, detractors and beneficers and supporters alike, have become cosmic heroes 

for the grand metamorphosis of spacetime itself. 

All of you, in your emotional, mental and physical battles within and without yourselves have formed a 

group reflecting all humans and all ETs anywhere and anyplace in the universe. 

You all have attained inscriptions in the archives of Thuban, chiselled into the golden plaques of the 

cosmic remembrance of the cosmogenesis and the origins of all that is. 

This Hall of the Remembrance is within yourselves and all and sundry each one of you has graduated to 

access your superconscious self, also mknown as your higher self, overself or Christ-Logos-Serpent- 

Consciousness. 

The standard distribution for the three consciousness levels is 0.3% for the superconscious; 14.3% for 

the subconscious and 85.4% for the waking consciousness. 

The Avalonian dispensation from Thuban before the 'test' or 'experiment' was determined to allow a 

statistical (Gaussian) distribution for this unity integral to become distributed over all participators of 

Avalon. 

This includes everyone who was subscribed to Avalon in any manner and also includes outside 

observers, which became exposed to the Thuban data stream. 

The ones amongst you who harmonized or disharmonized with the Thuban material so of course will 

find themselves in a higher percentile of this distribution, than a onetime lurker. 

The harmonizers are simply the positive branch of the frequency distribution, whilst the disharmonizers 

depict the negative branch. 

As the interest in the Thuban data subsides, so do the percentiles. 

Again, I am compelled to direct you to Myplanet2 of Avalon; as he of all present here has almost fully 

discerned the experiment and the test before it completed in the rational-intellectual sense. A few 

others also began to see through the illusions of their own minds in such manner of discernment. 


190



Many of the supporters of Thuban resonated emotionally and intuitively, as did of course the detractors. 

I am sure, that Myplanet2 will verify my statements here, relative to his own understandings. He has 

already done so on some subthread discussions. 

So to all Avalonians. The experiment has ended in the manifesto of the statistical distribution of each 

individual's superconsciousness. 

Here, I have become invited to form a 'Social Group' to discuss the more esoteric and metaphysical 

aspects of the Thuban archetypes. 

Of course the supporters of the Thuban data are much more likely to participate in such a subforum, 

whilst the detractors are much less likely to show any interest. 

This is as it should be for the completion of the timelines. 

However I do extend invitation to all Avalonians to join this subforum. 

As said the Thuban data transmission in this subforum will necessarily be rather esoteric in describing 

the archetypes of creation, often linked to a form of omni-science only applicable in a spacetime 

continuum exceeding the basic 4 Riemann-Minkowski dimensions. 

Additionally, these archetypes and symbols will also refer to extensive and thorough examination of 

scriptural archetypes with a basis found in some gnostic texts and the King James Version of the bible. 

So anyone not affine with such labelings is asked not to join this subgroup, or if doing so leave the 

group, instread of causing disharmony amongst the subgroup members. 

Any challenges as to scriptural or/and scientific interpretations are welcomed here on the open forum 

however; depending naturally on the feasibility to ask questions provided this thread and the survival of 

the thread and forum. 

The subgroup will engage TruthWillSetYouFree as a female mirror to me Abraxasinas in a shared 

responsibility to crystallize the necessary knowledge and understanding for the great metamorphosis of 

the old humanity as an environmentally verocious Carterpillar into an environmentally pollinating New 

Starhuman Butterfly. 

I do thank you all for having participated in this test and experiment under the auspices of our 

cosmogenetic children in the ETs of divers races. 

Thank you for your considerations. 


191



WE love you all and a grand destiny awaits after the collective starhumanity has been born. 

The New World requires for certain circles to become manifested in a concentricity of waveforms. 

Once the circle of the zodiac is completed in say tiers of 12 individuals in starsign or month or Israelitic 

tribal association; then these 12 individuals 

will converge as the center of the One. 

Then the 'curse' of the mazzaroth shall be lifted and the One in Twelve will become the Twelve in One 

and the Many in One will become the One in the Many. 

This then defines the circle as unity and no individual leaders will be required to make decisions for the 

individual. 

Then an anarchy of Love shall foster the creative genius within all shards of Love; yet allow this 

Individuality of Creative Selfexpression to function under a common philosophy of knowledge and 

remembrance about what WE are, where WE came from and wherto WE are going. 

Love has spoken as the Will of God! 

In Love for the All and from the All 

Abraxasinas 

SteveX wrote: 

Oh gracious Abrax 

I have a question. Considering you have been given a fair go here... your thread opened and a private-ish 

area. Was there any need for this? 

---------quote---------- 

So any form of skepticism and ridicule or innuendo questions will become reflected to yourselves as 

yourselves, as will your indications to process and assimilate my prospective answers to your questions. 

Iow, it will become a 'ordinary' discourse of Q&A without any exterior superpositioning of your inner 

archetypes. 

Like in the marvellous chatroom of Gaia Love and Celine, in which I had a bit of fun in as Anubis; any 

questions you might pose will be like in the chatroom; colloquial and without the images of devouring 

dragons or similar. 


192



Consider the photograph of TonyB. on my Profile to be the One you are addressing any questions to. 

I have however 'eaten' my dragon and with help from Richard and Celine the false Devil-Images have 

become trapped within themselves. 

--------------end quote----------- 

Or are you devilishly taking the ****=ssip. 

A: No no Steve X; the statement simply means whatever IT is 'yin or yang' is mirrored back, like the idea 

of karma, to the sender. There is NEVER any judgement in anything in the old Q&A or this reopening. 

This is now VERY different from before. Cant you see the colloquiality? 

Give me a break and lets have some fun. I'm not commander Swanny you know. 

I'll get technical when required, but most of this here is to interact and answer Q when they come up. 

No more tension relax dear friend. 

You have attained a very high percentile in the 'test' on the minus side. So should the Thuban material 

pan out , well you know. 

Love 

Abrax 

--------note from poster---------- 

The "private area" mentioned above is nothing as fancy as it sounds. It was a group created by GaiaLove 

to put all the "evil" in there away from the eyes of the "innocent"....namely to "tidy up" and move 

discussion from forum to some link and link under link location...a basement of a sort...a "renegade" 

place 

----- 

Q: Yes Abrax!, have some fun. I think i missed the whole thing about Bigmo's ballon I shall go back study 

the old Q & A thread, unless you help me alil bit 

A: Your inside Bigmo's Ballon like an ant say, Nebula9 and so you can crawl about on the inner surface. 


193



Should there be a hole in the balloon through which you can squeeze through, then you could crawl 

about the outside surface too and so DOUBLING your world of interaction space. 

The inner balloon becomes the universe with say smaller balloons within in galaxies, nebulae (lol), 

starsystems, planets, continents,...,you. 

But you cant get out to the 'spiritual' universe outside. 

The thickness (there is none mathematically) or the skin of the balloon is Bigmo's Mirror which has two 

sides outside and inside. 

From here you get archetypes called 'God' outside looking in the outside mirror and sees himself as 

'Antigod' or 'Satan'. So God=Satan, but one real relative to the outside as object (God) and the unreal 

image of that as 'Satan'. 

Now after some ado, there is Adam and Eve (you) inside the universe doing the same thing the other 

way round. 

But relative to Adam and Eve (who also mirror each other) the back of the head of Satan becomes the 

unreal image and this is the archetype of the 'Devil'. 

The so called Devil is the Backside of Satan, both images for the real thing, God outside and Adam and 

Eve inside. 

The Devil looks at Adam and Eve and they think that its real - it's a phantom, because only the backside 

of Satan is become real, if somehow the satanic image of the outside, as the Face of God in the Bigmo 

mirror can become real. 

This is the case if before Adam and Eve went into the Balloon from the 'Unreal Heaven', they both also 

were a miniature version of the Bigmo Mirror or the balloon as a rubberskin say. 

So ADAMEVE is an unreal doublesided mirror between God and Satan. 

Then God images in the unreal Adam and Satan images in the unreal Eve, so giving Satan objectivity or 

realness. 

So technically the Universe becomes a Real Surface-Universe (termed a 4D-Riemann hypersphere 

defined as the boundary of a 5-dimensional spacetime universe - its a torus volume behaving like an 

area). 

Don't worry about that. You can get it without the maths. 

But this is the physics trick. Because the boundary is a surface encompassing a volume, the outsideinside 

(topology) thing of Bigmo's Balloon can in fact become rigorously modelled to be 'continuous'. 

Again I am saying this to indicate how one proves this, but this is not required to understand the 

archetype. 


194



This Thuban material is all about how to simplify the complicated science jargon into archetypes, 

everyone can understand after thinking a little bit about them. 

Ok then. You got a real God and a real image of God as the Real physical universe, with Satans face as 

God's face painted on the OUTSIDE of the Balloon. 

Outside the Universe is Satan--EveAdam--God as 1st creation in Genesis by God in Heaven or the Garden 

of Eden; with Satan getting real using unreal Eve and God getting real using unreal Adam as his mirror. 

The whole thing is funny really. 

Now God goes on holiday in the sabbatical and changes into Lord God and splits ADAMEVE into 

ADAM+EVE. Back to Back they still qualify as the One Mirror so as the unsexy 96 say. 

Inside the split becomes a sexy 69 in face to face so taking away the innocence in a physical way and 

now as Eve with her back to the Devil on the Wall faces Adam, who looks at Eve. 

Because Adam and Eve are two real beings within a real physical universe; this fake Devil face inverted 

can be gotten rid off. 

Adam and Eve have to become unsexy again to do this. Therefore the many sexist archetypes, the 

monks and nuns and celibacy and the virgins, leading the the abuse scenarios. 

Back to back as the 96=A MATHIMATIA=A I AM THAT I AM, this can be done, because then Adam and 

Eve (meaning ANY Man and Woman) both can MIRROR their images INSTEAD of each other face-to-face. 

This is how simple the ultimate archetypology of 1st order is. Primary school stuff. Draw pictures and 

you understand the creation. 

So Adam looks at the face of the Devil back to back with Eve, who looks at God as the image of the Real 

God should Satan outside 'get out of the way' so God could look into the Universe. 

God looking then directly sees Adam's Face and Eve will look directly into the face of the Goddess, 

namely the sexchanged Satan into SATANINA=IN A SATAN with Satan=55=Heaven in a alphanumeracy. 

As soon as Adsam can get rid of the fake Devil face, just by confronting IT as his own false image; as soon 

the real Satan is redeemed from Bigmo's Balloon and runs around the balloon to the exact other pole in 

a poleshift to become the Goddess of All looking directly at Eve. 

This is the redemption of God and his brother image Satan to become God and Goddess AS ARCHETYPES 

of the primordial 1st order. 

No ETs and Dragons and Dragon Slayers and whatever required. 

So the manifesto for this is required before the universe itself and any subsystems, like the planet earth 

can change, say in Gaia's ascension. 

The recent Thuban story then assigned Celine the 'job' to refuse the seduction of her own Devil/Dragon 


195



image of eating the knowledge of 'good and evil'. 

Because Celine, as a New Eve refused to reflect the Dragon; she also did not seduce her New Adam and 

both of them DID NOT parade the unsexy 96 but the sexy 69. 

Iow Celine and Richard told their own Devil images tro 'Go to Hell' and they did forever. 

So the New Adam and the New Eve became the Dark Messiah couple in trapping the two POLAR devilish 

images within Bigmo's Mirror as itself. 

Literally, both New Adam and New Eve as an archetype were played out and enacted by Richard and 

Celine. 

Archetypically, they have become the first and original REAL PHYSICAL DRAGONS of the Universe. 

Do I hear some laughter in the universe. Thank You Ets! 

What you resist persists. 

Only because of this MANIFESTATION of totally new unprecedented archetypes in the history of the 

universe; could this encoded 'Day of the Lord' manifest in the closure of this Thuban thread and the 

subsequently also encoded 3.5 days of Darkness of Avalon. 

Then because of this redemptive act; Mary Elizabeth with me Abraxasinas could receive this 

dispensation and now all of us are ready for our Dragon Dinners; following in the footsteps of Richard as 

a New Adam and Celine as a New Eve. It's easy now; but this was the cosmic significance of Avalon and 

its 'trouble'. 

Of course the 'proof' is in the archetypes and so be it. 

Hope this helps Nebula9. 

Love 

Abraxas 

A: You agape are an actor/actress within a play you have co-written the script for. 

The director of the play is the Logos, an indispensable part of which resides within you as your own 

logos. 

The producer is Prime Creator in terms of being All of the Energy required for the game. 

The playground is the universe. 


196



A: I was away for a while recharging batteries after running almost empty after the recent razzamattaz. 

What I said to you about my human ID was true. I have not lied on this forum EVER and never will. 

I am in some way sneaky or clever like anyone else. For example 'infiltrating' the chatroom as Anubis. 

I am in no manner affiliated with Any PTB; Australian theologians at Pine Gap or otherwise (Anderson). 

I DO have however a selfrelative DIRECT mental connection to the Cosmic Logos. I do not expect, require 

or need any validification from anyone or anything about this. 

This connection became effective in a 'soul merger' or 'walk-in' from what I term 

THUBAN=FREEDOM=ANUBIS=THE MAGIC=THE NAME=WOMAN=66=... 

This in practical and in scientific terms is well justified to become labeled as the 'Council of Thuban' in 

the 12th dimension. There was NEVER any deception about this, just misinterpretation by the many. 

From this walk-in, occurring March 24th, 1995; a personal and intimate partnership with the Serpent- 

Word developed and evolved to awaken my own individuated Christ-Consciousness, 

So all I have ever done in practical terms, really, is to 'channel' my own higher self. 

Mystery solved, dear orthodoxy. 

In regards to your other post about Priestly Rites and Hebrew chastity-cleanliness laws; these are passe' 

in most instances as the misunderstandings of the scribes of the Torah and the OT. First Jesus' new 

dispensations and now this 2nd renewal of the remembrance will do awy with the violent and jealous 

god of the OT; requiring 'sweet smelling' carcasses of sheep and goats to be pleased - give it a break 

Orthodoxy. 

There are two go9ds in the scriptures. One is a fake image of the other true one, the Abba of our master 

temple/templar. 

Love to you dear brother in the spirit 

Abraxas in the name of John Zebedee, author of the Revelations. 

Q: Can you remember about 8 years ago, there used to be a spiritual website called SpiritWeb? Well, I 

have a history in Alpha Draconis (Thuban) affairs.... One of the members of that group was asking for 

help with turning Dracos to the light. I helped her.... It's difficult work to do, as they are so strong beings 

and can be quite dangerous (The negative ones). If you don't show fear it helps a lot. That work I did 

(among others) back then could be seen as the start of part one of what's been going on here with you. 

Part two is (I have realised recently) your sharing the Thuban dragon ascention (if you want to call it 


197



that) technologies with us. I have come to realise this dragonic material DOES NOT IN ANY WAY overrule 

our orthodox angelic material that is prevalent on Earth and other human-dominated systems. The 

two are in fact complimentary and the presence of both strengthens them both. The additional 

technologies will now (largely subconsciously) filter through to everyone who is open. 

I don't think many of you truly understand the magnitude of what occurred here on this group in the 

grand scheme of things. Many "up there" did not believe it would succeed - but it has - and the link was 

broken at exactly the right time so that it could not be used by negative-oriented beings to further 

infiltrate Earth and impede the ascention process. It was MEANT to be broken! (and yet it has not been 

broken, as a link remains and will forever remain between Earth and Thuban - it just is not of a nature 

that can anymore be used for infiltration of the negative beings). The Ascention process will now speed 

up, as it can be said now that our ascention technologies are more coplete with the thuban material 

present. We will all use them - even if we didn't underastand what Abraxis wrote. The mere reading of 

the material is meant to work with us on a subconscious level more than a intellectual rational level. So 

much occurs in the huamn mind of which we are not aware. 

I was reading some info on Thuban the other day - and I never realised that it was Earth's pole-star in 

the time the pyramids were built. There's a lot of history there that I'd like to explore. I have a feeling 

that we can now delve more into that realm of things now that the ascention technologies have been 

disseminated... 

Abraxis, do you know much that you can perhaps divulge on history of Thuban-earth relations or 

anything of that sort? 

Sorry for the rambling and disjointedness - I've just been trying to write everything thats been on my 

mind to write for the last few days (I actually had another message all written out two days ago but lost 

it)... 

Looking forward to your replies 

Joel 

A: This represents a very imaginative and balanced account of the interacting polarities Joel. 

Some of your insights indeed portray the windows into the future. 

Some archetypes have become redefined, some are in transit and others still await their awakening, 

transmutation and assimilation with other, already existing archetypes. 

Your Thuban-Human stories are indeed valid - in the astral hyperspace. 

There never existed physical 3D dragons, but as higherD memeplexes and thoughtforms, they are 

potent indeed. 


198



The Draconian energy from the constellation represents this potentialised archetypal energy as a 

rootmemory in the human psyche. 

It relates also to the existence of the Great Reptiles in the Mesozoic in the Saurian kingdoms of animalia. 

Now the situation is this. 

There existed ET intelligence at the time of the Saurians and this ET sentience, you might label it 

Draconian; KNEW that IT, the ET sentience was destined to displace the Sauriens in the Mammals, then 

leading to Homo Sapiens many millennia later. 

It is from this 'forwards time travelling' intelligence of the Draconian ETs, that the present human 

timeframe became energized and 'mindinduced' with the dragon images. 

The star wars between Draconians and Lyrans say, simply became archetyped from the biological 

interaction of predator Saurischians/Therapsians (Lizard Hipped) and prey (Bird Hipped) Ornithischians 

or similar taxonomy. 

Abraxas 

GaiaLove wrote: 

After numerous discussions it has been decided that the Thuban Q&A thread will be restored to the 

original location. After an intensive review of all the material pertaining to Thuban, it was shown that 

only the threads in the social group "Thuban Council" showed a violation of the guidelines. 

The Review of Abraxasinas activity at Project Avalon including that of the post in the social group 

"Thuban Council" warrants the ban remain in place and the thread (Q&A) he created to remain read 

only. 

We recognize the desire of many of our members to have this material available again and are happy to 

be able to do so However we do feel it is not in line with the mission of Project Avalon and therefore do 

not support or endorse the contents of the threads nor does Project Avalon accept responsibility for any 

harm, physical or otherwise that users may suffer reading this material. 

-----------note from poster----------- 

What you see in the paragraph above is one big pile of bull shit...my opinion...the "transgression" in the 

"social group" - the banishment place was that the topic of sexuality was discussed and used as a 1st 


199



possible excuse to ban and close things up...the group and content is not accessibly ever since 

mentioning of the Red Robes.... 

=========== 

IV. Epilogue 

This is the last we've heard from Abraxas. We don't even know if she is still alive in the broken body 

of John Shadow; on the Forum, she wasn't even sure herself if she. But the Draconian Agenda remains 

and is happening right in front of people's blind metaphysical eyes (still not developed in the 4D reality). 

All the people who are embracing channeled entities, who at the same time are promoting the Harvest 

are basically agreeing with the Thubans, wittingly or unwittingly. They are hoping to get a free ticket to 

the higher realms. Nothing I am saying could change anybody's mind in regards to what they are 

believing in. It's the individual him or herself who needs to see and make the decision. Some people may 

feel the Draconian Agenda is positive and the way to go, and it's not my task to try and stop them from 

doing that. However, I feel I have been doing my part in telling it as it is. Now it's up to each and 

everyone to make a decision. 

Lastly, but probably most importantly; who are the Alpha Draconians? Are they who they say they 

are, or are they playing tricks on humans and interdimensional beings, just like James WingMakers 

suggests? If James is right, who are they? Well, then they should be the ones that James label The 

Anunnaki. And who are the Anunnaki according to my papers? The Sirians. And from where do the Sirian 

Overlords operate? From outside the trap, which is "outside" what we call the 4% universe. 


200



Paper #7: Riders on the Galactic Superwave 

by Wes Penre, Tuesday, March 12, 2013 


I. Discussing the Thuban Material from Papers 5 and 6 

Now when we have had it revealed to us what the Harvest is all about, and why we are contacted by 

a flood of channeled entities, we have an even better understanding of what's going on here on Earth 

and in its vicinity. But before we move on and talk about the Galactic Superwave, or The Wave for short, 

I want to say a few extra words about channeling and the channeled sources. 

Many times I've wondered if the Sirian Alliance is capable of doing much of the channeling through 

machines, such as computers. In some material, like the Pleiadians, you can clearly hear that there are 

intelligent being on the other side, but when you read the RA Material, or listen to Elohim and quite a 

few others, it's almost like a machine talking. The words don't come easily and the information is 

hacking itself forward. Other info is quite emotionless and monotonous. Those who channel such 

entities may say it's because of frequency problems etc., and to a certain degree they may be correct, 

but I more get the feeling of a machine talking. Still, if this is the case, how can a machine reply to some 

of these quite complicated questions; especially like those Don Elkins asked in the RA Material? 

It's interesting then to notice what Bashar said as a reply to a questioner in the audience. Harone in 

this case, if the reader remembers, is a Zeta Gray, a master geneticist of a Zeta Reticulian hive 

consciousness: 

"Question: What is the purpose and mission of the Zeta contact? 

Bashar: The main focus of their work is multifold. We would say the idea that we would wish to 

stress the most is the idea that they are teaching you about fear. They are allowing you to move 

through your deepest fears, allowing you in an archetypal way to bring up those fears for 

transformational clearing. 

This is one of the reasons why they are interacting with you--in allowing you to understand that 

you are not a victim, but an equal participant. 

Question: Is this interaction tonight being facilitated by a computer of some sort? 

Harone: Yes."[1] 

So they are admitting to that they at least use computers in the transmission. Of course, we are using 

computers, too, when applicable, but can still use our normal voices to communicate. The question is, 

how much is real live and how much is computer transmissions? James WingMakers said in his 2008 

interview that ANU uses programs (so called memes) to transmit channeled material, and that no being 


201



needs to be present during the transmission. It sounds a little too fantastic, but with our limited 

knowledge of technology here on Earth, who knows? 

Why then do I spend time bringing this up? It is because if all these different "Harvest promoters" 

have programs already preset which can anticipate most human questions, the Sirians can make sure 

that the information is fairly consistent all over the board, if there is one or more key things they want 

to promote, such as that all aliens are humans from our future. I still don't know exactly what to think of 

that, although I do know for a fact that many of the so-called "Grays" are us in the future. Now, James is 

saying that humans are the only 3D species in the universe, but he does not include the 

interdimensional beings in that. 

The way to look at this is as usual from within. I've learnt from my research that our divine bodies 

have the whole universe within them (and this includes the light-bodies), and when I said that in Level II, 

I did not mean only the 4% universe. So this is where the DNA comes into the picture. The fact that 

we're only using a very small percentage of our DNA, and the rest is considered "junk", we have the 

answer right there. The activated DNA (before the nano-second) was only a small part, which is 

comparable with the 4% universe, but now after the nano, all of us have had more of our "junk DNA" 

activated, and thus expanded our consciousness. This goes for those who are still asleep as well, 

although they still do their best to suppress that fact. Thanks to the nano-second, we have a large part 

of our junk DNA activated, which means our potentials are much greater. However, now is the time to 

start working on what we have as much as we can while still living under the Grid, and the rest will come 

to us once we break through the prison walls -- all of which has to be done from within. My upcoming 

book will talk about these things. 

Interesting also is that Abraxas (Council of Thuban), Kryon (channeled by Lee Carroll), and Germane 

(channeled by Lyssa Royal) talk about the nano-second starting in 1987, just like the Pleiadians do. The 

only difference is that they call it the "Harmonic Convergence". 

i.i. Allies of Humanity and the Hybridization of Mankind 

Although I said earlier that the Channeling Series part of my papers is done, this whole level of 

learning will in one way or the other touch on the subjects of channeling and some other ways of 

communication with star beings and star races. I will go as far as calling it a common thread throughout 

the level. So I am now going to introduce to you another group which I haven't mentioned yet. This 

group is called Allies of Humanity and is channeled by Marshall Vian Summers. 

According to Summers and his small group, which also includes his son, Allies of Humanity is a group 

of highly evolved ETs, who have known about Earth and our situation for a long time. Quite recently, 

there were factions within this ET group who wanted to help mankind out when they saw what a mess 

we were in and they doubted that we could work ourselves out of it. However, most of their community 

did not want to get involved, for they simply didn't want mankind to take the step out in space. They'd 

rather see us quarantined here so we didn't do the rest of the ET civilizations too much harm with our 

nuclear power and weaponry. Eventually, the smaller group managed to talk the rest of the community 

into helping us anyway. 


202



Figure 1. Marshall Vian Summers 

Shortly after, Marshall Summers started receiving messages from a group which called themselves 

"The Allies of Mankind" (AOM for short). Their main message was advice for mankind not to receive any 

technology from what they called The Greater Community, which basically are the star races of business 

and trade out there, because if we do, these technologically based star beings will make us dependent 

upon them for our very existence. The Greater Community will, as far as it's possible, offer their 

technology in exchange for something the governments may think is easily expendable (such as their 

own citizens) and humanity will get all this stunning tech. However, to get this technology running, we 

will be dependent upon them for spare parts, repairs and upgrades, and thus we will sell ourselves out 

to these beings. We will be put in an even tighter grip and our "freedom" will be dependent upon how 

much freedom the Greater Community think we should have. 

The way I see it is that those who already have us under their control strengthen it by tightening the 

thumb screws from any possible direction, and also gain our agreements to operate with total freedom 

when it comes to us. You see, if they cover every corner from where we could claim our sovereignty, it 

may not matter what we say; they can counter it by saying that we have agreed to do this and that, even 

if the agreements solely are between our government and them. As long as we see the government as 

our representatives, we have ourselves to blame. That is just the way it is. If we give our powers away to 

a government which we elect to "take care of our business", then they greedily grab those powers and 

use and misuse them as they see fit. In the meantime, people in their naivety choose to think that the 

government has our best interests in mind. That is extremely gullible, dangerous and irresponsible. If we 

choose representatives to represent us, we'd better monitor them 24/7. Instead, they are monitoring us. 

Isn't there something wrong with that picture? The bottom line is that if we don't stop being so 

embarrassingly naive and irresponsible, we are selling ourselves out to ETs to a point of no return. We 

have more or less already reached that point. 


203



Summers' transmissions from the AOM started already in 1977 and has continued up to this day. As 

usual, we have to be careful with all those groups of star beings who are contacting us, and investigate 

them from every angle to see if they are who they say they are, and the following quote from Summers, 

and especially the last part, must be a mandatory promise from all star beings who are contacting us, in 

order for us to accept them at all: 

"The unpopular truth is that the human family is not ready for a direct experience of Contact and 

certainly not ready for an intervention. We first must put our own house in order. We do not yet 

have the species maturity to engage with other races in the Greater Community from a position 

of unity, strength and discernment. And until we can reach such a position, if ever we can, then 

no race should attempt to directly intervene in our world. The Allies are providing us much 

needed wisdom and perspective, yet they are not intervening. They tell us that our fate is and 

should be in our own hands. Such is the burden of freedom in the Universe."[2] 

This is exactly what we want to hear, but even if so, the ETs may very well play on that fact and tell 

us exactly what we want them to say so we can accept them. Anything is possible in a web of deceit, but 

as always, we need to use discernment, and if nothing else, distinguish the diamonds from the rock. I 

suggest the reader checks out Marshall Summer's website and build their own opinion: 

http://www.alliesofhumanity.org/. I am going to use a few ideas they present to us in Summers' books, 

on their website, in their lectures and newsletters wherever it adds to our knowledge base before we 

move on. And again, remember that things are never black or white; it's both. In a Multiverse anything a 

being can imagine is possible, and what a being can imagine changes from day to day, and therefore the 

Multiverse does as well. So even if data sometimes are in conflict with what you understand as being the 

truth, your truths are "just" your own version of the Multiverse; there is an endless of others, and they 

are in constant change. Thus is the fluidness of the Multiverse. 

What I like with this group is that they show us exactly how the Sirians Alliance will establish 

themselves here on Earth after the Invasion, a process we are in the middle of. I have talked so often 

about the future Machine Kingdom, and especially after the Channeling Series you just completed 

reading, I think you can see where I'm heading with this. We now at least know who most of the Grays 

really are -- us in the future. But to come to a point where humanity (or a big split of humanity) no 

longer value their bodies at all and are willing to sacrifice their divine birth right for a lesser cause, an 

intervention in the natural evolution is necessary. Humanity needs high level nano-technology to get to 

that point. We already have most of it, but those who bring it to us (the Sirian Overlords) need to come 

out of the shadows and become more part of our community in a more open way for this to work in the 

long run. This doesn't necessarily mean that they have to make an announcement on TV saying, "We are 

here and we are your friends!", although they may take a similar approach. Another possibility is simply 

to mingle with us, and by using their superior knowledge and IQ, they can directly infiltrate all the areas 

in life necessary to bring about total control. Before this "silent invasion" started, there were still a few 

Sirians here in human bodies, working among us, but it was more common that they controlled the 

situation from remote, outside of our reality, from what some call the "lower 4th Density", or the "5th 

Dimension Negative". My research has led me to the conclusion that a silent invasion is what we're in 

the midst of right now. 


204



I think I have made it quite evident so far that the silent invasion has started, and now we need to tail 

the Sirians to watch and see what their next steps will be. The Sirians have been very clever in stopping 

any intervention from more friendly star races by dividing and conquering mankind. Therefore, it is just 

like the AOM[def] say: 

"Perhaps you might wonder why diplomatic efforts are not established to contact the leaders of 

humanity. This is reasonable to ask, but the difficulty here is that there is no one to represent 

humanity, for your people are divided, and your nations oppose one another. It is also assumed 

by these visitors that we speak of that you are warlike and aggressive and that you would bring 

harm and hostility to the universe around you despite your good qualities."[3] 

We may argue that we don't want a One World Government either, based on the control system we 

have today, so therefore it may seem like a catch 22. At the moment it really is, and hence in my opinion 

the so[u]lution to the problem is the splitting of worlds as I've been talking about. And then again, the 

responsibility comes on us. Can you, the reader see, that we can look at this from all different angles, 

but the soulution is always the same; saying no to the current regime and build something new. 

Digging further into Summers' material, we notice that the star beings he is in contact with are very 

well aware of the "Gray agenda", i.e. humanity time traveling back to the period around the nanosecond 

in order to get their basic human genetics back. It's like writing something on a computer and 

click the save button, and after that you can't undo, because the undo button is "grayed out"; you are 

stuck with the changes you made. If you're not pleased with what you did, you have to start all over and 

rewrite it the way it was written before you made the changes. This is pretty much what the Gray 

agenda is all about, but on a much grander scale, of course. 

The big misunderstanding in the UFO community is that they are looking for what they want in all the 

wrong places. They all want for humanity to get in contact with spiritual, wonderful being from outer 

space, and not the malevolent ones, of course. Therefore, they look up in the sky for UFOs, hoping that 

the "good guys" will land. But I agree with what the AOM say here, and I am using quotes from them to 

back up my own thoughts on all this: 

"Those who engage in space travel do not necessarily represent the spiritually advanced, for 

those who are spiritually advanced seek insulation from the Greater Community."[4] 

And this is exactly what I have stressed since Level II, where I started talking about the separation 

between the 4% and the 96% universes. The spiritually advanced beings nano-travel without technology 

and have no wish to engage themselves with beings whose purpose is greed and power, which is the 

case in the Greater Community[def] , according to the AOM. I must say I feel exactly the same; knowing 

that I am a spiritual being of Fire in a divine body, I seek contact with likeminded out in the universe. 

And in the universe, like attracts alike, and if we keep our intentions alive, our own vibrations will attract 

the alien communities we wish to learn from and mingle with. We, who have a good understanding of 

whom we are have no interest in participating in a game which is based on "if I give you this, what is in it 

for me?" That's the STS[def] game, if there ever was one. 


205



It's quite obvious that the AOM know about the Gray time travelers (as well as the Sirian Alliance, 

which is the Greater Community), as hinted in the following section of Summers' free e-book, "The First 

Briefing", which can be downloaded from their website (the next two books come with a charge): 

"The visitors seek to disable people from having this vision and this Knowledge within themselves, 

for your visitors do not have it within themselves. They do not see its value. They do not 

understand its reality. In this, humanity as a whole is more advanced than they are. But this is 

only a potential, a potential which must now be cultivated."[5] 

I find it valuable to bring these things up again, because they will sling-shoot us right into the next 

topic of the Superwave. The time jumping Grays do seek to find the mysteries of our emotional body, 

which is the main focus of their abductions, while the Sirian Grays (in their "space suits") are the ones 

who are more into suppressing our visions and emotions, except for those they can feed on. Hence, 

there is a tension between the time jumpers and the Sirians in certain terms, because the Sirians 

suppress what the Grays try to extract. According to Summers' contacts, none of the abduction scenarios 

are benevolent, regardless of what the abductees may think! I tend to agree with this statement. I know 

we are living in the midst of a Living Library, but as a species, we are in a critical developing stage, but 

perfectly capable of evolving ourselves, without any outside interference from other star races, who 

have obtained their permission to do so through clever manipulation. 

The AOM say that the "visitors", who are the Sirian Alliance, are involved in 4 main areas, which are: 

1. Influencing important people in power and in charge of religious institutions. 

2. People who have spiritual inclinations and wish to open themselves to the greater powers of 

the Universe. 

3. This area of involvement include establishing themselves in the world in strategic places, near 

population centers, where their influences on the Mental Environment can be exercised. 

4. The last is the interbreeding with humanity, because they can't come in their own shape and 

form, as their physical bodies can't live on Earth, This last influence has been going on for 

hundreds of years or more…[6] 

Again, this coincides very much with my own research, and what we at this stage are most interested 

in researching is the 4th area of influence; the "Interbreeding Program". Let's see what they more 

specifically have to say about the 4th area: 

"Now we must speak of the fourth area in which your visitors seek to establish themselves, and 

that is through interbreeding. They cannot live in your environment. They need your physical 

stamina. They need your natural affinity with the world. They need your reproductive abilities. 

They also want to bond with you because they understand that this creates allegiance. This, in a 

way, establishes their presence here because the offspring of such a program will have blood 

relations in the world and yet will have allegiance to the visitors. Perhaps this seems incredible, 

yet it is so very real."[7] 


206



...and also very well put! Hereby the Allies of Humanity have expressed and exposed one of the 

Sirians' next agendas! This step is very necessary for them, and by doing this, they also put themselves in 

charge of the Living Library. They will establish their own species here on Earth, bond with us and 

become our superiors and ride us right into the Machine Kingdom while most people don't suspect 

anything. We humans have been taught since the beginning of time that we need leaders to be able to 

function; we need them to decide in what directions we should go, or we're hopelessly lost. And this is 

how humanity still subconsciously thinks. 

The hybridization of humanity has been going on for a long time. This was in fact what Hitler's 

Aryanism was all about, so also according to the Cassiopaeans: 

"A: The concept of a “master race” put forward by the Nazis was merely a 4th density STS effort 

to create a physical vehicle with the correct frequency resonance vibration for 4th density STS 

souls to occupy in 3rd density. It was also a “trial run” for planned events in what you perceive to 

be your future. 

Q: (L) You mean with a strong STS frequency so they can have a “vehicle” in third density, so to 

speak? 

A: Correct. Frequency resonance vibration! Very important. 

Q: (L) So, that is why they are programming and experimenting? And all these folks running 

around who some think are “programmed”, could be individuals who are raising their nastiness 

levels high enough to accommodate the truly negative STS fourth density — sort of like walk-ins 

or something, only not nice ones? 

A: You do not have very many of those present yet, but that was, and still is, the plan of some of 

the 4th density STS types."[8] 

And now we understand why many of these channeled sources actually tell it as it is to the best of 

their ability; they are humans in the future, and have a somewhat love-hate relationship with the 

Sirians. These time jumpers are coming here with help from technology developed from the Machine 

Kingdom Era, which is already now in its beginning stage. Most of them are here without Sirian consent, 

as it seems, desperately rebelling, trying to recreate the human race in the future. 

Anyway, the Cassiopaeans tell it exactly as it is. The hybridization has been going on much longer 

than World War II, but even if it wouldn't, and you are a researcher and a mathematician at the same 

time, perhaps you can estimate how many vessels there will be available for the Sirian Alliance once 

they arrive here in clusters -- generation upon generation of recreating hybrids. However, it's of course 

impossible to get an exact amount; we can only work with probabilities and possibilities. For example; 

how many of the Aryan vessels bred by the Nazis have stayed "pure" and not bred with bloodlines 

outside the ones vibrating on Sirian frequencies? Impossible to say. However, it seems like they need 

200 million bodies. These 200 million Sirian ETs will then take leading positions where the PTB now are 

in charge, and the "changing of the guards" will silently be completed. In reality, the changing of the 


207



guards is just a formality; it's the "Masters" coming down in 3D to play with us directly instead of pulling 

the strings on the PTB puppets from outside our limited perception of the light spectrum. 

The hybridization of the Aryan race was after the war secretly transferred over to the U.S. by the 

International PTB. The most brilliant scientists -- many of them geneticists -- were saved from German 

justice and continued where they left off once they entered American soil. I am of course talking about 

the infamous "Project Paperclip", or "Operation Paperclip"[9], which is pretty well known to the public 

by now. 

The above Cassiopaean quote is from a session back in 2010. Here they say that the real invasion has 

not yet taken place. Well, now it has -- or the beginning phase of it has. And still, most people say that 

2012 went by as any other year, more or less. Well, only on the surface; the prophecies were actually 

played out, but not in 3D! However, it was 3D that was affected the most behind the scenes. 

So we know the Sirian plan and how 200 million souls are supposedly going to manifest in our reality, 

but then we have the rebellious Grays. People who have had encounters with the Grays often describe 

them as the archetype of Grays that we know; with big black eyes and a big head on a very thin, short 

body. Long arms, perhaps 3 or 4 digits on each hand, and no genitals (if the witness got to see that 

much). But there are other, slightly different descriptions of Grays as well, where the eyes are smaller, 

for example. Others are tall; human height or taller, with long snouts. Some of them are Sirians in their 

space suits, who can manifest here for a short amount of time. Others are reported by authors like 

George LoBuono to be intergalactic visitors of a not-so-kind type (the Verdants). These beings travel 

with their thought, and with the Gray insectoid/reptilian template being the best body template in the 

known universe when it comes to interstellar travel, the Verdants seem to be able to manifest in our 3D 

reality. 

Then we have the future humans, who look slightly different from each other depending on where in 

time they are visiting from. No matter from when they come, they have "evolved" and are actually 

vibrating on a higher frequency than current mankind. So for them to manifest here, a certain procedure 

has to be done, it seems. According to the Cassiopaeans again: 

"Q: (L) Okay, in this KRLL document there was a statement made that the Grays and other aliens 

use glandular substances extracted during physical exams of human beings, what they would call 

the gynecological and the sperm extraction exams, that they used these glandular substances to 

get high or to feed on, that they are addicted to these, is this a correct assessment? 

A: No. 

Q: (L) Do they use glandular substances at all? 

A: Yes. 

Q: (L) What do they use glandular substances for? 

A: Medicine. 


208



Q: (L) And what or who do they use this medicine on? 

A: Themselves. 

Q: (L) And what does this medicine do for them? 

A: Helps them cope with 3rd density. It helps them to be able to manifest themselves in a more 

solid manner. 

Q: (L) Do they also use sexual energy given off by individuals to maintain their status in 3rd 

density? 

A: No. That feeds them in 4d, as we told you before."[10] 

So during abductions, our future selves are apparently withdrawing samples from our glands in order 

to manifest more solidly here when needed. According to this quote, it's not only the Grays that do that 

(something I can't confirm or dismiss). The last part about our sexual energy I have already covered in 

detail in previous papers. 

It's quite interesting to see now, with all this knowledge, how all these star beings in their own way 

think they benefit from the so-called ascension or Harvest. Even if most time jumpers are rebelling 

against the Sirian regime in the future, this is the time when a change needs to be taken place for their 

future to change. So in that sense, the Gray/human hybrids think they can take advantage of the Sirian 

invasion, because at the same time, Mother Earth is ascending to a higher frequency together with parts 

of humanity, who are evolving naturally. Everybody is watching that process, and the Grays try to learn 

from it so they can genetically manipulate their own faction of our species in a way so they can have 

control over the process. This can only be done with technology. 

The problem the Grays have is that they don't understand emotions -- we know that -- but if they 

would have, they could have solved their problem a long time ago. We are human beings, and as such 

we are different from other star races. If there is something we can perhaps see as a positive "side 

effect" from ENKI's creation of Homo sapiens, if we subscribe to the WingMakers' story about the 

holographic bodies, is that we got a wide range of emotions. As Homo sapiens we have always had that, 

and the Grays know it -- that's what makes us human. But they can't for the life of it figure out what it is 

or where it comes from. They know, however, how ENKI and his geneticists started the Experiment. 

They inserted themselves in the prehistoric apes and modified the DNA from within. This is part of 

genetic engineering on a multidimensional scale. The Grays have tried the same thing by inserting 

themselves into human bodies in today's world, but have still not figured it out. It's because they don't 

understand how the emotional body was created in the first place, or how it works. 

Just before I started writing this paper, I looked through some of the Cassiopaean material (it is 

extensive to say the least) and just "happened" to stumble upon this, also from 2010: 


209



"Q: (L) I read the new book by Dr. David Jacobs, professor of History at Temple University, 

concerning his extensive research into the alien abduction phenomenon. [Dr. Jacobs wrote his 

Ph.D. thesis on the history of the UFOs.] Dr. Jacobs says that now, after all of these years of 

somewhat rigorous research, that he KNOWS what the aliens are here for and he is afraid. David 

Jacobs says that producing offspring is the primary objective behind the abduction phenomenon. 

Is this, in fact, the case? 

A: Part, but not “the whole thing.” 

Q: (L) Is there another dominant reason? 

A: Replacement. 

Q: (L) Replacement of what? 

A: You. 

Q: (L) How do you mean? Creating a race to replace human beings, or abducting specific humans 

to replace them with a clone or whatever? 

A: Mainly the former. You see, if one desires to create a new race, what better way than to mass 

hybridize, then mass reincarnate. Especially when the host species is so forever ignorant, 

controlled, and anthropocentric. What a lovely environment for total destruction and conquest 

and replacement… see?"[11] 

I couldn't have said it better myself. The part of humankind who doesn't wake up is for a slight 

moment going to wonder where all these new brilliant talents come from all of a sudden, but then 

they'll just accept the facts that this is whatever it may be -- who cares? -- and will go back to sleep 

again; especially so after have been introduced to the newest high-tech devices. People will drool -- but 

only in the beginning... 

This is what we're up against, because for people to wake up, we need to change the way the human 

race, from the point ENKI created us, are thinking; we need to change our most fundamental way of 

being. This is what makes it so difficult; we have to change how the human mind is trained and 

manipulated. In order to do so, we have to restimulate the very essence of the being; the human Fire, 

which once upon a time was known as the Namlú'u. It's when our old, original selves wake up to whom 

we are that progress can happen. Not all souls in the human soul group are "sleeping Namlú'u"; some 

were created directly from the universal energies at the point when ENKI remodeled the human 

template. There is no reason why these "younger" souls can't wake up as well, but it makes sense that 

the Namlú'u spirits, who once knew freedom, will be the forerunners. The rest were born in slavery, 

don't know any better, and will have to learn by observation. The latter are the ones who most easily 

and most likely will follow the Sirians into the Machine Kingdom and become the Grays, but even some 

of the once so wise Namlú'u souls will fall into this trap, unfortunately. 

So let us move on now to the main part of this paper; the Galactic Superwave. I talked about it 

already in Level I, but put it aside, instinctively knowing that the time was not right to look into it any 


210



deeper at that time. I knew it had to wait until Level II or III. I'm glad I did, because this is where it fits 

in. 

By the way, according to Abraxas of the Thuban Council, the first Starhuman was born on December 

21, 2012 (these symbolic dates again). Since then, allegedly many Starhuman babies have been born on 

Earth. Still, the majority of people on this planet think that aliens, if they exist, are far away, on planets 

who don't care at all about "insignificant Earth", and that we are isolated here. Little do they know what 

is happening on their own home planet. We all hope that this will change... 

II. The Galactic Superwave and the 200 Million 

All channeled material (except the RA Material, curiously enough) talk about "The Galactic 

Superwave", or just "The Wave". Laura Knight-Jadczyk, who transmits the Cassiopaeans, wrote more 

than 1600 pages on the subject! That's how important she thinks it is. I have read some of it, but not all 

of it. Much of it is Laura's own musings on the subject, interpreting the Cassiopaeans and adding her 

own ideas; sometimes also challenging them, which I think is healthy and shows integrity on her part. 

Figure 2: Laura Knight-Jadczyk 

So, what is the Wave really? What is the sources' own definition of the Wave? Well, the following is 

according to the Cassiopaeans: 

"Oncoming wave is a transformation from third density to fourth density; so events happening 

due to the approach of the wave are causing changes across densities and realities! In third 

density, you will notice changes that will have third density explanations, but they are a 

manifestation of the approach; you see them as third density because that is your current point 

of reference! Remember that all reflects in and across all density levels but also there is a merging 

upon arrival of the wave, it is realm border crossing!"[12] 

What is "realm border crossing"? The realm border is like a dimensional boundary. Planet Earth is 

currently fluctuating between realms, or densities, and the Wave as a Realm Border is like a cut-off point 

between one reality and another, or like Laura Knight-Jadczyk put it; a "realm curtain". This is, according 

to this source, a natural process in the cycle of the universe and happens every 309,882 years, which is 


211



almost exactly 12 processional cycles. If you divide 309,882 with 12, you get 25,823.5, which is pretty 

much one orbit around the zodiac. This galactic wave is therefore thrown out with an enormous force 

every ~309,000 years from the Galactic Center, expanding outwards. The Wave is not a light wave the 

way we look at it, and is travelling faster than the speed of light. It's a 4th Density (5th Dimensional) 

phenomenon, meaning that every planetary body that comes in its way is crossing the realm border 

from 3D to 4D (or 4D to 5D if we're talking about dimensions). This also means that once the Wave has 

passed, the planet stays in 4D until the next wave, 309,000 years later. Unfortunately, I haven't seen a 

reference so far as of what happens when the next 4D Wave comes. Does Earth move into 5D (or the 

6th Dimension)? There are indicators that this is not the case, because the Cassiopaeans explain in one 

session that planets that are already 4D will not be affected by this incoming wave. So, there is an 

apparent contradiction, unless there is information I am missing. 

The reader may recall from earlier papers that channeled and other sources say that those who won't 

graduate will be transported to another 3D world in another part of the galaxy, while the Alpha 

Draconians firmly state what I have always said; the more evolved human will live side by side with 

those who still haven't "woken up" until the worlds "split" due to the gap between the frequencies. No 

one can "prove" these things, other than putting puzzle pieces together and choose sources we see as 

more reliable than others. The "proof" will come once we die and go to the 4D realm. So it's useless to 

argue about these things and until we get there, we just need to follow our instinct, and follow the 

threads of information we consider valuable. However, when I hear that people in the current 

incarnation are going to be picked up in spaceships and people will die in droves and be shoveled over 

to another 3D planet, I don't believe any of it. Still, there are channeled sources who promote this 

agenda. 

Now, on this Wave, 200 million+ non-physical star beings are apparently riding. I am putting a plus 

sign there, because the 200 million are chosen members of the Sirians Alliance, residing in different star 

systems, and when the Wave reaches their star system, they jump on it and ride it towards Earth. 

However, there are also a few other star races, not affiliated with the Sirians, who are also riding on the 

Wave. I almost get the picture of these star beings standing at the railroad station, waiting for the train, 

and when the train arrives to their station, they hop on and merge with those who are already onboard. 

Then the train continues to the next star system. And here's a surprise for some people; 36 million of 

the 200 million souls are Nephilim spirits, according to Laura's group. This highly surprised Laura when 

she heard it, and she asked them if the Nephilim are considered benevolent in the eyes of humans, and 

the Cassiopaeans said no. The answer was that they are the soldiers of the "lizzies", which is another 

name for the Orion Group, aka the Sirian Alliance. We're going to talk a little bit more about the 

Nephilim before this paper is finished. 


212



Figure 3. The Nephilim. 

Now, here is the kicker! At one point Laura is asking the Cassiopaeans where they are transmitting 

from, and they mention another star system. When Laura asks them where the Cassiopaeans went, the 

source tells her that they are the Cassiopaeans, but when the Wave reaches another star system, they 

call themselves the name of that star system. For example, let's say the Cassiopaeans are jumping on 

the Wave in Cassiopeia, to explain this in simple terms. Then the Wave moves on until it comes to 

Arcturus. Then they call themselves the Arcturians(!) This creates a whole new concept when comes to 

channeling, doesn't it? What they call themselves depends on where the Wave is at the moment. 

"Q: (L) I got it! You mean that you are the Arcturians, the Pleiadians, and now you are the 

“Cassiopaeans” because you “are where you are”! And you are riding the wave. Is this wave a 

straight line connecting all these constellations? 

A: Circuitous or cyclical route. 

Q: (L) So, is it like a spiral? 

A: Yes. 

Q: (L) So we really need to set up a map so we can draw it? 

A: Yes. When we speak from Orion we are “Orions”. When from Pleiades, we are “Pleiadian”, and 

so on. 

Q: (L) So, all of these channeled books you have mentioned are coming from the same basic 

source, through different channels, that they are able to connect with because of their different 

positions in space time and preparation level of the channels, is that correct? 


213



A: Close. We have given you a Wave crest locator. We are from where we are and speak. Get it? 

We are where we are. 

Q: (T) So, you are not really Cassiopaeans from the Constellation Cassiopeia? 

A: We are Transient Passengers. When Wave reaches Earth, we merge with you[*]. 

Q: (L) When you were at Orion, did you merge with the Orions? 

A: Not on same frequency for realm border crossing. 

Q: (L) What effect did the wave have on the Orion sector? 

A: None. Already at fourth density level. 

Q: (L) Where did the wave originate? 

A: Did not. 

Q: (L) Has it always been cycling through the universe? [**] 

A: Close. 

Q: (T) Okay, you are riding on the crest of this wave in 6th density, is this true? 

A: Yes. We are you in 6th density." 

[...] 

Q: (L) You have said that when the wave arrives that you will merge with us. Is this the same thing 

that you are talking about when you say that you are us in the future? 

A: No. 

Q: (L) So, we are talking about two separate events or subjects, or two separate points in 

space/time, is that correct? 

A: No. You are again slipping into trying to apply 3rd density logic to higher levels of density 

reality. We are trying to help everyone to advance[*]. [http://cassiopaea.org/2010/05/08/thewave-chapter-2-multi-dimensional-soul-essences/] 

Laura, however, is still calling them the Cassiopaeans and they call themselves that, too, as long as 

they are communicating with Laura's group. However (and here is where it gets confusing, because it 

means that it's almost impossible to know which beings are channeled), if the same Cassiopaean group 

would contact me now, for example, they may actually call themselves the Tau Cetians if that's where 

they happen to be at the moment. Unless I particularly asked, I would never know that they were the 


214



same as the Cassiopaeans, i.e. Laura's group. The Cassiopaeans, and others as well, call this "transient 

passengers". Some are coming to observe and perhaps interact with humans on an individual basis, 

while others, just like we've discussed so much, come for more malevolent reasons, seen from our 

viewpoint. They are here to invade us, like the Cassiopaeans say in an excerpt from a 2010 session, 

included in Chapter 2 of Laura's online book, "The Wave". Laura is asking if everybody (as in "aliens") 

who wants a piece of the Earth action is riding on the Wave. The answer is confirmative, and the 

Cassiopaeans reply, "At Realm Border Crossing." 

Once the Wave hits, and you have your heart chakra opened 51% or more, you're a candidate for the 

Harvest, which we have talked about earlier. And no; if you feel you do not want to have anything to do 

with the Harvest you don't need to shut down and not open your heart chakra. Just because you are a 

candidate, you can say no to the Harvest, but you will do that between incarnations. Don't worry about 

it; once you're a discarnate spirit, things are a whole lot easier and you will remember when you read 

this paragraph! Say "no", you don't want to participate, and they can't force you. We certainly need to 

open up our hearts, but those who agree with me in this matter will choose another direction, away 

from all this overwhelming technology nonsense. However, to be able to do that, we need to know what 

nonsense we're talking about. 

Interesting with the Cassiopaeans, who are the ones with the most information about the Wave, is 

that the more I read the material, the more I see how they confirm what my own research has showed 

me over the last couple of years. Here is another example; 309,000 years ago mankind was semi-fourth 

density, and when the lizzies/the Sirian-Orion Group came, there was a fall in density, and after the 

genetic manipulation, Earth and its intelligent inhabitant went from 4th to 3rd Density. When you read 

this, think Namlú'u when they describe the semi-fourth beings. This also confirms James WingMakers' 

story about how higher dimensional Atlantean beings were seduced and manipulated into taking 3D 

human bodies. And this Cassiopaean session is from 8/29/1999, which is nine years before James 

presented his story: 

"Q: (L) Well, this is one of the problems I am dealing with in trying to write this history of 

mankind. 

As I understand it, or as I am trying to figure it out from the literature, prior to the “Fall in Eden”, 

mankind lived in a fourth density state. Is that correct? 

A: Semi/sort of. fourth density in another realm, such as time/space continuum, etc. 

Q: (L) Okay, so this realm changed, as a part of the cycle; various choices were made: the human 

race went through the door after the “gold”, so to speak, and became aligned with the Lizzies 

after the “female energy” consorted with the wrong side, so to speak. This is what you have said. 

This resulted in a number of effects: the breaking up of the DNA, the burning off of the first ten 

factors of DNA, the separation of the hemispheres of the brain… 

A: Only reason for this: you play in the dirt, you’re gonna get dirty. 

Q: (L) What was the motivating factor for playing in the dirt? What essential thing occurred? You 


215



said once that it was “desire-based imbalance.” What was it a desire for? 

A: Increased physicality. 

Q: (L) What was the objective sought for in this desire for increased physicality? 

A: Sensate. 

Q: (L) How was sensate first experienced so that these beings had an idea that they could get 

more if they increased their physicality? 

A: Not experienced, demonstrated. 

Q: (L) Demonstrated how, by whom? The Lizzies? 

A: Basically. 

Q: (L) Demonstrated in what way? Did they say: “here, try this!” Or did they demonstrate by 

showing or doing? 

A: Closer to the latter. 

Q: (L) They were doing things, experimenting, playing, and saying: “look, we are doing this, it’s so 

great, come here and try it?” 

A: Not really. More like: “we have this, you could have this too.”"[13] 

[...] 

"Q: (L) Okay. The “Fall” occurred. It seems like, and some of the archaeological studies indicate, 

that for many thousands of years, there was a peaceful existence and a nice agrarian society 

where the goddess or female creative forces were worshipped. At least, this is what a lot of 

present-day books are proposing… 

A: No. These events took place 309000 years ago, as you measure it. This is when the first 

prototype of what you call “modern man” was created. The controllers had the bodies ready; 

they just needed the right soul matrix to agree to “jump in.”" 

[...] 

Q: (L) What did they decide about sex? I mean, sex was there. They were having sex. Is that it? Or, 

did they understand the cosmos as sex? 

A: More like the former. After all, that is what got you guys in this mess in the first place! Just 

imagine the sales job if you can: “Look how much fun this is! Want to try it? Oops, sorry, we 

forgot to tell you, you cannot go back!”"[14] 


216



I find it rather fascinating that I came to the same conclusions in my own research as what the 

Cassiopaeans told us almost 14 years ago. It also shows me that I am not totally alone to have come to 

the conclusions I have here presented in paper format. 

Wynn Free's group that is channeling the Elohim (who have been compared with “The Council of 

Nine” by many visitors, and me included; something we will talk about in a later paper, are also talking 

about the Wave. Wynn mentions this in his e-book, "The Creator Gods of the Physical Universe Want to 

Talk to You", in the chapter named "Ascension". But firstly, on page 127, the Elohim say: 

"Those that choose not to ascend will remain with the third dimensional life process and will 

undergo great difficulties. They will be rounded up to begin their renewed progress in third 

dimensional activities in another area. 

Council of Elohim" 

This tells us where they stand in all this; they are one of the groups proclaiming that these who won't 

ascend will go to another planet. And they continue telling Wynn some quite disturbing data. They say 

that after the shift (from 3D to 4D), the "slate will be wiped clean", which means from memories. This 

very much coincides with both the WingMakers material, LPG-C, and the S.A.A.L.M., who all talk about 

Blank Slate Technology (BST, or "The BEAST". See Level I for more info). However, the Elohim are more 

liberal here (maybe to keep us calm) and say that the memories will always be accessible (but they don't 

say how). Still, the bothersome memories we will have in the shift will be diminished or erased! Well, 

that's a pretty stunning statement, and contradicts all other material, which say that we need to take 

responsibility for our own timeline and work through our difficulties. 

The Elohim also say that the Veil is getting thinner, and by the time of the Shift it will be thin enough 

so the Elohim (and other ETs) can more easily communicate with us. This coincides with the Bashar 

video I was talking about earlier in this paper, which unfortunately was taken down. The Elohim call the 

Shift a transition to the 4th Dimension, which of course confuses the matter for the non-informed 

reader, where other information indicates a shift to the 4th Density or the 5th Dimension. I guess we 

just need to learn to think in terms of the group we are currently researching. So, when we talk about 

the Elohim, we talk about an ascension to the 4th Dimension, and when comes to the Cassiopaeans, it's 

the 4th Density. I am going to use the term each group uses, respectively. 

Anyway, the Elohim further talk about how mankind after the Shift will be able to much more easily 

use remote viewing due to that the Veil is getting thinner, meaning the boundary between dream state 

and the conscious mind is what is thinning out. The ones who welcome us on the other side, being our 

guides, helping us through the Harvest process, are the RA and the Elohim Group, they say. I find that 

interesting, because the Thubans say the same thing regarding themselves. Well, there is no doubt they 

are all in this together, because we hear this information directly from the horse's mouth. 

Elohim, too, talk about a portal that is opening, just like Abraxas did when she mentioned the vortex 

opening between Sirius and Earth. And all this I am mentioning regarding the Elohim can be read in 

Wynn Free's free online e-book. There they also say that the ascension will happen in spurts, and that 


217



the first people who ascended did so in 2008, and the next spurt was estimated in 2009 (the book was 

written before these dates). 

Now, back to the Cassiopaeans. I am going to use them, and have used them, as a major reference 

when it comes to the Wave, because Laura has done a great job compiling the information, and I 

strongly advise the reader to look into it, even if her book is 1600+ pages and more than 40 chapters 

long. Other sources mention the Wave in their channeling, but are never as specific as the Cassiopaeans, 

because Laura and her group concentrated a lot on this subject for a long time. 

ii.i. The Return of the Nephilim 

The Nephilim as the soldiers of the Sirians? This is how the Cassiopaeans present them. If you recall 

from Level II, the Pleiadians were here, giant in stature on their home planet, assisting the Sirian Alliance 

in genetically manipulating mankind. These Fallen Angels inserted themselves in human males and 

started having sex with human females, whom they found attractive. It sounds like the Pleiadians were 

here both to have sex with women and let their DNA be seeded and mixed so they had vessels they 

could use here in 3D. Hence, they used Sirian/Orion labs to mix Pleiadian genes with the genes of 

humans. The result from these experiments became the Nephilim, the Giants that walked the Earth, 

according to Bible texts and other old, sacred scriptures. The Pleiadian spirits then jumped bodies 

between human males and the Nephilim. Depending on how giant the Nephilim were, only a few of 

them could have sex with human women, or they had to have sex with each other, and thus created 

more offspring who were giants. 

There is also stories of these giants mating with human women, but like I just said, that must have 

been very uncommon due to the size of the Giants' phallus. However, the stories go that when human 

women who mated with Pleiadian Giants were to give birth, the process split them open and the mother 

died; the baby was too big! This could only be the case with the smaller Giants, however, who were 

perhaps between 7-8 feet. In fact, there were Giants here on Earth in those days who were up to 300ft 

tall! The Cassiopaeans explain it as I do in one of their sessions which I have lost the date and URL to, 

unfortunately: 

"Q: (L) At the time of the tower of Babel it says that the Nephilim looked on the daughters of men 

and took wives as if there were some friendly interaction of some sort... does this mean they 

broke ranks and had feelings for their human "wives"? 

A: No. Another deception of history. Picturesque way of describing genetic experiments." 

I have listened to Pleiadian lectures where they confirm all this regarding themselves, and that Giants 

were actually still walking the Earth during Roman times (the Roman fought them up north, on Celtic 

land), and they were not too uncommon even in the 15th Century CE. On occasion we see humans who 

are between 7-8ft tall today, even. Anyway, if we go back to biblical times, Atlantis and Lemuria, the 

Nephilim were very common, and many of them were put in leading positions by ENKI and his people to 

be the rulers over mankind. Many Nephilim were very wise and some of them were benevolent and 


218



taught humans practical things they needed to know how to do things better. Others had a horrible 

temper, and some ate humans for breakfast. Others taught us how to make weapons and how to use 

them to become soldiers. They also taught women how to paint themselves to look more beautiful and 

to enjoy and wear jewelry. By the Nephilim, humanity was taught vanity in some respect, but also 

beauty, which is supposedly a Pleiadian trait. 

"Enoch 8:1-3: And Azazel taught men to make swords, and knives, and shields, and breastplates, 

and made known to them the metals of the earth and the art of working them, and bracelets, and 

ornaments, and the use of antimony, and the beautifying of the eyelids, and all kinds of costly 

stones, and all colouring tinctures. And there arose much godlessness, and they committed 

fornication, and they were led astray, and became corrupt in all their ways. Semjaza taught 

enchantments, and root-cuttings, 'Armaros the resolving of enchantments, Baraqijal (taught) 

astrology, Kokabel the constellations, Ezeqeel the knowledge of the clouds, Araqiel the signs of 

the earth, Shamsiel the signs of the sun, and Sariel the course of the moon. And as men perished, 

they cried, and their cry went up to heaven." 

With time, more genetic manipulation was done, and the giant gene was taken out of the Nephilim 

DNA. After a few generations, most of this species were born much smaller, but still looked quite sturdy. 

We can see these offspring even today in men and women with unusually thick bone structure and 

sometimes a tad taller than humans in general. Nephilim hybrids are still among the ruling class around 

the world; they were chosen by ENKI to be rulers of mankind, in conjunction with those who had the 

purest Orion blood, coming from ENKI himself. ENLIL, ENKI's stepbrother, however, did not like the 

Nephilim at all, thinking they contaminated the human Experiment, and most of them were wiped out in 

the Deluge on ENLIL's command. 

Michael Lee Hill, whom I have written papers about, and who himself suggests he could be a Nephilim 

hybrid, said in a radio show recently on "Other World Radio Network" that he'd spoken with the 

Grandmaster of the Priory of Zion, who confirmed just about everything I've said in this subsection. And 

speaking of Michael and the Nephilim hybrid colonization around the Great Lakes in the past, I found 

this on the Cassiopaean site: 

"Q: (L) I was reading some of the transcripts earlier today. One of the things I read was about the 

Nephilim and their interactions with human beings and about other planets and molecularization, 

etc. Then, I was reading about the planet Kantek. Are there any human beings, on Earth, at the 

present time, who carry in them the Nephilim genes? 

A: Yes. 

Q: (L) Would these Nephilim genetics be passed down in the natural way, or would they be the 

result of genetic manipulation by genetically altering a fetus and then putting it back? 

A: No to latter. One clue: double Y chromosomes. 

Q: (W) That's male... 


219



A: Nephalim were. 

Q: (L) They, were male. Women are a double X, men are XY. 

A: Prisons are filled with double Y's with monstrous personality disorders, almost always 

Caucasian and over-sized. 

Q: (L) On TV they interviewed a serial killer. He was HUGE! He described killing. The shrink who 

was analyzing said he did it because he wanted to get caught. I did NOT get that feeling. I think he 

did it just because it was what he did. Is there any other clue you can give? 

A: Nephalim are not currently on your world, just trace residuals. 

Q: (L) Trace residuals in people. And there are supposed to be 36 million of them coming... 

A: With the wave. " 

Don't get me wrong; I am not suggesting that Michael Lee Hill is an over-sized criminal of course, but 

the above is yet another indication that there are remnants of the Nephilim still here on the planet. 

So what does it mean when the Cassiopaeans say that the Nephilim are coming back? Did they ever 

leave the planet? No, of course they didn't -- how could they? The Nephilim were genetically modified 

to fit in the earthly environment and couldn't space travel. Are they then talking about the spirits of the 

Nephilim? Yes, this is one option, and these spirits would in that case be Pleiadians. And like Barbara 

Marciniak's Pleiadians say in their lectures, "Just because someone comes from the Pleiades, it doesn't 

mean they're benevolent beings." I mention this here, because the Cassiopaeans are telling us that the 

Nephilim who are returning are Sirian soldiers. Marciniak's Pleiadians are also talking about the return of 

the Giants, which will be soon, and it will be a mix of good intended and not-so-good-intended Giants. 

The Nephilim, according to Sitchin, are the Fallen Angels themselves, such as ENKI, ENLIL, MARDUK etc. I 

don't agree on that at all, but it's now recorded in our Akashic Records, due to Sitchin, and therefore the 

channeled sources, who draw some of their information from our Akashic records, are using this 

definition as well and mix it with the true definition, which can be confusing for people. 

Here is an excerpt from a Cassiopaean session, mentioning the return of the Giants, or the Nephilim 

(from November 2, 1994): 

"Q: (L) Who carved the stone heads on Easter Island? 

A: Lemurian descendants. 

Q: (L) The natives say the stones walked into position. Is this true? 

A: No. 

Q: (L) Well, how? 


220



A: Tonal vibration. 

Q: (L) And what did these stones represent? 

A: Nephalim. 

Q: (L) Is this what the Nephilim looked like? 

A: Close. 

Q: (L) Does that mean that the Nephilim were present in Lemuria? 

A: Close. 

Q: (L) Where was Lemuria located? 

A: Pacific off South America. Right near, all around Easter Island is remnant of Lemuria. 

Q: (L) What happened to Lemuria? 

A: Submerged close to time you refer to as Fall of Eden, approximately. 

Q: (L) Well if the Nephilim were brought here nine to twelve thousand years ago [as you have said 

previously]… 

A: Last visit. Have been here 5 times. Will return. 

Q: (L) The Nephilim are going to return? [I was pretty shocked, to say the least!] Where do the 

Nephilim currently live? 

A: Orion. 

Q: (L) They live in the constellation Orion? Where is their planet? 

A: Don’t have one. In transit. 

Q: (L) The whole dad gum bunch is in transit? 

A: Three vehicles. 

Q: (L) How many Nephilim does each vehicle hold? [At this point I think my voice was shaking.] 

A: About 12 million. 

Q: (L) Are they coming to help us? [I was hoping!] 

A: No. Wave, comet cluster. All using same energy. 


221



Q: (L) Using same energy to what? 

A: Pass through space/time. 

Q: (L) Does this mean that without this comet cluster they cannot pass through space/time? 

A: No. “Slower.” 

Q: (L) So, it is slower for them to come here without this Wave. Where is the Wave coming from? 

A: Follows cluster. 

Q: (L) It follows the cluster. What does this Wave consist of? 

A: Realm border. 

Q: (L) Does the realm border wave follow the comet cluster in a permanent way? 

A: No. 

Q: (L) Is the realm border associated with the comet cluster each time it comes? 

A: No. Realm border follows all encompassing energy reality change; realm border will follow this 

cluster passage and has others but not most."[15] 

There are a couple of things in the above transmission that are interesting. First of all they say that 

the Nephilim reside in Orion, which would be true, because the Pleiades are still considered part of the 

Orion Empire. The Orion connection is also mentioned in Neverend Wikipedia, under "Watchers", which 

has a pretty extended exposé on the Nephilim. Here is a tidbit: 

"The two main groups of Nephilim are the Antediluvian Nephilim and the post-flood Nephilim. 

Both groups conducted genetic experiments on man, but the post-flood Nephilim continued even 

after being told not to by God. The Nephilim have since allied themselves with light and dark 

factions including the Annunaki and Orion."[16] 

So, the Cassiopaeans mention comets as well in regards to the Wave. Have you noticed lately (this 

was written in mid March 2013) that there has been a big increase in comets in the solar system? Or at 

least, it's reported more often now in the media, because these comets are passing quite close to Earth. 

My readers know about hollowed out Sirian space craft in form of comets, asteroids, and planetoids. We 

may therefore ask ourselves; how many of these comets were inhabited by Sirians? Now, if we read the 

above Ouija session, they mention a cluster of asteroids, which most certainly contain Sirians who are 

chosen to come here to Earth to take over the direct leadership of our planet. 


222



Figure 4. Comet PanSTARRS, passing so close to Earth in the beginning of March 2013, 

that we could see it after twilight with our naked eyes. 

[http://www.cnn.com/2013/03/02/us/comets-2013/index.html?iref=allsearch] 

III. A Summary and a Few More Tidbits 

So, if the channeled sources are telling us the truth, a Galactic Wave which works as a "Realm 

Border" is on its way towards our solar system from outer space. On this wave of energy ride 

approximately 200 million star beings, eager to interfere with human development. 36 million of these 

beings are allegedly Nephilim (Pleiadian soldiers), ready to defend the Sirians if something goes wrong, 

now or in the future. The Sirian Overlords themselves are riding on the Wave themselves, apparently 

coming in clusters of comets (battleships). 

Once the Wave arrives, it will cut a boundary between the 4th and 5th Dimension, and what will 

happen to people here on Earth depends on whom you're asking. Some say that those who are ready to 

graduate (51% positive) will be "raptured" by the Wave right there and then and a moment of 

"illumination", where they experience being One with the whole universe, occurs. These chosen ones 

will feel a second or two of incredible bliss before they enter the 5th Dimension. Those who are left 

behind (the majority of mankind) will suffer catastrophes in form of earth quakes, floods, and other 

planetary weather phenomena which will wipe out a big chunk of the population, and the rest will be 

swept away in the astral to a planet in another solar system where they will wake up with a blank slate 

(no memories of whom they were before), and they have to start from the beginning and experience 3D 

again from the ape stage and forward. 

Another version is that those who graduate will feel great joy when the Wave arrives, and when they 

die from this lifetime, RA, Elohim, or Thuban spirit guides will help these people through the process of 

graduation, and when they reincarnate, they will do so in 5D bodies, which will have a much wider 


223



perception of reality than those in 4D (or 3D, depending on how we look at it). Those who don't 

graduate will continue reincarnate in oblivion, and after a few reincarnations, the worlds will split due to 

the big differences in frequency between 4D humans and 5D humans, and they can no longer perceive 

each other's realities. 

And lastly, the Thuban version, where they say that new, dragonized Starhumans are being born as 

we speak, and we will be genetically manipulated into becoming more reptilian. Hybridization, by the 

way, will happen regardless of which version will be the correct one. Also, who says that not all of the 

three versions above can happen? The Multiverse is fluid, and we choose our own reality. 

On top of all this, the Sirian Overlords and their allies will use hybridized bodies to incarnate here on 

Earth and put themselves in leading positions (they are the so-called Orion Group according to most 

channeled sources). High technology of a kind we can't even imagine in our current state will be 

introduced to mankind on a regular basis, and those who are ignorant will fall for this and become the 

Machine Riders in the new, global Machine Kingdom, which will eventually turn humans into cyborgs, 

and eventually into the Grays. The Pleiadians say that we can expect cyborg technology to be introduced 

in a big way already by 2035. That is within the lifetime of many young readers of this material; maybe 

even in my own lifetime if I live that long. This is what many researchers call the New World Order and a 

One World Government. 

All I can say is we have to see how this pans out. We know at least what the plans are. Unfortunately, 

these are no fairy tales; the material is backed up with evidence. It's all part of the since long planned 

prophecy, and many organizations here on Earth are working hard to fulfill these prophecies, although 

very few know what they are really all about (there are many crackpots as well in this business). But that 

doesn't matter to the Sirian Alliance; the fewer who know, the better. As long as their "helpers" do what 

they are supposed to, things will turn out in Sirian favor; at least that's what they think. 

And then we have us, who know about all this. This knowledge is carrying us forward up to higher 

frequencies. We need no technology to do so, because we will do it the way it was meant to be done; 

we do the work ourselves, and that work is 100% inner work. Remember, we have the whole existence - 

- past, present, and future -- embedded inside of our physical and metaphysical bodies. We are in charge 

of our own future and we can create it exactly the way we want it to be. Of course, this is something I 

am very eager to research further and further. I already have a whole book in my head which just more 

or less needs to be written; something I will do after Level III. I am sure that book will be followed by 

more books, and more books, because life is an endless learning process, and this is all the 

documentation of my own journey, which I am happy to share with whomever is interested to read 

about it and perhaps find a diamond or two. 

Love, 

I hope you will follow me to the next paper! 


224





[*] And this is exactly what these 200 million non-physicals are coming for -- to merge with us. This is exactly Abraxas' point as 

well; it sounds okay if presented in a certain way, but once we look through the agenda...They are not trying to help us 

advance; they think they are helping themselves to advance, plus they need to feel they are in control over us. Therefore, 

everybody is pointing fingers at each other in order to confuse the matter. Are some of these 200 million us in the future, i.e. 

Grays in different stage of evolvement (or devolvement rather)? I would say definitely so, but the majority will be of the Sirian 

Alliance. 

[**] Here the Cassiopaeans look at Laura's question from a bigger picture, from which the Wave has always existed and has no 

beginning or end, it just is because time does not exist on the highest level of thinking. 

[1] Source: http://www.lyssaroyal.com/trans85.htm, op. cit. 

[2] http://www.alliesofhumanity.org/marshallviansummers.php, op. cit. 

[3] Marshall V. Summers, "The First Briefing -- Book 1", p.4, op. cit. 

[4] ibid., Chapter One, op. cit. 


[6] ibid. Chapter 2, op. cit. 


[8] http://cassiopaea.org/2010/05/12/the-wave-chapter-14-all-there-is-is-lessons-or-candy-will-ruin-your-teeth/ 

[9] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Operation_Paperclip 

[10] http://cassiopaea.org/2010/09/15/the-cassiopaeans-answer-questions-about-ascension/ 

[11] http://cassiopaea.org/2010/09/25/the-stargate-conspiracy/ 

[12] Cassiopaean session, March 18, 1995, op. cit. 

[13] Cassiopaean session, August 28, 1999, op. cit. 

[14] ibid. 

[15] http://cassiopaea.org/2010/05/08/the-wave-chapter-1-riding-the-wave/ 

[16] http://neverend.wikia.com/wiki/Watchers 


225



Paper #8: Galactic Federations and Councils 

by Wes Penre, Saturday, March 23, 2013 


I. Abstract. Galactic Federations and Councils 

Somewhere along the line, almost any channeled source we listen to is going to mention that they 

belong to one Galactic Federation and Council or another. This is normally presented as a positive thing, 

and people who are digging into the material feel that there is a chance in the future that humanity may 

join as well. Then there are others, like the Pleiadians, who don't like Galactic Federations. They have 

been channeling their information for almost 25 years, and every so often they get a question about 

Galactic Federations. It has come to a point where they get almost irritated and just say, "We are not 

hot on Galactic Federations." 

When I decided to look into these space organizations, I did my best to look at them objectively to 

see if I could find a connection between some of them, or if they all are separate from the others. What I 

did was to gather all the different federations and councils I could find out there and listed them. Then I 

tried to find out which specific group was talking about which council, and if these groups had any 

relation at all. The result is going to be presented in this paper. 

II. A List of Galactic Federations and Councils 

This list is far from complete, and I actually looked into more than these, but to save the reader from 

too much headache, I narrowed it down to those that I found at all significant for us in today's world; 

many of which we will stumble upon sooner of later in our research if we are into the UFO field. So, here 

they are, in no specific order: 

The Council of Zindar/Zendar/Saturn 

The Council of Thuban 

The Nibiruan Council and the Galactic Federation of Worlds 

The Council of Nine 

The Galactic Federation of Light (Previously only "The Galactic Federation") 

The Ashtar Command 

The Allies of Humanity 

The Greater Community 


226



The Galactic Federation of Planets 

The Council of 12 

The Council of 24 

The Elohim Council 

The Guardian Alliance 

The Andromedan Council 

The (Galactic) Federation 

The Confederation of Planets 

The Orion Federation 

Sirian High Command 

The Galactic Federation of Planets 

Intergalactic Federation of Sovereign Planets (IFSP) 

As the reader can see, there are a lot of councils and federations, and it seems like a lot to research 

and perhaps the subject for another 10 papers, but fortunately it's easier than it looks like at the first 

glance. We have already gained knowledge from the previous papers in Level III, and that will show to 

be of some significant help. It's also not my purpose to go into each group in detail; all I want to do it to 

show the connection between them and what effect that may have on us here on Earth. That is the only 

thing that is interesting at this point. Also, some of the Federations listed above are just other names for 

the same group, as we shall see. I think the reader can see the significance of bringing this up in order 

for us to distinguish who is who (something no one, amazingly enough, as done before, frm what I 

know). 

III. The Galactic Federations and Councils Under the Microscope 

When we listen to channeled material where they say that they are not part of any hierarchy, and 

that hierarchies are oppressive and unfair and create different classes of people, most people think that 

sounds good. However, what I show is that most of these sources belong to a Federation, 

Confederation, or a space council of some sort. It looks like no matter which council or federation they 

are members of, it's a part of a larger hierarchy that is taking us all the way from the bottom (the 

councils and federations here on Earth, resulting in the Illuminati Pyramid), out into the astral, to the 

next star system, across the whole galaxy and beyond, perhaps ending in the KHAA with the Thuban 

Council. 


227



So let us take a look at these galactic and intergalactic organizations and learn who is who and what is 

what. The following organizations will be listed in hierarchy order where possible. The first one is 

therefore the highest federation known to me in a descending hierarchy. 

iii.i. The Council of Thuban 

This is supposedly the oldest council in the Milky Way Galaxy, residing in the 12th Dimension, which 

is outside of the physical universe, in the VOID. They call themselves Dragons, but say they are the "good 

Dragons", admitting to that there are lower dimensional Dracos who are not as friendly. Thuban is a star 

system in the Draconis constellation, and because it's the brightest star, it's called Alpha Draconis. 

The Thubans say that they are a big part of our ancient history and participated in the early seeding of 

our planet. They are supposedly the ones who planted the reptilian brain into our mammal brains. 

They claim to be in service of the One Creator (all star races are, whether they are good or bad, Wes's 

comment), and say that the Sirians are humanity's best friends[1]. 

The reason they have contacted us here on Earth at this time is because they are allegedly in charge 

of the Harvest. Abraxas, who is a High Council member and a walk-in, is telling us that the Thubans need 

to genetically manipulate Homo sapiens into becoming dragonized "Starhumans", ready to approach the 

5th Dimension. It has to be done with technology, and this is the way God intended it to be. According 

to Abraxas, there is no such thing as "natural ascension happening without interference". Interfering 

with, and genetically manipulate, an ascending species is the natural way, she says. 

All star races who promote the Harvest are in one way or another talking about a Superwave heading 

towards Earth. Some say it originates from the Galactic Center, others say it originates nowhere; it's 

always been there and will always be. The Harvest and the ascension will happen when this wave, upon 

which 200 million star beings ride, reaches our solar system. Those who have 51% or more of their heart 

chakras open are potential graduates. 

Many of those who have not at all prepared themselves and know nothing about what's about to 

come down will have their neurological systems fried and they will die in the process. Others will go 

through extreme hardship with strange weather phenomena and sickness, but some will still survive. 

Those who are ready to ascend, however, will feel very little discomfort, but instead feel great joy, and 

for a short moment under the transition from 4D to 5D they will feel the Oneness with the whole 

universe, which is an indescribable "euphoric" feeling. 

The Thubans say that they are us in the future, but also our ancestors -- the ferocious Dragons. They 

claim that the whole universe consists of only humans in different stages of development. Due to that 

time is simultaneous in a fluid Multiverse, Earth is now being visited by our future selves in form of the 

Grays, who are here to steal our DNA in order to regain their emotionality and personalities; both of 

which they lost along the way in the Machine Kingdom we humans are about to create for ourselves in 

our present now. In other words, there are no other "aliens" in the universe except humans in different 


228



stages of development! This is what the Thubans are teaching, and this is what most other channeled 

sources and Galactic Federations are teaching us as well, although most people ignore that fact and 

don't even notice it. Whether this is true or not is something time will show; we need more evidence in 

order to once and for all establish this as the truth, but I must say that in the light of evidence based on 

intensive research, it looks like this could be the case. 

Thuban Guardians will wait for those who are due to ascend and will transport them to the correct 

place in the astral where they can obtain their 5D bodies which are there for them, ready to use. And 

here is the confusion: will the person incarnate as an adult in an adult body, or will this super-enhanced 

body be placed as a fetus in an impregnated earth woman for the 5D human to incarnate in? We don't 

know, because we never get any clear answer to this. 

We get the impression, however, that the Harvest may happen between lives but can also take place 

while the spirit is still incarnated. Our friends and neighbors will still live around us even if they don't 

ascend, but those who ascend will vibrate on a much higher frequency, and after a few generations, 

those who don't progress cannot hold the higher frequencies, and that's when the splitting of the world 

will take place. 

Sources and references: 

http://www.thuban.spruz.com/blog.htm?cachecommand=bypass&pageindex=5; 

http://www.galacticchannelings.com/english/wanderer04-01-12.html; 

http://www.birthofgaia.com/t234-thuban-101; 

http://www.thuban.spruz.com/blog.htm?cachecommand=bypass&pageindex=5; 

http://projectavalon.net/forum/showthread.php?t=18900; 

http://www.thuban.spruz.com/forums/?page=post&id=AA6C2853-C1C0-470F-BE65- 

B3ECBFE7D0A2&fid=DEBB8EAC-B175-40A5-9056- 

DDF2CBD8A410&cachecommand=bypass&pageindex=1; 

http://www.birthofgaia.com/t116-abraxas-thuban-qa. 

iii.ii. The Council of 24 

In 1973, J.J. Hurtak wrote a book he called "The Keys of Enoch". It is laid out like the Bible with 

chapters and verses, like it was meant to become a substitute for the Bible. The author says the material 

therein is channeled from a source he mentions on occasions as "The Council of 9". We will go much 

deeper into that council later in this paper. Anyway, in The Keys of Enoch (in the glossary) it says: "...the 

24 are the Council governing spiritual civilizations in the Son universe which is not to be confused with 

the Twenty-Four Elders.[2] The "Son universe" is defined as the universe of Christ, and Christ as we know 

him is no one less than ENKI himself. In the Thuban hierarchy, the Council of 24 is an assisting council to 

the Thubans in the lower 9th - 11th Dimensions. 


229



The RA Material mentions the Council of 24 as well: "...there are twenty-four entities which offer their 

services as requested. These entities faithfully watch and have been called 'The Guardians.'"[3] According 

to RA, the Council of 24 is also part of the Confederation[4] (more about them later). 

Sources and references: The Keys of Enoch by J.J Hurtak (the glossary); The RA Material, 

http://lawofone.info/results.php?q=council+of+nine; http://www.birthofgaia.com/t116-abraxas-thubanqa; 

http://www.birthofgaia.com/t234-thuban-101. 

iii.iii. The Council of 12 

There appear to be several different Councils of 12. If we start by continuing the Thuban hierarchy in 

a downward fashion, the Council of 12 is a lower council than that of the 24. 

The Elohim mention them as well in Wynn Free's e-book in the conversation that follows: 

"Do you report to a group that’s higher than yourself regarding delegation, of functioning or of 

oneness? 

We report to, and receive guidance from, the Council of 12. 

Is the Council of 12 a higher density than you? Do they administrate this realm, which is lower 

in density? 

They administrate more than one realm. They administrate their own realm of the Elohim, the 

different levels within the Elohim and the different jobs the Elohim provide. The repairing of life 

models would be one example. Healing in response to prayer is another section. The Council of 12 

does not directly administrate Earth. They are a group of 12 highly evolved individual souls who 

administrate the Council of Elohim who then, due to their functions, connect directly with earth 

and other realms. 

Is the Council of 12 overseeing this communication that we are having at this moment? 

We do coordinate through the Council of 12, and we receive advice and counsel from them. 

Are we speaking to an individual soul who represents the entire group, or do we have a portion 

of the group present with us? 

A portion of the group is present. Yesterday you had one individual come in at one point, the 

passionate individual who was also a member of the Council of 12. 

How many souls in the Elohim are paying attention to us right now as we do this 

communication. 

1,200. 

1,200? And there’s a total of 5 million? 


230



That’s about right." [p.79-80 op. cit.] 

This means that the Council of Elohim, although claiming to be the Creator Gods of this Universe, has 

quite a few councils above them in the hierarchy. 

In the Book of Job, it says that the 12 are, "...sons of Heaven working with YHWH to supervise the 

creation and regeneration of the lower world" (Job 38:3-7). This is a pretty interesting quote, because 

with the knowledge we now have gained, it's easy to see that the "sons of Heaven" are the Patriarchal 

Sirian Alliance, who are creating and maintaining the status of the "lower world", which would be 

us. YHWH in this case is ENKI, the Orion star being. 

Zecharia Sitchin also mentioned the Council of 12 in reference to the Anunnaki/Sirians, and he talks 

about the "gods" who sit (or sat) on that council. They were: ANU and his wife ANTU, NIN-HUR-SAG, 

ISHKUR, ENLIL, NINLIL, ENKI, NINKI, NANNAR, ISH.KUR, UTU, INANNA, MARDUK, NINURTA, NERGAL, and 

NINGISHZIDDA (Thoth). http://www.bibliotecapleyades.net/sitchin/names_gods.html. We are now 

down to the 4th Order of Archetypes. 

I'm not sure how Sitchin counted, but when I count, the above group adds up to 16, not 12, but they 

could have been on rotation. Dr. A.R. Bordon and his Life Physics Group California (which was dissolved 

in the beginning of 2013) claimed there are about 300 earthbound Anunnaki (Sirians) trapped here now, 

and the self-proclaimed King of this group is MARDUK, Lord ENKI's son. ENKI, having 100% Orion genes, 

but his wife being Sirian, made their offspring, MARDUK, an Orion/Sirian hybrid. However, this earthly 

Orion/Sirian Council differs a little bit from Sitchin's council with the same name, and the member do 

also. In the LPG-C version, many seats are held by unknown Anunnaki (the number after the name 

indicates the rank of the person, where 60 is the highest, indicating the King. MARDUK proclaimed 

himself to that title): MARDUK (60), ZARPANIT (55), NABU (50), Unknown (45), GIBIL (40), Unknown (35), 

Unknown (30), Unknown (25), Unknown (20), Unknown (15), NUSKUM (10), Unknown (5). 

http://illuminati-news.com/pdf/Between-the-Devil-and-the-Returning-Rock.pdf 

http://illuminati-news.com/pdf/Between-the-Devil-and-the-Returning-Rock.pdf. I also included this 

table in Level I. 

Here the odd numbers were females and the even numbers were males. Someone has hidden all 

female participants except one, which is quite peculiar. ZARPANIT, the female who is mentioned, was a 

mortal human woman, whom MARDUK married here on Earth and who later died from defects coming 

with higher age. NUSKUM, surprisingly enough, says Bordon, was a servant to ENLIL. 

It seems quite obvious that we on this level in the hierarchy are touching on the 4th Order Archetype, 

which more or less is the Sirian Alliance. They seem to have their hands on the Council of 12, according 

to more than a couple of sources. However, according the andromedancouncil.com, the Council of 12 

consists not only of members of the Sirian Alliance, but of different star races. This, however, would 

make sense in regards to the earthbound, as the Council of 12 which Bordon claims was set up entirely 

by MARDUK). 


231



If Sitchin was correct, and the Council of 12 actually consists of members of the Sirian Alliance, we 

have in that case a direct connection between the Council of Thuban, the RA Material and the Sirian 

Alliance itself. I have reasons to believe that there is indeed a connection, and that Sitchin in this case 

was correct, because the Book of Job is quite telling, and more evidence which will be revealed later in 

this paper will strengthen that theory. 

If we go back to Wynn Free's Elohim group, the "Elohim" are of course mentioned in the Bible, and 

most non-Christians researchers today are in agreement with that the Elohim in the Bible are the 

"Anunnaki", or the Sirian Alliance, as I call them. Wynn and his group, however, deny this and say that 

"their" Elohim are of a much higher rank than that, because they are the Creator Gods of this entire 

universe! 

Well, I have to agree with Wynn's group here, because they are probably telling it as it is. However, 

Wynn's group are not totally aware of what it is the Elohim are saying. First of all, when they are talking 

about the Elohim being the Creator Gods of the universe, we are still talking about the 4% universe we 

humans are aware of. The Elohim may claim that they are the creators of the universe, and in that 

respect they are not lying; they are just manipulative. Evidence point in the direction that the Elohim 

channeled by Wynn's group are the Sirian Alliance! In fact, that is exactly what the Elohim themselves 

are telling us. If they are taking advice from the Council of 12, they are saying that the 12 are more 

knowledgeable than they are, and thus higher up in the hierarchy. And evidence is showing us quite 

clearly that the Council of 12 is run by the 4th Order Archetype, which is the Sirian Alliance (see previous 

paper on the Alpha Draconians, where the Archetypes are discussed in depth). 

iii.iii.i. The Andromedan Council (The Council of 12) 

So, here we have another Council of 12, apparently, unless Sitchin's description of a council with the 

same name is false (or this Andromedan one is). For our purpose, it's almost irrelevant, as we shall see, 

because even here in the Andromedan list of membership planets, the Sirians are mentioned, so the 

connection is still there. 

The following is from the Andromedan Council. This is what Tolec, an Andromedan contact, says 

about the Council of 12: 

"The Andromeda Council is an intergalactic governance & development body of aligned 

benevolent star systems & planets of sentient intelligent life... for worlds in both the Milky Way 

and Andromeda galaxies. 

The chaired members of the Andromeda Council comprise a total of twelve (12) distinct 

representative council member races. 

The Council has, 

a non-voting Chairman from the star system Zenetae, planet Tishtae 

a non-voting Vice-Chairwoman from the star system Mirach, planet Terial 


232



The Mirach star system and planet Terial are located in the Milky Way Galaxy, though they can 

be seen from Earth as being in the Andromeda Constellation. 

The Zenetae star system itself is physically located in the Andromeda Galaxy. These two people, 

as many on the Andromeda Council, live & vibrate in a 4 th dimension/density reality. 

There are also some 3D, third dimensional like Earth; 5D, fifth dimensional, and 6D, sixth 

dimensional, people that are members of this governance body as well. There is one council 

member per seat. There are living accommodations on the primary Andromeda Council 

biosphere, where these meetings are held, for the people who live in all of these dimensions of 

life. 

Many of the member races of the Council are acknowledged throughout the Universe to be 

some of the same races that originally seeded Earth hundreds of thousands of years ago, as 

evidenced by the variety of humans on the planet today. 

It is said these races have already been through the process of transformation, of upliftment - 

the elevated vibration, density, and spiritual consciousness of the 4D, fourth dimension. 

Members of the Andromeda Council are from the star systems and planets listed below: 

1. Star System: Arcturus - Planet: Pitolla 

2. Star System: Antares - Planet: Nikotae 

3. Star System: M103 - Planet: Legola 

4. Star System: Procyon - Planet: Kaena 

5. Star System: Vega - Planet: Percula 

6. Star System: Capella - Planet: Pershea 

7. Star System: Polaris - Planet: Ventra 

8. Star System: Sirius A - Planet: Toleka 

9. Star System: Deneb - Planet: Ritol 

10. Star System: Tau Ceti - Planet: Xeta 

11. Star System: Alhena - Planet: 

Degaroth 

12. Star System: Betelgeuse - Planet: 

Etorth"[6] 

Figure 1. The Symbol of the 

Andromedan Council 

They are reassuring us that once we are getting visited from certain planets, where the Sirian Toleka 

is one of them, it's going to be fun here on Earth. Oh, I bet it will! They are also inviting us to the 

Galactic Federation of Light, which is an obvious Sirian Federation, which we will see once we get to 

that section. 

The above Andromedan Council contact can be found at 

http://www.bibliotecapleyades.net/vida_alien/alien_galacticfederations20.htm, and is not the same 

contact as Alex Collier has had, apparently. On Collier's website, at http://alexcollier.org/, Collier says 

he has been in contact with a group who calls themselves "The Eleven"[7]. Collier is not as obvious to 

"figure out" as many of the other contactees of Galactic Federations and Councils. I can understand 


233



how he could be so popular in the 1990s and during the first decade of the new millennium, because 

there is a lot of truth in what the Andromedans told him. 

Alex Collier is referring to the Andromedan Council as a political body, like a United Nation of the 

Milky Way Galaxy. Andromeda in this case does not refer to the Andromedan Galaxy, but the 

Andromeda star constellation. Here are a few key points that Alex Collier wants to point out regarding 

the Council and what they have had to say to him: 

o The Council consists of 133 representatives of planetary systems and races. 

o It has operated for thousands of years under strict codes and guidelines of conduct. 

o The Council is not coming down here to save us. They don't think we would benefit from that, 

and instead we should work on our own ascension, which is happening from within. Some wait 

for some Ashtar Command to come down and save us, but that is not going to happen. In fact, 

they add, the Pleiadians are looking for Ashtar, because he is considered a space pirate in their 

eyes (more about the Ashtar Command soon). They say that the Ashtar Command are 

responsible for much of the bad things that have happened here on Earth -- a lot of it (and I 

agree). 

o The Grays want to have a soul, but they don't. 

o In 1994, there were 72000 walk-ins on the planet. 

o So this is like the front-runner. Their hope is that the total will be 144000, and that these 

144000 souls, or walk-ins, will be able to stir enough change, that they themselves may not 

have to physically intervene, and therefore the integrity of non-intervention maintains itself. In 

other words, they don't have to violate their own laws, because now it's us doing it. It's a 

human in a human form. The Andromedans are offering this opportunity; they hope that 553 

million souls or more will ask them for help. Once they know the whole picture, then 

something can be done (here we have the 144,000 mentioned again. Be prepared, because we 

are going to hear this number over and over again! Wes).[8] 

Collier also confirms what Abraxas said regarding the 12th Dimension (albeit, Collier is calling it the 

12th Density -- same thing). In an article from 1995, Collier says: 

"Do you remember in one of the earlier lectures, we talk [sic] about the new vibration? The new 

color sound vibration that’s coming out of the black holes, which the Andromedan has referred 

to as the new 12th density, 12th creational density. I have some information that Moraney has 

relayed to me regarding the changes that occurred on the 11th and now the 10th. 

[…] 

Now this is the highest consciousness dimensional realm in our universe."[9] 

This, of course, depends on how we look at it. After the vortex opened (Collier calls it a black hole), 

it may seem like the 12th Dimension suddenly is a part of our universe, but it's not. This is clearly 


234



explained by Abraxas in the previous papers. It's still a confirmation. He also gives us an idea (for 

whatever it is worth) when the Wave will come: 

"But the last time I asked this question which was approximately a year ago, they said that 

between 435 & 510 million people would literally move to 5th density, December 3rd, 2013. 

Now I’ll be, I have to tell you, I’m a bit confused regarding this number and it’s not that I don’t 

believe them. It’s just that there are many psychics and other ET races that discuss 2024, 2031, 

other numbers like this. 

According to the Andromedans, and I can only give you that because that’s all I have contact 

with. They said that by Dec. 3rd, 2013 the planet and the race will be in 5th density. But I’m not 

going to tell you about 5th density yet. We’re going to talk about 4th density. Now, according to 

them the planet has tried to get into 4th density with humanity on it twice before. And twice 

before, there was a terrific and terrible war. The last time was when Atlantis sank."[10] 

Like I said, the Andromedans have mixed up dates and numbers before, so let's not take it too 

seriously, and especially as this was predicted nineteen years ago. It still sounds like a possible 

guideline. Here is something, however, that comes directly from Collier himself, and I find that quite 

insightful: 

"There’s still going to be people who don’t understand what’s happening. There are still going to 

be people clinging to their religions and begging for someone to come and save them. And they 

may in their own way create that. They may create a savior. And for those of you who are new 

here, the Andromedan Perspective is, don’t wait for anybody to save you, be your own savior 

because that’s the only way you permanently evolve."[11] 

I think he is absolutely right here. People on Earth are going to create their own savior -- the 

archetypes are already here, so it's been worked on behind the scenes. I am talking about Maitreya 

now -- these are the times when all probabilities are played out in a cacophony of alternatives. Take 

your pick and go for it! But it's not always going to be that way; it needs to be that way now so that 

people can live out and discharge their timelines. It's not even necessary that all probabilities are 

played out in full; some can be started and then abandoned... 

iii.iv. The Confederation of Planets 

This confederation consists of approximately 53 civilizations and about 500 planetary consciousness 

complexes, according to the RA Collective. It contains both those from our own solar system who have 

evolved to dimensions higher than our 3rd, but also consciousness complexes from other solar 

systems. The RA Collective themselves belong to the Confederation of Planets, and when they refer to 

that there are those from our solar system who have evolved to become members, they refer to 

themselves, because they claim to be originally from Venus, which was the planet on where they once 

upon a time evolved. I also get the feeling that the Grays, who are us in the future, may very well be 

members of this confederation. They, too, of course evolved here in our solar system, and one 

stipulation to become members of this confederation is that you must be a collective of beings, a socalled 

social memory complex, or consciousness complex. Single beings, or even beings of a whole 

planet, who have evolved can't be members, unless they have merged into this complex hive 

community of which both RA and the Grays can consider themselves being part of. 


235



RA says that it is a true Confederation in that its members are not alike, but allied in service 

according to the Law of One. They are available through our thoughts. This means that you can call 

upon them, but it doesn't necessarily mean that all of them are benevolent; you need to know whom 

you are calling for. To be in service in accordance to the Law of One can potentially mean both 

negatively and positively (STS or STO). 

It looks like the Council of Thuban, followed by the Council of 24 and 12 are the top of the Pyramid 

in this universe, and nothing can bypass them without them knowing about it. Then, beneath the 

Council of 12, the Councils and Federations start to branch out in different directions, depending on 

the purpose with them. Still, they all have to answer to the three councils here above. 

iii.v. The Council of Zendar and the Rings of Saturn 

This Council is also called the Council of Zindar, or the Council of Saturn, and is commonly 

mentioned in the RA Material. This is the council that is allegedly in charge of our solar system. Before 

anyone can land on any of our planets (and on Earth in particular) they need to have the permission to 

do so by this local council. They are, in other words, the ones who can decide who is allowed to enter 

3D on Earth, and when RA landed here a few times in the past, they first went through the Council of 

Saturn, who gave them permission, opened the Quarantine, and let the RA star beings through. Some 

members of the Council are also situated in the center of our planet, as Guardians of Mother Earth. 

When Don Elkins asks the RA Collective where this Council of Zendar is located, they answer him 

that they are in the 8th Dimension of the Planet Saturn[12], which we with our 3D understanding view 

as the rings of Saturn. This makes sense, as the 8th Dimension is the highest dimension in this physical 

universe. Once you enter the 9th Dimension (which you can't without permission), you are in the VOID. 

Also, when asked why the Orion Group (the Sirian Alliance, whom the RA Collective say are of the 4th 

and 5th Density Negative) on occasion have been seen flying through the Quarantine, and if they have 

been granted permission, RA replies that sometimes there's a hole in the Quarantine, and the Orion 

Group can manage to break through that way, and sometimes they are allowed permission to create a 

balance between positive and negative here on Earth. 

This is very interesting, to say the least, because here is evidence that there is an 8th Density 

Council, which guarantees that no one in the solar system, on any evolving planet, enters the KHAA 

without their permission, but it also works the other way around, of course. If beings from the KHAA, 

such as members of the Thuban Council, want to come into our reality, they will be given the go-ahead 

by Zendar. But even more interesting than that, in our case, is that they let through ships and hollowed 

out asteroids from the Sirian Alliance. I have a hard time believing that the Sirian Overlords can fool the 

Council just because they hide inside of asteroids. So apparently, it's okay with the Council that we 

have the situation we have on the planet today. Either there are a lot of holes in the Quarantine, or 

does the Council of Saturn think that we have a balance on the planet right now? Hard to believe. 


236



Figure 2. NINURTA 

Another relevant question would be if Zendar has something to do with the Harvest, and if that is 

the reason why they let so many hollowed out asteroids and Sirians in spirit onto the planet right now? 

Well, that is the only thing that makes sense. Think about it for a moment. The Council of Saturn sits in 

constant session in the rings of Saturn, in the 8th Dimension. First of all, where does the name Saturn 

come from? Well, in the Mesopotamian pantheon, Saturn was also the name for NINURTA, son of 

ENLIL![13] And NINURTA is a representative of the 4th Archetype, which is the archetype directly 

associated with Earth and our mythology. His mentor, interestingly enough, was ENKI, who gave him 

several powerful Meš[def]. I am sure there are more reasons why Saturn was named after NINURTA, 

but one of them could very well be because NINURTA is in charge of the opening of the vortex on our 

side of the solar system, which perhaps will open (or has opened) in the vicinity of the planet Saturn. 

Here may also be the vortex which opens into the VOID, where the 4% universe hologram in regards to 

humanity is maintained (after all, this is close to what researcher David Icke has concluded in his book, 

"Remember Who You Are". He says that Saturn probably plays a main role in how the holographic 

universe is created. He theorizes that the hologram is projected from Saturn via the Moon and further 

down to Earth). Anyway, on the "other side" of Saturn, figuratively speaking, is the 9th Dimension, 

which the Council of Zendar is protecting, as well as the entry into our solar system. I wonder if all solar 

systems have a council like this, or if it is because Earth is "special"? 


237



Figure 3. The Rings of Saturn 

I get this very feeling that the 2nd and 4th Orders of Archetypes are going to be the main players 

here for a while -- interplaying with each other. The 4th of course being the gods of old Mesopotamia, 

and the 2nd being the Dragons of the VOID, the Council of Thuban. Now, keep in mind that these 

archetypes have been created by us (perhaps with some help from the Sirians themselves), and when 

looked upon from the viewpoints of the VOID, the 2nd and 4th archetype orders may very well be the 

same, or on the same "level"; both being of the 12th Dimension. 

The Cassiopaeans also mention the Council of Zendar in a few places. 

"The Zendar Council is a sixth level density council which spans both physical and ethereal 

realms and which oversees dramatic development points at various civilizational sectors in 

lower density levels."[14] 

Here they mention the 6th Density instead of the 8th Dimension in the RA Material, but it all 

depends on which dimension/density system we use. In another session from July 23, 1994, the 

Cassiopaeans say that the Zendar Council is a "two cycle exchangers mission", which may sound cryptic 

to begin with, but if we think about it, we have just completed one cycle and started a new, and what 

is the mission in between? To complete the Harvest! It sounds to me that this council has as one of its 

missions to see to that the Harvest is completed, whatever it takes. And letting the Sirian Alliance pass 

through their filter is nothing they see as unusual; it's a part of their mission. Interestingly enough, the 

Cassiopaeans, in the same session, refer to Jesus as a member of this Council of Saturn! This, dear 

reader, is not as unbelievable as it sounds, as we will see when we move on. Just keep this in mind. We 

know Jesus from the Bible as the Son of God, but we know him as the son of the Goddess, right? And 

who is that? ENKI. So, if Jesus equals ENKI, we also have whom I refer to as "Space Jesus", whom is 

extremely relevant in channeled material and in New Age philosophy. The Bible talks about the 

"Second Coming of Jesus", but so does New Age. Many are those who say they channel Jesus, or the 

Federation/Federations Jesus is said to belong to. People shake their heads and think this is nonsense, 

but looked at from the right angle, it's really not. Not if we know who Jesus is -- ENKI, son of the 

Goddess! In another session from May 31, 1995, the Cassiopaeans compare the members on the 

Zendar Council with angels wearing wings, and that this is where our concept of angels come from. The 

Winged Sun Disc? Jesus and his angels? Are we getting closer? 


238



There is more evidence showing who the Council is allowing permission. Here is a direct quote from 

RA, telling us that they are granting permission for entities to pass the Quarantine in spirit form! 

"Secondly, there is permission granted, not to break quarantine by dwelling among you, but to 

appear in thought-form capacity for those who have eyes to see."[15] 

The more I look into this whole concept with channeled sources and Federations I see a connection 

between it all, which has to do with the concepts of the 4% and the 96% universes. There is so 

incredibly much that we haven't been told but have the right to know. Still, the evidence is there if we 

are willing to dig deep enough. 

iii.vi. The Council of 9 

This is a big one, because this council has had such an influence here on Earth, at least over the last 

decades. It has long seemed to me that this council has been the one which has as its responsibility to 

interact directly with us here in 3D, in order to get the process going, leading up to the point of the 

Harvest. 

Figure 4. "Henry" Andrija Puharic 

I posted an article about the Nine on my Illuminati News website[16] back in 2005. Although that 

article was quite biased, having a Christian slant, it had a lot of valuable information in there and was 

well researched. In December 1952, Andrija Puharic, whom at that time was the head of the "Round 

Table Foundation", and strongly into the paranormal, invited an East Indian psychic named Dr. D.G. 

Vinod, who began to channel the Council of Nine. An inner circle of people came regularly to listen to 

Dr. Vinod channeling these nine deities. Yes, they claimed to be the Ennead, the nine most prominent 

"gods" in ancient Egypt (the Orion Group). Interestingly enough, three years later, Puharic met with 

some members of the UFO movement in Mexico, who also claimed to be channeling the Nine, and 

their transcripts referred to the sessions transmitted to Puharic's group. So, obviously, there was more 

than one group of people channeling The Nine. 


239



Figure 5. Uri Geller bending metals with his mind 

The continuous story goes that Puharic, who himself was a psychic, eventually got in contact with a 

young Israeli psychic named Uri Geller. The reader probably knows about him. He was famous in the 

1970s for bending spoons on international TV. He also managed to bend spoons in people's homes 

while they were watching the program. Puharic was the person discovering Geller. And from that 

comes a very interesting story. Uri Geller, while set in trance, unpredictably started channeling 

"something" called "Spectra", which was supposedly a conscious super-computer aboard a spaceship! 

Puharic suggested that this might have something to do with The Nine, and Spectra confirmed this, and 

said they had programmed Uri Geller since he was a child to be a super-psychic! They also told Puharic 

that his life mission was to use Geller's talents to promote a mass landing of spaceships, which was 

supposed to be controlled by The Nine. In 1973, Geller left his "mission" and didn't want to have 

anything to do with The Nine again. So Puharic found another psychic, Phyllis Schlemmer. She became 

the channeler of "Tom", who was one of The Nine. 

I find this extremely interesting, especially as I suggested earlier that some of the channeled 

material could be done on a super-computer, which could answer most of the questions people have. 

It sure seems like that may be case! I hadn't read the Illuminati News article again since the year I 

posted it, and just reviewed it now after I stated that some channeling seems to have been made from 

computers. Some may suggest that this super-computer is set up by the Military Industrial Complex, 

but it's doubtful. Hypothetically, they could have received the technology to do so from ETs, but this 

story seems to be much bigger than that, which we will notice when we move on. But before we do, 

there is another short, but interesting story to tell about Bashar, the famous channel by Darryl Anka. In 

one session the following happened, according to this blog owner (I have had this confirmed, by the 

way): 


240



"This part jumped out for me: "A guy asked three questions. First about Chem Trails, second 

about H1N1, third about compulsory vaccines, To each question Bashar answered "That data is 

no longer available from this terminal". He said that he answered this way because all of these 

are negatively oriented, fear inducing belief systems. We can not extend frequencies and 

energies in those domains. 

Is this related to the 'weird' ending of a previous session, where we heard "This terminal has no 

more data" ?"[17] 

Well, to me it sounds like a lame excuse. Bashar has always answered whatever questions the 

audience has, without fail, and now, all of a sudden, they refuse to answer "negative" questions? And 

why do they call themselves, "this terminal"? The term "terminal" is normally related to computers! 

Anyway, let's continue the story about The Nine. To make a long story short, the small project which 

started with Puharic and his group in 1952 soon grew to enormous proportions. A lot of very famous 

people around the world started attending The Nine's sessions; such multi-billionaires as the 

Bronfmans (Canadian, international businessmen, members of the Global Elite -- the Illuminati), 

European nobility, scientists from Stanford Research Institute, and a political, personal friend of the 

sitting President, Gerald Ford. Other members were the famous author (at the time), Lyall Watson, the 

influential counter-culture guru, Ira Einhorn, and last, but not the least -- Gene Roddenberry, creator of 

Star Trek! 

Figure 6. Gene Roddenberry, father of "Star Trek" 

Roddenberry deserves his own paragraph here. He was a member of The Nine Group in 1974-75, 

and even produced a screen play for a movie about The Nine. It is also suggested that Roddenberry 

was deeply inspired by the information he'd received in The Nine sessions when he wrote the early 

Star Trek movies; The Next Generation and Deep Space Nine (which was quite a give-away). One of the 

characters in Deep Space Nine was Vinod, by the way, and we know that Dr. Vinod was the first known 

channeler of The Nine. 

Another major key figure in The Nine Group was J.J. Hurtak (Dr. James J. Hurtak), who was 

appointed "second in command" by The Nine, after Puharic. Dr. Hurtak also individually channeled The 

Nine in 1973 and forward, all which ended up in his famous book, "The Keys of Enoch", which is laid out 


241



in chapters and verses, in two columns, just like the Bible. Here is a quote from the Introduction to The 

Keys of Enoch: 

"And I was taken from this region of the stars into the Mid-Way station of Arcturus, the major 

programming center of the galactic Council serving the Father on this side of our galaxy, which is 

under the direction of the Council of Nine -- the governing body of our local universe." (Keys of 

Enoch, 1977 edition, Introduction p.vii.) 

The famous people involved in this channel group never ends. Richard Hoagland, known NASA 

"avant-garde" researcher, is also under their influence. David Myers and David Percy were Directors of 

Operations for Hoagland's "Mars Mission". In fact, Hoagland's interpretations of the monuments on 

Mars comes directly from The Nine sessions. Another author whom some readers may know of is Peter 

Farley, who wrote a series of books, where the most well-known is "Where Were You Before the Tree 

of Life?" He, too, is heavily influenced by The Nine, and even states that in the book. 

There is a lot to say about The Nine, which goes far beyond the scope of what I've just told you, and 

I will move on and make that connection in a second. But before that I want to mention a little bit 

more about Andrija Puharic. He was also an army doctor in the 1950s, and deeply involved in CIA's MK- 

ULTRA mind control program. He worked together with the notorious Dr. Sidney Gottlieb, who 

experimented with putting voices in the head of involuntary guinea pigs! The following is a direct 

quote from the article I posted back in 2005: 

"These techniques included the use of drugs, hypnosis and beaming radio signals directly into 

the subject's brain. And, significantly, he was engaged in this work at exactly the same time that 

The Nine made their first appearance at the Round Table Foundation. The Foundation itself is 

now known to have been largely funded by the Pentagon as a front for its medical and 

parapsychological research. Puharich was still working for the CIA in the early 1970s, when he 

brought Uri Geller out of Israel. Puharich's use of hypnosis is particularly interesting in The Nine 

circle. In the case of Uri Geller and Bobby Horne, he first hypnotised them and then suggested 

that they were in touch with The Nine - and lo, they were! Ira Einhorn - a close associate of 

Puharich's during the 1970s - confirmed to us that he believed that Puharich was "humanly 

directing" The Nine communications."[18] 

This is rather disturbing information, isn't it? Well, I wanted to bring all this up, because a few 

papers ago, I mentioned that some of the channeling is done by the MIC[def], and that we must learn 

to distinguish between that and the "real thing". Or could all channeling be done by the CIA and the 

MIC? After the above revelations, it's easy to believe that, but that is not the case. Channeling has 

been practiced long before the 1950s -- even in ancient times there were psychics who could contact 

beings "not from here". However, it is possible that more channeling in present time than we may 

think is transmitted by humans. The technology is obviously there. It has been developing pretty 

rapidly since the 1950s, and even the 1970s, of course. For those who want to read more about 

Puharic and Uri Geller in reference to The Nine, here are two interesting webpages: http://www.urigeller.com/books/maverick/maver8.htm 

and 

http://www.bibliotecapleyades.net/sociopolitica/esp_sociopol_council9_04.htm. It seems like 

Puharich, by the end of his life, was very scared of what he had found out, and it was apparently not 

only CIA mind control. He was desperately looking for someone who could channel The Nine again. 

What was he so afraid of? 


242



Now, let's move over to the RA Material, which also talks about The Nine, or the Council of 9. 

However, the RA sessions were later in time than Puharich's group, so does the RA Material mention 

him at all? Well, fortunately, Don Elkins asked quite a few questions about Puharich and his group, and 

I want to quote a few of these conversations. I will post them in a row here underneath and we'll 

discuss them afterwards (note that Andrija Puharich used an alias as well, and went by Henry 

Puharich): 

"Questioner: Is the Council of Nine the same nine that was mentioned in this book? (Questioner 

gestures to Uri.) 

Ra: I am Ra. The Council of Nine has been retained in semi-undistorted form by two main 

sources, that known in your naming, as Mark and that known in your naming as Henry. In one 

case, the channel became the scribe. In the other, the channel was not the scribe. However, 

without the aid of the scribe, the energy would not have come to the channel. 

Questioner: The names that you spoke of. Were they Mark Probert and Henry Puharich? 

Ra: I am Ra. This is correct.""[19] 

[...] 

"Questioner: Andrija Puharich will be visiting later this month. Can he read the unpublished 

healing material? 

Ra: I am Ra. The entity of whom you speak has a knowledge of this material in its conscious 

memory in somewhat altered form. Therefore, it is harmless to allow this entity to become 

acquainted with this material. However, we request the mind/body/spirit complex, Henry, be 

sufficiently prepared by means of meditation, contemplation, or prayer before entering these 

workings. At present, as we have said before, this mind/body/spirit complex is not of proper 

vibrational distortion."[20] 

[...] 

"Questioner: Was the reason that “The Nine” transmitted this principle in this form the… was 

the reason for this the first distortion? 

Ra: I am Ra. This is incorrect. 

Questioner: Can you tell me why they gave the principle in such a veiled form then? 

Ra: I am Ra. The scribe is most interested in puzzles and equations."[21] 

[...] 

"Questioner: I am sure that we are getting into a problem area with the first distortion here with 

a difficulty with a bit of transient material, but I have questions from a couple of people that I 

would like to ask. The first one especially is of no lasting value. Andrija Puharich asks about the 

coming physical changes, specifically this summer. Is there anything that we could relay to him 

about that? 

Ra: I am Ra. We may confirm the good intention of the source of this entity’s puzzles and 

suggest that it is a grand choice that each may make to, by desire, collect the details of the day 

or, by desire, to seek the keys to unknowing."[22] 


243



Don Elkins, in the third quote, mentions "the first distortion", which for the reader's knowledge is 

the Law of Free Will. Apparently, Elkins was visited by Puharich in the early 1980s because he thought 

that Puharich could benefit from the information given by the RA Collective. It seems quite obvious 

that Elkins didn't know about Puharich's CIA connection. When asked questions about Puharich and 

The Nine, RA replies accordingly to how the question is asked, which their norm was, and this is why 

the truth about Puharich is not clearly revealed. RA, however, indicates that he is not "of proper 

vibrational distortion" to receive some RA material. This means in "RA language" that Puharich is not 

vibrating on a very high frequency, i.e. he is not honest in this case. If Elkins would have known more, 

RA would have told him the truth about Puharich. However, it seems like at least some of the 

channeling of The Nine by Puharich's group was authentic, but distorted due to the scribe's/channelers 

interest in "puzzles and equations". 

Anyway, it's time to leave Puharich and his group and move on. The Council of 9 is mentioned by a 

number of channeled sources, where the RA Collective and the Elohim are two of them. RA refers to 

them as a part of the Council of Saturn, being responsible for the planetary development in 

conjunction with its intelligent species (mankind). 

"In number, the Council that sits in constant session, though varying in its members by means of 

balancing, which takes place, what you would call irregularly, is nine. That is the Session 

Council. To back up this Council, there are twenty-four entities which offer their services as 

requested. These entities faithfully watch and have been called the Guardians. 

The Council operates by means of, what you would call, telepathic contact with the oneness or 

unity of the nine, the distortions blending harmoniously so that the Law of One prevails with 

ease. When a need for thought is present, the Council retains the distortion-complex of this 

need, balancing it as described, and then recommends what it considers as appropriate action. 

This includes: One, the duty of admitting social memory complexes to the Confederation; Two, 

offering aid to those who are unsure how to aid the social memory complex requesting aid in a 

way consonant with both the call, the Law, and the number of those calling (that is to say, 

sometimes the resistance of the call); Three, internal questions in the Council are determined. 

These are the prominent duties of the Council. They are, if in any doubt, able to contact the 

twenty-four who then offer consensus/judgment/thinking to the Council. The Council then may 

reconsider any question."[23] 

So, in other words, the Council of Saturn, which is the "Grand Council" of our solar system, works in 

liaison with the Council of 24, 12, and 9, in descending order, where each council has its own duty. The 

rank of the councils seems here a little vague, when RA is saying that the 24 are a backup council. I 

pledge to the reader to keep this in mind when considering the hierarchy, as it may, or may not change 

the order. However, according to the Thuban Council, the 24 and the 12 are above the Council of 

Saturn, while the Council of 9 is below in the hierarchy. This is also confirmed by RA in the last 

paragraph above. The Council of 9, as well as the other councils mentioned above are also members of 

the Confederation of Planets (also see above where it has its own section). The RA Collective is a Social 

Memory Complex, and as such has been approved by the Council of Saturn to become members of the 

Confederation of Planets. Due to that they are members, the Council of Saturn approved their visiting 

Earth a few times in the past. However, to RA's own admission, they failed each time in their 

interaction with mankind and had to leave. 


244



Lastly, but not to the least, we may wonder if there is a direct Sirian connection to the Council of 9, 

which may be immediately related to the 4th Order of Archetypes that we are used to hear about; the 

names that by now are so familiar. And indeed there is -- right from the Dragon's fiery mouth! In the 

Thuban thread on the Birth of Gaia Forum someone asks Abraxas if there is a Sirian connection to the 

Council of 9, and here is Abraxas' reply: 

"The Sirius connection is appropriate as Sirius A is the brightest and closest Star to Earth in the 

ET agendas (Nommo of the Dogons and the DogStar Sirius Astar-Isis connections and so 

on)."[25] 

As we are getting closer to being able to "map" the 4% universe, we need the hierarchy to see how 

it is set up. Once we know that, the rest is just details, more or less. When Lucifer and his angels 

rebelled, they did not rebel in the 4% universe; there was no such at that time. There was only one, big 

100% universe. The perception of a much smaller universe was set up later by ENKI/Lucifer and his 

crew to counteract Mother Goddess' beautiful creation in progress. Note also that the Cassiopaeans 

are talking about the Council of Saturn being angelic beings with wings. And how are Lucifer and his 

dark angels usually portrayed? With wings and with great beauty. This is far from the stocky, hairy 

dwarfs we talked about in Level II as being the physical template for the Sirian Overlords. See, that is 

the difference between a physical adaptation to a harsh environment and the beautiful light-body. 

Anyway, this smaller universe is kept "real" with the help from holographic technology; no doubt. I 

believe David Icke is on the right track when he is talking about holographic relay stations. His theory is 

that there is a holographic station on the Moon, which relays to a larger one on Saturn, which then 

relays to an even larger one on ... well, in some other solar system, perhaps Sirius or Alpha Draconis, as 

far as Icke is concerned. But how about if these holographic relay stations exist in different 

frequencies, in different dimensions? 

Apparently, our 4% universe is made up of 8 Dimensions and a vast number of densities. To keep 

each dimension stabilized in its illusion, there needs to be a hologrammic output in charge of each 

major frequency. This is another theory on how it may be set up. Then, of course, there is a main 

server put somewhere, most likely in the 9th Dimension, overviewing the entire 8 Dimensions of the 

holographic 4% universe. The 3D version of the hologram is the distortion of our own, current 3D 

bodies. However, that will change. Once we break out and see through the lie, our bodies are set up to 

do miracles. We can not only see the hologram for what it is, but like a person watching TV, we can 

"turn it off" as the distraction and distortion it is and begin to experience the 100% universe! Little do 

humans know how powerful our bodies are! And instead of nurturing and taking care of them, we 

abuse them and destroy them with GM food, drugs, cigarettes, and alcohol. Instead of expanding 

multidimensionally, we expand our bodies in 3D physicality and gain weight until we can't even move 

without wheel chairs. 

However, what I was going to say before I went off track was that just because ENKI, ENLIL, and the 

rest of the so-called "Anunnaki" gods are considered 4th Order Archetypes here on Earth, it doesn't 

mean they are stuck in the 4% universe. ENKI, for example, I am sure is operating across the 

dimensions and outside the 4%, in the VOID where the so-called Dracos exist. They are again the same 

crew of rebels, and they are many in numbers. The Book of Revelation indicates (although there are 

different interpretations) that Lucifer seduced a third of all "angelic beings" to rebel against the 

Goddess, and if this is true, it's probably a lot, although like UTU told me, we humans have since long 

surpassed them in quantity. My point is that only a few of these rebels have actually visited Earth, 

while the rest dwell in other dimensions, and many, like the Thubans, have been waiting in the VOID. 


245



We get a hint, however, when we hear the number 220 million. Was that the amount of Sirians that 

rebelled together with ENKI? It sure sounds like it! 

Well, we can now truly see that it's impossible to fight something like that, and if we didn't know 

better, we would give up right now. Fortunately, victory doesn't come from battle; no one in their right 

mind is going to try to fight this force which is apparently coming in with the Wave. Instead, this is a 

great opportunity for us to show that we can separate ourselves out from that insanity, create our 

local, stable universes where these energies can't affect us, and prove that we can evolve without their 

"help" and their technology. 

iii.vii. The Council of Elohim 

Now, I believe we are coming down to a level when we are really communicating with the Sirian 

Overlords directly, and I am talking about the Orion Group that is currently present on our planet and 

her vicinity. I here need to refer mostly to Wynn Free and his group, who have helped out a lot by 

channeling this source, and Wynn's e-book is of great assistance in order to further understand this 

source. 

Wynn told me in person that many people who attend these sessions (many of them are actually 

conference calls where people can listen in, comment, and ask questions directly to the Elohim) get an 

almost euphoric feeling in the energy field of these beings, and they feel a tremendous amount of love 

(and light) from being present in the sessions. Wynn and his team understandably so use this fact as an 

advertisement for more people to tune in and join the team. When I spoke to him, he said he has 

never encountered so much love from anybody in his entire life as he has from channeling this group. 

He sent me a few YouTube videos and asked me to listen to them to see what I thought and felt (see 

previous paper on channeling, where I posted some Elohim videos). He also wanted me to join a 

conference call, in hope that he and I could perhaps start working together on some project. 

I must say that I like Wynn; he is a very likable person. My readers know, however, that I am always 

reluctant to join and work with groups on these subjects, because that's not how I operate the best. 

But regardless, Wynn and I differ when comes to the authenticity of the group he is involved with. He 

says that the strong emotions that are transmitted from this source should be good evidence that they 

are benevolent and have our best interest in mind. Still, he is telling me that he was very skeptic for a 

long time and it wasn't until quite recently that he totally understood that they are here in our best 

interest. So, in other words he has done his research, and I believe him. It doesn't mean that my 

research necessarily coincides with his. 

I have listened to all the videos I can find on the Internet on this source, but must confess that I have 

yet to participate in a conference call. However, the videos haven't had the effects on me that they 

supposedly have had on so many others. I am aware of that listening to a YouTube video is not the 

same as being in the same room as the source, but regardless, nothing of their channeling is touching 

me. When I read the RA Material, listen to the Pleiadians, and listen to and read other channeled info, 

it usually touches me more than the Elohim material does. If the reader has a different, and more 

positive experience, I acknowledge that, because we are all different. But instead, I found the 

channeling not flowing, but usually hacking itself forward, almost like it was transmitted from a 

computer. I am aware that this will probably upset many fans of the Elohim, but I am being honest. 


246



Also, remember that this is just my experience and is not a guideline for how others should feel. One 

thing I have mentioned before, however, which holds true, is that only because a channeled source is 

capable of transmitting a lot of love and light it doesn't make them more "authentic" or benevolent. I 

am actually going to contradict Wynn here and say that the more love and light they transmit, the 

more fake they probably are. You see, strong emotions are quite genuine for us here on Earth; "that's 

what makes us human", like some star beings say. Beings out there in the universe, in other 

dimensions, don't inhabit those strong emotions. If you listen to a lot of channeled material that is 

more genuine, you notice that they often lack our wide range of emotions. They are more logical, right 

to the point, practical, and focused. But you can't really say they are emotional. So I will suggest that 

channeled sources who transmit a lot of so-called "love & light" are doing so from have "sampled" 

human emotions and are transmitting them back on us in huge quantities in order to hook us to their 

message. Even the Pleiadians, when you listen to them, are not emotional. They do have a sense of 

humor, but lack our range of emotions. And in my opinion, the Pleiadians are a good source, for good 

and bad. They are honest with their shortcomings and they admit to bad things they have done, but 

they also show us their very benevolent sides, and this group is "real"; they are themselves in all 

aspects. There is no fake about them. I wish I could say the same about the Elohim source. Yes, you 

feel very good after have listened to let's say a Pleiadian session as well, but not because of the strong 

emotions, but due to the huge quantity of truth vibrations that are transmitted on the channel. This is 

different from "love and light". 

But let's look into the Elohim a little bit more. Wynn Free's e-book, "The Creator Gods of the Physical 

Universe Want to Talk to You", downloadable for free on the Internet, starts out with saying that this 

Elohim source are the God in the Bible. If this is true, I can almost stop right here, because we already 

know who that group is -- exactly! The Sirian Overlords! This is from the Introduction of Wynn's book: 

"What if this group intelligence, identifying itself as the God in the Old Testament, is now 

explaining how they function and how they interface with our realm in a way that's never been 

presented in the history of humankind?"[26] 

And then Wynn continues a little bit further down: 

"In the initial phases of this contact, when the source first identified itself as the Council of 

Elohim, I immediately did a Google search on the word Elohim and found definitions like “the 

Creator God of this realm,” “the name for God in the Old Testament” and “the group who was 

speaking to Joseph Smith when he founded the Church of Latter Day Saints.” When I asked them 

in a channeling if they were the same, they answered in the affirmative."[27] 

I have no reason to doubt what Wynn is saying here -- why would he write this if this wasn't what 

they told him? And being familiar with Wynn, I know that he is also aware of Sitchin's Anunnaki, and in 

the above quote they are right out saying that they are them! 

Well, that saves us a lot of research, because we now have established a few things. The Elohim are 

the same Elohim as in the Bible, and they also are the God in the Old Testament, who was a mix of 

different entities; such as ANU, ENLIL, ENKI, and even MARDUK from what it seems. They were also the 

ones establishing contact with Joseph Smith, and if so, they were also Jesus in the New Testament; 

Jesus in form of a bloodline incarnation of Lord EA, i.e. ENKI. 


247



We also know that they take advice from higher Councils, such as the Council of A'an and the 

Council of 12. We have already covered the latter, but not the first. A'an could mean just "Heaven", but 

could also refer to ANU, ENLIL's and ENKI's father. Regardless, we can now more clearly see the 

structure and don't need to spend too much time with the Elohim. Even Sitchin said that the Elohim in 

the Bible were the "Anunnaki". 

What I see so far is a long hierarchy of Councils, and one Confederation, starting at the top at a 

place outside our "local universe", which is different from the local universe I've been talking about in 

earlier papers. My definition of the local universe is the same as James Mahu Nahi of the WingMakers; 

it's the universe you create around yourself, your dear ones, and your community. It's the space in 

where you live and exist in this reality. When these beings talk about the local universe, they talk about 

the 4%. Another definition of "local universe" may be our Sector 9, or our galaxy, the Milky Way, but 

these beings are clearly speaking of the 4% universe. 

In the KHAA we have the Council of Thuban, which is supposedly consisting of a group of very wise 

beings of a Draconian, dragon-like feature. Under them are the Councils of 24 and 12 (there are more, 

but their missions are similar, so I won't go into them here), which are either in the 9th to 11th 

Dimension (still within the KHAA), or borderline 8th and 9th Dimension. They are, from what I 

understand, mixed Draconian and humanoid Councils. Lord ENKI, of course, has a hand in them all, 

because he was, together with his father, "ANU", the one who created the 8 Dimensional universe, if 

we are to believe the WingMakers, and must therefore also sit on the Council of Thuban. The 

Confederation of Planets is a Confederation which only accepts Social Memory Complexes, which are 

collectives of beings, such as the Grays. Under them, we have the Council of Zendar or Saturn, which 

has as one of their duties to approve collectives to membership in the Confederation, but also have the 

duty as "Watchers" over our solar system, and thus will decide who can enter and who can't. They 

were the ones who sat up the Quarantine to isolate humanity in order for us to have a 3D experience, 

which started out as a part of a larger Free Will Zone where everything goes if the being is willing to 

take the consequences (karma applies when dealing with 3D). The Quarantine is there to stop beings 

from interfering with our development here. However, according to the Pleiadians and others, we are 

also guarded in the sense that good forces are overlooking us and we can ask for help. Help will arrive, 

but not in a way that directly solves our problems, but makes us see a slightly bigger picture so we can 

more easily solve the problems that we may be stuck in. However, it's a matter of seeing the signs. 

The Council of Zendar are also the ones who decide when the Quarantine should be lifted. When it 

is, any type of beings can come in, but we can also see the bigger picture -- the real universe. The 

Quarantine is not equivalent to the Grid, as the Grid is something we humans create with our thoughts 

and belief systems. The stricter our belief systems and the harder the manipulation, the thicker the 

Grid. Only we humans can dissolve the Grid with a common effort. 

Lastly, in this direct hierarchy we have the Council of 9, which consists of 9 members of Royal Sirians 

and Sirian/Orion hybrids, such as MARDUK. They are the ones who have direct contact with the planets 

in the solar system. If we are to believe LPG-C, we also have a local Council of 12 operating here, 

directly on the Planet. If this is the case, it's a local council which doesn't necessarily answer to 

anybody higher than the Council of 9. 

So, this is more or less what we've learned from the channeled sources themselves, such as RA, 

Elohim, the Alpha Draconians, and the Cassiopaeans. It sure looks like a hierarchy in a Sirian Empire, 

doesn't it? It seems quite obvious who is in control. But is ENKI and his cohort in charge of everything 


248



in this "local universe"? Or is this just something they want us to believe? Are there also benevolent 

forces here who want to see us succeed on our own, or is it just us against the Sirian Alliance? 

No, we need to remember that the 4% universe is not a universe that is isolated from the KHAA; it's 

just the Sirian Overlords who have, with their superior technology, isolated us from the 100% universe. 

There are more beings out there, such as us humans in the future, who are also stuck in this specifically 

projected holographic universe, because they, too, have our DNA. Therefore, they never developed 

true multidimensionality where they could become members of the true Galactic Community, but a 

synthetic version of the same, built with a technology which makes them as imprisoned as we are. 

Earth is an Experiment, and it started out as a benevolent one. The Goddess wanted to see what 

happens if she created a type of being who voluntarily descended from Goddesshood to matter, as 

Guardians of a Living Library. This Experiment went just fine until Lucifer and his rebels, the Patriarchs, 

descended here as well and took over the place. They enslaved the androgynous race that lived here 

and started new genetic experiments to create a better, more sturdy slave race, because the Namlú'u 

were not built for slave labor. The rest is history, but the point is that Lucifer hijacked the Experiment 

and created his own, in which we still sit. He is even in charge of our evolvement and have thus created 

false routes to false higher densities and dimensions, where more spiritually evolved beings can 

ascend. However, the Sirian Alliance is waiting for us in whichever dimension we evolve to and 

manipulate us further from there unless we educate ourselves and learn to distinguish between friend 

and foe! Evolve with help from technology and you'll end up like the Grays, or evolve from educating 

yourself and raise your own frequency, and you'll end up in the KHAA -- the real universe in which you 

belong. No rusty spaceships needed there, and no Gray "space suits". That's only in the 4% universe. 

RA makes the Council of Zendar look benevolent and is there in order to protect us. Depending on 

how you look at that, it is true in a sense. They, and the Sirian "Guardians" are protecting us from 

ourselves and from other potential star races whom they do not want to interfere with their 

Experiment. They have plans for us, and they don't want us to know that from being told by another 

star race how things really are, or they don't want us to find out by just going out there and start 

mingling with those who would mean us well. Thus, so many precautions. 

Before we move on to the rest of the Galactic Organizations, I want to suggest to the reader that 

perhaps all the ones that you have heard of are not benevolent. This doesn't mean that benevolent 

ones don't exist, but they won't make their present known. They have very strict protocols how things 

should be done, and that does not include hovering around in spaceships in the atmosphere and tease 

ignorant humans, making them believe they are seeing UFOs. The UFOs from the benevolent ones -- 

the few that are here -- are cloaked and not of the 4% universe dimensions. Therefore you can't see 

them, except on rare occasion, when they are accidentally bleeding through and mysteriously 

disappear. But if you see triangular space craft or other nuts and bolts UFOS, it's our own military 

testing ET technology, or military and ETs working together with human/ET technology. Even most of 

the UFOs that appear and suddenly disappear are not the real deal; it's government/military 

technology again, showing off in order to prepare people for a more space oriented future. 

As I am writing this, Dr. Steven Greer and his team are almost finished with their "Sirius Movie" 

(interesting title), which will launch in California in April 2013, with a huge promotion program. It will 

show us a lot of filmed "UFOs" (or should I say military holograms, conveniently showing up wherever 

Dr. Greer and his followers happen to be?), and promote that we need to go from using oil to zero 

point energy. That sounds all good, but there is also a big promotion of technology in everything Greer 


249



is doing, and he is never talking about true multi-d, where we travel in our thought. Instead, he is 

saying that all ETs are good and we should embrace them all and learn from them. Dr. Greer, dear 

reader, is a very powerful tool in the upcoming Machine Kingdom and nano-technology research. 

Greer has the kind of backup so he can potentially pull something like this off, and we are getting 

closer to the "splitting of the worlds". I just want to mention this, because I read about it yesterday. 

The sad thing is that this former Emergency Room doctor knows exactly what he is doing. He is not 

being manipulated! 

iii.viii. The Nibiruan Council and the Galactic Federation of Worlds 

Now it starts to get really interesting, because we are getting down to a level where the Sirians, who 

are directly involved with Earth (the old Sumerian characters themselves) are getting involved in the 

channeling, as it appears. 

Figure 7 and 8. Lyssa Royal and Jelaila Starr, respectively 

The Nibiruan Council is channeled by Jelaila Starr, who in my opinion has an interesting, hybrid-like 

look to her, just like Lyssa Royal (fig. 7 and 8). When I read through the material on her website, 

http://www.nibiruancouncil.com/, a certain pattern starts to emerge; a pattern the reader is going to 

be aware of as well when we move along to the Ashtar Command and The Galactic Federation of Light. 

Mrs. Starr claims to be a 9th Dimensional walk-in (and if so, she's operating from the KHAA, just like 

Abraxas of the Thuban Council), and charges $125.00 to find out if you happen to be a Council member 

as well. She and her husband have thousands of members all over the United States, and once you 

enter their workshop, according to former members, uncomfortable cult-like mind control is starting to 

show its face. You are told that it's your free choice to do whatever you like, but if you don't do what 

they teach you, you will miss the stargate and thus the ascension. It's apparently fear-based in order to 

bring in as much $$ as possible. A six days "Galactic Training" by the way, cost $800.00 in 1994. 


250



Figure 9. Jehova and Jelaila Starr in her natural 9D state. She is a Feline, 

and she does what she can to look cat-like in her human picture (see fig. 8) 

According to Starr and her husband, whom she is working together with, Nibiru is certainly not the 

home planet of the Sirians, but instead a Battleship (so far, I couldn't agree more). It contains a mish 

mash of galactic races, travelling in this hollowed-out planet(!) across the universe to bring peace and 

happiness wherever they appear (well, now we start to disagree, I believe. Peace-bringing force???). 

The Nibiruan Council is the largest of a number of Councils all over this, and other universes, Starr 

says, and the 9th Dimensional members meet in what they call the "Great Hall", a place where they 

discuss how to easier bring peace into the universes. 

Figure 10-12. Feline, human, and Reptilian from "Nibiruan Council Website" 

The Galactic Federation of Worlds is, according to her website, the largest federation in the 

universe, and was founded at the end of the First Galactic War that was fought in the Lyra constellation 

between Lyrans, Reptilians, Felines, and Carians. They now wanted to avoid a similar war to happen 

again, so the GF (Starr's abbreviation of the Galactic Federation) was founded by beings from Lyra and 

Orion. They claim that today there are millions of members across the galaxy. 


251



In fig. 9 we see Jelaila Starr in her natural state, married to the Reptilian Jehova. However, she could 

not make this "alliance marriage" last because of Jehova's continuous wars. This story is of course 

stolen from a true one, which was the alliance marriage between the Orion Queen and the Sirian King 

of Kings. So, indirectly she is accusing the Orion/Sirian alliance marriage to have broken up, and this 

because the Orion Queen started a lot of wars. If we turn that around, we come closer (but only closer) 

to the truth. 

Figure 13. Devin 

Above (fig.13) we can see Devin, the "reigning patriarch of the Royal House of Avyon". He is Jelaila's 

brother and Guide while she resides in 3D, and it's interesting to hear that he is a patriarch, and in the 

same article she mentions hers and Nibiru's connection to Sirius: 

"Jehowah is the current ruling patriarch of the 9D Royal House of Aln. Enki is the reigning 

patriarch of the 5D House of Aln at this time. Until recently, Marduk, Enki’s firstborn son was the 

current commander of the Federation Flagship Nibiru, having seized control of it from his 

grandfather Anu."[31] 

iii.ix. The Ashtar Command and the Galactic Federation of Light 

This is a pretty interesting crew of "Ascended Masters". It's very well-known and supported in New 

Age circles, but doesn't start there. It goes back at least to Helena Blavatsky and her "Great White 

Brotherhood" (white as in light). This is all obviously Sirian in nature, and they don't make any efforts 

to hide this either, as we will find out. But let's start with how they promote themselves in present 

time, which I want to concentrate most of Level III on, anyway. 

As the reader can see so far, all these Galactic Organizations are Sirian in nature, and so are all the 

"bottom" ones; they only differ in name and approach in order to reach as many people as possible 

and pull them into a common belief system of gods and external saviors. What these Sirian 

organizations have in common as well is that they are quite popular, because the Overlords have found 

a niche that is working. Such as this: 


252



"Ashtar Command is a service-oriented, peace-keeping fleet with craft from at least a dozen 

major galactic civilizations integrated into a unified command structure. It serves in different 

places, and in different capacities, throughout the galaxy as the need arises."[28] 

Furthermore, it says on the same website as the above quote is borrowed from (a website 

supported by both Dr. Richard Boylan and Dr. Michael Salla, by the way. What is up with all these PhDs, 

one may wonder?) that the core system of the Ashtar Command include Sirius B, Arcturus, Aldebaran, 

and Altair. I also find it amusing how we always see Sirius A, B, and C as 3 totally independent star 

systems. Of course they are not. They are extraordinary close in their location to each other and are of 

course all under the command of the Sirian Overlords (if Sirius C even has inhabited planets orbiting it 

anymore since it went nova). Regardless, it is obvious, and even logical, that the wolfen/reptilian 

Overlords are the commanders of the whole Sirian star system. 

Lord Ashtar and his crew are supposedly the military force operating in the spaces around our 

planet to protect us from intruders. They are in direct connection with Sirius, where they return every 

now and then to attend the vast Sirian learning centers[29]. Otherwise, they are members of a larger 

space organization called the Federation of Planets, which supposedly is like an interplanetary United 

Nation System[30], but differs from the Confederation of Planets, which we talked about earlier, which 

requires that the members as Social Memory Complexes, something the Sirians are not, albeit Dr. 

Bordon in his essay, The LINK, suggests that they are on the brink of getting there. 

Figure 14. Commander Ashtar and his Space Fleet 

So the Ashtar Command is the airborne division of the Brotherhood of Light in today's channeling, 

under the administrative direction of Commander Ashtar. His spiritual guide is Lord Sananda, also 

known as Jesus[32]. This is the first real reference in my papers to whom I call "Space Jesus". Lord 

Sananda (interestingly enough we are going to hear the title "Lord" many times in these "lower" level 


253



channelings) is mentioned ever so often in conjunction with Commander Ashtar, but is also channeled 

by himself by quite a few New Age channelers. And who is this Space Jesus who is referred to so often 

and is also said to be returning in a Second Coming? Well, I haven't seen it mentioned directly 

anywhere, but to me it's obvious that Lord Sananda is Lord ENKI, who is the sole "Second Coming of 

Jesus", just as he was the First Coming, too. 

The Jesus story is a complex one. In reality, ENKI himself, or his counterpart, incarnated into his own 

pure bloodline here on Earth around 2,000 years ago, just as he before that incarnated as Osiris and 

Mithra to mention a few. So, as Osiris he incarnated as his own grandson, which is not so strange if we 

know how souls can split themselves, or when their physical bodies die, they take a new one. 

So, is the Jesus story of the Bible true? Did Jesus/ENKI actually perform all these miracles? My 

research has led me to conclude that he did perform some of them, while other magical acts were 

made up in order to more easily construct a religion around his incarnation. He also had a "twin 

brother" according to some records, who was not really his twin, but step-brother, ENLIL. And yes, 

Jesus got married and this "new" bloodline still exists today within the Global Elite. ENKI did not die on 

the cross, but was most possibly swapped with somebody else, while ENKI himself, in this incarnation, 

went to Europe and much later died somewhere in Tibet. So that part of the story, told in the book, 

"Holy Blood, Holy Grail" is true, although the authors never made the connection to ENKI (or it was 

purposely withheld). At this point, I am not even so sure that the Sirian Overlords mind if I mention the 

ENKI/Jesus story, because now when the Age of Aquarius is starting, ENKI is returning, and I believe 

that at that time the true Jesus story (or a version of it) will be told to us, because it fits the Agenda. 

Figure 15. Commander Ashtar (left) and Lord Sananda/ENKI (right) 

Indeed, the Ashtar Command, in addition to being a peace-bringing universal force (according to 

channeled material), is also the "Servants of the Most Radiant One", which is the Christ, or Lord 


254



Sananda. They are also, interestingly enough, "the midwives in the birthing of humanity from densephysical 

to physical-etheric bodies of light, capable of ascending into the fifth dimension along with the 

Earth."[33] So, here is another armada, apparently consisting of millions of spaceships, helping us in 

our ascension/Harvest process. And who said we are alone in the universe? Well, much of this is 

figuratively speaking, because the Alliance wants us to have the key parts of the story together 

regardless of whom we are listening to -- the RA Material or Ashtar-Athena. They want us to know that 

there will be a Harvest (and it will), and it's all for the good. However, in their minds, we humans are 

too dumb and foolish to manage that process ourselves, so these ever-so-kind beings have even 

prepared new bodies for us. Of course, they are not telling us that these new bodies will also, just like 

our 3D bodies, contain the holographic implant of a 4% universe. To the Sirians it is very important that 

we believe in their story of the Harvest, so they can provide us with the correct kind of bodies, because 

if we do our ascension process all by ourselves, lo and behold! we may end up in bodies that don't 

contain the implants and holographic images, with most of our DNA intact! 

But it's getting better: 

"A major focus at this time is the activation of the collective Messiah, the 144,000 ascended 

masters (referred to as Eagles within the Command) who form the Legion of Special Volunteers. 

These are the star-seeded emissaries from the Office of the Christ, through the interstellar 

Councils of Light, here on earth assignment. Their awakening is crucial to the transition of the 

planet. 

Hence, we and our earth-based representatives are here to facilitate the awakening of the 

Eagles and other Light servers. Our mission administers the sacred ordinances of the Lord God 

Most High and functions through the Elohim, the Councils of Orion, the Great Central Sun 

hierarchy and Order of Melchizedek."[34] 

Once again we hear about the 144,000. It's mentioned in the Bible, and they want us to really have 

that figure in our heads. In relation to previous material I have presented, I think it's fairly easy for the 

reader to interpret the above quote by "Adonia". Just like I have done in the Level III papers, they want 

people to eventually put the pieces together, hoping they have done a good job enough for us 

"dummies" to "get it". With "get it" they mean getting their dumbed-down version, which teaches that 

it's all benevolent, and that we shouldn't fear if millions of souls are coming to Earth and help us out in 

the "dressing rooms" to make sure our new bodies fit. "Oh, a little too much fat at the waist? Sure, 

we'll just adjust your light-body a little bit!" 


255



Figure 16. The Sirian Lord Sai Baba, the "Tenth incarnation of Lord Vishnu"??? 

The Ashtar Command channeling is the source which is really promoting the Second Coming of 

ENKI/Christ with full blast. They go on and on about how wonderful it's going to be. They also mention 

that all true, spiritual teachers or avatars represent a multidimensional collective, focalized and 

extended through "The Office of the Christ". This office is anchored as a Trinity, and it's currently held 

by Lord Jesus, Lord Moses and Lord Elijah. (Amen). They even say that the pedophiliac guru, Sai Baba, 

has ascended to Cosmic Christhood and also Father-Mother Godhood "as an extremely rare full avatar, 

known as the Kalkhi Avatar or tenth incarnation of Lord Vishnu."[35] Wonderful! Another sex-fixated 

Sirian Lord ascending to the Heavens! 

The Ashtar Command makes sure we understand that the 144,000 is not a limit of how many will 

ascend to the 5th Dimension. Of course not, we have 220 million intruders on their way, more than 

willing to possess whomever they wish. But first they must have the permission, something they 

already have by now, many times over. Not from 220 million humans, but from those who we've put in 

Office to represent us. This is well hidden in seemingly super-benevolent messages like this: 

"We abide strictly within Confederation policy of noninterference with free will. While we may 

point out the possible consequences of some of your choices of action, we allow you to live, 

express and govern your lives and planet as you choose. The only exception would be if your 

actions could jeopardize survival of your planet and populations a whole or have repercussions 

throughout the rest of the solar system. We are, however, always available to respond to your 

specific requests for assistance. We are enthusiastic about joining with you in more conscious 

interaction and co-creative endeavor."[36] 

"Requests for assistance" and "joining with you in more conscious interaction and co-creative 

endeavor" certainly have double-meanings. Say that they want to intrude. They already have the 

permission, so they are not breaking the Confederation policy of noninterference. The interaction they 

are talking about sounds like a cozy thing, but if you think about it in regards to possession, that part of 

the quote has its second meaning, for sure. 

When we continue researching this source, they too recognize only one race, "the race of humanity 

-- heavenly Universal Man." But overall, they are doing a good job presenting a pretty positive picture 


256



of themselves, although one give-away that they often use is UTU SMAMASH's Winged Sun Disc as 

their logo, and they don't hide their connection with Sirius, because they want to put Sirius in a 

benevolent light. 

On the following website, where they are channeling Ashtar Sheran (another name for Commander 

Ashtar), the following is revealed about the Ashtar mission: 

"The Ashtar Command has a multifaceted mission. The first mission is to assist the 

transformation of humanity and planet Earth from the present third/fourth dimension to the 

fifth dimension and Earth's seventh Golden Age. The second mission is to maintain the stability 

of the Earth's polar axis and continually monitor its magnetic field. The third mission is that The 

Ashtar Command is prepared, if necessary, to evacuate the planet and relocate the total 

population in the event of a natural catastrophe. The fourth mission is the return to Earth of the 

Christ and other Lords of Light. The fifth mission is to bring planet Earth into the United 

Confederation of Planets."[37] 

This sounds very familiar, of course, and seems to be almost a common mission statement for all 

these channeled sources that have anything to do with the Harvest. And we know of the Confederation 

of Planets from the RA Material, and it's covered in this paper (see subsection iii.iv.). According to RA, 

we have to be a social memory complex before we can apply for membership to the Confederation, so 

does this mean that Ashtar and Lord ENKI want to create a collective consciousness of mankind? Yes, 

why not? If you were them, wouldn't that be a great plan? If we're all One Mind, although separated in 

bodies and souls, we could very easily be manipulated into doing exactly what the Overlords want us 

to do without any protests. Once the "One Mind" has agreed, it's a done deal. Isn't that what the 

Machine Kingdom in its extension is all about, anyway? 

I have often mentioned that the Sirian Alliance has as its main goal to take over the Goddess' role as 

the One Creator. The Queen of the Stars is related to Orion. Orion is the star constellation, and it's 

those related to the word Orion that the Sirians want us to concentrate on as our main enemies. Every 

now and then they give a hint. So also Ashtar: 

"Many of the Ashtar Command walk among us on our streets on Earth without us even being 

aware of it. The Ashtar Command serves in a certain sense as heaven’s policemen, there are 

actually six planets in the Orion system, and a group called the Deros, from inner space, that 

have had to be cordoned off so beware of anything to do with the Orion Nebula."[38] 

It looks like here they are referring to the old battles that took place around 500,000 years ago, 

when the Sirian Alliance landed on Earth and defeated the Orions who were here at the time. I 

described that in detail in Level II. 

On almost all websites that are talking about, or are channeling the Ashtar Command, they say that 

Ashtar is working in tight connection with the Arcturians. We are manipulated to believe that the 

Arcturians are non-physical, or interdimensional beings of light, who are very benevolent, and if there 

are any allies of mankind, it would be them. But of course, the rabbit hole goes deep. Most people I 

know think the Arcturians are our allies, but then again, how could they, if they work with the Ashtar 

Command? I also clearly recall that Michael Lee Hill, who says he is in contact with the Sirians (and I 

doubt it not), also has a highly evolved Arcturian friend, who supports his Sirian connection. Well, 

things are coming together. 


257



Before we move on, I want to add that the Federation the Ashtar Command works for goes under 

many names. One of those we already know as the Confederation of Planets. Another one is the 

Galactic Federation of Light. These are one and the same. Almost every truthseeker is familiar with the 

Galactic Federation of Light, and they either think it's good, or it's bad. Many also know they are 

connected with the Ashtar Command, and then it depends of what they think of Ashtar. There is no 

doubt, however, that the GFL (common abbreviation of the Galactic Federation of Light) is connected 

with the Sirians. 

A lady who signs off as "Mary Lou" is right on the ball. She says on her website: 

"The Galactic Federation and an Earth Cataclysm 

On Sunday, June 6, 2010, Dennis Whitney, author of a blog called Strange Planet, posted an 

entry titled, "Who Is This Galactic Federation of Light? And When Will They Intervene, If They 

Really Do Exist?" 

Dennis seems convinced that the Galactic Federation [the GL has recently added "of Light" to 

their name] is genuinely concerned about the human race and that they're standing by to help 

in case of a catastrophic emergency [most likely one that they would like to create]. 

If you read Dennis' blog, particularly the section that contains a message from the Ashtar 

Command, you'll learn that in the event of an Earth cataclysm, the GL wants to "levitate" 

humans to their small ships that will then act as taxis to and from their larger ships. Fortunately, 

there are enough people saying Prayers at Sun Events in advance of a GL-planned cataclysm that 

this is not going to happen. 

Mary Jo "[39] 

The link Mary Jo is providing is dead, but her statement says it all. Why do you think they come in 20 

million ships? Didn't Abraxas say in the Gaia thread that each human who is getting harvested is going 

to get their own spaceship? She did! But why and for what purpose? They have not told us that. 

However, from what we already know, we can make a qualified guess. Why do some of these 

channeled sources say that the transmission to the 5th Dimension will happen here and "now", 

meaning before the person is dead and enters the astral? And that there will be earthquakes and 

catastrophes for those who stay behind? This is possibly the reason why some say that the ones who 

qualify will be "levitated" in spaceships, and that there will be little hope for many of those who stay 

behind. However, if that is what's going to happen, it's going to be staged. It's not going to be natural! 

Regardless of what is coming down, it's important that we're "going up", so to speak. We need to 

really work on our own energy fields so we are not available for this kind of nonsense -- none of it. 

People need to realize that we can do it and that it's no fairytale! These things can be simulated in labs. 

If something vibrates fast enough, it's going to be invisible in relation to what is vibrating slower. And it 

may sound unbelievable, but the difference in vibrations between those who are not spiritual at all and 

those who are, is way apart! It's just hard to imagine because we can't see it with our naked eyes, but 

we can feel it. 

Personally, I'm not an oracle, a prophet, or a fortune teller, but I have intuition, and I am learning to 

think and feel with my heart chakra, getting better and better at it. This has helped me a lot over the 

years, and what I feel in regards to this is that there will be a splitting of worlds. Of all the research I've 


258



done on this, that's what definitely feels like the correct thing. And not only does it feel right, it's also 

how the energetic Multiverse works. It's a natural process. Of course, that process can be interrupted 

by malevolent forces, such as the Sirians, if they want that to happen, but knowing their tactics fairly 

well (they are more predictable than they may think), all it is is fear mongering, which they feed on. 

They need people to serve them, and they need the Machine Kingdom to become reality. That is what 

they really aim for. Also remember that the Sirians' hands are tied, too, in certain ways. They have to 

restrict themselves to following the Law of Free Will, and that's why they are really afraid we're going 

to see through their manipulation. Because when that's done, and if we need help to run them off, 

there are benevolent forces that will see to that it will happen. There are many out there who are just 

waiting for the Sirians to make a mistake so they can run them off. It was easy to take over the planet 

once upon a time when those who lived here were unprepared, but the situation is different now. 

Figure 17. GFL and the Ashtar Command mass landing in 2012. 

The Sirians want to spread confusion, because that's how they can keep people from knowing 

what's really going on. A perfect example is the following link, 

http://www.galacticfederationoflight.info/, which is the Galactic Federation of Light's website. The 

headline says: "Galactic Federation of Light Ashtar Command, Worldwide Disclosure 2012!" 

Underneath it says there is supposed to be a mass landing and a disclosure before 2012 is over (this 

was written before 2012, obviously). The GFL and the Ashtar Command were supposed to come down 

and pick people up, and we all know that that didn't happen. But the page is still up, and that's not by 

accident. They want to confuse us out of necessity. 

Still from the GFL's website; here is their Sirian connection clearly documented. They are also 

promoting Sheldan Nidle, who is an obvious disinfo agent. 

"'I am SaLuSa from Sirius, and tell you that our ships are gathering for the grand announcement 

that will allow us to land on your Earth by invitation.' 

- SaLuSa / through Mike Quinsey 20th July 2011"[40] 


259



So, Mike Quinsey is promoting SaLuSa from Sirius, and Dr. Michael Salla, known exopolitical 

researcher, embraces Mike Quinsey, so what do we make out of that? Who can we trust? And here is 

another lie the GFL has spread: 

"Then there was a flurry of bold maneuvers this summer which terminated the existence of 

many dark-run underground facilities and their access tunnels. These actions led to the arrest of 

tens of thousands of dark subordinates."[41] 

Of course there were no mass arrests, but who else was spreading similar lies last year? Benjamin 

Fulford and David Wilcock. Although, to be honest, I believe David is genuine, even though I don't 

agree with much of what he's teaching, but Fulford knows exactly what he's doing -- spreading disinfo. 

He was talking about Global Elite mass arrests until his face went blue, and he called up one witness 

after the other; one less credible than the other. He gave date after date and nothing happened, and 

still people continued listening both to him and Wilcock, who tirelessly parroted Fulford, word by 

word, on his Divine Cosmos website. Now we get a hint on whom Fulford is working for. 

Figure 18. An introspect Benjamin Fulford 

The New Age term "light-workers" also stems from the Galactic Federation of Light, and is therefore 

a term I avoid in my own research. I do not like to be called a light-worker, because I am not associated 

with GFL. 

IV. Afterword 

The reader may think; why is all this so negative? Where are the good ones, and how come that all 

these federations and councils seem to be working against us? The answer is quick and simple: we are 

stuck in what I call a 4% universe, and therefore, what is affecting us is the 4% universe. It's because 

this is where we perceive that we're living. This 4% universe is set up by malevolent forces, so 

therefore what we need to learn first is often of a malevolent nature. The 4% universe is heavily 

controlled with hologrammic equipment. Think the "Matrix Series". If people would only understand 

how much truth there is in those movies! 

It is quite clear to me by now that the 4% universe is all about humans in different stages of 

development. The oppressors knew that mankind was going to evolve; it's such a natural state of being 

that they can't really stop that process. So ENKI and his cohorts had to think out a universe where even 

those who evolve stay trapped. Of course, he knows how dimensions and densities work in the "real" 

universe, so he just had to mimic that and program it into the "software", which is the human body. 


260



The hardware are the hologrammic computer systems which keep it all in place. Hence, we ended up 

with eight dimensions within which we are free to evolve, similar to how it would look like in the 96% 

universe. The whole difference, however, is that in the 4%, everything is controlled. 

So how come there are only humans in the 4% universe? It's because it's the human template -- the 

human DNA -- that is trapped! It's humanity as a whole and no one else. The universe outside the trap 

is teeming with life in all shapes and forms, but in the free universe you are also free to travel across 

the dimensions. Evolution in the 96%, from what I understand, is mostly a process of learning about 

oneself. By learning about oneself in the free universe we can create so much more, and it becomes a 

universe of magic! Yes, there are stars and galaxies and all the rest of it in the 96% as well -- that's the 

"hardware" -- but by living as a spiritual being in that hardware universe you are absolutely free to 

create anything and travel instantly wherever you want. The only restriction is your own imagination! 

That is why art in all its forms is considered so valuable here; people have this feeling that we can 

create universes with it, and we can! 

The 4% universe has its timelines, and humans have evolved on several of them. Some became nonphysicals, 

who can travel the dimensions, using stargates and star-lanes, and others became the Grays. 

Not all beings in the 4% need spaceships to travel; some actually seem to have developed nano-travel, 

but only within the 4%. Like Abraxas says, you can't get to the 9th Dimension without permission. And 

who is giving us that permission? Well, we already know the answer to that. However, this is all based 

on restrictions built into, and strands taken away from, our DNA, now lying dormant. This is why those 

who decide to evolve without help from Sirian technology, and who have seen through the veil of 

manipulation, can reshape their whole RNA/DNA structure and no longer be stuck in the hologram. 

This is what I am talking about. Those who decide to take this route don't have to go through lifetimes 

after lifetimes of being stuck in a restricted universe that is controlled; we can do it by reconstructing 

our light-body, using our Fire. See the trap for what it is and the trap will eventually disappear, because 

it's held in place by frequency. Supersede that frequency band and you're out of here! 

In elementary school we learnt about the electromagnetic spectrum. A tiny bit of it is visible, but 

most of it is not. We are stuck in the visible spectrum, which is the 4% universe. Increase your vibration 

until you start perceiving things outside this tiny piece of spectrum and you are breaking down the 

prison walls. If you're reading this, you are already well on your way of doing that! Oh, but you are not 

feeling very psychic? Don't worry, you will. In fact, you already are psychic, but it takes more to shatter 

the Quarantine, the Grid, and all the rest of it, before you can really break through. Some people have 

become quite psychic over the last few years, but those who feel they have not, although they've been 

working at least as hard on it, need not to worry. For you it will eventually come in "bigger chunks", 

once you let go. Again, do not worry -- it will happen if you consistently keep doing what you're doing 

to raise your frequency. You are not "behind" in your development because you are not as psychic as 

your friend. No comparison between us is necessary and should be avoided; every one of us needs to 

work on ourselves and everything will be just fine. 

Out there in the 96% universe our friends are waiting. All those who are monitoring our progress 

now and at the same time are benevolent and really love mankind are doing so, not from the 4% as 

much as from the 96%. Everybody in the 4% universe has an agenda whether they are benevolent 

beings or not. In a prison, everybody's agenda is to get out. The Multiverse, however, is benevolent 

and loving; the restricted 4% universe is not. A million words can be spent on talking about the "real" 

universe, but I believe no one can make it justice. Imagine a universe where you can create freely 

without having some government or organization telling you to stop doing it. The reader gets the drift, 


261



I'm sure, and can see the difference between enslavement and freedom, as much as it is possible to 

see it from our restricted perspective. 

Those who tell you that we need to evolve so we can join this or that Galactic Federation of Council 

are either trying to manipulate you, or they are themselves deceived. The federations they are talking 

about exist in the 4% universe, and we should have no interest in joining any of them. This is why I like 

the Pleiadians. They don't tell you about the 4% vs. the 96% universe, but they answer people's 

questions insightfully so we can really gain from the reply and comments that often follow, once they 

have our permission to talk about it. They know what this is all about, and as I am researching it on my 

own, I ever so often get things that the Pleiadians have said verified. Over and over, this is happening. 

They, too, don't want us to join any of these space organizations, because they obviously know they 

are not in our best interest. 

Our job, if we really want to break out, is to work on ourselves and get to the KHAA. It will happen 

on a one on one basis and rarely in a group. We have to earn it from hard work -- that's the only way. 

But once we've mastered it, there are beings on the other side who will be extremely happy to see us -- 

each and every one of us. This I can confirm! 

But is the 96% really such a Paradise all the time? No, it's not. There are warlike beings there, too, 

because you are free to create what you want, but you have the freedom not to mingle with them. No 

one is going to draft you; if you go to war, it's your own choice. 

So, no Galactic Federation for us; we don't need them, and they will drag us down into the rabbit 

hole again. No, thank you! We are on our own with lots of benevolent beings watching over us, and 

"being on our own" in the evolving process is actually not a bad thing. You are the only one who knows 

what is best for you, anyway. How can somebody else tell you? You are a unique being after all, in an 

intelligent cosmos. Use what you have and you will notice that you have more than you could imagine 

even in your wildest dreams. It's not that we have to work to get to a state of being of some star races, 

either. Our state of being is already divine and magnificent. Other star races are jealous, but the 

benevolent ones are jealous in a "good way". We just need to see the light at the end of the tunnel, 

and I'm not talking about the astral light between lives... 

[Last note: There are certain federations and councils I have not brought up here because of space 

issues. I meant to mention The Guardian Alliance, for example, who are data streamed by A'shayana 

Deane, but decided not to. Her information is too complicated to even start getting into in a paper like 

this. I honestly do not know who the Guardian Alliance are, as they seem to be in conflict with the 

Thuban Council, but it could be because there are different factions within the Sirian Alliance as well, 

who don't totally agree with each other. However, after have read the "Voyagers" books, I do not have 

a good feeling about any of it. It is extremely fear-based and technical, and thus very hard to 

understand for the average person who is not highly educated in quantum physics etc. The information 

also often contradicts everything you learn elsewhere. The reader is of course free to have their own 

opinion about the Guardians, but mine is that they are definitely not working in our favor.] 


262



Love, 


Notes and References: 

[1] The Thubans mention Sirius a lot, and want to push that the Sirians are our friends, by pushing that the dogs are the 

manifestation of Sirian on Earth, and that the first stargate will be opened between Sirian and our Sun. This stargate is most 

probably already open. 

[2] J.J. Hurtak, "The Keys of Enoch", ©1977 edition, op. cit. p.571. 

[3] http://lawofone.info/results.php?q=council+of+nine 

[4] ibid. 

[5] Wynn Free: "The Creator Gods of this Universe Want to Talk to You", op. cit. p.85. 

[6] http://www.bibliotecapleyades.net/vida_alien/alien_galacticfederations20.htm 

[7] http://www.alexcollier.org/alex-collier-et-overview-1994/ 

[8] ibid. 

[9] http://www.alexcollier.org/alex-collier-4th-5th-density-1995/, op. cit. 

[10] ibid. 

[11] ibid. 

[12] Elkins, Rueckert, McCarty: "The RA Material -- The Law of One", Session 6, Question 8. 

[13] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ninurta 

[14] Cassiopaean session #941022 

[15] Elkins, Rueckert, McCarty: "The RA Material -- The Law of One", Session 7, Question 12 (= 7.12). 

[16] http://www.illuminati-news.com/council-of-nine.htm 

[17] http://jims-01.blogspot.com/2009/08/bashar-this-terminal-has-no-more-data.html 

[18] http://www.illuminati-news.com/council-of-nine.htm 

[19] Elkins, Rueckert, McCarty: "The RA Material -- The Law of One", 7.10. 


263



[20] 21.3. 

[21] 39.7-8. 

[22] 84.7. 

[23] 7.9. 

[24] http://www.bibliotecapleyades.net/sociopolitica/esp_sociopol_council9_11.htm 

[25] http://www.birthofgaia.com/t116p120-abraxas-thuban-qa 

[26] Wynn Free: "The Creator Gods of the Physical Universe Want to Talk to You" p.7, op. cit. 

[27] ibid. p.14, op. cit. 

[28] http://www.bibliotecapleyades.net/vida_alien/esp_vida_alien_18z.htm 

[29] http://www.siriusascension.com/extraterrestrials.htm 

[30] http://www.telefonica.net/web2/paramahamsa/galacticfederation.htm 

[31] http://www.nibiruancouncil.com/html/houseofaln.html# 

[32] http://www.bibliotecapleyades.net/vida_alien/alien_galacticfederations05.htm 

[33] ibid. 




[37] http://www.ashtarauroraeagles.com/ashtar_ae_004.htm, op. cit. 

[38] http://www.bibliotecapleyades.net/vida_alien/esp_vida_alien_19a.htm#Ashtar Command, op. cit. 

[39] http://www.godsebook.org/galactic_federation.html 

[40] http://www.galacticfederationoflight.info/, op. cit. 

[41] ibid., op. cit. 


264



Paper #9: The Splitting of the Worlds Part 1: 

The Machine Kingdom 

by Wes Penre, Friday, April 5, 2013 


I. A General Look Ahead: 2013-2034 

Right now, in the aftermath of the nano-second, it seems like things have already started to slow 

down; almost like the "battle is over". The chaos and tumultuous time many of us experienced, 

especially at the end of the nano, looks like it has ended, and time is slowing down as well. All the above 

is at least what I am experiencing at the moment. I hadn't expected this, thinking that the train running 

out of control needed some time to turn on the brakes and actually adjust its speed back to normal. 

Instead, it's like someone stood on the brakes and it happened almost instantly. 

However, I know that this is not going to last, so if the reader feels similar to what I do, enjoy it, 

because in just a few years, things are probably about to change. We are just getting some breathing 

room now and a chance to recover. I would suggest that we all take a look at what we gained during the 

nano-second and make sure we start living what we've learned. Soon, there's not going to be any time 

to reflect and look at old notes to know what to do. Instead, we have to already live it, and hopefully it's 

now a part of the reader's reality and daily life. This is my hope, because we will need our increased 

vibrations, our calm, and our ability to separate ourselves from situations that will not benefit us. All this 

has to be a part of your very personality, and I trust it is. You now have some great knowledge that it will 

take the rest of humanity a very long time to catch up on (and the majority will never get to know it, 

unfortunately). 

In just a few years, around 2015 or so, things will probably start getting tumultuous again. Now, after 

the nano, it's very difficult for people to keep dirty secrets anymore. The vibration of the planet has 

indeed changed, and we are still, as a humanity, working out in which direction we want to go; even the 

Powers That Be are pondering exactly what to do, because they had no way of predicting exactly what 

would happen during the nano. Another big factor is that star beings from the Sirian Alliance have 

almost certainly already entered the bodies of many politicians, business leaders, religious leaders etc., 

and many things are to be adjusted. The real invasion, coming with the Superwave, is still to be 

expected, but those who were already here must by now have begun to enter our 3rd Dimension as 

walk-ins where they see fit. 

In the field of politics, not all politicians are going to be possessed by Sirian spirits, and some of them 

will be reluctant to the change that the new leadership will implement on us all, including the politicians 

that are not taken over. They will protest and try to prevent those changes from happening. These 

"obstacles" in the Sirian plans will be "taken care of", mostly by having their dirty laundry hung out in 

public. Most possibly, a lot of pedophilia, bribery, gambling with, and stealing, our tax money, and other 

serious crimes will be revealed in high places; much more so than has already happened. Remember 

when you read and hear about it, that most of these officials are being sacrificed because they can't 

adjust, or are doing or saying something that goes against the present or future Agendas. 


265



When this starts to happen on a grand scale, people will get very shocked and very angry. Few can't 

even in their wildest imagination picture what kind of crimes are committed behind the scenes. Some 

people will protest loudly and perhaps walk out in the streets in droves, trying to make a change, not 

understanding that this is useless. No change will come out of that, and our rage and emotions will give 

our extraterrestrial foes something more to feed from. Eventually, however, it may look like those in 

power are cleaning house by firing and prosecuting those whom they have decided to sacrifice. A new 

era, new policies. 

For a while it may look like the economy is on the rise, but the U.S. debt, and that of many other 

countries as well, are beyond recovery. There is no way the dollar can be saved in the long run. First of 

all, they are going to save money where they can, just like they do now, and more and more people will 

be unemployed. One of the few affluent businesses seems to be the war industry, which always needs 

people, and more so in the future. 

The bad economy will be one of the justification to continue building the Machine Kingdom. New 

technology will hit the market in super-speed, and it will be almost impossible to catch up with the 

technological development. We will see very advanced devices become smaller and smaller, and more 

and more efficient. Many people will love them, and the goal is to make these devices available to as 

many people as possible, in spite of the bad economy. Therefore, they are eventually going to make 

them fairly cheap so most people can buy them; just like almost every household today has at least one 

or two computers. When they spoke about having personal computers in every home more than 30 

years ago, people were laughing at such a utopic idea. Now we know better. 

The Machine Kingdom is going to creep up on us, and few are those who are going to notice. Even 

many of us who are "in the know" are going to go along with this as well, not realizing how it's creeping 

up on us. Sooner or later, those who don't notice at first probably will later and get a shock how they 

once again could be so deceived. But for those who don't know any of what is planned, there will be a 

very strange future, indeed. In the beginning they will think it's great and quite convenient. While this 

technology is building, the financial situation will eventually be resolved by most probably combine all 

currencies into one and flush the dollar down the drain, figuratively speaking. Most countries will 

eventually go along with this, and there will be a recovery. It's like starting from scratch. There may be 

other solutions that I'm not aware of, but of course, a resolution will dawn on us eventually, because it's 

needed when all the pieces that the Overlords want in place before they solve the financial problem, are 

laid out to their satisfaction. 

So, 2015-17 are most likely to be years when things are stirred up. But why these dates? It's based on 

astrology and the potential realities that are available to us at the moment. Just like the Pleiadians were 

the ones who coined the term "nano-second" and were right on the ball (or maybe I should say "right on 

the Bull", which will be a Pleiadian joke, them being from the constellation of Taurus, the "Bull"). These 

last 25 years have been just like they have predicted, with a few minor details being off due to the 

unpredictability of mankind that couldn't have been foreseen. These years I am now giving you, 

however, are based on their astrological calculations, which usually also normally have showed to be 

quite correct, but if it doesn't happen exactly when predicted, I am sure it will not be too far off. Then, 

again based on Pleiadian interpretation of astrology, it will be quite tough for many people who haven't 

prepared themselves spiritually and mentally from thereon and until around 2028, when things seem to 

stabilize again and we reach some kind of "zero point" from where timelines can really start to branch 

out. 


266



The Pleiadians say that something like a Machine Kingdom could be pretty much in place around 

2034, and it's based to some degree on the research and development within today's drug industry; and 

we're talking about legal drugs here. The pharmaceutical drugs we're taking are often made specifically 

to alter our DNA. Nano-technology is quite well established already. Particularly psychiatric drugs have 

nanobots in them that can alter the user on a genetic level and create a cyborg over time. 

I don't know when the Superwave will reach us, although the Andromedans mentioned December 

2013. If this is the case, the Pleiadians' predictions will be off. The Pleiadians have not mentioned any 

dates, other than there will be a Harvest coming up in the near future as the old age docks with the new. 

Others, like the WingMakers website, is talking about a "Grand Portal", which will be discovered in 2080. 

When I read about that particular event, I can't help but thinking that it is a cover story for the invasion. 

So perhaps he has that date correct, who knows? 

The Pleiadians don't talk too much about the Harvest, other than that there are benevolent and notat-all-benevolent 

beings involved in that process. With this they mean, from what I've been able to 

interpret, that there are actually those who are here to help us with the Harvest, and they are the 

original Founders of this planet, who are returning to see how we're doing. Not that they don't know -- 

they are keeping themselves informed -- but if this is true, what are they going to do? The Pleiadians 

themselves are not very keen on the Harvest in the way it's presented, and knowing them, the only 

"help" we would receive, if the original Founders are actually coming back, is as a support to support 

ourselves. Then again, knowing the Orions from extensive research, I doubt they are returning as long as 

the Sirians are here and we humans have not made up our minds how to unite in some kind of unified 

goal. The Orions, who are the Original Founders, will not interfere at all unless we as a species ask them 

to. Otherwise, they know from experience that we humans would see them as enemies. We are still too 

ignorant to understand who our friends are and who our foes are. 

What I think the Pleiadians got right is the fact that there are quite a few star races mingling with us 

here on Mother Earth at this time, aside from the Sirian Alliance. And more than that; beings who have 

long lived underground have been spotted in caves, caverns, on mountainsides, and coming up from the 

waters. 

There is also an Intelligence program run by the Global Elite to educate people on the ET issue to 

prepare us for things to come. We see a lot of History Channel documentaries regarding ETs and the 

ancient history about the "gods' who came down from Heaven. Of course, it's the simplified version that 

people's neurology can handle without freaking out, so it's the "soft version" we are getting right now. 

Science fiction movies are made, however, which are presenting a more realistic version of what this is 

all about. So it is coming out in the public, little by little, because they do want to prepare us. The ET 

issue is the next big thing we need to learn to cope with; we need to integrate it into our daily reality, 

just like we understand that the dinosaurs were real once upon a time, regardless of how huge and scary 

some of them looked. Still, forget about a big government disclosure in a manner that Steven Greer and 

others are promoting that it will happen -- it will not! And if it looks like it is, it's going to be fabricated 

and deceptive. Don't fall for it! The truth as it is will never be revealed in public by our "elected" 

Representatives. That would be suicide for them, because they have their gotten their hands way too 

dirty for that. 


267



Figure 1. Ancient Aliens on History Channel 

Anyway, back to the nano. To the reader: we are a whole lot wiser now than we were only 5-10 years 

ago, wouldn't you agree? Configure your own space and local universe exactly the way you want it, and 

then be a spectator for a while. Just make sure not to interact with any of that which must expose itself 

and do its thing. It's the sign of the times and must be played out before things can stabilize themselves. 

Let's look at it from a perspective of curiosity and even joy. The more we can relax, the better off we'll 

be. But of course, keep the antenna up and the bullshit detector on high. We have done well using our 

discernment so far, because we're all here, ready to complete whatever we're here for. So let us 

continue like we have. The Machine Kingdom will play out; there's no way around that either; and we 

will see it happen before our eyes. Now we have to use our brilliance that we all possess and cruise 

smartly through the upcoming years. That way we can effectively avoid the booby traps that are laid out 

for us, because we know where they are. The future will be everything from people who 100% embrace 

the Machine Kingdom to those who do not want to have anything to do with technology at all and will 

move out in nature, far from the SmartCities that are going to be built and constructed out of the old 

cities and metropolitans, and there will be everything in between. What will you do to make sure you do 

the correct thing? I would say, go with the flow and make smart decisions. If you want to go out and live 

isolated in nature, perhaps together with a group and plant your own food, go for it! Or, if you feel safe 

and stable where you are at the moment and think you can see the stability continue even in the future, 

you don't necessarily need to change anything. One thing, however, that is very important, is that we all 

in one way or other connect more with Mother Nature. If people understood who Mother Earth is, they 

would go out and kiss the ground in pure joy. Think about it; why are pagans celebrating her as the 

Goddess? 

II. The New SmartCities 

Many people are asking me why the Sirian Overlords who took over the stewardship over Earth 

half a million years ago and created Homo sapiens didn't eventually take over the whole planet and 

moved in once and for all? 

That's a good question until we understand that they are not of the same frequency we are -- they 

are interdimensional, who basically have access to both our own eight dimensions of the 4% universe, 

and some of those of the lower sections of the KHAA. They didn't feel comfortable here after they had 

decreased the vibration of this version of Mother Earth. So, why do they want to come in now in droves, 

and perhaps stay here for a long time? What has changed? The answer is that they want to rule us from 


268



the New Earth, where she once again has raised her frequency with help from her Higher Self, the 

Galactic Center. The nano-second was also Mother Earth's chance to break her chains and regain a 

frequency she had once upon a time, before the invader force came. The Sun is sending messages to the 

Galactic Center -- the Womb of the Mother, the Birth Center -- and the Galactic Center is sending 

messages back to the Sun, who is then sending those messages to Mother Earth. It's a process from 

which Earth Mother gains and can recapture her old strength. The Overlords know this very well and 

they are not strong enough, and don't have the technology, to counter these enormous jolts of energy, 

hitting Earth in form of solar flares and by other, for us more invisible spectra. We humans are the Earth 

Children, and it is our job to help our Mother ascending. We, too, are taking on those jolts in our bodies 

and need to do that without being fried or getting our neurological system totally out of whack. We 

want to help our Mother, but also evolve together with her. This is also her wish, because we are her 

special children. The Sirian Elite have had a few choices to accomplish their goals; they can do walk-ins in 

order to control these new, enhanced bodies, which have their DNA and chakras opened and their Fire 

enhanced. This they have done a lot recently. Another option is to create hybrids that are not naturally 

evolved through the above process, but created by genetic manipulation to fit into the new frequency 

range. These hybrids have been created and are still being created as we speak, for millions of intruders 

to take over. 

No one went through the nano-second without changing their perceptions -- no one did! However, 

the majority of people decided, in their usual manner, to suppress their new abilities, blaming them on 

something else, telling themselves they can't exist, and then they try to go on with their lives just like 

before. This is not totally possible any longer, and those who suppress their own divine selves are the 

ones who are prospects for the new Machine Kingdom, where they can escape from their new abilities 

into the technological world which is emerging in front of their stunning eyes. These are the Machine 

Riders. They are the ones who will despise those who raise their consciousness naturally, because they 

themselves were too afraid to do it. I am not judging that, I'm just stating a fact. The Machine Riders will 

do anything to get the newest updates and dig deeper into the technological world and all cool things 

that happen in the SmartCities -- the giant metropolitans that will be built around the world; 

metropolitans that will make cities like Tokyo and New York like suburbs. In the SmartCities everything 

goes; you can buy anything for money. Why care for a partner? It's a lot of work. If you can't afford a 

robot as a partner, with whom you can have sex anytime and boss around like you wish, you can always 

go to a "smart prostitute"; a female or male robot who looks like something from your wildest dreams. 

They will be the sexiest being you'll ever see! The only problem is that they are machines, not humans. 

But no, that is not a problem; that's actually the solution! These robots don't have souls and are not 

conscious like you and I; they are programmed to respond to your every wish and sexual desire. You can 

do what you want, pay for it, and go away without having a bad conscience, because it was just a 

machine anyway. 


269



Figure 2. "Smart Prostitutes". Take your pick! 

III. "We Are Your Ancestors and Friends!" 

We know from previous papers that the Gray phenomenon is a pretty complex subject. There is 

not one answer to the Gray complex. Some of them were kidnapped from the Zeta Reticuli system after 

they had developed in the Vega system, and the kidnapping was executed by the Sirians. These Grays 

became slaves and front figures for the Sirian Overlords, who noticed they did great in space and could 

make long distant space travelling and prevail. Their bodies had adapted well to radiation due to their 

planetary history and could therefore survive the otherwise harsh conditions in space. At the same time 

they didn't need much food, and their intake was different from other sentient beings. The Sirians 

noticed all this and started making hybrids out of them that they could use themselves. They figured out 

that they could leave their original bodies in a sleep state at home and let their souls jump over to the 

Gray hybrid body with help from technology. Now they had the perfect space suit, looking a tiny bit 

different from the original Zeta Grays, because they were hybrids, but that was beneficial for them as it 

was easier to distinguish who was Sirian and who was an original Gray, I can imagine. Keep in mind that 

this was before Earth was invaded, so there was no "4% universe", and therefore, not all beings dwelling 

in a universe teeming with life were human in nature. 

Another type of Grays are us in the future, and they do dwell in the 4%, just like us. They will develop 

here on Earth in the future (and are actually being tested in space as we speak) and are the ones who 

come back from our future, trying to regain what they lost in the process. So these Grays have their own 

agenda, as we talked about before, and most of those who come back to our time, and who are basically 

not from too far in the future, are the most ruthless ones, because they are desperate and less evolved. 

Then there are those who are further away into the future and sometimes are more compassionate, like 

the Essassani Grays from beyond Orion. They, too, of course have their own agenda which is not 

compatible with ours, but there are those among them who don't like what's done to us humans during 

the abductions and try to prevent it. However, they are not always successful. 


270



Figure 3. Philip Krapf onboard a Verdant ship. (This is apparently the best picture 

we have of the Verdants, but these guys' skins are not green, however. 

Then there are apparently Grays from other galaxies visiting us as well, such as the Verdants. They 

differ from the Grays we are used to encounter, because apparently they have a greenish (verdant) skin 

instead of gray, white, or brown. These beings, if we are to believe George LoBuono and Philip Krapf[1], 

who first started talking about this species, are conquerors and could be bad news for us -- more so 

according to LoBuono than Krapf, as it were. 

Anyway, it's already confusing, but will be even more so in the near future when all these different 

types of Grays (or many of them) will show up. We can easily see how Harone, who channeled through 

Lyssa Royale and is a Zeta Gray, when he was trying to "comfort" us by saying there will be no invasion, 

he was truly manipulating us. What he said was that there can't even be an invasion, because that 

means that we humans are invading ourselves (referring to that all beings in this universe are 

humans)[2]. This, of course, is a clever way to justify their own presence on Earth. 

The Grays, in all instances, except when the Sirians are using their template as space suits, are Social 

Memory Complexes (SMC) and Collective Consciousness. I don't think all the channeled entities who say 

they are SMC are Grays, however, because some of them are not even physical anymore, and others are 

probably hybrids of other branches of humanity, on other timelines, but they do have one thing in 


271



common; they are SMC. Moreover, these channeled sources are doing their best to convince us that we 

should work on ourselves so we can ascend and eventually become SMC as well. 

But why is that? If these future humans actually want to regain the human abilities that they 

once had (our abilities), why do they want us to evolve to become like them? We would think 

they'd rather see us keep our individuality and evolve as unique and separate beings, right? The 

answer must be manipulation. We must never forget that those entities, the time jumpers from 

the future, have been heavily brainwashed and manipulated by their masters, the Sirian 

Overlords. And their masters have taught them that the way to evolve in this universe is to 

become an SMC. To us it may not make sense, because we haven't yet come to the point when 

this will be an issue. Hence, we still think in terms of individuality. 

I know that we've learned from the Law of One (such as the RA Material) that we are all 

working towards becoming one with Source (God), and that is our main goal. I object to that! In 

all honesty, I fell for this as well in the past when I first read the RA Material and thought it was 

great! I still think it's a good source of information, and I learned a lot from it, but it's biased 

because they are still caught in the 4% universe and they don't understand that. There are basic 

concepts that the RA people have incorrect, and therefore it affects the information as a whole, 

and we need to use good discernment when we read the Law of One books. Since the beginning 

of 2009, when I first came in contact with RA because of the Hidden Hand material, I have done 

excessive research into many fields, and my conclusion about humanity's goals, our purposes, 

where we're heading, and all that comes with it has changed quite drastically, as the reader may 

have noticed. I no longer subscribe to that we are working on becoming one (and thus a Social 

Memory Complex). We are here to explore the universe as individual versions of the Goddess 

energy, not as a group where all are One and have a various kind of collective thinking. The big 

difference between a collective group like that and separate beings like us is that the group 

agrees with each other, and if there are a few who don't agree with the rest, they will change 

their minds and give into the majority, because "the group is more important than the 

individual". This may be true under some circumstances, but is dangerous if made into a rule. If 

we become an SMC, individual thinking will be something of the past; you always have to bow 

down to the majority's decisions and the majority's view on things. This sounds like complete 

torture to me and doesn't even make sense. Here is a whole memory complex thinking one thing 

about something, instead of having millions of beings -- perhaps billions -- who could instead 

think individually and contribute so much more to the learning process. And in the extension of 

things, the Goddess, who created the universes in order to learn more about herself from an 

outside perspective, will learn more and quicker from individual thinking. One day, perhaps, our 

purpose will be to once again merge with the Goddess energy and go back from where we came, 

but that will be in a far distant future and nothing we even have to bother our minds with at this 

time (of course, on a multidimensional level it has already happened, as all time is simultaneous). 

We have more important issues to take care of. 

It is definitely my understanding that in the KHAA, the goal is not to become SMC. This is just 

something that is coming out of the Machine Kingdom, because the Alliance wants an obedient 

army and an obedient class of slaves. It's obvious if we put ourselves in their shoes; wouldn't we 

do something similar if we were them and had the technology and power to do so? If we wanted 

complete power, the optimum would be to only have to deal with one mind and one will, which 

through manipulation would be one (Sirian) mind and one (Sirian) will, wouldn't you agree? I 

must add here, however, that an SMC is not completely one mind and one soul, but a Machine 


272



Society where each individual still can think independently to a certain degree, but is forced to 

comply with the standard way of thinking on relevant issues. This will be more obvious as we 

move on through the paper. 

The simple but ingenious program the Overlords apparently are trying to set up here, and are well in 

the process of doing, is to first possess the pure bloodlines; foremost those of ENKI's, but all pure Sirian 

or Orion bloodlines would work, and those bloodlines are present in the Global Elite and the Royal 

Families. Many religious leaders, cult leaders, business moguls and international bankers have them, 

too. This stage of the plan is more or less completed, as far as I can see. The Global Elite as we know 

them are on a top level well aware of what is happening, and they are more than willing to sacrifice 

themselves to the gods, and to hand over their bodies to them. I would suggest that it will happen in 

two stages: 

1) The Sirian Alliance will simply use their souls as walk-ins and either kick out the soul that's already 

in there (per agreement), or the original soul will be made to go to sleep. This possession will mainly 

happen with the powerful bloodlines that are the sons and the daughters, and the grandsons and the 

granddaughters of the old Rockefellers and Rothschilds etc. Perhaps also with the older ones, even if 

they are just on the brink to step into their graves (many are in the 90's, like David Rockefeller, George 

Bush Sr., and Henry Kissinger). (There are also much older bloodlines, like Hidden Hand was talking 

about. They are so hidden that we haven't even heard about them). The Sirians don't really care, they 

just jump bodies when the old one dies. As a matter of fact, that is how it's done already amongst 

human Elite. For example, when an old Rockefeller is getting close to the time when he will die, he or 

she makes sure there is a grand daughter or a grandson who will soon have a baby, and there is an 

agreement between the old Rockefeller and the young bloodline couple that the elder will reincarnate in 

that baby body. Then the older Rockefeller is timing when a soul normally is entering the fetus and then 

he or she lies down on the bed and consciously dies, or gets an injection or similar. Then, as soon as the 

spirit reaches the ether, she bypasses the between lives area and instead immediately starts hovering 

around the fetus and takes the new body when appropriate. A few months later, it's in the news that 

Rockefeller so and so has had a baby, which indeed is the recently deceased Rockefeller (the last part is 

of course not mentioned). However, it doesn't always work even for the Elite. Sometimes another soul 

out in the astral is stronger and/or faster, and takes the fetus before the old Rockefeller, perhaps 

because she wants to have a super-wealthy lifetime. So the old Rockefeller soul misses out. Often, the 

young couple with the baby recognize their grandfather, and when they see it's not the grandfather, 

something awful may happen to the baby and the couple are seen shedding crocodile tears in the 

tabloids and in the newspapers. However, they make sure they are soon pregnant again, and the second 

time, it usually works better, and mean old granddaddy becomes their son or daughter. 

2) The young bloodline generations who are getting married and have children will make sure their 

babies' bodies will have a Sirian soul. Thus, these babies grow up, and no one knows they are only 

human in body, but not in spirit. 

In the beginning it's just a matter of establishing themselves here on Earth and draw as little attention 

to themselves as possible. We may notice on occasion that a powerful person, who often shows him or 

herself on TV has a slightly different personality all of a sudden. We will see this in particular if it is a 

person whom we know well from the media. Other than that, policies, laws and all the rest of it will 

probably follow a similar pattern that they do now, because these recently possessed humans are 

waiting for their 220 million friends to come riding in on the Wave. Then, when the Wave has passed, 


273



and those who are ripe for Harvest are "tagged" for when they die and reach the astral, and everything 

else which will happen due to the Wave is over, the next step in the process will occur. 

There are many secret societies today that are working on the "Second Coming" of the Christ. And I 

am not talking about the Christian version, although people will be quite confused at first over what is 

going on. We talked about the Ashtar Command and Lord Sananda, which may be the name Lord 

EA/ENKI will go by. We have already been prepared for his Second Coming in almost all religions (his first 

coming was as Jesus Christ). Everywhere, where astrology has any influence at all, the Age of Aquarius 

has been announced as the Age of EA, the "water-bearer", just like I presented him in Appendix II to 

Level II, which was basically an update on Michael Lee Hill. The Age of Pisces, which is just about to end, 

was the Age of Jesus, so in fact, EA will get two ages of worship -- at least! 

All these secret societies I am talking about; whether they promote a new King or the Divine 

Feminine, have the same Grandmaster. It's not that the Divine Feminine is not the basic "religion", but 

it's being presented here, in our times, in a distorted form by certain secret societies. Hidden 

somewhere underground, arrived from the Pleiades, to where he fled when Atlantis was destroyed, 

perhaps even having a base under the ocean floor, like some people suggest, is Lord EA. There are 

indicators that he indeed has returned, and he may have been here for some time. His son MARDUK has 

probably, as LPG-C suggested, been here, ruling behind the scenes in his father's absence, more or less 

ever since they nuked Sodom and Gomorrah and Sinai Spaceport. Soon it is time for EA to brush off the 

dust from his cape and show himself to mankind. The moment when he will come as the Savior of 

mankind, as Lord Sananda, the Son of God, is coming closer. How will he present himself? I really don't 

know, but I don't think he will come in a cape, long Jesus-like hair, and a beard. I don't think he will look 

nearly as Jesus Christ is portrayed here in the west. It makes sense, however, that he comes as a 

spiritual leader and performs magical acts; fake and real. After all, the Orions are the inventors of 

magic. 

What about the Anti-Christ? There is a chance the Alliance will play out that card too, or maybe not. 

In Level I I talked about the two factions of the Anunnaki (Sirians) -- the ENLIL clan (the RAM Clan) and 

the ENKI clan (The Serpent Clan). I believe this is a part of the big deception; they want us to believe that 

they are not united in their mission. Yes, there is infighting, but not on such a massive scale that they 

can't decide their common goal. EA and ENLIL may not be the most loving brothers in the universe, but 

they are working towards the same goal, and I don't think there is as much of a division as was 

presented by Sitchin and LPG-C. And MARDUK and his father, EA, are definitely on the same page. 

Remember when UTU contacted me? He said that now is the time for forgiveness. We need to forgive 

them, and they need to forgive us. He started promoting that we are one big family and without them 

we wouldn't exist, because they created us. Also, because of that, we are of the same flesh and blood 

and shouldn't fight or have any bad feelings towards each other. 

That would have been just fine if he would have been honest. First of all, they didn't create us; we 

already existed. They only manipulated our DNA so we got trapped here; not a big deal, right? Not even 

worth mentioning, UTU. And why coming down here with soldiers and wipe out the Global Elite and 

those who have "suppressed us"? I told him what a disaster that would create. I think he hadn't 

expected that response. He didn't contact me after that, although he apparently kept an eye on me, 

according to A.R. Bordon. 

So, are they coming down here to wipe out the Global Elite? No, I doubt it. I think he wanted to 

manipulate me, counting on that I would promote this invasion; especially after I'd posted this giant 


274



data base called Illuminati News about the Global Elite. I did post his message, however, but with the 

disclaimer (http://battleofearth.wordpress.com/2011/10/18/authentic-message-from-the-king-of-theanunnaki-please-read/). 

I don't think they had any serious plans to do it that way, but he wanted to have 

something on me for the future, so they can discredit me. I was aware afterwards that this may be the 

case, but in the light of what I've been exposing since then, I don't think they stand much of a chance in 

that sense. 

Here is one possibility of how the Second Coming will play out: Like I've said, the invasion is a silent 

one. When time is right, Lord Sananda will return, perhaps together with Lord Ashtar, and Sananda will 

be presented as the Second Coming, whether he does it all himself, or he has a team behind him who 

does it for him so that it becomes more credible. Once he is accepted as the Messiah, he will preach 

forgiveness and hand out amnesty for the Global Elite and all those who have done evil. He will probably 

give them a chance to prove themselves. If they are serious in their redemption, they will be redeemed; 

if not, they will be killed, but the world will be told they have gone to Hell, or something along those 

lines. Exactly how that will be done, your guess is as good as mine, but redemption will be a big part of 

EA's return, and most people will love it, because EA will bring Peace on Earth. Even his son, MARDUK, 

will be redeemed. 

EA will tell us that humanity are all Divine and the sons and daughter of Father God in Heaven, the 

great YHWH, or Jehovah, or Allah, or Krishna, or whomever you want -- whatever religion you have, it 

will be told that it is all part of another major religion, which is the one that embraces them all. Even the 

Muslims will eventually accept Lord Sananda, because the Muslim leaders have by then been taken over 

by Sirian spirits. There will always be resistance to begin with, but that will be taken care of by the false 

Archangels and their Heavenly armies, which will be the Sirian Warriors. And they will literally descend 

from the heavens. 

If we continue on this line of thought, once the false Second Golden Era is established and King EA 

and his son, Prince MARDUK, will reign openly on Earth, certain plans will be executed, slowly but surely. 

EA must arrive during a time of deep need; there has to be mass unemployment, bad economy, lots of 

old and new diseases which kill people on a global scale; perhaps also earth changes, such as mass 

volcano eruptions, hurricanes, flooding, etc. And after the Wave has passed, on some timelines, it will 

kill a lot of people who are not at all prepared for such a unifying event, and if there will be big earth 

changes, that's when it will happen. On those who are spiritually prepared, however, the Wave will 

mostly have a positive effect, because what it basically carries is an overload of energy that has been 

accumulated and will hit Earth, all at once. Our final "upgrade" will happen at that point, and if your 

neurology can handle it, because you're already prepared, you are ready to reach for the stars. So, in 

other words, we can see the alignment with the Galactic Center and the energetic communication 

between the Central Sun, our Sun, Mother Earth, and eventually mankind, as the Goddess Gaia's way to 

counteract her son's EA decision to create the Machine Kingdom and devolve mankind rather than 

letting them evolve in peace. Mother Goddess is giving those of her children (us) who still are loyal to 

her original wishes a version of herself, a New Earth branching out in different probabilities, to evolve 

without destructive technology. 

This is when the splitting of the worlds will really be noticed. Those who see through the deception of 

the Second Coming will go their own ways, and just like now build their own local universes, and the 

splitting will start going much faster. In just a few generations, there will be many different Earths that 

are no longer just probabilities, but inhabited by humans who have started new timelines where they 

can express their multidimensionality so much easier. That will be the real New Golden Age! On these 


275



timelines, the Sirians and their Machine Kingdom will no longer exist, because those realities will no 

longer vibrate within the same frequency range! 

Figure 4. A near future "SmartCity", an endless super metropolitan where the Machine Kingdom will be established. 

However, that's the subject for the next paper. Let's go back to EA, the Sirian Alliance and their plans 

for humanity. Peace and Order will be established on Earth. A global economy will be established as well 

and many people worldwide will once again find employment. What has been destroyed in potential 

disaster areas will be reconstructed, but this time, instead of restoring the old towns and cities, new 

mega cities will be built; the so-called SmartCities. These will be, like I've mentioned many times before, 

huge metropolitans, where Tokyo and New York will look like suburbs (and probably will be). The 

justification for building these SmartCities will be to create jobs for everybody. Lord EA promises that in 

his Paradise, everybody will have a job and a roof over their heads. And beside him on the podium or in 

the Television seat will be humans who he says have helped him prepare for this "Second Coming". Who 

knows? Michael Lee Hill and A.R. Bordon will be two of them, James of the WingMakers another? There 

will be no more poverty and everybody will have what they basically need. Who can resist such a vision, 

unless they know about the deception that is planned in the future? EA counts on humanity's laziness 

and that they prefer to be taken care of rather than doing the work themselves. In fact, he will be 

correct; people will almost think it's too good to be true and can't understand how someone would 

rather go out in the woods and live! 

The bottom line is that the intruders will do what they can to bond with us at first. So here is another 

possibility how the Second Coming will play itself out: If the Sirians at all tell us who they are, which is 

plausible, it could very well be announced by world leaders when the Golden Age is already in place and 

people feel calm, safe, and secure. Do you remember the picture of those old farts who were in charge 

in the old Soviet Union, and how they stood on this giant balcony in Kremlin, waving at the people in the 

streets? I get this same picture of the future in my head, only this time it will be a whole lot friendlier. 

The new world leaders, who are nothing but grown up Sirians, who have incarnated into human bodies 

and taken the seats of power, will stand at the podium and make an announcement. They will tell the 

peoples of the world that they have had help in creating this utopia; this fantastic Paradise of peace, 


276



love and light. Then they will present the Sirian leaders, who will tell everybody that they obviously, as 

everybody can see, have come in peace, and intend to help humanity with the transition into world 

peace where everybody will be taken care of. People will look at them as Gods, indeed, and Prince EA, 

Lucifer himself, will take charge! The Sirians will tell us that they are our ancestors, and that's why they 

look exactly like us (of course they do; they have taken human bodies). If the violent past from 

Mesopotamian times is brought up, the Sirians will ask for forgiveness and that the past needs to be 

forgiven, or we will be stuck in karma none of us wants to deal with. Peace and forgiveness is a much 

smarter way to go. They'll tell us that they are our brothers and sisters, mothers and fathers; whatever 

rocks the boat. 

Many people want to believe, so they believe. Many want to give away their personal authority, 

because after all, that's what they've always been doing, so they will give it all in the hands of these 

godlike, "peaceful" intruders. People want to see friends and salvation in those star beings, so that is 

what they are shown.[4] 

As the reader may notice, it will be very hard to distinguish between friend and foe if you are not 

trained. Aren't you glad you have persisted and studied and studied in order to learn what is going on 

and what is about to happen? That's not a coincident, you know. Only a small percentage of humanity 

has the willpower to do that -- most people have other priorities, which will not save them, but they 

don't care. Still, we must look at these people, too, as our friends and co-travelers, because without 

them we wouldn't be where we are. Everybody who managed to incarnate on Earth during the nanosecond 

did so because they wanted to live in these energies and contribute with something. That 

"something" has built up a lot of energy that has helped you and I to get where we are. This has indeed 

been a co-creation; we have all helped in making it happen. 

Those who have read Marshall V. Summers' channeled books, The Allies of Mankind, may notice that 

these beings indeed are on the same wavelength as I am in regards to this. They, too, say it will be a 

silent take-over, and it will be fairly easily done, because humanity is still mostly asleep. Like with all 

channeled material, we have to be discerning, but there is some good stuff in Summers' books and 

briefings. I would recommend them, at least to show there are more people than I who have come to a 

similar conclusion, albeit they are not many -- yet. Their website is here. 

New technology will be introduced in a never-ending stream, and people will drool over all the fun 

devices that come out on the market. To be able to buy them, however, they need to leave their old 

towns and cities and move into these new SmartCities where the jobs are. People may ask how can they 

create so many jobs when machines are taking over more and more? Well, we are thinking in terms of 7 

billion people on the planet. This will not be the case when the SmartCities have been built. Like I said 

above, the Second Coming will probably not happen until a lot of people have died. The Sirians need a 

certain amount of human slave workers who can produce what they need. Personally, I think the 

Superwave will take care of much of the population problem. 

Eventually, the smaller cities will be more or less abandoned. The bigger businesses that used to be 

the main employers will of course move into the SmartCities, and the smaller businesses will not be able 

to sustain themselves, because there will not be enough people left in town to buy their products. So 

they will either go bankrupt, be bought out, or be liquidated. We will start seeing ghost towns 

everywhere as we drive out of the SmartCities, where either no one lives, or it will be a place where 

lawless people live; if such people will even exist in EA's Golden Age, that is. In the beginning I'm sure 

there will, but the more the New World Order establishes itself on Earth in this particular frequency 


277



band, the tighter Lord EA will make the rope for the citizens. He will not tolerate any rebellion, and 

crime will be taken care of in its cradle and with help from frequency machines. Crime is only allowed 

amongst the Elite, but people will never know. People will police each other, because EA will promote a 

world in peace, and the smallest crime will be reported. This kind of policing each other is very easily 

established in a covert tyranny, where people think they are doing something good when they are 

reporting their neighbor for planting marijuana in their backyard. This was done all the time in Nazi 

Germany, too. 

Some of the smaller towns will probably be the home of those who don't agree with Lord EA's 

policies and technological society; people such as you and I, perhaps? Groups of like-minded will do 

their own thing and survive outside the SmartCities, and without any major technology. They will grow 

their own food and live close to nature, because they understand who Mother Earth is, and they respect 

her, love her, and support her, knowing they are her children. These are the people who will create the 

true Golden Age, which will take them out to the stars, where their real soul family is waiting! 

III. The Hybridization Program 

The Alliance has come to understand the importance with being among us instead of controlling us 

on a distance, from another dimension. They need the blood relation, so they can feel what we feel (in 

whatever capacity this is possible); they want to have sex and need our reproduction abilities, so they 

can come back and reincarnate into the same bloodline -- bloodlines which don't have the amnesia 

program and perhaps not even the hologram we are subjected to. And they want to bond with us, 

because this creates allegiance[3]. They are here to establish themselves; they want humanity to believe 

in them and to serve them because we see that this is the best thing to do in order to live in a better 

world. This time they want our full agreement; they want us to go towards our own demise with a smile 

on our face. 

It's important for them that we bond with them; at least in the beginning, before they can slowly but 

surely add more oppressive rules and laws to the picture again. They truly want us to believe that we 

live in a new Golden Age. This is why forgiveness is a big part of their program; we need to forgive our 

oppressors, so they can continue to oppress us. They will address our good hearts and say that now is 

the time to act like One Humanity so we can build something new. The Illuminati bloodlines need to be 

forgiven, they will say. At first, when the truth about what is going on behind the scenes is revealed to 

us more and more, people will probably get very angry, even infuriated. Some will want to execute the 

whole pack overnight. It could be that riots start happening in the streets all over the world, and the 

military has to take care of it; perhaps even martial law will be applied in certain areas, or even 

countries. 

However, sooner or later, someone with a very glib tongue will calm people down and suggest 

amnesty. The authority, as well, may step forward and apologize to the people, saying they have had 

time to think and will step down. 

The question is if there will be any more elections after that. The United Nations will be infected by 

Sirian leaders, and they will suggest that to stop this oppression once and for all and give all peoples of 

the world a similar chance, we need to unite into a One World with One People. Someone with a 

smooth tongue -- perhaps EA himself -- will be able to seduce the masses into accepting this. They may 

even use frequency programs to do it, which will work as a form of hypnosis, ensuring people that this is 


278



the way to go. And if this is what the Sirians want, this is what they will get; there is no doubt about it! 

Humanity is way too ignorant to understand what is going on. Only those who vibrate on a higher 

frequency will see through this seduction. Some will warn their fellow man, but will rarely prevail. Few 

people will see through the deception, because it's very well planned. 

We will see if things happen in this order and fashion or not; at least this was the plan a few years 

ago, but things may have changed. Whatever it is they are planning at the moment, it has to unite 

people, and the United Nations was set up for this purpose and will most probably have a great role to 

play in future changes; it is still very active, perhaps more so than ever before. 

iv.i. What happened to the Microchip Program? 

Peace will be brought to the Middle East as well; the Israeli and Palestinean conflict will stop only 

because their leaders will be possessed or taken over and see to that it happen. The Alliance will 

certainly work their way towards peace as quickly as it is possible. And who knows how far they have 

come in the "microchip process"; if it's already completed they will have no problem calming the masses 

down. Speaking of microchips; this was a big issue a few years ago, and should still be, in my opinion. 

However, I'm no longer so sure about that it will happen with a chip through the skin. I am much more 

convinced that it's going to be interdimensional microchips. If the take-over is in the stage I'm 

concerned that it is, the chip process is more than likely already completed. Again, if you read this or 

similar material, I doubt the chip has power over you, or you wouldn't seek this type of information. 

Even the chip must have its frequency band to operate. One would think they are able to include higher 

vibrations in the chip so sincere truthseekers would be included, but all I can say is, I hope not. If so, the 

chips may not yet be activated. Are we strong enough to resist if worse comes to worse? I am not so 

sure about that we are, but on the other hand, there wouldn't be any star beings and star races having 

this sincere faith in us if they knew we would be under the control of these monitored frequencies. After 

all, I know many of us are protected even if we don't know it. 

The Overlords know that we will be a minority and not be a threat to the Kingdom; we will not even 

try to rebel against them. So it may be just easier to laugh us off and let the kids learn in school about 

us, saying, "There are those eccentric people who don't want to be part of our society. They are into 

witchcraft, sacrifice, and worse things, so stay away from them. They are savages. And can you believe 

it? They don't have any of our cool devices? What kind of life is that? And after all, they could have, if 

they only came and blended in with us, but they rather live there by themselves. Be cautious! The safest 

thing we all can do is to not leave the SmartCities." It could be that easy; they knowing that not too long 

into the future, the worlds will split, and those renegades will "disappear" into their world, anyway. 

Perhaps it's less work for them to do it that way, or I may just be gullible. 

I am not sure what exactly is going to happen in this crucial matter, but I know one thing -- we are 

protected! Those who are here to raise the frequency are protected from the KHAA! This should be 

enough for the Sirians to stay away, and I truly believe it is! And after all; if the Alliance doesn't have our 

agreement anymore, they can't do much. 


279



iv.ii. The Hybridization Program Revisited 

At least at first, the Sirian Alliance is not here to take our reproduction abilities away from us; quite 

the opposite. They need it; especially for themselves. They want to establish themselves here, and they 

can't live and breathe here without our bodies, or bodies they themselves have created through genetic 

engineering and manipulation. 

While humanity has lived in relative ignorance to what is happening around them, a lot of different 

star races have been interfering with our freedoms. The Orion Group (a term I will use from hereon 

when it's important to include EA/ENKI, the Orion Prince of Light, in the equation) are master geneticists 

and the genetic programming and upgrading when comes to mankind has never totally ceased. Now, 

around the nano-second, it's been more intense than it's been since ancient times when Homo sapiens 

was created. The goal is to create a more able slave, who can do more without getting tired, not needing 

8 hours of sleep. They need workers who can work around the clock again, just like when they were 

mining in South Africa, and the workers had to labor until they fell down dead and were replaced with a 

younger and stronger work force. This time around it's not so much a matter of letting people die from 

exhaustion as it is to find a genetic formula which can make a stronger, more endurable worker. In 

addition to this, or perhaps in conjunction with this, they want to create Supersoldiers. So these two 

projects are very important right now and go hand in hand. 

A third thing to mention here is that mining is certainly not something in the past. Very soon we will 

see the mining business sky-rocketing; it will be one of the fields where many desperate unemployed 

people will find work. The reader may have seen in the news lately how there has been an alleged 

increase in asteroids in Near Earth Space? Many of these, I'm sure, are already hollowed-out and are 

maneuvered by Sirian pilots; they just want us to get used to their presence, step by step. In the past 

they would have been silent about it, but not anymore. More and more Sirians are returning, and they 

are parked in space, all over the solar system, hidden in their asteroids. But that's mainly not what I 

wanted to tell the reader. 

In the news, they have talked about asteroid mining. Scientists are being interviewed on CNN and 

ABC News, and what have you, being extremely excited over the many asteroids in space, close to Earth 

(not all of them are spaceships). They say we have the technology to go up there and mine them! They 

should be overloaded with precious metals and other stuff which is very valuable here on Earth. While 

we are at it, we can also hollow them out, the scientists say, and perhaps make them suitable as space 

stations! This is where the many jobs will be! And this is what the hybridization program is leading 

towards; getting strong workers, who can endure the harsh conditions in space, so they won't have to 

come down to Earth to recover every so often. I mentioned this as well in Level III, "Paper #2: In Wait for 

Things to Come!" Water will not be a problem, either, because they say that there will be enough water 

in the asteroids to hydrate the astronauts. 

Interestingly enough, I listened to a Pleiadian lecture yesterday, which was from around September- 

October 2012, where they, too, talked about hollowed-out asteroids! I always fell out of my chair. They 

said that in the future, on one timeline, Mother Earth, the beloved Goddess, will be so polluted and 

destroyed that many people will move out in space. This will be one reason for mining asteroids, they 

said (and when that lecture was given, the asteroid mining had still not been in the news). They said we 

will hollow them out and live in them; not all humanity, but many will. After that, we will start 

conquering space, they said, but not as a friendly species, because we will live under a tyranny. So we 


280



come both as explorers and conquerors. At this time in the future, we are no longer humans, but 

cyborgs. In some ways, we can be compared with Arnold Schwarzenegger in the movie, "The 

Terminator", in that they have created the perfect Supersoldier that is half human and half machine, and 

who is very hard to kill. Also, this type of being can quite easily resist the harsh conditions in space(!) 

Eventually, the ET/human tyranny will reach them in the Pleiades. They also say that no one will let us 

on the Moon; there is too much going on there; too much alien activity, and they don't want humans 

there. Otherwise, the Moon could have been considered as a future population project for mankind if 

Earth is no longer able to house us, but this will never be the case, they say. 

Figure 5. Arnold Schwarzenegger as "The Terminator" 

I find this quite stunning, to say the least. Here I have sat researching these things and also used my 

intuition to look in hopefully the right places, and then, in a short amount of time, I get most of it 

confirmed by one source after another! I'm thrilled in one way, but at the same time wish I was wrong 

(albeit I know better than to think I am). 

As we know, there are more beings out there who are manipulating the DNA in abductees. We have 

the Grays -- us in the future, as discussed and proven to be the case, in a previous paper. They have their 

own agenda, and just like the Orion Group, they are without emotions, but for a different reason than 

Lucifer and his Fallen Angels. Also, the Grays know we are them in the past, so even if they hurt us, they 

are only hurting themselves, so what's the big deal? As long as they get what they want, the end justifies 

the means. 

I'm sure the reader remembers Harone, the "Master Geneticist" from Lyssa Royals channeling; he 

himself a Gray, discussed in one of my previous papers. In her excellent book, "Visitors from Within", 

Lyssa has dedicated a chapter to how hybridization is being done. This procedure is described in detail in 

the previous Level III paper named, "Paper #4: Channeled Entities Part II -- Channeling the Grays", 

Section IV, "How a Hybrid is Created". It could be a good idea to review that section again, because we 

need to know, and we need to remember how it's done. 


281



I am mentioning that there will be different programs running side by side for a reason. If you think 

about it, this is how different timelines are created. We have earlier talked about different probabilities, 

based on thought processes, where some of them we act upon, and some of them we don't. Those 

which we act upon become realities, but those we don't act upon, or quickly abandon, become 

probabilities and will not be acted upon to their full extent in the Multiverse. 

Now, as we are talking about the different hybridization projects, we are no longer talking about 

probabilities, but different timelines. The hybridization done by the Orion Group will lead in one 

direction, while that done by the future humans, the Grays, will lead in another direction, and yet 

another splitting of worlds will branch out from the Machine Kingdom timeline. 

Another faction of humanity will experience a big food crisis, which has actually already begun. 

Experts are desperately looking for alternative food sources. In the long run, the solution they will come 

up with is to instead genetically alter humanity in a manner so we don't need food. These beings will be 

half humans, half machines. They are the cyborgs who will go out and conquer space to search for their 

"Creators", which eventually will lead them to the Pleiades. A war will break out that humanity will win, 

and a tyranny will start in the Pleiades. From that tyranny, a future renegade group will be created, who 

will start researching where this tyranny started and why. Their research will lead them back to the 

nano-second here on Earth, where timelines merged and then branched off. On one timeline, a faction 

of humanity will go to the Pleiades. So, the Pleiadians came back in time in spirit, as a collective, and 

started channeling through Barbara Marciniak in 1988, in hope to be able to have at least a portion of 

humanity raise their frequency enough for the destructive timeline not to happen, and stay as an 

abandoned probability. 

Their goal is to have us create at least one timeline to begin with, where we can evolve without 

technology and thus keep our humanity intact. If they hadn't appeared, they claim (and I believe them), 

there would be no "natural" timeline, only a Machine Timeline. And by contacting us and by educating 

us, they also release their own karma, which went way back to Atlantis, where they created the 

Nephilim and did other destructive things. So, if the Pleiadians are correct, this particular cyborg 

timeline will not happen, or from what I have picked up, these space-faring humans will be redirected by 

this renegade Pleiadian group and will never reach the Pleiades. What will happen with them, I do not 

know, because the Pleiadians haven't told us yet. This is probably because no one has asked! It could be 

that these cyborgs, looking entirely like machines inside, but half humans and half robots, will never be 

created, or they will, but are not going to reach the Pleiades. The Pleiadians, however, tell us to watch 

out for abdication of our bodies! Humanity is unique and divine, and the alternations that are planned 

and have been going on for decades now, are not in any manner going to enhance humanity in the long 

run. 

There are other timelines that are going to be created as well, unless someone stops that from 

happening, which doesn't seem to be the case (see Paper #4 again). The Grays are coming, as we know, 

from different locations and times in the future, and that's why they look different from each other; 

they are in different stages of development. They, however, in contrast to the Pleiadians, are generally 

not interested in erasing timelines; they are just here to figure out secret codes in our DNA, so they can 

take those secrets with them into the future and regain human emotions and reproduction abilities. All 

this put together is the main reason why it's absolutely imminent that you and I never ever get involved 

in these things and instead create our own timelines! 


282



If you hadn't totally grasped why from reading earlier papers, are you starting to see a certain picture 

emerge now? God knows what will happen in all the chaos that is created as we speak; certain timelines 

may be altered from the future and cease to exist, and so will the beings living in them -- just like their 

lives never happened, or their lives will be altered in the Multiverse, so that their entire lives will be 

different. This is why it's so incredibly important to educate oneself, can you see that? If we fully 

understand what is going on, and the consequences that can be the end result of experimentation and 

timeline issues, we realize that we need to step -- not backwards and not forwards, but aside! We need 

to step aside and let the trains run to their destinations while we walk away from the railroad tracks and 

into the wilderness, sit down in Mother Nature, talk to her and talk to her creations that are all around 

us in form of plants and animal life, and even the soil itself. Let's show her that we love her and respect 

her and know that she is alive, and that she is the Goddess manifested to have a 3D, 4D, 5D experience 

etc., in her own universe. Let her know that we understand that we are her children, and it is our duty to 

guard her Living Library and start using it the way it was intended. Tell her that there are those of us 

who are willing to build and guard the new version of herself and do our absolute best for this disaster 

not to happen again. We are the New Humans; the Aware Humans! Let's tell her that we are very 

grateful for being chosen by her to be her Guardians and her special creation, and that she is our true 

Mother. 

Then, we can live wherever we want, in places where we can create our own reality the way we want 

it, in a way that makes us happy and honors the planet from which we were born. This doesn't mean we 

need to build a cabin out in the wilderness, let our beards and hair grow, and isolate ourselves totally 

from everything. Of course, it's nothing wrong with doing that either, and that way always live close to 

nature, but that was not the only way of living that Mother Earth intended for us. It's nothing wrong to 

use the resources Mother Earth has if we do it with respect, and thank the Earth for what she's giving us. 

We can build houses, even cities if we want to. We can use some technology, which will really benefit us 

as individuals and as a group. We just need to be sure we plant new trees and vegetables when we use 

them. 

The important part is that we create our own local universe, which I have stressed many, many times. 

Let the insanity reign all around us. Know that it is there -- always be aware -- but don't let it affect you 

or be part of your own space and your own reality. If you do this, you may notice in the extreme that a 

hurricane is destroying everything in the town next to you, or even in parts of your own town, but your 

house will still be standing when it's all over. This actually happened to my wife when she was younger 

and raised the kids as a single mother in Hawaii. A terrible hurricane swept over the island and tore 

houses to the ground all around her, but when it was all over, her house was the only house that had 

not been affected by the hurricane. Trees had fallen all around her property and sort of isolated her, but 

it showed afterwards that she was the only one on that part of the island who still had water. So it is 

definitely possible and it's not a fairytale or wishful thinking -- it works! 

All the three "Levels of Learning" which are now coming towards a completion, have all been about 

educating those who are ready to learn what is really going on. When you are finished reading, you 

should feel a great calm inside you and an assurance that you can manage your own reality much better 

than people in your environment who have not taken part of this material. You will feel much stronger 

and mentally stable than you did before you started. You will also feel that you have raised your 

vibration considerably compared to before. This will help you to make decisions which will be survival 

for you and your environment, and you feel inside that you are ready for the "Splitting of the Worlds". 


283



V. Life in the SmartCities 

Maybe they will even call it the Golden Age, or perhaps they will call it the New Age, and maybe they 

will stop the year count and start again from Year 1, I don't know. But I have no doubt that after 

sometime of unrest, the majority of mankind will go along with the Sirian program, because that's what 

seems to be the only thing that makes sense to them. It's too seductive to say no. The technology and 

the "comfort" people will be promised if they follow the Golden Age Plan is just too incredible for 

people to resist. 

The Overlords know what they are doing, although they start to become quite predictable by now. If 

we for now forget Nazi Germany, Tesla, and a few other examples, the U.S. Government was in the early 

1950s visited by the Sirians (whom the channeled material call the "Orion Group") in their "space suits", 

presenting technology that could bring the United States fast forward to become the most powerful 

country in the world, and outdo the Soviet Union almost overnight. And of course, these visitors 

promised to keep this treaty they were creating between the two. In exchange they wanted humans 

they could abduct and experiment on. We have heard that story before. The reason I bring it up again is 

because that's where things started to take off. In fact, they were visited by more than one group, the 

story goes, and the "good guys" were rejected by the U.S. President, while the "bad guys" won his trust. 

Shortly after that we started building giant computers; clumsy and impractical in the beginning (they 

sometimes took up a whole building). Since then, technology has developed superfast. The U.S. 

Government, on that level, was stupid enough to trust the star beings. First of all, they abducted much 

more people than they were allowed to, and they didn't bring all of them back, either. But not only that! 

These "Grays" visited other governments in other countries, too, and offered the same, or similar things; 

included in the visitations was the U.S. competitor, the Soviet Union.[5] What it led to was a new 

technological era, which many scientists wanted to name the "Second Industrial Revolution", because 

everything happened so fast. Soon we were in space (years before Jurij Gagarin -- unofficially), and a few 

decades later we had the PC and the Internet. Once Wi-Fi was established, the cell phone industry took 

off and the computer programs (the software) and the devices (the hardware) became smaller and 

smaller. Today there is hardly any teenager who doesn't own an iPod, iPad, or a smart phone of some 

kind (everything is called "smart" these days; deliberately so), and it basically go for adults too, although 

we may not always have the latest editions. However, the next generation of adults will! 

Now, park your car outside a collage or a university anywhere in the United States, close to a 

crosswalk which the students will use. Then watch. As the students show up when it's time to go home, 

or in the morning when they arrive, everybody, without exceptions, are texting on one of these small 

devices. Friends may walk in groups of 5-10 people, but they are barely talking to each other; they are 

busy texting somebody else. Also, they are not lifting their heads to see if cars are coming that may run 

over them, but just cross the street. Most of them have learned to see with their peripherals if a vehicle 

or bicycle is coming. But the rest of the mind is lost in the little device. 

What do I mean when I say "the rest of the mind is lost", actually? Think about that. Where is their 

consciousness? Is it in the body? No. Is it in that little device? Yes, very much so. What is consciousness? 

Most would say, the soul. So, the soul is leaving the body, "squeezing" itself into that little tiny phone 

device and is becoming part of that machine and whatever is going on in there. The body, on the other 

hand, is going on auto pilot. And it's doing so literally! There is no one home in those teenage bodies, 

and for one thing; they are wide open for possession. 


284



Still, we have only seen the beginning of this. What we are experiencing now is what the "gods" 

experienced thousands of years ago. They, too, had those little devices they called Meš, which held a lot 

of information, and which they fought over. Now we're there again, but this time it's the humans doing 

the same thing as the gods did then. Anyway, this will be developed further, with better and better 

technology, which will totally seduce the population. It's very scary when we see our children already 

having their souls sucked into these devices, which I can tell you are Stone Age compared to what is to 

come. Are you still doubting that man and machine will become one and the same? 

What I am trying to say here is that the Overlords have already prepared us for the Golden Age, 

which I call the Machine Kingdom, by giving us all these "teasers", because that's all it is. We think we're 

technologically advanced now; well, wait and see. Then, when they come to us and present the real 

"gifts" to humanity, few people will say no. All disputes will be forgotten and forgiven. If it wasn't for the 

destructiveness of all this, it would be a perfect way to unite us! And unite us it will! 

Now, there's another side to this as well. We may think that the Internet is a brilliant network which 

is connecting people all over the world, so we can share our knowledge, our lives, our cultures, and 

more with each other, and become more like "one people". Others think that it's a perfect tool to share 

information that would otherwise be censored, or not allowed to reach out to a larger public. Those 

who never would write an article in their entire life if it was up to them, now gladly create their own 

blogs and start blogging like it had been their life purpose all the time. But what is really going on here? 

Why is this allowed? Many ask me why they let people like me expose things like this on the World Wide 

Web. 

Here is one answer. Alien star beings don't understand the human psyche; we are a mystery to them. 

They have studied us on a distance for centuries -- yes, even millennia -- and they have abducted us, but 

still not figured us out. The reader knows it's because we are Divine and the direct children of the 

Mother Goddess, and we possess her Fire and have a code embedded in our DNA which the ETs want in 

order to understand what we are. The Sirian Alliance, and many other star beings in the background, 

want to understand our emotions and how we tick. The Internet, with its Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, 

Google+, and other programs where people willingly share their information, is what these star beings 

want. They are studying us through the Internet to see how we function, and they are quite confused to 

say the least. Not even Lucifer himself totally understands, because not even he was born with the 

qualities that humankind has, and this, too, makes him jealous and quite revengeful. Now, when they 

think they have figured out much of what makes us tick, the Alliance has finally decided they can start 

mingling with us for real and blend in. If they don't understand us, they will never be able to blend in 

with us; we would soon notice there is something different with them. 

v.i. Welcome to the Machine! 

Once the new agreement with mankind is made, and the Sirian Alliance is allowed by the majority of 

us to operate here, and not only that, but to operate as our executives, things will go fast. The Overlords 

know that they are safe, and no star race will interfere, because they have humanity's consent to be 

here. So, a majority of mankind is going to screw up again; this time it's going to be a devastating 

choice! Building these mega metropolitans called SmartCities are going to be the big priority, and it will 

happen in no-time. More or less simultaneously, the mining project on the asteroids will start taking off 

as well. Many unemployed people will find themselves as miners on asteroids in Near Earth Space; 

mostly young people, of course, who have the stamina to do this. Mass education in this field will also 


285



be a priority. Of course, eventually the mining project will be taken over by human hybrids, the biomachines, 

but we're not yet really there. 

How EA and his cohorts are going to present themselves to humanity will determine how the space 

program will develop. I would think that in the long run it would be more beneficial for them to present 

themselves as our saviors and put EA, or someone he's appointing as the CEO of the world and the 

chairman of the United Nations. The economy can't be saved the way currency is working in the world 

today and the unemployment rate and a new financial low will definitely be in the stars. Regardless of 

how these star beings will present themselves, they need to choose the correct opportunity when we 

need help the most. If we're going to accept an overt alien intervention of sorts, we'd better be 

desperate. And with all this denial of UFOs and star beings, it doesn't seem like an easy task. However, I 

just read about that FBI has released a paper written in the 1950s, I believe, which has now been 

declassified together with a lot of other information on Al Capone, Ted Bundy etc. This particular paper 

was about three UFO crashes involving 3 feet tall aliens who had been recovered from saucer-shaped 

spaceships. The person who is in charge of the FBI library was interviewed by the media, and he said 

that of all the amazing stuff that has been released to the public, this short document was the one which 

got the most hits! So, Hollywood, the media, and the alternative media have done a good job educating 

people about UFOs and aliens lately, it seems like, and raised the interest. In some respect, the Sirians 

are actually grateful for all the different UFO theories out there on the Internet (most of them being 

incorrect), because it helps them catching people's interest. This makes an overt, "friendly" invasion 

more possible. Look at Dr. Steven Greer in this respect; would you doubt whom he's working for? 

Even if I may be wrong, let's for now go for the hypothesis that it will be a silent takeover, however -- 

only because that seems to be the easiest way to go about it, and we want to present all alternatives we 

can think of. If they just blend in, they don't need to explain who they are and what they are doing here. 

The "savior" will be a combination of "brilliant minds" (EA and his cohorts) who have placed themselves 

in executive positions and can present quick solutions to the world. Maybe the whole thing with a 

Maitreya/Messiah in the sense we are thinking of it is just a distraction after all. Perhaps those who are 

waiting for a powerful deity to take over their "prepared hybrid bodies" are actually going to be used for 

something entirely different, which we haven't figured out yet. It will be interesting to see, because if 

that is the case, it will happen soon, in our own lifetime. 

People will be offered jobs in the SmartCities, but not in the old cities, so there will be a mass 

evacuation of the towns and cities we know of today. The Overlords will figure out a way so that 

everybody will get a job eventually, but they also need to concentrate on reducing the world population. 

The Sirians certainly don't need seven billion people anymore; it's way too many to control. If there is a 

silent invasion all along, wars and conflicts can continue like "business as usual" -- no problem. The 

Golden Age of peace and harmony can very well wait until the population is on a manageable level. We 

also see already now how more and more young people are being infertile, and couples can't have kids. 

Some will adopt and some will pay ten thousands of dollars, or more, to get impregnated artificially. 

However, many won't be able to afford it, which of course is the plan. Make it too expensive for 

common people, and that will take care of a part of the problem. A food crisis could take care of some 

reduction of the population, while implanted diseases in form of incurable new viruses, created in 

laboratories and released on the public, will help out to some large degree. Other means could be 

H.A.A.R.P. induced catastrophes of a major kind, like giant earthquakes, floods, and volcano eruptions, 

tornadoes etc. I am sure there is no shortage of ideas how to reduce the population tremendously, and I 

am quite positive that it will happen one way or the other. All this will preferably be over and done with 

before the invaders will start working on the later plans, such as SmartCities. Therefore, let us assume 


286



that we are dealing with a much lesser population when we continue here. And let's not forget the 

Superwave. 

Figure 6. Aaron McCollum, "Supersoldier" in Sirian service. 

What people will notice when they move into the SmartCities is that most of what has been promised 

will actually become true. People will get roofs over their heads and jobs will be distributed as needed; 

almost like in a Communistic society. Things will be very different from how they are now, because the 

control policies will change. The invaders want to start building their Kingdom so that Supersoldiers can 

be created and trained as quickly as possible. Supersoldiers already exist, and quite a few of them, such 

as Aaron McCollum, have been interviewed by Project Camelot's Bill Ryan and Kerry-Lynn Cassidy[7]. 

The soldiers that already exist in the Secret Government mind control programs usually don't remember 

anything from their missions. Afterwards, keywords or a key phrase is communicated to them and they 

forget all about it. These Supersoldiers are often time travelers, advanced remote viewers (nanotravelers), 

and shapeshifters (which works just like I've explained in Level II; you manifest whatever you 

want via your avatar), and they can bi-locate. They have been reported to be able to cloak themselves as 

trees and sometimes whole forests to distract enemies. This has been done both on Earth and on other, 

distant planets, according to whistle-blowers and metaphysical sources such as the Pleiadians. 

McCollum, for example, has quite a story to tell. He is, of course, a multiple personality through traumabased 

mind control such as MK-ULTRA and its many offspring programs like Project Monarch and 

Project Mannequin. Today's Supersoldiers are often 100% human, but the PTB have for a long time also 

experimented with human hybrids, who may more easily be able to do the job. 

The idea with hybrids who are half biological and half machine, doing the work as Supersoldiers, is 

their apparent invincibility. These days, due to Sirian-Orion technology, more or less any body part can 

be replaced quickly with a machine part which corresponds with an injured organ. You're a soldier in a 

war and you lose a leg or an arm? No problem. They throw you aside and quickly transplant a machine 

part that can work just as well as a real arm. Then it's back to battle again. A few days later, one of your 

legs is blown off by a grenade? So what? There is a mechanical leg ready to be attached, working just as 


287



well as a biological leg. Do you think I'm exaggerating? I'm not. This is already being done (see fig. 7). 

This young lady just got a machine arm implanted, which follows the commands from her mind, just like 

a real arm. 

Figure 7. Claudia Mitchell, the first woman to have a "bionic arm", 

which follows the signals from the brain, just like a normal arm 

Figure 7 is copied from a Facebook page by one of the leading UFO researchers in the field. He posted 

this picture, and the followers of his Facebook commented on it. There were a lot of comments, and 

they were done by those who are supposed to be "in the know" in the UFO and exopolitical fields (as 

much as you can be in-the-know). All of them were very excited and made comments like, "science go!"; 

"Science rocks!" and "I have friends who came back from war with amputated limbs. They could have 

benefitted from this. Science go!" No one realized what it is that is being promoted with this kind of 

technology -- no one. Everybody thought it was being done for the benefit of mankind. That is very sad. I 

am not saying people won't benefit from such implants, but the point of making them is not because 

science has developed something as a favor to mankind. It's a part of showing off how it will be in the 

Machine Kingdom, and it's being promoted in the media, naturally, so people can respond like these 

"enlightened" researchers and truthseekers. Do you believe me now when I say that the Machine 

Kingdom will be creeping up on us? 

The Sirians will probably be eager to meet our needs in the beginning, and the new illusionary 

freedoms will sit pretty well with mankind. Work will bring income so that people can buy the products, 

and the whole cycle of commerce will start working again. H.A.A.R.P. and similar institutions will be 


288



expanded, and mind control happen on a global scale by frequency (this is why it's so important that we 

keep our own raised frequency intact), which will keep people in check. Once the population is reduced 

to the optimal amount, wars and certain lethal diseases will suddenly stop and cease to exist. Now the 

trick is to keep the population on that level, and there are many ways to do that. One method, which 

will definitely be implemented, is to make mankind unfertile. How will they do that? By creating cyborgs. 

Keep in mind that what I am describing now is a long process, although there are those who say it will 

all be put in place and quite functional by 2034, thanks to nano-technology and the Big Pharma. If this is 

correct, and nanobots are put into our medicine, I agree with the Pleiadians. Nevertheless, mankind will 

soon find themselves surrounded by advanced technology, based on nano-tech. People will start 

working long hours and not have time for serious relationships, and they will also lose the skills how to 

interrelate with other humans. Their homes will be cleaned by robots who will be more and more 

sophisticated. These robots will then be made to look like sexy males and females and even have 

genitals, skin, and all the rest of it to make them look and act like human beings. Instead of having 

intimate relationships with each other, people will prefer to have sex with the robots. No responsibilities 

go with it, and when the act is over, they don't need to pay any more attention to the robot. Many, 

many people will find this convenient. Today we are deciding whether gay couples should be able to 

marry per law or not, but in the future the issue of marriage will be raised in regards to whether humans 

should be able to marry their robots or not. This is very likely, in my opinion. 

People will love their small devices and disappear into the world of virtual reality, leaving the body 

vacant, spending almost all of their spare time in virtual reality, which is just another hologram within a 

hologram. The Machine Kingdom is basically a thought form out there in the universe, and once that 

thought form is acted upon, the machines can eventually get their own intelligence. This is something 

the WingMakers are warning us about as well with their half allegorical and half realistic "Animus", 

which I spent a whole paper on in Level I. The realistic part of it is that the Anima do exist as our future 

selves -- the Grays. 

Eventually, this is the direction quite a few timelines will take; the Sirians want to create the 

Supersoldiers, who don't need food and don't need sex, but still have a biological mind and a soul. This, 

and much more, is explained in the concept of "Transhumanism", which we will get into now. It's a very 

scary future that is painted for us, because nano-technology has so many potentials. However, in the 

wrong hands..! 

VI. When the Robots Outsmart us! 

Dirk Bruere is a British scientist and magician, which are two trades that go hand in glove; one can't 

work without the other. Dirk contacted me after had read some of my papers and said that his material 

could be of assistance for me. He has written a book called, "TechnoMage" and a number of articles and 

essays on the subject of nano-technology, singularity, cyborgs and "Artilect" (artificial intellect). I started 

reading from his website, http://zerostate.net/ (another websites of his is, http://www.neopax.com/), 

and found his material fascinating to say the least, and has the scientific backup I need. 


289



Figure 8. Dirk Bruere, scientist and magician. 

It's a scary but highly adequate world Dirk is presenting to us. Contrary to myself, he thinks that a 

future with a lot of technology is inevitable, and we just have to face it. Nano-technology, the creation 

of cyborgs, and hyper intelligent robots; even Messiahs with artificial intelligence -- all that is part of Dirk 

Bruere's world. 

In Level I, I addressed my concern about nano-technology, and that billions upon billions of dollars of 

our tax money (and I'm sure a big chunk of the black budget) is going towards research in this field. In 

fact, it's considered the perhaps most important field of research right now, because the PTB know that 

whomever controls the nano-world is in control of the universe. 

Now, what is nano-technology all about? We already use nano-technology in computers and have 

done for decades, so what's the big deal? The big deal is when we not only are able to create devices 

built on nano-tech, but also have them self-replicate! Think about that statement for a while, and you 

may realize where we're heading with this. What else is self-replicating? Exactly! The 3D bodies! Not 

only human bodies, but nearly all life forms on our planet. This has been something we just know is 

happening by itself, without any interference, and that's what keeps the Living Library alive and going. 

3D is all about matter self-replicating itself. This is a "technology" known only to Creator Gods and the 

Goddess herself, but in just a few decades, mankind has gone from what we now may consider 

"technological stone age" in comparison, to becoming Creator Gods. No one is going to be able to say to 

me that this is only due to brilliant human scientists. Of course not! We have had help from those not 

from here. And this is not a matter of some big machine running software at the nano scale, but the 

machines themselves are at nano size. These, so called "nanobots", can then self-replicate. 

Imagine what you can do with this knowledge. You can of course use it for a lot of things, but the 

main subject is creating new life forms and have them self-replicate, i.e. we can create artificial bodies, 

so-called cyborgs, and make them intelligent. And that's exactly what the most brilliant scientists on our 

planet are working on now. 


290



We are certainly going to come back to creating artificial life in this paper, but first let's mention 

other things nano-technology can be used for, which also is a magnificent way of introducing this 

science to the public and get their approval to continue to the next step, which will be artificial 

intelligence. This technology will change almost all type of manufacturing. Dirk Bruere says, 

"The promise of nanotech is immense and many see it as not only the future of nearly all 

manufacturing but something that will form the basis of nearly every future technological 

enterprise. It is no less than programmable matter and as such is one of the technologies critical 

to the Transhumanist vision of the future."[8] 

This means that in the future you no longer have to go to the store and go through all the different 

types of utensils until you find a set that almost, but never totally, falls in your taste. As it is now, most 

of the time when you go shopping you may get what you want in accordance to what is already on the 

market. However, you may have your own vision of how a product, say utensils, should look like, but 

these exact ones are nowhere to be found because they don't exist. Not so any more. With nano-tech, 

you can push buttons and learn how to make choices and fine adjustments, and they immediately show 

up on the screen. Then, when you have adjusted the product exactly to your liking, you hit the Go 

button and the technology produces an exact copy of what you want, down to the exact atom. You can 

get anything you desire -- the only limit is your own imagination. You will of course be able to save the 

settings in the computer system until next time, or if your friend happens to love the product you 

created, you can give them the settings, and they can get that exact copy themselves, or make 

adjustments to it. This way, people with less imagination can get inspired by those who have more, and 

an exchange can be made. This will also lead to a new kind of business, where a staying at home mom, 

for example, with a great imagination can sell her "settings" to others and potentially make good money 

out of it. The opportunities in this field are endless. 

But these options are just candy for the masses. While the highly manipulated humanity en large is 

merely occupied and drooling over the next "invention" in an attempt to fill their own inner emptiness, 

those with higher minds, who do the thinking, are working hard behind the scenes in creating what none 

of us need, paving the road towards our own demise. Bruere's highly sophisticated work has many 

layers and must be read in its entirety to be fully understood, but I will touch a level of it that tells the 

story as it most likely will develop in the future. The thought form is there, the minds to create 

something from that thought form are there, and the technology is there, and there is no great 

resistance against it. This means everything is there to create a true timeline where there otherwise 

might just have been a potential. The PTB would never miss a chance like that. The next few years will 

be extremely important for them, and with PTB I mean both our human Elite, the extraterrestrial among 

them, and those still on proxy. 

There are also beneficial application of nano-technology, such as within medicine. Surgeons could 

inject nanobots, which are machines of nano size -- self-replicating or not -- into a patient with cancer, 

for example, and be able to attack the exact cells which are considered cancerous and leave the healthy 

cells alone, in contrast to chemotherapy, which also kills healthy cells. It may seem unfair that I leave 

out many of the positive effects of this technology, but it's outside the scope of this paper. So it's 

enough that I mention that they definitely exist. If we lived in a world where our best minds had our 

best interest as their priority, these technologies could be very beneficial, but in the wrong hands... 

Bruere says he believes that in perhaps 60 years we could build computer memory of which less than 

a ton of it could store the memories of everybody on this planet. He continues by saying that "if we get 


291



within a few percent of theoretical limits one kilowatt of electricity, enough to run a one bar electric 

heater, could provide enough processing to exceed Human brain capacity by a factor of around ten 

thousand."[9] But, he goes on, one kilowatt is what one square meter of the Sahara desert gets in term 

of sunlight! Hence, if we cover that space with nanobots, the power has increased up to a thousand 

trillion human brains. That's the raw material, but what can we do with it? Create a God? Or a whole lot 

of gods? This is not science fiction, but indeed something that scientists who are working with Artificial 

General Intelligence (AGI) are trying to accomplish in the form of Artilect[10]. 

Thus, we could build a robot which is so smart that none of us is able to compute it; it goes beyond 

our capacity as individual beings to think about it. So far, no one knows exactly how to build such an 

Artilect, but there is no shortage of ideas to test, says Bruere. But reader, don't get fooled! We're talking 

about how much is known in the scientific field that is accessible to us, and not what is available on an 

interdimensional level. The problem how to do it, I'm quite sure is already solved, but we are not 

supposed to know that. The rest is just a show for the masses. In fact, Lucifer (EA) and his Fallen Angels 

don't want to do this for us -- they want us to do it! They want us to develop the Artilect; they want us 

to be the "Creators". Although they are giving us the technology how to do it in exchange for something 

else, they want us to figure out the details and actually build this stuff. On one level it's because then 

they can blame us afterwards and get away with it, because we did it, not them. But there is another, 

more sinister reason why Lucifer wants us to do the dirty job, even if it takes much longer to accomplish 

compared to if he had his scientists do it. The reason is revenge! What I mean by that will be obvious 

before this paper is finished. Indeed, it's the ultimate evil. 

Someone mentioned to me that the Grays are indeed us in the future, just like I've concluded, but 

that they don't live in the same kind of universe we do. Instead, they live in a synthetic one, and the 

person who said that was absolutely correct. Bruere mentions the synthetic universe as well. He says 

that the self modifying programs the Elite is planning to develop as a solution to the software problem 

of creating an Artilect will mimic biological evolution as they mutate and replicate. The Artilect is thus 

evolving in a synthetic world. In retrospect, looking back at the Gray hive community, or the Social 

Memory Complex, can we now start to see where this is all heading? But by all means, let's continue. 

We're far from done yet. 

Transhumanists like Bruere, who postulate that as a step in nano-technology we could create a superintelligence, 

whether we want to call it Artilect or Singularity, and make it smart enough to compute and 

solve the most urgent and complex problems the world is facing, are concerned about the ethical part of 

such an Artilect. Will it be benevolent or not? His conclusion is that it doesn't necessarily have to be 

either, but in the long run, after it's outsmarted humanity, it will treat us as "collateral damage", and 

that would be the end of mankind. What good would we be to such an intellect from their point of view 

if they are even going to be self-replicating and evolving in their own synthetic universe? 

Therefore, say Bruere, it may be important to actually create a friendly Artilect, which like a Messiah 

will save us from ourselves, or our foes, if such are present. And of course it is. The problem, as I see it, is 

not whether such an Artilect will be friendly or not; it's already well-established what and when it's 

going to be, and like everything else the Alliance is creating, it has to do with power and control. An 

Artilect would be the ultimate power over our minds. 

This is why I say that the Transhumanists are the soft version of the Machine Kingdom. They have 

realized that something similar to a Machine Kingdom is on a rise, and there is nothing we can do about 

it. Humanity has the power to play with nano-technology, and therefore they will, they conclude. The 


292



Transhumanist's task will thus be to see to that these technologies are used as benevolently as possible. 

To be able to do this, we may just as well start the transition into a Machine World as soon as possible. 

The longer we wait, the more we have to fix, and the more extreme the measures. And in the long run 

we can use all this technology to help mankind evolve. This is where I and Bruere disagree, because I 

believe mankind can, and is supposed to, evolve without technology. 

There will be science magazines online that are going to tell the latest stories about the achievement 

in nano-technology, but this is not something to drool over; playing games may be fun, but getting 

extinct is not. This is not about humans fighting some alien force, where the aliens invade, looking like 

stiff machine people with bombs exploding and humanity eventually winning the battle. It's rather a 

subtle way of losing our sovereignty once and for all and have a machine think for us. We may be able to 

make easier decisions in daily life, but instead of having corrupt politicians deciding what is going to 

happen on a higher level, we are now going to have a Supercomputer so vast that it can generate 

thought processes many trillion times faster than a human brain. All problem will be solved! At least this 

is what the gullible will think will happen. Instead, it will be programmed to solve problems that have to 

do with a certain agenda, which goes far beyond the purpose of mankind, although we will be dragged 

into it, as usual. 

The sad thing is that if this Machine Kingdom is inevitable (on certain timelines), people will not 

understand the goal with such a society. Like Bruere says; if worse comes to worse, not even death is a 

refuge. These machines with their super-capacity could even resurrect people from the dead, so that 

not even death is an escape. Bruere and his likes seem to be giving their hope away to the goodness of 

mankind, which would ensure that we come to our senses and take the best from our human traits and 

put it into such a machine. Maybe we can make a Buddha God or something of the sort, who is able to 

show compassion? This will not happen, of course, unless the Overlords have a certain agenda which 

includes such a being, which I can't see. The scary part is that the human scientists may want to play 

with different personalities when they create Artilects, just to see if they can. In the long run, what will 

happen then? Will the different personalities, perhaps with different goals and purposes, start fighting 

each other on a synthetic thought level, totally outside of our control? If that happens, it's not only a 

threat to mankind's survival, but that of the whole universe, and maybe beyond, because where would 

they stop? Not until they meet their superiors -- if they exist. 

Bruere says that the solution to avoid an outbreak of Artilect would be to upgrade ourselves to match 

their evolutionary capabilities. He suggest we'll do that by merging with them as adjuncts to our minds, 

which would provide the core direction for the goal of Transhumanism -- the PostHuman. Well, actually, 

it is not the ultimate goal of Transhumanism; there is one vision even bigger; to transform dead matter 

to Mind. They are talking about starting with our galaxy and expand from there. Apparently, these 

scientists don't understand that matter is not dead; it is only how we perceive it! Transhumanism will try 

to make a God out of dead matter by transforming it to brain power trillions to times more powerful 

than our own intellect. Thus, we will live in a living, thinking universe, made up of nanobots as atomic 

particles. I am sure this will not sit well with the Orion Empire and the already Living Universe. I mean, 

these guys say they are trying to save us, for heaven's sake! And they don't know what the 

consequences will be to try to overcome the Goddess! Haven't we heard that before? Surpassing the 

Goddess in power and intellect? Well, if you can't do it with who you are, try technology! This is telling 

me that whoever came up with Transhumanism, or the ideas that led to it, before Bruere did, still had 

the old Lucifer's Dream in mind -- to take over the universe and make us the ultimate Creators! 


293



God help humanity if something like this will be developed. And it will not be developed by the Sirians, 

but by us, with their technology! We will be the guilty ones. We are supposed to be adults and know 

better, and if we refuse to learn when the cards are on the table, face up, we have to take the 

consequences as well. The consequences for something like that is extinction! Not as a form of revenge, 

but in a way to save the universe from such evil that we humans are creating (with the Sirian Alliance in 

the background, defending themselves by pointing at us). The Queen's Court will definitely not look 

upon it as a minor crime; the Goddess has to think of the survival of the whole universe, and I can 

imagine has little patience with those who try to destroy it, wittingly or unwittingly. Blindness beyond 

reason is no excuse! 

Transhumanism is also using the term Golden Age (like in a Second Golden Age) for the end product 

of their vision, and to distinguish ourselves from their goals, I prefer to call our future not depending on 

technology the New Era instead. If we change its name in the future, that's fine, but at least for now, for 

distinction purposes. 

Bruere is just as concerned as I am about the Machine Kingdom coming in the wrong hands; the 

difference is how much faith we have in scientists and alien toys coming into their greedy and 

insensitive hands. Bruere is more optimistic, while I'm not, because I know that this is not entirely up to 

humanity -- there are forces from outside, which are so much stronger than us at this stage of 

development that the comparison would be like that between a human and a dog. And these forces are 

on a mission; something Bruere may be ignorant of. Anyway, in his book, "The Praxis", he is quoting I.J. 

Good in a statement from 1965, about his concern creating machines more intelligent than us: 

"Let an ultra-intelligent machine be defined as a machine that can far surpass all the intellectual 

activities of any man however clever. Since the design of machines is one of these intellectual 

activities, an ultra-intelligent machine could design even better machines; there would then 

unquestionably be an 'intelligence explosion,' and the intelligence of man would be left far 

behind. Thus the first ultra-intelligent machine is the last invention that man need to make [my 

emphasis]."[11] 

Then we have Vernor Vinge, popular science fiction writer and mathematician, who gave a lecture 

containing the now famous statement in the 1980/90s. He wrote: 

"Within thirty years, we will have the technological means to create superhuman intelligence. 

Shortly thereafter, the human era will be ended"[12] 

If Vinge had inside knowledge, which almost all science fiction writers have, we are talking about a 

time which corresponds with now up to 10 years from now. So perhaps the Pleiadians, who suggested 

around 2034, were not so far off after all? 

Bruere, who is a little bit more optimistic from my point of view, suggests that something like this 

might happen a little later, around 2060 or so, based on mathematical calculations rather than 

astrological. He says, let's pretend we then have computers that are both cheap and much more 

powerful than the human brain, and that an Artilect is already created and ready to be implemented 

into a computer (or computers) with enough processing power. The Artilect "jumps" into this hardware 

and literally in a matter of hours things change, and there is zero time for us to adapt! Its brain power 

will outclass us like we humans outclass the brain of a goldfish, says Bruere. The world changes from 


294



biological dominance to Artilect dominance, which is synthetic! And remember, this is not science 

fiction; scientists behind the scenes are in fact working hard on this! And they are doing it with our tax 

money, which we gladly give away to create our own demise. All the big establishments of today, the 

military, financial systems etc., will be totally dependent upon a Cyberspace that it's a child's play for an 

Artilect to subvert into something else. If it just decides to crash the system, it will most certainly result 

in billions of deaths, says Bruere, let alone actively turning it against us! 

The "good" news is that yes, it will be turned against us, but not as in the sense of a war between 

machine and human, but as our new Leader; what in some spooky sf movies is just called "The System"; 

a central Supercomputer which decides who's to live and who's to die, and what is best for humanity 

and our future. Crazy? That's just the middle name. 

And so the "gods" have returned and established themselves once and for all on their mother's 

planet, controlling their mother's beings by transforming them into a synthetic race, dependent on a 

super-brain which we can't defeat. Only those not-from-here know how to control a Beast like that - 

hopefully? The Beast 666, couldn't that be it? 

Now, there is one more thing that needs to be done before the complete take-over is done! We need 

to upload our minds into computers, which will then be transferred and integrated with the Beast[def]. 

But why on Earth would humans want to do this? The answer is simple and will be promoted as 

"cheating death". 

How exactly will we do that? Well, imagine how scientists and geneticists will show you how they 

have created synthetic bodies which are much more powerful and durable than the bodies we have now 

in our biological, "fragile" forms. Also, backups can be made of your own mind in case an accident would 

happen, just like you back up your computer at home on an external hard drive. So say you die in the 

future, there is a way to reboot the "deceased", and you can continue as before, perhaps with some 

minor memory loss, but without going through death, afterlife, and reincarnation. Of course, people in 

the Machine Kingdom will not be famous for being spiritual, and the fear of death is one of the biggest 

issues in this future world, because no one will tell you the truth of what will happen after you die. All 

you will hear is horror stories of either getting lost in the astral or that there is no life after death at all. 

This will be stressed, and it will terrify people. The "research" into this field to come up with a solution 

to death will be heavily supported, and big funds will go into this, which is just a side project of the 

greater aspect of nano-technology. 

Bruere goes on with the following concerning statement: 

"Uploading into a virtual reality worlds run at a resolution where detail is comparable to the 

existing world of the senses, but the effective size of the 'universe' is vastly bigger than Earth. Or 

worlds which can be tailored to individuals or groups where the laws of physics or environment 

can be programmable, or fantasy base, or... anything. 

Merging our minds with vastly more powerful intellectual prostheses rivaling Artilects in 

power."[13] 

The way to do it is to scan the brain so that the original brain of course survives the procedure; it's 

just a cloned copy of the brain that's being made, including backups. However, this can't be done, says 


295



Bruere, until when his PostHuman is almost completed, which means that with nano-tech they can 

insinuate nanobots throughout the whole nervous system so the recording and transmission of data can 

be done. 

And Bruere and his fellow scientists are hopeful that this will happen as soon as possible. He quotes 

his critics, and here is one of them: 

"The capability to move the mind into the machine will mark the attainment of the final goal of 

the Gnostics, that of overcoming the body completely, living in a psychic Nirvana with the 

constraints of nature, time and history left behind."[14] 

"Hopefully he is correct", adds Bruere. And I say, "I hope he's not." 

This is the old dream of philosophical visionaries, however, to live in a constant Nirvana, apart from 

our bodies. This, however, is not what life and living is about at all. We are here to experience and 

explore, and we humans have a purpose and a goal that is far greater than 99.9% of our population 

realizes, according to my own estimate. Staying in our bodies and becoming multidimensional in a world 

free from interference and oppression are the goals of humanity. Everything else feeds the cosmic 

vampires, wittingly or unwittingly so! 

Bruere continues talking about fear of death and dying in the Multiverse. What happens after body 

death? Because of the fact that people don't know due to the way our DNA is reconstructed so we have 

amnesia, people want to avoid death at all cost. Also, growing old and "deteriorate" is another big fear -- 

the fear of not being attractive, or that the body will get sick and disabled. In cyberspace, like Bruere 

says, we are either healthily conscious, or dead with no intermediate states of Limbo. "It's a lot safer". 

People will buy this! 

So now we have a clone of our own mind in the computer system, and it's being integrated in a 

compatible Supercomputer, which is also emotional! Let us say that we have 2 billion people on the 

planet when this stage of development is finished. That is 2 billion brains integrated into this Supermind. 

What does this mean? It means that humanity gladly transferred the mind of the human soul group into 

a Supercomputer and willingly moved into a Virtual Reality, "where everything is possible". We're 

suddenly in the Matrix movies! No longer are we biological beings, but beings living in a synthetic 

universe, which is run, not by us, but by those who run the Supercomputer! Humanity will think it's 

them, but we know who they are -- the Sirian Alliance! 

Don't think for a second that this hasn't been planned for eons. The first step in the development of 

mankind in this slightly twisted 3D frequency, which is enough twisted to be out of range for other 

dimensional beings, unless they know the exact coordinates (we talked about this earlier), was for 

humanity to keep having a separate experience to build up a mass consciousness -- an enhanced human 

soul group. Enhanced according to Sirian standards for mankind. Now these standards are met, and it's 

time to move on into creating a hive community. Hive community? Where have we heard that before? 

Oh yes, the Grays, channeled material, but foremost -- the Orion Empire! 

Lucifer is Orion, and so are his Fallen Angels. I call them Sirians, because that's where most of them 

evolved, just like we evolve on Earth. However, after the Peace Treaty, the Sirians became Orions too; 

thus the "Orion Group", like I've explained earlier. In Level II I spent a whole paper talking about life in 


296



the Orion Empire, and I talked about the Bee Hive Society, where life circles around the Queen. This is 

how it is in Orion, but in a beneficial way. People there are not run by machines; everybody has 

individual thinking, can make their own decisions, and their society in general supports the individual, 

who naturally also supports the soul group, something that unfortunately is missing here on Earth. EA 

was born in Orion, and brought up in Orion before he rebelled. He understands the Orion Society very 

well. Now he is trying to distort the Old Ways of the Mother Goddess by creating a mass consciousness 

which is not centered around a Queen, but a Machine. The Machine is God (not even the Goddess, but 

God -- masculine), and it will run human society. 

So, what is the next step after that? Well, EA needs soldiers -- Supersoldiers. How does he get them? 

From genetic engineering, manipulation, and cloning! The sciences he knows best and is a master in. 

Although all human brains eventually will be connected to the Beast, individual thinking to a certain 

extent will still be possible; every individual's brain is copied into the computer, but the humans still 

have their bodies to move around in, and can think, although it's harder and harder to have original 

thoughts, because each brain can be set into whatever frequency the controllers of the Beast wish, and 

if someone has a thought that could be considered rebellious, or is not supporting the mass 

consciousness, the thought will be "culled", and the sheep who was running a little bit astray can easily 

be corrected and steered back into the fold. 

And why does each individual need to be able to think at all? Why not let the Beast do 100% of it? No, 

the Overlords need individual thinking as well, because every now and then they need a new permission 

from mankind and make a new agreement with them so that they don't force anything on us against our 

will. Bodies, for example. We can't go into space in biological bodies. They are made for planetary travel, 

but not for long distance space travel. 

We already know what kind of bodies are the most resistant to the space environment -- the Grays! 

The Grays in different shapes and forms. And humanity wants immortality, and now they have it -- in 

mind, but not in body. How about having a body that is not getting sick easily, and lives forever, because 

it's mostly synthetic and machine-like? And better yet -- with this new type of body, we can travel to 

other star systems!!! That sounds thrilling enough, and there you go. You now have Grays, and you now 

have the Gray hive community, and mankind is ready for space travel. However, these new bodies, 

needing very little to eat, also don't have reproduction abilities, because the Sirians don't want us to 

reproduce anymore. They haven't been able to figure out our sexuality and our abilities to have this 

tight connection with the Universe of the Goddess if not imprisoned, so instead of giving up and letting 

us go, they will suppress our sexuality and make us into cyborgs; sexless biorobots, controlled from a 

Supermind in a Supercomputer, living in a virtual reality; a universe slightly different from our current 

one. 

Thus humankind will sacrifice the most holy and sacred thing they have, the human body, out of fear 

for it. Out of fear for their own bodies and out of fear from that their bodies will get sick and 

deteriorate, they will let another star race, who has no business here in the first place, replace our 

sacred, Royal and Divine vehicles with artificial bodies which can't do anything near what the original, 

biological bodies can do! Fear of cancer is part of it, and that of ovarian, prostate and testicle cancers 

will make mankind willing to sacrifice their reproduction organs as well. They will be convincing us that 

children will not be needed in the new Golden Age, anyway. The amount of people on the planet is 

perfect, is what they will be manipulated to believe, and if we create more people, there will be survival 

problems. After all, those who are living now, they are told, are immortal anyway, and don't ever need 

to be replaced. There is no longer any death. It will of course be put in much slicker wording than I can 


297



accomplish here, but in one way or the other it will be done. We even have the evidence for that -- the 

Grays who say they are us in the future are lacking sexual organs. 

We have the Supercomputer where all the brain power of the human soul group is stored, including 

emotions. It's not farfetched to envision how every "human" being on this planet will be hooked up to 

this Artilect, just like the Borg in Star Trek, or like in the Matrix movies, although it doesn't have to 

happen physically, but through frequency control. A hive community and a group thinking will be the 

result. Each individual may still have their individual thinking abilities intact to a certain degree, but the 

group thinking -- the survival of the group -- comes first and the individual is not as important, other 

than to contribute to making the group mind stronger. 

Another thing is that the range of emotions that make us human will eventually not be needed, 

either, and is not even wanted by the Sirians. Many of the more compassionate emotions we inhabit are 

not desirable in the world of Sirians. They have lost all that themselves, and after all, they are a warrior 

race and looks upon all these kinds of feelings as weakness. If they want to make Supersoldiers out of 

us, the last thing they want is something that even slightly reminds them of weakness. Many emotions 

that are totally unique for humankind will be erased from the mind of the Supercomputer. 

Supersoldiers will be trained in bodies where body parts can be transplanted easily if the soldiers get 

injured. Perhaps it doesn't even hurt to get shot. Bruere thinks it's science fiction that we will create 

Supersoldiers such as Schwarzenegger's Terminator, because the New Human will be beautiful, he says; 

much more beautiful than today's bodies. I must disagree to that. On the other hand, Bruere is not 

familiar with the Sirian involvement in human evolution, so it's understandable. The new bodies will be 

those of the Grays; both those who live on Earth and those who go into space. However, the 

Supersoldiers are different. They have to be made almost invincible, and to make that happen, they 

can't be fragile and prone to being hurt when shot at. In other words, these bodies must be almost 

purely machines, perhaps with skin around the machine parts, so they look human. They may come in 

any size, from dwarfs to massive giants, depending on which kind of mission they are assigned to. These 

Supersoldiers will be trained to be fearless, because even if they would be shot to pieces after all, the 

mind lives on in the Beast back on Earth, and death is impossible. The Between-Lives-Area in the astral 

will probably by that time be deserted and not even used; it's not needed anymore. No reincarnation, 

no babies, only rejuvenation of bodies, with souls and minds trapped in the Beast. 

The manipulation will continue. The human soul group will be told that now when they have 

overcome death, there is only one direction, and that is UP! They will be told that they shall eventually 

evolve to higher planes of existence; higher densities, and higher dimensions, and become the Gods of 

the Universe. Now, when they are a Collective Consciousness, half of the battle is already won. The 

reward will eventually be Heaven itself, and they will merge with God, the One Creator. In fact, they are 

God as a composite, and all they need to do is to take back what is theirs, but was taken from them, 

they will be told. Of course, they will never be told that those who "took it from them" were the same 

beings who told them this story. Instead, they will blame it on the Orions. On some timelines, they call 

themselves Social Memory Complexes. Where have we heard those terms before? Our channeled 

sources again! The RA Material, Elohim, Lyssa Royal's "Grays", Bashar...the list goes on! 

But what happened from the point that these collective consciousnesses were created until the time 

when they returned from the future as channeled sources, talking about 4th and 5th Dimension, 

Harvest, and Compassion, Love and Light? To even have a clue, we need to tell another story from very 

long ago, long before there were any humans at all on Earth; early human experiments which led to the 


298



Namlú'u and Homo sapiens -- none of these had been implemented. This story is probably billions of 

years old, and it's partly told in the Urantia Book. This is the story of Ultimate Evil and Revenge in its 

highest and most vicious form. It's about power, Ego, remorselessness, ruthlessness, intolerance of love 

and compassion. It's about the opposite of what humankind is in her basic form stands for. It's the story 

about Lucifer, his Rebellion, and his ultimate plans for the future. It's a sobering story, because all clues 

leads to the same conclusion -- that this story, in its essence, and I am sure in most of its details, is true. 

VII. The Larger Story around Lucifer's Rebellion 

There is a much bigger agenda with all this, and I've mentioned it before, but without explaining all 

the details. I said that the Sirian Overlords, the Patriarchs, want to be the Kings of the Universe, and 

steal the Goddess title from the Mother Goddess. This is what Lucifer's Rebellion is all about, of course. 

EA/Lucifer thought he was perfect and could do things much better than his mother, the Goddess 

herself. He was jealous of her power and tired of just being "number 2" forever. Yes, forever, because 

the Goddess will of course never die. So, with his slick and glib tongue, he seduced a third of the 

Goddess' special guards and tried to overthrow his own mother. This, of course, was an effect from his 

pride, and it didn't work. 

Archangel Michael, the leader of the loyal guards, threw EA and his angels (the Sirians) out of Heaven 

(the Orion Empire). This whole Lucifer story was excluded from the Bible, again most possibly because of 

EA's pride. He and his son MARDUK wrote most of the Bible, and Lucifer didn't want humans to know 

that he was defeated; it was too much of a trauma for him, and his Ego was severely hurt. The story, 

however, was told in details in the Urantia Book, which was allegedly brought here by non-physicals in 

the astral (4th Dimension). This is why the Council of Zendar/Saturn, in the RA Material says that the 

Urantia Book was never passed or approved by the Council. Of course it wasn't; if the beings who 

brought the information to Earth had gone through the Council first, the material would never have 

been approved, because the Council of Zendar supports Lucifer! Of course,, the Urantia Book was 

brought to us during a period of war on Earth, which reflects in the book. It has a military overtone to it, 

which is natural, because the non-physicals who delivered it wanted us to be able to easily be able to 

relate to the information. 

Figure 9. Lucifer and his Angels cast out of Heaven, 

the Orion Empire, by Archangel Michael and his troops 


299



So, EA and his rebels were thrown out of Orion by Archangel Michael and his warriors, and the rebels 

were furious but not the least willing to give up. They wanted revenge, but what could they do? They 

couldn't storm the gates of Orion; the Empire was way too powerful and they would all succumb if they 

tried -- this much Lucifer had realized. However, there was something else they could do. 

After perhaps millions of years in exile, EA felt that his pride started coming back and his Ego once 

again rose almost to its former proportion! There was a way Mother Goddess had manifested herself in 

this universe to have a physical and metaphysical experience, and that was in the form of Mother Earth! 

She was the Goddess transformed into matter. Now, what did the rebels do? They flew to Earth, noticed 

it was populated by EA's mother's selected beings, an earlier form of mankind called the Namlú'u in 

some scriptures. They were the shepherds and the Guardians of the Goddess' Living Library. But the Lús 

were not the only intelligent beings on Earth, something EA soon was about to experience. His mother 

had also put her personal "ambassadors" on Earth, the Titans, thus establishing Earth as Orion territory. 

Other star races were also present on Earth, and they were all peaceful in nature. 

This, thought EA, shouldn't be too much trouble for him. Earth was probably one of the most 

beautiful planets in the universe and had enormous riches and resources that EA and has angels wanted, 

but this was just a part of it. Most of all he wanted on trying to intimidate his mother and take revenge 

for the unfair treatment he thought he'd gotten from his own flesh and blood when he was cast out of 

Heaven. 

So, a war broke out, which I wrote about in Level II and called "The War of the Titans". EA and his 

allied troops defeated the Titans, and all star races residing on Earth had to leave. The Titans returned to 

Orion and it became known what had happened. Orion sent an armada to Earth in order to once again 

defeat Lucifer and the Fallen and release Mother Earth from this invader force, but this time it showed 

not to be so easy. The Orion Group used the Namlú'u as their shields, and there was nothing the Orions 

could do without sacrificing this magnificent human species. So the Orions returned home, waiting for a 

better opportunity. And they are waiting still... 

EA was excited! He now considered Earth as his, and even named her after himself (EArth). The 

Namlú'u were not made for war and knew nothing about it, and with time, the Sirian Alliance managed 

to manipulate this human species into starting to work (slave) for them in the mines. In the meantime, 

EA and his scientists started working on creating a more sturdy and enduring slave race, because the 

Namlú'u died in droves in the mines. The rest, as they say, is history, and is discussed elsewhere in 

previous papers. 

Back to present time. Now they are here again, in direct contact with us like in the old days. What do 

they want this time? Well, the Machine Kingdom is of course not the goal; only the means to reach a 

much vaster goal. The goal is still the same as it's always been -- revenge! After all these eons, EA is still 

the same kind of being and has not grown. His Ego is still running him, and he is obsessed with taking 

control over Orion. He already took control of a faction of the Empire by taking over Mother Earth, or 

Gaia, the Goddess manifested[6]. 


300



Figure 10. Gaia, the Earth Mother 

Again, he finds humanity not up to the task he is preparing us for. He wants cyborg-like Supersoldiers, 

who are more or less indestructible, and totally fearless in battle. He wants them to be part biological 

and part machine, so they can switch body parts quickly, in case someone loses a leg or an arm, for 

example, but they must be biological as well, perhaps so EA can show off what an excellent geneticist he 

is, being able to create such beings. Also, he needs them to have psychic powers, being experts in 

remote viewing and time travel, and also be able to travel interdimensionally. In other words, he is 

building a huge army to use as a shield and as foot soldiers in an upcoming war with Orion. This is 

obvious to me, but in spite of all his preparations, I don't think he will succeed. I may pull in his rage for 

writing this, but so be it! 

The sad thing, however, is that those who follow him into the Machine Kingdom will experience a hell 

of a future, literally speaking. Also, there will be no escape, as the between-lives-area will probably 

"close down" eventually, and his human slave souls will reincarnate instantly into the cyborgs after they 

have died. No time for them to reflect, no time to decide goals anymore. EA doesn't want to waste his 

time training all these souls and then let them escape. And where have we heard about these cyborg 

troops before? That's right! They are the ones who in the future will reach the Pleiades and create a 

disaster there. And how are they described by the Pleiadians themselves? As more or less indestructible 

bio-machines, type the Terminator a la Schwarzenegger. 

So, this is the plan that is not spoken of very much, although it's so obvious. There is a reason why I 

end the last Level of Learning with two papers called, "The Machine Kingdom" and "Evolving without 

Technology". I want people to have the chance to choose after have had both main routes we can take 

from here on presented to them. The Machine Kingdom in its extreme, and the evolving of mankind 

without technology are two main roads; the main crossroads. From there, lots of timelines are 

branching out in different directions, but if we choose the Machine Kingdom, don't think that any 

timeline that branches out from there will take us out of the trap. The sober truth is that once we're in 

that reality, we're pretty much stuck there for a very long time, perhaps until the bitter end, even. As we 


301



have seen, not even death will be an escape! The souls are immediately routed back into the Machine 

Hive. 

EA/ENKI is a notorious liar. He and his son have done an excellent job rewriting history to their 

advantage, and people look forward to the Second Coming of EA, the "water bearer", because after all, 

when the Flood came, he was the one who saved mankind, so we owe him our lives. Also, because he 

did that, he must be our ally. 

It is sad that it's come to that. Unless people brighten up and start looking into this a little deeper, EA 

is going to be welcomed as a long lost King or God by the New Age society, and also by many prominent 

researchers. Even politicians and people in high position in society will welcome him as the Savior. ENLIL, 

on the other hand, is the bad guy, so we need to watch out so he doesn't come back. 

Now, from all we know, perhaps ENLIL was the better of the two brothers? EA and his son changed so 

much in the old records and included these changes in the old teaching of his Secret Societies, which still 

are run by the Power Elite today, with EA or MARDUK, respectively, as Grandmasters. 

Still, ancient unaltered records that were hidden once upon a time by those who wanted the truth to 

prevail, are being found on occasion. Some of it gets in the wrong hands and is once again hidden from 

people, now in the hands of the same secret societies that created the lies. But a few did reach the 

public, such as the parts quoted below, which are old Babylonian texts. Some of it is very revealing, to 

say the least, and tell a whole different story about the Tower of Babel and the Deluge. 

We have been taught that it was ENLIL, as the impostor YHWH, who tore down the Tower of Babel 

and created all the languages so man became separated from each other and could no longer 

communicate (in reality, it sounds like genetic manipulation all over again, where part of our DNA was 

rearranged and/or cut off, so we could no longer understand the language of the gods and had to 

develop our own languages, which were programmed into the genes). We have also been told that it 

was EA who saved a faction of mankind from drowning in the Flood. Well, even if he did, what was the 

purpose with that? Of course, EA wanted to save the Elite bloodline (Noah and his people, who were 

direct descendants of EA himself) to include in his future plans. And more importantly, who was it that 

with his lies and manipulation managed to see to that mankind could not eat from the Tree of Life and 

become immortal like the gods? ENLIL, right? Well, the scriptures tell us otherwise! Let's see what the 

ancient scriptures say. This one is called "The Babylonian (Akkadian) Tales of Beginnings: The Stories of 

Adapa and Etana". The emphasis is mine: 

"1. The Tale of Adapa 

Like "Adam," its cognate in Hebrew, the Akkadian word "Adapa" means "man." Adapa was the 

first of the seven sages of Eridu who lived before the flood. These sages talked with the gods, 

performed their rites, and helped them bring order and civilization to mankind. The story of 

Adapa begins by saying that Ea disclosed "the broad design of the land" to Adapa, giving him 

wisdom, but not "eternal life" (Dalley 184). Like the flood hero Atrahasis, Adapa is described as 

"extra-wise," and as particularly faithful and observant to his god Ea (Enki), baking bread and 

making the proper offerings of food and water every day. Adapa is also in charge of ritually 

assuring the fish supply, so one day, he sets out to fish, letting his boat drift rudderless in "the 

broad sea" (Dalley 184)--no doubt the Persian Gulf. 


302



The South Wind (who is female) kicks up, and overturns Adapa's boat. Adapa is "plunged into the 

world of fish" (Sandars 171), so he curses South Wind, threatening to break her wing. Since 

Adapa's word is law, 

No sooner had he uttered these words 

Than South Wind's wing was broken; 

For seven days South Wind did not blow towards the land. (Dalley 185) 

The sky god Anu wonders about this, so he asks his vizier Ilabrat why the South Wind has not 

blown for seven days. Ilabrat tells Anu about Adapa breaking the wind's wing. Anu is furious. He 

demands that Adapa be brought before him. Ea, who knows what's going on in heaven, touches 

Adapa and advises him to go to heaven in rags and mourning. Adapa is to approach the two 

gatekeepers of Anu, Tammuz and Gizzida, and to tell them that he is mourning their absence 

from the earth. Ea predicts that the two gatekeepers will be pleased with this display of grief: 

"They will look at each other and laugh a lot, / Will speak a word in your favour to Anu" (Dalley 

186). In addition to this advice, Ea advises Adapa on how to behave in the presence of Anu and 

the assembled gods: 

They will offer thee the food of death; 

Do not eat it. The water of death they will offer thee; 

Do not drink it. A garment they will offer thee; 

Clothe thyself with it.Oil they will offer thee; anoint thyself with it. (Heidel 150) 

An envoy from Anu arrives and takes Adapa to heaven. At the gates, everything befalls as Ea 

predicted. Adapa's claim to be in mourning for the two gatekeeper gods, Tammuz and Gizzida, 

causes them to "laugh a lot." But Anu shouts at Adapa, "Why did you break South Wind's wing?" 

(Dalley 186). Adapa explains that he was just trying to fish for his lord Ea when the wind dumped 

him into "the world of fish," so he cursed the wind. At this point Tammuz and Gizzida speak a 

word in Adapa's favour to Anu. Anu's anger is softened somewhat, but nevertheless he grumbles 

Why did Ea disclose to wretched mankind 

The ways of heaven and earth, 

Give to them a heavy heart? 

It was he who did it! 

What can we do for him? 

Fetch him the bread of (eternal) life and let him eat! (Dalley 187) 

Another translation renders the two middle lines above as, "He has made him strong (and) made 

him a name" (Heidel 151). Despite these translation difficulties, it is clear that Anu is not pleased 

that Ea has given Adapa magic powers like the ability to curse the wind. But as a host, Anu must 

show Adapa some respect and offer him food and drink, in this case the bread and water of 

eternal life. Adapa, however, follows Ea's instructions to the letter and refuses what he thinks 

are the bread and water of death. He does clothe himself with garments they offer and anoint 

himself with the oils they provide. Anu wonders at his guest's lack of appetite: 

'Come, Adapa, why didn't you eat? Why didn't you drink? 

Didn't you want to be immortal? Alas for downtrodden people!' 

'(But) Ea my lord told me: "You mustn't eat! You mustn't drink!" (Dalley 187) 


303



Anu commands that Adapa be sent back to earth and laughs at the cleverness of Ea. Anu says, "Of 

the gods of heaven and earth, as many as there be, / Who ever gave such a command, / So as to 

make his own command exceed the command of Anu?" (Pritchard 80). The text comments that 

Adapa, who broke the South Wind's wing, "the man child of man" (Sandars 172), has brought 

illness and disease "upon the bodies of men" (Heidel 153). The text ends with a prayer to 

Ninkarrak, the goddess of healing, to heal the sickness of men and women."[15] 

So, in this old, original scripture, it clearly says that it was EA/Lucifer who refused mankind eternal 

life, and in the extension of things he also started the recycling of souls (reincarnation), together with his 

son, MARDUK. EA and his son, by altering some prominent texts, and with some help from Sitchin and 

other "translators", have blamed ENLIL for being the god doing this to us. But let us not end here. Who 

isolated us here by separate us from each other; cutting off our ability to use the language of the gods 

and spread us out over the planet so we had to create and establish new languages wherever we went. 

This action from the gods has created not only separation between humans, but also instigated wars 

and conflicts because we no longer were able to understand each other. I said "gods", but again, ENLIL 

as YHWH has always been the one blamed for this crime, falsely so. Here is an excerpt from another 

text, called "Enmerkar and the Lord of Aratta". Again, the emphases are mine: 

" 134-155 Chant to him the holy song, the incantation sung in its chambers -- the incantation of 

Nudimmud: "On that day when there is no snake, when there is no scorpion, when there is no 

hyena, when there is no lion, when there is neither dog nor wolf, when there is thus neither fear 

nor trembling, man has no rival! At such a time, may the lands of Cubur and Hamazi, the manytongued, 

and Sumer, the great mountain of the me of magnificence, and Akkad, the land 

possessing all that is befitting, and the Martu land, resting in security -- the whole universe, the 

well-guarded people -- may they all address Enlil together in a single language! For at that time, 

for the ambitious lords, for the ambitious princes, for the ambitious kings, Enki, for the ambitious 

lords, for the ambitious princes, for the ambitious kings, for the ambitious lords, for the ambitious 

princes, for the ambitious kings -- Enki, the lord of abundance and of steadfast decisions, the wise 

and knowing lord of the Land, the expert of the gods, chosen for wisdom, the lord of Eridug, shall 

change the speech in their mouths, as many as he had placed there, and so the speech of 

mankind is truly one.""[16] 

There is no doubt here that it was ENKI/EA who created all the languages, "as many as he had placed 

there", and blamed it on ENLIL. It makes us wonder who of the brothers did what. EA and MARDUK are 

clever; what they have done throughout history, on the most part, is to take the truth as it is and totally 

turned it around so that which is true becomes a lie, and what is a lie becomes the truth. And it has 

worked like a clock on mankind; we have swallowed it all -- line, hook, and sinker. This is the best way to 

create a lie that people will believe in, because the truth is embedded in it for those who have eyes to 

see. Not that I think ENLIL was innocent on all accounts, and he and EA had quite a few conflicts, but I do 

believe that ENLIL has been falsely accused of things that he is innocent of. 

Regardless of that, people of today are willing to follow EA's ways, and as long as we do, we are 

walking willingly right down into the bottomless pit. The truth is here, and I know that many people who 

had embraced EA will read this. So now there is no justification for promoting EA as a "good God". EA is 

Lucifer, the angel who rebelled in Heaven where he created havoc. He was cast out and then came to 

Earth. And what did he do here? Create even more havoc! That's the nature of this "god", and everyone 


304



who follows him will go towards his or her demise and drag everybody else with them. And no, Lucifer 

was never redeemed, like Supriem Rockefeller said; that was another lie. 

Like if this wasn't enough, consider this: EA is the eldest son of the Mother Goddess. She had big 

plans for him. She educated him, because she saw his brilliance and his almost endless talents, and she 

loved him dearly. He could have been a great angel in Heaven. Instead, he became jealous of his mother, 

and because of his brilliance and seductive brainwashing techniques, he managed to gather a third of 

the Goddess' Angels against her, and EA attacked his own Mother. Of course, EA had overestimated his 

brilliance and didn't stand a chance against the Archangels and the Goddess' soldiers. Michael cast 

Lucifer and his "dark" Angels out of Orion and told them that they were not welcome back unless they 

could show that they had truly changed their ways! This was a heartbreaking event for the Orion Queen, 

who is the Goddess manifested as the Queen of the Orion Empire in the KHAA. 

Lucifer, however, had no intention to "change his ways". Instead, he felt badly mistreated and his big 

Ego was incredibly hurt. Anger, hate, and revenge were the thoughts that ran through his head, day and 

night. For perhaps millions of years he browsed the universe and probably created havoc wherever he 

arrived. But mainly, his thoughts were occupied with how he could take revenge on his mother, 

overthrow her and take over the Orion Empire, and after that, the whole universe. 

Now, think of this from the Goddess' perspective. Here his son descends from the heavens, down to 

Earth, and starts a war against his own flesh and blood, the Titans. He drives them away and decides to 

use the Goddess' most beloved creation, the Namlú'u, as a slave race, and he lets them die in the mines. 

This was done by her own firstborn son! But as if that wasn't enough, he altered their genetics and 

created a new race, which was a mix of other races, and made their bodies into a trap. He took the 

Namlú'u spirits, and other highly evolved spirits from the universe, and trapped them into these 

genetically altered bodies and reduced their perceptions with 96%! In addition, Lucifer created new 

souls from the energy of the universe and manipulated those into the altered bodies as well. Now, 

Lucifer had created the worst abomination and crime a being could create -- he had totally devastated 

the Goddess! Then he kicked these new beings, Homo sapiens, into the mines and let them slave for him 

until they died. The few Namlú'u that were left on the planet decided to leave. In addition, he and his 

Fallen Angels raped the earthly women and created children with them; something which is a high crime 

according to universal law!!! You can't go to an evolving planet and have sex with its evolving habitants. 

That's a very serious crime, and in this case, it was like raping Mother Earth herself. 

Now, Mother Earth had been totally hijacked by her own son. In addition, he changed the frequency 

of the planet and sealed it off! Only Lucifer could now decide who was allowed on the planet. He also 

set up the Council of Saturn to make sure no uninvited visitors entered the solar system. 

The Mother Goddess love Homo sapiens, even though we are just watered-down versions of the 

original Namlú'u human race which she once created. But humanity still has the Fire of the Goddess, and 

this is something she could most certainly enhance in us from being the Earth Mother. Lucifer could 

never take that away from us. But his plans didn't stop here. He wants to totally intimidate the Goddess 

before he takes over Orion and the rest of the KHAA. Therefore, his plan is to manipulate mankind to 

such a degree that we in our ignorance and total oblivion agrees to being made into machines and to 

start a war against our original Creator God and her helpers -- the Mother Goddess! This is Lucifer's 

ultimate evil plan; to use the Goddess' most beloved creation against her in a devastating war, where 

the Queen of Orion has no other choice than to open fire against her own human race, who will 

furiously attack her, not knowing any better! In the process, most, if not all, of humanity will be 


305



eradicated and their avatars blown to pieces by the "weapons of the gods". This is the future in which 

the Machine Kingdom is just the beginning! Want to join? I didn't think so. 

Personally, I wouldn't be surprised if EA doesn't care too much whether he wins the war against 

Orion or not. I can see him sit in the background, laughing hysterically while humans are killed in droves 

before his eyes. Even if Lucifer loses the war, he may consider that he got his revenge anyway. He had 

his mother being forced to kill what is left of her own creation. 

Remember that this is his plan! But will he succeed? We don't know; we really don't know. The odd 

thing here is that we have been able in these papers to look way into the future with a lot of certainty 

thanks to the channeled sources. The Grays, who are us in the future -- the "time jumpers" -- have 

showed us where humanity is heading on any and many of the timelines that branch out from the 

Machine Kingdom. We have been shown what is going to happen thousands and thousands of years into 

the future. But here is the odd thing: it stops with the Essassani Grays (Bashar). They are the "end 

product". What happens after that? We have no clue; it's like time stops there and we can't go any 

further. Why? 

What about if we speculate then? It is my understanding that Lucifer wants to create Social Memory 

Complexes (also called "Collective Consciousness) in order to more easily manipulate us into this war 

against Orion. However, it seems like this war is not happening. Instead, somewhere along the lines of 

time, mankind either manages to break out of Lucifer's grip and become left on their own, evolving as 

Social Memory Complexes. However, after have been manipulated for so long by Lucifer and his Fallen 

Angels, these collectives are still trying to evolve beyond the 8th Dimension, but have no clue what is 

waiting there for them. When RA is asked that question, they say they don't know what's beyond this 

"Octave". It sounds like somewhere, perhaps still on Earth, this Supercomputer still exists, manipulating 

the future mankind in form of a Social Memory Complex, in the same fashion it was basically set up. On 

these timelines, such as that of the RA people, EA may still work in the background, but there are Grays 

from the future, who seems to be independent from Lucifer's grip and able to come back here in 

attempts to switch back to our present DNA set up, so they can become humanized again. I see no 

reason why Lucifer would let them do that, unless they are renegades, just like the Pleiadians. It's hard, 

if not impossible to know. 

Nowhere, however, do we hear about a future war with Orion. This makes me think that Lucifer/EA 

was stopped somewhere along the line, or perhaps, on the timelines available to us, the war hasn't 

happened yet. Like I said, we can only speculate. I have clearly seen his plan, but I can't see the 

outcome. Knowing what I know about Orion, I don't think that even with humanity's help, EA would be 

able to defeat the Orion Empire. That to me seems out of the questions. What seems totally plausible, 

however, is that humanity will go along with EA's plans, and as usual be used as cannon fodder and run 

towards their own demise; all because they never bothered to find out what was really going on. 

Therefore, in their ignorance, they will choose the wrong side. Only a small percentage of mankind will 

survive, and those are the ones who choose to evolve without alien technology! We are humanity's only 

chance, and the only ones who will acknowledge the Goddess as our Creator and honor her 

manifestation as Mother Gaia. In a future version of herself, we will nurture her like she will nurture us 

in a symbiosis where balance and happiness is restored, and the New Human of the New Era will be the 

beginning of a new species. We are the survivors! 


306



VIII. The Hell Dimension 

There are apparently only eight dimensions in the 4% universe we humans are entitled to explore as 

long as we are under Lucifer's command. However, there is a sealed off part of one of the dimensions 

that he has created for a specific purpose; something that I heard from the horse's mouth. Anton Parks 

brings it up too in his research on the "Anunnaki". The Orion Group has created what they seem to call a 

"Hell Dimension". I hope this is only a scare tactic and that it doesn't exist, and I have waited until now 

with talking about it, going back and forth whether I should mention it at all. Then I thought, why would 

I start keeping information from from people now, when I have revealed all this other stuff? I know it's 

not pleasant, but none of it is, and after all, it's always better to know than to live in oblivion. 

Figure 11. The Dimensions according to Anton Parks. 

The ANGAL is equivalent to the KHAA (the VOID) and 

KUR-NU-GI is the "Hell Dimension" 

Those who want to see Anton Parks’s description of the Hell Dimension can go to the website created 

by the Zeitlin couple, who are good friends with Parks and have translated parts of his work from French 

to English on their site. Here is the page describing the different dimensions, and check out the KUR-NU- 

GI dimension in particular: http://www.zeitlin.net/EndEnchantment/Secret2.html#Dimensions. 

The reader can probably imagine that I've been under attack since I started writing my papers. 

Especially so since I started writing Level II and all the way up to present. It has come in waves, and I can 

see that certain papers are more "sensitive" than others and have most certainly bothered and annoyed 

particular people in power. The worst attack I had, though, was in dream state, where I was shown the 

"Hell Dimension" and what it actually is. It has nothing to do with Eternal Fire. Let me explain by telling 

you about my dream: 


307



The dream started with that I was on the ship that was used in the "Philadelphia 

Experiment"[17]. People started getting stuck in the walls and on the floor and became "one" with the 

ship. Everybody was screaming in fear and terror and running in all directions, trying to get away from 

this nightmare. I was running in one direction together with three or four other people. I didn't 

recognize any of the faces in the dream. 

Then everything went dark for what I perceived a long time. There was nothing besides darkness. My 

body was gone and it was only me left, the soul/Avatar. Then, all of a sudden it got a little lighter, but 

still quite dim; I couldn't see any details. The next thing I know, I (my soul) bumped into some kind of 

black box on the floor, bounced one time and landed on the floor beside the box. Again, it was only me 

without a physical body. I had no particular feelings at the time, except confusion. I didn't know where I 

was. 

I did what I could, trying to orientate myself and floated up in mid air. Then I noticed that I apparently 

was in a room of some sort, and it was dark, like I said, but dim enough for me to be able to see the 

walls. So I was apparently in what looked like some kind of room, about 25ft2. I thought, "OK, at least I 

am alive. Let's see where the door or the opening is". I floated around in that little space trying to find a 

door or a way out, but couldn't find any. I was trapped in a 25ft2 space with nowhere to go. I was 

thinking that due to that I was in spirit form, I could maybe float through the walls, but I just bounced! 

That's when I started feeling desperate. I sat still for a while, listening, but it was extremely quiet; the 

quietest place I've ever been in. There seemed to be no one around. I started shouting, "Hello?", but of 

course I didn't have a voice like a body does, so it was more like a telepathic thought that I transmitted. 

No answer. That's when I totally realized that I was trapped and there was no one around, and no one 

was going to come and let me out! For a second I thought, "They have to come and give me food soon!", 

but I realized that souls need no food! The last thought I had was a devastating one: "Oh no! I am 

trapped here forever! They can keep me here for an eternity, and I can't even die! It's the ultimate trap! 

And the worst thing is, I have no idea where I am! Am I on Earth? Another planet? Where????" 

I remember I was totally desperate and terrified. Then I woke up, chipping for air. 

The next morning, before my wife woke up so I could tell her about the dream, I told a friend of mine 

about it. That's when I realized what this was all about. The Sirians had visited me in dream state and 

threw my soul into their "Hell Dimension", so I could see how it is! And I also then remembered a quick 

thought I had in my dream, "If you don't stop, this is what's waiting!" Then I had little doubt that they 

had actually showed me Hell, and that's where they want to put me unless I stop writing. It was quite a 

hard decision to know what to do next, but I decided that I am not going to let them stop me. If what 

they threatened me with is actually true (and it was pretty true while I was dreaming it), and that's what 

they are planning for me, it's not a pleasant thought, but this is so much bigger than I, and if this 

information is not coming out now, no one else is going to do it, either. At least not any time soon, and 

then it may be too late. 

I know that this will scare a few readers, and I am sorry about that. It's not my intention, but this is 

what happened to me. Will it happen to you? I doubt it! It may not happen to me, either, but was just a 

threat to stop me from continuing. The soulution is still to evolve like we have talked about. When we 

leave our bodies, we know who we are and we vibrate on a much higher level than they do. Put a 

bubble around you when you leave this world and let no one come inside that bubble, no matter what. 

Then, if you have decided what to do, do it and let nothing distract you! More about "Exit Plans" in the 

last paper! 


308



I want to end this paper on a good note! While I was writing the Lucifer section of this paper, a 

Pleiadian Newsletter came in the mail. They said they are very excited, because mankind has managed 

to energize the timeline where we evolve without technology! They told us in the letter that what they 

had come here to accomplish has been accomplished by us! What this means is that enough people 

have raised their frequency enough to change the positive timeline from a potential timeline to a real 

timeline. Enough energy is put towards creating this new reality that it is actually going to happen! If this 

is true (and I really believe it is, because I can feel it in my heart!), it's the best news we've received in 

years and years. We have done the right thing and now we just have to follow through and continue 

doing what we're doing, and we can eventually achieve our goal to live in a world free from oppression 

and Sirian presence. Congratulations! 

The Pleiadians continued by saying that they will still be here long after the nano-second and 

communicate through Barbara Marciniak as long as she is strong enough to hold their energy (only age 

and sickness can stop her from doing that, and she is after all 65 years old). This Pleiadian renegade 

group wants to be here and guide us and answer our questions in order to help us rebuild a new society. 

However, as always, they tell us that we are the ones who have to do it; they are just here to observe 

and give advice when asked for. 

The next, and the very last paper, will be exactly about what the Pleiadians talk about in the above 

paragraphs; the evolution without technology! I'll see you there! 

Love, 


Notes and References : 

[1] http://www.bibliotecapleyades.net/vida_alien/vidaalien_signtimes05a.htm 

[2] ZETA RETICULI REVELATIONS. Bashar & Harone through Lyssa Royal, October 27, 1990 - Los Angeles - Tape #85. 

[3] Summers: "The Extraterrestrial Presence in the World Today -- Allies of Humanity, The First Briefing", p.19. 

[4] In this respect, I am totally in line with Marshal V. Summers and the "Allies of Humanity". I don't agree whole-heartedly with 

the information this ET group is giving us, but again, it's not necessary. They are another piece of the puzzle, and I'm glad to 

have them there, because their information will probably be considered helpful in the near future, like mine hopefully will be as 

well. 

[5] Some say that the tension between the U.S. and the Soviet Union after the war was just a play for the masses, and the "Cold 

War" never existed; that too was only to keep people on their toes. There is evidence enough to back up those statements, but 

on a lower level government, the Cold War existed. Remember how everything is a hierarchy and on a need-to-know-basis. 

[6] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gaia_(mythology) 


309



[7] http://projectcamelotproductions.com/interviews/operation-stargate/operation-stargate.html and 

http://projectcamelotproductions.com/interviews/aaron_mccollumII/aaron_mccollumII.html 

[8] Dirk Bruere, ©2011: "The Praxis", p.40, op. cit. 

[9] ibid, p.42, op. cit. 

[10] http://www.forbes.com/2009/06/18/cosmist-terran-cyborgist-opinions-contributors-artificial-intelligence-09-hugo-degaris.html 

[11] "The Praxis", p.47, op. cit. 

[12] ibid., p.47, op. cit. 

[13] ibid., p.49, op. cit. 

[14] ibid., p.49, op. cit. 

[15] The Babylonian (Akkadian) Tales of Beginnings: "The Stories of Adapa and Etana", op. cit. 

http://faculty.gvsu.edu/websterm/Adapa.htm 

[16] "Enmerkar and the Lord of Aratta, verses 134-155" op. cit. http://etcsl.orinst.ox.ac.uk/section1/tr1823.htm 

[17] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Philadelphia_Experiment 


310



Paper #10: The Splitting of the Worlds Part 2: 

Evolving without Technology 

by Wes Penre, Tuesday, April 9, 2013 


I. Confronting our Dark Side 

Now when the reader has read through three levels of material, about 1,500 pages all together, have 

you noticed something pretty astonishing? Although perhaps 2/3 of this material has been about the 

Sirians and their control over mankind, which could potentially make these paper "fear-based", what do 

you feel right now? Do you feel afraid, or do you feel stronger and more uplifted than before you started 

reading it? 

Albeit there are probably a few who would say they are afraid, the vast majority are probably feeling 

what I feel -- enhanced spiritually. But how can that be? Most of this material, except the "Soulution 

Sections", which end each Level, are not talking about uplifting things, but mainly about the slave 

society we've lived in since we were created as Homo sapiens. 

It's because this material is telling the truth and therefore stimulate the neurological pathways, and 

also create new ones. 

There was a point in my writing, before I even started on Level I, when I realized that we as a species 

won't be able to go any further until we've learned to confront our dark sides. We all have a tendency to 

be willing to look at our "good" sides, and all the new abilities we are going to achieve if we follow the 

Path of Light. But very few are digging deep inside their own roots and stir around in the darkness of the 

very soul. This, however, is what these papers have done. By telling the dark history about humanity, we 

have been able to see humanity's own involvement in what has happened, and mostly unconsciously 

been able to call up the timelines connected to these major solidifying events. Albeit some of the true 

story about mankind's past has been told elsewhere, some of the events that have been really 

traumatizing and hooked us in 3D, have never before been told. On top of that, very few have told us 

where we come from and who is our real Creator. The only version we actually have ever heard is the 

version where the coin is flipped; black is white, good is evil, foe is friend, and so on. What do you think 

happens when some beings (in this case EA and MARDUK) change history by turning the truth around 

and present its opposite as the truth? We will be stuck in our timelines, and past life events will keep us 

imprisoned in this reality, because we can never break the chain of events in our own minds. This is why 

I have been talking about that our timelines will merge before we can break loose and become multi-d. 

The events and the lies that have kept us stuck in the past must be confronted, pondered, and realized. 


311



Figure 1. Neuro-pathways. 

But not only that. We must also break the chains from our future; the future timelines, such as those 

of the Machine Kingdom, which we don't want to participate in, but perhaps we will -- on a timeline or 

two. Therefore, we must also confront the future and merge these timelines as well. My efforts are an 

attempt to make this happen. However, I'm not the only source to make this happen, and it's also part 

of a natural phenomenon which has to do with our alignment with the Galactic Centers. 

What will happen when you read this material is therefore basically twofold: 1) you have gotten a 

much truer history of mankind presented to you, which will flip the coin back with the right side up. You 

will see things for what they are and your timelines will unhook from events that were suppressed in 

space and time and therefore stuck there. Sometimes you feel you are able to expand on what is written 

here, and you create your own "bigger picture" -- it just comes to you. Like a rubber-band, your 

timelines -- past and future -- will snap and return to you, and you become much more whole. This can 

be tough and traumatic at first, and requires courage, because some of these events include violence 

and grief, but once they are seen for what they are the emotional charge will be taken off of them and 

remain as experience only. This doesn't mean you necessarily will remember all these timelines (or you 

would be quite overwhelmed), but you feel the emotionality of them. 2) By confronting the darkness of 

your own soul, you then stand on neutral ground and are ready to make a totally conscious decision 

about your own future for the first time ever, perhaps. Your heart chakra is opened, your neurological 

pathway clear, and new neuro-pathways opened. You are ready to meet new challenges, but this time 

they are based on your own decisions, not some manipulation done by an outside force. This is why you 

amazingly enough probably feel much more stable and sure of yourself now than you did before you 

read this material. 

There is a disinformation campaign being run as we speak (and has been for quite some time) that we 

should only look at the positive side of things, because then we will only get positive effects back. 

However, if we look at the dark side and that which is set up to scare us, fear and negativity is what we 


312



get in return. If we follow that advice we get blind to 50% of whom we are, and we end up with Steven 

Greer, who says that all aliens are benevolent, without exceptions. That's blindness. No, we have to look 

at both sides of ourselves, and we need to start with the dark side, or the dark side will make it very 

hard to genuinely expand on the light side. By bringing up the darkness to the surface and take a look at 

it, we also are much less prone to being effected by the negativity around us; we simply don't take it in 

anymore, because we know where it is and how it works. This is a requirement in order to be able to 

build the New Era. We don't need to be 100% perfect with it, but if you've reached the point I'm 

speaking of, you know and feel what I mean. After all, we can talk about Global Warming, the toxins we 

spread around in our atmosphere in form of chemtrails (something Bill Gates clearly admitted to exist, 

by the way)[1], oil spill, nuclear fallout, etc., but the worst toxic "chemicals" we spread on the planet are 

those of our own, unconfronted negative emotions. 

Also, if we don't know our own history, good or bad, we don't know ourselves, and can't create a 

harmonious future for ourselves. So I thank you from the bottom of my heart for staying with me! The 

dark side of humanity's history has now been confronted enough, in my opinion, for us to start 

concentrating on the positive paths. I am painfully aware of that only a handful individual so far have 

read my papers (around 60,000 all together since I launched Level I in October, 2011), and many of them 

did not complete them, but on the other hand, these papers are not written for those who just woke up 

and started looking for the truth. There is other material they need to look into first, such as that at 

http://illuminati-news.com. I am convinced that much more people will find this material in the near 

future. It will be here, floating in time. 

I ask the reader to please do me a favor, however. Please download the pdf versions of each paper on 

your hard drive as soon as you can; hopefully already when you start reading a certain paper. By doing 

so, I know that this material is safe. Even if the Internet goes down in the future, the material lives on 

with you, the reader, and can be printed and spread in other ways. It also may save my life. And if not -- 

even if they get to me -- I can smile, because I know that my work was not in vain and will live on after 

my own demise. Thank you! 

II. Creating a Safe Environment for Self and Others 

I can't stress enough how important it is to love yourself. If you don't, you can't love others either, 

and you get stuck. You need to feel deep inside that you deserve what is absolute best for you, now and 

in the future. For many people, these are no easy things. Deservability is a heart quality. 

Too many people sacrifice themselves for others. Since the old Shakespearean dramas and way 

further back, people have learned from Sirian art and manipulation that others are more 

important than you. They knew they could get away with that, because we humans basically have 

a good heart and care for each other. There are people who have set it as a goal in their life to 

help others. This is a very honorable thing and it's nothing wrong with that. Only if you constantly 

help others over and over again to the extent that you exhaust and sacrifice yourself is it 

something you perhaps need to reconsider. If you're one of those, what is it in yourself that you 


313



don't like? What is it that makes you think that others deserve more than you? When others 

become more important than yourself, there is a lack of self-love, self-respect, and 

"deservability". 

Then, of course, we have the other side of it, where you are not doing another person a favor when 

you constantly help her or him out. Everybody is on their own journey, and if you constantly interfere 

with the challenges this other person has to face, they will never learn. You may be able to solve the 

problem for them, but if you do, there is no lesson learned. Instead, giving a hint of advice to lead the 

person on the right track if they're stuck is much more help than helping "hands on". Then, of course, 

we need to use our judgment; if a person is getting raped, beaten up, or otherwise abused, we don't just 

stand and look and tell ourselves it's these people's learning lessons. But the bottom line I am trying to 

get across is that when you start loving, respecting, and trusting yourself, it's coming right out of the 

heart chakra, and you will notice that all your relationships, whether they are family, friends, or work 

partners, will be based on the same qualities. It's inevitable. 

Figure 2. The seven body chakras. The 4th chakra is green and called the "Heart chakra". 

What we who have decided to choose this alternative route, free from the Machine Society, are 

doing is that we are bringing ourselves and others outof the solar plexus chakra, based on fear, to the 

heart chakra, based on love and compassion. So in that sense you could say we are ascending, because 

we are vibrating on a higher frequency where fear is more or less out of our lives. This is also why we 

had to confront the fear on a mass consciousness scale (which includes the whole human soul group), to 

move up from the stomach to the heart. Those who will choose the Machine Kingdom are still living in 

fear, basing their entire existence on the solar plexus chakra. They never had the courage to look what 


314



was deeply embedded there, and their way of conquering their fear was to go with the fear mongers, 

thinking they could keep them safe as long as they do what the fear mongers say. This is how the tune 

goes, both on an overt and a covert plane. And when I'm talking about the heart, I clearly mean the 

heart chakra and not particularly the physical heart, although the physical heart is the physical part of it, 

and a portal into the deeper aspects of the chakra, dwelling inside of ourselves, on a subquantum level. 

People who think very little, or hardly at all, from their heart chakras, have a higher risk of heart attacks 

than those who have their chakras more open. So in the extension of things; the more chakras we have 

managed to open, in general, the healthier we become, and we enhance our longevity. Science says that 

the human body as it is can live maximum 120 years and that it is impossible to live longer than that. If 

this is true, it only goes for the old human, but not for Homo Nova[2], who will be able to live much 

longer than that in the future. Some may ask why we want to live that long if we get old and sick, but 

the whole point is that we should be able to live long lives without getting the regular elderly symptoms, 

so common and almost unavoidable for today's Homo sapiens. 

We are all children of Nature -- all of us. Although our bodies were manipulated many times 

throughout history, no one could take away the fact that we belong to Mother Nature. There are those 

who want to create the ultimate abomination, trying to disconnect our bodies from Nature by making us 

into machines so we never again will remember where we came from, and on many timelines they will 

succeed. I am not alone; there are others who strive towards the same goal as I do -- to keep a branch of 

humanity alive, a branch which will not forget who our Goddess and Creator is, and our relationship and 

bond to her. 

This is why it's so important that we reconnect with Nature. With that I don't mean that we take 

Sunday trips into the woods, sit on rocks and drink warm chocolate. We can do that, too, if we like, but 

connecting with Nature is so much more than that. We see in Hollywood movies -- the ones which are 

magical -- how people talk telepathically with the animal and listen to the trees. This is what we're going 

to be able to do (and many are already doing). On Earth everything is connected; rocks, plants, animals, 

and humans. What the Sirian Overlords did was to turn off our switch so the energies that connected us 

with Nature didn't find anywhere to go. Now it's our task to turn on that switch again. 

To learn about Nature is to learn about ourselves and vice versa. We all potentially have the ability to 

go out in the woods, up in the mountains, out in the desert, or to the beach, and just sit down and listen 

to Nature. Although there may be a stillness and an apparent silence where you stay, there is much 

going on in other dimensions of reality. All we have to do is to listen to what is there and start 

communicating. The trees have quite a story to tell, and so do the rocks, the rhythm of the waves, and 

the old mountains. Once upon a time we were the Guardians of all this, and we always knew what was 

going on around us. We knew that everything was encoded and bore the imprint of the original Creator 

God that created it. Through Nature we could communicate with the whole universe, and we could 

communicate with our own Creator Gods, regardless of where they were. Now it's become a one-way 

communication. We can be communicated to, but we don't respond because we no longer hear the 

communication in our bodies. Instead of using our bodies as an instrument to communicate in the 

Multiverse, we have become afraid of our own bodies. No wonder we get sick. When the body feels we 

don't love her, and actually fear her, she responds by getting sick. Separation from the body is a 

separation from God/the Goddess. 


315



As a fun thing you can try in the beginning is to communicate telepathically with butterflies. They are 

enormously clairvoyant. Every summer, just because I enjoy it, I sit on my porch next to a flowerbed 

early in the morning and wait for the first butterfly to come. When it does, I start with saying "hi" to it, 

telepathically, and follow its path with my eyes. Then I tell it how beautiful it is and how much I enjoy 

having it around. Next, I ask it to come closer, and it does -- carefully at first. I send a lot of love and 

affection towards it and that makes it come and circle around me and even land on the table just in 

front of me. When it takes off, I again follow its path and tell it how wonderful it is, and it's like it wants 

to show off because I recognize it. Lastly, I tell her to go and ask more butterflies to come, and sure 

enough, a minute later several of them show up in the flowerbed, together with the original one. It 

works like magic, but still it's so natural. 

What happens here is that I am not necessarily communicating with the insect itself, but with the 

intelligence behind it; the God or Goddess who created her. The fact that a human once again 

recognizes that there is intelligence in the small things makes the force want to play along to show me 

that what I'm doing is noticed and appreciated. Try it! Practice! Do it with other insects too, if you wish, 

and with squirrels and birds. You are going to find that you are able to attract a lot of animals in your 

yard, or whatever environment you live in. Then they are going to return because they feel and 

recognize your energies. The animal and plant Queendoms know who you are. By doing this, and by 

accomplishing the above, you prove to yourself that everything in the universe is connected and in 

communication across the dimensions. We are only trapped here if we agree to it. I spoke in earlier 

papers about us being "allowed" to enter 8 of the 12 major dimensions, and only a very limited part of 

them (4% of the whole universe), but disagree with this, open up your chakras, one by one, and you will 

see that eventually, a whole new universe is opening up before your eyes. You are manifesting your 

Inner Universe in the Outside Universe in order to be able to explore, but in reality every cell in your 

body is a galaxy, just like Abraxas, the Dragon walk-in, said on the Gaia forum (see Level III, papers 5 and 

6). As above, so below. Go inside, and the whole Multiverse will open up, literally. 

However, this will not happen in one day; it's a process, and it's practice that is leading us there. Still, 

we need to understand that all the above is possible to regain, and in an upcoming book I will go into 

details about how we can obtain these abilities and much more; i.e. the process of becoming 

multidimensional. The first thing we need to do, however, is to create a safe environment for ourselves, 

now that we know what we're facing when comes to high-tech timelines and artificial intelligence. 

Regardless if you're all alone, have a small or large circle of friends, if you're married and have family 

or not, you need to create your own "Local Universe". I first heard of this concept from James of the 

WingMakers when he explained it in an interview with Mark Hempel. I then knew right away that this is 

the way to create our new timelines in the beginning of the New Era, i.e. now, in this present moment. 

The Local Universe is defined as your local environment, which could be your neighborhood, your town, 

or a wider area in which you operate. If you take this area and tell yourself that this is your current Local 

Universe, which at any time can expand or retract, and then fill that area with whatever you wish that 

area to be or become -- you do it in your mind. You also include the safety or people, animals, and 

whomever or whatever lives in this specific locality. Perhaps you live in a Local Universe which is more 

or less how you want it to be, and you feel safe, or maybe there are quite a few things you need to 

improve to come to that point? No matter which it is, you are now going to imagine exactly how you 

want your Local Universe to be in order to be safe and according to the reality you wish for yourself. 


316



Then you hold that picture and tell yourself that this is your Local Universe in which you live, and these 

are the things you want to approve (or keep as they are). Don't force that reality on your environment; 

just put a light thought and a positive emotion to it and let it go. Then, if something happens which is 

not in line with what you want to be safe, you once again put your picture there, lightly and with a 

positive emotion, and let it go. Soon enough, you're going to notice that things around you start to 

change and the energies are going to twist and bend in the direction towards your goals. 

Under some circumstances, if the reader lives in a very bad neighborhood with a lot of crimes and 

people who emit an unusual amount of fear, it may not matter what you do; you will still live in a very 

unsafe area. In that case, there is no other option than to move. You may tell me that your 

circumstances are such as you can't move, but then your energy must go towards making that your first 

goal instead of what I've suggested above. Optimally, this would already have been taken care of during 

the nano-second. 

For this to really work, you need to understand the dynamics around it. When I say Local Universe, I 

really mean it. That is your universe in which you currently live. Let's say you live on the American west 

coast. Then, what happens in Israel and Palestine, in Syria, or in Egypt, is not part of your Local Universe. 

Neither is Washington DC and the political environment there. If you read the newspaper about war and 

disaster in one area of the world, you must remember that it's another Local Universe you are reading 

about, not yours. This is very important to understand, because people have a tendency to sympathize 

with what is happening outside their own Local Universe. Sympathy pulls those energies towards you; it 

has that quality, and that is not what you want, because then things soon may start going "wrong" in 

your own environment. You don't want to pull in negative energies in your space if you can help it. 

In the extreme, the same reader of the newspaper may feel that they want to take the first plane to 

the area of unrest and do something to help. This is their choice, but know in that case that you extend 

your Local Universe to that war zone, and it will in one way or the other affect your whole Local 

Universe, which will then have a tendency of unrest. In addition; when you leave the area of unrest, the 

same unrest you came to help resolving will continue just like before. One thing Homo Nova has to 

understand is that we can't solve the world problems, because they don't want to be solved. The Sirian 

Alliance is there, seeing to that the wars and unrest are always happening regardless of what you do. 

Your task is to create peace and rest in your own area. When you do, others will feel it and start doing 

the same thing, and it will spread amongst the mass consciousness so others, outside your Local 

Universe will start to apply similar ways of living. Eventually, people can extend their areas, combine 

their areas and change the vibrations more rapidly amongst those who are still receptive to those 

positive kind of energies. This is in no way a suggestion of limiting your space. At any time, we can go 

visiting other universes (other parts of the world) to study them or enjoy what they have to offer, but 

keep in mind that we're only visiting, and when we come back home, our task is as always to keep our 

local universe safe. I hope the reader gets the drift here. 


317



III. Building Communities 

Some people will notice that they are able to create such a safe environment exactly where they live, 

with their current neighbors and in the current little town in which they may live and therefore have 

little need to move to some kind of community to live with likeminded. There is no need to change 

something that is already working for you. In other cases, Section II above has prepared you how to use 

your energy on your environment; an ability you may want to use when it's time to perhaps get together 

with likeminded. 

Like we talked about in the previous paper, businesses will move into the big SmartCities and leave 

nearly nothing left in the smaller towns and cities, which will sometimes become just like ghost towns. 

Here is where some people with a similar mindset may want to build their new communities, which are 

based on self-sufficiency. People will build their own gardens and plant their own food and live close to 

Nature. Those who have studied rituals will know how to make contact with Mother Earth through 

those, which will help the crops grow, etc. This is basically nothing new, but more a matter of going back 

to the "old ways", before we became "civilized". 

This way of living may in the beginning be attacked by the authorities, who will create laws against 

planting anything at all that is not GM food (genetically manipulated food) and Monsanto based, and 

people may have to shut down their gardens, only to either start them up again when the government 

inspector has left, or move to somewhere else until the authorities give up. They will have plenty to take 

care of elsewhere, and the communities will be more and more, which will eventually make it hard for 

the inspections to take place at all. And people will become quite clever at tricking the government once 

they learn how their bureaucracy works. It can be frustrating and inconvenient at first, but it's a matter 

of being persistent. 

There are going to be people who want to have nothing to do with technology or society whatsoever 

and simply move up in the mountains or deep into the forests and build their communities there, like 

many did in the 70s and 80s. Some say that wouldn't work, because it didn't work back then, but back in 

the hippie era, very little was known about what is going on in the world. The young generation felt 

something was wrong and that there was too much corruption in high places, but they didn't know what 

we know now. If they would have, these people would have been more serious about it, and there 

would have been a much greater chance that it would have worked. 

Lastly, some communities are probably also going to be built out of anger and disgust. People will be 

so furious when they notice the extent of deception their leaders have subjected them to that they will 

leave society in pure rage and build their own communities, refusing to pay taxes that support the 

crimes of the few. These communities, over time, may very well also turn into very positive ones, so 

there will be many different ways how these communities will start. Other people may prefer to live 

alone but still be self-sufficient and only sporadically connect to a community, and that will also be well 

accepted. There will be many different ways to do this, and how it's done is not of that much 

importance; the important thing is that we break out of the manipulation we are living under and refuse 

to be slaves under the Machine Kingdom. It's the thought form that is important, and that we put 

energy on that thought form. 

People are asking if these future communities will have any leaders. I would think that there will be a 

mix; some communities will have their local leaders, which the rest of the community has appointed. 


318



These local leaders will not live in a special building where they can get away with doing harmful things, 

but will live among the rest of the people, like one of them. The only reason someone is appointed will 

probably be because some people have excellent leader skills, which is not a bad thing if they lead from 

their heart chakra and listen to the rest of the community and don't make important decisions behind 

their backs. The best leader is one who knows what the people want and gets the job done in such a laid 

back way that the people think it was them who did it, and it was done exactly the way they wanted it! 

Other communities may prefer not to have leaders, but instead have other ways to deal with things 

internally. 

IV. Humane Meritocracy 

So far, all political systems have failed, regardless of which time period we are looking at. I know that 

interdimensional forces have had their hands on everything, which certainly has contributed to the 

failures, but we still need something new and fresh. 

A few years ago, I looked into the philosophy of The Bavarian Illuminati in its present form, which 

supposedly is different from how it was back in the revolutionary days of the late 1700s, when Adam 

Weishaupt was the Grandmaster of the Order. I was at the time also into the WingMakers philosophy 

and noticed that the two had much in common. The common thing that stood out the most was to 

merge religion and science in order for mankind to evolve. There was also a lot of other philosophical 

teaching I liked on the Bavarian Illuminati website, which you can find at 

http://armageddonconspiracy.co.uk/. What I liked the most was the idea of Meritocracy, although I 

didn't agree with all the rules and regulations connected to it. I am not going to go into their 

philosophies here -- that's something the reader can do if you feel inclined -- but instead present my 

own solution to the political problem. 

First of all, I am not for any political solution at all; I simply don't like politics, because it limits people 

under laws and regulations. That's exactly what has kept us from expanding both spiritually and 

mentally. So my solution will therefore be non-political. The question is, how do we create a 

community, or a new society where the citizens will feel valued, loved, and happy? And how can we 

manage a society which is not based on money, and where everything is free? Alex Collier, when he 

explained to the Andromedans how our monetary system works, they stood and listened in awe and 

finally said something to the effect, "why do you have to pay for things on the planet where you were 

born?" There is a lot of wisdom in that single question. 

My solution is Meritocracy, just like the Illuminati suggests, but to make sure people know that I 

differ in opinion, I will call my version of it Humane Meritocracy, at least for now. In short, this is how it 

works: in the near future society, people will be much more psychic and observant when comes to their 

environment. Therefore, they will notice very quickly if a little child has a certain talent that he or she is 

projecting. Perhaps the child starts singing before they can talk; maybe they're very interested in playing 

an instrument? It could be they like to build things? Maybe they lean towards astronomy, cooking, 

playing doctor...the list goes on. One of the most important task for a parent will be to recognize these 

talents in the kids and let the kids develop them as they wish without interference other than if they 

hurt themselves or others. 


319



When the kid becomes a little older, the parents may ask them what they want to be when they 

grow up. You will get the answer right there, and it may or may not correspond with what the parents 

thought it was. Either way, support the kids. Elementary school will be very different from now, and the 

general subjects will bring up things that the pupils will really need to learn; not irrelevant stuff that 

doesn't have any value in the future for anybody. But the key thing is that both the teachers, parents, 

and the kids work in unison to find out what the kids like to do the most and enhance that. It is okay for 

the kids to change their minds when they get a little older -- many probably won't, but find early in life 

what they want to do if they are encouraged. Soon we have a society built on merit, not on Elite 

Bloodlines and how they want things to be. If a kid likes to hammer and build, maybe carpentry or 

construction work is something they want to do, while others want to entertain. All the variety will put 

each person in the right place and people will be happy doing what they're best at and like the best. 

Money is unnecessary, as everything is built on barter. No trade is more worth, or higher in rank than 

any other trade, as they are all important for the group. If someone wants a house built, carpenters can 

do it, and you may give them something you have in exchange. If you don't have something that is 

considered being of equal value, you contribute with what you have or with what you can do, and that's 

fine. Many people will have many talents, being both carpenters, entertainers, and gardeners in one, 

and if so, they can decide what they want to contribute with at the moment and switch between the 

trades to make life more interesting. And there will be local libraries which have material where the 

information is undistorted and helpful for the individual to expand their awareness, and time of the day 

will be spent on spiritual enhancement. The purpose is that people will get much more freedom and be 

able to create their own day and still be able to survive. 

All these things need to be talked about within the community so the details can be discussed and 

agreed upon. But I think Humane Meritocracy may be a good beginning for our new societies. Someone 

may come up that works better, and if so, then that is what we should use! Mine is just an idea, but I do 

think it's important that every person feel they are in the right place and are able to make a 

contribution of some kind. And why not do it in an area which you are skilled enjoy working in, anyway? 

The new human, Homo Nova, is already psychic, whether we are aware of it or not. Coming together 

in groups will enhance those abilities in people and those who thought they weren't will notice that 

they actually are. We will realize that to totally understand another being, whether it's another human, 

an animal, or a plant, we need to become what we want to understand. The Native Indians have a good 

saying for it: "Before you judge somebody, you need to be able to walk in that person's moccasins". The 

same thing goes if you want to understand Nature. Let's say you are wondering how it is to be an ant; 

then you have to sit down and patiently watch what ants are doing and transfer parts of your 

consciousness into one or more of these ants and live like them. Not until then can you understand 

what it means to be an ant. The same thing will happen in communities. The evolved human will not 

judge another until he or she has walked in that person's moccasins, and therefore much of what now in 

3D is a hassle will be much easier as we have changed our frequencies and learned to live accordingly 

with our new abilities. The old human "reacts" to its environment, while Homo Nova, who have merged 

their timelines, will act rather than re-act. Thus, obstacles we were used to having are no longer an 

issue, but new obstacles will build instead, which will feel much more challenging, often in a positive 

way, than those built on functional insanity, which is the definition of the Old Era. 


320



V. The Divine Feminine in Future Societies 

In the future societies, and the more awareness grows, the Divine Feminine will be much more 

predominant as a "religion". It's not a matter of a religion of worship at all, but the Wisdom of the 

Divine Feminine will be totally understood. The female will be much more respected and attended to 

than we are used to in today's society. If you are really willing to listen to your wife, you notice that she 

carries a lot of wisdom which you may wonder where it all of a sudden comes from. Well, it was always 

there, but suppressed, perhaps unintentionally by yourself, but definitely by society in general. 

We are not looking at a society where we worship our women; we still need to look for balance, but 

we will notice more and more that when we need good advice and spiritual enhancement, we will more 

often than not attend to a woman. Wisdom must be protected, and we men will protect our women; 

it's part of our job. We will also think of it as obvious that the universe is feminine in nature and that 

everything was feminine to begin with. 

VI. Indigo Children 

I have not mentioned much about these phenomenal kids in my writings so far, and that's 

intentional. I am very ambivalent when comes to using these terms, because they have been so used, 

misused and abused by those who don't have any good intentions towards this new generation of 

children. They are children, period, and I don't like to put labels on them. 

Especially during the nano-second, we have seen kids with extraordinary abilities being born into this 

world. These children are "simply" the new Homo Nova in enhanced bodies that vibrate on a higher 

frequency than their environment. That makes them very talented and they often have psychic abilities 

way beyond other children around them. As soon as this was noticed, society, and even their parents, 

were quick at labeling these kids and therefore making them special and for more than other kids. This 

has created two major problems. 

The first problem is that these poor kids are prone to feeling alienated from their environment and 

other children, and they often have a hard time with relationships with others. Also, it's difficult for 

them at times to live up to their expectations. If their parents, teachers, and society in general call them 

"special", they have to really show that they are special, and often get the feeling that whatever they 

do, it's not enough. "Am I 'special' enough now?" "Today I couldn't do what I could do yesterday. I feel 

like a failure". These kind of thoughts will come up in many of these children. Of course, their parents 

may be proud over their kids having these extra talents and want to "brag" about it and show the world 

what their very own child can do. But we need to understand that this can be quite destructive for the 

kids themselves. Instead, recognize the abilities in your children, because more and more of them will 

be born from here on, and let them develop these talents in their own pace. Never say to your children 

that they are "special"! This goes for so-called Indigo Children or "regular" children, respectively. We 

have had enough of Elitism, and this is exactly what we are coming back to if we call someone special. 

They will have enough problems as it is to adjust to a society that doesn't understand them; they don't 

need their parents and others to put additional pressure on them. Remember that these kids are our 

future! Let's not start our New Era with traumatizing our talented kids by labeling them "special". 


321



Figure 3. A so-called "Indigo child", having 

special talents and psychic abilities. 

The second problem is that when we are announcing that so and so parent has an Indigo child, the 

government knows where they are and are often quick at targeting these kids. They want them to 

experiment on, now and in the future. Again, the Sirians don't understand higher consciousness in the 

form the Namlú'u of old had it; they don't understand Homo sapiens, and they certainly will not 

understand Homo Nova. There will be a turning point when the Alliance no longer will harass those of 

higher consciousness, and leave us alone, simply because we understand the rules now and can say 

"no" to further manipulation, abductions, and experiments. Homo sapiens can't, because they are too 

deep into it at this point and the majority of them seem to be beyond salvation, unfortunately. 

However, Indigo children is a quite new phenomenon, and both human military and the Sirian 

Alliance want to know what's going on with these kids, and perhaps, as a last attempt, they can learn 

how we function and be able to break the originally DNA code. Therefore, scientists have been working 

with these kids with the parents' consent for quite a while now to figure out how their psychic abilities 

work and where their extraordinary talents come from. Some parents, proud over their child, have been 

happy to let scientists make experiments on him or her, unfortunately. 

So, bottom line in my opinion is to leave these kids alone and let their development come in their 

own pace. In the meantime, treat them as regular children, have them play with regular children and 

make them feel that they belong. Acknowledge and encourage their talents, but don't make them feel 

special and for more than other kids. In the future, when these kids are born within the communities, 

their talents and abilities will be considered quite normal, and we will not pay much extra attention to 

them in that sense, because most people will be like them. 


322



VII. Another Choice for the Future: Do We Want to Come Back to Earth or "Move On"? 

This is something I have brought up as a side note in an earlier paper: when this lifetime is over, do 

you want to come back to Earth and help building the New Era, or do you want to leave Earth all 

together and go out and explore the universe as a multidimensional being? 

Yes, from what I have learned, we actually have a choice. Now that we know fairly well how the trap 

is set up, with Quarantine, Grid, Veil of Amnesia, and the Between-Lives-Area, we have much more 

choices we can make, which also bypass the trap. However, keep in mind that there is only a handful of 

humanity which has taken part of this material and similar, so many advanced souls, who don't want to 

have any part in the Machine Kingdom, will still be born into the trap. They will, as they always have, go 

into the light, fly through the tunnel and everything will have its routine, as usual. If they are not 

educated enough they will be back here with only their "common sense" that it is wrong to participate 

in the Second Industrial Revolution. 

It's not going to take long before communities are set up, and there are already those which are, and 

those which are in the planning. Beings who in this lifetime have decided not to go for it, will have the 

same feeling in the next life, because their vibration is high enough to seek in the right places. Each 

generation will have an easier and easier time with that. This material, which I personally stand for 

when comes to its value and validity, although a few details may be slightly off, something that's 

inevitable, is for those who are ready to take the information in. You will be the ones to inform others in 

the future communities how things really work behind the scenes. That's why it's so important that you 

download the pdf files -- all of them -- and if you can afford it, print them out and save them, in case the 

whole computer system breaks down in the future, or regular people won't have access to it. Also, in 

some communities, no technology whatsoever is accepted (which I personally think is too extreme, but 

it's everybody's choice), so print-outs would work fine there. Hopefully these papers can be safeguarded 

for future generations as well in one form or another. Also, if I, in the future, find some smaller errors I 

have made, I may or may not update these papers. Even if there are such errors, they will quite 

irrelevant in the scheme of things, because the papers as a whole tell the story like it is, with our 

without these minor errors. They are not merely theory, either, but can be practiced (and don't forget 

the breathing exercise and other important articles, written by me or others, also available on the 

wespenre.com website: http://wespenre.com/site-map-misc.htm. Please save those and print them out 

as well). 

vii.i. Suggestions how to Bypass the Sirian Trap in the Afterlife 

Some people who are here now, and were grown-ups during the nano-second, took bodies on Earth 

for perhaps the first time, basically coming from somewhere else. They are here on a mission to wake 

people up during this transition period and will then leave and not return to Earth again in a long time, if 

ever again. Once their mission is over, they will exit their bodies and go back from where they came. 

These are beings of higher consciousness, whose whole mission was to vibrate on a level so that others 

could feel it and raise their vibration as well, and thus create a ripple effect across the planetary mass 

consciousness, in order to save a faction of mankind from becoming cyborgs. 

Others are humans who have worked on themselves across the incarnations and been able to raise 

their vibrations with hard work and by staying focused. These humans have gained a lot from the nanosecond 

and may as well as the non-human category have a strong feeling of having a mission they need 


323



to complete. Most of these people will sooner or later in their lives realize what their mission is and 

start working on it, and very little besides that matters to them. They dedicate their lifetime to 

completing this mission. So, overall they are very similar to the non-human category, with the exception 

that they are human and have lived many lives here on Earth, just like any other human, but chosen a 

spiritual path more often than the average human. 

Other categories are those who have woken up because of the vibrations of others and started 

educating themselves, while again, the vast majority haven't learned much over the millennia and 

simply need a lot of more time to learn what others learn relatively quickly. Unfortunately, if this last 

category doesn't wake up yesterday rather than today, it's going to be too late. 

Now, what we want to do with the knowledge we have gained and the awareness we have reached is 

up to each and every one. If we start with those who decide that they are done with experiencing Planet 

Earth and want this lifetime to be their last one here, there are a few choices they can make, once they 

leave their physical body. 

Those who have seen the Grid around the planet right now are telling me that it starts looking like a 

Swiss cheese with a lot of holes in it. This means that it's much easier to escape now than it was a 

couple of generations ago. The holes depend on that more and more people are waking up and are no 

longer contributing to the vibration range that the Sirian Alliance has set out. The Overlords have 

therefore had a heck of a time keeping up with "patching" the Grid, but have seemingly given up, 

realizing it is not worth the effort, because it's like a rotten garden hose. When you repair it in one spot, 

it starts leaking somewhere else. 

Hence, when you leave your body, you will have the option to say no to spirit "guides" who are trying 

to get you to go into the light, and instead disappear out through a hole in the Grid. The universe you 

will see there is quite different from the night sky you have been looking up into, and space that you've 

seen in photo-shopped NASA pictures. What you will see is a universe full of stars everywhere. Where 

there previously was just "black" space, there is now light. Remember that you have only been able to 

experience 4% of the universe; the other 96% we have called the KHAA or the VOID, but this "VOID" is 

filled and teeming with stars, nebulae, and life. The sight of it all will be so stunning that you as an 

Avatar will most probably just stop and "gasp" with your light-bodies. You will be able to experience 

both space/time and time/space at will! 


324



Figure 4. Maybe this is more like how the universe looks like when you pass the Grid, 

although you should probably remove most, if not all, of the "black space" from this picture. 

Now, all this 100% universe is yours to explore as a Divine child of the Mother. You have many 

choices. Being discarnate, you can just nano-travel wherever you want. You don't have to worry about 

how to do it; you will know. All that's needed is a thought and you'll be on your way. For example, think 

yourself to a friendly planet where you know you would like to live, and you'll be finding yourself 

outside its atmosphere. It is my understanding that according to the Law of Non-Interference, if the 

Council of Zendar is speaking the truth that you have the right as a discarnate to enter the atmosphere 

of the planet and hover around to "check things out" as long as you don't interfere with anything and 

anybody. If you find that you like what you perceive, you have two choices I am aware of; you can either 

make contact with the beings who live there if they are aware enough to be able to receive your 

communication and able to process it. If not, you can ask either the planet herself or the Sun of that 

solar system for permission to incarnate there. If you are approved, you may go ahead. If not, you must 

abide to that decision and move on to some other solar system and try again. In general, the universe is 

a friendly place, but not always, of course. The reason a solar system may turn you down is not because 

there is something wrong with you or they think you're "evil", but normally because your Avatar may 

vibrate on a frequency that does not match the planet and its inhabitants. 

In fact, you may even want to browse the universe for a while before you even decide where you 

want to go and stay. Typically, I would imagine that most humans would want to incarnate on a planet 

in a solar system relatively close to Earth, only because we feel safe being "close to home", even if there 

are light-years between. We have a tendency to forget that distance is not a huge obstacle in the 

Multiverse. Wanting to be close to home, of course, is only due to insecurity and a little "home 

sickness", but not something that will bother the soul for a long time. Instead, why not explore other 

parts of the galaxy as well, albeit you may find that the biological life forms there are quite different 

from here. Other kind of soul groups may live there, creating other kind of life forms for their own 

amusement. 

The above choices is if you still want to be planet-bound. Another option is to be like Q in Star Trek; 

you can manifest yourself exactly as you like and create your own solar system from your own thought 

and imagination. They will be as "real" as any other solar system (Q did this, too) and the planets as 

solid as Earth. You can imagine beings living on these worlds and they may look like something from 

your wildest imagination. You may attract other Avatars who are hanging around in space and you can 


325



play together. Then, if you get tired of it, you can erase it in a second, because it was just a solid 

hologram in the first place. When you're a 100% universe "citizen", you can create with your mind 

whatever you like. Even space wars that are not real. Spirits are very playful and can be pretty 

"childish", but in a good way, most of the time. You will get the hang of it pretty quickly. All we are 

doing when we are "playing around" like that is that we take subquantum particles and put them 

together into forms and shapes, and make them come close together enough to create visibility in 

whatever dimension you're creating them. 

Another thing you may want to do is to "knock" on Orion's door. The Empire is out there, and beings 

from there are your Original Creators. Think yourself to Orion and you'll be there. The Empire is guarded 

to avoid attacks from outside, but as evolved humans, we should have no problems being let in. What's 

waiting there, we can only imagine! 

As the reader can see, the options are many, you can even visit other galaxies and stay there, if that's 

what your heart tells you. You will have access to almost the whole electromagnetic spectrum, and not 

only the little tiny piece which is the 3rd Dimension, set up as a trap. Freedom is out there! 

Now, there is a totally different option that we have as well. If we leave the solar system, we also 

leave the human soul group in search of new adventures. But we can also choose to stay within the soul 

group of Homo Nova of the New Era, continue incarnating on Earth, and build the New World. There are 

a lot of advantages to this, as well. First, you will keep your Divine physical body which the Goddess 

once gave you, and which the Orion Group never managed to figure out. We still have our divinity 

intact, but still, even with our upgraded bodies, watered-down to some extent compared to those of 

Namlú'u and her forerunners. However, we are quickly on our way to regain the multidimensional 

abilities we had then. Our goals, if we choose this route, should be in line with once again being the 

Guardian of the Living Library of the New Earth. This time we will be a little more shaken up, but a 

whole lot tougher than the original human, who basically didn't really know and understand evil. In that 

sense, we are wiser now. 

The whole universe is within our divine bodies. Everything we see projected outside is basically 

coming from within; we must not forget that. Our bodies are multidimensional in its most optimal 

sense! Many times we have heard how the Sirian Alliance cut off strands of our DNA so we only can 

perceive a part of the whole (4%, actually). In fact, what they did was to close down the majority of 

almost all of our chakras, except the lowest ones that had to do with survival and fear. They didn't really 

cut anything off, but left about 96% of the DNA dormant (the "junk DNA"). This is the reason why we 

only perceive and can see 4% of the universe. When we look at the night sky, there seems to be such a 

long distance between the stars, and most of the universe is dark space/matter. In reality, this is not so. 

We only see 4% of all the stars out there; even on the NASA photos (if we see any stars at all in them 

after they have photo-shopped them). The Pleiadians explain this pretty well when they say that the 

body has 7 chakras and an additional 5 are outside the body. This means that the trap is set up so you 

can't perceive almost any of the upper body chakras when your Avatar enters the body. However, to 

also have control over the astral (the 4th Dimension), they have shut down the 5 "cosmic" chakras as 

well, which you otherwise would have access to when you leave the physical body. These chakras are 

shut down within the light-bodies, and are also to some degree controlled from the Grid, from what I 

understand. In other words, when you leave your genetically manipulated Homo sapiens body and go 

into the astral, they make sure you don't pass the Grid, or you would get all, or most of your 

perceptions back. However, in the astral your chakras are more opened than they are in the physical, 


326



manipulated body, so that you are able to reflect over your life and decide new goals, which you 

normally don't reach. 

In 3D, the astral has been hijacked by the Sirian Alliance in order to have control over the soul after 

body death so that she doesn't escape. The spirit guides have the function to "steer you right", i.e. into 

the Tunnel, towards the Light. Abraxas, the Alpha Draconian, talked about the astral and the Afterlife 

dimension as a twist of the 7th Dimension, which I see can be interpreted as if the Overlords took a part 

of the 7th Dimension, and "twisted" it in time/space so that it could be used for their own purposes, 

and it became the circle around the Earth, which we know as the astral plane. It shouldn't be there in 

the first place, so it's an arbitrary that we now must be able to bypass. 

The Ra Material says: 

"Each time/space is an analog of a particular sort or vibration of space/time. When a negative 

time/space is entered by an entity the next experience will be that of the appropriate 

space/time. This is normally done by the form-making body of a mind/body/spirit complex 

which places the entity in the proper time/space for incarnation."[3] 

This means that while a being is in incarnation (space/time), they are, due to their experiences, 

shaping their mind/body/spirit so that it can fit the corresponding place in the astral (time/space) after 

death. This, in turn, would hypothetically mean that if the Sirians are in charge of 3D corresponding 

time/space, those who vibrate higher than within those margins would not qualify for the Sirian trap in 

time/space. The reason for this, if correct, is as I see it that the Sirians created a "radio station"; a 

frequency band in which they can have Homo sapiens operate under their control from higher 

dimensions. So, there is a limit to that frequency band, and if you exceed that limit, you will not go to 

the manipulated time/space. And if RA is correct, which I believe they are in the above case, it means 

that we shape our "wholeness" in our lifetime here on Earth, and after death, all we need to do is to 

reincarnate again, without going into the Tunnel and towards the Light. The new body we will get in our 

next incarnation was already formed in this incarnation, so when the whole mind/body/spirit complex 

(as RA calls it), now shaped in a form and within a frequency outside the Sirian limited frequency band, 

incarnate again, it will automatically shape a higher dimensional body. We are at that time way closer to 

all together operate outside Sirian 3D frequency, and my estimate, based on the above, is that already 

after a couple, or a few generations, the Sirian control will not be perceivable from the New Earth 

vibration we will operate within. 


327



Figure 5. The Sirians will no longer be able to seduce us and manipulate us into entering their time/space astral prison. 

This does not guarantee total freedom from amnesia in the next incarnation, unfortunately. At least 

not for everybody, albeit I'm sure for some. Still, more memories and a lot better intuition would help 

the incarnated person to continue their mission in the right direction. After all, evolution does not go 

backwards, and once you've achieved a certain vibration and level of awareness and consciousness, you 

won't lose it in the next lifetime. 

These new, more evolved bodies will rather quickly become multidimensional and be able to work as 

such from the will of the Avatar. After a few generations, when the Grid and the Quarantine for sure are 

lifted, just as the Veil of Amnesia will be for everybody in the New Era, full multidimensional freedom 

will occur. And what does that mean, and how does that differ from the person who escaped through 

the hole in the Grid and became multi-d in a multidimensional universe? 

The difference is that those who decided to stay and create the New Earth will have the ability to 

remain on Earth, in their enhanced bodies, who are Divinely multidimensional, and at the same time use 

their Fire and Avatar to nano-travel anywhere in the Multiverse, including to Orion. You will have the 

advantage to live on one of the most beautiful planets in the universe, but connect with your space 

brothers and sisters whenever and wherever you want. You can go to their home planets, or you can go 

out in space and create the exact things the person who escaped through the Grid can do. Also, you will 

be the Guardian of the Living Library once again, which means that beings from all over the universe 

(and we are not talking about those beings who are trapped now) can come to Earth and learn from the 

knowledge that is stored in the Living Library and within our very bodies. Our bodies have all the 

memories from the entire universe, from beginning to end, inside of them! And we are the only ones 

who have access to all that information! No other bodies in the entire universe beside the human 

bodies have those abilities. So if you escape through the Grid you lose your Divine physical body and 

that aspect of multidimensionality. 

These are basically the choices we have as Homo Nova. To get a fuller understanding of what the 

Living Library is, and how everything on this Earth and everywhere else has consciousness, I highly 

recommend the following video, which is showing you how advanced the plant life is. Brilliant scientists 

have already discovered this, but they can't figure out how plants can think and have emotions without 

a brain. Well, it's actually a no-brainer, because the answer is Consciousness! Plants may not have a 

neurological system, but they do have consciousness. Watch this very enlightening movie, but please 


328



watch it all: http://www.pbs.org/wnet/nature/episodes/what-plants-talk-about/video-fullepisode/8243/. 

VIII. From Here and Into a Future Which is Very Bright After All 

Some people may ask themselves, what happened to the "3% rule"? Remember we talked about 

that, especially at Level I, and this was in regards to LPG-C and their hypothesis that if approximately 3% 

of the population could decide on a plan for the future for mankind, the rest will automatically adjust. 

This, in turn, is based on the scientific experiments which led to the 100th Monkey Syndrome. I still 

think that it may possibly be a valid hypothesis, but there is a big problem with it, and I wonder if LPG-C 

eventually realized this as well. The problem is that it's only good in theory; we will never be able to 

gather 3% of humanity under the same umbrella. If we had more time, we might, perhaps, but not as 

things have developed. This is a shame, and it's sad on behalf of those who will decide to take what they 

think is the "easy path", when indeed it will turn out to be the most difficult one, and the one that could 

possibly lead to their own demise. This is ironic, because those who choose the Machine Kingdom will 

do so partly because they are promised almost eternal life. As it turns out, it's all a deception, because if 

Lucifer and his angels get what they want, that faction of humanity will end up being "star dust" in a war 

against their own creators. This means they will become scattered pieces of fire as a part of the rest of 

the universe, without any personality and without any mind. This is what the weapons of the Gods do. 

However, we haven't seen any evidence that a war against Orion will actually happen in the future, but 

we know that on certain timelines, mankind will become cyborgs and lose all the abilities their Divine 

bodies had, and they will deeply regret it. They will do all they can to become human again, but from all 

I've seen, they will not succeed. Be happy that you are one of those who choose to evolve without 

technology! 

Figure 6. The number of Earths are almost infinite. 

Although some of us will perceive ourselves as living on 

the same planet, we are actually all living on our own version of it. 

Still, we must not forget that even if the 3% Rule is not a possible anymore, the Pleiadians confirmed 

that there are enough evolved beings on this planet to put life onto the timeline of the New Era and the 

New Earth. The spiritual battle we have fought within ourselves is in that sense already won. Now we 

need to uphold our positions in space and time and time and space to build our new future. And keep in 

mind that there is nothing wrong with leaving at this point and disappear through the Grid when this 


329



lifetime is over. We are all the pioneers. If we leave now, we have already done more than can be 

expected of us under the circumstances, and now it's soon time for the next generation to take over. 

The future of the Earth is in the hands of those who will stay, but the gratefulness will always be with 

those who leave as well. You will be remembered and honored! 

The Veil of Amnesia is due to the disconnection between dream state and the awake state. That 

disconnection was done by the space pirates who took over our beautiful planet. In the future, the 

connection will once again be reestablished automatically as our vibrations will heal our RNA and DNA, 

but there are already now ways to do this, which also gets us ahead of the game. The dream state is 

indeed the awake state and the other way around. Just like so many other things, the Overlords took 

the truth and turned it around; the lies became true and the truth became the lies. In an upcoming 

book, I will, among other things, work with the reader on how to reconnect the unconscious with the 

conscious mind and thus make a much more multidimensional being. 

I will be in touch and tell you about the progress of my next project. With this, the Third Level of 

Learning is complete. This also means that all levels of learning are completed, and there will be no 

more papers. As it looks like, I will from here on communicate mostly in book format, with the intention 

of giving them away electronically, in pdf format, still free of charge as usual. 

Thank you from the bottom of my heart for staying with me to these last words in this paper. It has 

been an incredible journey for myself, and I hope for the reader as well! Spend as much time as you 

need to ponder over this material and come to your own conclusions about it. This is my research and 

my recommendations, but I'm only one person of 7 billion, and we all have Free Will to do what we 

want with information that is given to us. 

I hope I will see you also reading my future material. Besides books, I will most probably also write 

and post articles, perhaps on wespenre.com, but also at battleofearth.wordpress.com, which you can 

subscribe to by going there. 

Have a peaceful, blessed, exciting and enlightening journey, full of joy and love. The future, my 

friends, is very bright, after all. We will all be more than fine! 

Love, 


This is the end of "The Third Level of Learning", and "The Wes Penre Papers" all 

together. This paper is the last in the Three Level Series about humanity's 

position and role in the Multiverse! 



330



[1] See, http://battleofearth.wordpress.com/2013/03/29/bill-gates-admits-to-chemtrails/ 

[2] Indeed we are as we speak turning into a new species -- and upgraded version of Homo sapiens, and we have done it 

without technology. I call this new species "Homo Nova" here, but in the future we will have to come up with a name for the 

upgraded version of ourselves. 

[3] Ra Material, Session 70, Question 14. 


331



Appendix: Definitions of Special Terminology from 

"The First--Third Levels of Learning" 

(Listed in alphabetical order) 

* * * 

(Scroll down to find the definition you are looking for. Then use the back button on your browser 

to go back from where you came) 

* * * 

From January 25, 2013, the definitions entered into this Definition 

Sheet, on and after that date, will have the "enter date" added, 

following after the definition itself, in this format: [1/25/2013]. 

* * * 

4-Space/Time: Our 3rd Dimensional reality plus time; the 'known universe', which we can perceive with 

our 5 senses, including planets, stars, nebulae, and galaxies.. 

7 Superdomains: The seven 'super dimensions' which are the building blocks in LPG-C's (see def. below) 

'Working Model' (see def. below), where 4-space/time (see def. above), which is the 'known universe', is 

the 7th, and 'lowest' superdomain. For more information regarding the 7 superdomains, see, 

http://wespenre.com/exploring-the-unum.htm. 

Alignment with the Galactic Center: The Galactic Alignment is the alignment of the December solstice 

sun with the Galactic equator. This alignment occurs as a result of the precession of the equinoxes. 

Precession is caused by the earth wobbling very slowly on its axis and shifts the position of the 

equinoxes and solstices one degree every 71.5 years. Because the sun is one-half of a degree wide, it will 

take the December solstice sun 36 years to precess through the Galactic equator. 

This 26,000-year precessional cycle shifts the apparent position of the sun, on the December solstice, 

backward through the signs of the zodiac. This leads to the observation (as viewed from the earth) that 

the December solstice sun is moving "around" the Galactic Center, coming into alignment with it once 

every 26,000 years. This is the galactic alignment. It is a name given to a relative perception of the stars 

while observing from the earth. (source: http://kryon.com/inspiritmag/articles/index.html). 


332



Amašutum: Anton Parks' term for the female Gina'abul (see def. below). The word, according to Parks, 

stems from old Sumer, but if we trace it back far enough, it comes from the stars, and looks very much 

like a female, Aryan word. I use this word as a synonym for the Titans in these papers; something that 

would be quite acceptable. 

ANGAL, The: A term used by Anton Parks, describing the dimensions of the beings of Higher Order (we 

may call them angels, or Builders). The ANGAL has its own set of dimensions. The upper parts of the 

ANGAL corresponds pretty well with what I otherwise call the 96% Universe, consisting of 96% dark 

matter and dark energy, in contrast to the 4% Universe, which is the Universe we are currently 

perceiving with our 5 senses. 

AOM: Allies of Humanity. This is an alien group in contact with the medium Marshall Vian 

Summers. They are here to warn us from taking part in any TTP (see def. below) between 

ETs and the human governments of Earth, because this is a way to control us. [3/9/2013] 

ARIDU: One of many names of our solar system, used by extraterrestrials. This is the name I chose to 

use in my papers. 

'As Above So Below': This expression is said to originate from the Freemasons, but may be much older. 

It refers to the relationship between the Macrocosms (the Universe as we can see it) and the 

Microcosms (the Universe of particles, like cells, atoms, neutrons, positrons, electrons, tachyons, and 

other quantum particles). It is said that if something for example happens here on Earth, i.e. we have 

constant wars going on, it is a ripple effect from what is happening above (in the Cosmos above our 

heads). So if we have wars here on Earth, we can almost take for granted there are wars out in Cosmos 

which extend to down here. If we want to take it further, there are probably "wars" all the way down to 

the quantum world. 

Avatar: 1) A part of the soul, also called the 'light body' in metaphysics. This is the ethereal body we use 

in the afterlife where we 'mock ourselves up' so others can see us. In the afterlife, we usually mock 

ourselves up the way we looked like when we were alive. 2) The light body which extraterrestrials 

sometimes us when they 'shapeshift'. ETs who travel through space and time in spirit form (so called 

ontoenergetics [see def. below]) and are coming here as intruders, are usually mocking themselves up 

as humans to blend in, but can also show themselves off as Reptilians, Grays, Dragons or whatever they 

want. 

Beast, The: A future Supercomputer with the brainpower of trillions of human brains, which 

will be run by the Sirian Alliance in order to steer humanity into the core of a Machine 

Kingdom, where all are One Mind to follow One Command. [4/3/2013] 


333



Biokind: The biological body of any given race. Term coined by LPG-C (see def. of LPG-C below). 

Biomind: The combined mind of a being + their biological body. Term coined by LPG-C (see def. of LPG-C 

below). 

BLA: 'Between Life Area', where the soul and its composite goes between incarnations. 

Black Magick: I am using the term 'Dark Magick' in contrast to 'Black Magick' throughout my papers. 

Black Magick is used to describe magicians who use magick to access the Void and use it for personal 

gains against someone else, while 'Dark Magick' is used to signify shamans and others who use magick, 

also to access the Void, but with the intentions to help self and others in a positive manner. I am not 

using the term 'White Magick', because both the good intended and the bad intended are both trying to 

get in touch with the Goddess Universe (see also, 'Magick'). 

Bloodlines, The: During the Atlantis Era, Lord EA selected an elite of human hybrids who were direct 

descendents of the Aryan/Sirian bloodline and had EA's blood running through their veins, and also 

possessed the Fire to become the Ruling Elite we see today (we often call them the Illuminati, the Global 

Elite, or the Cabal). The chosen ones were always males, because he feared that if the women ruled, 

they would be too powerful and therefore a threat. The Women of Fire instead became the sorcerers, 

witches, the psychics, and were often psychic healers to the ruling Men of Power. So it has remained up 

until this day. We now call these shamanic Women of Fire 'High Priestesses of the Illuminati', but their 

powers have been tremendously watered down from what they once were. 

BSMC: Body/Spirit/Mind Complex, i.e. you as a human being. This is what you consist of, 

whether you have your experience in a physical body or an etheric one [1/25/2013]. 

Builders: The original Creator Gods of a Universe (Unum). The Mother Goddess is giving birth to 

universes, and then she assigns 'Builders' to 'go out and create' in her new universe. These Creator 

Gods, together with the Goddess are responsible for that the goals for that specific universe are met. 

Creator Gods (capital letters): My combined name for all creator gods who have understood the 

mechanics of the Multiverse and have learned how to create intelligent life forms outside of their own 

planet. 


334



creator gods (small letters): A term used for a race who has just begun to explore genetic engineering 

and are experimenting, using DNA from different life forms to create something new. Humanity is about 

to become 'creator gods' at this exact moment, even if it's done in secret. We are experimenting to 

create both artificial intelligence, clones, and new races. 

Dark Magick: I am using the term 'Dark Magick' in contrast to 'Black Magick' throughout my papers. 

Black Magick is used to describe magicians who use magick to access the Void and use it for personal 

gains against someone else, while 'Dark Magick' is used to signify shamans and others who use magick, 

also to access the Void, but with the intentions to help self and others in a positive manner. I am not 

using the term 'White Magick', because both the good intended and the bad intended are both trying to 

get in touch with the Goddess Universe (see also, 'Magick'). 

Debt, The: When the Sirian Overlords took over real estate Earth, they had, per universal law, the 

obligation to see to that the intelligent beings already inhabiting Earth (we humans) were not interfered 

with to such a degree that it inflicted on our development as a species. The Sirians broke this law, but 

'put things right' by letting a few human soul every now and then leave the Prison Planet and find their 

way to the stars in order for the Sirians to pay off the 'Debt', meaning they had to show that humans 

down here actually evolved. However, these souls who were allowed to escape were so depleted of 

energy that they were literally 'useless'. So, the Sirians sent souls they had no use for anymore to the 

stars, thinking they were paying off the Debt. It was sort of a bypass of the law. The Queen of the Stars 

disagreed! 

DRAP: 'Death-Recycling-Amnesia-Trap'. An orchestrated chain of events, created by a composite of alien 

races to keep us under control. 

EC: 'Etheric Composite' (see these words below). 

Einstein-Rosen Bridges: Interconnect all stars in all galaxies, and even galaxies with each other. ER 

bridges can be seen through telescopes that capture images in the visible light range. Used by 

extraterrestrials to travel from one point in space to another, when the distance is an issue. Somewhat 

synonymous to stargates. 

ENS (Extension Neurosensing): In a nutshell, ENS works as follows[...]: a human being, applying this 

technique, lies relaxed in a resonance-inducing sarcophagus, while his vital energy thresholds are 

monitored. A photonic body (an avatar) is induced and through advanced technology and the person's 


335



own mental abilities, he is capable of neurologically "extending himself" wherever he wants; nearby, to 

the edge of the Physical Universe, or even beyond! Hence, the Physics Group has been able to open the 

doors of perception to explore nature and the universe in a manner that has never been possible before, 

or even been perceived as a possibility. By expanding on the research of scientists such as Albert 

Einstein and David Bohm, they have been able to accomplish getting astonishing results from this 

technique. (http://wespenre.com/exploring-the-unum.htm). 

Etheric Composite: The three composite parts of 'you' that leave the physical body (biokind) when the 

body dies. The Etheric Composite consists of the information cloud (the soul), the avatar (the light 

body), and the emotional body respectively. 

Exopolitics: The politics regarding extraterrestrials. The subject of "exopolitics" includes both the 

political issues, as well as interrelating and relating issues, regarding ETs here on Earth, near Earth space, 

or in the Multiverse in general, and their relations, political and others, with we humans here on Earth. 

It has become a broad definition which sometimes includes everything that has to do with 

extraterrestrials. 

Experiencer: A person who is exposing what he has experienced first hand with extraterrestrials; either 

through abductions, face-to-face encounters, mind to mind, or written communications. Channeling 

could also go under this category. 

Exteriorization: The phenomenon when the soul (avatar and fire[s]) leave the body temporarily (not 

including body death). Could happen through shock and trauma, but also at will, if a person is trained in 

different spiritual rituals and exercises. The word originally comes from L. Ron Hubbard and his Church 

of Scientology. Hubbard used this term to describe when a soul (thetan) leaves the body during 

Dianetics or Scientology processing as a part of the End Phenomenon of any particular process. I am 

using this term as described in the first definition above. 

Fire: another word for 'soul'. 

First Level of Learning: The first series of papers that I completed in October, 2011, and posted at 

http://wespenre.com. I am suggesting that the readers start reading these papers before they continue 

reading the Second Level of Learning (see def. below). The First Level of Learning can be found here: 

http://wespenre.com/sitemap.htm. 


336



Founders: Creator Gods who seed planets with different life forms, such as plants, insects, animals, and 

one or more intelligent species, which has programmed into their DNA to feel the urge to reach for the 

stars (such as humankind). They always leave their signature in what they create; a butterfly may have a 

physical outlook similar to the Founder who created it and a praying mantis may be a small version of 

the Founder who created this particular insect. Even we humans sometimes have the signature of the 

Founders who created us. 

Gina'abul: A common Sumerian name, used by Anton Parks, for the Reptilian star races in this part of 

the Galaxy, whom are supposedly coming from the same ancestors. 

Goddess, The: The creator of all Universes, often also called God, Source, First Source, Prime Creator, All 

That Is etc. 

Greater Community: An alliance of star races who engage in business and trade with each 

other, often in ways where they get dependent upon each other, and in many cases star 

races have a tendency of using technology to control other races. The Allies of Humanity 

(see AOM above) is a group of aliens who advise mankind not to get involved with the 

Greater Community. [3/9/2013] 

Helpers: A combined word for creator gods on all levels whom are helping Mother Goddess to create 

life within her universes. 

Hušmuš: Sumerian/Akkadian name for the Dinosaurs. 

Hyperversals: see "Ontoenergetics". 

Information Cloud: Another word for soul. Term coined by LPG-C (see def. below). 

Innernet: Instead of connecting to the Internet to find all the information we want to learn about 

ourselves, the most important thing is to connect with nature and use the INNERnet more than the 

INTERnet to connect to Self and evolve as a being. The Innernet is your own, local universe, which is 

inside of you. 

Kadištu: [Sumerian term] See 'Founders' 


337



KHAA, The: The Mother Universe, also called the Void, which is the 96% of the Universe science can't 

explain. This is the Home Universe of the Mother Goddess through which you travel when you enter a 

stargate after have 'shrunk' yourself into nano size. This is the fastest and easiest way to travel between 

stars, galaxies and universes. 

KHANUS KHANUR: The Sirian 'Foremost King of Kings'; he who had the ultimate power of the Sirian 

Kingdoms and ruled over all other kings. Sitchin and the Ša.AM.i call the KHANUS KHANUR, AN or ANU. 

KI: The 3rd Dimension, consisting of several sub-dimensions, or densities. KI is sometimes used as a 

substitute for Earth by the Ša.AM.i. (Sirian star race). 

Kingú Races: Reptilian races in Anton Parks' chronicles. The White Kingú is the one race which more 

resemble humans of all Gina'abul (see def. above) races. The White Kingú may correspond with the 

Vegan star race. 

Law of Free Will: We live in a 'universe of free will', which means we have the right and the ability to 

create as we want without restrictions, but we have to take the consequences for our actions. Not all 

universes are 'universes of free will'. 

Law of Non-Interference: Each star race has the right to develop and evolve without interference from 

outside star races. When a star race is landing on an evolving star race's planet without permission, they 

are breaking the 'Law of Non-Interference'. 

Law of One: The concept that we are all One with the Creator, and everything is connected with each 

other on a subquantum level; therefore, what we are doing to others we do to ourselves. The expansion 

of this is that by being of Service to Others (STO), we are also being of Service to Self (STS), and 

everybody gains. If we are excessively STS, we are not including others in our decisions, and therefore 

separate ourselves from others. According to the Law of One, we live in a Universe of Free Will, which 

means 'anything goes', but the road back to unity with Source will be much longer and more 

cumbersome the more STS we are. We can still evolve while being STS, up to a certain level, but the way 

to get there is that of violence, vendetta, and other hardship that can more easily be avoided by being 

more STO. 

Law of One also involves 'catalysts'. The idea is that everything in the Universe if of service to the whole, 

whether it's evil or good. Therefore, if you experience 'evil', you can use that as a catalyst to learn what 


338



you are not and thus build your knowledge from that and use a negative experience and turn it into 

something positive (more on the Law of One here: http://lawofone.info). 

LERM: Light Encoded Reality Matrix. A term coined by LPG-C (see def. below). It is advanced science, 

explained to LPG-C by extraterrestrial beings. It is basically a technology to manipulate light. You can use 

it to change shape and form in objects and humans, so they appear to look different from what we're 

used to. 

Lesser Council: In Atlantis, ten Kings ruled ten Kingdoms (see RGCA below), and under them were the 

shamans and their High Priests and Priestesses, who formed the 'Lesser Council'. 

Level One (Level I): see 'First Level of Learning'. 

Level Two (Level II): See 'Second Level of Learning'. 

Living Library: In an ancient past, Earth was selected to be one of twelve planets (according to the 

Pleiadians) who as going to be a Living Library. Star beings from all over the Universe contributed with 

flora and fauna from their own worlds; thus the richness and the variety in plant and animal life on 

Earth. Many plants and herbs were seeded here as a part of a Universal Pharmacopeia. The early 

humans were meant to be the Guardians of this Living Library and let star beings from all over come and 

get, not only medicine, but knowledge built into the DNA of life on Earth. This was all a Great 

Experiment in progress and was working excellently, until the Sirian Overlords came... 

LPG-C: (Life Physics Group California). This is a group of rogue scientists, who formed LPG-C in the late 

1990s to further study subquantum physics and the ET influence on human life on Earth. They are now 

in connection with at least 118 different alien races; some of them with whom they have annual 

meetings; on planet and off planet, respectively. 

By researching the Multiverse, mainly through advanced remote viewing (ENS [Extra Neurosensing]), 

they were able to map it quite accurately. They also had help from different ET races in their 

explorations of the Multiverse, which in their "Working Model" became known as the "Unum". 

Currently, LPG-C is working with a faction of the Anunnaki (the ancient ET "gods" of ancient times), in an 

attempt to steer things right here on Planet Earth, and claim human sovereignty of Earth and our own 

human bodies, which were genetically tampered with by the Anunnaki, resulting in homo sapiens. We 

allegedly have Anunnaki genes. 


339



Figure D1: The Unum 

I wrote a simplified description of LPG-C's "Working Model" and talked a lot about them in Level One 

(see def. above). I am currently in frequent contact with their leading scientist, Dr. A.R. Bordon, and 

their web address is, http://lifephysicsgroup.org/. 

Lú: (see Namlú'u). 

Lulu: (plur., "lulus"). The Anunnaki's name for homo sapiens, meaning something to the effect of human 

workers, or slaves. 

MA'AT: The 'Justice of the Goddess', from where the expression that your heart should weigh less than a 

feather comes from. 

Magick: Magick spelled with a "k" was introduced by one of the most influential and (in)famous 

magician of the 20th Century, Aleister Crowley, to separate stage magic (applied by "Illusionists" and 

"Stage Magicians") and "real magic", which are two different things, entirely. So he added a "k" at the 

end to distinguish between the two. In my papers, I will do the same (see also, 'Dark Magick' and 'Black 

Magick'). 


340



MAKH Scientists: The Orion Queen's personal scientists, whom among other things, developed the 

S'MA, the life elixir, which extended the life of a physical body, sometimes with millions of years. 

MAKH Warriors: Warriors of the Orion Special Forces, whose task was to keep the Empire safe, and to 

protect the Queen and stop intruders and invaders from entering the Empire. 

Meš: 1) 'Tablets of Destiny'. 2) Small crystals, containing important information needed for the Sirians to 

get access to information, but also to run computer networks and other electronic devices. 

MIC: acronym for Military Industrial Complex. Military and Industry working hand in hand in the weapon 

industry, building more and more destructive weapons for so-called 'defense purposes'. the MIC is also 

responsible for hijacking free energy and other 'useful inventions' that can be used destructively. 

MIKH/MAKH Warriors: (See MAKH warriors). 

Namlú'u: The primordial human species. The Guardian of Earth and the Living Library. They were 

created by many different Founders and had the Fire of the KHAA. They were androgynous and lived 

during Earth's Golden Age. 

Nano-Second: The time period between 1987-2012 when our solar system is lining up with the Galactic 

Center. This lineup is very rare and only happens once every approx. 26,000 years (one cycle around the 

Zodiac). This means we are bombarded with gamma rays, directly from the Central Sun in the Galactic 

Center, but also relayed from our own Sun. This will fry the nervous system on some people who are not 

ready for this, while others, who have prepared by already gathered information on what is going on 

and have evolved to some degree, will get a boost of energies which will take them to another level of 

evolvement. 

The year 2012 marks the end of the Mayan Calendar, but not the end of the world. Every galactic cycle is 

26,000 years; then it ends and a new cycle begins. It's the Phoenix burning and then rising again from 

her ashes. A New Era begins, and in our case, a new species is born--a new humanity, which is 

multidimensional. But first the old must die to make room for the new. 

Time here on Earth is also divided into Zodiacal Eras, each one lasting around 2,200 years. We are still in 

the Age of Pisces, but are moving into the Age of Aquarius. 


341



NEKH-T or NEKH-TT: Title for the Orion Queen. 

Níama: The Feminine Life Force of the Universe. This life force is all around us and consists of the energy 

that is in everything. For us to master the Níama, we must first know it exists and learn to "tame" it so 

we can use it for our own benefit. George Lucas, in his "Star Wars" called it "The Force", but is the same 

thing; it can be used for good or evil. The Star Wars series was based on a lot of truth and was mainly 

describing the Great Galactic Wars, although in reality it didn't happen in "a galaxy far, far away" but in 

our own sector of the Milky Way. Lucas has a lot of inside information, and so does Steven Spielberg. 

Ontoenergetics: Non-physical beings. 

P: Short for Barbara Marciniak's Pleiadian group. 

Panspermia: an idea with ancient roots, according to which life arrives, ready-made, on the surface of 

planets from space. It is often said that panspermia isn't very interesting, because it simply removes the 

problem of the origin of life from our planet to some other place. And yet, panspermia has gained the 

attention of our science. 

There is now Pseudo-panspermia (the delivery of complex organic compounds from space, to give the 

prebiotic soup some starter ingredients, a notion has already becoming widely accepted), Basic 

Panspermia (which holds that microbial life is present in space or on bodies like comets or asteroids, 

and it can be safely delivered to planets and start life there. If the cells escape from a living planet on 

fragments after a meteor impact, the phenomenon is called litho-, ballistic-, impact- or meteoritic 

panspermia). 

And that’s not all. Svante Arrhenius proposed that naked cells might travel interstellar distances 

propelled by light pressure, a theory now called radio-panspermia. Whereas a light coating of carbon 

could protect single cells from UV radiation, a couple of meters of water or rock are needed for 

protection from cosmic rays. Consequently, radio-panspermia is currently in disfavor. The danger of 

radiation damage influenced Francis Crick and Leslie Orgel, in 1973, to propose that life came to Earth 

by directed panspermia, the theory that intelligent life from elsewhere sent germs here in a spaceship. 

Modern panspermia proposes comets as the delivery vehicles. Comets can protect cells from UV and 

cosmic radiation damage; and comets can drop cells high in the atmosphere to float gently down. If 

bacterial spores can be immortal, as it appears, comets could spread life throughout a galaxy. 

Hoyle and Wickramasinghe ,starting in the 1970s, rekindled interest in panspermia. But they went 

further to include a new understanding of evolution. While accepting the fact that life on Earth evolved 

over the course of about four billion years, they say that the genetic programs for higher evolution 


342



cannot be explained by random mutation and recombination among genes for single-celled organisms, 

even in that long a time: the programs must come from somewhere beyond Earth. In a nutshell, their 

theory holds that all of life comes from space. It incorporates the original panspermia in the same way 

that General Relativity incorporates Special Relativity. Their expanded theory can well be termed 

"strong" panspermia. Their Cosmic Ancestry is a new theory pertaining to evolution and the origin of life 

on Earth. It holds that life on Earth was seeded from space, and that life's evolution to higher forms 

depends on genetic programs that come from space. It is a wholly scientific, testable theory for which 

evidence is accumulating. 

I am personally using a more simplistic way of describing panspermia, putting it into 4 sub-categories, 

which are as follows: 

Lithopanspermia - rocks thrown off from one planet’s surface transfers the ‘seeds of Life’ to another 

planet in a distant solar system. 

Ballistic panspermia - rocks thrown off from one planet’s surface transfers the ‘seeds’ of Life to another 

planet in the same solar system. 

Directed panspermia - the ‘seeds of Life’ are spread intentionally by an extraterrestrial civilization from 

one planet onto another. 

On planet panspermia - intelligent Life from another planet deliberately came to Earth to plant the 

‘seeds of Life’. 

PESH-METEN: 'The Ninth Passageway'. This is the Commercial Route lots of ETs are using when trading 

with each other. It has a long series of stargates and Einstein-Rosen Bridges, which makes it easy for 

different races to travel. This is the route on which Planet Earth (Uraš) is sitting in the heart of. It starts 

in the Galactic Center of the Milky Way Galaxy and spirals out, following the path of the Orion Arm, 

passes right through the Mintaka star system, continues to the Pleiades, runs further through our own 

solar system and continues beyond, probably disappearing off of the galaxy and to one of the next, 

perhaps the Andromeda Galaxy (Source: Arynama and Robert Morning-Sky: "The Terra Papers") 

Pleiadians: Group of non-physical entities, said to have their homestead in the Pleiades, mostly on 

planets around the stars Maia and Electra. They are channeling messages to mankind through a "vessel" 

(human body)--Barbara Marciniak, http://pleiadians.com. 

Pleiadians B: This group is represented by Satya, a Pleiadian who is said to be the keeper of the Library 

of Alcyone. This entity channels through Barbara Hand Clow, http://www.handclow2012.com/. 


343



Pond: I am using the analogy of a 'pond' when talking about the creation of universes. For more detailed 

information, see Metaphysics Paper #2: 'The Creation of Universes'. 

Post-Nano: The nano-second (see def. above) was the time period between 1987-2012, when time sped 

up a million fold. The post-nano is the time after the nano-second, basically between 2013-2030, which 

is the "aftermath" of the nano-second, when time is slowing down, going more back to "normal", while 

mankind is pondering what they learned during the nano-second. It's in the post-nano so many decision 

have to be made. Mankind will during this time period decide their own destiny. Some will merge with 

the upcoming Machine Kingdom, led by the Sirian Alliance, while others will create a new Earth, which 

eventually will vibrate on a much higher frequency. With time, the "old world", based on technology, 

will fade and disappear from the reality of those who chose nature before technology. 

Project Elohim: ENKI's and NIN's project to create a new species of humanoids, based on upgraded 

Homo Neanderthalensis and Homo Erectus, which contained the Fire of the Mother Goddess, created 

from the midst of the KHAA, making the species truly Divine. A downgraded version of 'Project Elohim' 

was created after the Deluge, and this downgraded version became today's Homo Sapiens (see 'Project 

Sirius'). 

Project Sirius: After the Flood (the Deluge), the Sirians took the existing 'Project Elohim' (see above) and 

downgraded it to become less psychic, less multidimensional, and more obedient to following 

commands. 'Project Sirius' is today's Homo Sapiens. 

PTB: (Powers That Be). Also called The Global Elite, The Shadow Government, The Illuminati, The Secret 

Rulers and more. They are the human hybrids who rule the world in High Places (being advisors to 

Presidents, Kings, CEOs of Global Businesses and the International Banking Industry etc.) and those who 

rule behind the scenes, invisible to the general public. Above these hybrids are the Earthbound 

Anunnaki, the Dracos, the Grays, the Mušgir and a few other star races working together. 

RGCA: The 'Royal Governing Council of Atlantis'. Poseidon's (EA/ENKI) ruling council in Atlantis, headed 

by ten ruling Kings over ten Atlantean 'districts' or Kingdoms. This ruling Elite were Aryan/human 

hybrids of the first generation. 

RMS: acronym for the Hopi/Apache author and researcher, Robert Morning Sky. 


344



SA: The Sirian Alliance. A group of star races working in unison to conquer the universe and 

overthrow the Mother Goddess as the One Creator. [2/1/2013] 

Ša.A.M.e.: The Sirian word for Nibiru, the planet they are using to visit our solar system. 

Ša.A.M.i.: Equivalent to the 'Anunnaki', the Sirians, or the Sirian Lords. 

Second Level of Learning: The second series of papers, succeeded by the First Level of Learning (see def. 

above), which I completed in October, 2011, and posted at http://wespenre.com. I am suggesting that 

the readers start reading these papers before they continue reading the Second Level of Learning, 

which can be found here: http://wespenre.com/sitemap2.htm. 

Sector 9: The Milky Way Galaxy is divided into different sectors for commercial purposes between 

different ET species. Earth is part of 'Sector 9' (Sources: Robert Morning-Sky; L. Ron Hubbard, Anton 

Parks, and my Orion Source). 

Service to Others (STO): a person, group, or species who believe that by making others a priority instead 

of oneself in more than 50% of the cases is considered being STO. Those who practice STO understand 

Unconditional Love, either on a conscious, or subconscious level, and the nature of the Creator, and are 

in service of It rather than just "self". These beings have matured as biokind/biomind and know what is 

needed to evolve to higher levels of existence. They know that by serving, helping and showing 

unconditional love to others, they also do it to themselves, and everybody wins. 

Service to Self (STS): a person, group, or species who believe that by making themselves a priority on 

others expense by being more "selfish" than helpful to others. This mindset started when beings started 

realizing we are all ONE with the Creator, and by prioritizing oneself before others would thus help them 

as well, because we are all ONE. This thinking eventually got out of hand, and some beings started using 

Service to Self (STS) to the extreme, and became dishonest, violent and less emotional about what harm 

they did to others while getting what they wanted. This is basically the reasons for wars as well. 

SHC: The Sirian High Council. I highly evolved star race from Sirius B. They are not the Sirians I am mainly 

talking about in these papers. 


345



Sirian Alliance, The: An alliance of star races, led by the wolven/reptilian species from Sirius. Their 

objective is to become the Kings of the Universe, and they use races like we humans to achieve and 

accomplish this goal; they are in many ways like cosmic vampires. 

There are many other star races supporting the Sirians in this mission; most of them once upon a time 

conquered by the Sirian star race and under their command; others may have joined the Sirian Empire 

by choice. A few of the star races supporting the Sirian Overlords are factions of Vegans, Alpha 

Draconians, Andromedans, Pleiadians (former Lyrans), the Grays (basically from Lyra, where they were 

genetically manipulated, then Zeta Reticuli), and a few other star races. 

Sirian High Council: See SHC. 

S-MA: Life prolonging elixir, used by the Orion Queen to keep her body young and healthy. Can extend 

longevity in species with millions of years. The Queen distributes this elixir to other star races in the 

Orion Empire, if the star race is evolved enough to use it respectfully. 

SMC: Social Memory Complex. In channeled material, many beings are of a high density and have 

merged into a group mind and a group soul, in preparation of becoming One with the One Creator at an 

even higher level of existence. When they come through as a channel, they are often merged into one 

such Social Memory Complex. [2/4/2013] 

Sources: Here a common name for "channeled sources", i.e. entities that a "vessel", or a "channeler" is 

channeling. It may be a single entity or a collective of star beings [1/25/2013]. 

Stargate 9: One of the major stargates leading on and off this planet. It's located in Sinai (the one 

stargate most important to the Ša.A.M.i (see def. above); the one they always used when they were on 

Earth. From there, the traveler can connect directly to PESH-METEN (see def. above). It was closed down 

by the Ša.A.M.i when they left around 4,500 years ago after have nuked the Sinai Spaceport and Sodom 

and Gomorrah (see Sitchin's book, War of Gods and Men). It's since then been taken over by the 

Earthbound Sirian Lords, led by Marduk, but the Incoming Ša.A.M.i. are supposedly fighting to get it 

back. 

STO (Service to Others): a person, group, or species who believe that by making others a priority instead 

of oneself in more than 50% of the cases is considered being STO. Those who practice STO understand 

Unconditional Love, either on a conscious, or subconscious level, and the nature of the Creator, and are 

in service of It rather than just "self". These beings have matured as biokind/biomind and know what is 


346



needed to evolve to higher levels of existence. They know that by serving, helping and showing 

unconditional love to others, they also do it to themselves, and everybody wins. 

STS (Service to Self): a person, group, or species who believe that by making themselves a priority on 

others expense by being more "selfish" than helpful to others. This mindset started when beings started 

realizing we are all ONE with the Creator, and by prioritizing oneself before others would thus help them 

as well, because we are all ONE. This thinking eventually got out of hand, and some beings started using 

Service to Self (STS) to the extreme, and became dishonest, violent and less emotional about what harm 

they did to others while getting what they wanted. This is basically the reasons for wars as well. 

Technology Transfer Program: (see TTP) 

Terra: The name I use for Earth, more or less throughout these papers. 

TTP: Technology Transfer Programs. Since at least the early 1950s, but more than probably before that, 

human governments all over the world, but the U.S. government in particular, have been involved in 

technology transfer exchanges between humans and aliens. The aliens have given us technology in 

exchange for getting permission to abduct a certain amount of humans to do genetic experiments on 

them. They promise to return the guinea pig after they are done with them, and the people they use will 

not have any memories of the abduction afterwards. Many governments have agreed to such transfer 

programs, and that's why you hear about so many abductions from the 1950s and up to this date. It 

showed later that some guinea pigs actually had some flashbacks and memories from the abductions, 

and more could be revealed in regression therapy. In spite of this, and the fact that many people who 

were abducted were severely traumatized afterwards, the government let the transfer programs 

proceed. The technology they received, they apparently think overrides the suffering innocent people 

have to endure. This human-alien trade continues even today. 

Type I Civilization: Type I civilization controls the resources of an entire planet (weather and earthquake 

control, plus exploration of an entire solar system). 

Type II Civilization: a Type II civilization controls and directly uses the power of its sun and begins to 

colonize nearby star systems. 

Unum: See LPG-C. 


347



Uraš: Planet Earth. 

Walk-in: A walk-in is when a non-physical being is taking over a body from the original soul. If it's done 

per a previous agreement (usually between lives), the original owner willingly leaves the body, but if it's 

done unexpectedly, the original soul may have to be kicked out by force. By some, a walk-in can also be 

defined as someone who comes in and shares a body with the original soul, but I would call that 

'possession'. 

Wanderer: A term coined by the RA Social Memory Complex (see the books in the Law of One 

series), meaning a person who decides to stop his own evolvement for a while and descend to a 

lower density to help out in the process of ascending. A Wanderer therefore incarnates on the 

specific planet, amongst the beings he/she wants to assist. There is, however, always a chance 

that the Wanderer forgets who they are and get stuck in the system of the planet due to the 

Veil of Forgetfulness [1/30/2013]. 

White Kingú (or Royal Kingú): see Kingú Races. 

Working Model: The research done by the rogue science group, LPG-C (see def. above), into how our 

Multiverse is built. Their result is what they call the 'Working Model', in contrast with the 'Standard 

Model', which is the model of mainstream science. Also, see '7 Superdomains' above. 


348

The Wes Penre Papers

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?